PUB.

(ENROUTE)

SAILING DIRECTIONS

★

★

2011

173

INDIA AND THE BAY OF BENGAL

Prepared and published by the

NATIONAL GEOSPATIAL-INTELLIGENCE AGENCY

Bethesda, Maryland

© COPYRIGHT 2011 BY THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT

NO COPYRIGHT CLAIMED UNDER TITLE 17 U.S.C.

ELEVENTH EDITION

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office

Internet: http://bookstore.gpo.gov Phone: toll free (866) 512-1800; DC area (202) 512-1800

Fax: (202) 512-2250 Mail Stop: SSOP, Washington, DC 20402-0001
II

Pub. 173

Preface

0.0 Pub. 173, Sailing Directions (Enroute) India and the Bay of

Bengal, Eleventh Edition, 2011, is issued for use in conjunction with Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South

At-lantic Ocean and Indian Ocean. The companion volumes

are Pubs. 171, 172, 174, and 175.

0.0 Digital Nautical Chart 3 provides electronic chart coverage

for the area covered by this publication. 

0.0 This publication has been corrected to 23 April 2011, including Notice to Mariners No. 17 of 2011.

Explanatory Remarks

0.0 Sailing Directions are published by the National GeospatialIntelligence Agency (NGA), under the authority of Department

of Defense Directive 5105.40, dated 12 December 1988, and

pursuant to the authority contained in U. S. Code Title 10,

Sections 2791 and 2792 and Title 44, Section 1336. Sailing

Directions, covering the harbors, coasts, and waters of the

world, provide information that cannot be shown graphically

on nautical charts and is not readily available elsewhere.

0.0 Sailing Directions (Enroute) include detailed coastal and

port approach information which supplements the largest scale

chart produced by the National Geospatial-Intelligence

Agency. This publication is divided into geographic areas

called “Sectors.”

0.0 Bearings.—Bearings are true, and are expressed in degrees

from 000° (north) to 360°, measured clockwise. General

bearings are expressed by initial letters of points of the compass (e.g. N, NNE, NE, etc.). Adjective and adverb endings

have been discarded. Wherever precise bearings are intended

degrees are used.

0.0 Charts.—Reference to charts made throughout this publication refer to both the paper chart and the Digital Nautical

Chart (DNC).

0.0 Coastal Features.—It is assumed that the majority of ships

have radar. Available coastal descriptions and views, useful for

radar and visual piloting are included in geographic sequence

in each Sector.

0.0 Corrective Information.—Users should refer corrections,

additions, and comments to NGA’s Maritime Operations Desk,

as follows: 

0.0 1. Toll free: 1-800-362-6289

0.0 2. Commercial: 301-227-3147

0.0 3. DSN: 287-3147

0.0 4. DNC web site: http://msi.nga.mil/NGAPortal/

DNC.portal

0.0 5. Maritime Do0.0 main web site: http://msi.nga.mil/NGAPortal/

MSI.portal

0.0

0.0 6. E-mail: navsafety@nga.mil

0.0 7. Mailing address: Maritime Domain

0.0 National Geospatial-Intelligence

0.0 Agency

Mail Stop D-44

0.0 4600 Sangamore Road

0.0 Bethesda MD 20816-5003

0.0 New editions of Sailing Directions are corrected through the

date of the publication shown above. Important information to

amend material in the publication is available as a Publication

Digital Update (PDU) from the NGA Maritime Domain website.

0.0NGA Maritime Domain Website

http://msi.nga.mil/NGAPortal/MSI.portal

0.0

0.0 Courses.—Courses are true, and are expressed in the same

manner as bearings. The directives “steer” and “make good” a

course mean, without exception, to proceed from a point of

origin along a track having the identical meridianal angle as the

designated course. Vessels following the directives must allow

for every influence tending to cause deviation from such track,

and navigate so that the designated course is continuously

being made good.

0.0 Currents.—Current directions are the true directions toward

which currents set.

0.0 Dangers.—As a rule outer dangers are fully described, but

inner dangers which are well-charted are, for the most part,

omitted. Numerous offshore dangers, grouped together, are

mentioned only in general terms. Dangers adjacent to a coastal

passage or fairway are described.

0.0 Distances.—Distances are expressed in nautical miles of 1

minute of latitude. Distances of less than 1 mile are expressed

in meters, or tenths of miles.

0.0 Geographic Names.—Geographic names are generally

those used by the nation having sovereignty. Names in parentheses following another name are alternate names that may

appear on some charts. In general, alternate names are quoted

only in the principal description of the place. Diacritical marks,

such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to

specific letters in certain foreign languages, are not used in the

interest of typographical simplicity. Geographic names or their

spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political

status of an area by the United States Government.

0.0 Heights.—Heights are referred to the plane of reference

used for that purpose on the charts and are expressed in meters.

0.0 Index-Gazetteer.—Navigational features and place-names

are listed alphabetically in the back of the book. The approximate position, along with the Sector and paragraph numbers

(e.g. 1.1), facilitate location in the text.

0.0 Internet Links.—This publication provides internet links to

web sites concerned with maritime navigational safety, including but not limited to, Federal government sites, foreign Hydrographic Offices, and foreign public/private port facilities.

NGA makes no claims, promises, or guarantees concerning the

accuracy, completeness, or adequacy of the contents of the web

sites and expressly disclaims any liability for errors and omissions of these web sites.

0.0 Light and Fog Signals.—Lights and fog signals are not described, and light sectors are not usually defined. The Light

Lists should be consulted for complete information.

0.0 Ports.—Directions for entering ports are depicted where

appropriate by means of chartlets, sketches, and photos, which

facilitate positive identification of landmarks and navigational
III

 Pub. 173

aids. These chartlets and sketches are not always to scale, however, and should be used only as a general informational guide

in conjunction with the best scale chart. Specific port facilities

are omitted from the standard format. They are tabulated in

Pub. 150, World Port Index.

0.0 Radio Navigational Aids.—Radio navigational aids are not

described in detail. Publication No. 117 Radio Navigational

Aids and NOAA Publication, Selected Worldwide Marine

Broadcasts, should be consulted.

0.0 Soundings.—Soundings are referred to the datum of the

charts and are expressed in meters.

0.0 Special Warnings.—A Special Warning may be in force for

the geographic area covered by this publication. Special

Warnings are printed in the weekly Notice to Mariners upon

promulgation and are reprinted annually in Notice to Mariners

No. 1. A listing of Special Warnings currently in force is

printed in each weekly Notice to Mariners, Section III, Broadcast Warnings, along with the notice number of promulgation.

Special Warnings are also available on the Maritime Division

website.

0.0 Wind Directions.—Wind directions are the true directions

from which winds blow.

Reference List

0.0 The principal sources examined in the preparation of this

publication were:

0.0 British Hydrographic Department Sailing Directions.

0.0 Various port handbooks. 

0.0 Reports from United States Naval and merchant vessels and

various shipping companies.

0.0 Other U.S. Government publications, reports, and documents.

0.0 Charts, light lists, tide and current tables, and other documents in possession of the Agency.
 Pub. 173

V

0.0SECTOR LIMITS — PUB. 175
Pub. 173 VI

Conversion Tables

Feet to Meters

Feet 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 0.30 0.61 0.91 1.22 1.52 1.83 2.13 2.44 2.74

 10 3.05 3.35 3.66 3.96 4.27 4.57 4.88 5.18 5.49 5.79

 20 6.10 6.40 6.71 7.01 7.32 7.62 7.92 8.23 8.53 8.84

 30 9.14 9.45 9.75 10.06 10.36 10.67 10.97 11.28 11.58 11.89

 40 12.19 12.50 12.80 13.11 13.41 13.72 14.02 14.33 14.63 14.93

 50 15.24 15.54 15.85 16.15 16.46 16.76 17.07 17.37 17.68 17.98

 60 18.29 18.59 18.90 19.20 19.51 19.81 20.12 20.42 20.73 21.03

 70 21.34 21.64 21.95 22.25 22.55 22.86 23.16 23.47 23.77 24.08

 80 24.38 24.69 24.99 25.30 25.60 25.91 26.21 26.52 26.82 27.13

 90 27.43 27.74 28.04 28.35 28.65 28.96 29.26 29.57 29.87 30.17

Fathoms to Meters

Fathoms 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 1.83 3.66 5.49 7.32 9.14 10.97 12.80 14.63 16.46

 10 18.29 20.12 21.95 23.77 25.60 27.43 29.26 31.09 32.92 34.75

 20 36.58 38.40 40.23 42.06 43.89 45.72 47.55 49.38 51.21 53.03

 30 54.86 56.69 58.52 60.35 62.18 64.01 65.84 67.67 69.49 71.32

 40 73.15 74.98 76.81 78.64 80.47 82.30 84.12 85.95 87.78 89.61

 50 91.44 93.27 95.10 96.93 98.75 100.58 102.41 104.24 106.07 107.90

 60 109.73 111.56 113.39 115.21 117.04 118.87 120.70 122.53 124.36 126.19

 70 128.02 129.85 131.67 133.50 135.33 137.16 138.99 140.82 142.65 144.47

 80 146.30 148.13 149.96 151.79 153.62 155.45 157.28 159.11 160.93 162.76

 90 164.59 166.42 168.25 170.08 171.91 173.74 175.56 177.39 179.22 181.05

Meters to Feet

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 3.28 6.56 9.84 13.12 16.40 19.68 22.97 26.25 29.53

 10 32.81 36.09 39.37 42.65 45.93 49.21 52.49 55.77 59.06 62.34

 20 65.62 68.90 72.18 75.46 78.74 82.02 85.30 88.58 91.86 95.14

 30 98.42 101.71 104.99 108.27 111.55 114.83 118.11 121.39 124.67 127.95

 40 131.23 134.51 137.80 141.08 144.36 147.64 150.92 154.20 157.48 160.76

 50 164.04 167.32 170.60 173.88 177.16 180.45 183.73 187.01 190.29 193.57

 60 196.85 200.13 203.41 206.69 209.97 213.25 216.54 219.82 223.10 226.38

 70 229.66 232.94 236.22 239.50 242.78 246.06 249.34 252.62 255.90 259.19

 80 262.47 265.75 269.03 272.31 275.59 278.87 282.15 285.43 288.71 291.99

 90 295.28 298.56 301.84 305.12 308.40 311.68 314.96 318.24 321.52 324.80

Meters to Fathoms

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 0.55 1.09 1.64 2.19 2.73 3.28 3.83 4.37 4.92

 10 5.47 6.01 6.56 7.11 7.66 8.20 8.75 9.30 9.84 10.39

 20 10.94 11.48 12.03 12.58 13.12 13.67 14.22 14.76 15.31 15.86

 30 16.40 16.95 17.50 18.04 18.59 19.14 19.68 20.23 20.78 21.33

 40 21.87 22.42 22.97 23.51 24.06 24.61 25.15 25.70 26.25 26.79

 50 27.34 27.89 28.43 28.98 29.53 30.07 30.62 31.17 31.71 32.26

 60 32.81 33.36 33.90 34.45 35.00 35.54 36.09 36.64 37.18 37.73

 70 38.28 38.82 39.37 39.92 40.46 41.01 41.56 42.10 42.65 43.20

 80 43.74 44.29 44.84 45.38 45.93 46.48 47.03 47.57 48.12 48.67

 90 49.21 49.76 50.31 50.85 51.40 51.95 52.49 53.04 53.59 54.13
VII Pub. 173

Abbreviations

The following abbreviations may be used in the text:

Units

°C degree(s) Centigrade km kilometer(s)

cm centimeter(s) m meter(s)

cu.m. cubic meter(s) mb millibars

dwt deadweight tons MHz megahertz

FEU forty-foot equivalent units mm millimeter(s)

grt gross registered tons nrt net registered tons

kHz kilohertz TEU twenty-foot equivalent units

Directions

N north S south

NNE northnortheast SSW southsouthwest

NE northeast SW southwest

ENE eastnortheast WSW westsouthwest

E east W west

ESE eastsoutheast WNW westnorthwest

SE southeast NW northwest

SSE southsoutheast NNW northnorthwest

Vessel types

LASH Lighter Aboard Ship ro-ro Roll-on Roll-off

LNG Liquified Natural Gas ULCC Ultra Large Crude Carrier

LPG Liquified Petroleum Gas VLCC Very Large Crude Carrier

OBO Ore/Bulk/Oil

Time

ETA estimated time of arrival GMT Greenwich Mean Time

ETD estimated time of departure UTC Coordinated Universal Time

Water level

MSL mean sea level LWS low water springs

HW high water MHWN mean high water neaps

LW low water MHWS mean high water springs

MHW mean high water MLWN mean low water neaps

MLW mean low water MLWS mean low water springs

HWN high water neaps HAT highest astronomical tide

HWS high water springs LAT lowest astronomical tide

LWN low water neaps

Communications

D/F direction finder MF medium frequency

R/T radiotelephone HF high frequency

GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and Safety System VHF very high frequency

LF low frequency UHF ultra high frequency

Navigation

LANBY Large Automatic Navigation Buoy SPM Single Point Mooring

NAVSAT Navigation Satellite TSS Traffic Separation Scheme

ODAS Ocean Data Acquisition System VTC Vessel Traffic Center

SBM Single Buoy Mooring VTS Vessel Traffic Service

Miscellaneous

COLREGS Collision Regulations

IALA International Association of Lighthouse

Authorities

No./Nos.

PA

Number/Numbers

Position approximate

IHO International Hydrographic Office PD Position doubtful

IMO International Maritime Organization Pub. Publication

loa length overall St./Ste. Saint/Sainte
Pub. 173 IX

Contents

Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II

Chartlet—Sector Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V

Conversion Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI

Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VII

Sector 1

Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head (including the Gulf of Kutch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Sector 2

India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama (including the Gulf of Cambay and Bombay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Sector 3

India—West Coast—Cape Rama to Cape Comorin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Sector 4

Sri Lanka (including the Gulf of Mannar, Palk Strait, and Palk Bay) and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 87

Sector 5

The Laccadive Islands and the Maldive Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Sector 6

India—East Coast—Point Calimere to Balisahi Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Sector 7

India—East Coast—Balisahi Point to New Moore Island—Bangladesh and Burma—West Coast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Sector 8

Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Sector 9

The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Glossaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Index—Gazetteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Pub. 173

1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head (including the Gulf of Kutch)

1.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 1 — CHART INFORMATION
3

Pub. 173

SECTOR 1 

PAKISTAN AND THE WEST COAST OF INDIA—RAS MUARI TO DIU HEAD (INCLUDING 

THE GULF OF KUTCH)

1.0 Plan.—This sector describes the coasts of Pakistan and India

between Ras Muari and Diu Head (20°41'N., 70°50'E.), including the Gulf of Kutch. The sector includes the port of Karachi.

The arrangement of the sector is from NW to SE. 

Ras Muari to Karachi

1.1 Ras Muari (Cape Monze) (24°47'N., 66°59'E.) is the

W extremity of a sloping headland which rises to a pointed

summit about 148m high, about 0.8 mile E of the headland.

The Jhil Range, a ridge with a nearly level crest with several remarkable hummocks on it, extends about 10 miles NE of Ras

Muari; the highest hummock, 234m high, lies about 3.5 miles

E of Ras Muari. Ras Mauri lies about 17 miles W of the entrance to Karachi and is the most likely landfall for vessels approaching Karachi from W.

1.1 Ras Muari Light, shown from a concrete tower, 51m high

and painted in horizontal white and black bands, is situated on

the coast about 1 mile SE of Ras Muari. 

1.1 There are ten major lights in the area covered by this sector.

In addition to the light on Ras Muari, they are Manora Point

Light, Khuddi Light, Jakhau Light, Chachhi Light, Navinal

Point Light, Mandvi Light, Pirothan Island Light, Kalubhar Tapu Light, and Humani Point Light.

1.1 Churma Island (24°54'N., 66°36'E.), 179m high, lies about

4 miles NW of Ras Muari.

1.1 Beauchamp Reef, a narrow ridge of sand, gravel, and shell,

with a least depth of 8m, extends about 3 miles NW from a position about 4 miles W of Ras Muari. 

1.1 A spit, with depths of less than 18.3m, extends about 3.5

miles SW of Ras Muari Light. Nancowry Shoal, consisting of a

series of sand, gravel, and coral ridges, with depths of less than

11m, lies on the inshore part of this spit. Two 10.5m patches lie

on the spit, about 1.5 and 2.3 miles, respectively, SW of Ras

Muari Light. 

1.1 Caution.—A dangerous wreck is charted 27 miles S of

Karachi.

1.1 A submarine exercise area extends up to 40 miles WNW, 50

miles SW, and 25 miles SSE of Ras Muari. Naval exercises

take place S and W of Ras Muari. 

1.1 The coast from Ras Muari to Buleji Point (Goth Jafar), about

9 miles E, is rocky and backed by the Jhil Range. It is low and

sandy to Manora Point, about 8.5 miles farther ESE. 

1.1 Foul ground and shoal water, with depths of less than 9.1m,

extend nearly 2 miles SSE of Buleji Point. Shoals, with depths

of 9.1 to 10.3m, lie up to 2.8 miles S of the point. 

1.1 A prohibited anchorage area, best seen on the chart, lies SW

of Buleji Point.

1.2 Hawkes Bay, E of Buleji Point, has general depths of

less than 5.5m. A rock, with depths of less than 1.8m, lies in

the middle of the entrance to the bay.

1.2 A submarine cable is laid from Hawkes Bay, leading S, then

WSW and W, passing about 4.5 miles S of Ras Muari. 

1.2 Manora Point (24°47'N., 66°59'E.), forming the W side of

the entrance to Karachi, is a perpendicular cliff at the SE end of

a narrow hill, about 29m high. Manora Point Light is shown

from a red circular tower with white bands, 38m high, about

0.3 mile NNW of Manora Point. The signal station for communicating with vessels outside the harbor is a conspicuous lattice

tower, 42.5m high, about 91m WSW of the light structure.

Manora Breakwater extends about 0.2 mile SSE from Manora

Point. Manora Breakwater Light, a 15m high lattice tower, is

situated at the end of the breakwater.

1.2 A lighted buoy, moored off the edge of the coastal bank

about 3 miles SSE of Manora Point, marks the N edge of a

spoil ground and is on station from September to May. Its position is approximate and is liable to be washed away or withdrawn frequently. 

Karachi (24°47'N., 66°59'E.)

World Port Index No. 48600 

1.3 Karachi, the principal sea and rail terminal of Pakistan, is the gateway to the fertile regions of the interior. Karachi

is the largest and leading industrial city of Pakistan. The harbor

is divided into the Lower Harbor and the Upper Harbor, with

the principal commercial facilities situated on both sides of the

Upper Harbor. 

1.3 Winds—Weather.—The Southwest Monsoon, which generally runs from June to September, is characterized by high humidity, high temperature, and strong winds. In addition to the

rain, which generally reaches Karachi in the latter part of July,

the Southwest Monsoon wind brings with it fine alluvial sand,

which continuously blankets the city. Some squalls reaching

force 6-7 will occur during the Southwest Monsoon.

1.3 The Northeast Monsoon (December through March) is characterized by a relatively cool dry land breeze from the NE. Fog

or mist is common at dawn and dusk during the winter months.

1.3 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Karachi is 2.0m at

HWS and 1.2m at HWN. 

1.3 Tides at Karachi are semidiurnal and show a pronounced diurnal inequality at times, particularly at LW, occasionally falling below the level of the chart datum.

1.3 In the outer anchorage, the flood current sets E and the ebb

current, which is scarcely perceptible, sets W.

1.3 The flood current sets E across the SE end of Manora Breakwater at a velocity of 2 knots, then into the channel and harbor

toward the S end of W wharf, where it branches into both the

Upper Harbor and Baba Channel. In the Upper Harbor, it is

 Karachi Port Trust Home Page

http://www.kpt.gov.pk
4 Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 

Pub. 173

strongest on the W side; its greatest velocity in the entrance is

about 2 knots. 

1.3 The ebb current sets down the channel until abreast the oil

facilities on the E side of Lower Harbor, where it sets strongly

toward the E side of the channel. Its greatest velocity is about 3

knots at springs. 

1.3 On the flood tidal currents, during the Southwest Monsoon,

a considerable swell rolls into the Lower Harbor, making boat

work at the Manora piers, which are situated on the W side of

the Lower Harbor NW of Manora Point, hazardous. 

1.3 Depths—Limitations.—The depths in the port of Karachi

are reduced to the chart datum measured from the lowest astronomical tide. As of 2010, the dredged depth in the approach

channel is being increased from 12.2m to 13.5m. Silting in the

channel usually occurs during the Southwest Monsoon. Due to

the varying depths at berths and silting in the channels, dredging in the harbor is continuously in progress to maintain the

charted depth as far as possible. Vessels should enter the harbor

on the first or last flood tidal current if at all possible. 

1.3 The channel, from Fairway Lighted Buoy K to ENE of

Manora Point, is dredged to a depth of 12.2m; N of this, the

Lower Harbor channel, with a dredged depth of 11.3m, stretches to a position 1.5 miles NE of Manora Point. North of this

position, the rest of the Lower Harbor is dredged to a depth of

10.7m on its E side and 8.2m on its W side. 

1.3 The maximum draft for the Upper Harbor is 9.75m. Vessels

with drafts of 8.85m and deeper may enter or depart on HW

only. On the W bank are the naval dockyard and West Wharf,

while on the E bank lies East Wharf. New Channel leads W of

the naval dockyard and the West Wharf. It has a width of

106.7m and it is dredged to a depth of 7.6m. 

1.3 When berthing, vessels are advised to let go an anchor in

midstream to enable them to haul-off when leaving; however,

attention should be paid to unreliable holding ground, for the

anchor may drag when casting off.

1.3 Along E side of the Lower Harbor channel are three oil piers.

Berthing information is given in the accompanying table.

There is a turning basin abreast Berth OP-IV which has a

dredged depth of 10.4m.

1.3 On the W side of the channel, between Bunker Island and

Baba Pool, there are head and stern mooring berths to accommodate vessels up to 183m in length. LASH vessels up to

229m in length, 50,000 dwt, a beam of 30.4m, with a maximum draft of 8.2m, berth abreast Bunker Island. Caution is

necessary as many stranded and dangerous wrecks, best seen

on the chart, lie in the vicinity of the mooring buoys between

the LASH moorings and Baba Pool.

1.3 Berthing information for East Wharf, West Wharf, and the

Lower Harbor oil facilities are given in the accompanying table

titled Karachi—Berthing Facilities.

There are two drydocks available. The largest one is 246m

long and 27m wide, with a sill depth of 5.4m, accommodating

vessels up to 25,000 dwt. The other drydock is 176m long and

24m wide, with a sill depth of 4.8m, accommodating vessels

up to 18,000 dwt.

1.3 Aspect.—The Lower Harbor is that portion of the harbor between the entrance and the S end of East Wharf. Kiamari Groin

forms the NE side of the Lower Harbor. The oiling pier lies in

the NE part of the outer harbor. Extensive oil storage installations in the vicinity of the oiling pier are visible from a considerable distance.

1.3 The Upper Harbor is formed between East Wharf on its E

side and West Wharf on its W side. Kiamari, a small town built

on a sand ridge, lies E of the S part of East Wharf. 

Karachi—Berthing Facilities

Berth Maximum Vessel Remarks

Length Draft

EAST WHARF (see Note 3)

Merewether Wharf

Berth No. 1 — 10.67m Dedicated coal berth and general cargo/bulk/deep Draft 

all dirty cargos. See Note 5.

Berth No. 2 — 10.67m Dedicated coal berth and General Cargo/Bulk/Deep 

Draft all dirty cargos. See Note 5.

Berth No. 3 — 10.67m Dedicated Coal berth and General Cargo/Bulk/Deep 

Draft all dirty cargos. See Note 5.

Berth No. 4 186m 10.5m Deep draft/Bulk/General Cargo/Cruise ships/Naval 

ships) No dirty cargo allowed. See Note 5.

Erskine Wharf

Berth No. 5 186m 10.5m Deep-draft/bulk/general cargo/cruise ships/naval ships. 

No dirty cargo allowed. See Note 5.

Berth No. 6 300m 12.0m Pakistan International Container Terminal.

Berth No. 7 300m 12.0m Pakistan International Container Terminal.

Berth No. 8 300m 12.0m Pakistan International Container Terminal.
Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 5

Pub. 173

James Wharf

Berth No. 9 300m 12.0m Pakistan International Container Terminal.

Berth No. 10 140m 10.5m Multi-purpose. See Note 1.

Berth No. 11 225m 11.6m Multi-purpose. See Note 1. 

Giles Wharf

Berth No. 12 225m 11.6m Multi-purpose. See Note 1. 

Berth No. 13 168m 10.5m Multi-purpose. See Note 1.

Berth No. 14 148m 10.5m Multi-purpose. See Note 1.

Younghusband Wharf

Berth No. 15 148m 10.5m Multi-purpose. See Note 1.

Berth No. 16 168m 10.5m Multi-purpose. See Note 1.

Berth No. 17 148m 10.5m Multi-purpose. See Note 1.

Napier Mole Ship Repair Berths

Berth No. 1 79m 7.3m

Berth No. 2 79m 7.3m

WEST WHARF

Berth No. 18 150m 9.5m General cargo, jute, break bulk, and geared containers. 

See Note 4.

Berth No. 19 150m 9.5m General cargo, jute, break bulk, and geared containers. 

See Note 4.

Berth No. 20 150m 9.5m General cargo, jute, break bulk, and geared containers. 

See Note 4.

Berth No. 21 150m 9.5m General cargo, jute, break bulk, and geared containers. 

See Note 4.

Berth No. 22 150m 7.5m General cargo, Jute/Break bulk plus geared containers. 

See Note 4.

Berth No. 23 150m 7.5m General cargo, Jute/Break bulk plus geared containers. 

See Note 4.

Berth No. 24 — 10.0m General cargo, jute, break bulk, bulk cement, and 

geared containers.

Berth No. 25 — 10.0m General cargo, jute, break bulk, bulk cement, and 

geared containers.

Berth No. 26 300m 12.0m Karachi International Container Terminal.

Berth No. 27 300m 12.0m Karachi International Container Terminal.

Berth No. 28 300m 12.0m Karachi International Container Terminal.

Berth No. 29 300m 12.0m Karachi International Container Terminal.

Berth No. 30 300m 12.0m Karachi International Container Terminal.

LOWER HARBOR OIL FACILITIES

Berth OP-1 259m 11.8m Petroleum products.

Vessels up to 75,000 dwt with maximum displacement

of 95,000 tons can be accommodated. See Note 6. 

Karachi—Berthing Facilities

Berth Maximum Vessel Remarks

Length Draft
6 Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 

Pub. 173

1.3 The new part of Karachi, at the head of the Upper Harbor,

contains many fine buildings, while that part closest to the harbor is closely-built and crowded. 

1.3 When approaching Karachi from S and passing the Indus

Delta, the landmarks are not good. Land is not generally seen

before sighting Manora Point. During the Southwest Monsoon,

this approach is particularly hazardous. There is a continuous

haze and overcast during this season, making visual determination of the ship’s position difficult. From the W, Ras Muari

makes a good landfall.

1.3 Several groups of large square buildings are distinguishable

at Clifton, situated on some low sand hills, about 3 miles E of

Manora Point. 

1.3 At night, the lights on East Wharf can be seen from some

distance seaward and care is necessary not to mistake them for

navigational lights when approaching the port. Three conspicuous chimneys, one of which emits a flare, stand about 8 miles E

of Manora Point. 

1.3 Bara Andai, 28m high and marked by a light, lies about 1

mile ENE of Manora Point and is the S islet of Oyster Rocks. 

1.3 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels of 200 grt and

over. Pilots board incoming vessels 24 hours in the vicinity of

Fairway Lighted Buoy K (24°44'N., 66°56.6'E.). Pilots are requested by VHF. The Manora Point Light signal station will

advise the vessel if rough weather prohibits the pilot from

boarding. 

1.3 Karachi Harbor maintains a 24-hour watch on VHF channels

12 and 16. The Karachi Pilot can be contacted on VHF channels 8, 9, 11, 12, and 16. Karachi Coast Radio can be used for

passing messages. INMARSAT communication is also possible.

1.3 A vessel, while awaiting the pilot, should heave-to with its

head to wind and sea and, on the approach of the pilot boat,

bring the wind and sea on the port quarter and lower an accommodation ladder on the lee side.

1.3 Regulations.—Ships should contact Karachi Port Trust

(KPT) for reporting ETAs, with the following information:

1. Vessels name and flag.

2. Nrt and grt.

3. LOA.

4. Draft.

5. Loading/discharging information.

1.3 Container vessels should send their initial ETA 7 days prior

arrival; all others should semd their ETA 15 days in advance.

Subsequent ETAs should be transmitted by all vessel types at

intervels of 96 hours, 72 hours, 48 hours, and 24 hours prior arrival. 

1.3 Inbound vessels should maintain a listening watch on VHF

channel 12 when the pilot boards. Outbound vessels should

maintain a listening watch on VHF channel 12 from 30 minutes prior to departure until when outside the port limits.

1.3 Vessels with their bridge structure aft and having a length

greater than 170m must arrive, sail, and shift berth during daylight hours only.

1.3 The following vessels may navigate in the harbor only between LW and 1 hour before HW:

1. Cargo vessels greater than 288m long.

2. Tankers greater that 259m long berthing at OP-1 and

OP-2.

1.3 It has been reported (1995) that vessels are not allowed to

depart the harbor on the ebb current.

1.3 Although Fridays are weekly holidays, the port will impose a

fine for vessels not working cargo on this day.

1.3 Signals.—The signal station for communicating with vessels

outside the harbor is the tower WSW of Manora Point Light.

This tower, which is manned continuously, will flash the Morse

Code Letter “U” if a vessel appears to be lying into danger. 

1.3 Storm signals, using the General System, are displayed from

the Manora Point Light signal station and from the N entrance

of Boat Basin, about 1.5 miles N of the Manora Point Light

signal station. Further information on these storm signals may

be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide)

South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

1.3 Contact Information.—The Port Authority can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channels 12, 14, 16, and 20.

2. Telephone: 92-21-99214530 through

Berth OP-2 259m 11.8m Petroleum products, chemicals, molassas, and palm oil.

Vessels up to 75,000 dwt with maximum displacement

of 95,000 tons can be accommodated. See Note 6.

Berth OP-3 229m 11.8m Petroleum products, chemicals, molassas, and palm oil.

Vessels up to 75,000 dwt with maximum displacement

of 95,000 tons can be accommodated. See Note 6.

NOTES:

1. It is reported (2007) that heavy rains led to the collapse of Berths 10-14 and Berths 10-17 have been declared nonoperational. This situation has been reconfirmed as recently as December, 2009.

2. There are no restrictions on the beam for General cargo vessels when ships are self-sustaining.

3. There are no railroad served berths located on the East Wharves.

4. Movement at Berths 18-23 restricted to daylight hours only.

5. Deep-draft vessels are to commence loading/discharge immediately after berthing.

6. These berths are limited to a maximum beam of 44m and a maximum departure draft of 11.3m.

Karachi—Berthing Facilities

Berth Maximum Vessel Remarks

Length Draft
Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 7

Pub. 173

92-21-99214540

3. Facsimile: 92-21-99214329

92-21-99214330

1.3 Anchorage.—Anchoring is prohibited within the area, best

seen on the charts, which extends 5 miles SW from Manora

Breakwater. Anchorage is also prohibited within an area, best

seen on the chart, extending about 2 miles SSW from a position about 1.5 miles NW of Manora Point.

1.3 From September to May, ships can anchor off Karachi outside the charted prohibited anchorage areas, as convenient according to draft; ships are recommended not to anchor in

depths less than 9m and during April and May, they should anchor farther offshore in depths not less than 12m. 

1.3 Vessels should not anchor off Karachi during the Southwest

Monsoon, as several vessels have lost anchors and cables while

attempting to do so. 

1.3 Vessels having had more than two cases of dangerous infectious diseases aboard, or in which more than two deaths have

occurred during the 12 days prior to their arrival at Karachi,

must anchor in the quarantine anchorage, best seen on the

chart, at the entrance to the harbor. Vessels in quarantine may

enter the harbor during daylight hours only.

1.3 Directions.—The best approach is with Manora Point Light

bearing about 040° until Fairway Lighted Buoy K is sighted

and closed; then bring the leading lights in line as mentioned

below. It is dangerous to proceed within 2 miles of the harbor

entrance, and under no circumstance should a vessel attempt to

enter the harbor without a pilot. The lighthouse should not be

brought to bear less than 030° due to the heavy rollers and

swell on the edge of the flats. 

1.3 The approach channel to the harbor entrance is marked by a

lighted range, shown from metal framed beacons situated S of

Bara Andai Island. The channel is marked on either side by

lighted buoys. 

1.3 The best time to enter Karachi is on the first or last of the

flood tidal current. A vessel should swing to an anchor and

berth with its head S. When berthing during the Southwest

Monsoon, it is advisable to drop an anchor in midstream to assist in hauling off.

1.3 When leaving the harbor, the pilot disembarks at the harbor

entrance. Vessels should then steer through the buoyed channel

on course 220° until Fairway Lighted Buoy K is passed clear.

However, as stated previously, Manora Point Light should not

be brought to bear less than 030°.

1.3 Caution.—No vessel should proceed within 2 miles of the

harbor entrance without local knowledge. Vessels should not

attempt to enter the harbor without a pilot.

1.3 Several vessels approaching Karachi from S have grounded

on the banks off the Indus Delta through failure to sound and

for not making due allowance for the SE set. 

1.3 Dangey Patches, rocky heads with a least depth of 10.4m, lie

about 1.5 miles WSW of Manora Point. Three dangerous

wrecks lie within the red sector of Bari Andai Light, about 3

miles S, 5.8 miles S, and 4.3 miles SSE, respectively, of Bara

Andai Island.

1.3 There are dangerous or stranded wrecks which lie within 1,

6, and 9 miles SW of Manora Point Light. Other dangerous

wrecks lie 2.5 and 4.8 miles WSW, and 5 miles W of Manora

Point Light. These dangerous wrecks may not be marked by

buoys.

Approach to Muhammad Bin Qasim

1.4 Phitti Creek (24°40'N., 67°09'E.) is entered 11 miles

SE of Manora Point, between Bundal Island, which is low and

sandy, and Zulfiquar Bank (24°39.6'N., 67°08.1'E.), which

dries 0.6m. A tower, with an elevation of 24m, lies close NE of

the SE extremity of Bundal Island. 

1.4 A bank, formerly known as Surveyor’s Sand (24°39.7'N.,

67°07.2'E.), is a drying patch with its SW extremity lying 1.5

miles SW of Bundal Island. Range lights lead through the outer

part of Ahsan Channel. The rear range light stands off the SE

end of Surveyor’s Sand.

1.4 Phitti Creek is approached by Ahsan Channel, which leads

through the shallow flat fronting the entrance. This entrance is

marked by Fairway Lighted Buoy, moored 7.5 miles SSW of

the rear range light on Surveyor’s Sand. The outer anchorage

area is centered about 2 miles W of Fairway Lighted Buoy. The

least depth in the anchorage is 17m, good holding ground, mud

and sand. There is a waiting area close E of the channel and N

of Zulfiquar Bank. 

1.4 Bundal Island (Bhunddaar Island), composed of sand dunes,

lies W of Muchak Island which is a small strip of land always

visible at the SW end of Buddo Island. Buddo Island is a lowlying area of mangroves and mudflats. There are several mooring buoys in the channel E of Bundal Island. There is a prominent building on the E side of Bundal Island, 0.8 miles N of its

S extremity; a beacon stands on the NE point of the island.

1.4 Anchorage.—Anchorage, in 16 to 20m, good holding

ground, sand and mud, can be obtained in the Outer Anchorage

Area, close W of Fairway Lighted Buoy. The limits of the anchorage area can best be seen on the chart. During the heavy

swells of the Southwest Monsoon, vessels should anchor near

the W end of the anchorage area and pay out extra cable.

1.4 Caution.—During the Southwest Monsoon, a heavy swell is

also encountered in Ahsan Channel. During this period, suspended dust in the air also results in reduced visibility. Fog or

mist may also be encountered during the winter months at dusk

and at dawn.

Muhammad Bin Qasim (24°46'N., 67°21'E.)

World Port Index No. 48605 

1.5 Port Muhammad Bin Qasim is the second largest port

in Pakistan and is situated in Phitti Creek, 32 miles SE from the

center of Karachi. Constructed in the late 1970s, it is capable of

handling vessels of up to 75,000 dwt and 295m in length, with

a draft of 12.6m. 

1.5 Tides—Currents.—The spring tidal current of 3 knots on

the flood and 5 knots on the ebb are normal in Phitti Creek and

vessels should proceed with caution, especially in passing the

dredges. Except in the entrance channel, the current mostly follows the direction of the creek. 

1.5 Depths—Limitations.—Access to the port is through a 24-

mile long channel, divided into three sections beginning with

 Port Qasim Authority Home Page

http://www.portqasim.org.pk
8 Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 

Pub. 173

Ahsan Channel. Ahsan Channel is approximately 9 miles long

and has been deepened to a depth of 12.5m, with a year round

target of 11.5m, and is well-marked. From the vicinity of Buddo Island and Zulfiquar Bank, the channel continues through

Phitti Creek and Kadiro Creek, both maintained at 12.5m, to a

turning basin off the Iron Ore and Coal Jetty, a distance of 13

miles. From this jetty, the channel traverses Gharo Creek,

maintained at a depth of 10m, to the Marginal Wharf, 2 miles

farther up the creek.

1.5 The turning basin off the Iron Ore and Coal Jetty is maintained to a depth of 12.5m. The turning basin off the Marginal

Wharf is maintained to a depth of 10.0m.

1.5 The width of the channel ranges from 185 to 280m in the approach and from 145 to 250m in the reach channel. The turning

basins are 370m and 450m in diameter. 

1.5 Dredging of the channel is continuous, but silting is liable to

occur, particularly during the Southwest Monsoon. Buoys are

liable to drag and are moved frequently to mark the best channel. 

1.5 The Fauji Oil Terminal has a 46m long main platform. Dolphins extend the berthing length to 250m. There is a maintained depth of 11.3m alongside. Vessels between 25,000 dwt

and 75,000 dwt can be accommodated, but in 1995 vessels

were limited to a maximum length of 225m, a maximum beam

of 32.2m, and a maximum draft of 10m (10.5m with special

permission).

1.5 Fauji Akbar Portia, a dry cargo jetty, can accommodate vessels with a length up to 230m. The maximum allowable draft is

11.5m while the maximum allowable beam of 40m. This terminal can accommodate bulk grain and fertilizer carriers.

1.5 The Iron Ore and Coal Jetty, 1 mile ESE of the Fauji Oil Terminal, handles bulk carriers serving a steel mill; it is 270m

long. The jetty is connected to the steel mill by a trestle and a

conveyor. Vessels of 50,000 dwt can be accommodated, although it is planned to increase the capacity to 100,000 dwt.

Berthing limitations are given in the table titled Maximum

Vessel Dimensions—Iron Ore and Coal Jetty.

1.5 There are seven berths at the Marginal Wharf. Berth 5, Berth

6, and Berth 7 make up Qasim International Container Terminal. Each berth is 200m long, with limiting dimensions as listed in the table titled Berthing Limitations—Marginal

Wharf.

1.5 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots board 1.5 miles

SW of Fairway Lighted Buoy. In bad weather, the pilot may

board in the waiting area or in the channel abreast the SE end

of Bundal Island. The pilot boat is gray-hulled with a white superstructure.

1.5 Deep-draft vesels are normally boarded by the pilot about

2.5 hours prior to HW, in order to assure that vessels berth at

HW.

1.5 Regulations.—The vessel’s ETA is required 72 hours, 48

hours, and 24 hours in advance; messages are to be sent to the

Deputy Conservator. Vessels should contact Port Muhammad

Bin Qasim Control 6 hours prior to arrival onon VHF channel

16. 

1.5 The ETA message should contain the following information:

1. Vessel name and flag.

2. Net registered tonnage.

3. Gross registered tonnage.

4. Length overall.

5. Draft.

6. Loading/discharging information.

1.5 Contact Information.—The Port Authority can be contacted, as follows:

1. Call sign: Port Qasim Control

Maximum Vessel Dimensions—Iron Ore and Coal 

Jetty

Monsoon season 

(May to September)

Non-monsoon season 

(September to May)

Length 201m 225m

Draft 10.5m 9.5-10.5m

Beam 25.3m 25.3m

Note.—All berthing limitations are subject to change.

Updated information can be obtained from the Pakistan

Notice to Mariners or the local port authorities.

Berthing Limitations—Marginal Wharf

Berth

Maximum Vessel Dimensions

Size Length Draft Beam

1 — 183m 9.5m 25m

2 25,000 dwt 183m 10.0m 25m

3 25,000 dwt 183m 10.0m 25m

4 25,000 dwt 183m 10.0m 25m

5 25,000 dwt 200m 11.5m 25m

6 35,000 dwt 200m 11.5m 25m

7 35,000 dwt 200m 11.5m 25m

Note.—All berthing limitations are subject to

change. Updated information can be obtained from

the Pakistan Notice to Mariners or the local port authorities.

Muhammad Bin Qasim
Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 9

Pub. 173

2. VHF: VHF channels 10 and 16

3. Telephone: 92-21-99204211 through

92-21-99204230

4. Facsimile: 92-21-34730108

92-21-34730109

5. E-mail: secretary@portqasim.org.pk

1.5 Qasim International Container Terminal can be contacted, as

follows:

1. Telephone: 92-21-34739100

2. Facsimile: 92-21-34730021

3. E-mail: info@qict.net

4. Internet: http://www.qict.net

1.5 Anchorage.—Refer to paragraph 1.4. 

1.5 Caution.—Buoys marking the channel are liable to drag and

they are moved frequently to make make best use of the channel especially during times of silting during the SW monsoon

so their charted positions should be be relied upon. Night navigation is restricted to special request and can be carried out

only under the following conditions:

1.5 In Ahsan Channel, a dangerous wreck lies near the SE edge

of the dredged channel, close SW of Ahsan Channel Lighted

Buoy No. 11. 

The Indus Delta—Phitti Creek to Khori Creek

1.6 Winds—Weather.—The climate of the Indus Delta is

hot in the summer, cool in the winter, and unhealthy during the

floods, which normally occur from June to September.

1.6 Tides—Currents.—The currents in the Indus Delta tend to

be variable, but the sets of the currents do tend to parallel the

coast.

1.6 Farther off the delta, the currents have a seasonal variation

that is related to the monsoons, as follows:

1. February to September—The set is usually SE, with

the strongest consistancy occuring from June to August.

2. October—The currents are variable.

3. November to January—The set is usually NW.

1.6 The rate of the current is usually less than 1 knot, but a rate

of as much as 2 knots can occur, usually from June through

August and in December.

1.6 Tidal currents at the mouths of the Indus Delta are strong,

and can attain the following rates at ebb:

1. Phitti Creek (24°40'N., 67°09'E.)—3 knots.

2. Dabba Creek (24°19'N., 67°16'E.)—3 knots.

3. Turshian Creek (24°03'N., 67°23'E.)—5 knots.

4. Sir Creek (23°38'N., 68°02'E.)—4 knots.

1.6 Aspect.—The Indus Delta extends about 115 miles SE from

Karachi to Khori Creek. The delta is low and flat throughout,

and is partially flooded at HW to a considerable distance inland. It is destitute of trees and shrubs, with the exception of a

little jungle, and nothing is seen for many miles but swamp.

The land is scarcely discernible at more than 2 miles offshore,

except where bushes exist, which can be seen at LW at a distance of 5 or 6 miles. 

1.6 A narrow strip of sand hills generally fronts this coast, which

is backed by mangrove swamps and fronted by drying sand

banks. During the heat of the day, and especially during the dry

season when the wind blows off the land, a heavy dust-haze

hangs low over the coast, making the coastal features unrecognizable, even from a short distance to seaward. 

Khuddi Creek (24°36'N., 67°12'E.) is fronted by a bar with

a depth of 2.4m; within the bar a 1-mile wide channel, with

depths from 4 to 11m, leads between low sandy islands on either side of the entrance. A light shown from a round tower,

with black and white bands, on the S side of the creek.

1.6 Caution.—It is difficult to identify the different mouths of

the Indus River on a coast so devoid of landmarks and, at

times, partially submerged. Beacons marking the mouths have

long since collapsed or disappeared, owing to the constantly

changing coastline; a few beacons remain.

1.6 Vessels navigating along this coast should remain in depths

over 18m, as the depths shoal abruptly in places, especially in

the vicinity of The Swatch. It is dangerous for a deep-draft vessel to approach the Indus Delta, as the breakers on the shelving

coastal banks, which extend many miles offshore, are often

seen before the coast is sighted; this is especially so during the

Southwest Monsoon, when visibility is poor and the sea breaks

in depths of 5.5m or more. The discoloration of the water is

very marked, especially off the main fresh water mouths on the

ebb tidal current, when during spring tides it extends more than

10 miles offshore.

1.6 Heavy tide rips are common off the mouths of the Indus Delta, especially during springs.

1.7 Sir Creek (Sir River) (23°38'N., 68°02'E.) enters the

sea about 100 miles SE of Karachi and is the approximate

boundary between India and Pakistan. 

1.7 The Swatch is a remarkable submarine valley, from about 3

to 8 miles wide, extending about 52 miles SSW from approximately 23°40'N., 67°27'E. The Swatch has depths of less than

183m on either side of it, with depths exceeding 1,097m at its

SW end. It is almost regular in shape and has steep sides and a

flat sloping bottom. The bottom and sides of The Swatch consist of soft, gray mud, with some sand and gravel on its NW

edge.

1.7 The Swatch can be of great assistance to vessels approaching

Khuddi Island Light
10 Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 

Pub. 173

Karachi from S. An echo sounder trace of maximum depths

can help provide a clear indication of the vessel’s position, especially during the poor visibility and the strong sets of the

Southwest Monsoon.

1.7 Khori Great Bank is an extension of the coastal bank SW

from the coast between The Swatch and Khori Creek. This

bank has depths of 20.1 to 33m and extends as much as 60

miles offshore. 

Khori Creek to the Gulf of Kutch

1.8 Khori Creek (23°30'N., 68°20'E.), one of the outlets

of the Rann of Kutch, has a shallow bar, but is navigable by local craft as far as Lakhpat, about 28 miles inland, on the SE

side of the river. The entrance of the creek is obstructed by several sand banks, except on the E side, where a deep-water

channel leads into the creek. The banks of the creek, 0.6 to

1.5m high, are broken by numerous waterways. 

1.8 When a vessel is in depths of over 5.5m off the mouth of

Khori Creek, the low land cannot be seen, except in the clearest

weather, when the low hills NE will be visible. 

1.8 Maniara (23°28'N., 68°37'E.), 67m high, is surmounted by

a fort. The bar, with depths of 3 to 3.7m, is about 4 miles across

and lies with its outer edge about 10 miles seaward of the E entrance point of Khori Creek. A dangerous wreck lies about 15

miles WSW of the entrance to Kori Creek. Inside the bar, the

channel, with depths of 5.5 to 22m, leads through the creek for

a distance of 10 to 12 miles. As the channel and banks are subject to constant changes, local knowledge is necessary. 

1.8 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents are strong in the estuary

of Khori Creek, attaining a velocity of 5 knots at springs and

about 3 knots at neaps. The flood sets up the channel until

three-quarters flood, when it sweeps over the sand banks in the

entrance. 

1.9 Godia Creek (Goria Creek) (23°14'N., 68°35'E.),

known locally as Jakhau Harbor, can be identified by some

sand hills, about 9.1m high, on the N side of its entrance. The S

side of the entrance is low and fronted by ridges of sand, 6.1 to

13.7m high. The coast between Godia Creek and Khori Creek,

about 19 miles NW, is very low and indented by creeks. 

1.9 The entrance to Godia Creek is marked N and S by beacons;

a light is shown about 2 miles E of the entrance, on the S side

of the creek. Local knowledge is necessary for entering the

creek, as the coastline and creek is constantly changing. 

1.9 The creek has depths of 5.5 to 8.8m within the entrance; the

bar had a least depth of 1.2m in the fairway in 1961. Salt is

loaded into barges from a jetty near the above-mentioned light. 

1.9 Signals.—Storm signals are shown at Jakhau Harbor using

the Brief System. Further information on these storm signals

may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide)

South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

1.9 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be obtained, in about

8m, mud, about 5 miles SW of the creek entrance. Vessels

should approach the entrance cautiously, as few distinguishable

landmarks are visible until in the vicinity of the 10m curve,

about 7 miles offshore. 

1.9 The coast between Godia Creek and Asar Mata, about 43

miles ESE, is uniformly low and fronted by a narrow, sandy

ridge, which is about 9.1m high, except near Asar Mata where

it is slightly higher. Villages are numerous and the land is wellcultivated. 

1.9 Chachhi Light is shown on the W side of the entrance of the

Chok River (22°57'N., 69°00'E.), from a white masonry tower

with black bands, 31m high.

1.9 Dholo Pir Temple, 10m high, is conspicuous about 3.5 miles

ESE of the Chok River.

1.9 Asar Mata (22°50'N., 69°13'E.), a conspicuous Hindu temple, 25.3m high, lies on the coast, on the crest of the sand hills,

at an elevation of 34m.

The Gulf of Kutch

1.10 The Gulf of Kutch, entered between Asar Mata and

Humani Point (Vomani Point) (22°29'N., 69°04'E.), about 23

miles SSW, contains some sheltered anchorages and harbors.

The shores of the gulf are uniformly low. The N shore, consistng of sand and mud, is fronted by numerous shoals. The S

shore is fronted with islets and islands covered with brushwood

and surrounded by coral reefs.

1.10 The N shore is backed by a range of hills, about 15 to 20

miles inland, extending in an E-W direction and nearly parallel

with the coast for a distance of about 35 miles. Krikubbah,

253m high, with a sharp peak, lies about 18 miles N of Asar

Mata. Nanu Hill (Nunnomar Hill), 434m high and circular, lies

about 6.5 miles ENE of Krikubbah. Katrura, also circular and

378m high, is the highest of the E peaks of this range,which

lies about 24 miles E of Nanu Hill and may sometimes be seen

from the S side of the gulf. 

1.10 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents are strong in the estuary.

Across the mouth of the Gulf of Kutch, the strong tidal currents

over the uneven bottom cause a confused breaking sea. It has

been reported that the tidal currents in the gulf are very irregular in direction and that a vessel proceeding into or out of the

gulf may be set considerably N or S in a short time.

1.10 Along the coast on the N side of the gulf, the tidal currents

set E with the flood and W with the ebb, attaining a velocity of

2 to 3 knots. 

1.10 The tidal currents in the vicinity of Lushington Shoal set

ESE with the flood, attaining a velocity of 1.8 knots at neaps. 

1.10 At the W edge of Gurur Shoal, the tidal current sets E with

the flood and W with the ebb, at a velocity of 1.5 knots at neaps. 

1.10 Between Gurur Shoal and the coast S and SE, there are

heavy tide rips on both sides of the fairway, particularly on the

ebb tide. The sea sometimes breaks in this fairway even in

calm weather. 

1.10 Tidal currents over Ranwara Shoals attain a velocity of 5

knots at springs and 3 knots at neaps. They cause heavy tide

rips and overfalls over the uneven ground in the vicinity of the

shoals and W toward Asar Mata.

1.10 Aspect.—Lushington Shoal (Unniamor) (22°38'N.,

68°47'E.) lies in the fairway of the W approach to the Gulf of

Kutch, about 18 miles WNW of Humani Point. This danger,

with a least depth of 4.3m, can usually be identified by the discoloration of the water over it. The bottom consists of sand and

rock. Depths of less than 10m extend about 2 miles WSW of

the shoal. 

1.10 Gurur Shoal, about 5 miles NW of Humani Point, is com-
Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 11

Pub. 173

posed of sand and rock, and has a least depth of 3m. Depths of

less than 10m extend about 2.8 miles SW, and 1.5 miles NE of

the shoal. A 9.4m patch lies about 6.5 miles W of Humani

Point. Between Gurur Shoal and the mainland S and SE, the

depths are irregular; heavy tide rips are experienced, particularly on the ebb tide, on either side of the intervening deep-water

channel. The sea sometimes breaks in this channel, even in

calm weather. 

1.10 A shoal, with a least depth of 7.9m, lies about 5.5 miles S of

Asar Mata. Detached shoals, with depths of 9.1m, lie about 2.5

miles WNW, and 1.5 miles NNW of the W end of this shoal.

Ranwara Shoals, about 6 miles S of the breakwater at Mandvi

(22°49'N., 69°21'E.), consists of two rocky shoals, oriented EW, with depths of less than 10m, separated from each other by

a narrow passage. The NW shoal, about 5.3 miles long, has an

area at its E end with a depth of 3.7m. The SE shoal, about 3.5

miles long, has an area at its NW end with depths of 0.9 to 4m

and depths of 5.5m and less near its SE end. 

1.10 A lighted buoy is moored off the SW side of the SE shoal.

1.10 Pilotage.—Pilots for the Gulf of Kutch are obtained at

Mandvi (22°50'N., 69°21'E.), on the N side of the gulf.

1.10 Caution.—In the entrance to the Gulf of Kutch, large quantities of mud and sand are sometimes held in suspension, either

on the surface causing discoloration, or beneath the surface,

which will be churned up by a ship’s propellers, giving the impression of being in shoal water. This may occur between the

meridians of 69°00'E and 69°30'E. 

1.10 Strong cross currents, setting in any direction for short periods, have been reported. 

1.10 The depths in the gulf are very irregular for about 30 miles

inside the entrance. They then decrease gradually, with the bottom changing from rock and sand to mud.

The Gulf of Kutch—North Coast

1.11 The coast between Asar Mata (22°50'N., 69°13'E.)

and Mandvi, about 7 miles E, is fronted with white sandhills,

between 6.1m and 15.2m high, which are very visible at night.

1.11 Vijayvillas Palace, Tamachi Pir Tomb, and a house are conspicuous about 3.5 miles E of Asar Mata. The tomb is situated

on a sand hill, 26m high; the E end of the sand hill is a steep

bluff, with a small creek at its foot. 

1.11 Between Asar Mata and Mandvi, the coastal bank and some

detached shoals, with depths of less than 5m, extend between

1.5 and 2 miles offshore. 

Mandvi (22°50'N., 69°21'E.)

World Port Index No. 48620 

1.12 Mandvi, situated on the W bank of the Rukmawati

River, is the most important commercial town in the Gulf of

Kutch. The port authority at Mandvi is exercised by the Port

Officer, however, radio messages to Mandvi are relayed

through Kandla Radio. 

1.12 Depths—Limitations.—Albert Edward Breakwater, 564m

long and lighted at the head, protects the harbor from W winds.

Vessels with a maximum drasft of 3.7m can berth alongside the

breakwater at high tides. 

1.12 The small harbor, sheltered from W winds by the breakwater, has a pier and pitched slope, where sailing vessels and

lighters with a draft between 2.7 to 3m can secure alongside to

work cargo on a HW only; the entire harbor dries out at a half

tide. The height of HW at Mandvi ranges between 3 and 4.2m.

1.12 Aspect.—The town is surrounded by a wall flanked with

bastions, within which a large flat roofed building forms a

prominent landmark.

1.12 A conspicuous radio mast, 75m high, stands 4.5 miles NE of

the entrance to the harbor. A light, with a racon, is shown from

Mandvi Lighthouse, pictured above, on the SW bastion of the

wall mentioned above. 

1.12 Raval Pir Tomb (Rawal Pir Tomb), conspicuous and lighted,

lies about 2.5 miles E of the harbor. There are some sand hills

with clumps of trees in the vicinity of the Tomb.

1.12 Signals.—Storm signals are displayed, in daylight only,

from a flagstaff at the Customs House; the General System is

used. Further information on these storm signals may be found

in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

1.12 Anchorage.—Good anchorage may be obtained, in depths

of 9 to 11m, sand and shingle bed, 2.3 miles offshore, with

Mandvi Light and the breakwater lights in line bearing 358°.

The tidal currents at the anchorage attain a rate of 3 knots at

springs and less than 2 knots at neaps; however, farther offshore the strength increases. 

1.12 Cargo is handled by means of lighters at these anchorages. 

Mandvi Light
12 Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 

Pub. 173

1.13 The coast between Mandvi and Mudwah Point

(22°46'N., 69°30'E.) is fringed by a sandbank which extends

about 0.5 mile offshore in places. Mudwah Point is a sandy

bluff, 12.5m high. North of this point an extensive backwater

runs to within 2 miles of Raval Pir Tomb; the backwater is entirely flooded at very high spring tides and at ordinary HW during the Southwest Monsoon.

1.13 Long narrow ridges of sand, from 1.5 to 3m high, front the

coast between Mudwah Point and Navinal Point, about 12

miles E; a drying bank extends about 1 mile seaward of the

coast. Between these sand ridges and the mainland there is an

extensive swamp which is covered with mangroves and intersected by numerous small creeks. 

1.13 Sonar Durree, a sand bank, lies from 4 to 7 miles ESE of

Mudwah Point and consists of detached drying ridges of sand;

it is steep-to on its S side. During the first half-flood, and after

half-ebb, the bank can be identified by the rippling of the water. Sonar Lighted Buoy is moored 1.5 miles S of Sonar Durree. From the masthead, the bank can be identified by the

discolored water. There is no navigable passage N of this bank. 

Navinal Point (22°44'N., 69°43'E.) consists of a few ridges

of sand, the greatest elevation being not more than 3m. A large

swamp, partly covered with mangrove bushes and through

which several small creeks flow, extends NW, N, and NE of the

point.

1.14 Mundra Port (22°44'N., 69°42'E), about 1.5 miles

NNW of Navinal Point, is a private port and has a natural

breakwater. The port consists of an old port area with a roadstead anchorage, a lighterage/coastal jetty, and a salt loading

jetty. The new port area consists of an eight-berth multi-purpose terminal, a container terminal, and an offshore SPM. 

Winds—Weather.—The weather is generally dry. From

April to September, the winds are generally SW, with gusts up

to 22 knots. From September to April, the winds are generally

NE and light.

1.14 Tides—Currents.—Tides are semi-diurnal, ranging from

4.8m at springs and 2.5m at neaps with Currents running generally at 3 knots but as high as 5 knots at springs alternating between 070°/250°. Monthly tide tables for the entire year are

available at the Mundra port Home page listed above.

1.14 Depths—Limitations.—The T-head jetty extends 0.7 mile

SSE from the shore and has two outer berths and two inner

berths. Specific berth information can be found in the accompanying table titled Mundra Port—Multi-purpose and Container Terminal.

1.14 Mundra International Container Terminal, located near Navinal Point, is approached from the SE through a channel,

marked by lighted buoys and a lighted range, and maintained to

a depth of 17 to 18m. A circular turning area close NE of the

terminal and marked by lighted buoys is maintained to a depth

of 14.3m.

1.14 Two offshore SPMs, in depths of 32m, lie about 5.3 miles

SW of Navinal Point. Tankers up to 360,000 dwt and 348m in

length can be accommodated. A submarine pipeline extends

NNE from the SPMs to the shore. Two more SPMs may become operational in the near future.

1.14 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. The pilot boards, as follows: 

1. Mundra International Container Terminal—Pilot

Boarding Position A, in position 22°42.30'N, 69°44.00'E.

2. Multi-Purpose Terminal—Pilot Boarding Position B,

in position 22°42.32'N,69°42.20'E.

3. Offshore SPM—in position 22°38.87'N, 69°39.18'E.

1.14 Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA 7 days, 5

days, 72 hours, 48 hours, and 24 hours in advance. 

1.14 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channels 16 and 73

2. Telephone: 91-2838-289221

91-2838-252333

3. Facsimile: 91-2838-289170

4. E-mail: marine.control@mundraport.com

portopscenter@mundraport.com

 Mundra Port Home Page

http://www.portofmundra.com 

http://www.mundraport.com

Mundra Port—Multi-Purpose and Container Terminal

Berth Depth

Maximum Vessel

Remarks

Length Draft Beam Size

No. 1 16.5m 275m 15.5m 38m 75,000 dwt Coal.

No. 2 16.0m 180m 13.0m 32m 30,000 dwt Liquid bulk cargo.

No. 3 14.6m 225m 14.0m 38m 60,000 dwt Fertilizer.

No. 4 13.0m 225m 12.0m 32m 60,000 dwt Liquid bulk cargo.

Terminal 2

No. 5 14.4m 250m 14.0m 38m 150,000 dwt Fertilizer, Agro. See Note 1.

No. 6 15.6m 250m 15.5m 38m 150,000 dwt Steam coal. See Note 1.

No. 7 12.5m 175m 12.0m 35m 40,000 dwt Steel. See Note 1.

No. 8 12.5m 175m 10.5m 35m 40,000 dwt See Note 1.
Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 13

Pub. 173

1.14 Mundra International Container Terminal can be contacted,

as follows:

1. Telephone: 91-2838-288269

91-9879-104801 (mobile)

2. Facsimile: 91-2838-288278

3. Internet: http://www.mict.poports.com

1.14 Anchorage.—Vessels waiting to berth at Navinal Marine

Terminal can anchor, in 12 to 30m, about 4 miles SSE of Navinal Point. Deep-draft vessels working cargo can anchor about

1.2 miles ESE of Navinal Point, but must keep clear of the

range line leading to the container terminal. 

1.14 An anchorage area for vessels using the SPM is located 2.3

miles SSE of the SPM.

1.15 Between Navinal Point and Nakti Creek, about 27

miles ENE, the coast is fronted by a mud flat which dries up to

3 miles offshore. A 6.7m shoal lies about 3 miles E of Navinal

Point, and a chain of shoals, with depths of 0.3 to 6.4m, extends about 8.5 miles ENE of the same point. 

1.15 Bhadreswar Temple, standing about 14.5 miles NE of Navinal Point, is conspicuous, with a white dome 25m high; a fort

lies close W from it. Another temple, 24m high, with a dome,

is about 1.3 miles S from the above temple. 

1.15 A clump of banyan trees is conspicuous about 3.5 miles ENE

of Bhadreswar Temple. 

The Gulf of Kutch—South Coast

1.16 Humani Point (Vomani Point) (22°29'N., 69°04'E.),

at the N extremity of the Okhamandal Peninsula, forms the S

entrance point of the Gulf of Kutch. A tower, 21m high, lies on

the point. There are two beacons standing 0.2 and 0.4 mile SSE

and SSW, respectively, of the point. Humani Point (Okha

Point) Light, shown from a tall white masonry tower with red

bands, is fitted with a radar reflector and lies about 0.4 mile

SSE from the point. A fog signal is sounded from the tower.

Two radio masts; situated close SSW of the light, are marked

by fixed red obstruction lights. 

1.16 Okha Point, low and sandy, lies about 1 mile ESE of Humani

Point and is marked by a 28m high flagstaff; the town of Okha

lies on this point.

1.16 Samiani Island (Samayani Island) lies about 1 mile N of

Okha Point, with its SW extremity over 30m high. 

Barge 9.0m 80 6.0m 15m 2,500 dwt —

Mundra International Container Terminal

CB1 13.6m — 13.5m 42m 150,000 dwt Containers. See Note 2.

CB2 14.1m — 14.0m 32m 150,000 dwt Containers. See Note 2.

CB3 14.5m — 13.9m 42m 150,000 dwt Containers. See Note 2.

CB4 14.5m — 14.2m 42m 150,000 dwt Container. See Note 2.

Notes:

1. Berth No. 5 and Berth No. 6 are along a quay that is 575m in length; Berth No. 7 and Berth No. 8 are along a quay

that is 442m in length. This allows any number of vessels to use either quay as long as the total length of all the vessels plus

40m in clearance between these vessels does not exceed either total quay length. 

2. Berth CB1 and Berth CB2 are along a quay that is 631m in length; Berth CB3 and Berth CB4 are along a quay that is

also 631m in length. This allows any number of vessels to use either quay as long as the total length of all the vessels plus

40m in clearance between these vessels does not exceed 631m. 

Mundra Port—Multi-Purpose and Container Terminal

Berth Depth

Maximum Vessel

Remarks

Length Draft Beam Size

Humani Point (Okha Point) Light
14 Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 

Pub. 173

1.16 A Deep Water Route has been established leading from SW

of the entrance point of the Gulf of Kutch for the use of VLCCs

to approach the offshore oil terminal near Sikka Creek. The

route is entered 7 miles WNW of Kachchigadh Light, leads between Lushington and Gurur Shoals, then E into the gulf, passing N of Investigator Reef. The route varies in width from 0.8

to 1.7 miles, with its first 4.5 miles having controlling depths of

25m; the 8.5 mile stretch of the route NNE of Okha, having

depths of 23m. 

1.16 Vessels with drafts less than 15m, navigating in the Gulf of

Kutch, should keep N of the Deep Water Route and S of Ranwara Shoals (22°41'N., 69°22'E.). 

1.16 In 1982, it was reported that the shallowest depth of 23m lies

between the meridians of 69°08'E and 69°10'E. 

Okha (22°28'N., 69°05'E.)

World Port Index No. 48670 

1.17 The Port of Okha lies between the N end of the Okhamandal Peninsula (22°29'N., 69°05'E.) and Beyt Shankhodar.

The port is protected and open year round, with facilities to accommodate deep-draft vessels. 

1.17 The port limits extend approximately 2.8 miles NE, 2 miles

NW, and 1.75 miles SW from the town. Its main exports are cement, bauxite, and sodium carbonate.

1.17 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Okha is 3.35m at MHWS and 2.74m at MHWN. 

1.17 In the W approach channel to Okha Harbor, the tidal currents

set ESE with the flood and WNW with the ebb, attaining a velocity of 3.5 knots at neaps. 

1.17 North of Samiani Island, and between it and Chandri Reef,

the tidal currents set SE with the flood and WNW with the ebb.

The flood current attains a velocity of 3 knots at springs; the

ebb current attains a velocity of 2 knots at neaps. 

1.17 West of Samiani Island, the tidal currents set NE with the

flood and SW with the ebb, with a velocity of 1.8 knots at neaps. Southeast of the island, the reverse is the case.

1.17 The flood current sets strongly around the S end of Samiani

Island in a S and E direction; from there it sets S through Okha

Harbor, curving E around the S end of Beyt Shankhodhar. It

has a velocity of 1.3 to 1.5 knots at neaps and 2 knots at

springs. 

1.17 The ebb current, coming from the E around the S end of Beyt

Shankhodhar, sets N through the harbor until it reaches the

shoal water NW of Padmatirth Point. Here it divides into two

branches, one setting along the W side of the harbor and W of

Samiani Island, and the other setting N and NE between Samiani Island and Beyt Shankhodhar, and then WNW in the area N

of Samiani Island. The ebb current has a velocity of 1.3 to 2

knots at neaps. 

1.17 Strong eddies form in the harbor at springs with both tidal

currents, and a confused sea occurs over the shallow ground

NW of Padmatirth Point. There is a strong undertow at the anchorage off Okha Point. 

1.17 Depths—Limitations.— Aramda Reefs, with a least depth

of 0.6m, extend about 1.5 miles from the coast, about 4 miles

WSW of Humani Point. 

1.17 Marian Shoal, with a least depth of 2.4m, lies about 2.5

miles W of Humani Point, and Bobby Shoal, with a least depth

of 6.7m, lies about the same distance WNW of Humani Point. 

1.17 Samiani Shoal, an extensive area with depths of less than

3.3m, extends about 1.8 miles WNW from its E extremity,

which lies about 0.3 mile N of the N extremity of Samiani Island. There is a drying patch in the SE part of this shoal. Buoy

No. 1 is moored about 0.2 mile W of the NW extremity of the

shoal; a 5m patch lies about 0.3 mile W of the same extremity.

Buoy No. 2 marks the SE end of the shoal. 

1.17 Samiani Island is fringed by a reef, which dries in places and

extends about 0.2 mile NE from the NE extremity of the island.

Depths of 6.1m extend about 0.3 mile farther NNW. 

1.17 Chandri Reef (Chinri Reef), which dries, lies with its SW extremity about 2 miles NE of Samiani Island. The reef lies on

the SW corner of an extensive shoal with depths of less than

1.8m. 

1.17 A large shoal, with depths of 2 to 5m, lies W of Chandri

Reef, with its W edge about 1.5 miles NNE of Samiani Island.

Lighted Buoy No. 1 is moored about 0.5 mile W of the shoal;

detached patches, with depths of 4 to 5.5m, lie between the

buoy and the shoal. Less water than charted has been reported

(1993) about 0.5 mile ESE of the buoy. 

1.17 Chandri Rock, a shoal with a least depth of 2.4m, lies about

1.5 miles ENE of Samiani Island and is marked close SW by a

lighted buoy. Several other shoal patches lie in this vicinity. 

1.17 A large shoal, the NW end of which lies about 0.3 mile E of

the NE extremity of Samiani Island, extends SSE and dries

over its central portion for about 0.5 mile. Buoy No. 2 marks

the NW extremity of this shoal.

1.17 A wreck, with a depth of 5m, lies 1.7 miles NNW of Samiani

Island.

1.17 The entrance channel, passing close SE of Samiani Island,

has a least depth of 4.9m in the fairway. 

1.17 There are general depths of 6.1 to 9.4m in Okha Harbor.

1.17 Shri Sayaji Pier, lying close S of Okha Point, is a concrete

pile structure 180m in length, connected to the mainland by an

approach pier 114m in length. The pier can simultaneously accommodate two vessels at a time up to 181m in length on the E

side and 100m in length on the W side, all in a least depth of

8m. 

1.17 Second Pier (Dry Cargo Berth), lying close SW of Shri

Sayaji Pier and similar to it in construction, is 145m in length

and connected to the mainland by an approach pier 216m in

length. This pier can accommodate vessels up to 75m long,

with a draft of 4m, on the W side. The E side of this pier provides a deep-water berth handling vessels up to 181m in length

and a draft of 8m and is connected with the railway system,

Vessels Berth port side-to.

1.17 Passenger Jetty and a small slipway lie close SW from Second Pier. 

1.17 Cargo can also be worked from the roadstead anchorage

NNW of Samiani Island.

1.17 Due to the narrow entrance of the approach channel between

Samiani Shoal and Samiani Island North Light, all vessels are

restricted to a beam no more than 28.4m. 

1.17 Aspect.—In addition to the landmarks and navigational aids

mentioned for the S approaches to the Gulf of Kutch, a conspicuous chimney, 101m high, lies about 5.5 miles SW of Humani Point. A light is shown from the top of a building, 50m

high, lying close NE of the chimney. 

1.17 Samiani Island North Light is shown from a white concrete
Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 15

Pub. 173

tower with black bands standing at the NE edge of the drying

reef. 

1.17 Samiani Island Center Light is shown from a white circular

stone tower near the center of Samiani Island; a tomb, with a

spire 27.1m high, lies close N. 

1.17 Okha Point and Samiani Island have been reported to be

good radar targets at 12 to 15 miles. 

1.17 Mariners are advised to keep well clear of Gurur Shoal.

1.17 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels greater

than 350 gross tons and is available during daylight hours only.

Vessels should signal their ETA 24 hours before arrival,

amending the time as necessary.

1.17 Pilots boards about 1.25 miles NNW of Samiani Island Center Light, although caution is necessary as a dangerous wreck

lies close N of the pilot boarding position. Vessels should not

proceed farther until the arrival of the pilot. During the Northeast Monsoon, a vessel should be in the above position 1.5

hours before HW or at LW; during the Southwest Monsoon

vessels shoyld be in the above position 0.5 hour before HW or

1.5 hours before LW.

1.17 Signals.—There is no Coast Radio Station. Messages should

be sent via Bahrain or Singapore Radio. 

1.17 Storm signals are displayed at Okha; the General System is

used. Further information on these storm signals may be found

in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

1.17 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channels 1, 10, 14, and 16

2. Telephone: 91-2892-262001

3. Facsimile: 91-2892-262002

1.17 Anchorage.—Vessels of any length and draft up to 9m can

obtain anchorage in the outer roadstead, in depths of about

12m, sand and broken shell, with Samiani Island Center Light

bearing 171°, distant about 1.2 miles.

1.17 Vessels with a draft of not more than 4.9m and a length of

less than 160m can anchor SE of Okha Point. 

1.17 Directions.—Three channels lead to Okha, two from the N

and one from the S of Samiani Island. The E channel of the two

from the N is buoyed, considered safe, and generally used.

Strong tidal currents flow across this channel and it should not

be attempted without local knowledge. 

1.17 The best time to enter and leave the port is about the time of

slack water, when the tidal currents on each side of the island

are comparatively slack and a vessel may take a sheer while entering or leaving. At other times there is a strong race N and S

of Samiani Island. There is a heavy tide rip on all the shoals,

especially on the ebb. 

1.17 The E channel is approached to pass between Samiani North

Light and Lighted Buoy No. 2; then bringing the NE corner of

Sayaji Pier in line with the 10.4m high beacon, black disc top

marked, lying on Adatra Point, bearing about 207°; this leads

1.17Samiani Island North Light

Samiani Island Center Light
16 Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 

Pub. 173

through the fairway with a least depth of 4.9m in the channel. 

1.17 The W of the two channels from the N leads close NW of

Samiani Island. It is seldom used and should not be attempted

without local knowledge. The leading marks for this channel

are two black beacons on Humani Point. These beacons, in line

bearing 231°, lead through the fairway of this channel in a least

depth of 3.5m. 

1.17 The W channel, locally known as the Southern Channel,

leads between Okha and Samiani Island. The leading marks for

this channel are two beacons which lie 0.3 mile apart, 1.3 miles

ENE of Padmatirth Point. In line bearing 116°, they lead

through the W channel in a least depth of 3.7m. Strong tidal

currents flow across and the channel is extremely narrow and

difficult. It is only used by coasters and small craft with local

knowledge.

1.17 The continuation of all three channels S lead to anchorage

and moorings SE of Okha Point.

The Gulf of Kutch—South Coast—Okha to Bet

Shankhodhar Island and Pindara Bay

1.18 Bet Shankhodhar Island (Beyt Shankhodar) lies with

its NW extremity, Padmatirth Point, about 1 mile SE of Okha

Point. The island is mainly composed of sand hills on its N

part, and formation of a rocky tableland on its SW part. There

are some clumps of coconut and a few other trees; the rest of

the island consists of open jungle with thorny scrub.

1.18 Padmatirth Point, a small bluff tableland about 9m high, becomes an islet at highest spring tides. A small, white domed

tomb lies on the point, with another tomb 0.8 mile E of it.

1.18 Bet (Beyt), a town with a pilgrim resort, lies 0.5 mile S of

Padmatirth Point and is surrounded by many temples and

shrines. Dwarkadish Temple, a large square building near the

center of the town, is most prominent. There is a small jetty at

the town. 

1.18 Hanuman Point (22°28'N., 69°09'E.), the E extremity of the

island, is composed mainly of sand hills on its NE part. Hanuman Temple, about 0.8 mile W of the point, is the only building

on this part of the island.

1.18 Hanumandauda Reef lies on the foul ground extending about

1 mile N from the NE shore of Bet Shankhodhar Island. 

1.18 Paga Reef, extending between 2.5 to 5.5 miles E of Hanuman Point, has a sand ridge on its SW side which covers only

at HWS. The red sector of Samiani Center Light covers Paga

Reef between the bearings of 260° and 290°.

1.18 Positra Point (22°25'N., 69°12'E.) lies about 3.8 miles SE of

Hanuman Point; the village of Positra lies 2 miles SW of the

point.

1.18 Anchorage.—During W gales, sheltered anchorage may be

obtained about 0.5 mile E of Bet Shankhodhar Island, with Hanuman Point bearing 334°; E of this position the bottom is

rocky. Detached 5.5m patches lie about 1.8 miles ENE and 2

miles E of Hanuman Point. 

1.18 The tidal currents at the anchorage flow S with the flood and

N with the ebb, attaining a rate of 1.3 knots at neaps and 1.5

knots at springs.

1.18 Directions.—Vessels proceeding to the anchorage can pass

either E or W of Chandri Reef. Vessels passing E of the reef

should, when the village of Positra. lying on 20m high ground

bears 180°, steer for it until Samiani Center Light bears 275°,

when course may be altered towards the anchorage. 

1.18 Vessels passing W of Chandri Reef should, from a position

about 0.8 mile N of Samiani Center Light, steer E to pass clear

N of Chandri Rock and a shoal patch about 0.3 mile N of it.

The tidal current in this vicinity flows E and W at rates between 2.5 to 3 knots. Following this course, when Positra village bears 180°, steer for it and proceed, as described above,

for the anchorage. 

1.18 Positra Bay (22°26'N., 69°09'E.) is entered W between the

SE point of Bet Shankhodhar Island and Positra Point; the bay

is very shallow and dries in places. Local knowledge is necessary when navigating in the vicinity. 

The Gulf of Kutch—South Coast—Pindara Bay

and Approaches

1.19 The summit of Ajad Island is 8 miles SE of Positra

Point and in line with Great Peak, the highest summit of Barda

Hills, 35 miles SE, bearing 140°, which leads close NE of Paga

Reef. 

1.19 The SE bluff of the Okhamandal Peninsula, 37m high and

9.5 miles SSW of Positra Point, seen between two islets of

Merodi Bet, bearing about 205°, leads close SE of Paga Reef.

1.19 Boria Reef, which dries, lies at the E edge of foul ground extending E from Positra Point; a small reef lies about 0.8 mile

N, with a 3.7m shoal patch about 0.5 mile W. There is a deep

channel between Paga Reef and Boria Reef; however, local

knowledge is necessary when navigating in the vicinity. 

1.19 Bural Reef (Chank Reef) (22°30'N., 69°19'E.), an extensive

drying coral reef, is steep-to on its N side. The reef extends

about 10 miles from E to W and 9 miles from N to S.

1.19 A stranded wreck, which has been reported to give a good radar response, lies S of the NW point; another wreck lies about

1 mile S. A light is shown and a racon transmits from a round

tower, 12m high, on the NW side of Bural Reef. 

1.19 Mitha Chusna (Chusra Bet) is a small rocky islet, with another islet close to it, lying at the S point of Bural Reef.

1.19 Chank Island (Chank Tapu), lying 3 miles E of Nora Island,

is small and wooded. Chank Tapu Light is shown from a white,

square, concrete tower with black bands at the edge of Bural

Reef, 1 mile NNE of Chank Island. 

1.19 Bhaidar Island (Baidar Tapu) lies 3 miles NE of Mitha Chusna, is sandy on its W part, and is covered with mangroves. Nora Island (Nora Tapu) lies 3 miles NE of Bhaidar Island and is

low and covered with mangroves. The highest group of trees lie

on its E side; the N side is sandy. 

1.19 Pindara Bay is large and shallow. Its head forms a salt marsh,

which dries out to a distance of 1.5 miles, but covers at HWS

tides. The head is almost impassable and extends S forming the

E side of the Okhamandal Peninsula. The W limit of the Saushtra coast extends ENE to the head of the Gulf of Kutch. Shiyardi Bet marks the E entrance to the bay; Merodi Bet the W

entrance to the bay.

1.19 Anchorage.—Anchorage for a small vessel with local

knowledge can be obtained 0.5 mile E of Merodi Bet and also

on its W side, in depths of 11 to 16.5m, mud, sheltered from all

winds. This anchorage can be approached by the deep channel

E of Paga Reef.

1.19 Ajad (Ajar), a bluff island 21m high at its S extremity, lies 3

miles N of Shiyardi Bet. The ruins of an old tower lie high on
Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 17

Pub. 173

the summit of a round hill at the S point of the island. Although

the island is surrounded a by rocky reef and dangers, there are

deep channels N and W of the reef; several dangers exist in the

fairway of the W channel. Local knowledge is essential in navigating in the vicinity. 

1.19 Small vessels may anchor, in a depth of 7m, mud, close W of

the NW edge of Bural Reef. Vessels are cautioned to avoid

shoals extending NW and SW from the NW edge of the reef.

On the E and SE sides of Bural Reef, there is good shelter from

W winds; however, vessels anchoring E of the reef should

avoid Bubasir Rock off its E end.

1.19 A vessel may anchor, in a depth of about 15m, mud, near the

edge of the shoal with the trees on Chank Island bearing 271°

distant about 2 miles, or farther SE, in a depth of 12m, with the

trees bearing 293°, distant about 3 miles, where the tidal flow

is NW on the ebb and SE on flood. Another anchorage lies, in a

depth of about 9m, mud, 2 miles SE of Chank Island. 

1.19 During the Southwest Monsoon, large local vessels seek

shelter on the lee side of Chank Island. 

1.19 Directions.—Vessels proceeding to anchor on the E side of

Bural Reef and passing N of the reef should keep a good lookout for the trees on Nora Island and Chank Island and maintain

a distance of about 3 miles from these islands. 

1.19 Caution.—Along the N face of Bural Reef, the rate of tidal

flow varies between 4 to 6 knots, causing heavy tide rips off the

NE end. 

1.19 Between Bural Reef, Chandri Reef, and Paga Reef, the uneven bottom causes overfalls and tide rips which at springs are

alarming to a stranger. Kudda Reefs consist of three detached

drying reefs centered about 4 miles NE of Ajad, with a channel

between Bural Reef having a least depth of 7.3m in the fairway.

A steep-to submerged rock extends SE from Bural Reef. 

1.19 Investigator Reef (22°36'N., 69°33'E.), with a least depth of

8m, lies near the center of the Gulf of Kutch, about 8 miles

ENE of Chank Island Light. 

The Gulf of Kutch—South Coast—Salaya Harbor

1.20 Salaya Harbor (22°26'N., 69°33'E.) is entered between the drying reefs extending NE from Dhani Island

(22°24'N., 69°33'E.) and SW from Karumbhar Island. The harbor extends about 6 miles SE, with an average width of 0.7 to

0.8 mile. The continuation of the harbor S is Salaya Creek.

Blunt Channel, an easterly continuation of the channel for

small craft, leads S of Karumbhar Island and into Pathfinder

Inlet. Blunt Channel is narrow, tortuous, and difficult to recognize when the reefs and mud flats are covered.

1.20 Storm signals are shown at Salaya; the Brief System is used.

Further information on these storm signals may be found in

Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic

Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.” 

1.20 The harbor entrance is not easily identified when the reefs

that extend from the islands are covered. 

1.20 Dhani Island is a sand and mud flat, fringed with mangrove

scrub. The island, with the exception of some sand ridges at its

N end, is submerged at HWS. The coral reef surrounding the

island extends from 1 mile to 1.5 miles NE from its NE side

and dries 3m.

1.20 Kalubhar Tapu (Karumbhar Island) is similar in composition

to Dhani Island. A low ridge of sand, covered with low scrub,

extends along the N side of the island. Kalubhar Reef (Karumbhar Reef), extending about 1.3 miles from its N and SW sides,

covers at half tide, and consists of hard dead coral, with flats of

very soft mud in places. 

1.20 Sykes Point lies at the junction of Salaya Creek and Blunt

Channel. A pier extends N from the point; boats and lighters

can go alongside for 2 hours on either side of HW, after which

the reef at the head of the pier dries.

1.20 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Salaya Harbor is 5.3m

at MHWS and 4.9m at MHWN. 

1.20 The tidal currents in Salaya Harbor set SE with the flood and

NW with the ebb, attaining a maximum velocity of 2 knots at

the entrance to the harbor. 

1.20 At a distance of 2 to 3 miles outside the entrance, the tidal

currents set E with the flood and W with the ebb, attaining a

velocity of 1 knot at neaps. 

1.20 Depths—Limitations.—The harbor has depths of 10 to 25m

in the entrance, gradually shoaling to 9.1m about 5 miles up the

harbor.

1.20 A bar of soft mud extends across the approach. The fairway

in the approach has a least depth of 8.8m. Taylor Shoal, with a

depth of 6.9m, lies on the bar, about 3.3 miles WNW of the W

extremity of Karumbhar Island. Hand Shoals consist of two

8.2m patches lying about 0.5 mile SSW and 0.8 mile SSE, respectively, of Taylor Shoal.

1.20 Nora Rock, with a least depth of 2.1m, coral, lies on the E

side of the harbor, about 1.5 miles SW of the W extremity of

Karumbhar Island. A tongue, with a least depth of 6.7m, extends about 0.5 mile W from Nora Rock, and constricts the

channel to a width of less than 0.2 mile. 

1.20 Aspect.—Kalubhar Tapu Light is shown from a circular

stone tower, 14m high, at the W extremity of Kalubhar Tapu.

1.20 Wooden pole beacons, 0.6m high, mark the edges of the

reefs on both sides of the channel. They are intended for the

guidance of local craft, and cannot be relied upon as they are

not always standing. Similar beacons mark the entrance and

head of Salaya Creek. 

1.20 A pair of white stone beacons, 2.4m high, and in line bearing

302°, are situated about 2.5 and 3 miles, respectively, W of

Kalubhar Tapu Light. 

1.20 A similar pair of beacons, in line bearing 164° and about

0.35 mile apart, are situated on the W side of the harbor, about

2 miles SE of the above pair. 

1.20 The town of Salaya (22°19'N., 69°36'E.), at the head of Salaya Creek, is closely built with small stone houses and surrounded by a wall about 12m high. 

1.20 Anchorage.—Large vessels can obtain anchorage in Salaya

Harbor, in a depth of about 14.6m, in the outer or inner anchorage. The outer anchorage is situated about 0.8 mile NNW of

Nora Rock. The inner anchorage is situated about 2 miles S of

Kalubhar Tapu Light.

1.20 Directions.—Deep-draft vessels approaching from NW, after passing Chank Island Light, steer for Kalubhar Tapu Light

bearing 128°, keeping on this course until the SE beacon of the

302° range bears 114° ; then steer for the beacon on that bearing until Kalubhar Tapu Light bears 114°. Steer for the light on

that bearing, passing between Taylor and Hand Shoals, until

the beacons in the S part of the harbor are in range 158°; then

steer on this range to the anchorage.
18 Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 

Pub. 173

1.20 Deep-draft vessels without local knowledge should not proceed S of Nora Rock.

1.20 Light-draft vessels continue on the 158° range until the beacon in the NW part of the harbor are in range 302° astern; the

latter range leads to the inner anchorage. 

The Gulf of Kutch—South Coast—Pathfinder

Inlet

1.21 Pathfinder Inlet (22°28'N., 69°40'E.), between

Kalubhar Reef and Narara Reef, is about 0.2 to 0.3 mile wide,

with depths of 24m in the entrance, decreasing to 10m about

1.5 miles within the entrance. The entrance is marked by lighted beacons on each side. Ambla Hill, 28m high, is conspicuous

about 5 miles S of the entrance.

1.21 Tilburn Shoal, with a depth of 7m, lies about 1.5 miles NE of

the N extremity of Kalubhar Tapu (Kalubhar Island). A detached reef, which dries 1.2m, lies on the E side of the entrance

to the inlet.

1.21 Anchorage.—During the Southwest Monsoon, sheltered anchorage can be found, in a depth of 18m, mud, about 0.8 mile

N of the inlet entrance, under the lee of Kalubhar Tapu. A

small vessel, with local knowledge, can anchor, in a depth of

20m, about 1 mile within the entrance. Tidal currents at the latter anchorage attain a maximum velocity of 3 knots.

1.22 Vadinar Offshore Oil Terminal (Vaadinaar Terminal)

(22°31'N., 69°42'E.), (World Port Index No. 48615) consists of

three Single Buoy Mooring (SBM) terminals with discharging

facilities plus an Oil Jetty for crude and product tankers with a

Service Pier for barges and tugs, is situated at about 8 miles NE

of Kalubhar Tapu Light. The terminal functions under the jurisdiction of Kandla Port Trust.

SBM1 can accommodate tankers up to 300,000 dwt, with a

length of 350m, a beam of 56m, and a maximum draft of 23m.

SBM2 will accommodate tankers up to 315,000 dwt, with a

length of 362m, a beam of 60m , and a maximum draft of 23m.

SBM3 (Essar Offshore Oil Terminal) can accommodate tankers up to 325,000 dwt, with a length of 350m,; there are no beam

or draft restrictions.

An oil jetty about 3 miles away from SBM3 can accommodate

vessels up to 110,000 dwt, with a length of 245m and a maximum draft of 15m. A nearby service pier for barges and tugs can

accommodate a maximum length of 150m; a 3-ton mobile crane

is available.

1.22 Submarine oil pipelines are laid between Narara Bet and the

SBMs. Crude oil discharged from the tankers is stored in a tank

farm at Vadinar, S of Narara Bet, which is then pumped to a refinery 260 miles inland.

1.22 A conspicuous water tower lies at Vadinar, about 4 miles S

of the root of the pipeline. 

1.22 It has been reported (2007) that when lighterage operations

in the area located 22 miles W of Malabar Point (see paragraph

2.27) have been suspended due to the conditions associated

with the Southwest Monsoon, the lighterage operations take

place about 5 miles WNW of the Vadinar Offshore Oil Terminal in an area bounded by lines joining the following positions: 

a. 22°34.5'N, 69°38.0'E.

b. 22°33.1'N, 69°38.0'E.

c. 22°30.0'N, 69°37.0'E.

d. 22°30.0'N, 69°36.0'E.

e. 22°33.2'N, 69°36.0'E.

1.22 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory; pilots board vessels, as

follows: 

1. SBM—position 22°33'02.4''N, 69°37'54.0''E.

2. Jetty—position 22°28'33.0''N, 69°39'48.0''E.

1.22 Regulations.—The vessel’s ETA should be sent to the harbormaster at Kandla and the vessel’s local agent 72 hours, 48

hours, and 24 hours in advance. When within VHF range, vessels should contact Vadinar Port Control on VHF channel 12 or

16 to receive berthing instructions. At least 3 hours prior to arrival vessels should contact Vadinar Port Control on VHF

channel 12 and the terminal on VHF channel 6.

1.22 A listening watch should be maintained on VHF channels 6,

12, and 16 at all times.

1.22 Vessels are berthed during daylight hours only but may unberth at any time. 

1.22 Contact Information.—The terminal can be contacted, as

follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channels 6 and 16

2. Telephone: 91-2833-256749

3. Facsimile: 91-2833-256540

1.22 The Port Authority can be contacted, as follows: 

1. Telephone: 91-288-241777

2. Mobile: 91-288-25153618 

3. Facsimile: 91-288-241779

4. Email: votl@essar.com

1.22 Directions.—Vessels should berth at the SBMs at slack water or during an ebb tide, approaching from W. Due to the insufficient sea room, berthing attempts should not be made from

E.

1.22 Anchorage.—VLCCs awaiting pilot or berth at the SBMs

should anchor in position 22°33'N, 69°38'E, in a depth of 33m,

mud with broken shells. It is prohibited to anchor within 2

miles of the SBMs, as charted. 

The Gulf of Kutch—South Coast—Sikka Creek

Entrance

1.23 Sikka Creek (Sikka Kari) (22°29'N., 69°47'E.) is entered between Goos Reef and Narara Reef, about 1.5 miles W.

Sikka (22°26'N., 69°50'E.) lies about 5 miles SE of the entrance. 

1.23 Storm signals are shown at Sikka; the Brief System is used.

Further information on these storm signals may be found in

Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic

Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

1.23 Goos Reef, a large drying coral reef, has a conspicuous long

sand bank on it which dries before the reef itself. A white concrete beacon lies on the SW edge of Goos Reef. Narara Reef, a

coral reef which covers at 0.8m, fringes Narara Bet, and extends about 2 miles N and NE of the island. The seaward edges

of all reefs are generally steep-to; during the Southwest Monsoon, there are heavy breakers over the off-lying reefs. 

1.23 Tides—Currents.—Outside the entrance to Sikka Creek,

the flood current sets E and ebb current sets W, attaining a

maximum velocity of about 3.5 knots. Within Sikka Creek and

Sikka Channel, the tidal currents generally set in a direction

parallel to the axis of the creek and channel, respectively, attaining a maximum velocity of about 2 knots. 
Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 19

Pub. 173

1.23 The tidal rise at Sikka Creek is 4.8m at MHHWS and 2.6m

at MHWN.

1.23 Depths—Limitations.—Siri Reef, a drying coral reef, lies

about 0.7 mile SW of Goos Reef and is marked on its E side by

a white beacon. In 1987, it was reported that a beacon lies on

the W side of Siri Reef, with another beacon on the reef 0.35

mile SW. A small detached drying reef lies about 0.2 mile NW

of Siri Reef. A 3.7m patch lies about 0.2 mile ENE of the SE

extremity of Siri Reef, in the deep channel between Goos Reef

and Siri Reef.

1.23 Sikka Channel has a least depth of 8.2m and a general width

of about 183m.

1.23 Ammonia Discharge Berth, located about 0.5 mile SSW of

the charted Beacon A, consists of a concrete island jetty joined

to the shore ESE by a breakwater. The berth has a length of

220m, with a pair of mooring dolphins at the ends, and has an

alongside depth of 11m. A road to the shore runs over the

breakwater. 

1.23 A disused jetty is located about 0.5 mile SSE of Ammonia

Discharge Berth. An overhead ropeway extends ESE form the

disused jetty to the shore

1.23 Aspect.—The entrance channel, leading between the reefs

into the anchorage, is marked by range beacons.

1.23 The channel is marked by IALA Maritime Buoyage System

(Region A), and leads from the fairway (red can) buoy moored

1.3 miles NNW of Siri Reef. The channel becomes narrow inward, with a least depth of 8.2m. It is reported that buoys may

liable to drag in strong winds. 

1.23 Two chimneys, 72m and 70m high, stand in Sikka; two other

chimneys, 130m high, stand about 0.6 mile SW of the first two

chimneys. A tower, 25m high, stands close offshore at Sikka. 

1.23 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots come from Okha

in a tug, usually boarding ships 2 hours before HW during daylight hours only. There are no pilots available for the stretch between Pirothan Island and the anchorages off Kalyan Light;

however, local guides are provided upon request. 

1.23 The pilot should be requested 48 hours in advance. The pilot

boards about 1.5 miles S of Fairway Lighted Buoy. 

1.23 Regulations.—All vessels are to maintain a listening watch

on VHF channels 11 and 13 during oil-lightering operations

from May to October. 

1.23 Anchorage.—Sikka Creek provides sheltered anchorage, in

a depth of 11m, about 0.5 mile within the entrance, between

the W end of Goos Reef and Siri Reef. 

1.23 An outer anchorage, in depths from 14 to 20m, is established

about 2.5 miles N of Siri Reef for vessels waiting to berth

alongside and for berthing at Vadinar Offshore Oil Terminal

(paragraph 1.22). Vessels up to 165m long, with a maximum

draft of 7.9m, can use this anchorage. The anchorage is exposed to the Southwest Monsoon; in 1987, it was reported to

be congested. A dangerous wreck lies in the S part of the anchorage area. 

1.23 Directions.—Vessels proceeding to Sikka Creek should not

proceed into depths of less than 27m until the lighted entrance

buoy is sighted. This buoy should be approached in a direction

from the W through N to NE until on the entrance range; then

steer on the entrance range, between Siri Reef and Goos Reef,

to the anchorage, taking care to avoid the 3.6m shoal, marked

by a buoy, about 0.2 mile E of Siri Reef. Caution should be taken when entering Sikka Creek during a strong ebb or flood

tide. 

1.23 Caution.—Berthing is permitted only from 2 hours before

until 2 hours after HW. The use of this berth is dangerous during the Southwest Monsoon.

1.23 In 1987, it was reported that vessels berth port side-to and

leave stern first because of insufficient turning room off the

berth. Another berth for discharging ammonia was in operation

the same year. 

1.24 Jamnagar Terminal (Reliance Jamnagar Terminal)

(22°30'N., 69°50'E.), which is part of Sikka, comprises three

SPMs about 9 miles NNW of Sikka, RPL Jetty and the four

tanker berths located in the channel between Goos Reef and

Munde Reef, about 3.75 miles N of Sikka. The terminal handles crude oil discharging at the SPMs and petroleum products,

chemicals, and LPG at RPL Jetty. 

Winds—Weather.—The terminal is exposed to W winds;

Southwest Monsoon conditions may affect operations from the

beginning of May until the end of September.

Tides—Currents.—Currents at the terminal normally do

not exceed 2 knots but may reach 3 knots under certain conditions.

The tidal range at springs is about 6.5m.

Depths—Limitations.—The least depth at SPM-1 is 32m;

the least depth at SPM-2 is 30m. The is a least depth of 28m in

the approach to SPM-1. SPM-5 is reported (2007) to be located

about 2.5 miles E of SPM-1. 

The least depth in the channel to RPL Jetty is 13.9m; a minimum underkeel clearance of 1.4m must be maintained when

transiting the channel; an underkeel clearance of at least 1.0m

is required at the berths.

Berth information is given in the accompanying table titled

Jamnagar Terminal—Berth Information.

Jamnagar Terminal—Berth Information

Berth Length Depth 

alongside Vessel size

Maximum

Vessel Remarks

length Draft

Offshore SPMs

SPM-1 — 32m 20,000 to 

350,000 dwt 345m 22.5m

SPM-2 — 30m 20,000 to 

350,000 dwt 345m 22.5m
20 Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 

Pub. 173

Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels using the

terminal. Pilots board, as follows:

1. Tanker Berths—position 22°32.5'N, 69°45.8'E.

2. SPMs—position 22°36'N, 69°47'E. 

Regulations.—Vessels are required to inform the terminal of

their ETA at the pilot boarding position 72 hours in advance by

one of the following methods:

1. E-mail: port_operation@ril.com

2. Facsimile: 9-288-6612699 

The ETA should be confirmed 48 hours, 24 hours, and 12

hours prior to arrival. All times are to be given in local time.

At least 3 hours prior to arrival, vessels should contact Port

Control on VHF channel 16 or 71. Port Control will assign a

working channel for use within the terminal area and will give

the vessel berthing instructions. A listening watch should be

maintained on VHF channels 16 and 71.

Vessels at the SPMs must also maintain a listening watch on

the cargo control room on a frequency assigned by the terminal. This frequency is normally VHF channel 68 or 71.

Vessels berthed at tanker berths must maintain a listening

watch on VHF channels 16 and 71 while berthed at the jetty.

The following restrictions in effect at the SPMs:

1. Berthing at the SPMs is done during daylight hours

only

2. During the monsoon season (May 1 until September

30), berthing will be done on the flood tide during daylight

hours only.

3. Berthing is suspended if maximum sustained winds

speeds exceed 30 knots or wave heights exceed 1.8m.

4. Discharging is suspended if maximum sustained

winds speeds exceed 35 knots

5. Vessels unmoor at the discretion of the master/pilot if

sustained wind speeds exceed 40 knots of wave heights exceed 3m.

6. If wind speed is greater than 20 knots, berthing is undertaken when the wind and tide are in the same direction.

The following restrictions may be in effect at RPL Jetty:

1. Partly-loaded vessels arriving for further loading may

SPM-5 No information as of December, 2007 

RPL Jetty

Berth A 27m — See 

Remarks 105 to 195m 12.5m

Length of berth increased by four 

breasting dolphins and several additional mooring dolphins. Maximum 

vessel size of 40,000 dwt for LPG 

vessels and 60,000 dwt for product 

carriers.

Berth B 27m — 86,500 dwt 108 to 228m 13.5m Length of berth increased by four 

breasting dolphins.

Berth C 27m — 112,500 dwt 160 to 246m 13.5m

Length of berth increased by four 

breasting dolphins. Vessel lengths of 

160 to 228m accommodated during 

the monsoon season. Maximum 

vessel size of 86,500 dwt during the 

monsoon season.

Berth D 27m — 120,000 dwt 160 to 252m 14.5m

Length of berth increased by four 

breasting dolphins and several additional mooring dolphins. Vessel 

lengths of 160 to 246m accommodated during the monsoon season. Maximum vessel size of 112,500 dwt 

during the monsoon season.

Jamnagar Terminal—Berth Information

Berth Length Depth 

alongside Vessel size

Maximum

Vessel Remarks

length Draft

RPL Jetty—Night Berthing/Unberthing Restrictions

Berth Situation

Maximum

Length Draft

Berth A Berthing 170m 8.0m

Unberthing 195m 12.0m

Berth B Berthing 185m 8.0m

Unberthing 200m 12.0m

Berth C Berthing 195m 8.0m

Unberthing 210m 12.0m

Berth D Berthing 195m 8.0m

Unberthing 220m 12.0m
Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 21

Pub. 173

not have a draft exceed 10m when berthing at Berth A or a

draft exceeding 10.5m when berthing at Berth B, Berth C, or

Berth D.

2. Loading/discharging is suspended when sustained

wind speeds exceed 35 knots.

3. The maximum sustained wind speeds for berthing are

27 knots during the day and 20 knots at night.

4. Night berthing and unberthing restrictions are given in

the accompanying table titled RPL Jetty—Night Berthing/

Unberthing Restrictions.

1.24 Aspect.—A buoyed channel leads ESE from Fairway Lighted Buoy. Range lights, in line bearing 130°, lead between Goos

Reef and Munde Reef to RPL Jetty. 

Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots board, during daylight hours only, as follows;

1. Sikka—22°30.1'N, 69°46.0'E.

2. SPMs—22°32.5'N, 69°45.8'E.

3. RPL Jetty—22°36'N, 69°47'E. 

1.24 Contact Information—The facility can be contacted, as follows: 

1. Call sign: Reliance Port Control

2. VHF: VHF channels 16, 68, and 71

3. Telephone: 91-286-6612600

91-286-6612605

91-286-6612610

4. Facsimile: 91-286-6612699

5. E-mail: port_operation@ril.com

1.24 Anchorage.—The VLCC Anchorage lies between 2 and 6

miles ENE of SPM-2, as best seen on the chart, in depths of

28.5 to 36.0m.

1.24 Anchorage can also be obtained 3 miles W of SPM-1, in a

depth of 36m, and in the tanker anchorage off the mouth of

Sikka Creek, about 3 miles SSW of SPM-1; this anchorage was

previously described in paragraph 1.23.

1.24 Caution.—The outer buoys of the buoyed channel leading to

RPL Jetty are liable to drag in bad weather.

Sikka Creek to Bedi

1.25 Dera Island, a mangrove islet with a range of low sandhills, lies about 2.5 miles NE of the N extremity of Goos

Reef. The NW end of this islet is a bluff about 4.6m high. A

drying reef extends about 1.5 miles W, 0.8 mile N, and 4.5

miles NE from the NW extremity of Dera Island.

1.25 Pirotan Island (22°36'N., 69°57'E.), about 6.5 miles NE of

the NW extremity of Dera Island, is a good landmark as the

trees on it are not allowed to be cut down. The island lies about

1 mile from the mainland, to which it is connected by a drying

coral reef. 

1.25 Pirotan Island Light is shown from a pyramidal concrete

tower, with red bands, on the NW extremity of the island. Another light is shown from an iron framework beacon, on a stone

base, on the edge of the reef about 1.5 miles NE of Pirotan Island Light. 

1.25 Jindra Bet (Pirotan Swamp), with its NW extremity about 4

miles W of Pirotan Island, consists of sand and mud flats, is

fringed by mangroves, and is liable to flood. The N side of the

island consists of sand dunes, 1 to 3m high. 

1.25 Rozi Island, rocky and 11.3m high, lies about 5 miles SE of

Pirotan Island. A group of four conspicuous radio towers, having an elevation of 44m, lies on the E side of Rozi Island, and a

conspicuous water tower with an elevation of 38m is situated

on the SE side of the island. 

1.25 A radio mast, with an elevation of 76m and marked by an obstruction light, lies 6.3 miles SE of Rozi Mata Temple. 

Bedi (22°31'N., 70°02'E.)

World Port Index No. 48650

1.26 Bedi Docks, about 1 mile NW of the village of Bedi,

form the port for Jamnagar, about 3.5 miles SE, with which

they are connected by a railway. The port is an all-weather

lighterage port open throughout the year. The basin at Bedi

Docks dries at half-tide. Cargo is worked at the anchorage.

1.26 A stone pier, the seaward end of which covers at half tide,

extends about 0.8 mile NNW from the N end of Rozi Island.

Bedi Creek, providing access to Bedi Docks, is entered W of

the stone pier. Tidal currents in the creek have a maximum velocity of 2.5 knots in spring tides. 

1.26 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at the anchorage is 5.5m

at springs and 3m at neaps. 

1.26 Aspect.—Rozi Mata Temple (22°33'N., 70°03'E.) lies at

the N end of Rozi Island. Rozi Mata Light is shown from a

white circular tower, 15m high, on the NW corner of the temple courtyard. A light is shown from the head of the stone pier,

about 1 mile NNW of the temple. Bedi Bandar Light is shown

from a white metal framework tower lying about 1 mile SSW

of Rozi Jetty. 

1.26 A light is shown from Kalyan Beacon, on the NE edge of the

drying reef, about 1.8 miles N of the stone pier. 

1.26 Two radio masts, 36.5m high, about 3.5 miles S of Rozi Mata, and Pratap Clock Tower, about 1.25 miles farther SE, are

conspicuous. 

1.26 Pilotage.—Not compulsory but local guides are available.

Pilots are available Pirotan Lighthouse to Rozi Anchorage, Pilot request to be made through PORTAL BEDI; the pilot

boards off Pirotan Light.

1.26 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channel 16

2. Telephone: 91-288-2755106

91-79-23238346

3. Facsimile: 91-79-23234703

4. Radio: Bedi Radio (call sign: VUK5)

5. Telegraph: PORTAL BEDI

1.26 Anchorage.—Large vessels may anchor, in 14m, mud,

about 1.5 miles N of Kalyan Beacon. Smaller vessels can anchor, in 5.4m, mud, about 2.5 miles NNE of the N end of Rozi

Mata. 

1.26 Small craft with local knowledge can anchor, in 5.5m, mud,

about 0.5 mile NE of Kalyan Beacon, sheltered from W winds,

which prevail from February through October. There is a white

mooring buoy about 0.8 mile SE of Kalyan Beacon.

1.26 Directions.—Vessels approaching from the W should not alter course S until Kalyan Beacon bears 185°. This will avoid

the reefs and shoals extending offshore between Pirotan Island

and Rozi Island. Vessels entering or leaving the anchorage

should keep N of Ranson Shoal. 

1.26 Caution.—A submerged rock lies about 1.8 miles E of Ka-
22 Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 

Pub. 173

lyan Light, a dangerous wreck about 2 miles NNE, and another

wreck 3 miles NE from the same light. A wreck with a 10m

depth lies about 2 miles ENE of Kalyan Light; another dangerous wreck lies about 1 mile NE of the light. 

1.26 Ranson Shoal, with a least depth of 1.5m, is located about

3.3 miles N of the stone pier. Depths of less than 5.5m extend

about 0.7 mile ESE of the least depth. 

Bedi to Mungra Reef

1.27 The coast between Rozi Mata Temple (22°33'N.,

70°03'E.) and the village of Sachana (Sachara), about 7.5 miles

E, consists of sand and mud flats, fringed with mangroves, and

intersected by creeks.

1.27 A small range of rocky mounds, 12.2 to 15.2m high, fronts

the coast about 3 miles NNE of Sachana. These mounds are

isolated at HWS.

1.27 At Balachadi (Balachiri), about 2.8 miles NNE of Sachana, a

range of hills about 30m high extends SE and terminates rather

abruptly about 1.5 miles from the village. A small conical hill,

detached from the mainland and isolated at HW, lies about 0.8

mile NNE of Balachadi; Aku Pir (Akria Pir), a Mohammedan

building, lies on the summit of the hill. 

1.27 Balachadi Rocks (Balachiri Rocks) (22°41'N., 70°10'E.),

which dry, have been reported to give good radar returns at 9

miles. 

1.27 The NW bastion, 24m high, of the fort at Jodiya (22°42'N.,

70°18'E.), and a house close SE, are conspicuous about 7.5

miles NE of Aku Pir and 2.8 miles inland. These objects are

unmistakably identifiable and can be seen 10 to 12 miles in

clear weather. 

1.27 About 2 miles NW of the fort a light is shown. A light is

shown from the N extremity of the quay wall at Jodiya Bandar

(Bandar). 

1.27 Mungra Reef, at the W edge of the drying coastal reef, lies

with its W edge about 6 miles WNW of Jodiya Bandar. About

0.8 mile within the W extremity of Mungra Reef lies a heap of

sand and shells. This is the first part of the reef that dries, and

the position of the remainder of the reef may be determined

from it. 

1.27 A light stands on a small detached drying reef close S of the

W extremity of Mungra Reef. 

1.27 Anchorage.—Balachiri Roads, NW of Aku Pir, may be approached with Aku Pir bearing 120°, on which bearing anchorage can be taken, in 5.5 to 9.1m, soft mud, according to a

vessel’s draft. The anchorage is protected from NE gales by the

reefs N, but local knowledge is necessary for navigating this

part of the gulf. 

1.27 Anchorage may be taken, in 5.5m, mud, sheltered from

strong NE winds, with the fort at Jodiya bearing 109°, and the

beacon off the W end of Mungra Reef bearing 003°, distant 1.5

miles. 

Head of the Gulf of Kutch

1.28 Little Rann, which flows into the head of the Gulf of

Kutch, is dry during the Northeast Monsoon from November to

February. It is a great inland sea and quite impassable during

the Southwest Monsoon, when the sea is driven many miles E

by the wind. 

1.28 This vast sheet of water is drained by Nakti Creek, Kandla

Creek, and Hanstal Creek. These creeks are subject to the regular tides. The ebb current in Hanstal Creek, because of the large

shallow area which it covers and uncovers, attains a velocity of

6 to 7 knots at its mouth; the ebb current flows longer than the

flood, their durations being about 8 hours and 4 hours, respectively. 

1.28 Between the mouth of Hanstal Creek and the coast on the S

side of the head of the gulf, there is another rann resembling

Little Rann. Its W edge is fringed with mangrove bushes; the

ordinary HW mark extends from the mouth of Hanstal Creek

toward Jodiya. At HW this area is like a large inland sea of

only about 1m depth; in the Southwest Monsoon it is navigated

by boats drawing from 0.9 to 1m.

1.28 About 4.5 miles NNE is Jodiya, a rocky islet, covered with

bushes, lying about 1 mile E of the ordinary HW mark.

1.28 Tides—Currents.—In the W approach to Kandla Creek and

Hanstal Creek, the tidal currents are very irregular and appear

to be greatly influenced by a strong wind from any quarter.

They are strong and gradually increase in velocity to within the

entrance of Hanstal Creek. At Outer Tuna Fairway Buoy, the

velocity is 2.5 knots at springs and 1.5 knots at neaps; at the entrance of Hanstal Creek the velocity is 7 knots at springs and 4

knots at neaps. 

1.28 Caution.—The head of the Gulf of Kutch between Jodiya

and the entrances of Kandla Creek and Hanstal Creek is encumbered with numerous changing shoals. Local knowledge is

necessary while navigating in this part of the gulf. 

1.29 Nakti Creek (22°56'N., 70°09'E.) has almost entirely

silted up and can now be used only by small local craft at HW

proceeding to Tuna Bandar, about 3 miles up the creek on its W

side. 

1.29 The W entrance point of the creek is very low and is covered

with mangrove bushes which are nearly submerged at HW.

Narrow ridges of coarse sand and broken shell, from 0.3 to

1.2m high, front the rann on the W side of the creek. 

1.29 Tekra Islet, about 1.3 miles WNW of the W entrance point of

the creek, consists of mud covered with mangroves. A similar

islet lies about 0.5 mile SE of Tekra Islet. 

1.29 Tekra Light (22°56'N., 70°07'E.) lies about 1.3 miles SW of

the W entrance point of Nakti Creek. The light is shown from

an iron column on a black masonry tower, 14m high, with

white bands, situated on a sandy ridge on the S edge of a mangrove swamp. 

1.29 Beacon G, painted black, surmounted by a rectangular topmark and 13.7m high, lies about 6 miles W of Tekra Light.

1.29 Beacon I, painted black and surmounted by a ball, lies about

3 miles E of Beacon G. 

1.29 Beacon H, painted red, with a diamond topmark and 15m

high, lies about 2.8 miles NE of Tekra Light.

1.29 The channel leading to Tuna Bandar is marked by range beacons.

Kandla (23°02'N., 70°13'E.)

World Port Index No. 48630

1.30 The port of Kandla, on the W bank of Kandla Creek,

about 2.5 miles within its entrance, is a naturally-sheltered har-
Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 23

Pub. 173

bor in all seasons. The approach to Kandla leads W of Khara

Dhada and Mid Shoals, through Sogal Channel, then N through

a buoyed channel passing over Kandla Bar to the creek.

1.30 The Kandla port jurisdiction extends to Kalubhar Tapu

marking its W limits, which include Pathfinder Inlet, Vadinar

Offshore Oil Terminal, Rozi Anchorage, and Hantal Creek. 

1.30 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Kandla is 6m at MHWS, and 4m at MHWN.

1.30 On Kandla Bar the flood current sets NE with a velocity of 2

to 3 knots at springs tides. The flood tidal currents in Kandla

Creek attain maximum velocities of 3 to 4 knots at spring tides. 

1.30 Depths—Limitations.—Kandla is a tidal port; entrance and

departure depend on the tide. Vessels up to 225m in length,

with a maximum draft of 10.2m at HW neaps and 12.5m at

HW springs, can use the port. Maximum permissible drafts are

issued quarterly by the Deputy Conservator. 

1.30 A deep-draft mooring in the harbor can accommodate vessels up to 225.6m in length and 11.3m draft. 

1.30 Mooring berths close NE of the quay can accommodate vessels up to 152.4 and 183m in length and 7 to 8.8m draft. 

1.30 The salt mooring in the N part of the harbor can accommodate vessels up to 183m in length and 8.8m draft. 

1.30 There is a spoil ground, with radius of about 0.5 mile, centered on position 22°52.5'N, 70°09.5'E. 

1.30 Kala Dara Shoal (Kara Dhada Shoal), in the entrance to

Kandla Creek, dries 2.7m and consists of hard dry sand. 

1.30 Sogal Channel leads towards Kandala Creek between Khengarji Bet and Kala Dara Shoal. The channel is dredged and

marked by lighted buoys conforming to the IALA Maritime

Buoyage System (Region A); the buoys are moved frequently

to meet changes in the channel.

1.30 Sathsaida Leading Lights lead through Sogal Channel; a second pair, lying close NNW, leads across the inner bar to Kandala Creek. 

1.30 Kapoor Shoal, about 0.8 mile SE of and parallel to Kala

Dara Shoal, has depths of less than 5.5m and a least depth of

1.2m; it consists of ridges and pinnacles of coarse sand, small

stones, and broken shells. 

1.30 Mid Shoal, which dries 0.7m, lies 0.3 mile N of the NE extremity of Kala Dara Shoal.

1.30 Kandla Bar, at the entrance to Kandla Creek, had a least

depth of 4.3m in 1994. The depth over the bar is subject to constant change.

1.30 Flamingo Flat, a drying mud bank, extends about 2 miles S

from the SW extremity of Sathsaida Bet. 

1.30 The depths over the bar and in Kandla Creek are subject to

constant change and the latest information should be obtained

from the Deputy Conservator, Kandla. 

1.30 The nature of the bottom throughout the creek is coarse sand,

small stones, and broken shell, except in depths of less than

5.5m near the banks, where the bottom is mud. 

1.30 Barry Shoal, on the W side of the harbor and about 0.5 mile

N of the cargo quay, is a ridge with depths of 2.7 to 5.5m. 

1.30 Aspect.—Kandla Creek is entered among mangrove bushes,

between Khengarji Bet and Sathsaida Bet, both of which are

typical rann ground of hard mud flats; it then extends N for

about 7 miles, where the creek forks. Both sides of the creek

are protected by steep mangrove-lined banks, which just cover

at HWS.

 Port Authority of Kandla

http://www.kandlaport.gov.in

Kandla—Berth Information

Berth Length

Maximum Vessel

Remarks

Size Length Draft

Cargo Berths

Berths I-IV

See Note 1.

45,000 dwt

See Note 

2.

9.8m

Berths V-VI 35,000 dwt 9.1m

Berths VII-X 55,000 dwt 12.0m Berth IX and Berth X are container berths.

Berths XI-XII 65,000 dwt 12.5m

Oil Terminal

Berth No. 1 91.4m 40,000 dwt 213.4m 10.4m Chemicals, petroleum products, and edible oil.

Berth No. 2 84.4m 52,000 dwt 183.0m 10.0m Chemicals, petroleum products, and edible oil.

Berth No. 3 91.4m 40,000 dwt 213.4m 10.7m Gasoline and petroleum products.

Berth No. 4 110m 56,000 dwt 216.0m 10.7m LPG and petroleum products.

Berth No. 5 (IFFCO 

Jetty) 110m 45,000 dwt 216.0m 9.5m

Ammonia and phosphoric acid. Strong currents during the ebb have been reported (2007) 

at this berth. 

Berth No. 6 (VJ-IOC) — 45,000 dwt 216.0m 10.1m Petroleum products.

Note 1.—The total berthing length is 2,268m.

Note 2.—Vessels up to 225.5m long can be accommodated.
24 Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 

Pub. 173

1.30 Navinal Point and Bhadreswar Temple have been previously

described in paragraph 1.13 and paragraph 1.15, respectively.

Tekra Light, along with Beacon G, Beacon H, and Beacon I,

have been previously described in paragraph 1.29. 

1.30 Outer Tuna Lighted Buoy (22°51'N., 70°07'E.), painted

red, marks the entrance of the channel to Kandla. 

1.30 In 1980, less water was reported in the entrance to the channel between Kala Dara and Kapoor Shoals. It is cautioned that

the buoys and channels are liable to be moved due to frequent

changes in depths.

1.30 Beacon A, painted black, with a cone topmark and 18m high,

lies about 0.8 mile WNW of the W entrance point of Kandla

Creek. 

1.30 Beacon B, painted black, with a ball topmark and 12m high,

is situated on Sathsaida Bet, about 1.8 miles ENE of Beacon A.

Beacon C and Beacon E, situated about 1.8 and 3.3 miles, respectively, SE of Beacon B, are similar to Beacon B, except

they are surmounted by an inverted cone and a rectangle, respectively, and Beacon E is 9m high. 

1.30 A black masonry radar tower, 29m high, lies close N of the

cargo quay. A water tower, 24m high, lies about 0.5 mile S of

the radar tower. 

1.30 Two framework water towers, each 26m high, are situated

about 0.6 mile WNW and 1.4 miles N, respectively, of the radar tower.

1.30 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory; it is available during

daylight hours only for tankers and 24 hours for all other vessels. The pilot boards 2.5 hours before HW, as follows: 

1. About 1.1 miles SSW of Outer Tuna Lighted Buoy.

2. In the vicinity of Lighted Buoy No. 2 and Lighted

Buoy No. 3.

1.30 Requests for pilots should be sent to the ship’s agent 12

hours in advance. Vessels should contact Kandla Tower via

VHF channel 16.

1.30 Regulations.—Vessels berth at HW only. Tankers or vessels

with an overall length exceeding 189m, with a draft of more

than 8.2m, or with a speed capability of less than 9 knots, may

not enter or leave the port during darkness nor may ships at

moorings be berthed or unberthed except in daylight.

1.30 It was reported (1993) that berthing is restricted to daylight

hours only due to the small number of pilots available and the

poor condition of the lighting on the jetty. The movement of

tankers is also restricted to daylight transit of Sogal Channel.

1.30 It has been reported (2007) that tank vessels 20 years old and

older are not permitted in the port. 

1.30 Vessels should arrive with a minimum of 14 mooring lines,

seven forward and seven aft. It is requested that four to six of

these lines should be completely made of soft rope. The rest

can be wire rope with soft rope ends. 

1.30 Kandla lies in a controlled area where special security regulations are in force; photography of shore installations is forbidden. 

1.30 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. Call sign: Kandla Tower

2. VHF: VHF channels 8 and 16

3. Telephone: 91-2836-221347

4. Facsimile: 91-2836-232040

5. E-mail: kpt@kandlaport.com

1.30 Signals.—The port signal station is situated near the radar

tower. Communication may be made with the signal station by

semaphore and the International Code of Signals by day, and

by flashing light at night. The port is also equipped with VHF. 

1.30 Storm signals are displayed; the General System is used.

Further information on these storm signals may be found in

Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic

Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

1.30 Signals used in the port are given in the Kandla Port Rules

issued by the port administration. 

1.30 A black ball displayed at the masthead of the signal station

indicates a vessel is about to enter or leave the harbor.

1.30 In the event of an outbreak of fire in the port area or on a ship

alongside a berth, a blue square flag by day and two green

lights shown vertically by night will be displayed from the

yardarm of the signal mast. In addition, eight short blasts followed by one long blast will be sounded on the port siren and

repeated at short intervals. 

1.30 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be taken, in 8.2m, coarse

sand, small stones, and broken shell, about 0.4 mile NE of the

oil pier in the N part of the harbor. 

1.30 Vessels liable to quarantine regulations will remain in the

quarantine anchorage, about 1 mile S of Outer Tuna Lighted

Buoy until pratique is granted. Vessels suspected of having minor inectious diseases on board may be brought into the harbor

and anchored or berthed in a suitable quarantine area. 

1.31 Navlakhi (22°57'N., 70°27'E.) (World Port Index No.

48635) is an all-weather lighterage port, with cargo worked at

anchorage by self-propelled barges. The largest vessel accomodated was 24,364 dwt. Navlakhi is approached through Hansthal Creek, which is about 4 miles in length to Sui Creek, with

the port limit beginning at inbound Buoy No. 5. The width of

the entrance to Hansthal Creek has doubled by erosion in the

last 50 years, and is now about 2 miles wide between Sathsaida

Bet and the S coast. The S side of the approach is formed by a

coast fringed with ridges of coarse sand and broken shell, 0.3

to 0.9m high.

1.31 Tides—Currents.—The flood and ebb currents in Hanstal

Creek attain a velocity of 5 knots in the channel between the

mangrove bushes; during freshets, the velocity may sometimes

increase to 7 knots. 

1.31 The tidal rise at Navlakhi is 6.4m at MHWS and 4.1m at

MHWN. 

1.31 Depths—Limitations.—Hansthal Creek lies between

Kapoor Shoal and Singari Shoal to the N, and Baptista Shoals

to the S. Kapoor Shoal was previously described in paragraph

1.30 with Kandla. Singari Shoal, with depths of less than 5m,

extends up to 1.5 miles off the S side of Flamingo Flat. Baptista Shoals, similar in composition to Kapoor Shoal, but with

drying to less than 1m at MLLW, lies about 0.8 mile SE of the

E end of Kapoor Shoal. 

1.31 Depths within Hansthal Creek vary significantly and buoys

are moved frequently to reflect these changes.

1.31 Navlakhi Bet lies on the N side of Sui Creek, at its junction

with Hanstal Creek, about 4 miles NE of the entrance to the latter creek.

1.31 Aspect.—Murga Bet (Murga Island), consisting of several

islets covered with mangroves, lies NE of Hansthal Creek

about 0.8 mile NW of Navlakhi Bet.

1.31 Beacon F, painted black, with a ball topmark and 12m high,
Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 25

Pub. 173

is situated near the SE extremity of Sathsaida Bet.

1.31 Beacon D, painted black, with a diamond topmark and 12m

high, lies about 3 miles W of Beacon F at the S extremity of

Sathsaida Bet.

1.31 Numerous beacons mark the NW and N edge of mangroves

for the entrance into Sui Creek from the NW. 

1.31 Navlakhi Light is shown from a conspicuous steel framework tower, 23.5m high, on the NW extremity of Navlakhi Bet.

1.31 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels with draft

greater than 9.14m. Local pilots can be provided by the Port

Authority for all vessels during daylight hours only. The pilot

will board in position 22°44'N 70°05'E and arrival here should

be 3 hours prior to HW.

1.31 Regulations.—The vessel’s ETA should be provided 24

hours in advance. 

1.31 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows:

1. Radio: VHF channel 16

2. Telephone: 91-2822-220435

3. Facsimile: 91-2822-232470

4. Kandla Coast Radio Station (call sign: VVK)

1.31 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained about 2.3 miles

WSW from Navlakhi Light, in depths of 9 to 12.5m. Only two

vessels at a time can be worked at the anchorage. 

1.31 Additional anchorage can be found in vicinity of Bouy No. 5

in Hansthal Creek in depths of 10 to 12m. The holding ground

in Hanstal Creek is not good, as rock lies a little way beneath

the mud and the strong tidal currents cause a vessel to drag anchor easily.

1.31 Caution.—Buoys in Hansthal Creek follow the Uniform

System of Buoyage, which is obsolete.

1.31 A dangerous wreck, visible, with a depth of less than 2.5m,

lies in the vicinity of position 22°57'N, 70°24'E. 

1.31 Local knowledge is necessary for navigating Hanstal Creek

and its approaches. 

The Gulf of Kutch to Porbandar

1.32 The coast of Kathiawar from Humani Point, the S entrance point of the Gulf of Kutch, to Kachchigadh, about 11.5

miles SW, is composed of low sand hills. Between Kachigadh

and Dwarka Point, about 5.5 miles S, the coast is cliffy, and

thence to Madhi, about 12 miles farther SE, the coast is again

composed of low sand hills. The above coast forms the W side

of a very low peninsula. At HWS tides and during the Southwest Monsoon, this peninsula is separated from the mainland

by Okha Rann, which extends from Madhi in a NNE direction

for about 12 miles to Pindara Bay. 

1.32 A light, with a racon, is shown from a white round concrete

tower with red bands at Kachchigadh. 

1.32 A 30m sand hill with bushes on it lies about 2 miles N of

Kachigadh. 

1.32 Warwala, about 2.5 miles SSE of Kachigadh and 1 mile inland, is a large walled town. A square tower in the town is conspicuous and visible several miles to seaward. 

1.32 Dwarka Point (22°14'N., 68°57'E.) is the W extremity of

the promontory on which the town of Dwarka is situated. A

light is shown from a white square stone tower, 37m high, on

the point. Three chimneys, the tallest beig 70m high, are conspicous near the point.

1.32 Caution.—A dangerous wreck has been reported (2007) to

lie 5.5 miles offshore about 6 miles SW of the light. Another

dangerous wreck lies 4.5 miles offshore about 8 miles S of the

light. 

1.33 Dwarka Temple (Jagat Mandir), a stone structure,

51m high, carved with figures from base to summit, lies within

Dwarka Fort on high ground close to the sea. In clear weather

this temple is conspicuous and can be seen from 17 to 18 miles.

A column lies close to the edge of the cliff a short distance W

of the temple. 

1.33 Rupen Bandar, the port for Dwarka, is shallow and obstructed by rocks at its entrance, about 1 mile N of Dwarka. The

cliffs between Rupen Bandar and Dwarka are about 12m high

and covered with cactus bushes.

1.33 Tidal currents abreast Rupen Bandar set N with the flood, at

a velocity of more than 2 knots, and SSE with the ebb, at about

the same velocity. Farther N, the tidal currents are stronger. 

1.33 Anchorage for large vessels can be taken, in 20 to 22m, sand,

with Dwarka Temple bearing 069°, distant 1.5 miles. The bottom is rocky in the approach to the Gulf of Kutch; several vessels have lost their anchors. 

1.33 Madhi, about 12 miles SE of Dwarka, is a village with a

small dark temple and an old tower lying on elevated rocky

land near the coast. About 4.8 miles NW of Madhi, a fresh-water current flows into the sea during the rainy season. There are

many such streams along the Kathiawar coast, which cause

breaks in the coral reef that fringes the coast, furnishing good

landing places where small boats can lie aground in the mud. 

1.33 The coast between Madhi and Meda Creek, about 22 miles

SE, consists of a high sandy ridge, with dispersed gaps. The

only conspicuous objects on this coast are two small conical

hills about 3 miles SE of Madhi. A prominent radio mast,

marked by a red obstruction light, is situated 4.5 miles SE of

Madhi. 

1.33 Meda Creek, the estuary of a river, dries. Miyani (Miani), a

small village with a fort, lies on the E bank of the creek. On the

W side of the creek, abreast the village, is a pagoda or temple

on a hill about 56m high. Meda Creek has been reported to give

good radar returns at 15 miles. 

1.33 The coast between Meda Creek and Porbandar, about 16

miles SE, is low but rises gradually NW.

Porbandar (21°38'N., 69°36'E.)

World Port Index No. 48680

1.34 Porbandar is the largest town on the coast of Kathiawar. The principal imports are low ash coke, fertilizers, and

scrap; exports include bauxite, cement, sesame seeds, abrasive

cotton bales, mineral extracts, and reefer cargo.

1.34 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents are not perceptible in the

offing; however, the ebb current runs very strongly in the creek

and continues for some time after LW.

1.34 Depths—Limitations.—The indentation of the creek is

shallow as the coastal bank, with depths of less than 5.5m, extends about 0.8 mile offshore.

1.34 An S-shaped breakwater, 2,650m in length, extends S from

the point on which lies Kadar Pir and provides shelter for a port

which is in operation throughout the year.
26 Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 

Pub. 173

1.34 A light is situated at the head of the breakwater.

1.34 On the E side of the breakwater, there is a main wharf, 385m

in length, accomodating two berths for vessels with drafts up to

9.5m. Inland of this wharf are numerous other jetties and

wharfs accomcodating the various types of cargo, as well as a

finger jetty, 100m in length, along the breakwater used for

lighterage.

1.34 An anchor berth E of the breakwater is used for lighterage

operations.

1.34 There is a mooring buoy about 0.25 mile E of the quay in a

depth of 7m. This buoy, and an anchor berth E of the breakwater, are used for lighterage operations. 

1.34 Aspect.—The Barda Hills (Barda Range) (21°48'N.,

69°44'E.) are conspicuous and make a good landfall; in clear

weather they are visible from 25 or 30 miles.

1.34 Porbandar lies on the E side of the entrance to a narrow

creek, which flows out between the town and a point on which

lies Kadar Pir, a conspicuous mosque with an elevation of 8m.

A conspicuous pillar is situated on the coast 0.5 mile NW of

the mosque.

1.34 Porbandar Light is shown from a tall round stone tower with

black horizontal bands lying on the coast in front of the town. 

1.34 Conspicuous chimneys are situated 1 mile N and 0.5 mile

ESE of New Hazur Palace. In addition, the towers of the water

works, 1.5 miles N of the palace, are prominent.

1.34 The Rajah’s old palace, a white square building with a red

roof, lies 0.5 mile ESE of New Hazur Palace.

1.34 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and is available during

daylight hours only. the harbormaster acts as a pilot and boards

1 mile SW of the breakwater. Vessels awaiting pilot at the

mooring buoy should have one anchor chain ready before the

pilot boards.

1.34 Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA 7 days, 5

days, 3 days, 48 hours, and 24 hours in advance.

1.34 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channel 16

2. Telephone: 91-286-2242408

3. Facsimile: 91-286-2244013

4. E-mail: poptbr1@rediffmail.com

1.34 Anchorage.—The outer anchorage is 2.2 miles SSW of Porbandar Light, with a depth of 17m. Small vessels can anchor

closer inshore according to draft. An examination anchorage

lies centered about 1.5 miles WNW of the head of the breakwater.

1.34 Caution.—Loaded vessels are only allowed to berth or depart during HW in daylight with a minimum tide height of

1.8m. No lighterage work is performed during the summer

monsoon period identified as May 15 to September 14. During

the Southwest Monsoon, a 0.6m swell is generated within the

breakwater; heavy fore and aft springs are essential for ships

berthed alongside. 

Porbandar to Veraval

1.35 The coast between Porbandar and Navibandar, about

15 miles SE, consists of sandhills with clumps of trees near the

villages. Inland there is an extensive swamp, which is flooded

during the rainy season. At Tukda (Tunkra), about 10 miles SE

of Porbandar, there is a conspicuous temple. 

1.35 Navibandar (21°27'N., 69°47'E.) is a walled town close to

the coast. A light is shown from the sea face wall of the center

bastion at Navibandar from September to June. The Bhadar

River enters the sea about 0.8 mile NW of the town; its entrance is shallow and rocky. 

1.35 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be taken, in 9.1m, off the

entrance of the Bhadar River, with the light structure at

Navibandar bearing 099°.

1.35 Gorakhanath (21°32'N., 70°32'E.), 1,116m high, lies about

53 miles NNW of Diu Head and about 35 miles inland. The

mountain is an enormous granite rock, conical, isolated, and

bare, upon which there are numerous temples and monasteries.

In clear weather, it is prominent from Porbandar to abreast Diu

Head, but farther NW it is obscured by the Barda Hills. 

1.35 Madhavpur, about 15 miles SE of Navibandar, is a small

walled town on the coast. The town of Mangrol, about 12 miles

farther SE and 1 mile inland, has a high tower which is conspicuous from 10 or 12 miles. Mangrol Light is shown from a

square house at Mangrol Bandar. There is a pier, 122m long, on

the coast SW of Mangrol. 

1.35 The Megal River, about 11 miles SE of Mangrol, flows into

the sea during the Southwest Monsoon, but, like most rivers on

this coast, its mouth is generally choked with sand.

Veraval (20°54'N., 70°22'E.)

World Port Index No. 48690 

1.36 The town of Veraval shows up well from seaward, as

many of the houses rise up abruptly from the surrounding

countryside. Somnath, a town of about the same size as Veraval, is situated on the coast about 1.8 miles ESE of Veraval. 

1.36 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents are not perceptible in the

roadstead, but there is sometimes a surface drift of about 0.5

knot, depending on the wind. The tidal range at springs is about

1.6m and at neaps 0.7m.

1.36 Depths—Limitations.—Veraval is an open roadstead where

vessels load and discharge by lighters working to quays in the

inner harbor. The inner harbor, close SE of the customhouse, is

sheltered by a 2 breakwaters; one extending SE from the coast,

and one extending WSW from the coast on the E side of the inner harbor. The port is closed to shipping from May 15 to September 15.

1.36 A shoal, with a least depth of 10m, lies about 1 mile SSE of

the breakwater head.

1.36 A dangerous wreck, marked by a white can buoy, lies about

0.2 mile ESE from the breakwater head. 

1.36 A detached rocky shoal, with a least depth of 4.6m, lies

about 0.2 mile SE of the breakwater head. 

1.36 There are depths of 3 to 4m in the inner harbor. There are

two basins in the inner harbor; two of the quays have depths of

4m alongside. The channels leading to the quays are maintained by dredging. 

1.36 Aspect.—The customhouse, a large white building facing

the sea, is the most conspicuous landmark.

1.36 A chimney, 51.5m high, is conspicuous about 1 mile NW of

the customhouse. 

1.36 Veraval Light (20°54'N., 70°21'E.), with a racon, is shown

from a white masonry tower, 33.5m high, with black bands, situated near the coast about 1 mile WNW of the custom house. 
Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 27

Pub. 173

1.36 Deni Barra, a cliffy point, 9.1m high, with a temple, 7.6m

high, is conspicuous about 0.5 mile NW of Veraval Light. 

1.36 Bhirbhanjan Temple (Bhirria Temple ) is conspicuous about

0.8 mile E of the custom house. Lighted Beacon A is shown

from a white square mansonry structure, 6.1m high, close SW. 

1.36 Somnath, about 1.8 miles ESE of Veraval, is surrounded by a

wall of dark-colored stone. A conspicuous temple, 56m high,

lies on the seaward side of the town. 

1.36 Two buoys, both of which are removed when the port is

closed, mark the entrance to the inner harbor. 

1.36 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory. Local knowledge is

required for entry inside the breakwaters. 

1.36 Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA 7 days, 5

days, 3 days, 48 hours, and 24 hours in advance.

1.36 Signals.—There is a signal station at Veraval which vessels

may communicate with by the International Code or Morse

Code.

1.36 Storm signals are displayed from the mast above the customhouse; the General System is used. Further information on

these storm signals may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean

under “India—Signals.”

1.36 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channels 11, 12, 13, and 14

2. Telephone: 91-2876-220001

3. Facsimile: 91-2876-243138

1.36 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be obtained, in depths of

about 16m, sand, with Bhirbhanjan Beacon Light structure

bearing 054° at a distance of about 0.9 mile. 

1.36 In fine weather anchorage can be obtained farther inshore, in

about 11m, coral rock, with Bhirbhanjan Beacon Light structure bearing 058°, at a distance of about 0.7 mile. 

1.36 The following table shows the designated anchorages available for vessels working cargo. Note that only 3 vessels can be

worked at a time.

Veraval to Diu Head

1.37 The coast between Sutrapara, about 7.5 miles ESE of

Veraval, and Mul Dwarka, about 11 miles farther ESE, is low

and sandy with patches of cliffs at intervals. 

1.37 Mul Dwarka (20°45'N., 70°40'E.) lies below a small bluff

point with a temple on its summit, which has an elevation of

24m. The point can be identified by the white sand on the top

of the cliffs and the dark building of the temple. 

1.37 The port contains a 250m-long private jetty, with an alongside depth of 9.5m; the jetty is used for unloading cement.

1.37 Pilotage is compulsory; the pilot boards about 2 miles SSW

of the temple. Pilots can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channel 15

2. Telephone: 91-989-8506015

1.37 Port control can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channels 12, 15, and 16

2. Telephone: 91-279-5220214

1.37 Vessels should send their ETA 72 hours in advance, including the following information: 

1. Name, official number, call sign, and flag.

2. GRT, nrt, dwt, loa, beam, arrival draft, and freeboard.

3. Last port of call and port clearance number.

4. Port health details.

5. P and I Club/H and M Policy details and contact details of representative.

6. Cargo details (including cranes, hatches, etc.).

7. ISPS information, including last ten ports of call.

8. Crew list.

9. Validity of ceretificates.

10. Any restrictions, obstructions, or other areas of concern.

Veraval Light

Veraval Working Anchorages

Designation Position Depth Maximum 

draft

A 20°53.45'N 

70°22.67'E

11.5m 8.7m

B 20°53.33'N 

70°22.33'E

12.0m 9.2m

C 20°53.05'N 

70°22.55'E

12.8m 10.0m

D 20°53.23'N 

70°22.80'E

11.0m 8.2m

E 20°55.27'N 

70°22.55'E

13.0m 10.2m
28 Sector 1. Pakistan and the West Coast of India—Ras Muari to Diu Head 

Pub. 173

1.37 Vessels can anchor about 2.5 miles S of the temple, in a

charted depth of about 23m. 

1.38 The Somat River (Surmat River) flows into the sea

about 1.5 miles W of Mul Dwarka; the Singwada River (Singavado River) empties about 0.5 mile E of the point. The latter

river has very little water in it except during the rains. 

1.38 Kodinar, a town about 3 miles NE of Mul Dwarka, is just

visible among the trees. 

1.38 The coast between Mul Dwarka and Diu Head (20°41'N.,

70°50'E.), about 10 miles ESE, consists of rocky points with

sandy bays between and some cliffs 9m to 12m high. A submerged rock, with depth of 2m or less, lies about 2.5 miles W

of Diu Head Light. 

1.38 Chara is a village near the coast, about 3 miles ESE of Mul

Dwarka. The coast is more densely wooded here and the trees

are larger than elsewhere on the coast. A white tomb lies close

to the coast about 0.8 mile W of Chara. 

1.38 Tides—Currents.—Between Sutrapara and Diu Head, the

ebb current sets WNW and the flood ESE at a velocity of 1 to

1.5 knots, but they are subject to irregularities. In December

and January, with the current setting up the coast, the W tidal

current is increased, while the E tidal current is weakened and

may at times be imperceptible.

1.38 Caution.—The coast between Mul Dwarka and Diu Head is

fronted by a rocky shoal lying about 1.5 miles offshore, with a

least depth of 3m. A vessel should not approach it to a depth of

less than 24m.
29

Pub. 173

2. 

India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama (including the 

Gulf of Cambay and Bombay)

2.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 2 — CHART INFORMATION
31

Pub. 173

SECTOR 2 

INDIA—WEST COAST—DIU HEAD TO CAPE RAMA (INCLUDING THE GULF OF CAMBAY 

AND )

2.0 Plan.—This sector describes the W coast of India between

Diu Head and Cape Rama, including the Gulf of Cambay. The

sector includes the port of Mumbai (Bombay), the largest seaport on the W coast of India. The arrangement of the sector is

from N to S. 

General Remarks

2.1 An extensive offshore area, bounded approximately

by the parallels of 18°00'N and 19°50'N, and the meridians of

71°00'E and 72°40'E, is being developed for oil production.

Numerous oil derricks, oil production platforms, single point

moorings, etc., obstruct navigation within the area. Other unlit

objects, pipelines, submerged obstructions, and well heads,

sometimes marked by buoys, exist in this area; these features

are not all charted due to their compelxity and frequent change. 

2.1 Recommended routes have been established by Indian authorities to aid traffic transiting the area, as well as vessels

bound to or from the port of Mumbai (Bombay). The Indian

government requests that vessels remain 1 to 2 miles to starboard of the tracklines shown on the chart, consistent with safe

navigation, and the International Regulations for Preventing

Collisions at Sea, 1972 (72 COLREGS). 

2.1 The extent of the development area and the recommended

routes are best seen on the appropriate chart. 

Diu Head to Diu Harbor

2.2 Diu Head (20°41'N., 70°50'E.), a rocky bluff about

30m high, can be identified by the lighthouse, two long buildings, and a small temple lying near its summit. From this summit the land slopes gradually E, terminating in a rocky point,

on which there is a cairn, 8m high.

2.2 The Gir Hills, about 25 miles N of Diu Head, extend about

40 miles in an E-W direction and attain an elevation of about

640m, but cannot be seen from any great distance from the SW.

Nandivela, 529m high, the SE peak of the range, lies about 27

miles NE of Diu Head and is conspicuous from the S. 

2.2 Madhwad Bay (Mandwa Bay) (20°42'N., 70°56'E.) lies between the E extremity of Diu Head and Nagwa Point, the SW

extremity of Diu Island, about 3.5 miles E. The bay affords

shelter from NW winds, and the holding ground is good, but

there is frequently a swell setting into it. The anchorage should

not be used with S or E winds.

2.2 The coast at the head of the bay between Diu Head and

Brancavara Creek, about 2.3 miles ENE, consists of low sand

hills backed by marshy land, which is partly submerged at HW

springs. Between Brancavara Creek and Nagwa Point, the

coast consists of sand dunes which extend inland to a thick unbroken belt of palm trees. 

2.2 Madhwad Creek, which dries, is entered about 0.9 mile

NNW of the E extremity of Diu Head. 

2.2 Nagwa Point (20°42'N., 70°54'E.) is a dark bluff, with cliffs

9.1 to 12.2m high, rising to a 20m summit marked by a bush.

Shoal water, over which the sea breaks occasionally, extends

about 0.3 mile WSW from Nagwa Point. 

2.2 A conspicuous temple lies on the E entrance point of Brancavara Creek. Another prominent temple is situated about 0.5

mile farther NE. 

2.2 Caution.—Rocky Shoal, with a least depth of 1.4m, lies in

the middle of the entrance of the bay. The E end of this steep-to

shoal, over which the sea occasionally breaks, lies about 1.3

miles WSW of Nagwa Point.

2.3 Madhwad Bainsla, a rock 2m high, lies about 0.2 mile

E of the E extremity of Diu Head. Foul ground, over which the

sea breaks heavily, extends about 0.1 mile N and 0.3 mile E

from this rock. At springs, strong tide rips and overfalls occur

E of Madhwad Bainsla. 

2.3 Kachbi Reef (Khasbi Reef), which dries from 0.6 to 0.9m,

lies about 0.5 mile E of the SW entrance point of Brancavara

Creek.

2.3 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken on either side of

Rocky Shoal. At the anchorage E of this shoal, vessels usually

lie across the wind and tide when the ebb current sets out of

Brancavara Creek. There are depths of 10 to 12m, sand and

mud, at this anchorage. 

2.3 Moderate-sized vessels can anchor, in 8m, sand and mud,

about 1 mile ENE of the E extremity of Diu Head, and about

0.6 mile offshore. 

2.3 Vessels are not advised to anchor midway between Madhwad Gainsla and the W end of Rocky Shoal because of the

strong tidal currents and the exposed position. 

2.3 Small craft can anchor, in 7m, between Nagwa Point and

Kachbi Reef, sheltered from E winds and out of the influence

of the tidal currents. Dhows, usually without lights, may be

found here at night, as it is a favorite anchorage for sailing craft

waiting for the flood current to proceed up the Gulf of Cambay. 

2.3 Directions.—Vessels intending to anchor E of Rocky Shoal

should approach with the conspicuous temple on the E entrance of Brancavara Creek bearing 322°, and anchor when the

Diu Head Light
32 Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 

Pub. 173

S extremity of Nagwa Point bears 077°, distant 0.9 mile, in

11m, sand and mud. 

2.3 Vessels approaching from the E and intending to anchor NW

of Rocky Shoal should steer with Madhwad Bainsla, or the E

extremity of Diu Head, bearing more than 283°, and open well

N of the light structure on Diu Head. This course leads S of the

S extremity of Rocky Shoal. Course should be altered N for the

anchorage about 1 mile ENE of the E extremity of Diu Head,

when the E of two distant sharp peaks bears 005°. Steer for this

peak on this bearing, taking care to avoid a 4.9m patch about

0.5 mile NW of Rocky Shoal. Vessels can anchor when the

cliffs on the S side of the entrance of Madhwad Creek bear

270°, with the S entrance point of the creek about 1.25 miles. 

2.3 When approaching this latter anchorage it should be remembered that the flood current sets strongly toward Rocky Shoal

and the ebb current toward Madhwad Bainsla. 

2.4 Diu Harbor (20°43'N 71°00'E), between the E end of

Diu Island and the mainland N, is open E and somewhat encumbered by shoals. 

2.4 Tides—Currents.—The flood current S of Diu sets ENE,

with a greatest velocity at springs of 1.5 knots. It often runs for

2 hours after the time of HW by the shore. The ebb current sets

WSW at a velocity of 2 knots at springs, and often runs for 2.5

hours after the water along the shore has began to rise. These

irregularities of tides will account in some measure for the eddy currents off Diu Head.

2.4 Aspect.—Diu Island is separated from the mainland by

Sesalkhada Creek, which runs through the middle of a large

swamp. The seaward side of the island is composed chiefly of

sandstone cliffs; the hills on its W part are about 30.5m high.

The citadel of Forte do Diu, at the E extremity of Diu Island, is

conspicuous from seaward.

2.4 A light is shown near the center of Forte do Diu; Couraca

Light is shown periodically from the NE extremity of the same

fort. The town of Diu, close W of the fort, is enclosed by a wall

which is breached in many places on its W sides. There are

several prominent buildings in the town. 

2.4 Forte do Mar is situated about 0.2 mile N of Forte do Diu, on

the N side of the entrance to Sesalkhada Creek; it lies at the SE

edge of a spit and is periodically marked by a light. 

2.4 A temple, about 0.7 mile NNW of Forte do Mar, is conspicuous in the N part of the village of Ghoghla. 

2.4 A guard house, with a red roof and a palm tree, are conspicuous about 1.3 miles NNE, and 2 miles N of Forte do Mar. 

2.4 Signals.—Storm signals are displayed from a flagstaff in

Forte do Diu; the Brief System is used. Further information on

these storm signals may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean

under “India—Signals.”

2.4 The port can be contacted on VHF channels 16 anf 71. 

2.4 Anchorage.—Diu Harbor affords no protection from the E;

vessels should not anchor in the harbor during strong E winds,

the holding ground, sand and rock. 

2.4 The safest and best anchorage, in 14 to 16m, mud, lies with

the light structure near the center of Forte do Diu bearing 315°,

distant 0.5 to 0.6 mile. This anchorage is used by local vessels

and affords protection from W winds. 

2.4 There is anchorage, in 5 to 7m, about 1 mile E of Ghoghla.

To reach it, vessels should steer for the temple N of Ghoghla,

bearing 298°, passing between the dangers ENE of Forte do

Diu, and anchoring when Couraca Light bears 240°.

2.4 Caution.—A rock, with a depth of 1.3m, lies about 0.5 mile

E of the E extremity of Diu Island. A 3m rocky patch lies about

0.8 mile farther ENE. A 4.7m depth lies about 1 mile ENE of

the E extremity of Diu Island. 

2.4 A reef, which dries in places, extends about 0.5 mile ENE

from the E extremity of Diu Island. 

2.4 From October to the end of January large fleets of fishing

vessels based at Brancawara, at the W end of Diu Island, and

also based at Diu, Nawabandar, and Simar (20°46'N.,

71°10'E.) will be found from 4 to 8 miles offshore; these vessels leave barrel buoys and logs to mark the fishing grounds,

and it is advisable to give them a wide berth. 

Diu Harbor to Pipavav Bandar

2.5 Nawabandar (20°44'N., 71°05'E.) is a promontory

situated 2 miles E of Diu Harbor; the intervening coast is high,

with deep water close to it. A light is shown from a white circular building on the promontory. The town of Delvada, about 2.5

miles NW of Nawabandar, has a large conspicuous temple with

twin minarets. 

2.5 Storm signals are shown at Nawabandar; the Brief System is

used. Further information on these storm signals may be found

in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

2.5 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be obtained, in 9.1m,

mud, with the light structure at Nawabandar bearing 254°, distant 1 mile. 

2.5 Panikota Islet, about 4.5 miles ENE of Nawabandar, is connected to the mainland W by a drying reef, which also extends

about 0.3 mile ENE from the islet. Simar Fort (Simbor Fort), a

white flat-topped structure with a flagstaff, is situated at the N

end of the islet; a light is shown seasonally from the fort. 

2.5 Close W of Panikota Islet, a range of cliffs extends about 2

miles W and attains an elevation of 13m; the W end of these

cliffs appears as a sharp bluff when seen from E. A temple,

11m high, is situated on the mainland, about 0.3 mile SW of

Simar Fort (Simbor Fort). 

2.5 Bhesla Rock, a rocky islet 8m high, lies about 10.3 miles E

of Panikota Islet and is fringed by a drying reef, except on its

SE side. A detached drying reef lies from 0.2 to 0.3 mile WSW

of Bhesla Rock. 

2.5 There is good anchorage for small vessels about 0.4 mile N

of Bhesla Rock, in 8.2m, mud, in Simar Anchorage (Simbor

Anchorage). 

2.5 From a position ENE of Bhesla Rock the track leads WSW,

clear of the 4.3m spit, towards the anchorage. 

2.5 The channel between the reef W of Bhesla Rock and the reef

projecting ENE of Panikota Islet is not recommended, for although there is plenty of water, there are no navigational aids.

2.5 The village of Rajpura (Rajvla) lies on a point about 3.5

miles ENE of Panikota Islet; a light is shown seasonally from

this point. There is high ground, with steep cliffs, close W of

the village. A shoal, with a least depth of 4.2m, lies about 0.8

mile SW of the point, and about 0.3 mile offshore. 

2.5 Murex Bluff, 25m high, lies about 5 miles farther ENE. Murex Reef, which dries from 1.8 to 2.7m, extends about 1 mile E
Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 33

Pub. 173

of the bluff. 

2.6 Jafarabad (20°52'N., 71°23'E.) is an open roadstead

affording little protection during the Southwest Monsoon. The

harbor is shallow and a ledge of flat rocks extends nearly 0.5

mile W from the E side of the harbor entrance. Jafarabad is a

walled town, with several round towers, on the highest of

which there is a flagstaff, 35m high. The town, situated on high

ground, can be seen from the S and E over the intervening rising ground, about 1 mile inland on the W bank of the river of

the same name. 

2.6 Jafarabad Harbor is situated in a shallow bay about 1 mile

across, at the entrance to the Jafarabad River. A breakwater

ends with an L-shaped jetty extending about 0.5 mile W from

the shore near the cement factory on the E side. A second

breakwater extends ENE about 0.3 mile from the W entrance

point of the bay. A light shows from the W breakwater head. 

2.6 Tides—Currents.—Outside the harbor, the tidal current sets

E with the flood and W with the ebb along the coast. 

2.6 At springs, the E current continues to run for about 1 hour after the time of HW, and the W current continues to run until 4

hours before the time of the following HW. Both currents attain

a maximum velocity of 4 knots after running for 3 hours. 

2.6 At neaps, the E current continues to run for 30 minutes after

the time of HW, and the W current continues to run until 4.5

hours before the time of the following HW. The maximum velocity of the flood is 1.8 knots and of the ebb 1.5 knots.

2.6 At neaps, the current changes from ebb to flood in a clockwise

direction and the flood to ebb in a counterclockwise direction. 

2.6 Depths—Limitations.—A channel about 40m wide, being

dredged to a depth of 5.5m in 1986, leads to a dredged basin of

the same depth having a diameter of 300m, around the Lshaped jetty. Range lights, in line bearing 222°°, lead to the jetty. 

2.6 Aspect.—Barman Hill, 106m high, is conspicuous about 6.5

miles NNW of Jafarabad. Lor Hill, 146m high, about 3 miles

W of Barman Hill, is also conspicuous.

2.6 A chimney, 90m high, and a conspicuous tower, 102m high,

are situated close together at a cement factory on the E entrance point of the river. 

2.6 Lights are shown from the SW and NE entrance points of the

harbors. A white beacon marks the W edge of the ledge of flat

rocks extending from the E side of the harbor entrance. 

2.6 Varahaswaroop Temple, 29m high, is situated close to the

coast, about 2 miles W of the W entrance point of Pipavav Anchorage, and is conspicuous from S. 

2.6 Anchorage.—In fine weather, good anchorage can be taken,

in 14m, with the light structure on the SW entrance point bearing 260°, and with the light structure on the NE entrance point

bearing 036°. 

2.6 Caution.—A dangerous wreck lies about 0.8 mile E of the

SW entrance point of the harbor. 

2.6 The coast between Jafarabad Harbor and the W entrance

point of Pipavav Anchorage, about 5 miles ENE, is cliffy with

precipitous points, and fringed by a coastal reef. Inland the

country is undulating and partially cultivated. Small watch

towers, about 1.8m high, lie on most of the hilltops on the

coast. 

Pipavav Bandar (20°55'N., 71°31'E.)

World Port Index No. 48730

2.7 Pipavav Bandar, the principal port for Dongar, about 6

miles N, is the principal town on this part of the coast. Pipavav

Bandar is operated by APM Terminals, which is part of the

A.P. Moller-Maersk Group. 

2.7 Pipavav Bandar lies on the NW shore of the West Channel. It

is an all season port offering container, bulk, break bulk and

liquid cargo handling services. It imports and exports bulk cargo including coal, cement and fertilizer, break bulk, and LPG. 

2.7 Chanch Island, the W extremity of which is located about 2.3

miles NNE of Shival Island, fronts the coast for about 4.5

miles. There is an extensive mangrove swamp close inland,

which is submerged only at very high spring tides A heavy

swell occurs during the Southwest Monsoon.

2.7 Tides—Currents.—The mean spring tidal range is about

2.7m. The mean neap tidal range is only 1.2m. 

2.7 The ebb current, which sets SW from S of Chanch Island, divides N of Bhensla Rock. One branch sets W through East

Channel and then SW through West Channel, attaining a velocity of 2 knots at springs and 1 knot at neaps. The other branch

sets toward Savai Bet Reef and then W along the coast at a velocity of 2 to 2.5 knots at springs and 1.5 knots at neaps.

2.7 The flood current sets across the S approach to West

Channel and there divides. One branch sets N through the

channel and then NE toward Chanch Island at a velocity of 1.5

to 2.5 knots at springs and about 1 knot at neaps. The other

branch sets ENE past Savai Bet Reef, and then toward Bhensla

Rock at a velocity of 3 knots at springs and 2 to 3 knots at neaps.

2.7 Strong eddies form in West Channel at HW and LW.

2.7 Depths—Limitations.—Pipavav Port is approached from

the S through West Channel, about 0.75 mile long, dredged to

about 14.5m, and marked by lighted buoys. West Channel is

the recommended route to Pipavav Port and anchorage due to

much shallower depths in the East Channel. East Channel,

leading N of Bhensala Rock and Shiyal Bet, should only be

used by light-draft vessels with local knowledge, and only at

high water. 

2.7 West Channel leads W of Shiyal Bet (20°54'N., 71°31'E.)

Jafarabad Light (W side of harbor entrance)

 Port Authority of Pipavav Bandar

http://www.pipavav.com
34 Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 

Pub. 173

NNE from a position about 0.3 mile E of the W beacon for

about 0.2 mile, then NE to a position between the N end of the

GPPL Jetty and Lighted Buoy No. 9 light, where there is a

turning basin with a radius 275m and a depth of 13.5m. West

Channel can be used at any time day or night. The channel

width varies from 380m at its beginning and widens to 575m in

the vicinity of the GPPL Jetty before narrowing to a width of

200m in the vicinity of the N end of the LPG Jetty. 

2.7 The GPPL Jetty, consisting of four berths, has three berths in

line for container operations which can accommodate vessels

up to 305m in length and has a dredged depth of 14m alongside. The fourth berth extends 47m into the channel from the

in-line berths and will accommodate container, bulk, and general cargo vvessels up to 240m in length with a maximum draft

of 13m. 

2.7 Close N of the GPPL Jetty is the LPG Berth with a jetty

length of 337m able to accomodate vessels up to 15.5m of

draft.

2.7 The UCL Jetty serves a cement factory on the W side of the

entrance channel, about 1 mile ESE of Chachuda Temple. The

jetty is 337m in length, L-shaped, with a berth able to accommodate vessels up to 200m in length and draft up to 10.5m on

arrival and 11m on departure. This jetty does not operate between June 16 and August 14. 

2.7 Only small vessels with local knowledge can proceed to Pipavav Bandar, as there is only a depth of 2.1m in the channel

leading to it.

2.7 Aspect.—The shores of the islet are composed of rocky

cliffs, 10.4 to 16.5m high, with the exception of the NE side

and the shore of a small bay on its NW side, which are low and

sandy. Remains of old fortifications are on the N and E sides of

the islet. The greater part of the islet is covered with ruins of

what must have been extensive buildings and temples.

2.7 Savai Bet Reef, a drying reef, steep-to on its E edge, extends

about 0.4 mile E from Savai Bet.

2.7 Bhensla Rock, a bluff rocky islet, 15m high and nearly steepto on its E side, is located 1 mile ENE of Savai Bet.

2.7 Montapat Creek, separating the NW and N sides of Chanch

Island from the mainland, is the outlet for waters that cover an

immense tract of marshy land at high water.

2.7 A circular tower, 9m high, is conspicuous at the W edge of a

reef extending about 0.3 mile WSW from the W extremity of

Chanch Island.

2.7 One Tree Hill, at the W extremity of Chanch Island, is 14m

high.

2.7 Spit Sand, which dries 0.3m, extends nearly 1.8 miles SW

from the SW edge of the above-mentioned reef. The SW edge

of Spit Sand is called The Spit and has a least depth of 1.9m.

2.7 A palace, 26m high, about 2 miles ENE of the circular tower,

is a good landmark from the SE and S.

2.7 Beacons on the mainland, in line bearing 019°, and about 2

miles N of Shiyal Bet, lead through West Channel. Beacons

stand on drying reefs on each side of the entrance to West

Channel.

2.7 Chachuda Temple, 24m high, is conspicuous on the mainland, about 1.5 miles WSW of Shiyal Bet.

2.7 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and available at all times.

Vessels should send their ETA 72 hours, 48 hours, 24, hours,

and 12 hours, in advance to the harbormaster. Vessels should

call Port Control on VHF channel 16 or 71 for pilot boarding

information. The use of tugs is compulsory and the pilot boards

from a harbor tug in position 20°52.5'N, 71°29.8'E. 

2.7 Signals.—Port contact information is given in the table titled

Pipavav Bandar—Contact Information.

2.7 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage, sheltered from the

Southwest Monsoon, in a depth of 9m, mud and sand, S of

Shiyal Bet, about 3.8 miles offshore. Strong tidal currents prevail in the Gulf of Kambhat so caution needs to be taken when

anchoring.

2.7 Vessels should contact Port Control on VHF channel 16 or

71 for anchoring positions to be assigned.

2.7 Anchoring is prohibited N of 20°52.5'N. between 71°29.4'E

and 71°30.4'E.

2.7 Directions.—Vessels should enter West Channel with the

beacons on the mainland in line bearing 019 and steer in on

this bearing until Chachuda Temple bears 275, when course

can be shaped to the anchorage.

2.7 Caution.—Due to the strong current setting across the West

Channel entrance, Pipavav Harbormaster recommends for vessels to maintain a speed over ground of 3-4 knots.

2.7 A ferry service operates between the SW part of the GPPL

Jetty and NW Shiyal Bet. 

Pipavav Bandar to Gopnath Point

2.8 Islet Point (21°00'N., 71°41'E.), about 10 miles NE

of Shiyal Bet, is prominent and hilly. Several islets front the

point and are connected with each other and the coast by a drying reef of rocks. The S islet, about 0.8 mile S of the point, is

15m high and nearly steep-to. A spit, with a depth of 4m, extends about 0.8 mile ESE from this islet. 

2.8 Patva Bay, between Islet Point and a bluff point, 15m high,

about 2.5 miles WSW, is shallow and mostly dries.

2.8 The bight between Islet Point and Gadhada, about 4 miles

ENE, is filled with the coastal reef, which extends about 1.3

miles offshore in places. Gadhada, a village, is situated on the

edge of a cliff, 20m high. A detached 7.3m patch lies about 3

miles SW of Gadhada, and about 1.8 miles offshore. 

Pipavav Bandar—Contact Information

Port Control Port Authority Harbormaster

Call sign Port Control — —

VHF VHF channel 16 and 71 — —

Telephone 91-2794-286334 91-2794-286001 91-2794-286032

Facsimile — 91-2794-286068 —

E-mail portcontrol@portofpipavav.com — harbourmaster@portofpipavav.com
Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 35

Pub. 173

2.8 The coast between Gadhada and the SW entrance of Mahuva

Bay is composed of limestone cliffs and is fringed by a steep-to

oastal reef extending about 0.2 mile offshore. 

2.8 Mahuva Bay (21°02'N., 71°47'E.) nearly dries and shows a

mass of rocks and stones. Its SW entrance point is a bluff, 24m

high; the NE entrance point, which is the SW extremity of Jegri

Island, is similar, but 18m high. 

2.8 Jegri Island, sparsely cultivated, has bold rocky cliffs on its S

and E sides, and its W part consists of sand hills from 18 to

23m high. A drying reef extends about 0.2 mile E from the SE

extremity of Jegri Island, which is marked by a light.

2.8 Mahuva Bandar is situated at the head of Mahuva Bay, and is

approached through a creek which nearly dries. Mahuva, a

walled town with a conspicuous temple near its center, lies

about 2.8 miles N of Mahuva Badar, from which it is separated

by an extensive swamp, submerged at HW. 

2.8 Anchorage can be taken by small vessels, in about 13.1m,

mud, with the light structure on Jegri Island bearing 040°, distant 0.6 mile. 

2.8 Jegri Bay (Katpur Bay), between Jegri Island and Cave

Point, about 2.3 miles NE, is a shallow bight, the head of

which, consisting of sand and mud, dries to a distance of about

0.7 mile seaward; the depths increase gradually to seaward.

Bhawani Temple, on top of a sandhill at the head of Jegri Bay,

is conspicuous.

2.8 Tidal currents S and W of Jegri Island set in the direction of

the line of the coast, with the flood setting E and the ebb setting

W; at springs, the flood current attains a velocity of 2.5 knots

and the ebb current a velocity of 1 knot. 

2.8 Kotada Bluff (21°07'N., 71°58'E.) is 26m high and conspicuous. During W winds, boats can land on the NE side of the

bluff. 

2.8 Methla Point, about 2 miles farther ENE, is a low rocky projection, 7.6m high, rising about 0.5 mile N to the average elevation of the undulating land in this vicinity of more than

30.5m. 

2.8 Bhensla Rock, 27m high, lies on the drying coastal reef

about 2.5 miles NE of Methla Point. 

2.8 Jhanjhmer is a walled town on the coast about 4 miles NE of

Methla Point. The remains of a square and conspicuous old fort

are situated close S of the town. A light is shown about 0.2

mile S of the fort. 

2.8 Anchorage for small vessels can be obtained, in 10m, sand

and mud, about 0.9 mile SE of the fort. 

2.8 About midway between Jhanjhmer and Gopnath Point, there

is a projecting point, 27.4m high, with a tower close inland. 

The Gulf of Cambay (The Gulf of Khambhat)

2.9 The Gulf of Cambay is about 30 miles wide at its entrance between Gopnath Point (21°12'N., 72°07'E.) and Suvali Point (21°05'N., 72°38'E.). Malacca Banks, with deep

channels to the W and E, lie in the fairway of the approach.

Grant Channel and Sutherland Channel are safer to use than the

channels between the banks, as the mariner is able to accurately fix his position from the objects on the coast; Sutherland

Channel should be used only by those with local knowledge. 

2.9 The S part of the gulf is deep, but the N part is encumbered

with sand banks, which frequently change because of the force

of the bores and freshets from the rivers. 

2.9 Deep-draft vessels can proceed up the gulf as far as Piram Island, about 28 miles NNE of Gopnath Point. Local knowledge

is necessary for vessels navigating above Gogha, about 6 miles

NW of Piram Island. 

2.9 Caution.—Considerable shoaling is reported in the entrance

of the Gulf of Cambay and mariners should navigate with caution in this vicinity. 

2.9 The sand and banks in the upper part of the gulf are subject to

great alterations. Any directions for navigating this area must be

considered as general only; local knowledge is necessary. 

2.9 Malacca Banks is the general name for four long narrow

shoals lying in and obstructing the entrance of the Gulf of

Cambay, between the parallels of 20°20'N and 21°20'N. These

shoals, named in order from W, are Western Bank, Narbada

Bank, Breaker Bank, and Eastern Bank. 

2.9 Deep channels are between these shoals, but they are narrow

at their N ends, and it is inadvisable to use them. 

2.9 Western Bank dries in places. 

2.9 Grant Channel, between Western Bank and the coast NW, is

steep-to on both sides, with general depths of 11.3 to 27m. bottom is sand toward the bank and mud toward the Channel off

the N end of Western Bank

2.9 Depths in Grant Channel between Gopnath Point and Western Bank, 6 miles SSE of Gopnath Point, were reported (2002)

to be 1 to 1.5m less than charted.

2.9 Narbada Bank has a large area of drying sand near its center.

2.9 Breaker Bank has a long sand bank near its center, which

may be seen a long distance from the masthead when the sun

shines on it at high water neaps, but it is submerged at high water springs. Depths of 2.7 to 3.3m lie at the N end of Breaker

Bank, about 16 miles ENE of Gopnath Point; a drying patch

was reported (1954) in this vicinity. A dangerous wreck lies

about 5 miles SW of Breaker Bank.

2.9 Eastern Bank has several shoal patches, some of which dry.

Because the depths are deep within 0.2 mile of these shoal

patches in many places, soundings give little warning of the approach to these dangers. 

2.9 Sutherland Channel, between Eastern Bank and the coast E,

is about 2.5 miles wide at its narrowest part, WNW of Suvali

Point. Two lighterage areas, one for general cargo and one for

chemical and LPG cargo, which are best seen on the chart, are

located about 5 miles W of Suvali Point.

2.9 Caution.—Shoaling, including a drying patch about 300m

wide, has been reported (2003, 2006) in an area extending from

2 to 3 miles SW of the SW corner of the charted General Lighterage Area. 

Magdalla (21°09'N., 72°45'E.)

World Port Index No. 48770

2.10 Magdalla, an official point of entry, includes the Hazira port complex comprised an Hazira Offshore Terminal (see

paragraph 2.11), the Hazira LNG Terminal (see paragraph

2.12), and a bulk/container terminal presently under construction.

The actual port of Magdalla is located about 5 miles upstream on the S bank of the Tapi River. Magdalla has four

berths capable of handling barges with drafts up to 3.5m. Most

cargo is handled at the Magdalla river jetties.
36 Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 

Pub. 173

2.10 Tides—Currents.—The flood tide sets N, continuing for 1

hour after the time of local HW. The tide often falls 2m just before the commencement of ebb tide. 

2.10 Depths—Limitations.—The Tapi River bar is dry at LW

while the entrance and river itself contains many sand banks

that are also dry at tides less than HW. Magdalla is approached

through a buoyed channel marked 80m wide and dredged to a

depth of only 3m. 

Pilots.—Pilots are not compulsory but any attempt to locate

the entrance to the navigable channel should only be carried

out through use of a local pilot.

2.10 Anchorage.—Anchoring, best seen on the chart, is available

in Surat Roads, SW of Hazira Point, in depths from 10m to

12m, but care must be taken due to the strong tidal currents, especially on ebb tide. 

2.10 Signals.—Magdalla Port Control/VTMS and Port Authority

can be contacted as specified in paragraph 2.12 under Signals.

2.11 Hazira Offshore Terminal (21°09'N., 72°34'E.) is

situated about 9 miles NNW of the Tapi River Fairway lighted

Buoy. The terminal is an SPM (named Reliance) and is approached through Sutherland Channel. 

2.11 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents set N and S in the channel at rates of up to 6 knots at springs. The tidal range is reported to be about 7m. 

2.11 Depths—Limitations.—There is a depth of 25m at the

SPM. Vessels between 15,000 and 50,000 dwt and up to 250m

in length, with a maximum arrival draft of 13m, can be accommodated. 

Pilots.—Pilots should be requested via the agent. The pilot

boards 3 miles S of the SPM. Vessels are berthed only during

daylight hours during slack water; a tug is available to assist.

Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA, via the agent,

72 hours, 48 hours, 12 hours, and 6 hours prior to arrival.

2.11 Signals.—The terminal can be contacted 24 hours, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channel 67

2. Telephone: 91-261-3035484

3. Facsimile: 91-261-3035489

4. E-mail: shippingradioroom@ril.com

2.11 Caution.—Anchoring and fishing are prohibited within 1

mile of the SPM and as well as within 0.25 mile of the pipeline

extending from the coast to the SPM. A fog signal is sounded

from the SPM ; the SPM also includes a radar reflector. 

2.12 Hazira LNG Terminal (21°06'N., 72°37'E.) (World

Port Index No. 48790) is located on the W side of the Hazira

peninsula and is approached through the S part of Sutherland

Channel. 

2.12 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents attain a rate of at least

4.5 knots at springs. 

2.12 Depths—Limitations.—The harbor, open WSW, is protected by breakwaters. The entrance channel is 0.65 mile long; it is

0.37 mile wide at seaside, tapers to a width of 0.25 mile wide at

the breakwaters, and is dredged to a depth of 13m. 

2.12 The facility can accommodate an LNG carrier of 145,000m3,

with a maximum length of 295m, a maximum beam of 50m,

and a maximum draft of 11.5m. The berth, on the N side of the

harbor, has an alongside depth of 13m, is oriented in a NE/SW

direction, and consists of four breasting dolphins and five

mooring dolphins. 

2.12 Aspect.—Range lights, in line bearing 070°, lead through

the entrance channel. The seaward end of the entrance channel

is marked by a pair of lighted buoys. 

2.12 Pilots.—Pilots are compulsory and board in vicinity of the

General Lighterage Area in position 20°57'N, 72°35'E.

2.12 Regulations.—Vessels bound for the terminal must report to

Magdalla Port Control when 2 miles S of Magdalla Port Limits. All LNG carriers must obtain passage approval from

Magdalla Port Control prior to entering the entrance corridor.

2.12 Only one vessel at a time is allowed to be underway in the

approach corridor. The use of tugs is compulsory; four tugs secure to the LNG carrier prior to entering the dredged entrance

channel. 

2.12 Signals.—Magdalla Port Control/VTMS can be contacted,

24 hours, as follows:

1. VHF: VHF channels 9 and 16

2. Telephone: 91-261-2721700

3. Facsimile: 91-261-2721700

2.12 Magdalla Port Authority can be contacted, as follows:

1. Telephone: 91-261-2470533

2. Facsimile: 91-261-2475645

3. Telegraph: PORTAL MAGDALLA

4. E-mail: gmbpomin_adl@sancharnet.in

2.12 Anchorage.—Anchoring is prohibited within the Magdalla

Port Limits, which are best seen on the chart, except in an

emergency. See paragraph 2.10 for anchoring information.

2.12 Caution.—The N end of Malacca Banks should not be approached with an ebb tide, because, being nearly steep-to,

soundings do not give sufficient warning. This area also has not

Hazira Offshore Terminal SPM 

 Port Authority of Hazira

http://www.porthazira.com

 Hazira LNG Terminal

http://www.haziralng.com
Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 37

Pub. 173

been closely examined. Tapti Oil Development Area, best seen

on the chart, is located in the W approach to the Gulf of Cambay. Unlit structures are situated on the Malacca Banks, Surat

Roads, and the Sutherland Channel, as best seen on the chart.

The Gulf of Cambay—West Side

2.13 Gopnath Point (21°12'N., 72°07'E.), the W entrance

point of the Gulf of Cambay, is moderately high, with a conspicuous light structure and bungalow on it. A temple, 23m

high, lies near the coast, about 0.8 mile N of the point. 

2.13 A reef, which dries 2.7m, extends about 1.5 miles ENE from

Gopnath Point.

2.13 Gopnath Shoals, nearly steep-to on the E side, extend about

3.5 miles NNE from about 2 miles ENE of Gopnath Point. The

shoals consist of a reef, which dries from 1.2 to 2.7m, and several patches with depths of less than 5.5m. 

2.13 Sultanpur Shoals extend about 4 miles NNE from the N end

of Gopnath Shoals to about 9 miles NNE of Gopnath Point,

then W to the coast. These shoals consist of drying rock, sand

and clay, and numerous patches with depths of 0.6 to 5.5m. 

2.13 Tides—Currents.—Within Gopnath Shoal and Sultanpur

Shoal the flood current at springs does not turn until more than

1 hour after the time of HW, and the ebb current continues to

run for more than 1.5 hours after the tide has commenced rising. At neaps the flood current turns 2 hours after the time of

HW. 

2.13 The coast between Gopnath Point and Kuda Point, about 28

miles NNE, is low and covered with sandhills for about 18

miles to Mitivirdi; then it is comparatively high, with several

ravines close to the coast. The country is flat and cultivated,

with many scattered villages mostly surrounded by trees; inland it is generally from 30 to 61m high. 

2.13 Talaja Hill, rising from a level plain about 10 miles NNW of

Gopnath Point, and 5 miles inland, is a steep conical hill, about

113m high, with a conspicuous temple on its summit.

2.13 Palitana Mountain, 596m high, is conspicuous about 12

miles WNW of Talaja Hill. 

2.13 Khokhra Hills, the S end of which lies about 9.5 miles NNE

of Talaja Hill, extends about 7.5 miles N. Its summit, 300m

high, near the N end of the range, is conspicuous.

2.14 Alang Shipbreaking Yard (21°30'N., 72°20'E.) is located about 5 miles SSW of Piram Island Light. Vessels to be

scrapped are normally run in to the beach on high tide (HW

over 10m) twice a month. There are no size restrictions for vessels calling at Alang to be scrapped. 

2.14 Tides—Currents.—Tide information is produced by the

port department and can be attained by contacting local agents.

2.14 Regulations.— Masters are to send their ETA’s 72 hours, 48

hours, and 24 hours prior to arrival. Vessels slated for demolition must arrive without any cargo on board.

2.14 Anchorage.—The primary anchorage is 5 miles S of Piram

Island Light.

2.14 Kuda Point (21°38'N., 72°18'E.), 10m high, has a thick

clump of trees and a white bungalow on it. The trees are conspicuous from N or S, and the bungalow shows well during the

forenoon when seen from E. 

2.14 Mallock Reef, about 1.5 miles SE of Kuda Point, lies on the

W side of the channel between it and the reef extending NW

from Piram Island. 

2.14 Piram Island, 11m high and composed of sand, lies with its

N end about 2.8 miles SE of Kuda Point. At the S end of the island there are a few trees and a little cultivation; the NE side is

fringed by a few mangrove trees. The lighthouse is conspicuous near the middle of the island; a small village is situated

close N of the lighthouse. 

2.14 Reefs surround the island and extend about 2.5 miles NNE,

0.5 mile E, and 1.5 miles SSE from the island. Shoal water,

with depths of less than 11m, extends about 7.8 miles SSW

from the S end of the reef surrounding Piram Island. 

2.14 The narrow channel between Mallock Reef and Piram Island

should not be used without local knowledge as the tide runs

through at a great velocity and there is very little slack water. 

Bhavnagar (21°46'N., 72°14'E.)

World Port Index No. 48760

2.15 The port of Bhavnagar consists of a lock gate basin

capable of receiving shallow draft vessels within an area protected by a Lock Gate at the Bhavnagar New Port area and an

anchorage area about 3 miles E of Perigee Rock to accommodate deep-draft vessels for working cargo via lighters and barges. The lock gate basin lies near the head of an inlet which

mostly dries about 5 miles NNW of Gogha. Bhavnagar New

Port is entered through lock gates, 21m in width, near the entrance to the inlet. Only coasters, lighters, or harbor craft can

enter the port.

2.15 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Bhavnagar is 10.2m at

MHWS and 8.3m at MHWN. At Piram Island, high tide is 40

minutes earlier and the tidal rise is 8.9m at MHWS and 7.3m at

MHWN. 

2.15 The direction and velocity of the tidal currents are irregular

between Gopnath Point and Bhavnagar and are affected by local winds, especially in Malcolm Channel. At the S of Channel

Bank, the current divides. 

2.15 At the N end of Bhavnagar Channel, the flood and ebb curLock Gate at Bhavnagar Port
38 Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 

Pub. 173

rents have a velocity of about 3 knots at springs and 2.5 knots

at neaps. These velocities are likely to increase when freshets

occur in the Kalubhar River. The general direction of the tidal

currents is parallel to the coast.

2.15 The duration of SW at the N end of Bhavnagar Channel varies from 13 to 20 minutes at springs and from 12 to 22 minutes

at neaps. 

2.15 Depths—Limitations.—Vessels only up to 148.5m long,

with a maximum beam of 19.5m, can enter the port through

21m-wide lock gates. Depending on the tide level, a vessels

with a maximum draft of 4m can enter into the tidal basin.

2.15 A concrete jetty within the tidal basin of Bhavnagar New

Port, which is 270m long and 12.8m wide, is designed for two

berths. The following berths are also located within the New

Port area:

1. A steel jetty 56m long and 9.14m wide. Used by small

coasters and lighters

2. North Quay, 141m long and accommodating vessels

up to 131m long.

3. Akwada Jetty, 92m long, for working lighters

2.15 Vessels arrive and depart at about HW slack. They enter with

a tug ahead; another tug is available in the turning basin, where

they are usually swung and berthed starboard side-to. 

2.15 A shoal, with a least depth of 8.8m, lies about 4.3 miles NNE

of Piram Island. An 8.8m patch lies about 1.3 miles WNW of

the shoal. A 5.1m patch lies about 5.5 miles N of Piram Island.

2.15 Perigee Rock, which dries 1.2m, lies about 2.3 miles NE of

Ghogha; it shows three heads above water at the lowest spring

tides. 

2.15 Perigee Light Vessel is moored about 0.9 mile S of Perigee

Rock. Depths E and SE of Perigee Rock, to a distance of about

4 miles, are irregular. 

2.15 A shoal, which dries 2.1m, extends N from a position about

2 miles NE of Perigee Rock. 

2.15 A stranded wreck lies 2.8 miles E of Perigee Rock.

2.15 Channel Bank, which dries 5.5m and is covered with grass,

extends N from about 2 miles N of Gogha. 

2.15 On the S side of the Kalubhar River, and N of the city of

Bhavnagar, there is a steel pier which can accommodate coastal vessels of medium draft. Vessels using the pier lie alongside

with an anchor down, and can lie on the mud at LW.

2.15 Aspect.—The coast between Kuda Point and Ghogha

(21°41'N., 72°17'E.), about 4 miles NNW, is low and marshy. It

is fronted by reefs, parts of which dry, and shoalwater extends

nearly 2.5 miles offshore. Abreast Ghogha, the foreshore is

mud and shingle, drying to a distance of about 0.5 mile offshore. 

2.15 Ghogha is a walled town and the land in the vicinity is inundated at spring tides. 

2.15 The coast from Ghogha to Bhavnagar Point, about 9 miles

NNW, consists of a mud flat overgrown by low mangrove

bushes intersected by numerous small drying creeks. 

2.15 Rhuk Bank, with its S end about 7 miles NNW of Gogha, extends about 10 miles N, partially covers at HWS, and is covered with mangrove bushes. 

2.15 Bhavnagar Channel lies SW of Channel Bank.

2.15 Ruvapari Light (21°47'N., 72°14'E.) is shown from a gray

hut on piles, on the SW side of Bhavnagar Channel, about 1

mile NNW of Bhavnagar New Port. 

2.15 A tower, 25m high, is conspicuous about 0.8 mile S of

Bhavnagar New Port, and 0.5 mile inland. 

2.15 Lights, in line bearing 251°, situated at the head of Bhavnagar New Port, lead into the tidal basin.

2.15 Mariners are warned that due to frequent changes in the banks

and channels N of Piram Island, local knowledge is necessary. 

2.15 A light is shown on Bhavnagar Point and on Johnson Point,

about 1.3 miles ESE. The above points are the W and E entrance points, respectively, of the Kalubhar River. 

2.15 Beacons, in range, lead across the drying banks in the Kalubhar River. Due to the continual silting, the depths in the river

and its approaches are liable to change, and the range beacons

are liable to alteration. Dredging is continually in progress. 

2.15 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots will board vessels

in position 21°41.8'N, 72°24.9'E, not later than 2 hours before

the time of HW at Bhavnagar for docking on the same tide. Prior notice of ETA must be sent to obtain a pilot. 

2.15 If the pilot has not yet arrived when the vessel reaches the pilot boarding area, anchoring to await the pilot is not recommended, but instead to steam in reciprocal courses until the

pilot arrives. 

2.15 The pilot vessel is a tug with a black hull, buff superstructure, and a buff funnel with a black top. In addition to the usual

signals for a pilot vessel, a searchlight is flashed from time to

time at night. The pilot boat maintains radio watch on VHF

channel 16 when on duty.

2.15 Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA to the Port Office at least 48 hours in advance. 

2.15 Vessels dock and undock during daylight hours only, except

for special circumstances.

2.15 Signals.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channels 6, 12, and 16

2. Telephone: 91-278-2210221

3. Facsimile: 91-278-2211026

4. Telegraph: PORTAL BHAVNAGAR

2.15 Anchorage.—Vessels anchor in the charted anchorage area

E of Perigee Rock. Tidal currents have been reported to reach a

rate of about 6 knots at springs. 

2.15 It has been reported that several vessels have lost anchors in

the foul ground found about 1.5 miles E of Perigee Rock.

2.15 To prevent yawing during spring tides, consideration should

be given to the use of a second anchor and/or steering. The second anchor should be heaved up and dropped 1.5 hours before

and after the tidal current change to avoid fouling the first anchor. It is recommended that engines are kept on stand-by, to

be available within 20 minutes, during spring tides.

Ruvapari Light
Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 39

Pub. 173

2.15 Directions.—No directions are given due to the frequent

changes in the channels and banks, and local knowledge is necessary. 

2.15 A wide berth should be given the area around Perigee Light

Vessel due to extensive silting.

2.15 The Lock Gate at the entrance to Bhavnagar New Port harbor is unusual in that it is lifted vertically before being swung

clear and will cause a surge in the harbor area. Successive

heights of tide at HW during springs can vary by up to 2m, resulting in unequal water levels. The initial lock gate lift, at any

time between 2.5 hours and 0.5 hour before HW, can cause a

surge within the dock basin and attention to moorings and

gangways during this period is recommended.

The Gulf of Cambay—East Side

2.16 Suvali Point (21°05'N., 72°38'E.), the E entrance

point of the Gulf of Cambay, is fringed by the drying coastal

reef which extends about 1 mile W of the point. Tapti Light is

shown from a white circular stone column, 27m high, on the

point; a tomb lies close SE of the light structure. 

2.16 The coast from Suvali Point to the entrance of Tena Creek,

about 8.3 miles N, is fringed by a drying coastal reef. About 5

miles N of Suvali Point there are some sand hills, known as Suvali Hills. 

2.16 Between the entrance to Tena Creek and the entrance to Sena

Creek, about 9 miles N, the coast is fringed with thick groves

of palmyra trees. The Kim River, about 2 miles farther N, dries

in its entrance. 

2.16 Tena Bank-Outer Bhagwa Sand, one continuous narrow

bank nearly parallel with the coast, lies between the entrance to

Tena Creek and the S entrance of the Kim River. Tena Bank,

the S part of which dries, is a continuation of Outer Bhagwa

Sand, the N part of which dries in patches. Bhagwa Channel, E

of the above bank, is used only by small vessels with local

knowledge. 

2.16 Dani Point Light is shown from a steel framework structure,

26m high, about 2.5 miles SE of the entrance to the Sena River. 

2.16 Gulwala Bank, with depths of less than 11m, extends about

6.3 miles S from a position about 3.5 miles W of the S entrance

point of the Kim River. There is a drying patch near its N end. 

2.16 Between Gulwala Bank and Tena Bank and Outer Bhagwa

Sand there are several shoals with depths of less than 5.5m.

The intricate navigation required to pass through the channel E

of Gulwala Bank, with its rapid tides, should not be attempted

without local knowledge. At night, or in a large vessel, it is

necessary to keep well W of Gulwala Bank. 

2.16 The coast between the entrance of the Sena River and Luhara

Point, about 18 miles N, is low and marshy. It is intersected by

several streams and rivers, and is flooded at spring tides from 1

to 4 miles inland. 

2.16 The Narmada River flows into the Gulf of Cambay, S of Luhara Point, through a wide estuary in which there are extensive

sand banks which dry and are subject to change. The river itself

also contains many sand banks with channels between them,

which are mostly shallow and very intricate. 

2.16 Alia Bet, low and covered with small scrub, lies in the middle of the estuary.

2.16 Mariners should navigate with caution off the S part of the

estuary of the Narmada River, as the depths have changed considerably. 

2.16 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents on the E side of the

Gulf of Cambay set in a NE direction with the flood tide and in

a SW direction with the ebb, except when their direction is altered by the sand banks. 

2.17 Luhara Point (21°39'N., 72°33'E.), the N entrance

point of the Narmada River, is the highest ground in the vicinity; the land is generally low, and consists of sand hills covered

with trees. The highest sand hill, about 24m high, rises just

within Luhara Point. Luhara Point Light, with a racon, is

shown from a white tower with red diagonal stripes on the

point. 

2.17 The drying coastal bank extends about 2.5 miles SSW, and

about 1.3 miles W of the point. Bar Sands, which dry, lie close

S of the S edge of the coastal bank, and are marked W by a red

conical buoy.

2.17 Bharuch Roads is the roadstead W of the entrance to the

Narmada River. The anchorage is unprotected, but the bottom

is good holding ground of sand and mud. At the anchorage the

tidal currents set N with the flood and S with the ebb; the flood

runs for about 1 hour after the time of HW. 

2.17 Anchorage in Bharuch Roads can be obtained, in 16.5m,

with the light structure on Luhara Point bearing 024°, distant

4.5 miles and the light structure on Piram Island bearing 272°. 

2.17 The Narmada River, which is tidal for about 55 miles, can

only be navigated by vessels drawing more than 1.8m between

half flood and half ebb, and then only if possessing local

knowledge. 

2.17 Pilotage for the river can generally be obtained off the bar of

the river. 

2.17 Kerselea Bank, lying between Luhara Point and Alia Bet, is

an extensive area of mud and sand, which dries up to 5.5m. 

2.17 Bharuch Channel, the principal entrance of the river, leads W

and N of Kerselea Bank. Vessels can pass either N or S of Bar

Sands. 

2.17 Tides—Currents.—The flood current entering the Narmada

River flows until about 1 hour after the time of HW, and sometimes attains a velocity of 5 to 6 knots. The ebb sets out strongly and runs occasionally until 1 hour after the time of LW.

During the flood tide there are heavy overfalls on the outer

edge of the bar.

2.18 The coast between Luhara Point and Ban Creek,

about 4.5 miles N, consists of moderately-high sand hills. Then

to the entrance to the Dhadar River, about 7.5 miles farther

NNE, the coast is low and composed of sand and mud. 

2.18 Dahej (21°42'N., 72°32'E.) (World Port Index No. 48674)

and Gandhar, about 3.8 and 15 miles, respectively, NNE of Luhara Point, are the only large villages near the coast. They both

have conspicuous buildings, which can be seen from a considerable distance. Dahej is an open roadstead, used for the unloading of bulk fertilizers to barges.

2.18 The GCPTCL Jetty (Offshore Marine Jetty), a bulk chemical

facility, is a 241m-long T-headed jetty, with alongside depths

of 16 to 18m, situated about 2.3 miles NW of Lahura Point.

Vessels up to 60,000 dwt, with lengths of 111m to 215m and a
40 Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 

Pub. 173

maximum draft of 14.5m, can be accommodated. 

2.18 The Petronet LNG Jageshwar Jetty (IPCL) is a 1.5-mile long

trestle jetty, with a pier head length of 84m. Vessels up to

90,000 dwt, with a maximum length of 300m, a maximum

draft of 12.5m, and a maximum beam of 45m, can be accommodated. 

2.18 The ETA for Dahej should be sent 72 hours, 48 hours, 12

hours, and 6 hours in advance.

2.18 Pilotage is compulsory for all but the fertilizer anchorage.

Request for the fertilizer anchorage should be made at 24 hours

in advance to the Assistant Port Officer. Request for the IPCL

and GCPTCL berths should be made via the agent. Pilots board

5 miles W of the Petronet LNG Jageshwar Jetty (IPCL). 

2.18 A drying flat extends from 1 to 3 miles offshore between Luhara Point and the S entrance of the Dhadar River. The S part

of this flat is steep-to at its W edge.

2.18 Anchorage can be taken, in about 17m, with Luhara Point

Light bearing 136°, about 5.25 miles.

2.19 The Dhadar River nearly dries about 1.5 miles within

the entrance; local knowledge is necessary to enter the river. 

2.19 Devjagan Light is shown periodically from a circular stone

column, 13m high, on Tankari Point, the N entrance point of

the Dhadar River. A pagoda lies about 0.5 mile NW of the light

structure. 

2.19 Makra Bank, which dries near its center, lies with its SE extremity about 6 miles NW of Luhara Point and about 4 miles

offshore. The bank is narrow and extends about 10.3 miles N. 

2.19 Mariners are warned that owing to frequent changes in the

banks and channels in the upper part of the Gulf of Cambay, local knowledge is necessary. 

2.19 Tankari Road, the roadstead off the entrance to the Dhadar

River, can be identified by the light structure and pagoda on

Tankari Point. Vessels can anchor with the light structure bearing 047°, distant about 3.8 miles, and the buildings at Gandhar

bearing 086°.

2.19 The flood current in Tankari Road continues to run for about

1 hour after the time of HW. The greatest velocity of the tidal

currents in the roadstead is 6 knots at spring tides. 

Head of the Gulf of Cambay 

2.20 The coast of the W side of the head of the gulf from

Johnston Point (21°49'N., 72°13'E.) to the entrance of the

Bhadar River, about 26 miles NNE, is composed chiefly of

mangrove jungle, extending several miles inland. The sand

bank fronting this coast dries and extends from 1 mile to 4

miles offshore.

2.20 Mal Bank, the S end of which lies about 7.5 miles E of

Johnston Point, is a large sand bank lying in the middle of the

head of the gulf, and extends about 4 miles N. 

2.20 There are channels on the either side of Mal Bank, each

about 1 mile wide in the fairway, but local knowledge is necessary. Malcolm Channel is the W channel. 

2.20 Khambhat Channel leads NE into the estuary of the Mahi

River from the N end of Mal Bank. Khambhat (22°18'N.,

72°37'E.), the chief town in the area, lies on the N side of the

estuary of the Mahi River. 

2.20 Storm signals are shown at Khambhat; the Brief System is

used. Further information on these storm signals may be found

in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

2.20 Bore Rocks, with depths of less than 1.8m, lie about 6.5 miles

SE of the entrance to the Bhadar River, on the NW side of

Khambhat Channel. They lie on the N entrance of a channel that

leads between the banks at the entrance of the Sabarmati River. 

2.20 The shores of the Sabarmati River are rather elevated and

well-cultivated. Sikotar Mata (22°19'N., 72°24'E.) is a pagoda, 5.8m high, with a flagstaff, on the E entrance point of the

Sabarmati River.

2.20 In the upper part of the Gulf of Cambay, the tidal current sets

NE with the flood into the Mahi River, and SW with the ebb,

with a velocity of 4.5 to 6 knots. 

2.20 Tidal bores form near the entrance to the Sabarmati River;

one travels up that river while another travels up Khambhat

Channel and the Mahi River. Each sweeps through the channels as a line of disturbed and breaking water, and tends to alter

the configuration of those channels.

2.20 In the Mahi River, the bore may be as much as 2.4m high,

and attain a velocity of 10 knots at the highest spring tides. The

magnitude of the bore varies with the range of the tide. The

bore is not perceptible at neap tides, but becomes increasingly

prominent as spring tides approach. The bore preceding the

higher HW is greater than that preceding the lower of two successive HWs. 

2.20 The bore in the Sabarmati River is similar but less pronounced. 

2.20 The flood current commences at a great velocity with the

passage of the bore, then decreases in strength for a time, and

finally attains its full strength about 45 minutes after the passing of the bore. 

The Gulf of Cambay to Daman

2.21 In the N part of the coast, between Suvali Point

(21°05'N., 72°38'E.) and Daman, is an alluvial belt through

 GCPTCL Jetty Home Page

http://www.gcptcl.com

 IPCL Petronet Home Page

http://www.petronetlng.com

GCPTCL/IPCL—Contact Information

GCPTCL Jetty Petronet (IPCL Jetty)

VHF VHF channels 

16 and 77 VHF channel 14

Telephone

91-2641-256064

91-2641-256604 91-2641-257249

91-2641-256605

Facsimile 91-2641-256048 91-2641-257252

E-mail site@gcptpl.com idmtportcontrol@ipcl.co.in
Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 41

Pub. 173

which the Tapti River forms a deep and fertile delta. Along the

S part of this coast are small hillocks of drifted sand; the coast

in some parts is watered by springs and covered with a thick

growth of creepers and date palms. Through the river mouths

and inlets the tide runs up behind the sandhills and floods a

large area of salt marshes. The rise of the tide renders these rivers and inlets accessible at HW, but local knowledge is necessary. 

2.21 The Tapti River lies between Suvali Point, previously described in paragraph 2.16, and the N entrance point of the

Mindhola River, about 3.5 miles E. The river and its entrance

are encumbered with numerous sand banks, several of which

are dry. The river is tidal for 15 miles, and small craft can ascend the river to Surat, about 14 miles above the entrance. A

vessel of 1.8m draft can only navigate in the river at more than

half-tide. 

2.21 Directions for entering the river cannot be given, as the sands

and channels are continually changing; the navigable channel

can only be pointed out by local pilots. The bar dries, but there

is a spring rise of about 6.1m, and off the city of Surat there is a

pool with depths of from 3.7 to 5.5m. 

2.21 Magdala is a lighterage port 5 miles within the Tapti River

on the S bank, with a 107m long wharf. 

2.21 Storm signals are shown at Magdala; the Brief System is

used. Further information on these storm signals may be found

in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

2.21 Surat lies in a bend on the E bank of the river and extends

about 1.5 miles along the river front. A splendid girder bridge

spans the river at the city. 

2.21 Surat Roads is the name given to the anchorage off the entrance of the Tapti River, about 2 miles SW of Suvali Point. 

2.21 Tides—Currents.—The flood current sets N and continues

to run for 1 hour after the time of HW. At the outer anchorage,

during springs, the tidal currents are very strong, especially the

ebb, which sets S at a velocity of 4 to 5 knots; nearer the bar

the tidal currents are weaker. The tide frequently falls more

than 1.8m before the tidal current turns S.

2.21 Directions.—Vessels bound for Surat Roads from the S

should, from abreast Daman, set course for the roads, keeping

in depths of 9.1 to 18.3m. 

2.21 Between the Mindhola River and the Purna River, about 9

miles SSE, there is a low sandy plain with some scattered

palmyra trees. A black beacon, 14m high with white bands, lies

on the N entrance point of the Purna River. 

2.21 Warsi Borsi Light is shown from a white, square, concrete

tower with red bands 0.6 mile NNW of the entrance point of

the Purna River. 

2.21 A tomb, with a white dome about 3.5 miles farther SE, is

conspicuous among the dark green trees, especially when seen

fromthe SW.

2.21 The entrance to the Ambika River lies about 10.5 miles SSE

of the Purna River. Kanai Creek lies just N of the entrance to

the Ambika River. Kanai Creek Light is shown from a white,

round, concrete tower with concrete tower with black bands 0.6

mile NW of the N entrance point of the creek.

2.21 Caution.—A dangerous wreck, with masts showing, is reported (2006) to lie about 15 miles WNW of of the entrance to

the Ambika River. 

2.21 The Auranga River (20°38'N., 75°53'E.) flows into the sea

through Bulsar Khari, a creek. A light is shown on the S entrance point of Bulsar Khari. Hills, about 31m high, are about

5.5 miles NE of the light structure and about 5 miles inland.

Shoals, with depths of less than 1.8m, lie about 3.5 miles W,

and 4.3 miles SW, respectively, of Bulsar Khari. A 5.8m patch

lies about 9 miles WSW of Bulsar Khari. 

2.21 Anchorage can be taken by large vessels, in 7.3 to 9.1m,

about 8.5 miles W of the entrance to Bulsar Khari.

2.21 The Par River flows into the sea through Umaradi Creek,

about 6 miles S of Bulsar Khari. Parnera Hill, 184m high with

a fort on it, lies about 3.5 miles ENE of the creek entrance. 

2.22 Daman (Damoa) (20°25'N., 72°50'E.) lies on both

sides of the Damanganga River; itcan be identified by the forts

on either side of the river entrance and by two square steeples

and its white buildings. Other landmarks are a 109m hill, with

an idgah, or Mohammedan place of prayer, on its summit,

about 2.8 miles NE of the river entrance; Indragad Hill, 108m

high, with a fort in ruins on its summit, about 3.3 miles SSE of

the river entrance; and Jogmari Hill, 231m high, about 2 miles

farther SSE.

2.22 Daman Light is shown from a white masonry tower on the

bastion of the fort on the S side of the entrance. 

2.22 The bar at the mouth of the Damanganga River is flat, mostly

hard sand, except N of the N point of the river entrance, where

the rocky ground projects some distance offshore; the bar has

0.3m or less over it. 

2.22 Vessels not exceeding 500 grt sometimes enter the river at

HW in fine weather and moor abreast the forts, where there

were depths of 4.1 to 5.2m, soft mud. Local knowledge is necessary. 

2.22 Anchorage can be taken, in 9m, about 4.5 miles W of the river entrance. 

Daman to Bassein Creek

2.23 The coast between Daman and Vadhavan Point, about

30 miles SSW, is bordered by extensive reefs and foul ground

extending up to 4 miles offshore. Vessels should not approach

this coast in depths of less than 18.3m when navigating in the

vicinity.

2.23 Between Daman and Umbargaon, about 13 miles SSW, the

coast is low, fringed with bushes, and backed by several conspicuous hills. Indragad Hill and Jogmari Hill were previously

described with Daman in paragraph 2.22. Dhodi Phar, 148m

high, is conspicuous about 7 miles S of Daman. Patia Hill, 98m

high, lies about 3.3 miles SW of Dhodi Phar. 

2.23 A light is periodically shown from a white framework tower,

10.7m high, at Maroli, about 6 miles N of Umbargaon.

2.23 Umargam (Umbargaon) (20°12'N., 72°45'E.), a small town

with a ruined tower, lies on the S side of the entrance of the

Varoli River. 

2.23 Umargam Light, with a racon, is shown from a white concrete tower with red bands, close SSW of the ruined tower.

2.23 Storm signals are shown at Maroli and Umargam; the Brief

System is used. Further information on these storm signals

may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide)

South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”
42 Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 

Pub. 173

2.23 A partially-wooded range, the summits of which are conspicuous from seaward, lies from 7 to 12 miles inland, between

Umargam and Mahim, about 34 miles S. High Land of St.

John, a rounded mountain 540m high, slopes gradually N and S

from its center about 9 miles SSE of Umbargaon. Muslia (Maha Luxmi), about 9.5 miles SE of the High Land of St. John,

has a pointed summit, 458m high. Kaldurg Fort, about 6 miles

NE of Mahim, is 468m high and resembles a castle when seen

from NW. 

2.23 The coast between Umargam and Gulur Point, about 8 miles

S, is low and sandy. The latter point is low and covered with

coconut trees. A detached 9.4m rocky patch lies 6.5 miles offshore, 6 miles NW of Gulur Point.

2.23 Dahanu (19°59'N., 72°43'E.) is a village on the N side of the

entrance of Khonda Creek. A light is shown at Dahanu. 

2.23 Vadhavan Point, about 4 miles farther SW, is low and covered with mangrove bushes. Foul ground extends nearly 2

miles W and about 2.8 miles SSW of the point. 

2.24 Tarapur Point (19°50'N., 72°39'E.) is bordered by

foul ground extending about 0.8 mile W; a narrow reef extends

about 2.8 miles NNW from the N extremity of the point. A

light is shown from a white square masonry tower, 23m high

with black bands, on the N extremity of the point. 

2.24 Tarapur Harbor, formed by the barrier reefs extending SSW

from Vadhavan Point and NNW from Tarapur Point, is only accessible to small coastal vessels.

2.24 The coast between Tarapur Point and Satpati, about 7.5 miles

S, is low, rocky, and densely wooded. Vessels should not proceed into depths of less than 14.6m off this part of the coast. 

2.24 A light is shown at Satpati and at Nawapur, about 3.5 miles

N. Storm signals are shown at Nawapur; the Brief System is

used. Further information on these storm signals may be found

in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

2.24 The village of Mahim (19°39'N., 72°43'E.) lies on the coast,

about 5 miles SSE of Satpati. Kelve, about 2 miles farther S,

lies on the N side of the entrance of Danda Creek. A small detached rock, with a fort on it, lies just off the entrance of the

creek. A light is shown at Kelve. 

2.24 A detached 5.5m patch lies about 4 miles WSW of Mahim.

Drying reefs extend about 2 miles off this part of the coast.

2.24 Ussapur Rock, 16m high, lies on the coastal reef about 4

miles S of Kelve, and about 0.5 mile offshore. Drying rocks extend about 1 mile W of the rock. 

2.25 Arnala Island (19°28'N., 72°44'E.), 4m high with a

fort on it, lies about 0.5 mile offshore, and is fringed by rocks

on all sides. Shoal water, with depths of less than 5m, extends

about 1 mile W of the island. Arnala Island has been reported

to give good radar returns at 27 miles.

2.25 Arnala Light is shown from a white framework tower on the

coast, abreast the S end of Arnala Island. 

2.25 Agashi Bay, entered N of Arnala Island, is very shallow, encumbered by shoals, and can only be navigated by a small vessel at about the time of HW. 

2.25 The coast between the low point abreast Arnala Island and

the N entrance of Bassein Creek, about 8 miles SSE, is very

low; shoal water, with depths of less than 5m, extends about 2

miles offshore. 

Bassein Creek to Mumbai (Bombay)

2.26 Dongri Point (19°18'N., 72°48'E.), the S entrance

point of Bassein Creek, is a bluff point as seen from seaward. It

rises to an elevation of 94m about 0.5 mile S of the point, and

then slopes gradually to level country about 2 miles farther S. 

2.26 A light is shown from about mid-September to mid-June.

2.26 Poshpir, a rocky islet 13m high, lies about 3 miles NW of

Dongri Point. 

2.26 Drying rocks extend about 2 miles WNW of the same point.

When there is no wind the sea does not break on the drying

rocks and the sand banks in the entrance to Bassein Creek, and

there are no indications of their existence.

2.26 Depths of less than 5m extend about 3.5 miles W of the entrance to Bassein Creek. 

2.26 North of Bassein Creek there are several landmarks conspicous from seaward. Girij Hill, a small round hill 53m high,

lies about 4.5 miles N of Dongri Point, and about 2 miles inland. Kamandurg, about 9 miles E of Girij Hill, is conical and

652m high. This mountain, with the high land of Salsette Island to S, cannot be mistaken by a vessel N of Mumbai (Bombay). 

2.26 The conspicuous plateau of Tungar, about 2 miles long in a

N-S direction, and attaining an elevation of 662m, is located

about 4 miles NNW of Kamandurg. 

2.26 Bassein Creek, entered between Dongri Point and a point

about 1 mile NNE, is a tortuous stream which can be navigated

only by small vessels with local knowledge and a draft of not

more than 3.7m. The entrance of the creek is always difficult

except at slack water, as both flood and ebb current set across

the channel. The sea breaks heavily across the entrance during

the Southwest Monsoon.

2.26 Tides—Currents.—Currents in Bassein Creek attain a velocity of 3 knots at springs, but about 5 miles above the entrance they decreases to 1.5 and 2 knots. In the creek the tidal

currents continue to set about 1 hour after the times of HW and

LW. Slack water lasts for about 15 to 25 minutes. 

2.26 Vasai lies about 0.5 mile inland on the N side of the creek. A

fort, with the citadel near the middle, lies S of Bassein near the

landing place. 

2.26 Storm signals are shown at Vasai; the Brief System is used.

Further information on these storm signals may be found in

Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic

Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

2.26 The village of Dongri lies on the S side of the creek, about 1

mile SSE of Dongri Point. 

2.27 Panju Island (19°20'N., 72°51'E.) is connected to the

mainland N and S by an iron railroad bridge; the island is low

and swampy. 

2.27 Salsette Island lies between Bassein Creek and Mumbai

(Bombay). The mountain range on the island has several conspicuous peaks; the central and highest, Kanheri (Khanher

Peak) (19°13'N., 72°55'E.), 462m high, lies about 9.5 miles SE

of Dongri Point. From the W, Kanheri appears to have a flat

summit. Shendur, about 3 miles NNE of Kanheri and the N

peak of the island, is a sharp detached peak, 459m high. 

2.27 An aviation light is shown from a 27m tower near the S end

of Salsette Island. 

2.27 The W side of Salsette Island is fronted by islands and islets,
Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 43

Pub. 173

which are separated from it by creeks and drying flats. Foul

ground extends about 1.5 miles W from these islands and islets. 

2.27 Dharavi Island, the N and largest of the islands facing Salsette Island, extends from Dongri Point to Manori Point, about

7 miles S. The latter point is a bluff of dark bare rock, 30m

high. 

2.27 Utan Light is shown from a black and white square tower,

12m high, on a salient point about 2 miles SSE of Dongri

Point. 

2.27 Storm signals are shown at Utan; the Brief System is used.

Further information on these storm signals may be found in

Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic

Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.” 

2.27 Gori Rock, a conspicuous sharp black pinnacle, 30m high,

about 3.3 miles NNE of Manori Point, and about 1.5 miles inland, forms a good landmark. A temple, with a white dome,

lies on the N summit of a round hill, 35m high, about 2.8 miles

E of Gorai Rock; the dome is conspicuous from seaward. 

2.27 High Rock, a sharp pinnacle, 9m high, about 2 miles SW of

Dongri Point, lies on a drying reef. Outer Islet, 4m and composed of sand, lies at the S end of this drying reef, about 1 mile

S of High Rock. 

2.27 Green Islet, from 0.9 to 1.2m high, covered with short green

scrub and surrounded by a ledge of rocks, lies about 3 miles

NNW of Manori Point and about 0.8 mile offshore. Marva Island, low and covered with palm trees, lies close E of Manori

Point. Reefs extend about 0.5 mile W of Madh Island.

2.28 Ambu Islet (19°08'N., 72°47'E.), at the SW edge of

the reefs, is low, covered with palms, and has an old watchtower on it. Mehti Khada, a small rock, 4.3m high and steep-to on

its W side, lies about 0.5 mile W of Ambu Islet. 

2.28 Madh Island, about 36m high and well-cultivated with coconut and fruit trees, lies close S of Marva Island. There are some

ruins on its summit; a fort in ruins stands on its SE point. 

2.28 Harvey Patches (Hervey Patches), with a depth of 1.8m,

about 1 mile S of Madh Island, are marked N by a buoy from

October to May. The sea always breaks over Harvey Patches. A

dangerous wreck lies about 4.5 miles W of Harvey Patches and

is marked close W by a lighted buoy. 

2.28 Juhu Island, with its S extremity about 4 miles SE of Ambu

Islet, has a sandy coast and is covered with coconut and date

palms. Andheri Hill, 61m high, isolated and bare, lies about 1

mile E of the N end of Juhu Island. 

2.28 Uarashi, a reef, lies about 1 mile W of the S end of Juhu Island. A light is shown from October to May on the S end of

Uarashi. Some rocks, one of which is awash, lie about 0.8 mile

NW of the S end of the reef. 

2.28 Shoals, with a least depth of 4.6m and 4m, lie about 1.5

miles W and NW, respectively, of Bandra Point, the S extremity of Salsette Island. 

2.28 The coast between Worli Point, the NW extremity of Bombay Island, and Malabar Point, about 5.3 miles SSW, is fringed

by drying reefs and shoal water, with depths of less than 5.5m

extending up to 1 mile offshore in the N part and about 0.5 mile

off the S part. 

2.28 A conspicuous TV tower lies at an elevation of 305m, 1.5

miles SSE of Worli Point. 

Mumbai (Bombay) (18°58'N., 72°52'E.)

World Port Index No. 48840

2.29 The city of Mumbai (Bombay), on Mumbai Island

(Bombay Island), is the largest city of India and the principal

seaport on its W coast. Mumbai Harbor (Bombay Harbor) lies

between Mumbai Island (Bombay Island) and Trombay Island

to W and N, and Karanja Island and the mainland to E and S. It

is the only natural deep-water port on the W coast of India. The

harbor contains several islands, rocks, and shoals, with numerous bays and inlets indenting its shores. 

2.29 The direction and management of the port, including pilotage, berthing, docking, and wharves, are administered by the

Mumbai Port Trust. The daily operations of the port are carried

out by the Chairman and Deputy Chairman.

2.29 The facilities of the port are mainly on the E side of Mumbai

Island (Bombay Island). There are also tanker terminals at Pir

Pau (Butcher Island) and at Jawahar Dweep (Trombay Island).

2.29 Winds—Weather.—Visibility may be reduced by heavy

rain during the Southwest Monsoon. A smoky haze frequently

hangs over the area from November to March, mostly during

the early morning and occasionally in the evening. 

2.29 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise for Mumbai Harbor

(Bombay Harbor) is 4.4m at MHWS and 3.3m at MHWN. 

2.29 The velocity and direction of the tidal currents in the approaches to Mumbai (Bombay) are generally as described below, but they are greatly influenced by winds and heavy rains.

2.29 The tide does not set fairly through the channel, but the flood

sweeps E over the foul ground of Thal Shoal (18°48'N.,

72°50'E.). During rains in the Southwest Monsoon the ebb sets

strongly W out of Dharamtar Creek. 

2.29 The velocity of strong spring tides between Thal Shoal and

Prongs Reef (18°53'N., 72°48'E.) is from 2.5 to 3 knots and

perhaps as much as 4 knots during the rains. 

2.29 Between Thal Shoal and a position about 4 miles WNW, the

flood current sets between ESE and ENE, resulting in a more N

direction as the velocity increases. In East Channel Swatch, E

of Thal Shoal, it sets about NNE, taking a more E direction as

it crosses the mouth of Dharamtar Creek. 

2.29 Off the SW extremity of Prongs Reef, the flood current at

first sets ESE and, as the velocity increases, shifts to the NE.

East of Prongs Reef, as far as Sunk Rock, it sets between NNE

and NE.

2.29 On the S side of the harbor entrance the ebb current starts

setting WSW across the mouth of Dharamtar Creek, changing

to SSW upon the vessel’s approach to Thal Shoal, then more S

as a vessel continues S. 

2.29 From Thal Shoal extending WNW across the dredged approach channel to a position about 4 miles away, the current

sets about SW. 

2.29 On the N side of the harbor entrance, the current ebbs SW

going from Sunk Rock until passing abeam Prongs Light,

where it changes to W, then becoming SSW as the tide

strengthens.

 Port Authority of Mumbai (Bombay)

http://www.mumbaiport.gov.in
44 Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 

Pub. 173

2.29 The velocity and direction of the tidal currents within Mumbai Harbor (Bombay Harbor) are generally as described below,

but can also be greatly influenced by winds and heavy rains.

2.29 Tidal currents within Mumbai Harbor (Bombay Harbor)

have velocities that range between 0.75 knot and 3 knots.

2.29 On the E side of the harbor, the flood current sets NE abeam

Karanja Island, turning more ENE upon passing Karanja Beacon. The current sets N between Butcher Island and Elephanta

Island, then NE approaching Trombay Island. 

2.29 On the W side of the harbor, from Sunk Rock to Cross Island, the flood current sets NNE, with a velocity of about 2

knots. The flood current splits N of Tucker Beacon (18°58'N.,

72°51'E.), setting N until abeam Mazagaon Pier, then turning

NE and ENE, joining the current from the E side of the harbor

N of Butcher Island.

2.29 On the E side of the harbor, the ebb current sets SW in the

channel between Butcher Island and Elephanta Island, continuing out of the harbor past Karanja Island, then turning WSW

upon passing abeam the entrance Dharamtar Creek.

2.29 On the W side of the harbor, from Cross Island to inside

Middle Ground Islet, the ebb current sets SSW, and then to

Sunk Rock in a SW direction. From Cross Island to E of Middle Ground Islet, in mid-channel, the ebb current sets from SW

to SSW; from there to Sunk Rock it sets SW, but at the first of

the ebb the set is more W. 

2.29 The ebb current on the W side of the harbor occurs 30 to 35

minutes earlier than on the E side, and during strong spring

tides it can begin 40 minutes to 1 hour sooner. 

2.29 From Trombay Island until passing abeam Mazagaon Pier

the current ebbs SW.

2.29 Inshore and near the Indira Dock wall, during the Southwest

Monsoon, the ebb current occurs about 45 minutes before the

time of HW at Mumbai. This is important for vessels docking. 

2.29 The ebb current sets SSW from abeam Cross Island until

passing between Middle Ground Island and South Breakwater,

whereas the ebb sets more S to SSW across the dredged channel and waters E of Middle Ground Island.

2.29 From Middle Ground Island to Sunk Rock, the ebb current

sets between S and SSW, but at the start of the ebb the set is

more W flowing.

2.29 The flood current in the vicinity of the tidal basin and wet

docks runs parallel to the South Breakwater, then ENE past the

entrance to the tidal basin, joining the main flood current setting N passing E of Middle Ground Island. 

2.29 An eddy current flows S along the E side of Ballard Pier,

then turns W into the tidal basin. This eddy current also flows

close E to the head of South Breakwater before turning SW

alongside the breakwater. The effects of this eddy have been

observed up to 100m E of the SE extension of Ballard Pier.

Both the flood and eddy currents run strongly past the head of

the South Breakwater, causing ships to sheer violently in this

area.

2.29 Depths—Limitations.—Mumbai Harbor (Bombay Harbor)

is approached through a series of dredged channels commencing about 4 miles SW of Prongs Reef Light. The initial depth is

dredged to 11.1m for about 2 miles heading, then to 11m for

about another 2 miles, then to 10.9m continuing into the harbor

entrance to a point about 1.3 miles ENE of Middle Ground Island, then to 10.8m until the main channel, marked by range

lights in line bearing 085°. The main channel continues S then

SE of Elephanta Island, then passing NE of Jawaharlal Nehru

Port, and has a maintained depth of 11m. At the point where

the main channel starts there is another dredged channel, with

range lights in line bearing 202.7°, continuing NNE between

Butcher Island and Elephanta Island, to about 18°58'N, then

with a depth of 8.7m into Trombay Channel. 

2.29 Mariners should navigate with caution through these maintained channels since they are subject to silting, especially during times of strong monsoon winds. For latest information

concerning maintained depths of these channel, mariners

should contact the Mumbai Port Authority. 

2.29 The maximum drafts for alongside berths are subject to

change due to siltation and dredging. The Port Authority at

Mumbai should be contacted to determine the maximum allowable draft at any specific time, as well as any possible restrictions on berthing or departures during night hours.

2.29 The three enclosed wet docks in the harbor are named Indira,

Victoria, and Prince’s. In addition to these wet docks, there are

also, along the harbor front, many “bundars,” which are open

wharves and basins that have extensive facilities for the working and storage of many different types of cargo. Further information on these areas is, as follows:

1. Indira Dock is entered through an entrance lock,

228m in length and 30.5m in width. The entrance lock is located close NNW of Ballard Pier. 

Hughes Drydock is entered from Indira Dock. It can accommodate vessels up to a maximum length of 304m, and

30.4m in width. The pumps in Hughes Drydock have been

electrified and are capable of increasing the water level to

Sunk Rock Light
Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 45

Pub. 173

10.5m at all berths within Indira Dock at any time.

Ballard Pier is the continuation of the W side of Indira

Dock entrance lock and is the main terminal for passenger

vessels. The N part of the pier is for container vessel accommodation.

2. Victoria Dock is entered through a swinging lock

gate from the E side for vessels with a maximum width of

16.76m. The maximum loa for vessels during the day is

152m and only 122m during the night. The maximum entry

draft is 6.7m at all times.

There is a channel connecting this dock with Prince’s

Dock that is 19.5m in width close N from the entrance. 

3. Prince’s Dock is entered through a swinging lock

gate with an entrance width of 20m and a dredged channel

depth of 6.6m. The maximum width for a ship that can enter

Prince’s Dock is 13.8m. 

Ships can be taken into Prince’s Dock only from about 2

hours 45 minutes before the time of HW to 30 minutes after

the time of HW. They cannot leave the dock after the time of

HW because the ebb current commences in that vicinity

about 90 minutes before the time of HW and sets directly

down on to the reef N of Cross Island at about the time of

HW. 

There is a channel connecting this dock with Victoria

Dock that is 19.5m in width close S from the entrance to

Prince’s Dock.

2.29 General berthing information for the wet docks plus the deepwater petroleum and crude oil facilities at Butcher Island and Pir

Pau in Trombay Channel are given in the accompanying table titled Mumbai (Bombay)—Berthing Facilities.

2.29 In Jawahar Dweep, loaded tankers are berthed at HW and

two tugs are required to assist. It is compulsory to test astern

power during the approach and before berthing at the terminal.

There is a turning circle, best shown on the chart, found close E

of Berth JD-4.

2.29 Jawaharlal Nehru Port (Nhava Seva) (18°57'N., 72°57'E.)

(World Port Index No. 48845) is a separate port in the E part of

Mumbai Harbor (Bombay Harbor) on the mainland SE of Elephanta Island. The facility is administered by a separate port

authority from Mumbai (Bombay). The port provides container

berths, bulk cargo berths, and bulk liquid berths accommodating vessels to 80,000 dwt, a ship repairyard, and a linkspan for

ro-ro traffic. Berth information can be found in the accompanying table titled Jawaharlal Nehru—Berthing Facilities.

Jawaharlal Nehru Port 

http://www.jnport.com

Mumbai (Bombay)—Berthing Facilities

Berth Maximum Vessel Remarks

Length Draft

Indira Dock

Berth No. 1 180m 8.84-9.14m Containers

Berth No. 2 158m 8.84-9.14m Containers

Berth No. 3 158m 8.84-9.14m Containers

Berth No. 4 158m 8.84-9.14m Containers

Berth No. 5 158m 8.84-9.14m Containers 

Berth No. 6 158m 8.84-9.14m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 7 152m 8.84-9.14m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 8 152m 8.84-9.14m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 9 152m 8.84-9.14m General cargo and tankers

Berth No. 10 152m 8.84-9.14m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 11 152m 8.84-9.14m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 12 152m 8.84-9.14m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 12A 180m 8.84-9.14m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 12B 180m 8.84-9.14m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 13 158m 8.84-9.14m General and bulk

Berth No. 13A 180m 8.84-9.14m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 13B 180m 8.84-9.14m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 14 158m 8.84-9.14m General and bulk

Berth No. 15 158m 8.84-9.14m General and bulk
46 Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 

Pub. 173

Berth No. 16 158m 8.84-9.14m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 17 158m 8.84-9.14m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 18 183m 7.5m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 19 168m 7.5m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 20 168m 7.5m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 21 168m 7.5m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 22 168m 7.0m Ship repairs

Berth No. 23 122m 7.0m Ship repairs

Jetty End 130m 8.84-9.14m Heavy lifts

Victoria Dock (see Note 1)

Berth No. 1 122m 6.7m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 2 122m 6.7m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 3 122m 6.7m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 4 122m 6.7m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 5 122m 6.7m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 6 122m 6.7m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 7 122m 6.7m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 8 122m 6.7m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 9 152m 6.7m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 10 152m 6.7m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 11 152m 6.7m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 12 100m 6.7m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 13 100m 6.7m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 14 100m 6.7m Multi-purpose

Berth No. 15 138m 6.7m Holding berth for tugs and launches

Prince’s Dock (see Note 2)

Berth A 138m 6.1-6.4m Multi-purpose

Berth B 138m 6.1-6.4m Multi-purpose

Berth C 140m 6.1-6.4m Multi-purpose

Berth D 140m 6.1-6.4m Multi-purpose

Berth F 140m 6.1-6.4m Multi-purpose

Berth G 100m 6.1-6.4m Multi-purpose

Berths K, L, and M 431m 6.1-6.4m Ship repairs

Berths N and O 212m 6.1-6.4m Multi-purpose

Berths P and Q 212m 6.1-6.4m Multi-purpose

Jetty End 75m 6.1-6.4m Ship repairs

Jawahar Dweep (see Note 3)

JD-1 244m 11.6m Petroleum products and chemicals

Mumbai (Bombay)—Berthing Facilities

Berth Maximum Vessel Remarks

Length Draft
Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 47

Pub. 173

JD-2 244m 11.0m Petroleum products and chemicals

JD-3 244m 11.6m Petroleum products and chemicals

JD-4 493m 14.3m Petroleum products and chemicals

Pir Pau (see Note 4)

Old Jetty 174m 9.7m Petroleum products and chemicals

New Jetty 197m 12.0m LPG, petroleum products, and chemicals

Ballard Pier (see Note 5)

Ballard Pier Extension 232m 10.0m Passengers and containers

Ballard Pier Station 244m 9.5m Containers

New Ferry Wharf

Ferry Jetty 312m 3.2m Passengers

Ferry Berths 249m 3.2m Ferries

Notes:

1. This is a semi-tidal dock area. It has been reported (2010) that this area will be filled and closed eventually.

2. This is the oldest of the three enclosed wet docks. It is also a a semi-tidal dock area and has been reported

(2010) that this area will also be filled and closed eventually.

3. Berths 1-3 are alongside moorings and Berth 4 is handled alongside a jetty, all of which extend from

Butcher Island into Trombay Channel.

4. New Jetty extends into Trombay Channel close NNE of Berths 1-3 extending E off Butcher Island and Old

Jetty extends a much shorter distance into Pir Pau Deep. Both jetties have turning circles alongside as best shown

on the chart..

5. Ballard Pier is located close SSE of Indira Dock.

Jawaharlal Nehru—Berthing Facilities

Berth Length Depth 

alongside

Maximum vessel

Remarks

Draft Length

Jawaharlal Nehru Port (JNP) Container Terminal

CB01 Total quay 

length of 

680m

13.5m 12.5m 305m Containers. (See Notes 1 and 2)

CB02 13.5m 12.5m 305m Containers. (See Notes 1 and 2)

CB03 13.5m 12.5m 305m Containers. (See Notes 1 and 2)

Nhava Sheva International Container Terminal

CB04 and CB05 600m 13.5m 12.5m 305m Containers. (See Notes 2 and 3)

Gateway Terminals (India) Pvt. Ltd.

GT1 and GT02 712m 13.5m 12.5m 305m Containers. (See Note 2)

Jawaharlal Nehru Bharat Petroleum Corporation Ltd (BPCL) Liquid Bulk Terminal

Twin Berth Jetty 300m — 12.0-13.5m — Petroleum products, chemicals, and 

other liquid products. (See Note 4)

LB01 (Seaside) 250m — 12.5m 250m Crude oil, kerosene, light deisel oil, 

and petroleum products. (See Note 5)

LB02 (Shoreside) 185m — 10.0m 185m Crude oil, kerosene, light deisel oil, 

and petroleum products. (See Note 6) 

Mumbai (Bombay)—Berthing Facilities

Berth Maximum Vessel Remarks

Length Draft
48 Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 

Pub. 173

2.29 Offshore Oil Development Areas.—An extensive area of

producing oil fields and exploration areas lies off the Indian

coast and the approaches to the port of Mumbai (Bombay). Numerous derricks, oil production platforms, wells, SPM, and

other obstructions impede safe navigation of the area. 

2.29 Indian authorities have established recommended routes to

aid traffic transiting the area, or bound for the port of Mumbai

(Bombay), which may be seen on the appropriate chart. 

2.29 Vessels are advised not to approach within 2.5 miles of production platforms, and are prohibited from passing within

500m of any installation or structure. 

2.29 Submarine oil and gas pipelines have been established from

some producing fields to the entrance of Mumbai Harbor

(Bombay Harbor). Vessels should exercise caution when navigating in this vicinity. 

2.29 Well heads exist in position 19°20'N, 72°03'E and in position

19°44'N, 72°01'E about 53 and 70 miles NW of the entrance to

Mumbai Harbor (Bombay Harbor). For further information

consult Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South

Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean.

2.29 Transshipment of petroleum products is carried out from

large storage tankers moored in the vicinity of position

18°53'N, 72°26'E.

2.29 Any vessel in difficulty within 50 miles of any production

platform or rig and likely to drift towards platforms or rigs

should contact Mumbai (Bombay) Radio and stand-by offshore

supply vessels on VHF channel 16 for assistance. 

2.29 The established development areas are, as follows:

1. Mumbai High (formerly known as Bombay High)

Oil Field Development Area.—This area is situated with its

center about 90 miles WNW of the entrance to Mumbai Harbor (Bombay Harbor). The area extends 25 miles in an E-W

direction and 47 miles in a N-S direction and contains numerous production platforms within. Three lighted tanker

mooring buoys are situated close together in the N part of the

area. Flares are lit from this vicinity. Another lighted tanker

mooring buoy is situated 10 miles SSE of the above buoys.

Oil and gas pipelines are laid ESE from the center of the oilfield to Mumbai (Bombay). 

2. Mukta Panna and Bassein Oil Field Development

Area.—This area is situated with its center 50 miles NW of

the entrance to Mumbai Harbor (Bombay Harbor). The area

extends 21 miles in a E-W direction and 33 miles in a N-S

direction. Submarine oil and gas pipelines from Mumbai

(Bombay) High Oil Field are laid passing through the center

of Bassein Oil Field Area with a gas pipeline branching 115

miles NNE to Danti at the Mindhola River (21°04'N.,

72°43'E.).

3. Neelam Heera and Ratna Oil Field Development

Area.—This area is situated with its center about 40 miles

SW of the entrance to Mumbai Harbor (Bombay Harbor)

The area extends 14 miles in an E-W direction and 40 miles

in a N-S direction. 

2.29 A circular lightering area, best seen on the chart, is located

about 22 miles W of Malabar Point. All vessels are advised to

maintain a continuous listening watch on VHF channel 6 and

to give the area a wide berth. It has been reported (2007) that

lighterage operations are not conducted in this location during

the Southwest Monsoon, but are transferred to Vadinar

(22°31'N., 69°42'E.); for further information see paragraph

1.22. 

2.29 Direction Bank, with its N end about 39 miles WSW of the

SE entrance point of Mumbai Harbor (Bombay Harbor), extends about 27 miles in a S direction, and has depths of 37 to

64m, coarse sand and small shells. East of this bank, the depths

decrease gradually from about 55m, off its E edge, towards the

coast. 

2.29 Vessels approaching Mumbai (Bombay) from the N of Direction Bank will run a considerable distance before the depths

will decrease from 73m to 55m, but the depths will then decrease rapidly to 37m, which depth is found about 15 miles W

of Khanderi Island (18°42'N., 72°49'E.) or the light structure

on Prongs Reef, about 10.5 miles farther N. 

2.29 A vessel approaching this bank from the W will pass over Fifty

Fathoms Flat, then gradually shoal to depths of 73m, and then suddenly to 55 and 42m over Direction Bank. After crossing the bank

the depths will again increase to more than 55m over the greater

part of the bank, and to about 50m at its S end. 

2.29 Approaching Mumbai (Bombay) from the SW, if the vessel

is S of Direction Bank, the depths will decrease rapidly from

73m to 55m, and continue between 55 and 37m for some distance until the latter depth is obtained about 17 miles offshore. 

2.29 Aspect.—In clear weather, the high peak of Malangar

(19°06'N., 73°11'E.), 789m high, is conspicuous in the offing.

On the summit of this peak is an enormous perpendicular cliff,

topped by a fort in ruins. 

2.29 On nearer approach Kanheri and Shendur, on Salsette Island

on the N side of the harbor, and Kankeshwar and the SagarNotes:

1. Total quay length capable of accommodating three vessels up to 200m in length at one time hence the three

separate berth assignments. However, if a vessel is being worked that meets the maximum loa allowed then only two

berths will be available for loading/discharge.

2. Maximum vessel draft depends on tide during summer monsoon season and can be as low as 12m.

3. Total quay length intended to accommodate two vessels at one time. However, if a vessel is being worked that

meets the maximum loa allowed then only one berth will be available for loading/discharge.

4. Jetty is 40.5m in width.

5. Capable of handling vessels up to 85,000 dwt. Only BPCL-consigned vessels are permitted to use this berth.

6. Capable of handling vessels up to 30,000 dwt. Only BPCL-consigned vessels are permitted to use this berth.

Jawaharlal Nehru—Berthing Facilities

Berth Length Depth 

alongside

Maximum vessel

Remarks

Draft Length
Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 49

Pub. 173

agarh Range, on the S of the harbor, can be seen. Kanheri and

Shendur were previously described with Salsette Island in

paragraph 2.27.

2.29 Kankeshwar, a mountain 384m high, lies about 26 miles SW

of Malangarh. It is separated by a valley from a thickly-wooded range of hills which extends along the SE side of the entrance of Mumbai (Bombay) Harbor. 

2.29 Thal Knob, 54m high with a conspicuous white beacon, 18m

high on its summit, lies about 4.3 miles NW of Kankeshwar.

False Knob, about 0.5 mile SSW of Thal Knob, is similar in

appearance, but somewhat lower. In thick weather these hills,

being detached from the more distant highland, stand out well

among the coconut trees. 

2.29 Ashuerra Hill, 243m high, about 3.5 miles ESE of Thal

Knob, has two hummocks named The Paps. A black beacon,

24m high, lies on North Pap. 

2.29 Sheva Beacon lies on a drying reef at the S end of the port.

Nhava Island (18°58'N., 72°57'E.) lies close E of N breakwater head.

2.29 Gull Islet (Kansa Rock) (18°50'N., 72°54'E.), 6.1m high and

marked by a lighted beacon, 20.4m high, lies about 2.3 miles

NNE of Thal Knob. 

2.29 Karanja (Great Karanja), 302m high, is a long and flat-topped

hill at the S end of Karanja Island, about 2.8 miles ENE of Gull Islet. The S side of this hill is steep and almost inaccessible, but the

N side slopes gradually from its base to a peak on which there is a

ruin. A conspicuous flare chimney lies at the SE end of the island;

a conspicuous tower lies on the SW slope of Kharavli, a 214m hill

near the NW extremity of the island. 

2.29 Kharavli, 212m high at the N end of Karanja Island, about

2.8 miles NNW of Karanja, is formed by the junction of 4 ridges and has a very sharp summit. 

2.29 Fifty Fathoms Flat, lying between 60 and 120 miles W of

Mumbai (Bombay), is an extensive bank with depths of 82 to

92m, fine sand, although a muddy bottom has occasionally

been found between this bank and Direction Bank. 

2.29 Mumbai (Bombay) Island consists of a low-lying plain,

flanked by two parallel ridges of low hills. The city consists

generally of well-built houses and broad streets, with many

fine public buildings. The most conspicuous of these is the Taj

Mahal Hotel, surmounted by a dome 70m high, about 2 miles

NE of Colaba Point. Among the conspicuous buildings in the

densely built tract known as The Fort, W of Indira Dock, are

the cathedral and the municipal buildings, the tower of which is

71m high. Another tower, with a white dome 53m high, lies

about 1 mile farther N. 

2.29 A clock tower, 85m high, about 0.5 mile NNW of the Taj

Mahal Hotel, is conspicuous among the prominent buildings on

the esplanade on the E shore of Back Bay.

2.29 A conspicuous chimney, 54m high, and the spire of St.

John’s Church, 55m high, lie on the Colaba Peninsula, about

0.7 mile SSW, and 1.3 miles SW, respectively, of Taj Mahal

Hotel. The Naval signal station, with a flagstaff, is prominent

near the root of the S breakwater. 

2.29 Khanderi Island (Khanhoji Angre Island) (18°42'N.,

72°49'E.), S of the harbor entrance and about 2.5 miles offshore, has two hills, on the S and higher of which lies the lighthouse with a flagstaff NE of it. The island, sparsely covered

with trees and scrub, is surrounded by the remains of a wall. A

rock, drying 3.8m, lies 0.2 mile NE of Khanderi Island. Range

lights are shown on the E side of Khanderi Island, 1.3 miles NE

of the light; when in line bearing 168° they lead W of the drying rock and to the landing place. 

2.29 Mumbai Lightship (18°50'N., 72°44'E.) is moored nearly 5

miles SW of Prongs Reef Light; it is removed and replaced at

irregular intervals at the discretion of Mumbai Port Trust. It has

been reported that the Lightship has been off station for an extended period. A wreck area, best seen on the chart, lies S and

SW of the lightship. A depth of 11m and a wreck, with a depth

of 11m, lie 4.5 miles W and 2.8 miles S, respectively, of the

lightship.

2.29 Colaba Point (18°54'N., 72°49'E.) is the S extremity of the

Colaba Peninsula, a narrow peninsula extending SW from

Mumbai (Bombay) Island. The peninsula is covered with

buildings which continue N in an unbroken line and connect

with the more thickly-settled part of the city. A spoil ground

lies 4 miles WSW of Colaba Point. 

2.29 Prongs Reef, which dries, extends about 1 mile SSW from

Colaba Point. Prongs Reef Light (18°53'N., 72°48'E.), a

prominent visual navigation aid, is shown from a round tower,

52.5m high, painted in red, white and black horizontal bands

near the S end of Prongs Reef. Foul ground extends about 1

mile SW, SE, and E of the light structure. The light structure is

reported to be a good radar target at 17 miles. A dangerous

wreck, with masts above water, is situated 5.5 miles SW of

Prongs Reef Light, with another dangerous wreck 0.4 mile

NNE from it. The area is considered foul and dangerous to

navigation. 

2.29 Malabar Point, about 3 miles NNW of Colaba Point, and

Malabar Hill, about 1 mile farther NE, have been reported to

give good radar returns at 22 and 39 miles, respectively. 

2.29 Khanderi Island Light, about 10.5 miles S of Prong Reef

Light, is shown at an elevation of 47m from an octagonal tower, surmounting a flat-roofed house, 31.5m high, on the summit

of Khanderi Island. It is connected by telephone with Mumbai

(Bombay). If a vessel is seen to be lying into danger, a warning

rocket signal is fired, and the International Code signal “U,”

(You are standing into danger) is displayed.

2.29 Khanderi Island has been reported to give good radar returns

at 17 miles. 

2.29 Foul ground and shoal water extend about 3 miles offshore

between Khanderi Island and the SE entrance point of Mumbai

(Bombay) Harbor. Thal Shoal, about 6 miles N of Khanderi Island and 2.5 miles offshore, is composed of sand and rock,

with several detached heads, and a least depth of 4.3m. A black

conical buoy is moored off the W side of Thal Shoal. 

2.29 Thal Reefs, SE of Thal Shoal, consists of numerous reefs

and rocks extending about 1.5 miles offshore. Detached shoals,

with depths of less than 5.5m, lie within 1 mile W of Thal

Reefs. A prohibited area, best shown on the chart, lies close N

of Thal Shoal.

2.29 East Channel Swatch, with a least depth of 5.8m, lies between Thal Shoal and the detached shoals W of Thal Reef. 

2.29 SW Prongs Lighted Buoy, moored about 1.5 miles SSW of

Prongs Reef Light, marks the edge of the shoal water SW of

Prongs Reef. 

2.29 A lighted buoy moored about 1.5 miles SE of Prongs Reef

Light marks the N side of the fairway into the harbor. 

2.29 Sunk Rock (18°53'N., 72°50'E.), awash and marked by a

light, lies about 1.3 miles E of Colaba Point. A stranded wreck,
50 Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 

Pub. 173

marked by a lighted buoy, lies 2.3 miles SE of Sunk Rock. Another dangerous wreck, marked by a lighted buoy, lies 1.8

miles S of Sunk Rock. 

2.29 Oyster Rock, about 0.8 mile ENE of Sunk Rock, is flat and

21.5m high; a tower, with an elevation of 28m, stands on it.

Fishing stakes extend about 0.5 mile E of Oyster Rock; care is

necessary when navigating in this vicinity, as the stakes are often broken off just below-water. 

2.29 Dolphin Rock, nearly steep-to on its E side and marked by a

light, lies about 1.5 miles N of Oyster Rock.

2.29 Middle Ground Islet, rocky and about 12.5m high, lies about

0.8 mile ENE of Oyster Rock; two towers, with an elevation of

17m, lie on the islet. Shoal water extends about 110m SW and

0.2 mile NNE, respectively, from the islet. 

2.29 Range lights, in line bearing 305°, on Ballard Pier, about 0.5

mile farther N, lead through the middle of the approach channel to the pier. 

2.29 The Naval Dockyard lies about 0.5 mile NW of Middle

Ground Island. South Breakwater, marked at its head and root

by towers having an elevation of 58m, forms an enclosed area

E of the Naval Dockyard. The Naval Signal Station, with a

flagstaff, is conspicuous near the root of South Breakwater.

2.29 Cross Island, 19.5m high, lies about 1.8 miles farther N, and

about 0.3 mile off Victoria Dock. 

2.29 The N side of the harbor is occupied by an extensive coastal

bank, with depths of less than 5.5m. 

2.29 Tucker Beacon, about 1.8 miles ENE of Middle Ground Islet, marks the S edge of the bank. The beacon is a cylindrical

structure, painted in red, white, and black horizontal bands, and

shows a light.

2.29 Gull Islet (Kansa Rock) lies off the entrance to Dharamtar

Creek, on a bank filling the SE part of Mumbai (Bombay) Harbor. Gull Islet Light is shown from a framework tower on the

summit of the islet. 

2.29 Karanja Reefs, farther N, extend about 2 miles off the W side

of Karanja Island. Karanja Beacon, a black steel structure,

8.5m high, surmounted by a cone, lies near the NW edge of the

reefs, about 5 miles N of Gull Islet. 

2.29 Two spoil grounds, the N marked approximately 0.5 mile

NNW by a lighted buoy, are situated on the SW side of Karanja

Reefs. 

2.29 A dangerous wreck, marked by a buoy, lies about 1.5 miles

SW of Karanja Beacon. 

2.29 Butcher Island (Jawahar Dweep) (18°58'N., 72°54'E.), 20m

high, with an oil terminal on its SE side, lies about 5 miles NE

of Middle Ground Islet. A conspicuous water tower, with an elevation of 31m, stands near the center of the island.

2.29 Butcher Rock, steep-to on its S and E sides, lies about 0.6

mile S of Butcher Island and is marked by Butcher Beacon, a

red stone beacon, 8m high, from which a light is shown. A

breakwater, extending NNW from Butcher Rock, is 3m above

chart datum and uncovers at half tide.

2.29 Elephanta Island, 174m high, about 1 mile E of Butcher Island, is wooded with two hills separated by a ravine. 

2.29 Elephanta Patch Beacon, from which a light is shown, lies

about 0.5 mile NW of Elephanta Island.

2.29 The channel leading ENE and NNE between Butcher Island

and Elephanta Island is marked by ranges. Range lights, shown

on the SW side of Elephanta Island, in line bearing 055°, lead

between the shoals on either side of the channel. This range intersects with a lighted range leading NNE, which is in line

bearing 203°, astern. The rear light of the latter range is shown

from a lighted beacon on Uran Shoal (18°56'N., 72°54'E.). 

2.29 Trombay Island, N of the harbor, attains an elevation of

305m at Trombay Peak (19°02'N., 72°55'E.). There are several oil refinery chimneys on the S side of the island; the flares

from these chimneys are conspicuous and visible from seaward. 

2.29 Pir Pau Tomb, a conspicuous mosque with a white dome,

24m high, stands on the S extremity of Trombay Island. A

white dome, 42.5m high, and a chimney, 125m high, are conspicuous about 0.5 mile farther NNE. 

2.29 Radio masts, each marked by red lights, stand on the SW end

of Trombay Island. 

2.29 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory in Mumbai (Bombay) for

all vessels over 100 nrt and is available 24 hours. The pilot

boards in position (18°50.9'N., 72°50.0'E.). Once in the pilot

controlled harbor, vessels may not depart or shift berths without a pilot on board. Pilots can be contacted on VHF channel

12, 14, or 16. 

2.29 Pilotage is compulsory in Jawaharlal Nehru for all vessels

over 200 grt and is available 24 hours. The pilot boards in same

position as for vessels bound for Mumbai (Bombay). 

2.29 Pilots for berths in Mumbai (Bombay) can be contacted on

VHF channel 12, 14, or 16 and vessels bound for Jawaharlal

Nehru Port VHF channel 13 or 16.

2.29 Vessels are not permitted to proceed E of 72°44'E., without

Courtesy of Mumbai Port Trust

Tucker Beacon
Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 51

Pub. 173

being instructed to do so.

2.29 During summer (Southwest Monsoon) conditions, pilots will

board inside the channel. Also during this season, a long swell

can prevail at Mumbai port entrance. This will cause problems

for the pilot boarding so instructions may be given to proceed

to a position about 1 mile SE of Sunk Rock Light to obtain a

better lee.

2.29 Vessels boarding a pilot should maintain a continuous listening watch on VHF channel 13 for Jawaharlal Port Control and

on VHF channel 12 for Mumbai (Bombay) Port Control. 

2.29 Regulations.—A Vessel Traffic Service controls traffic to

Mumbai (Bombay) and the Jawaharlal Nehru Port. When arriving within a distance of 24 miles from Prongs Reef Light, vessels must register their approach by contacting Mumbai

(Bombay) Vessel Traffic System on VHF channel 14. In addition, vessels bound for the Jawaharlal Nehru Port must contact

that port on VHF channel 13. 

2.29 Advance notification requirements for Mumbai (Bombay)

and Jawaharlal Nehru are given in the accompanying table titled Advance Notification Requirements for Mumbai (Bombay) and Jawaharlal Nehru.

2.29 Vessels at anchor are required to maintain continuous listening watches on VHF channels 13 and 16. 

2.29 Signals.—A naval signal station at Colaba Point may call up

vessels by signal lamp, which they are required to answer by

the same system. 

2.29 Vessels liable to quarantine or carrying certain types of dangerous cargo are required by Mumbai (Bombay) Port Rules to

make certain signals to Prongs Reef Light; these are answered

by day by corresponding signals at the light. 

2.29 The Port Signal Station is in a tower on the E side of Ballard

Pier. The docking signal station is on Bull’s Nose at the entrance to Indira Dock. The Naval Signal Station lies about 0.5

mile SW of the Port Signal Station. 

2.29 Communication is by the International Code of Signals, by

signal lamp at night, or by VHF radiotelephone. 

2.29 Storm signals are displayed from the port signal station and

from a flagstaff at the NE corner of Victoria Dock; the General

System is used. Further information on these storm signals

may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide)

South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.” 

Advance Notification Requirements for Mumbai (Bombay) and Jawaharlal Nehru

Mumbai (Bombay) Jawaharlal Nehru

Vessels should send their ETA 96 hours in advance, with a

confirmation sent 48 hours in advance, to their agents. The 96-

hour message should contain the following information:

Vessels should send their ETA together with the

request for pilotage at least 48 hours prior to arrival. The

message should contain the following information:

1. Master’s name. 1. Vessel name.

2. Vessel’s ETA. 2. Master’s name

3. Present loaded displacement, draft, gross tonnage, and nrt. 3. Port of registry.

4. Ports visited in last 30 days. 4. Last port of call.

5. Distance of manifold from amidships. 5. Length overall.

6. Cargo quantities on board. 6. Gross tonnage.

7. Supplies and cash requirements. 7. Type of vessel.

8. Maximum draft in meters.

9. Class of dangerous cargo.

10. Any defects.

Vessels should also send their ETA 24 hours in advance to the

harbormaster.

The ETA should be confirmed on VHF channel 13 at

least 3 hours prior to arrival.

Vessels should call Mumbai Port Control on VHF channel 12

when approaching (18°50'00"N., 72°44'09"E.).

Mumbai (Bombay)/Jawaharlal Nehru—Contact Information

Mumbai (Bombay) Jawaharlal Nehru

Call sign Mumbai (Bombay) Port Trust Jawaharlal Nehru Port Trust

VHF VHF channels 12, 14, and 16 VHF channels 13 and 16

Telephone 91-22-6656-5656 99-22-2724-4076

Facsimile 91-22-2261-1011 99-22-2724-4020

E-mail mbpt@vsnl.com jawahar@giasbm01.vsnl.net.in
52 Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 

Pub. 173

2.29 Port contact information is given in the table titled Mumbai

(Bombay)/Jawaharlal Nehru—Contact Information. 

2.29 Anchorage.—An anchorage area has been established about

20 miles NW of the entrance to Mumbai Harbor (Bombay Harbor) as best shown on the chart. 

2.29 Mumbai Harbor (Bombay Harbor) has numerous anchorages

available within the harbor, in depths up to 9.7m, with three of

them designated for for explosives and dangerous cargo in either the channel leading to Thana Creek, NNE of Elephanta

Patch (18°58.5'N., 72°55.3'E.), or NNE of Karanja Beacon as

shown on the chart.

2.29 In the S part of the harbor the anchorages are found on both

sides of the dredged channel. These anchorages are reported to

be mud, with good holding ground.

2.29 Anchorages for tankers are located about 0.9 milesand 1.3

miles SW of Butcher Beacon. An emergency anchorage area is

designated about 0.45 mile NE of Butcher Beacon. Also shown

on the chart is a special anchorage area designated for naval

vessels located N of Sunk Rock.

2.29 Deep-draft vessels should anchor about 7 miles W of Prongs

Reef, outside the 20m curve, in mud and shingle, reportedly

good holding ground, and await berthing instructions. 

2.29 For Jawaharlal Nehru Port, there is an anchorage area accommodating vessels up to 180m in length, with a maintained

depth of 13.5m, located NE of Elephanta Island with limits

best shown on the chart.

2.29 As a general rule, vessels in the harbor should always be

moored in a SSW-NNE direction, as follows:

1. Between October 1 and May 31 use 82m of cable

each way.

2. Between June 1 and September 30 use 109m on the S

anchor and 82m on the N anchor.

3. Vessels moored in the eddies off Middle Ground Islet

should USE 140m on the S anchor.

2.29 Vessels subject to quarantine may be instructed to anchor in

a position convenient for the health officer to board. 

2.29 Anchoring and fishing are prohibited in the vicinity of the

pipelines. Anchoring is prohibited in an area in the harbor entrance extending approximately 4.75 miles E from Prongs Reef

Light. Another prohibited anchorage has been established NW

of Back Bay (18°56'N., 72°49'E.), as shown on the chart.

2.29 A dangerous wreck lies close NE of Anchorage A5; another

dangerous wreck lies about 350m NNW of Anchorage J3.

2.29 Directions.—Mumbai (Bombay) harbor is approached from

the W and entered through a dredged channel between Prongs

Reef Light and Thal Knob to the SE. Jawaharlal Nehru Port is

approached through Mumbai (Bombay) harbor passing S of

Butcher and Elephanta Islands through what is known as the

JNP Channel.

2.29 If approaching from the NW, keep North Pap Beacon

(18°46'N., 72°56'E.) in line with Thal Knob Beacon, on a bearing of 121.5°, which leads close SW of SW Prong Lighted

Buoy. If approaching from the S, pass W of the buoy marking

Thal Shoal. 

2.29 During the Southwest Monsoon, when it may be difficult to

identify marks, or during the cold weather, when a smoke haze

often reduces visibility, the best time to make Mumbai (Bombay) is about 1 hour before sunrise, when the lights are still visible. 

2.29 In the approaches to Mumbai (Bombay), recommended

routes are charted to assist mariners to navigate safely in the vicinity of the previously-described Offshore Oil Development

Areas. One route leads in an E-W direction, passing S of Mumbai High Oil Field Development Area and Mukta Panna and

Bassein Oil Field Development Area and N of Neelam Heera

and Ratna Oil Field Development Area. Other routes lead in

NNE-SSW directions, passing W and E of Neelam Heera and

Ratna Oil Field Development Area.

2.29 Mariners are advised to keep 1 or 2 miles to starboard of the

centerlines of these routes in the approaches or departure from

Mumbai (Bombay), and to be consistent with the 72 COLREGS. 

2.29 Caution.—In the approach to Mumbai (Bombay), either

from N or S, lines of strong fishing stakes, surmounted by baskets, which project about 6.1m out of the water, may be encountered anywhere in depths up to 18.3m and sometimes up

to 22m.

2.29 In the immediate approach to the harbor, within the area

shown by dashed lines on the charts, no fishing stakes are permitted, but even within this area they are sometimes placed,

and so may be encountered before the port authorities have

been able to remove them. Occasionally the heads of the stakes

are broken off at the waterline.and then they may not be seen

above water. All fishing stakes are normally removed each year

for the duration of the Southwest Monsoon.

2.29 Caution is necessary in the harbor and its approaches as

many buoys have been reported (2007) missing. 

2.29 In 2001, it was reported that numerous fishing vessels were

anchored directly in the inbound and outbound traffic lanes.

2.29 Numerous wrecks, best seen on chart, lie in the approaches,

channels, and adjacent waters of the port of Mumbai (Bombay). Mariners should use caution while transiting these waters. 

2.29 Heavy smog and haze may reduce the visibility in the harbor.

2.29 It was reported (2001) that heavy pollution and siltation in

the harbor prevented the vessel’s depth finder from giving accurate readings.

2.29 A submarine exercise area is centered 67 miles W of the entrance to Mumbai (Bombay) Harbor. Another submarine exercise area is centered between the Fifty Fathoms Flat and

Direction Bank, about 75 miles offshore. 

2.29 Numerous small fishing vessels, with buoyed nets, are likely

to be encountered up to 25 miles offshore from Mumbai (Bombay). 

2.29 A depth of 23m was reported in 1987 close W of the 200m

depth contour in approximate position 19°00'N, 69°55'E. 

2.29 Mariners are advised not to anchor or fish near the pipelines

to avoid damaging them. 

2.29 Submarine oil and gas pipelines are laid from the SW point

of Karanja Island, WSW through the entrance to Mumbai

(Bombay) Harbor and then NW to Mumbai (Bombay) High

Field. 

Mumbai (Bombay) to Cape Rama

2.30 The coast between Khanderi Island (18°42'N.,

72°49'E.) and Cape Rama, about 228 miles SSE, consists of

sandy bays separated by bold rocky capes. There are a number

of river estuaries and it is often bordered by tableland in the

middle of its S part.The Western Ghats, which are generally
Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 53

Pub. 173

from 609 to 904m high, with some peaks nearly 1,524m high,

lie like a wall parallel to the coast at an average distance of 30

miles inland. 

2.30 The Sagargarh Range, S of Kankeshwar, has a spur forming

two narrow ridges extending W to about 2 miles ENE of Alibag. Sagargarh (18°39'N., 72°58'E.), 415m high, and the

highest peak of this range, lies about 5 miles E of Alibag. It has

a rounded summit and is faced on its S side by high conspicuous cliffs. At the NW end of this range, about 5 miles NW of

Sagargarh and 2.5 miles from the coast, are three high bare,

and conspicuous peaks. The S of these three is the sharp and

conical Parhur, 313m high. Close SE of Sagargarh is a sharp

rocky peak; farther S the range is lower and covered with jungle. 

2.30 Depths—Limitations.—Depths in the approach to the coast

between Mumbai (Bombay) and Cape Rama are fairly deep

and clear of dangers, with the exception of Angria Bank. 

2.30 Angria Bank, with a least depth of 20.1m in position

16°43'N, 72°03'E, lies about 65 miles off the coast, and is composed of sand, shells, and coral. The bank is steep-to on all

sides, with great depths surrounding it. The tidal currents set

NE across the bank during the flood and SW with the ebb, with

a velocity of about 1 knot in spring tides. 

2.30 A volcanic disturbance was reported observed (1949) in an

area about 100 miles SW of Angria Bank. Vessels should approach this area with caution. 

2.30 Caution.—Between Khanderi Island and Boria Point, about

80 miles SSE, fishing stakes and logs are liable to be encountered in depths up to 22m. 

Khanderi Island to Murud-Janjira Harbor

2.31 The coast from abreast Khanderi Island to Alibag,

about 4 miles S, consists of a low ridge of sandhills backed by

dense groves of palm trees. It is fringed by sandbanks and reefs

extending in places about 1.3 miles offshore, and depths of less

than 5.5m extend about 3.5 miles offshore. The inner reefs,

which lie in narrow ridges parallel to the shore, are joined by

low stone walls and are used as fish traps.

2.31 Alibag Creek, almost closed by sand, lies S of Alibag. Kolaba Fort, about 0.5 mile SW of Alibag, stands on a drying reef

on the NW side of the entrance to the creek. The fort can be

recognized by the cupola of a temple in the shape of a pogoda,

which is conspicuous from seaward. A light is shown periodically from Kolaba Fort.

2.31 Alibag Outer Reef, with a depth of 1.8m, lies about 1.3 miles

W of Kolaba Fort, and is marked SW by a red conical buoy

from October to May. 

2.31 Chaul Kadu Reef, a group of rocky patches with a least

depth of 2.1m, lies about 2.5 miles farther S. The sea breaks

heavily over these reefs at LW. A light is shown from a white

round masonry tower, 19m high, on the NE extremity of the

reef.

2.32 Revadanda Port (Port Chaul) (18°33'N., 72°55'E.),

the estuary of the Kundalika River, is only available to vessels

able to cross the bar. In the fairway over the bar there is a depth

of 2.1m, but this may be subject to change. The tide flows over

a considerable part of the low-lying land on either side of this

moderately wide river at HWS. Local vessels call at the port. 

2.32 Korlai Fort, on the S side of the river entrance, stands on the

summit of a reddish-colored headland, connected to the mainland by a low, narrow, and sandy isthmus. The N part of this

headland slopes gradually to the sea and terminates in a rocky

point. A light, with a racon, is shown from the fort. 

2.32 Chaul Knob, 255m high, round and conspicuous, lies about

1.8 miles ESE of Korlai Fort, and is the summit of a range of

wooded hills.

2.32 Revadanda, an old fortress, stands on the N entrance point of

the river. The tower of the Franciscan convent, 30.5m high, is

conspicuous above the walls of the fort. 

2.32 A prominent white temple stands 2 miles NE of Revadanda.

Another temple is conspicuous on the summit of a 172m hill

above the preceding temple. A Muslim tomb stands at a height

of 128m, near a group of palm trees, about 0.8 mile NW of the

latter temple. 

2.32 Nine Foot Patch lies about 2.3 miles NW of Korlai Fort. Six

Foot Patch lies about 0.8 mile farther S. 

2.32 An offshore production platform lies about 33 miles W of

the entrance to Murud–Janjira harbor. 

2.33 Murud-Janjira Harbor (18°18'N., 72°57'E.), at the

mouth of Rajpuri Creek, is entered between Vihur Point (Yeoor

Point) and Nanwell Point (Rajpur Point), about 4 miles SSE.

The harbor affords good shelter to moderate-sized vessels from

all winds except those from W and NW.

2.33 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise is 3.9m at MHWS, and

3m at MHWN. Tidal currents have a velocity of 1 knot to 1.5

knots at springs. 

2.33 Depths—Limitations.—Depths of less than 5m extend

about 10.3 miles S of Kansa Fort. 

2.33 Whale Reef, about 1.3 miles WSW of Nanwell Point, dries

3.3m. Shoal water, with depths of less than 5m, extends about

0.5 mile WNW, and 0.3 mile S of the reef. 

2.33 Fishing stakes, consisting of large poles or stripped palm

trees, may be met within the harbor, but they normally show

well above HW.

2.33 Aspect.—The coast in the vicinity of the harbor is hilly and

well-wooded, with high ranges behind the coastal hills. 

2.33 A peninsula with two conspicuous peaks lies on the S side of

the harbor. Conical Hill, 232m high and bare, and Round Hill,

231m high and thickly wooded, lie about 2 and 3 miles, respectively, SSE of Nanwell Point. Dighi Hill, about 1.5 miles SE of

the same point, is 250m high and the highest point of the peninsula. 

2.33 Dighi, a village on the S shore of the Rajpuri River, has a

bight SE of it fringed with mangroves; a drying mud flat fills

the bight. There is a jetty at Dighi and a small sugar exporting

port is planned. 

2.33 Nanwell Point Light is shown from a white masonry tower

with red bands, on Nanwell Point, a wooded bluff. 

2.33 A hill, 134m high, lies about 0.8 mile N of Vihur Point. Murud Hill, 306m high, is conspicuous about 2.5 miles E of the

same point.

2.33 Janjira Fort, 37m high and conspicuous, stands on a rocky islet, about 2 miles NE of Nanwell Point and abreast the village

of Rajpuri. A light is shown from the fort. 

2.33 Bandar Hill, a small round headland 70m high, with a grassy

summit, lies about 1 mile NNW of Janjira Fort. A light is

shown periodically from the hill.
54 Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 

Pub. 173

2.33 Kansa Fort, its walls about 6.1m high and partly in ruins,

stands on a reef about 2.5 miles N of Nanwell Point. 

2.33 The Nawabs Palace and flagstaff are conspicuous on a steep

bluff, 33m high, about 1.3 miles NE of Kansa Fort. 

2.33 The town of Murud, surrounded by a large grove of palm

trees, is situated on the N side of the entrance between Bandar

Hill and Nawabs Palace. 

2.33 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained, in about 5m, with

Janjira Fort bearing 001°, about 0.7 mile. Anchorage with better shelter can be obtained, in about 5.5m, with the fort bearing

330°, distant about 1.75 miles and Sandy Point bearing 100°.

Sandy Point lies about 3.5 mile E of Nanwell Point. 

2.33 Directions.—A vessel bound for Murud-Janjira Harbor

should keep in depths greater than 11m until Janjira Fort is

identified. Then bring Fort Janjira to bear 090° and steer for it

on that bearing until Nanwell Point Light bears 180°. Course is

then altered SE into the harbor, or steer for Sandy Point bearing

116° to the anchorage, in a least depth of 4.4m. 

2.33 Approach to the anchorage may be obstructed by lines of

fishing nets and, from November to April, by fishing stakes. 

Muhud-Janjira Harbor to Port Bankot

2.34 Kumbaru Point (18°13'N., 72°56'E.), 70m high, lies

about 3.5 miles S of Nanwell Point and is the N entrance point

of Kumbaru Bay. The point fronts densely wooded hills rising

to about 240m; there is a conspicuous bluff about 2.3miles E of

the point. 

2.34 Shah Jehan Shoal, with a least depth of 4.2m, lies about 1

mile SW of Kumbaru Point. Depths are irregular for a short

distance W of this shoal and vessels in the vicinity should keep

in depths greater than 11m. 

2.34 Anchorage, sheltered from NW winds, can be taken, in a

depth of 4.5m, SE of Kumbaru Point. 

2.34 Srivardhan Bay, about 5 miles SSE of Kumbaru Bay, is shallow and the village of Srivardhan lies at its head. A light is

shown from the S end of the N entrance point of the bay from

September to May.

2.34 Anchorage off Srivardhan for large vessels can be obtained,

in 10m, mud, about 3 miles WNW of Srivardhan Point

(18°01'N., 73°00'E.), the S entrance point of the bay. 

Port Bankot (17°59'N., 73°03'E.)

World Port Index No. 48870

2.35 Port Bankot lies from 1 to 2 miles within the bar at the

entrance of the Savitri River, which is entered between Devgarh Point, 55m high, and Rankuran Point, about 1.5 miles

SSE. Bankot, a fishing village, extends some distance along the

S bank of the river. The Savitri River becomes a narrow stream

above the village. 

2.35 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents set over the bar NNE

with the flood, and SSW with the ebb, attaining a velocity of

0.8 knot at springs. 

2.35 Between the bar and the anchorage off Bankot the flood current sets slightly toward the sandbank on the N side of the

channel, while the ebb follows the direction of the channel. 

2.35 At the anchorage off Bankot the velocity of the tidal currents

at springs is about 2.5 knots. 

2.35 Aspect.—The entrance of the Savitri River may be identified

by Hareshwar Hill, 109m high, dark, and conical, about 0.3

mile E of Devgarh Point. Hareshwar Donghur, 125m high, is

conspicuous about 0.8 mile farther NE. 

2.35 The high black walls of Fort Victoria, in ruins, stand at an elevation of 140m, about 0.8 mile ENE of Rankuran Point. A

high pillar and large pyramidal headstone, both prominent

from outside the bar, stand in a cemetery close under the walls

of the fort. The hill from Fort Victoria slopes down to Panbruj

Point, about 0.8 mile NE of Rankuran Point.

2.35 The entrance to the channel over the bar was 1 mile W of

Rankuran Point, with a least depth of 2.1m in 1968. The N side

of the entrance is marked by a red can buoy, and the S side by a

black conical buoy. A drying sandbank N of the channel, over

which the sea breaks heavily, is marked by a red can buoy. The

existence of these buoys is doubtful.

2.35 Depths gradually increase within the bar, and off Panbruj

Point there is a pool with depths of 13m. 

2.35 Pilotage.—The services of a local unlicensed pilot can be

obtained on application to the Customs and Port Officer.

2.35 Anchorage.—Outside the bar, anchorage can be taken, in a

depth of 9m.

2.35 Off Port Bankot vessels may anchor, in about 10m, off the

custom house, which lies about 0.3 mile ENE of Panbruj Point.

2.35 Directions.—The NW corner of Fort Victoria bearing 079°

leads across the bar. The channel then leads 055° and passes

close W of Panbruj Point. 

2.35 The channel over the bar is liable to change and passage into

the river should not be attempted without local knowledge. 

2.35 Caution.—Caution is required in crossing the bar; during

strong W breezes heavy breakers are raised over the bar and

there is always a cross sea. 

Port Bankot to Port Dabhol

2.36 The coast between the entrances of the Savitri River

and the Vashishti River, about 25 miles SSE, consists of a series of plateaus at elevations of 150 to 210m. 

2.36 Kanta, a peak 346m high, about 2.3 miles ESE of Bankot,

and Gimona Peak, 306m high, about 10 miles farther SSE, are

two conspicuous peaks along this coast. 

2.36 The seaward slopes of the plateaus are generally abrupt, but

in places there is a narrow strip of land between the plateaus

and the beach. The vegetation consists of sparse bushes with

very few trees. 

2.36 A vessel proceeding between the two rivers will not encounter any shoals by keeping from 1.5 to 3 miles offshore and in

depths of over 9.1m. Care must be taken to avoid the logs

marking the fisheries, which may be met about 5 miles W of

the entrance to the Jog River (17°50'N., 73°05'E.).

2.36 An islet, about 2 miles S of the entrance to the Jog River, lies

close S of a promontory projecting from the coast at Harnai.

Harnai Light is shown from a white masonry tower on the

promontory. 

2.36 Janjira Fort, a fortified islet, 19m high and covered with vegetation, stands about 0.5 mile NW of the above-mentioned islet. Janjira Fort, standing under a range of hills, is not easily

distinguished from seaward. 

2.36 Burondi Bay lies about 6 miles SSE of Janjira Fort. The bay

affords anchorage, with some shelter from S winds, in a depth
Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 55

Pub. 173

of 3.7m. 

2.37 Port Dabhol (17°35'N., 73°10'E.) lies in the estuary

of the Vashisti River, which is navigable at all times by vessels

with a draft of 3m as far as Karbone, about 16 miles within the

entrance, and thence, at HW only, to Chiplum, 10 miles farther

up. 

2.37 Sil Point, the N entrance point of the river, lies nearly 2

miles ENE of Tolkeshwar Point. Chirpulti Sand, which dries,

extends about 1.5 miles WSW of the point. 

2.37 Tolkeshwar Point (17°34'N., 73°09'E.), the S entrance point

of the river, is bold and faced with cliffs about 90m high; an ancient Hindu temple and a prominent clump of trees stand on its

summit. Ranvi Point, about 0.5 mile S of Tolkeshwar Point, has

a very large boulder and overhanging cliff N of it. 

2.37 Ratnagiri Gas and Power Terminal (17°32'N., 73°09'E.),

is a new LNG terminal S of the entrance to the Vashisti River.

The terminal is protected by a breakwater 1.4 miles in length

and is comprised of a jetty capable of handling vessels up to

140,000m3. 

2.37 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Port Dabhol is 2.7m at

MHHW and 2.2m at MLHW. 

2.37 The tidal current sets NE over the bar with the flood and SW

with the ebb, attaining a velocity of about 1.5 knots. 

2.37 Inside the bar the flood current sets into Anjanvel Bay and

the ebb onto Churpulti Sand. 

2.37 The flood current continues for about 1 hour after HW and

the ebb current for about 1 hour after LW. At neaps, the ebb

current occasionally commences 1 hour before HW.

2.37 Depths—Limitations.—The bar, with a least depth of 2.7m

on the entrance range, extends about 0.7 mile NW of Tolkeshwar Point. Within the bar, the depths increase from 7.6m to

12.8m. 

2.37 Churpulti Sand lies on the N side of the channel. 

2.37 Aspect.—The land on both sides of this river is hilly and undulating; the hills, about 90 to 120m high, slope steeply to the

coast and terminate in cliffs from 5 to 25m high.

2.37 Pir Balu, a conical hill 248m high, with a dome-shaped tomb

on its summit, is located about 4.3 miles ENE of Tolkeshwar

Point and is a good landmark as it lies out above the flat rocky

ridges in the vicinity. 

2.37 Tolkeshwar Point Light is shown from a white square masonry tower on Tolkeshwar Point. This light may be occasionally obscured by clouds because of its elevation of 104m. The

point has been reported to be a good radar target at 23 miles. 

2.37 Anjanvel Fort, in ruins, is situated about 0.8 mile ENE of

Tolkeshwar Point. Anjanvel Bay, E of the fort, is shallow. Veldur Hill, 81m high, is located on the E side of Anjanvel Bay. 

2.37 Range lights, on the S side of the river, in line bearing 081°,

lead across the bar. The front light is situated close N of Anjanvel Fort and the rear light stands on the N slope of Veldur Hill,

about 0.8 mile E. 

2.37 A red can buoy marks the W end of the bar; another red can

buoy is moored off the S side of Churpulti Sand. A red can

lighted buoy is moored about 0.5 mile SW of Sil Point. 

2.37 Pilotage.—Pilotage is only compulsory for berthing and departure from the Ratnagiri Gas and Power Terminal. The services of a local unlicensed pilot for Port Dabhol can be

obtained by contacting the Port Authorities for the port. Pilot

embarkation point for the gas and power terminal will be determined at the time of request to the Port Manager for the gas

and power Terminal. 

2.37 Contact Information.—Port Dabhol and the Ratnagiri Gas

and Power Terminal can be contacted by using the information

contained in the table titled Port Dabhol/Ratnagiri Gas and

Power Terminal—Contact Information. 

2.37 Anchorage.—Good anchorage may be obtained outside the

bar, in calm weather, in 10m, clay, about 1.3 miles WNW of

Tolkeshwar Point. 

2.37 Anchorage may also be obtained in midstream, S of the pier

at Dabhol, in a depth of about 8.5m, mud. 

2.37 Directions.—Vessels intending to enter the Vashishti River

should not proceed into depths less than 9.1m until Tolkeshwar

Point Light bears 095°. When the light structure is on this bearing, distant 1.5 miles, bring the range lights in line bearing

081°. When Tolkeshwar Point Light bears 180°, steer to pass

about 137m N of Anjanvel Fort Light, the front range light.

When the latter light bears 180°, steer a mid-channel course,

keeping about 0.1 mile offshore to avoid the coastal reef which

extends about 91m offshore near Veldur Hill. 

2.37 Care must be taken to avoid fishing logs which are often

moored both inside and outside the river.

2.37 Caution.—A dangerous wreck, best seen on the chart, is situated 6 miles WSW of Tolkeshwar Point, the position of which

is approximate. Another dangerous wreck lies 5 miles SW of

the same point, along the 20m line.

Port Dabhol/Ratnagiri Gas and Power Terminal—Contact 

Information

Port Dabhol Ratnagiri GPT

Call sign Port Dabhol Port Authorities RGPPL Terminal

VHF — VHF channel 16

Telephone

91-23-5824-8524 91-23-5924-1110

91-94-2296-6102 (mobile) 91-23-5924-1350

91-94-2237-7115 (mobile) —

Facsimile — 91-23-5924-1118
56 Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 

Pub. 173

Port Dabhol to Jaigarh Bay

2.38 A sandy beach extends about 3.8 miles SSE from a

position about 3 miles SE of Tolkeshwar Point. Guhagar, a

large village, lies parallel to the beach close inland. 

2.38 Cliffs, about 100m high inland near their N end, extend from

the sandy beach to Palshet Bay, about 1 mile S. Palshet Light is

shown from the N entrance point of the bay; the light is obscured by high land when bearing more than 141°.

2.38 Boria Headland (17°24'N., 73°10'E.), about 2 miles SW of

Palshet Bay, attains an elevation of 118m. Boria Pagoda, a

small conspicuous temple, stands at the NW end of the headland within a summit of the point. Boria Pagoda has been reported to be a good radar target at 18 miles.

2.38 Boria Bay lies SE of Boria Headland. Anchorage, sheltered

from NW winds, may be obtained by small vessels, in a depth

of 8m, mud. 

2.38 The coast between Boria Headland and Bhandarawadi Point,

3.5 miles SSE, is composed of small, sandy bays divided by

rocky points.

2.39 Jaigarh Bay (17°18'N., 73°13'E.) is entered between

Jaigarh Head and Bhandarawadi Point, about 1.8 miles NE.

The estuary of the Shastri River, which flows into the head of

the bay, forms a sheltered, convenient harbor, fairly easy to access, even during the Southwest Monsoon, for vessels of about

3.4m draft with local knowledge. 

2.39 Depths—Limitations.—The bar of the Shastri River extends NNE from close W of Jaigarh Fort to close E of Katane

Reef, which dries 0.6m about 0.2 mile SW of Bhandarawadi

Point. 

2.39 A channel leads E across the S end of the bar about 0.2 mile

offshore and had a least depth of 3.7m in 1964, but it is subject

to change. 

2.39 Mora Sands, which dry 1.2m, extend about 0.6 mile W of the

NE entrance point of the Shastri River, leaving a navigable

channel about 183m wide between Mora Sands and Jaigarh. 

2.39 Aspect.—Jaigarh Head (17°18'N., 73°11'E.) has Karateshwar Point at its NW extremity; this point appears from seaward

to be a level and almost barren plateau terminating in steep

rocky cliffs. A Hindu temple stands on the steep face of the

cliffs. Jaigarh Head has been reported to be a good radar target

at 20 miles. 

2.39 Jaigarh Head Light is shown from a tall, black iron tower

with white bands, on the SW end of Jaigarh Head. Dhamankhol Light is shown from a white tower about 0.5 mile NE of

Jaigarh Head Light. 

2.39 Jaigarh Fort, an old fortress containing a few houses, is situated on a rocky point, about 2 miles E of Jaigarh Head Light; a

light is shown from the NW corner of the fort. The town of

Jaigarh extends along the coast for about 0.8 mile S of the fort. 

2.39 Trize Kila, a ruined fort, is situated about 1 mile E of Jaigarh

Fort. The NE side of Jaigarh Bay consists of ridges of bare

hills, about 61 to 91.4m high, with steep cliffy sides and small

sandy indentations. 

2.39 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Dhamankhol Bay,

in about 8m, about 0.4 mile E of Dhamankhol Light. 

2.39 There is good sheltered anchorage E of Jaigarh, but the best

anchorage, in 8.5m, lies about 0.8 mile SE of Jaigarh Fort. 

2.39 Caution.—Vessels approaching Jaigarh Bay from the S

should not close Karhateshwar Point within 0.3 mile to avoid

foul ground. 

2.39 A dangerous wreck lies 23 miles W of Jaigarh Head. 

Jaigarh Bay to Ratnagiri Bay

2.40 Ambwah Bay (17°16'N., 73°13'E.) lies E of Ambwah

Point, the S extremity of Jaigarh Head. Anchorage, sheltered

from NW winds, is available in 7.3m, mud and sand, ESE of

Ambwah Point.

2.40 A 10m patch and an 8.8m patch lie about 0.5 mile SW and

0.8 mile SSE, respectively, of Ambwah Point. 

2.40 Warori Bluff, about 4.5 miles SSE of Ambwah Point, is a

conspicuous promontory, 70m high. A light is shown about 0.5

mile SE of the W extremity of Warori Bluff. Good radar returns have been reported from Warori Bluff at 17 miles. 

2.40 Anchorage.—Small vessels can obtain sheltered anchorage

during the Southwest Monsoon on the N side of Warori Bluff,

in a depth of 5.5m.

2.40 Neori Point, about 5.5 miles SSE of Warori Bluff, is 64m

high. The point has been reported to be a good radar target at

15 miles. 

2.40 Vada Mirya (Mirya Donghur) (17°02'N., 73°16'E.), a high

rocky headland, is lighter in color than the adjacent coast, and

resembles an island when seen from the N or S. The W end of

the headland terminates in steep cliffs. Mirya Peak, 142m high,

the conspicuous summit of this headland, lies about 0.5 mile

NNE of Miyet Point, the SW extremity of the headland. Tonkul

Peak, 115m high, lies nearly 1 mile N of Mirya Peak. 

2.40 Good radar returns have been reported from Vada Mirya at

16 miles. 

2.40 Sookana Shoals, with a least depth of 9.4m, lie about 1 mile

NNW of Sookana Point, the NW extremity of Vada Mirya. 

2.40 Kalbadevi Bay is entered between Sookana Point and Kurne

Point, about 2.5 miles NE. 

2.40 Anchorage may be obtained, in 8m, about 0.7 mile E of

Sookana Point and 0.3 mile offshore. Local vessels call here

during the Southwest Monsoon. 

2.40 Mirya Bay is entered between Miyet Point and Galee Point

(17°00'N., 73°16'E.), the N extremity of The Fort, about 1.5

miles SSE. The shore at the head of this bay is covered with coconut palms and is fronted by a ridge of sand hills. A conspicuous temple stands on Galee Point. 

2.40 Mudle Shoal (Taylor Shoal), with a least depth of 1.1m, and

marked on its S side by a buoy, lies about 0.7 mile SE of Miyet

Point. The sea breaks over this shoal at LW. 

2.40 Bhagwati Bunder (Mirya Bay), a new port, has a breakwater

0.3 mile long extending N from Galee Point; it provides sheltered anchorage throughout the year in depths up to 9.1m, sand

and mud. However, attention should be given to Taylor Shoal,

which lies N of the entrance to the breakwater; a shoal, with a

least depth of 3.4m, lies 0.4 mile ENE of N end of breakwater. 

Ratnagiri (16°59'N., 73°17'E.)

World Port Index No. 48900

2.41 Ratnagiri is approached from Ratnagiri Bay. The bay

is entered between The Fort and Kushipur Point (16°57'N.,

73°17'E.), about 2 miles S, affords no shelter during the South-
Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 57

Pub. 173

west Monsoon, when smooth-water anchorage can be found in

Kalbadevi Bay.

2.41 The Fort, on the N side of the entrance, is an old structure

which covers a bold, conspicuous, and rocky headland up to

91m high. It appears as an island from a distance, and is connected to the mainland by a sandy neck. 

2.41 The Ratnagiri River, entered about 1.3 miles E of The Fort, is

only navigable by small craft at HW. The town of Ratnagiri is

situated on the N side of the river entrance, on the brow of a

flat ridge, about 46m high. There is a Coast Radio Station at

Ratnagiri. 

2.41 Depths—Limitations.—Cargo is worked from anchorages

via lighters and at the Finolex Jetty at the N part of Ratnagiri

Bay. The jetty handles ethylene dichloride, ethylene, LPG, and

vinyl chloride monomer. 

2.41 In the N part of the bay, the depth in the entrance is about

11m, decreasing gradually E, but abruptly to the reef which extends from the N shore; the bottom is sand and mud. 

2.41 About 0.7 mile ENE of the N entrance point, a reef, on

which the sea breaks heavily in bad weather, extends about 0.4

mile SSW. Close S of the S edge of this reef is a depth of 8.7m. 

2.41 Depths of less than 7m extend nearly 1 mile NW of Kushipur

Point. Brum Mudle Rock, 3.5m high, which breaks heavily

during the Southwest Monsoon, lies about 0.3 mile NNW of

the same point. 

2.41 Aspect.—Ratnagiri Light is shown from a tall black and white

checkered, round, concrete tower on the S bastion of The Fort. A

radiobeacon and a racon are situated at the light. 

2.41 A palace, 83m high, is conspicuous about 2.3 miles E of Ratnagiri Light.

2.41 Pilotage.—Pilots are not compulsory but are available by contacting the port. 

2.41 Regulations.—The vessel’s ETA should be reported to the

charterers/shippers or consignees 7 days, 5 days, 3 days, 48

hours and 24 hours prior to arrival. 

2.41 It is reported that Ratnagiri port is closed during the summer

monsoon period (June-September) and traffic is diverted about

5 miles N to Kalabadevi Bay.

2.41 Signals.—Storm signals are shown at Ratnagiri Light; the

Brief System is used. Further information on these storm signals may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—

Signals.”

2.41 The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channel 16

2. Telephone: 91-2352-222160

3. Facsimile: 91-2352-222160

2.41 Anchorage.—At the beginning and end of the Southwest

Monsoon vessels should anchor, in 11m, with Ratnagiri Light

bearing 000°, distant about 0.7 mile. 

2.41 Vessels can anchor, in 9.6m, with Ratnagiri Light bearing

315°, distant about 0.5 mile. Shallow draft vessels can anchor

farther N. 

Ratnagiri Bay to Vijayadurg Harbor

2.42 Between Ratnagiri and the Machkandi River (Muchkundi River), about 11 miles S, the land rises gradually from

the coast in undulating hills reaching a height of 200m about 5

to 6 miles inland. Chandralli (Dhulia) (16°56'N., 73°26'E.), a

round wooded hill 280m high, about 9.5 miles ESE of The

Fort, is the only conspicuous feature.

2.42 Pavas Bay (Paos Bay) is entered S of Pavas Point (16°54'N.,

73°17'E.). Golap Hill, 120m high, lies about 1 mile NE of Pavas

Point. 

2.42 Vessels can anchor in Pavas Bay, in a depth of about 8.5m,

mud and sand, sheltered from NW winds. 

2.42 The coast between Pavas Bay and Purangad Bay, about 5

miles S, consists of rocky tableland and sandy bays, and is free

from dangers. 

2.42 Purangad Bay Light (16°49'N., 73°18'E.) is shown, except

during the strength of the Southwest Monsoon, from the N entrance point of Purangad Bay. About 1 mile farther E, a ruined

fort stands on a bare hill on the N side of the entrance to the

Machkandi River. Khavri, a mountain 346m high, lies about 10

miles E of the river entrance. 

2.42 The coast between Purangad Bay and Wada Vetye (Yetia), a

village about 6 miles S, consists of a rocky tableland; thence to

Ambolgarh Point, about 3 miles farther S, it is sandy and

backed by a range of hills 84 to 97m high. A conspicuous hill,

103m high, lies about 0.5 mile NW of Wada Vetye. 

2.42 Ambolgarh Bay lies between Ambolgarh Point and Musakazi Point (Musargagi Point), about 1 mile SSE. There is a sandy

beach at its head, and the ruins of a large salt works stand in a

valley on the S side. 

2.42 Ambolgarh Reef, with a small drying patch at its center, lies

about 0.4 mile SW of Ambolgarh Point; the sea breaks heavily

over this reef. A black conical buoy is moored near the SW extremity of the reef. 

2.43 Rajapur Bay (16°37'N., 73°20'E.) is entered between

Musakazi Point and Wagapur Point, about 1 mile SW; each

point is about 21m high. A light is shown from September to

May from Musakazi Point. A light is shown from a tall, white,

square, concrete tower with black bands on Wagapur Point;

foul ground extends about 0.1 mile WNW of the point. 

2.43 The coast between Wagapur Point and Vijayadurg Harbor,

about 2 miles S, consists of cliffs about 21m high. Holi Hill,

85m high, about 2.3 miles E of Wagapur Point, is a round sloping conspicuous hill on the E side of Rajapur Bay. It presents

the same appearance from all directions, and lies out from the

tableland in this vicinity which is faced with steep cliffs. 

2.43 The Rajapur River flows into the head of Rajapur Bay at its

NE end. The bar of the river has depths of 1.8 to 2.3m; abreast

the village of Jaitapur, which lies on the S bank of the river

about 1 mile within its entrance, there are depths of 4.6 to

7.3m. 

2.43 Anchorage.—Rajapur Bay affords anchorage, in a depth of

8m, protected from NW winds which may blow strongly, but

the anchorage is not safe during W winds, which raise a heavy

short swell in the bay. 

2.44 Vijayadurg Harbor (Viziadrug Harbor) (16°34'N.,

73°20'E.) is entered between Burmana Point (16°33'N.,

73°19'E.), 24m high, and a point about 1.5 miles NNE. Burmana Reef, over which the sea breaks, extends about 0.2 mile

WNW and 0.2 mile NNW of Burmana Point. An 8.2m shoal

lies about 0.2 mile NW of the same point. 

2.44 A conspicuous fort stands on a projecting rocky point, about

26m high and 0.8 mile ENE of Burmana Point. This point
58 Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 

Pub. 173

forms the W side of the entrance to the Vaghotan River. The

fort is obscured from the S by the higher land in that direction. 

2.44 Vijayadurg Light is shown from a white steel tower with red

horizontal bands on the NE corner of the fort. Vijayadurg, a

small village, is situated about 0.8 mile S of the light. 

2.44 Depths—Limitations.—Depths in the harbor decrease regularly from about 12m in the entrance to the E shore of the bay.

Depths in the fairway between the point on which the fort lies

and a cliff, 19m high, about 0.7 mile ENE, are about 6.5m, but

decrease sharply farther within the river to 3.7m. 

2.44 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken anywhere in the harbor, according to draft, during good weather. A convenient position is about 0.5 mile NNE of Vijayardurg Light, in 8m, mud. 

Vijayadurg Harbor to Malvan Bay

2.45 The coast between Vijayadurg Harbor and Devgarh

Harbor, about 10 miles S, is fairly regular, although entered by

numerous streams and creeks. Steep, abrupt cliffs are fronted

by sandy beaches and coves. The land behind the cliffs is flat,

but farther inland it rises to bare rocky hills with no vegetation

except in the rainy season.

Devgarh Harbor (16°23'N., 73°22'E.) is entered N of Fort

Point, which lies at the N end of a rocky peninsula, 37m high.

The peninsula appears like an island, but its S end is connected

to the mainland by a narrow sandy neck. The town of Devgarh

lies NE of the sandy neck. Depths in the harbor restrict its use

to vessels of comparatively shallow draft. 

2.45 An old fort, from which a light is shown, stands on Fort

Point. Two towers, 41 and 36m high, stand about 0.4 mile and

0.7 mile, respectively, S of Fort Point; another tower stands

about midway between the two towers. The town of Devgarh

has a post office and a hospital.

2.45 Storm signals are shown at the light tower using the Brief

System. Further information on these storm signals may be

found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South

Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

2.45 Round Hill, 108m high, and Saddle Hill, 140m high, lie

about 2.5 miles NNE and E respectively, of Fort Point. 

2.45 Tides—Currents.—Outside the harbor the tidal currents are

irregular, both in strength and direction, being much influenced

by the wind; on several occasions they were observed to set

NW on the flood and SSW with the ebb, with a velocity of up

to 1.5 knots. 

2.45 At the entrance to the harbor the currents attain a velocity of

1 to 1.5 knots with the spring ebb. 

2.45 Anchorage.—The recommended anchorage is with Devgarh

Harbor Light bearing 203°, distance 0.3 mile, and the N entrance point of the harbor bearing 306°, in a depth of 6m. Farther in depths shoal gradually; small vessels can find more

sheltered anchorage SE of Fort Point, in depths of 3 to 4m. 

2.45 Directions.—Vessels proceeding into Devgarh Harbor

should approach with Saddle Hill in line with the N side of the

fort on Fort Point, bearing 090°; when 1 mile from Fort Point,

and when Mumbri Point bears 153°, steer 080° to pass 0.2 mile

N of Fort Point. Foul ground and depths of less than 5m extend

0.3 mile SW from the N entrance point of the harbor, and 160m

N from Fort Point, the fairway between being about 0.3 mile

wide. 

2.46 The coast between Devgarh Harbor and Achra Point,

about 12 miles SSE, is similar to the coast N of Devgarh Harbor to Vijayadurg Harbor.

2.46 Devgarh Hill, 95m high, lies close to the coast, about 5 miles

SSE of Fort Point. Devgarh Hill has been reported to give a

good radar response at 14 miles. 

2.46 Achra Point (16°12'N., 73°26'E.), 41m high, is the N entrance point of the Achra River, which is only accessible to

boats. A light is shown during good weather from the point. 

2.46 The coast from the mouth of the Achra River to the entrance

of Kalavali Creek, about 7 miles SSE, is sandy and fringed

with coconut palms. A range of hills of moderate height, with

no conspicuous peaks, about 4 miles inland, extends roughly

parallel with the coast. 

2.46 Kura Patches, with a least depth of 9.6m, lies about 2 miles

SSW of Achra Point. 

2.46 Kura Islet (16°06'N., 73°27'E.), 9m high and the largest of

three rocks, lies in the center of a group of rocks, about 1.3

miles NW of the entrance of Kalavali Creek. A 10.5m patch

lies about 2 miles NNW of Kura Islet and about 1.5 miles offshore. A 5m patch lies about 0.7 mile S of Kura Islet. 

2.47 Malvan Bay (16°06'N., 73°28'E.) is entered between

Fort Rajkot and Sindhudrug Janjira, about 0.5 mile S. The entrance is much encumbered by rocky shoals, and the bay is accessible to shallow draft vessels but only during good weather.

A conspicuous radio tower, with an elevation of 220m, stands

5.5 miles ENE of Malvan Bay. 

2.47 Sindhudrug Janjira is a low fortified island on the coastal

reef, which is connected to the mainland E by a drying reef. A

light is shown from the W end of the island during good weather.

2.47 Fort Rajkot, on the N side of the entrance, has foul ground

extending S and SE of it. A flagstaff, 21m high, is situated at

the SW end of the fort. The town of Malvan is situated on the N

side of the bay almost hidden by coconut palms. 

2.47 Johnston Castle Rock, consisting of two rocky heads with

depths of less than 1.8m, lies about 0.4 mile W of the N end of

Sindhudrug Janjira. 

2.47 Rajkot Rock, with a depth of 3.7m, lies about 0.3 mile SSW

of Fort Rajkot. 

2.47 Range lights, in line bearing 075.5°, at the head of the bay,

lead through the buoyed fairway into Malvan Bay. The range

lights and buoys are only in operation during good weather. 

2.47 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor off the entrance to Malvan

Bay, in 15m, mud, with the N end of Sindhudrug Janjira bearing 095°, about 0.9 mile. 

2.47 Shallow draft vessels can anchor in the bay in depths of 4m,

on the range line, and with a small fort, situated about 0.2 mile

NE of Sindhudrug Janjira, bearing 163°. 

Malvan Bay to Vengurla Roads

2.48 The coast is sandy between Malvan Bay and a point

about 7 miles SSE, on which is situated the ruins of Niuti Fort.

Then to Vengurla Point, about 8 miles farther SE, the coast

forms a bight with several rocky capes and sandy bays. 

2.48 A prominent hill, 159m high, lies about 2 miles N of Niuti

Fort. Bhubra Rock, awash, lies about 0.3 mile SW of the fort;

the rock is marked SW by a buoy, which is unreliable, and in
Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 59

Pub. 173

position only during good weather. 

2.48 Malvan Rock (16°02'N., 73°26'E.), with a swept depth of

2.5m, lies about 1.5 miles WSW of Sindhudrug Janjira.

2.48 Caution.—When passing Malvan Rock at night Vengurla

Rocks Light (15°53'N., 73°28'E.) should not be brought to bear

more than 158°, nor should a vessel approaching this rock proceed into depths of less 27m. 

2.48 Mandel Rock, 7m high, about 1 mile S of Sindhudrug Janjira, lies at the W edge of a group of shoals, some of which are

awash. There are detached shoal patches, with depths of less

than 5.5m, about 0.7 mile SSE and SW and nearly 0.9 mile

WSW of Mandel Rock.

2.49 Square Rock (15°59'N., 73°27'E.), 11m high, lies

about 4.3 miles NW of Niuti Fort, and provides a useful mark

to avoid the dangers N and S of it, and the foul ground extending E of it to the coast. A 6.4m patch lies about 0.8 mile SSW

of the rock. 

2.49 Chaldea Rock, awash, lies about 2.5 miles WNW of Niuti

Fort; it lies at the S end of foul ground between it and the shore

NE. A buoy is moored about 0.5 mile WSW of the rock during

good weather. 

2.49 Vengurla Rocks (Burnt Island) is a group of islets and rocks

in dangerous foul ground extending about 3 miles S of Karil

Rock (15°56'N., 73°28'E.), which is 14m high and the N of the

group. 

2.49 Some above-water rocks, steep-to on their N side, extend

about 137m NW of Karil Rock. A rock, awash, lies about 0.3

mile E of Karil Rock. 

2.49 Vengurla Rock, 44m high and conical, lies about 2.3 miles S

of Karil Rock and is the highest of the group. 

2.49 Vengurla Rocks Light (15°53'N., 73°28'E.) is shown from

the NW point of an islet about 0.3 mile SSW of Vengurla Rock. 

2.49 Tapti Rock, the S danger of the group, lies about 0.8 mile

SSW of Vengurla Rock, and consists of two rocky heads with

less than 1.8m; it is steep-to on its S side.

2.49 An islet, with a disused lighthouse near its SE extremity, lies

about 0.3 mile NNW of Tapti Rock. 

2.49 Vengurla Rocks have been reported to give good radar returns at 18 miles. 

2.49 Anchorage.—Anchorage, with good protection from NW

winds can be obtained, in a depth of 21m, mud, 1 mile ESE of

the S end of Vengurla Rock. 

2.49 Caution.—Between Malvan Rock and the S extremity of

Vengurla Rocks, except in the N end of Karil Kachal Channel,

the bottom is sand and rock and there are sudden overfalls. No

vessels should proceed into depths of less than 18.3m in this

vicinity. Karil Kachal Channel leads from seaward between

Chaldea Rock and Karil Rock, about 1.3 miles SSW. A depth

of 7.2m lies about 0.3 mile ENE of Karil Rock. A similar depth

lies about 0.3 mile S of Chaldea Rock. 

2.49 Vessels coming from the N should approach this channel

with Wagh-Giri (15°53'N., 73°42'E.) bearing 105° and well

open S of the point on which Niuti Fort stands. When the fort

bears 093°, steer through the fairway on that bearing which

leads N of Karil Rock, in charted depths of about 9.6m. 

2.49 When Vengurla Rock bears more than 186°, a vessel will be

E of the rock awash lying E of Karil Rock. Course may then be

gradually altered SE to pass SW of Bhubra Rock, and then to

Vengurla Roads. 

2.49 Vessels should not use this channel at night, but should pass

W of Vengurla Rocks in depths of 31 to 37m. 

2.50 Vengurla Roads (15°51'N., 73°37'E.) lies S and SW

of Vengurla Point, 79m high. Vengurla Point Light is shown

from a hexagonal masonry tower on the point; a flagstaff

stands on the point. 

2.50 Wagh-Giri, a conspicuous wooded mountain, 322m high,

lies about 5 miles ENE of Vengurla Point. 

2.50 Tides—Currents.—Currents between Vengurla Point and

the N entrance to Karil Kachal Channel set N on the flood current and S on the ebb, with a velocity of about 1 knot in spring

tides. 

2.50 Anchorage.—Large vessels can anchor, in 10m, with the

flagstaff on Vengurla Point bearing 036°, distant 1 mile, or

closer inshore, in similar depths on the same bearing with the

flagstaff distant about 0.4 mile. 

2.50 Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in about 4m,

in the bight on the E side of Vengurla Point. 

2.50 Caution.—South West Point Rock, with a least depth of

1.2m, and marked SW by a buoy, lies about 0.3 mile W of Vengurla Point.

2.50 South Rock, with a depth of 3.2m, lies about 0.4 mile S of

Vengurla Point; shoal patches lie W and SW of it. A buoy,

moored about 229m NW of South Rock, marks these dangers.

2.50 East Rock, with a depth of 1.8m, and marked W by a buoy,

lies about 0.3 mile SE of Vengurla Point. 

Vengurla Roads to Marmagao Bay

2.51 Machlimar Point, 85m high, lies about 3.5 miles SSE

of Vengurla Point. The entrance of the Talavda River lies about

1 mile SSE of the point. 

Port Redi (15°45'N., 73°39'E.) is an open roadstead off Redi

Point. Vessels load ore at the anchorage from lighters working

to jetties near the ore mines. The port is protected from N

winds and currents by cliffs which almost encircle it. It is

closed during the Southwest Monsoon from mid-September to

mid-May. 

2.51 Redi Point is a flat rocky projection, 15m high at its W end.

Redi Rock (Rairi Rock), 11m high, lies about 1 mile S of the

point, at the S end of foul ground extending W and SSW of the

point. Redi Fort (Rairi Fort), with an elevation of 34m, stands

about 1 mile NE of Redi Point. 

2.51 Pilotage.—Pilotage at Port Redi is compulsory. The vessel’s

ETA should reach the Port Office Redi (Ratnagiri) 24 hours

prior to arrival. The pilot boards 1 to 1.5 miles W of Redi

Point; vessels should anchor here to wait for the pilot. Port authority is exercised by the Port Officer, who also acts as pilot.

2.51 Signals.—Storm signals are shown at Port Redi; the Brief

System is used. Further information on these storm signals

may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide)

South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

2.51 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained, in about 13m, off

Redi Rock by vessels loading ore.

2.51 The Terekhol River (Tirakul River), about 2.5 miles SE of

Redi Point, is fronted by a bar with depths of about 2.5m, but

subject to change. Terekhol Fort lies on the brow of a hill on

the N side of the river entrance.
60 Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 

Pub. 173

2.51 Havelock Rock, a sharp pinnacle awash, lies about 2 miles

W of the river entrance. Another rock, awash, lies nearly 0.5

mile farther ENE.

2.51 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained, in 9.1m, mud,

about 0.8 mile SE of Havelock Rock. 

2.51 Chapora Fort (15°36'N., 73°44'E.), about 7 miles SSE of

the Terekhol River, is easily identified by its black walls, and

stands on a high bluff on the S side of the entrance of the

Chapora River. 

2.51 A conspicuous church is situated on Baga Point, about 2.5

miles farther S. 

Aguada Bay (15°29'N., 73°47'E.), entered between Aguada

and Kabo Rajniwas, about 1.8 miles SSE, affords anchorage to

moderate-sized vessels during the Northeast Monsoon. The

bay is free from dangers, but strong W winds produce a heavy

swell. 

2.52 Panaji (15°30'N., 73°49'E.) (World Port Index No.

48960), the capital and seat of government of the State of Goa,

Daman, and Diu, is situated on the S bank of the Mandavi River, which enters the head of the bay. The city is well built, with

prominent buildings along the waterfront. A bridge spans the

river at the E end of the city. 

2.52 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Panaji is 2.3m at MHWS and 2.06m at MHWN. 

2.52 The ebb current sets strongly out of the Mandavi River, but is

weak at the anchorage off Aguada, where the flood current is

barely perceptible. 

2.52 Depths—Limitations.—Depths in the entrance of Aguada

Bay are about 7.6m, decreasing gradually to the head of the

bay. 

2.52 Outer Patches, with a least depth of 0.9m, lies about 0.8 mile

W of Kabo Rajniwas.

2.52 The bar of the Mandavi River, which is subject to frequent

change, has a depth of 2.1m during good weather. During the

Southwest Monsoon, heavy breakers extend across the entrance and render it impassable. 

2.52 The main channel, less than 183m wide, lies between sand

banks extending about 0.9 mile SW of Raij Magus, the N entrance point of the river, and about 0.5 mile SW from Gaspar

Dias, the S entrance point of the river. Raij Magus Light is

shown from mid-August to mid-June from a white round tower

0.3 mile NNE of Raij Magus Point. 

2.52 In 1987, a shoal depth of 2m existed about 0.5 mile SW of

Gasper Dias.

2.52 Raij Sand, which dries, lies in the fairway W of Panaji.

2.52 The dangers in the channel are not marked. 

2.52 Most cargo is worked from anchorage.

2.52 The port has a jetty, 92m long, with an alongside depth of

4.3m. There is a pier for inspections and surveys of barges and

small craft up to 75m in length and a beam of 15m can be accommodated. 

2.52 Aspect.—Aguada is a bold bluff headland, 80m high, which

appears from seaward to have a flat summit. The headland is

fortified on its N side; a fort with a flagstaff lies on its S side,

with a disused white round tower. 

2.52 Aguada Light is shown from a white rectangular tower close

N of the fort; a tower lies close SE in the N part of the fort. A

racon is situated at the light. Another light is shown about

183m S of the tower. 

2.52 A chapel, with an elevation of 74m, stands about 0.5 mile E

of Aguada Fort Light. 

2.52 The coast close N of Aguada is low and a heavy surf always

runs along the foreshore. 

2.52 Kandoli Hill (Candolim Hill), about 2 miles N of Aguada, is

easily recognized by three conspicuous banyan trees, with an

elevation of 101m, which lie on it. 

2.52 Kabo Point, at the W extremity of the island of Goa, is a

prominent headland, 55m high. A conspicuous church spire is

situated near the seaward end of the headland. 

2.52 A group of radio masts, with an elevation of 86m, stand near

the summit of Panaji Hill, S of Panaji. A conspicuous water

tower, with an elevation of 82m, is situated about 0.5 mile farther SE. 

2.52 Range lights, in line bearing 053°54', lead close W of Outer

Patches and across the bar at the entrance to the Mandavi River. Range lights shown at Tejo and bearing astern 191°18'' lead

through the channel W of Raij Sand. These lights are extinguished during the Southwest Monsoon when the bar is closed

to navigation. 

2.52 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory in the Mandivi River as

well as for vessels proceeding to the inland portions of the

Mandavi River and the Zuvari River. Local pilots may be engaged by contacting the Captain of the Port, Panaji. 

2.52 Regulations.—The vessel’s ETA should be sent to the Port

Captain 4 days, 3 days, 48 hours, and 24 hours prior to arrival. 

2.52 Panaji is a fair weather anchorage port making any cargo operations worked from anchorages impossible during the Summer Monsoon period (about May 15 through September 15).

2.52 Signals.—Storm signals are shown at Panaji and the Brief

System is used. Further information on these storm signals

may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide)

South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

2.52 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channels 16 and 74

2. Telephone: 91-832-2225070

91-832-2420580

91-832-2420579

3. Facsimile: 91-832-2420582

91-832-2421483

4. E-mail: captainofports@eth.net

2.52 The Port Captain can be contacted via mobile telephone at

91-9225-905926 and 91-9890-331573.

2.52 Hours of operation are 0930 to 1745 local time. 

2.52 Anchorage.—During good weather large vessels can anchor

in about 14m, mud, about 2 miles W of Aguada. 

2.52 Vessels of moderate size can anchor, in 6.4m, mud, with

Aguada Fort Light bearing 333°, distant 1 mile. 

2.52 Caution.—Vessels approaching from the N should give the

W extremity of Aguada a berth of at least 1 mile. A dangerous

wreck lies in about 4.5 miles NW of Mormagao Head. 

2.52 Vessels approaching from the S should take care to avoid the

dangers in the entrance to Marmagao Bay and the foul ground

extending W from Kabo Point. 
Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 61

Pub. 173

Marmagao (Mormugao) (15°26'N., 73°48'E.)

World Port Index No. 48970

2.53 Marmagao Bay (Mormugao Bay) is entered between

Marmagao Head and Kabo Point, previously described with

Aguada Bay in paragraph 2.52, about 3 miles N. The entrance

to the bay is encumbered with shoals. The Grandi Islands lie in

the S approach to the bay.

2.53 Marmagao is one of the oldest ports on the west coast of India, protected by a breakwater as well as a mole constructed E

of the seaward end of the breakwater. The port lies on the N

side by Marmagao Head. It is the leader in exporting iron ore in

India as well as manganese ore and alumina. Imports include

petroleum products, chemicals, other general cargo and a

growing container trade.

2.53 Winds—Weather.—Occasional strong NE winds from

about the middle of February to the end of March cause a

heavy swell in Marmagao Bay. These winds usually last from 3

days to a week and decrease in strength from sunset to sunrise.

However, it has been cautioned by the local authorities that the

weather deteriorates without warning. 

2.53 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Marmagao is 2.3m at

MHWS and 1.6m at MHWN. 

2.53 Tidal currents in the outer anchorage off Marmagao Bay are

weak. 

2.53 Depths—Limitations.—The port is approached through a

dredged channel entered between Lighted Buoy No. 1 and

Lighted Buoy No. 2, moored 2 miles W of of Marmagao Point.

The channel, which leads to the inner anchorage and the berthing area, is about 4.6 miles long and 250m wide. The channel

has been dredged to a depth of 14.4m although lesser depths

have been reported (2002). 

2.53 Vessels up to 70,000 dwt, with a maximum draft of 12m, can

berth alongside. Vessels up to 275,000 dwt can be accommodated in midstream.

2.53 The port authority applies an underkeel clearance of 1.2m

and a swell allowance of 0.5m. During the Southwest Monsoon

period a higher swell allowance is used.

2.53 A quay extends 1.5 miles E and SE from the root of the

breakwater and affords ten numbered berths, including berths

for tankers and ore carriers at its SE end.

2.53 Limitations at these berths are given in the accompanying table titled Marmagao Bay—Berth Limitations.

2.53 Draft limitations for the above berths are subject to frequent

change in conjunction with the state of tide, underkeel clearance, prevailing sea, and weather conditions. Details of changes can be obtained from the local pilot or the Port Officer. 

2.53 Night navigation is permitted only during the fair season

(mid-September to the end of May), but there are still restrictions placed on vessels working at Berths 9, 10, and 11. Detailed information should be obtained from the Harbor Master

if this is applicable.

2.53 A floating dock extends NE from Berth No. 1. A breakwater

extends NE from between Berth No. 2 and Berth No. 3. Both

structures are best seen on the chart.

 Port Authority of Marmagao

http://www.mptgoa.com

Marmagao Bay—Berth Limitations

Berth Max. loa

Depth alongside

Remarks

Fair 

Season 

(OctMay)

Summer 

(Southwest 

Monsoon) 

Season

5A 170m 13.1m 11.0m Steel.

6A 225m 14.0m 12.0m Bulk coal.

7 100m 3.5m 3.5m Pellets and coke. This berth used for barges.

8 225m 12.8m 11.0m Oil products and Chemicals. This is a T-headed berth with dolphins

located on either side.

9 335m 14.0m 12.0m Iron ore. Accommodates vessels up to 52m in width and 275,000

dwt. Synthetic mooring lines to be used.

10 215m 12.0m 11.0m General cargo and containers. Accommodates vessels up to 35,000

dwt. 

11 225m 12.8m 12.0m General cargo and containers. Accommodates vessels up to 35,000

dwt. 

Mooring Dolphins

No. 1 225m 12.8m 11.0m

No. 2 225m 13.0m 11.0m Iron ore, other ores, and general cargo.

No. 3 225m 13.0m 11.0m
62 Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 

Pub. 173

2.53 Vessels requiring to top-off to their seasonal mark may be

permitted W of the breakwater during fair weather season. 

2.53 Several mooring buoys are situated E and SE of the head of

the mole. Five finger piers for small vessels and barges lie

within 0.2 mile SE of the Berth No. 9. 

2.53 Foul ground borders Grandi Island up to 0.3 mile offshore. A

5m patch lies about 0.5 mile NE of the E end of the island; other patches, with depths of 3.9m, lie 0.7 mile N and 0.6 mile

NNW of the same position. 

2.53 Saint Georges Reef, which dries 1.5m, lies about 0.3 mile E

of Grandi Island. 

2.53 Sail Rock, 14m high, lies about 0.5 mile S of the W end of

Grandi Island; this pillar rock can easily be mistaken for a sail.

A reef, which dries 1.2m, lies about 0.2 mile NE of Sail Rock. 

2.53 Saint George’s Bank, with a least depth of 6.5m, lies about

0.8 mile WNW of Grandi Island.

2.53 Martha Patches, a group of rocky shoals with a least known

depth of 2.7m, lie about 1 mile N of Grandi Island. 

2.53 Marmagao Rocks, with a least depth of 6.1m, lie about 0.5

mile N of Marmagao Point, and are marked on their S side by

Lighted Channel Buoy No. 6. 

2.53 An 8.2m patch and a 7.9m patch lie about 0.5 mile NNW and

1.3 miles W of Marmagao Point. 

2.53 Amee Shoals, close N of Marmagao Rocks and lying in the

middle of the entrance to Marmagao Bay, is a group of shoals

with a least depth of 1.8m. 

2.53 Sunchi Reefs, about 1 mile S of Kabo Rajniwas, are rocky

shoals, one of which dries 0.9m. Marivel Patches, with a least

depth of 0.4m, lie close NE. 

2.53 Kambariam Islet (Buffalo Rock), 6m high, lies about 1 mile

SW of Marmagao Point, the NW extremity of Marmagao

Head. Foul ground extends about 0.2 mile N of the islet.

2.53 Sawyer Patches, with depths of 4.9m, lie about 0.5 mile N of

Kambariam Islet. 

2.53 Aspect.—Marmagao Head (15°24'N., 73°48'E.), about

61m high, is a tableland peninsula with steep sides, especially

W. It is connected to the mainland SE by a narrow neck of low

ground.

2.53 The S side of Marmagao Bay is bold and rocky, rising to the

tableland of Marmagao Head. 

2.53 The N shore of the bay between Kabo Point and Nazaret

Point, about 4.5 miles ESE, consists of alternating stretches of

sand and rock. The land within is covered with jungle and rises

to an elevation of 45m. 

2.53 A radio mast, with an elevation of 175m, is conspicuous

about 2 miles NNW of Nazaret Point. 

2.53 A conspicuous water tower, with an elevation of 74m, is situated about 0.5 mile SE of Marmagao Point.

2.53 North Head Breakwater Light is shown from a white concrete tower at the N point of the breakwater. 

2.53 A mole extends E about 0.1 mile from E side of the breakwater; Breakwater East Head Light is shown from a squat masonry tower at the head of the mole. 

2.53 St George’s Islands (15°23'N., 73°47'E.) consists of three

islands between 1.5 and 2.5 miles SSW of Marmagao Head.

Grandi Island is the collective name of the two S islands of the

group, which are connected by a narrow reef of rock and shingle. The W of the two islands, 76m high and conical, is bold,

rocky, and covered with trees towards its summit. The E island

rises to a 76m summit at its E end, which, with the N side of

the island, is covered with jungle. Sail Rock, lies close SSW of

the E most Grandi Island and remains uncovered to a height of

13m with a wreck next to a reef that covers and uncovers to

1.5m close NE. 

2.53 Pikene Island, the third island of the St George’s group, is

about 61m high and lies about 1.5 miles NE of Grandi Island.

This circular island is flat-topped, precipitous, and covered

with trees. 

2.53 Grandi Island Light is shown from a four-sided metal tower

on the summit of the W island. In 1974, an obstruction was reported 1.5 miles WSW of Grandi Island Light. A prohibited

anchorage projects 1.8 miles W and 1 mile S from the W end

of Grandi Island.

2.53 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Vessels should send, via

their agent, a request for pilotage, at least 48 hours in advance. 

2.53 Vessels awaiting a pilot may anchor, in about 13m, mud,

about 2 miles WNW of Marmagao Point.

2.53 The pilot boards about 0.9 mile W of Lighted Buoy No. 1

and Lighted Buoy No. 2. In bad weather, the pilot will guide

the vessel from the pilot vessel until boarding is possible. 

2.53 Pilotage is available 24 hours during the fair weather season

(September to May), but is not available at night during the

Southwest Monsoon (June to September). During these times,

vessels are guided up to the breakwater by the pilot launch and

with assistance from the VTMS. 

2.53 Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA, via their

agent, 48 hours and 24 hours in advance.

2.53 A Vessel Traffic Management System (VTMS) controls traffic to the approaches to Marmagao Harbor. Vessels should contact Marmagao VTMS Center on VHF channel 16 (call sign:

Goa Port) when within 2 hours prior to arrival or no less than a

radius of 12 miles from the breakwater. 

2.53 Vessels at anchor should maintain a continuous listening

watch on VHF channel 16. 

2.53 Signals.—The quarantine signal of the International Code of

Signals must be shown by all vessels entering the port, and

kept flying until pratique has been granted. The health official

boards either at the anchorage or alongside the quay. Radio

pratique may be granted.

2.53 A signal station is near the NW extremity of Marmagao

Head. Storm signals are displayed from a flagstaff; the General

North Head Breakwater Light
Sector 2. India—West Coast—Diu Head to Cape Rama 63

Pub. 173

System is used. Further information on these storm signals

may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide)

South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.” 

2.53 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. Call sign: Goa Port

2. VHF: VHF channels 10, 11, 12, 14, and

16

3. Telephone: 91-832-2520184

91-832-2522868

91-832-2594807

873-762093016 (INMARSAT)

4. Facsimile: 91-832-2520184

91-832-2521105

91-832-2521155

873-762093017 (INMARSAT)

5. E-mail: dc@mptgoa.com

2.53 Anchorage.—Large vessels can anchor S of Grandi Island,

with shelter from NW winds, in about 18m, mud, about 0.4

mile SW of the SE extremity of Grandi Island. Smaller vessels

can anchor, in about 17m, about 0.1 mile ESE of the above

point. 

2.53 Anchorage can be taken in Marmagao Bay, in 7m, about 0.6

mile NE of the head of the breakwater. 

2.53 Anchorage is prohibited between Searle Patch (15°27'N.,

73°48'E.) and Amee Shoals, 1 mile SW.

2.53 Anchorage is also prohibited off the S side of the W end of

Grandi Island (15°21'N., 73°46'E.) and about 0.5 mile and 1.5

miles SE of Pikene Island (15°23'N., 73°48'E.). 

2.53 Directions.—Vessels bound for Marmagao Bay from the S

should pass about 2 miles W of Grandi Island and about 1 mile

W of Kambariam Islet, then steer NE to enter the buoyed channel. 

2.53 Vessels approaching from N should steer to pass about 2

miles W of Aguada Head (15°29'N., 73°46'E.), then keep Kambariam Islet in range with the E end of Grandi Island, bearing

168°; this leads W of all dangers in the entrance to Marmagao

Bay. 

2.53 Caution.—At night do not proceed into depths less than

13m when between Aguada Head and the Saint George’s Islands. 

2.53 The sea breaks heavily on the dangers in the entrance during

the Southwest Monsoon. 

2.53 During the Southwest Monsoon, in presence of heavy swell

at the approach to the port, good steerage should be maintained

while rounding the breakwater to avoid being set E; ensure

there is sufficient underkeel clearance to allow for the swell

and maneuvering.

2.53 A spoil ground lies 2 miles WNW of Marmagao Point. 

2.53 Dangerous wrecks lie 1.3 and 0.8 miles from the fairway

buoy. 

2.53 Submarine Exercise Areas are centered 30 miles and 45

miles W and 20 miles SW of Marmagao Head.

2.53 A channel, marked by lighted and unlighted buoys, leads S

of the spoil ground and N of Marmagao Head to the harbor.

Marmagao Bay to Cape Rama

2.54 The coast between Cola Bay (15°22'N., 73°53'E.) and

the Sal River, about 14 miles SSE, consists of low cultivated

land with several churches on small hills. 

2.54 Anchorage, sheltered from NW winds, can be taken, in a

depth of about 7m, in Cola Bay. 

2.54 The Sal River, entered close N of Betul Point (15°08'N.,

73°57'E.), may only be used by small vessels and local knowledge is required. Cargo is handled by lighters from the wharf at

Betul, on the S side of the river entrance. 

2.54 Chandranath Temple stands on a hill with an elevation of

349m, about 7 miles NE of the entrance to the Sal River. 

2.54 Anchorage can be obtained, in about 10m, mud, from 1.3 to

2.3 miles W of Betul Point.

2.54 Canaguinim Bay is entered between Canaguinim Point,

about 1 mile SW of Betul Point, and Moliem Point, about 2

miles SW. Two rock patches, each drying 1.2m, lie about 0.1

mile and 0.3 mile, respectively, SW of Canaguinim Point.

Cliffs, about 38m high, lie on the E half of the bay. A rocky islet, 0.9m high, lies at the head of the bay. 

2.54 Anchorage can be taken, in 9.1m, 0.5 mile NNE of Moliem

Point. 

2.54 Rama Bay lies between Moliem Point and Cape Rama, about

1.3 miles SSW. Cliffs at the head of the bay rise to elevations

of 40 to 61m. A small islet lies close W of Moliem Point. 

2.54 Anchorage can be obtained, in about 11m, mud, 0.5 mile

NNE of Cape Rama
65

Pub. 173

3. 

India—West Coast—Cape Rama to Cape Comorin

3.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 3 — CHART INFORMATION
67

Pub. 173

SECTOR 3 

INDIA—WEST COAST—CAPE RAMA TO CAPE COMORIN

3.0 Plan.—This sector describes the W coast of India from Cape

Rama to Cape Comorin. The arrangement of the sector is from

N to S. 

General Remarks

3.1 The Western Ghats continue parallel to the coast at

distances of 5 to 25 miles inland. These mountains have general heights of 750 to 900m, and attain heights of 1,800m. Palghat Gap, a striking feature on this coast, lies between the

parallels of 10°52'N and 10°35'N. This break in the Western

Ghats is about 16 miles wide; its S side is formed by Kollengode Bluff, which lies about 48 miles NE of Kochi (Cochin) at

the NW end of the Anamalai Mountains. North of Palghat Gap,

gentle slopes and gradually widening valleys succeed the forest-clad uplands, until near the coast, where the low tablelands

shelve into rice plains and backwaters fringed with coconut

palms. South of the gap is an extensive hill area, which includes some mountains, almost detached and precipitous on

their W sides, which are connected with lower hills diminishing in height towards the coast. The coastal belt, extending

about 10 miles inland, is flat and covered with an almost unbroken belt of coconut and areca palms; high white sand dunes

and areas of red sand along the coast form good landmarks.

Tortuous rivers flowing into lagoons and backwaters are connected in places by canals and, between Alleppeu (9°29'N.,

76°19'E.) and Ponnani, 85 miles NNW, form a continuous line

of smooth water.

Cape Rama to Karwar Bay

3.2 Cape Rama (15°05'N., 73°55'E.) projects 1 mile W

from Rama False Bluff, which rises abruptly E of the tableland

of Cape Rama to a height of about 200m. The land then rises

gradually E in a succession of hills for a distance of 4 miles

and terminates in East Peak, 448m high. Kankon Peak (Kanakona Peak), 646m high, about 9 miles ESE of Cape Rama, is

the W summit of a range of hills extending E, and is separated

from East Peak by a gap. 

3.2 Cape Rama is prominent and has a fort on it, but during the

thick weather of the Southwest Monsoon, no part of this coast

is visible for more than 4 or 5 miles. Good radar returns have

been reported from Cape Rama at 16 miles. Pandigat Point

(Paidegal Point), about 5.5 miles SE of Cape Rama, is a steep

projecting headland rising to an height of 192m; a village is situated on its N side. Kankon Islet, fringed by a reef, lies about 2

miles farther SE. 

3.3 Karwar Bay (14°49'N. 74°06'E.) is entered between

Dayamada Point, the N entrance point of Kalinadi Creek, and

Badchidhar Point (14°48'N., 74°06'E.), the NW extremity of

Karwar Head, about 2.8 miles SSW. Karwar Head, with an elevation of 207m, is covered with dense jungle. The entrance

leading to Kalinadi Creek is much encumbered by sand banks

and the channels are subject to frequent change. 

3.4 Karwar (14°49'N., 74°07'E.) (World Port Index No.

48990) is a lighterage port on the SE side of Karwar Bay.

3.4 Tides—Currents.—The average maximum tide rise is 1.6m

MHWS and 0.7m at MHWN. 

Depths—Limitations.—A channel, abount 2.5 miles long,

150m wide, and dredged to a minimum depth of 10.0m to as

deep as 10.7m, leads to the Baitkal Cove, where the alongside

wharf facilities for Karwar are located. The channel is marked

by ranges. There is a turning circle dredged to a depth of at

least 10m at the junction between the approach channel and

Baitkal Cove. 

On the SE side of Baitkal Cove is a quay, 560m long, divided

into two berths. One berth, 355m in length, can accomodate

two vessels with a maximum draft of 9.75m; the other berth is

a lighterage wharf, 205m in length, dredged to a depth of 2.5m

alongside. A stone masonry wharf, nearly 244m in length with

an alongside depth of 2.5m, is located in the NW side of Baitkol Cove.

Aspect.—Loliem Point (Lolien Point) (14°55'N., 74°03'E.),

in the N approach to Karwar, attains an elevation of 175m

about 0.2 mile inland, and is steep, rocky, and well-wooded.

Loliem Rocks, awash at LW springs, lie about 1 mile S of Loliem Point; a rock, with less than 1.8m over it, lies about 0.2

mile N of the rock. Black Rock (Kumbae), 19m high and

fringed with rocks, lies about 1.8 miles SE of Loliem Point.

Kangiguda Island, 51m high, lies about 4 miles SE of Loliem

Point and about 0.2 mile offshore. 

3.4 Oyster Rocks (14°49'N., 74°04'E.) consist of a prominent

group of islands and rocks. Devgad Island (Devgadgudda Island), 44m high to the tops of the trees, is the largest and highest island; it is bold, rocky, and steep-to on its W side. 

3.4 Oyster Rocks Light, with a racon, is shown from a red round

masonry structure, with white bands and a white cupola, on the

summit of Devgad Island. 

Kurmagad Island (Kurmagadgudda Island), encircled by fortifications and with its summit rising to a height of 60m, lies

about 2.5 miles N of Karwar Head. The island is surrounded by

foul water, but there is a safe narrow channel, with charted

depths of about 7m, between Kurmagad Island and Sunghiri Island (Shimishgudda Island), 31m high, about 0.2 mile SW. 

3.4 Mandal Island (Mandelgudda Island), 26m high, lies about

0.2 mile SW of Devgad Island; a 5.2m patch lies about 183m E

of the island. 

3.4 Karkal Island (Karkaigudda Island), 33m high and covered

with jungle, lies close E of Devgad Island. East Island, a bare

rock, 9m high, lies about 0.3 mile farther E. A 0.3m patch lies

between Karkal Island and East Island. 

3.4 A rock, which dries 1.2m, lies close E of East Island; the sea

breaks over this rock at HW. A detached shoal, with a depth of

2m lies close SE of this rock. 

3.4 Parker Rock, with a least depth of 4.7m, rock, sand, and

shell, lies about 2.5 miles NW of Devgad Island. A detached
68 Sector 3. India—West Coast—Cape Rama to Cape Comorin 

Pub. 173

10m patch lies close E of the rock. 

3.4 A breakwater, 250m in length, lies close S of the end of the

approach channel.

3.4 Guddehalli Betta (Godhulli Peak) (14°47'N., 74°10'E.),

550m high and conspicuous, lies about 4 miles WSW of Karwar Head; with the adjacent summit, appears from the S as a

saddle-backed hill. 

3.4 Mogeragudda Island and Gudsar Sunv (Karwar Rock) are

described in paragraph 3.5

Range beacons N of Karwar Head lead through the dredged

channel to Karwar. The initial range is picked up between Oyster Rocks and Karwar Head. 

3.4 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and available 24 hours.

Pilots are contacted on VHF channels 10, 12, and 16.

3.4 Vessels waiting for the pilot to board may anchor about 0.65

mile SSE of Oyster Rocks Light, in a depth of about 12m, soft

mud and sand.

3.4 Regulations.—Cargo operations at the anchorage are suspended during the Southwest Monsoon period (May-September.) Baitkal Cove provides year-round all-weather operations. 

3.4 The vessel should send its ETA 48 hours in advance. 

3.4 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channels 10, 12, and 16

2. Telephone: 91-8382-221342

3. Facsimile: 91-8382-221488

4. E-mail: dir@karnarakaports.in

3.4 Directions.—Vessels approaching or entering Karwar Bay,

either by day or night, should have no difficulty after having

made Oyster Rocks Light.

3.4 Approaching from N, pass on either side of Sunghiri Island

(Shimishgudda Island) according to draft.

3.4 The SW extremity of Kurmagad Island (Kurmagagudda Island), bearing 131° in range with Guddehalli Betta, leads SW

of Loliem Rock.

3.4 At night, steer for Port Karwar Light, bearing 124°, if proceeding to the inner anchorage.

3.4 The E end of Mogeraguda Island in range with the W end of

Anjadip Island bearing 154°, barely leads clear of, by less than

0.2 mile, the dangers E of Oyster Rocks. 

3.4 If approaching from S, pass between Oyster Rocks and Karwar Head. The summits of Kurmagadgudda Island and Ramnathguda, in range bearing 036°, lead clear of the dangers E of

Oyster Rocks; a white framework tower stands on the summit

of the island. 

3.4 Anchorage.—During the Southwest Monsoon, anchorage

can be obtained NE of Karkal Island (Karkaigudda Island), in

10m, soft mud, with Oyster Island Light bearing 248°, distant

about 0.8 mile. 

3.4 The principal anchorage for working cargo (October-April)

is in the SE portion of Karwar Bay (14°49'N., 74°06.3'E.), in a

depth of about 7m, soft mud. 

3.4 Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor near the head

of Baitkal Cove, in a depth of 2.7m. 

Karwar Bay to Honavar

3.5 Mogeragudda Island (14°48'N., 74°05'E.), 56m

high, rocky, and covered with jungle, lies about 0.5 mile SW of

Karwar Head. A 4.3m patch lies about 0.3 mile SSW of the island. Gudsar Sunv (Karwar Rock), with a least depth of 2.4m,

lies about 0.5 mile WNW of Mogeragudda Island. The channel

between Mogeragudda Island and Karwar Head is free from

dangers, with a least charted depth of 7.6m in the fairway.

Golikodlu Peak, a sharp peak 547m high, lies about 3 miles

E of Guddehalli Betta.

Anjadip Island (Angediva Island) (14°45'N., 74°07'E.), in

the S approach to Karwar, lies about 3 miles S of Karwar Head.

A flagstaff lies at an elevation of 72m near the NW end of the

island, with a church close ENE of it. A shoal patch, with a

least depth of 3.2m and marked close E by a buoy, lies about

0.2 mile SE of the SE extremity of the island. Round Island,

19m high and fringed by reef, lies about 0.7 mile ENE of the

same extremity. 

3.5 The island forms a good breakwater and vessels have ridden

out the Southwest Monsoon here. A strong current sets SE during this season. 

3.5 Caution.—A circular spoil ground, with a radius of 1 mile,

lies about 1.8 miles SW of the SW extremity of Anjadip Island. 

3.5 A submarine pipeline is laid from a position ashore between

Binaga Point and Baitkal Point, in a SW direction for about 0.5

mile, then for 1.5 miles in a WSW direction. Vessels are advised to avoid anchoring in the vicinity. 

3.6 Binge Bay (14°46'N., 74°08'E.) lies between Binaga

Point and Arge Cape, 2.5 miles SE. A restricted area, into

which entry is prohibited, extends from a position about 0.5

mile SE of Karwar Head to Kwada Point (14°43.0'N.,

74°12.6'E.). A major naval base, which includes shipbuilding

and repairs facilities, is located on the NE side of the bay. The

base is approached through a dredged channel initially heading

N between Anjadip Island and Round Island, then NE and E to

the Naval Jetty. This channel has maintained depths of 14m in

its outer part E of Anjadip Island, 13m in a short stretch W of

Round Island, and then 12m from Round Island to the Naval

Oyster Rocks Light
Sector 3. India—West Coast—Cape Rama to Cape Comorin 69

Pub. 173

Jetty. The outer part of the channel is marked by lighted buoys,

unlighted buoys, and range beacons in line bearing 359°. North

Breakwater connects Binaga Point with the N extremity of Anjadip Island; South Breakwater connects the SE extremity of

Round Island with the NW extremity of Arge Island. Anchorage can be obtained about 0.4 mile ENE of Round Island, in a

depth of 11.7m, mud. A prohibited anchorage area lies about

0.4 mile SW of the Naval Jetty. 

3.7 Belekeri (14°42'N., 74°15'E.) (World Port Index No.

49000) is a small iron ore loading port on the S of the entrance

to Belekeri Creek. It hs a loading capability of 3,500 to 4,000

tons per day. Cargo is handled by lighters loading at a stone

masonry wharf, 250m in length, in Belekeri Creek, and the anchorage at Belekeri Bay (Roads). Belekeri Bay (Roads) lies between Kwadar Point and Kusuldiva Gudda, about 6.5 miles SE.

Vessels will anchor in the N part of the Roads for cargo operations.

3.7 Depths—Limitations.—Belekeri Bay (Roads) has depths of

less than 5m. Foul ground extends about 0.7 mile W of Belekeri Point (14°42'N., 74°15'E.), a low, flat, and rocky point at

the head of the bay. Several small islets lie close N and about

0.2 mile WSW of the point. 

3.7 Aspect.—Kwada Guda, about 0.8 mile NW of Kwada Point,

is the conspicuous summit of a steep, rocky headland, 216m

high. 

3.7 Arge Cape, about 3 miles WNW of Kwada Guda, has a summit close within the cape, 168m high. Arge Island, 52m high,

lies about 0.2 mile S of the cape. Button Rock, small and black,

lies about 1.5 miles SSW of Arge Cape. Kukra Islet, 55m high

and wooded, is conspicuous about 1.3 miles W of Belekeri

Point. A light is shown, from September to May, from a white

tower with black bands on Kukra Islet. Belekeri Hill, 474m

high and prominent from S and W, lies about 3.5 miles ENE of

Kwada Point, at the SW end of a range which rises near the

coast N of Belekeri Creek. 

3.7 Dauglish Peak, 610m high, about 3 miles farther NE, is the

summit of the range. Aversa Hills, about 1.5 miles SE of Belekeri Hill, has two conspicuous peaks, the higher being 125m

high. Kandani Halla, a low valley terminating in a creek ENE

of Belekeri Point, extends NE for several miles and shows in

striking contrast to the high land on either side. Tulsi Parwat, a

conspicuous black peak 521m high, lies about 6.5 miles NE of

Kusuldiva Gudda. Conical Hill, 374m high and cone-shaped,

lies about 2 miles NW of Tulsi Parwat. 

3.7 Kusuldiva Gudda (14°38'N., 74°16'E.) is a table-topped hill

46m high; cliffs extend about 1.8 miles SE to the N entrance of

the Gangavali River. A rock, 3m high, lies about 0.5 mile N of

Kusuldiva Gudda. 

3.7 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory but is available on application to the Port Officer at Karwar. 

3.7 Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA 7 days, 5

days, 3 days, 2 days, and 24 hours in advance.

3.7 Cargo operations at the anchorage is suspended during the

Southwest Monsoon period (May-September). 

3.7 Contact Information.—VHF communication with Belekeri

is carried out through Karwar. Direct telephone contact with

Belekeri can be made on 91-8382-282222. All other communications for Belekeri are through Karwar port; contact information can be found in paragraph 3.4.

3.7 Anchorage.—Anchorage for medium-draft vessels can be

obtained, in about 11m, mud, with Kukra Island bearing 080°,

distant 2.5 miles. Vessels with a shallower draft can anchor, in

about 10m, mud, with Kukra Island Light bearing 055°, distant

2 miles. 

3.7 Caution.—Dangerous wrecks, marked close SE by lighted

buoys, lie about 1.5 miles WSW of Kukra Island, and 0.6 mile

SSW of Kukra Island Light. 

3.8 The Gangavali River (Gangawali River) (14°36'N.,

74°18'E.) is shallow, and the channel is rendered tortuous by

sand banks. Handegadda, 310m high, about 4.5 miles ENE of

the river entrance, is a well-defined isolated summit. The coast

from the Gangavali River to Gokarn, about 3.5 miles SSE, is a

low sandy beach fringed with coconut palms; a few miles inland several hills rise to elevations of up to 140m. The town of

Gokarn has several large temples. 

3.8 The Aghnashini River (Tadri River) (14°31'N., 74°20'E.) is

navigable for a short distance only, and local knowledge is necessary to cross the bar; it is subject to constant shifting and has

a least depth of 2.4m. Tadri River Light is shown from midSeptember to mid-June from a stone tower painted black and

white at the NW entrance to the Aghnashini River. Rajaman

Drug, a fort, lies at an elevation of 91m at the SE entrance

point of the river. 

3.8 Kudaini Hill rises to an elevation of 135m about 0.7 mile

NW of Tadri River Light. A promontory, 66m high, lies about

1.3 miles W of Kudaini Hill. 

3.8 Anchorage can be obtained, in 8m, mud, about 1.5 miles SW

of the bar, with the range beacons lying well up on a hill about

0.5 mile NE of Rajaman Drug, bearing 070°.

3.8 The coast between the Aghnashini River and Kumta Point,

about 6 miles SSE, is backed by several conspicuous landmarks. 

3.8 Achuvi Moti Gudda, 835m high, is a prominent sugarloaf

summit, about 10.5 miles NE of the entrance to the Aghnashini

River. 

3.9 Parvat Gudi (Danson Peak) (14°32'N., 74°27'E.) is

581m high and conspicuous; Spike Hill, about 90m lower, lies

about 0.8 mile NW. Kudi Gudda, 321m high, about 3.5 miles

WNW of Parvat Guddi, is dome-shaped and prominent from

W. Gudeangdi Temple, about 3 miles N of Kumta Point, is conspicuous from the N and lies on the summit of a 39m hill close

to the coast. 

3.9 Kumta Point (Kumpta Point) (14°25'N., 74°23'E.), marked

by a light, shown from mid-September to mid-June, lies at the

N entrance to a creek, with the town of Kumta about 1.5 miles

E. Snail Rock, 7m high, lies about 1.8 miles NW of the point,

and 0.8 mile offshore; it resembles a snail when seen from N.

A rock, awash, lies 0.5 mile N of Snail Rock.

3.9 Anchorage.—Small vessels may anchor, with some shelter

from NW winds, in a depth of 6.1m, S of Kumta Point.

3.9 Ravana Gundi, a rocky headland with 2 summits 103m and

120m high, lies about 3.5 miles S of Kumta Point. This headland appears saddle-shaped from the W, and shows up well at

night. A 124m wedge-shaped reddish hill lies about 2.5 miles

NNE of Ravana Gundi. 

3.9 Basavrajdurg Island (Baswaraj Drug) (14°19'N., 74°24'E.)

is 51m high and conspicuous. It is the site of an old fort, in ru-
70 Sector 3. India—West Coast—Cape Rama to Cape Comorin 

Pub. 173

ins, and is covered with trees and bushwood. 

3.9 Indravati Patch, about 0.6 mile W of Basavrajdurg Island, is

a rocky shoal with a depth of 4.6m; a 5m patch lies midway between the rocky shoal and the island. Kalti Gudda, 675m high,

about 9 miles ENE of Basavrajdurg Island, is the highest peak

of a range extending ENE; it is a conspicuous landmark in

clear weather. 

3.10 Honavar (14°17'N., 74°27'E.) (World Port Index No.

49020) is an open roadstead port which enjoys some importance with a considerable export of iron ore, timber, tiles and

betel nuts; local vessels call regularly. The town lies on the N

side of the extensive estuary of the Sharavati River, about 0.8

mile E of the river entrance. The bar of the river is dangerous

and constantly changing; the least depth over the bar was 1.8m

in 1974. At LW, there are heavy breakers, but at HW vessels of

up to 3m draft can enter. There are no port operations during

the summer months.

3.10 Aspect.—A conspicuous monument lies on a hill, 43m high,

behind Honavar and about 1.5 miles NE of the river entrance.

Honavar Light, shown about 0.7 mile SW of the monument,

from mid-September to mid-June, is obscured by trees when

bearing less than 035°.

3.10 Haravalli, a peak 532m high, about 7 miles E of Honavar, is

isolated and easy to identify. A 126m hill, about 3.5 miles S of

the monument, is also easy to identify.

3.10 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be obtained, in 9m, sand

and mud, with the conspicuous monument bearing 082°, about

3 miles. Small vessels may anchor, with shelter from NW

winds, between Basavrajdurg Island and the coast E, in about

5m; local knowledge is necessary.

Honavar to Bhatkal

3.11 The coast between Honavar and the entrance to the

Bhatkal River, is low and sandy with some rocky points. A

ridge, reaching an elevation of about 150m, extends about 2

miles along the coast from a position about 3 miles S of Honavar. The ridge is covered with brushwood and contrasts strongly with the sandy shore; the cliffs, 46m high at its base are

prominent. Murdeshvar, an islet 32m high, lies about 6.5 miles

S of the above ridge. A rocky island, 9m high, lies about 0.8

mile SW of Murdeshvar at the W end of foul ground extending

from the coast. Hawkins Reef, awash, lies with its SW extremity about 1 mile NW of Murdeshvar and about 1 mile offshore.

Dart Rock, with a least depth of 2m, lies about 1.8 miles WSW

of Murdeshvar. Kota Gudde, 430m high, is a conspicuous saddle-shaped summit about 3 miles NE of Murdeshvar. It is connected at lower levels with a long sharp ridge farther inland,

which extends about 2 miles SE and is very noticeable from the

S. Huddelgudda, 525m high, about 6 miles ESE of Kota Gudde, is easily identified by its long flat summit. Kerekund, a

rocky islet 19m high, lies about 4 miles S of Murdeshvar and

on the W edge of the coastal reef. A rock, 3m high, and a rock,

7m high, lie about 0.5 mile NNE and SE, respectively, of the

islet. Between Kerekund and Bhatkal Fort, about 4.5 miles SE,

the low and sandy coast is fringed by foul ground extending up

to 1.8 miles offshore. Shirali (Hog Island), about 1 mile S of

Kerekund, is a peaked island 109m high. Two rocks, each drying 1.2m, lie close W and 0.2 mile SE, respectively, of the island. When in the vicinity of this island do not enter into

depths of less than 18m. 

3.11 Netrani (Pigeon Island) (14°01'N., 74°20'E.), about 9 miles

W of Shirali, is wooded and flat-topped with a conspicuous

summit, 101m high. It is steep-to except for a rock, 16m high,

off its S end, and a rocky shoal close E of the island. 

3.11 Anchorage, with some shelter from NW winds, may be

found, in 27m, mud, off the SE side of the island. Netrani has

been reported to give good radar responses at 17 miles.

3.12 Bhatkal Fort (13°58'N., 74°32'E.), in ruins, lies on a

rocky point, 46m high, at the entrance to the Bhatkal River.

Bhatkal Light is shown from a square masonry tower with red

bands on the fort, and is obscured by Shirali on bearings between 129° and 132°. The town of Bhatkal lies on the N bank

of the river, about 1.5 miles NE of the fort. The channel over

the river bar is very narrow and dangerous for ship’s boats. 

3.12 Anchorage may be obtained, in 10m, with Bhatkal Light

bearing 075°, distant 1 mile. Small vessels may anchor, in 7m,

sand and shell, with Bhatkal Light bearing 014°, distant 0.3

mile. 

3.12 Caution.—When approaching the port of Bhatkal, do not

proceed into depths of less than 18.3m unless local knowledge

is available. When approaching from the S, pass W of a 3m

rocky shoal which lies about 1 mile SW of Bhatkal Light . Take

care to avoid other rocky patches in the approach to Bhatkal,

including two 5m patches and a 4m patch which lie about 1.3

miles WSW, 1 mile S, and 0.8 mile W, respectively, of Bhatkal

Light. When approaching from the N, keep the summit of

Shirali bearing not less than 006°, and alter course for the anchorage when Bhatkal Light bears 090°. The inner anchorage

should be approached on a course of 087° from the outer anchorage, passing about 0.2 mile S of the previously-mentioned

4.3m patch. 

Bhatkal to Coondapoor

3.13 The coast between Bhatkal and Huddi Point, about

1.3 miles SE, consists of cliffs up to about 60m high. Huddi

Point is a cliffy promontory, rising to a height of about 52m

about 0.5 mile inland; a small rounded hill, 35m high, lies on

the extremity of the point. The coast is then low and sandy to

Coondapoor, about 20 miles SSE. 

3.13 Baindur Head (13°52'N., 74°36'E.), about 6 miles SSE of

Huddi Point, is 61m high and cliffy. It is conspicuous from seaward, being the W point of a table and extending some distance

inland. Kodachadri, an impressive sugarloaf peak 1,343m high,

is isolated and conspicuous about 16 miles E of Baindur Head.

When bearing more than 090°, it is obscured by Male Gudda,

900m high, about 9 miles W and prominent. Madalbare Gudda,

1,015m high, is prominent about 2 miles N of Male Gudda. 

3.13 Yademale Gudda, 843m high, is prominent about 5.5 miles

farther NNW. Two White Rocks (Double White Rocks), 5m

high and close together, lie about 4 miles WNW of Baindur

Head, and are very prominent when the sun shines on them.

Single Rock, 3m high, lies about 2 miles N, and a rock awash

lies about 0.8 mile SSE, respectively, of Two White Rocks. 

3.13 Caution.—Although the area inside the above dangers has

been examined and dangers found, it is possible that others

may exist. It is recommended, therefore, that vessels should not
Sector 3. India—West Coast—Cape Rama to Cape Comorin 71

Pub. 173

attempt to pass inside them, and they should keep in depths of

more than 20m between Hog Island and Coondapoor.

3.13 Nancowry Rock (13°48'N., 74°33'E.) consists of two rocky

shoals; the W shoal has a depth of 3m. A rock, 3m high, lies

between Nancowry Rock and the coast. 

3.14 Coondapoor (Kundapur) (13°38'N., 74°41'E.) is an

open roadstead off the common entrance of the Haladi River

and the Chakranadi River. The coast N of the river entrance

consists of low hills up to about 37m high. The coast S of the

entrance is flat, sandy, and fringed with coconut trees up to

24m high. A wreck, best seen on the chart, lies almost 4 miles

W of the harbor entrance. A shoal patch of 7.4m lies 2.1 miles

W of Coondapoor Light. 

3.14 Depths—Limitations.—Foul ground, with rocks above and

below-water, extends for about 3.5 miles N of the entrance to

Coondapoor to a distance of about 1.3 miles offshore. Pate

Rock, which dries about 1m, lies at the SW edge of this foul area. A rock, 4m high, lies about 0.2 mile NE of Pate Rock. A

4.6m patch and a 4.9m patch lie about 0.3 mile SSE and SE, respectively, of Pate Rock. Gangoli Shoals, with a least depth of

5.2m, lie about 3.5 miles WNW of the port entrance. A 6m

shoal lies about 2.8 miles WSW of the entrance. It is marked W

by a red and white striped barrel buoy from October to May. A

6m depth and a 7m depth lie about 1 mile NW and 1.5 miles

WNW of the 6m shoal. The bar across the entrance to

Coondapoor had a least depth of 2.5, and is constantly changing. Steering for the entrance, bearing 055°, leads over the bar

in the deepest water. A dangerous wreck lies 3.8 miles W of the

harbor entrance. Another wreck lies about 1.5 miles S of the

above wreck. 

3.14 Aspect.—Coondapoor Light is shown from a steel mast,

about 0.8 mile S of the entrance, from September 16 to May

15. It is difficult to distinguish from other white lights nearby.

Tippu Sultan Gudda Light is shown from September 15 to May

15, about 1.5 miles NNW of the entrance. Two conspicuous

objects are a white house is close NE and a gray chimney, 40m

high, 1 mile E of the entrance .

3.14 Anchorage can be taken, in about 13.5m, with Coondapoor

Light bearing 076°, distant about 3.5 miles, and about 1 mile

WSW of the 6m patch.

3.14 Caution.—The bar across the entrance to Coondapoor is

perpetually changing. Continuous surf breaks across the entrance with W winds, and it is advisable to enter only with the

aid of local pilots. 

3.14 The port is normally closed during the Southwest Monsoon,

usually from the middle of May until the middle of September,

depending on the weather conditions. The lighted buoys marking the bar and the channel are removed during this time period. 

Coondapoor to New Mangalore

3.15 The coast between Coondapoor and Malpe, about

17.5 miles S, is fringed by coconut trees and broken only by

the mouth of the Sita Nadi River. The Saint Mary Isles consist

of Coconut Island, Middle Rock, Entrance Rock, and the

Darya Bahadurgarh Islands. Passage between the islands is obstructed by numerous rocks and should not be attempted except

by small craft with local knowledge. 

3.15 Coconut Island (13°23'N., 74°40'E.), about 2.5 miles NW

of Malpe, is well-wooded, with trees about 26m high. Foul

ground surrounds the island and extends about 0.8 mile WNW

to a rock which dries 2m. A rock, 2m high, lies about 2 miles

NW of the island and a chain of rocks, above and below-water,

extend about 3.5 miles farther NNE. Middle Rock, 4m high,

lies about 1 mile SSE of Coconut Island. Foul ground extends

up to 0.2 mile W and NW of Middle Rock. Entrance Rock,

1.2m high, lies at the S end of a rocky ridge extending about

0.2 mile S of Middle Rock. 

3.15 The Darya Bahadurgah Islands consist of three islands.

North Island, 15m high at its SE end, is marked by Malpe

Light, shown from a conspicuous square tower on the summit

of the island. Darya Bahadurgah Island, 16m high, lies about

183m SE of North Island. 

3.15 South Island (13°20'N., 74°42'E.) lies about 0.2 mile SE of

Darya Bahadurgah Island and has a rock, with a least depth of

3.7m, about 0.2 mile SSE of it. 

3.15 Anchorage can be obtained, in 9m, mud, about 1 mile WNW

of the light structure on North Island. Small vessels can anchor,

in 6m, sand and mud, with the light structure bearing 185°, distant 0.5 mile. Small vessels can anchor, in 6.1m, mud and sand,

about 0.5 mile E of the summit of South Island.

3.15 Malpe (13°21'N., 75°42'E.), a town of some importance to

coastal vessels, lies on the N side of the entrance to the Udiyavara River. A white house is conspicuous on the N side of the

entrance about 0.2 mile inland. Malpe has four small jetties,

accommodating vessels up to 33m long with a draft up to 3.7m.

The open roadstead W of Malpe is afforded some protection by

the Saint Mary Isles. The coast between Malpe and New Mangalore, about 26 miles SSE, is straight and fringed with coconut trees. Black Rocks, 13m high and conspicuous, lie about 4

miles S of Malpe. Two rocks, 3m high, and two rocks, 5m high,

lie about 0.5 mile NW and 0.2 mile WSW, respectively, of

Black Rocks. Outer Rocks, 13m high and prominent, lie about

1 mile SW of Black Rocks. 

3.15 Caution.—Vessels in the vicinity of Black Rocks and Outer

Rocks should not enter depths of less than about 15m by day or

22m by night. The port is closed during the Southwest Monsoon due to heavy swells.

3.16 Kap Light (13°13'N., 74°44'E.), about 8 miles SSE of

Malpe, is shown from a white tall masonry tower with black

bands standing on a rock near a battery in ruins. Kap Rock,

13m high, is prominent about 1.5 miles NNW of the light. A

rock, 1m high, with a drying rock close NE, lies about 1 mile

SSW of Kap Rock. 

3.16 Mulki Rocks, some of which are 13m high and of black basalt, lie about 4 miles WSW of Kap Light.

3.16 Caution.—Vessels in this vicinity at night should keep in

depths of not less than 24m. A 4m depth lies about 3 miles SW

of Kap Light. Kunjar Gudda, 105m high, is a prominent landmark about 4 miles NE of Kap Light. Valkunji (Buffalo’s

Hump), 1,041m high, a peak of the Western Ghats about 18

miles farther ENE, is well-defined and shaped like a buffalo’s

hump. The town of Mulki, with a church on high ground, lies

about 8.5 miles SSE of Kap Light, and about 1 mile NE of the

entrance to the Mulki River. A dangerous wreck lies approximately 1.5 miles W of the entrance to the Mulki River. Another

dangerous wreck lies about 5 miles NW of the previously-men-
72 Sector 3. India—West Coast—Cape Rama to Cape Comorin 

Pub. 173

tioned wreck.

3.16 Suratkal Point Light (13°00'N., 74°47'E.), with a racon, is

shown from a 36m high white masonry tower with black bands

standing on Suratkal Point, about 5 miles S of the entrance to

the Mulki River. An aero light is occasionally shown from a

very tall tower at Mangalore Airfield, about 6 miles ESE of the

point.

New Mangalore (12°55'N., 74°49'E.)

World Port Index No. 49030

3.17 The port of New Mangalore, a major all-weather port,

is situated about 5 miles NNW of the old Mangalore port. The

harbor is protected by breakwaters that extend about 700m

from the coastline at points N and S of the entrance. The port

consists of a turning basin, with radius of 245m, dredged to a

depth of 15.1m, oil and LPG jetties on the SW side of the lagoon and near the approach channel, and seven berths contained in a basin extending N from the turning basin. The

berths are used for general cargo, the export of iron and manganese ore, and the import of materials for a chemical and fertilizer factory. 

3.17 Depths—Limitations.—The port is approached by a channel about 4 miles long and 245m wide; it is maintained by

dredging to 15.4m and marked by lighted buoys. Several shoal

patches, depths of 7.5 to 9.7m, lie close S of the channel and

are best seen on the chart.

3.17 A depth of 15.1m is maintained within the harbor leading

from the entrance to the turning basin. It has been reported that

the maximum depths allowable for entry into the harbor can be

reduced during the Southwest Monsoon (May-September) period so vessels drawing 14m or more should check with the

Port Authority for the latest information. 

3.17 Berth limitations are given in the accompanying table titled

New Mangalore—Port Facilities.

3.17 Aspect.—Fairway Lighted Buoy is moored about 4 miles W

of the port. Range lights, in line bearing about 079°, at the E

side of the port, mark the approach channel through the entrance. 

3.17 A signal station and port radio station are situated on the N

entrance point of the port. A white concrete tower lies close S

of the S entrance point. Two towers, one of which is conspicuous, lie a short distance inland from the head of the harbor.

There is a conspicuous water tower about 0.2 mile S of the S

entrance point of the harbor. 

3.17 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 200 grt

and is available 24 hours for vessels up to 245m in length. Vessels whose loa exceeds 245m, including Suezmax tankers, are

handled only during daylight hours. 

3.17 Pilots board, as follows: 

1. Vessels with a maximum draft up to 10m—About 1

mile ENE of Fairway Lighted Buoy (12°55'13.8''N,

74°45'33.0''E.).

2. Deep-draft vessels—Close NW of Fairway Lighted

Buoy (12°54'57.0''N, 74°44'16.8''E.).

3.17 The pilots can be contacted, as follows:

1. VHF: VHF channels 12 and 16

2. Telephone: 91-824-2407428

91-824-2407341

3.17 Regulations.—Vessels should send an ETA message at least

48 hours in advance. The message should contain the following

information: 

1. Vessel name.

2. Nationality.

3. Call sign.

4. Draft fore and aft.

5. Length overall.

6. Gross tons and nrt.

7. Last port of call.

3.17 An ETD message should be sent to the harbormaster’s office

at least 2 hours in advance.

 New Mangalore Port Trust (NMPT) Home Page

http://www.newmangalore-port.com

New Mangalore—Port Facilities

Berth 

Name Length Depth Alongside

Draft 

Restriction

Maximum 

Vessel Size Remarks

1 125m 7.0m 7.0m 4,000 dwt General cargo.

2 198m 11.0m 10.5m 30,000 dwt General cargo.

3 198m 11.0m 10.3m 30,000 dwt General cargo.

4 198m 10.0m 10.3m 30,000 dwt Cruise ship terminal, general cargo, 

liquid ammonia, and phosphoric acid.

5 198m 10.0m 9.5m 30,000 dwt General cargo, bulk cement, edible oils.

6 198m 10.0m 9.5m 30,000 dwt General cargo.

7 198m 10.0m 9.5m 30,000 dwt General cargo.

8 300m 13.0m 12.5m 60,000 dwt Iron ore. (See Note 1)

9 330m 11.0m 10.5m 45,000 dwt LPG jetty and POL products.

10 320m 15.1m 14.0m 85,000 dwt Crude oil and POLproducts. (See Note 2) 
Sector 3. India—West Coast—Cape Rama to Cape Comorin 73

Pub. 173

3.17 A Vessel Traffic Management System is in operation in the

port. Vessels will be automatically identified as they enter the

port (about 4 miles from the inner harbor) so there will be no

need for communications between the vessel and Port Control. 

3.17 Signals.—Storm signals are displayed from the signal station; the General System is used. Further information on these

storm signals may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions

(Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.” 

3.17 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. Call sign: New Mangalore Port Control

2. VHF: VHF channels 12 and 16

3. Telephone: 91-824-2407428

91-824-2407300

4. Fascsimile: 91-824-2408390

91-824-2408300

5. E-mail: nmptdc@sancharnet.in

3.17 Anchorage.—Anchorage is recommended NNW of Fairway

Lighted Buoy, in depths of 16 to 18m. A spoil ground is established about 1 mile S of Fairway Lighted Buoy. 

3.17 Caution.—Stay well clear of a dangerous wreck lying close

S of the anchorage. Haze settles over the land after sunrise.

Even during good weather, the coast remains indistinct until

about the middle of the day, making normally conspicuous objects difficult to discern. 

3.18 Mangalore Harbor lies in the backwater formed by the

confluence of the Gurpur River and the Netravati River. The

port is only of importance to coastal vessels, as it is fronted by

a shallow bar between low sandy spits. The port is closed from

June through August during the Southwest Monsoon, when the

bar is impassable. A shoal, with a depth of 15m, lies 6.5 miles

WNW of the entrance to Mangalore. 

3.18 Aspect.—In the approach to Mangalore, the following peaks

are conspicuous:

1. Kodinjakal (Asses Ears), 346m high, about 18 miles

NE of Mangalore.

2. Kuduremukha, a 1,890m peak of the Western Ghats,

about 13 miles farther ENE.

3. Mudipina Padavu, 207m high, about 7 miles ESE of

Mangalore.

4. Passodigumphe (Barn Hill), 324m high, a sloping

mountain with a flattish summit, about 8.5 miles farther

SSE.

The town of Mangalore is almost entirely concealed from the

offing, but the following landmarks are conspicuous:

1. Mangalore Light, a squat, white, masonry tower with

black bands, attached to a house resembling a small chapel,

about 0.5 mile ENE of the harbor entrance.

2. A 41m high dome, surmounted by the steeple of the

Roman Catholic Cathedral, about 0.5 mile N of the light

structure.

3. The 76m high square tower of Saint Aloysius College,

about 1.3 miles NNE of the cathedral.

4. A conspicuous white cross about 3.5 miles N of the

harbor entrance.

5. A group of white houses close S of the harbor entrance.

A radio tower, having an elevation of 153m, lies about 1 mile

NNW of Saint Aloysius College. 

Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 100

grt and is available during daylight hours only. For boarding

positions, see New Mangalore (paragraph 3.17).

Regulations.—For ETA and message requirements, see

New Mangalore (paragraph 3.17). 

Signals.—Vessels can communicate with a signal station

close S of Mangalore Light. 

Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channel 12

2. Telephone: 91-824-420104

Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in 9.1m, mud,

with Mangalore Light bearing between 050° and 100°, distant

about 2 miles. Vessels should not approach the lighthouse closer than 1.5 miles, as the depths then decrease rapidly.

Caution.—It is preferable to arrive off Mangalore during the

afternoon with the sun astern, or at night when the light can be

seen. The landmarks are difficult to distinguish during the

morning haze. 

Dangerous wrecks lie about 1.8 and 2.5 miles WSW of Mangalore Light.

Mangalore to Mount Dill

3.19 The coast from Mangalore to Kotte Kunnu, about 55

miles SSE, presents a fringe of coconut palms broken here and

there by the mouth of a river or a prominent headland.

Manjeshwara, about 9 miles SSE of Mangalore, is a small customs port with minimum of trade. A radio tower lies near the

coast about 5 miles NNW of Manjeshwara. Kumbla, a village

with an old fort, lies about 15.5 miles SSE of Mangalore, at the

11 320m 15.1m 14.0m 85,000 dwt Crude oil and POLproducts. (See Note 2) 

12 320m 15.1m 12.5m 50,000 dwt POL products and chemicals.

13 275m 14.0m 12.0m 35,000 dwt POL products. 

14 350m 15.1m 14.0m 90,000 dwt General cargo, iron ore, and coal. 

Notes:

1. Berth exposed to swell during the Southwest Monsoon. 

2. If Berths 10 and 11 are occupied at the same time, the combined loa of both vessels should not exceed 495m. 

New Mangalore—Port Facilities

Berth 

Name Length Depth Alongside

Draft 

Restriction

Maximum 

Vessel Size Remarks
74 Sector 3. India—West Coast—Cape Rama to Cape Comorin 

Pub. 173

mouth of the Shiriya River. The Chandragiri River enters the

sea about 8 miles SSE of Kumbla, between the two hill forts of

Kasaragod and Chandagiri, 53 and 45m high, respectively. The

bar of the river dries and changes frequently; it can only be

used by small craft at HW. Kasaragod Anchorage Light, primarily a mark for fishermen, is shown about 1 mile NNW of the

river entrance. 

3.19 Kasaragod (12°29'N., 75°00'E.), a large village, lies on the

N side of the entrance to the Chandragiri River. A chimney,

41m high, is conspicuous in the village. Kasaragod Light, a

white, octagonal, concrete tower with black bands lies N of the

village. Storm signals are shown at Kasaragod; the Brief System is used. Further information on these storm signals may be

found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South

Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

3.19 Bekal, about 6 miles SSE of Kasaragod, a small open port

for local craft, is formed by a rocky promontory; an old fort,

with a tall central bastion, lies on the promontory. A group of

rocks, 1m high, lies about 1.8 miles NW of the fort. Hosdrug

Fort, 37m high, is conspicuous about 6 miles SSE of Bekal,

and 0.8 mile inland. A bare hill, 179m high, lies 2.3 miles NE

of the fort. Kavvayi Backwater, close within and parallel to the

coast, extends from about 5 miles SSE of Hasdrug Fort to

Mount Dill. 

3.20 Mount Dill (Mount Delli) (12°02'N., 75°12'E.), 259m

high, is the summit of a conspicuous headland separated from

the low-lying mainland by a narrow creek. Kotte Kunnu, a

bluff point 52m high, at the SW extremity of the headland, is

joined to the more elevated land by a low neck; a fort lies on

Kotte Kunnu. Mount Dill Light (Kotte Kunna Light) is shown

from a white triangular stone tower with red bands on the bluff

point.

3.20 Madai Light is shown about 2.3 miles ENE of Kotte Kunnu.

Good radar returns have been reported from Mount Dill at 26

miles.

3.20 Anchorage, with moderate shelter from NW winds, can be

obtained, in 7m, mud, with the summit of Mount Dill bearing

330°, distant 2.5 miles. Small vessels may find shelter off the

mouth of the creek, SE of Mount Dill, during the NW winds

which prevail here from February to May, in depths of about

4m. A short confused sea and a slight S set will be found here.

3.20 A stranded wreck lies 2 miles NNW; a dangerous wreck lies

3 miles SSE from Mount Dill Light. 

Mount Dill to Cannanore

3.21 The coast from Mount Dill to Cannanore, about 13

miles SE, is sandy and fringed with coconut palms. The Valapattanam River, marked on the N side of its entrance by a clump

of casuarina trees, flows into the sea about 7 miles SE of

Mount Dill. The bar at the entrance to the river has a least

depth of 1.2m, and is subject to seasonal change. Azhikal Light

is shown at the S side of the entrance. Storm signals are displayed near the light. 

Azhikal (Azhikkal) (11°55'N., 75°18'E.) (World Port Index

No. 49040), with a thriving timber trade, lies on the S bank of

the river, about 1 mile within the entrance. Boundary pillars,

NW and SE of the river entrance, define the limits of the port. 

3.21 Presently the port has only one wharf, 50m in length, that

can accomodate one vessel up to 2,000 dwt, with a maximum

length of 30m, a maximum beam of 10m, and a maximum draft

of 3m. 

3.21 Pilotage is not available. 

3.21 Vessels should advise the Port Officer Kozhikode of their

ETA 24 hours in advance and then confirm their ETA 2 hours

in advance to the Port Officer in Azhikal on VHF channel 16. 

3.21 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 9m, sand and mud,

good holding ground, about 2.5 miles WSW of the river entrance.

3.22 Cannanore (11°55'N., 75°24'E.) a military cantonment and open roadstead port, is in charge of the Port Conservator, subordinate to the Port Officer at Calicut (Kozhikode).

The port is closed to local sailing craft from the beginning of

June to the end of August, but vessels may work cargo during

the Southwest Monsoon when weather permits. Moplah Bay,

the bight E of Cannanore, is shallow, but affords shelter to local

craft.

3.22 Aspect.—The following are prominent or conspicuous in the

approach to Cannanore:

1. The flagstaff on the N bastion of Fort St. Angelo,

which lies on a low rocky point at the S end of the town.

Mount Dill Light

Cannanore Light
Sector 3. India—West Coast—Cape Rama to Cape Comorin 75

Pub. 173

2. A chimney, 42.5m high, about 0.8 mile NW of the

fort.

3. North Point, a 16m high headland, about 4.3 miles

NW of the fort.

4. Two boundary pillars about 1 mile WNW and 1.8

miles ESE of the fort.

3.22 Cannanore Light is shown from a white, concrete column

with red bands 1 mile WNW of Fort St. Angelo.

3.22 A red conical buoy is moored about 0.5 mile SE of the fort

from October to May and marks the approach to the inner anchorage for small craft. Signaling with shipping is conducted

from the flagstaff on Fort St. Angelo. Port limits are defined by

lines drawn in a 270° direction from the above-mentioned

boundary pillars to depths of 16.5m.

3.22 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained, in about 9m,

mud, good holding ground, about 1.8 miles SW of the fort.

3.22 Caution.—A rifle range extends SSW of the flagstaff of Fort

St. Angelo. Vessels anchoring W of the E limit of the firing

range (a flagstaff bearing 022°) should remain at least 1.5

miles offshore. During firing practice, a red flag is displayed

about 0.3 mile W of the fort. 

Cannanore to Tellicherry

3.23 The coast between Cannanore and Tellicherry, about 9

miles SE, consists of alternate sandy beaches and cliffs, fringed

with coconut trees. Rocks, above and below-water, fringe the

coast. Dharmapattanam Island, about 7 miles SE of Cannanore,

is encircled by two rivers. Green Island, 34m high and covered

with tall trees, lies off the W extremity of Dharmapattanam Island. The ruins of a redoubt are conspicuous on the summit of

a bare hill, 61m high, about 1.3 miles NE of Green Island.

3.24 Tellicherry (11°45'N., 75°30'E.), an open roadstead

port, is open throughout the year. The port limits are defined by

two lines extending SW into depths of 16.5m from the N

boundary pillar on the rocky S extremity of Dharmapattanam

Island and the S boundary pillar on Punuli Point, about 4 miles

SE. 

3.24 Aspect.—An ancient fort stands in position 11°45'N,

75°29'E on rising ground near the coast. Tellicherry Light is

shown from the NW bastion of the fort.

3.24 Bilikulu, a natural breakwater of basalt, 6m high, lies parallel to the coast, about 0.5 mile SW of the fort. Two similar but

shorter ridges lie between Bilikulu and the shore. These ridges,

together with numerous detached rocks above and below-water, between Bilikulu and the shore, give sufficient shelter to

the landing at Tellicherry at LW during NW winds to enable

vessels to communicate with the port when all others are

closed. 

3.24 Inland, the following peaks of the Kundah Mountains are

conspicuous:

1. Perali Mala (Perly Hill), 488m high, about 13.5 miles

NE of Tellicherry.

2. Periya Peak (Periah Peak), 1,157m high, about 18

miles ENE of Tellicherry.

3. Nattavaram (Naduwaram Peak), 1,387m high, about

17.5 miles E of Tellicherry.

3.24 Conspicuous objects in the approach are the Club House,

about 1 mile NNW of the fort, and the port flagstaff, about 0.3

mile SE of the fort. The hills near Tellicherry are thickly covered with coconut palms and other trees. 

3.24 Shorukulu, a natural breakwater of basalt, 3.7m high, lies

parallel to the coast, about 0.8 mile NW of Bilikulu. Nakudiankulu (Nukudiankulu), about 0.5 mile NW of Shorukulu, is a

pinnacle rock drying 0.9m. Talayi Rock, a pinnacle rock with a

depth of 1.5m, lies nearly 0.7 mile SE of Nilot Point

(11°44'N., 75°30'E.). A black spherical buoy, removed between

May and October, is moored on the S side of the rock. 

3.24 Depths—Limitations.—Cargo is worked from a T-head

pier, 171m in length, with depths of 1.8m to 3m alongside.

There are landing steps on both sides of the pier that extends

SW of the shore close W of the Post Office building.

3.24 The pier is protected by a naturally-occurring breakwater of

basalt which lies parallel to the coastline close W of the berth.

3.24 Signals.—Communication with shipping is maintained from

the port flagstaff by flags of the International Code and by

Morse Code from the Port and Customs Office, about 0.3 mile

SE of the fort. 

3.24 Storm signals are shown at Tellicherry: the Brief System is

used. Further information on these storm signals may be found

in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

3.24 Anchorage.—Anchorage for large vessels in unsettled

weather is well offshore, in a depth of 12m, but in good weather a vessel can anchor, in 9m, soft mud, SW of the fort, about

1.5 miles from Bilikulu. 

Tellicherry to Calicut (Kozhikode)

3.25 The Kundah Mountains lie only about 10 miles from

the coast between Tellicherry and Calicut (Kozhikode). 

3.25 Mahe (11°42'N., 75°32'E.) is a small settlement on the S

side of the entrance to the Mahe River. A light is shown on the

S side of the river entrance. Some old forts and houses lie on

the detached hills behind Mahe. Rocks extend offshore from

both sides of the river entrance into depths of 3.7m. 

3.25 The channel leading into the harbor is less than 1m in depth

but is still considered good for small vessels with local knowledge for trading coconuts, pepper, dried figs, and all kinds of

small commodities during the Winter Monsoon period (November-April).

3.25 Anchorage can be obtained, in 9m, mud, about 2.5 miles

WSW of the light structure. Chombaku, an islet, 4m high, lies

about 2.5 miles SSE of Mahe, and about 0.5 mile offshore; several rocks lie near the islet. 

3.25 Badagara (11°36'N., 75°35'E.) is an important town on the

coast, about 7 miles SSE of Mahe. The coast in the vicinity is

low, sandy, and fringed by coconut trees. 

3.25 A flagstaff, 26m high, is conspicuous on the coast W of the

town. A casuarana tree, 64m high, is conspicuous above the

dense coconut plantations on a small hill close S of the town. 

3.25 A flat-topped hill, 114m high, is conspicuous about 3 miles

ENE of Badagara. A 101m hill and a 104m hill rise about 1

mile NNW and SSW, respectively, of the flat-topped hill. Farther inland, Nattavaram, 1,388m high, and Banasuram (Buffalos Hump), 2,060m high, about 20 miles WNW of Badagara,

are conspicuous. 

3.25 A conspicuous round red hill, 55m high, lies about 3 miles

SSE of Badagara, on the S bank of the Murat River, about 1
76 Sector 3. India—West Coast—Cape Rama to Cape Comorin 

Pub. 173

mile within the entrance. 

3.25 Storm signals are shown at Badagara: the Brief System is

used. Further information on these storm signals may be found

in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

3.25 Anchorage can be taken, in 9m, mud, about 2 miles WSW of

the flagstaff. Caution should be taken to stay well clear of a

wreck in position 11°36'N, 75°32'E.

3.25 Kadalur Point (11°28'N., 75°38'E.), low but prominent, is

covered with palm trees, over which will be seen a large round

tree. Hills gradually rise NE of the point; the nearest summit is

78m high, about 1.3 miles NE of the point. 

3.25 The coastal reef extends about 1.5 miles W and 1.3 miles S

from the point. Trikodi Reef, with a least depth of 1.5m and

Kadalur Reef, with a least depth of 3.4m, are the W and SW

ends, respectively, of the coastal reef. 

3.26 Sacrifice Rock (11°30'N., 75°32'E.), 18m high and

conspicuous, lies about 6.5 miles WNW of Kadalur Point. It

consists of granite and, having a white appearance, can be seen

10 miles in clear weather. The passage between this rock and

the coast is free of dangers, but vessels using it should keep

near the rock, and not proceed into depths of less than 13m.

Vessels passing W of this rock at night should not proceed into

depths of less than 27m which are found about 2.5 miles W of

the rock. A shoal, swept to a depth of 2.7m, lies almost 1 mile

offshore W of Tikkotti village.

The coast between Kadalur Point and Calicut (Kozhikode),

about 14.5 miles SSE, is generally low, sandy, and fringed with

palms. Red laterite hills back the coast. 

3.26 Quilandi, a large village, lies about 3.8 miles ESE of Kadalur

Point. A water tower is conspicuous on the coast, close S of the

village. The conspicuous summit of Palkunnu, 297m high, rises about 7.5 miles ESE of the village. A large black rock, with

a tree on it, lies on the coast about 2.8 miles SSE of Quilandi. 

3.26 Elattur Cape (11°19'N., 75°44'E.), about 4 miles farther

SSE, is low and rocky, with coconut palms close inland. The

mouth of the Elattur River, a shallow and rocky river, lies about

1.3 miles N of the cape.

3.26 Vavul Mala (Camels Hump) (11°25'N., 76°08'E.), 2,338m

high, about 23 miles ENE of Calicut (Kozhikode), is the highest and most conspicuous peak of the Kundah Mountains. It is

visible far to seaward in clear weather. The Kundah Mountains

end rather abruptly S of Vavul Mala.

Calicut (Kozhikode) (11°15'N., 75°46'E.)

World Port Index No. 49100

3.27 The port of Calicut, also known as Kozhikode, is an

open roadstead of considerable commercial importance. Cargo

is worked at the anchorage by lighters. The port is unusable

from the beginning of June to the end of August. 

3.27 Depths—Limitations.—Reliance Shoal, with a least depth

of 8.6m, extends about 2.5 miles NNW from a position 3.5

miles W of Calicut Light; the shoal is rocky, but the bottom

near it is soft mud.

3.27 Anchorage Reef, with a least depth of 3.7m, lies about 1.3

miles WSW of Calicut Light. A lighted buoy, painted in black

and white stripes, is moored W of the reef; it is in position from

October to May.

3.27 Calicut Reefs, a group of rocky shoals with a least depth of

4.1m, extend about 1.5 miles N from a position 2.5 miles SSW

of Calicut Light.

3.27 Coote Reef, with a least depth of 0.9m and over which the

sea generally breaks, lies about 1.5 miles S of Calicut Light. A

black and white striped can buoy is moored about 0.3 mile W

of the reef. Gilham Rock, about 0.3 mile farther S, has a depth

of less than 1.8m. 

3.27 Aspect.—Calicut Light is shown from a white masonry tower near the Port Office at the N end of town. West Hill, 49m

high, with the houses on it showing among the trees, lies about

2 miles N of Calicut Light and forms a good landmark in the

morning when approaching Calicut. The dome of the Roman

Catholic Cathedral, 45m high, is conspicuous 0.5 mile SE of

the lighthouse. A rocky islet, 2m high, lies on the coastal reef

about 3 miles N of Calicut Light. 

3.27 Two white boundary markers, marking the N and S limits of

the port, lie on the coast about 4 miles N and 5 miles S, respectively, of Calicut Light. 

3.27 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and is available during

daylight hours only. The pilot boards in the anchorage. 

3.27 Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA 48 hours and

24 hours in advance. For vessels bound for the harbor, the ETA

should also be advised 12 hours in advance; all ETAs should be

confirmed 2 hours prior to arrival on VHF channel 16. 

3.27 Signals.—The signal station, close N of Calicut Light, communicates with shipping by flags of the International Code or

by Morse Code. Landing conditions are indicated by the following flags of the International Code:

1. K—Surf is impassable.

2. M—Communication with the shore is dangerous.

3. N—Boats can leave the harbor.

4. F—Boats can enter the harbor. 

3.27 Storm signals are shown at Badagara: the General System is

used. Further information on these storm signals may be found

in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South AtlanKadalur Point Light
Sector 3. India—West Coast—Cape Rama to Cape Comorin 77

Pub. 173

tic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

3.27 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channel 16

2. Telephone: 91-471-2724842

91-471-2724533

3. Facsimile: 91-471-2724533

4. E-mail: calicutport@sanchamet.in

3.27 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor with Calicut Light bearing

SSE in depth of about 9m. 

3.27 Anchorage may also be obtained with Calicut Light bearing

078°, at a distance according to the vessel’s draft. Vessels

should not anchor S of this bearing as the bottom is foul and

rocky. The lighted buoy, moored W of Anchorage Reef, marks

the S and E limits of the anchorage for vessels of moderate

size.

Beypore (11°10'N., 75°48'E.)

World Port Index No. 49110

3.28 The port of Beypore (Beipur), an open roadstead, lies

off the entrance of the Beypore River and is considered a wharf

of the port of Calicut (Kozhikode).

3.28 Depths—Limitations.—Black Rocks, 1.2m high, lie towards the SE end of a reef about 0.8 mile S of the entrance to

the Beypore River. A rock, with a depth of 1.5m, lies about 0.5

mile SSW of Black Rocks. The bar of the Beypore River had a

depth of 3.5m between the breakwaters in 1990. 

3.28 Aspect.—Kota Kunnu, a 60m hill, about 3 miles SE of the

entrance to the Beypore River, is a good landmark for vessels

approaching Beypore. Olavattur Kunnu, 245m high, about 8

miles E of Beypore, lies among isolated hills in the vicinity.

Urakuth Mala (Dolphins Head), a hill 477m high, about 13

miles ESE of the river entrance, is conspicuous.

3.28 New Beypore Light is shown from an octagonal masonry

tower, with red and white bands, on the SE side of the entrance

to the Beypore River.

3.28 Other landmarks are a flagstaff, 25m high, on the SE entrance point of the river; a conspicuous chimney, 58m high,

about 1.5 miles NE of the flagstaff; and several chimneys of a

tile works, across the river and about 0.2 mile N of the tall

chimney. 

3.28 Regulations.—For ETA information, see Calicut (Kozhikode) (paragraph 3.27).

3.28 Signals.—For port contact information, see Calicut (Kozhikode) (paragraph 3.27).

3.28 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 7m

to 10m, with Beypore Light bearing from 045° to 090°, distant

1.5 to 2.0 miles.

3.28 Caution.—Vessels in the vicinity of Beypore at night should

not enter depths of less than 15m.

Beypore to Kochi (Cochin)

3.29 The coast between Beypore and Ponnani, about 24

miles SSE, is low, sandy, fringed with palms, and backed by

red laterite hills. A light is shown at Tanur, an important fishing

village, about 11.5 miles SSE of Beypore. A tableland, covered

with palms, lies about 1 mile NE of the village. A tableland,

about 90m high, with a few scattered trees, lies about 9 miles N

of Ponnani.

Ponnani (10°47'N., 75°55'E.), a busy seaport for local craft,

lies on the S side of the entrance to the Ponnani River. The port

is closed during the Southwest Monsoon, and is in charge of a

Port Conservator responsible to the Port Officer at Calicut

(Kozhikode). The extensive backwater of the Ponnani River

forms a wide gap in the line of palms when viewed from WSW.

The entrance of the river is wooded and prominent from the S.

Ponnani Light is shown from a white, round, concrete tower

with black bands, 0.8 mile S of the river entrance. The bar of

the Ponnani River has a depth of not more than 2.1m, but small

vessels with local knowledge can enter it at HW. There are

some unlicensed pilots available. 

Beypore Light
78 Sector 3. India—West Coast—Cape Rama to Cape Comorin 

Pub. 173

3.29 Storm signals are shown at Ponnani; the Brief System is

used. Further information on these storm signals may be found

in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

The town of Chetwai (Chetwayi) (10°32'N., 76°03'E.) lies

about 1.5 miles within the entrance to a backwater. The existence of the boundary pillars N and S of the backwater entrance

is doubtful. Chetwai Light is shown from a 30m high circular

concrete tower, lying 1.5 miles N of the boundary pillar.

3.29 Anchorage can be taken by small vessels, in 11m, mud, off

the entrance to the backwater; local knowledge is necessary.

3.29 A range of hills, over 305m high in its highest part, lies about

18 miles ENE of Chetwai. It lies between the Western Ghats

and the coast, and terminates abruptly toward the S. The NW

summit of this range gives good radar response. 

3.29 The Periyar River (Pallipur River), about 22 miles SSE of

Chetwai, is generally easy to identify from the W due to the

gap in the fringing palms. Periyar River Light is shown from a

white, square, concrete tower with black bands, situated 1.3

miles N of the river entrance. 

3.29 In 1951, it was reported that the depth contours between the

Periyar River and Narakal, about 8.5 miles SSE, had extended

considerably seaward, and the coast had extended similarly up

to 0.5 mile in places. 

Kochi (Cochin) (9°58'N., 76°14'E.)

World Port Index No. 49130

3.30 The port of Kochi (Cochin) is a fine natural harbor

formed by the estuary of the Periyar River and its backwater.

The inner harbor is able to shelter a large number of vessels

with drafts up to 9.1m at all seasons. It is the main deep water

harbor S of Bombay and a base for the Indian Navy. 

3.30 The N and S limits of the Port of Kochi (Cochin) extend 7.5

miles in a 270° direction from a position on the coast 5 miles

SSE and 2 miles NNW of Kochi (Cochin) Light. The port area

includes the harbor and backwater, with the creeks and channels connecting with them and their shores, whether of the

mainland or of islands, as may lie within 46m of the spring tide

HW mark.

3.30 The great estuary, or backwater, on which Kochi (Cochin)

lies, extends for about 50 miles NNW to Ponnani, and about 30

miles S to Alleppey. Its width varies from 8 miles to a few hundred meters, and its channels connect with other inland waters.

It has a least depth of 1.8m and is affected by tidal influence.

Several rivers flow into the backwater making it brackish. During the Southwest Monsoon, which brings heavy rain to the

Ponnani Light

Chetwai Light
Sector 3. India—West Coast—Cape Rama to Cape Comorin 79

Pub. 173

seaward side of the Western Ghats, the watershed drainage of

these rivers increases greatly and, entering the sea through numerous openings into the backwater, probably causes the constant shifting of the soft mudbanks off this part of the coast. 

3.30 Winds—Weather.—Kochi (Cochin) is outside the cyclone

area, but during the Southwest Monsoon, short gusts of wind

50 to 55 knots are sometimes experienced. 

3.30 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Kochi (Cochin) is 0.9m

at MHHW and 0.8m at MLHW. Salinity within the harbor has

values between 1000 and 1020, according to tidal and seasonal

factors.

3.30 The maximum velocity of the ebb current at springs,

throughout the year, is from 2 to 3 knots, and at neaps from 0.8

knot to 1.3 knots. The velocity of the flood current at springs,

throughout the year, varies 1.5 to 2 knots and at neaps from

about 0.8 knot to 1.3 knots. Both currents run for a considerable time after the predicted times of HW and LW, from 1 to 2

hours on the flood, and from 2 to 3 hours on the ebb, according

to the season.

3.30 After heavy inland rains the ebb current may run continuously for many days, while the flood current enters the harbor under the surface ebb. On very rare occasions, and after high

inland floods, the tidal current in the harbor may have a velocity of 5 knots or more.

3.30 In January and February, the effect of the ebb current is not

noticeable W of the outer channel buoys, and no appreciable

current is experienced off the coast in the vicinity of Kochi

(Cochin). Under monsoon conditions, strong eddies and crosscurrents were experienced in the harbor entrance between

Vypin Island and Kochi (Cochin), and also off the NW point of

Willingdon Island. 

3.30 On the ebb current, between the harbor entrance and the NW

end of Willingdon Island, there is a strong set across the channel from the N part of the harbor; the limits of this current are

marked by tide rips which cause a vessel to sheer. 

3.30 Depths—Limitations.—The approaches to Kochi (Cochin)

are clear of outlying shoals or banks, except for the shoal water

of the bar, through which the deep approach channel has been

dredged.

3.30 The approach and inner harbor channels are maintained to

the following dimensions: 

1. Outer Approach Channel—about 6.5 miles in length,

175m in width and maintained at a depth of 13.8m. 

2. Inner Approach Channel—All the same as the Outer

Approach Channel except that is extends to a width of 400m.

3. Ernakulam Channel—about 3.1 miles in length and a

minimum width of 200m, dredged to a depth of 13.8m to the

Cochin Oil Berths and to the Rajiv Gandhi Container Terminal, then 11m until the fertilizer berth (Q10), then 10.0m to

Berths Q5 to Q7, and 9.75m to the S and N Tanker Berths.

4. Mattancheri Channel—about 1.6 miles in length, to a

width of 183m, and maintained to a depth of 10.75m until

the S end of Boat Train Pier, thence 9.75m for the remainder.

3.30 Local authorities should be consulted for prevailing depths

in the channels and alongside berths. Plans are to increase the

width to 260m and depths to 16.7m in the approach channel

sometime in the near future.

3.30 A shoal area N of the dredged channel includes a spoil

ground which is awash in places. South of the dredged channel

a shoal, with a depth of less than 1.8m, and on which the sea

breaks, extends about 0.9 mile W from the coast.

3.30 Vessels, once E of Fairway Lighted Buoy, must not attempt

to enter or leave the approach channel without a pilot on board.

In 1985, less water than charted was found to exist outside the

dredged channel on both sides. Another spoil ground lies about

2.5 miles SW of Outer Signal Station. A dangerous wreck and

a small foul area lie near the N limit of the dredged channel, 1

mile E of Fairway Lighted Buoy. 

3.30 Within the harbor entrance the dredged channel is about 0.2

mile wide; its N limit is marked by two lighted buoys. An anchorage for sailing vessels is situated N of the fairway, close

within the harbor entrance. 

3.30 The dredged channel then divides into Mattancheri Channel

and Ernakulam Channel leading W and E, respectively, of

Willingdon Island. A road bridge, with a lifting span, connects

the SW end of Willingdon Island with the mainland W; a road

and rail bridge, with a navigable opening marked by lighted

dolphins, connects the E side of the island with the mainland E. 

3.30 Approximately 0.8 mile SE of the fertilizer berth is Naval

Jetty. Caution is necessary when berthing alongside Naval Jetty, on the W side of the channel, as the ebb current sets strongly

off the pier and the flood current strongly onto it. The bar at the

entrance to the harbor is dangerous for ship’s boats when the

ebb tide is setting strongly against the sea breezes, resulting in

a short choppy sea. 

3.30 Berth information in the harbor is given in ther accompanying table titled Kochi (Cochin)—Berth Information.

 Port Authority of Kochi (Cochin)

http://www.cochinport.com

Kochi (Cochin)—Berth Information

Berth

Maximum vessel

Remarks

Length Size Draft

Emakulam Channel Wharves (South Side)

Q5 250m 20,000 dwt 10.0m General cargo.

Q6 250m 20,000 dwt 10.5m General cargo

Q7 250m 20,000 dwt 10.5m Containers

Q8 250m 35,000 dwt 12.5m Containers

Q9 250m 35,000 dwt 12.5m Containers
80 Sector 3. India—West Coast—Cape Rama to Cape Comorin 

Pub. 173

3.30 There are two mooring buoys on the E side of Mattancheri

Channel which can accommodate a vessel up to 145m in

length. There are also two numbered mooring buoys in the SE

portion of Ernakulam Channel. 

3.30 Tankers in ballast are subject to draft restrictions. Tankers

less than 152.4m in length must have a minimum draft forward

of 4.3m (plus or minus 0.6m and trimmed by the stern) and

4.9m aft. Minimum drafts for tankers of 152.4m and over are

4.9m (plus or minus 0.6m) forward and 6.1m aft. Additionally,

tankers over 213.4m in length are subject to a maximum draft

of 8.5m.

3.30 Aspect.—The coast in the vicinity of Kochi (Cochin) is low,

sandy, and thickly fringed by palms. The highest of the Western Ghats are about 50 miles inland, but they can be distinguished only when the weather is clear. Haze settles over the

land after sunrise and the coast remains indistinct until midday;

even objects otherwise conspicuous are difficult to discern. 

3.30 Kollengode Bluff (Kollangod Bluff), about 48 miles NE of

Kochi (Cochin), lies at the NW end of the Anamali Mountains,

which form part of the Western Ghats. The bluff is conspicuous

during the Northeast Monsoon and forms the S part of Palghat

Gap, which is 1,220m lower than the mountains flanking it and

through which the winds blow fiercely between November and

February.

3.30 A buoy, painted in red and white stripes, is moored 32 miles

WNW of the entrance to Kochi (Cochin) Harbor.

3.30 Kochi (Cochin) Light (9°59.8'N., 76°13.3'E.), with a racon,

is shown from a concrete tower with red and white bands.

3.30 A wooden pile beacon lies 1.3 miles SSW of Kochi (Cochin)

Light; a concrete pile beacon, 9.1m high, lies 1.5 miles WSW

of the light. 

3.30 A conspicuous signal station is situated at the 37m flagstaff

close W of Fort Cochin. This flagstaff stands at an elevation of

37m on a 20m high conspicuous tower, painted white on its

seaward side. A conspicuous tower, 22m high, stands about 0.2

mile SSE of the Signal Station. 

3.30 A white house is conspicuous at the village of Kandakkadavu, about 7 miles S of the entrance to the port of Kochi

(Cochin). The dredged entrance channel, Mattancheri Channel,

and Ernakulam Channel are marked by lighted buoys. The harbor office, which is conspicuous, lies on the NW end of Willingdon Island. Range lights, situated N and NE of Willington

Q10 207m 60,000 dwt 10.7m Fertilizer and phosphoric acid. (See Note 1)

Venduritti Jetty 350m — — Has a maintained depth of 8m alongside

Emakulam Channel Wharves (North Side)

Cochin Oil Terminal 250m 115,000 dwt 12.5m Petroleum products

North Tanker Berth 213m 30,000 dwt 9.14m Petroleum products (See Note 2)

South Tanker Berth 170m 20,000 dwt 9.14m Petroleum products (See Note 2)

Mantacherri Channel Wharves

Boat Train Pier (BTP) 200m 35,000 dwt 10.0m Dry and liquid bulk cargo

North Coal Berth 170m 15,000 dwt 9.14m Dry and liquid bulk cargo (See Note 3)

Q1 180m 16,000 dwt 9.14m Dry bulk cargo

Q2 180m 16,000 dwt 9.14m Dry bulk cargo

Q3 180m 16,000 dwt 9.14m Dry bulk cargo. (See Note 4)

Q4 180m 16,000 dwt 9.14m Dry bulk cargo (See Note 5)

South Coal Berth 170m 15,000 dwt 9.14m General cargo and liquid amonia

Offshore Oil Platform

SPM 370m 300,000 dwt 22.5m Located about 13 miles WNW of harbor 

entrance in position 9°59'48''N, 76°02'24''E

Notes:

1. Berth is 217m in length, 15m in width and stands 35m offshore with a bridge connecting from the SE end

of the quay to the mainland.

2. Vessels berth on the ebb current on a SE heading.

3. An ebb current of 3 knots has been experienced alongside this berth.

4. It has been reported that the operational ability of this berth has been temporarily adversely affected by the

problems encountered at Q4 and may not be reliable for berthing. Contact Kochi Port Control for the latest status.

5. It has been reported that this berth has been decommisioned due to overloading and will not be available

until about 2012 due to rebuilding.

Kochi (Cochin)—Berth Information

Berth

Maximum vessel

Remarks

Length Size Draft
Sector 3. India—West Coast—Cape Rama to Cape Comorin 81

Pub. 173

Island, lead through the harbor entrance and through the center

of Ernakulam Channel abreast the tanker berths. 

3.30 A number of Indian Naval vessels are situated at Vendurutti

(Venduruthy Island) on the E side of Willingdon Island. In this

area there are several flagstaffs; a radio station, with several

masts, is situated 183m NNW of the W end of the road and rail

bridge. 

3.30 A prominent storage tank, with a red and white checkered

top, stands in the vicinity of South Coast Berth. 

3.30 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all merchant vessels

over 100 grt and is advisable for smaller vessels. Pilots are

available at any time. Deep-draft vessels are advised to wait for

the pilot 0.5 mile W of Fairway Lighted Buoy. Pilots board

vessels in position (9°57.7'N., 76°08.4'E.). The pilot vessel has

a red hull with a white house. Communications with pilots is

through VHF Channel 16.

3.30 Vessels may anchor in this vicinity, clear of the axis of the

channel, good holding ground, mud. Vessels can enter or leave

the harbor day or night at almost any state of the tide, except

for crude oil tankers which may only enter by day. A vessel,

equipped with radio, is stationed near the seaward end of the

approach channel; it will transmit and receive messages concerning pilotage only. A vessel awaiting a pilot should, if anchoring, lie about 1 to 2 miles NNW of Fairway Lighted Buoy. 

3.30 Regulations.—Vessels should send ETA messages 48 hours

in advance to the harbormaster. Any changes in ETA should be

sent at least 12 hours in advance. The message should include

the ETA (in local time) at the outer roads and the salt water

draft fore and aft. 

3.30 Vessels should contact port control 2 hours before and 30

minutes before arrival at Fairway Lighted Buoy for pilotage

and berthing instructions. 

3.30 Vessels awaiting a berth should maintain a listening watch

on VHF channel 16. 

3.30 Immobilization of main engines is not permitted without

written consent by the Port Authority. Discharge of oily water

or other rubbish is forbidden.

3.30 When plague is prevalent in Northern India, vessels must obtain pratique before communicating with the shore. 

3.30 Ship-to-ship transfers of liquid bulk cargo and gas are authorized in an area with a radius of 1 mile centered on position

10°03.5'N, 76°04.5'E, about 10 miles NW of the harbor entrance. The transferring vessel should anchor in the center of

the area. The vessel’s agent should notify the harbormaster in

the vessel’s ETA message prior to the commencement of any

transfer operations. 

3.30 Signals.—The Signal Station situated at the 37m flagstaff

close W of Fort Cochin communicates by flags and Morse

Code as necessary. Storm signals are displayed; the General

System is used. Further information on these storm signals

may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide)

South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

3.30 The following flags of the International Code should be displayed by vessels entering or leaving Kochi (Cochin) (meaning

of hoist follows flags): 

1. Q—My vessel is healthy and I request free practique. 

2. Q over First Substitute—My vessel is arriving from a

yellow fever port and requests health clearance. 

3. G—I require a pilot. 

4. H—I have a pilot on board. 

5. An oil tanker should display a red ball below these

flags. 

3.30 A vessel must not enter harbor until the signal has been repeated by the Signal Station. Signals for vessels leaving the

harbor will also be repeated by the Signal Station. 

3.30 A vessel shifting berth within Kochi (Cochin) Harbor must

display a black ball or shape at least 0.6m in diameter at half

mast and shall proceed at not more than half speed. 

3.30 The following flag signals may also be displayed:

1. EM—Vessel shifting from Ernakulam Channel to

Mattancheri Channel. 

2. ME—Vessel shifting from Mattancheri Channel to

Ernakulam Channel. 

3. DN—Port’s dredge proceeding to sea. 

4. DF—Port’s dredge entering harbor. 

3.30 A vessel on fire and requiring assistance should continuously: 

1. Sound on it whistle or siren the letter “F” in Morse Code

together with rapid and continuous ringing of the ship’s bell. 

Kochi (Cochin) Light
82 Sector 3. India—West Coast—Cape Rama to Cape Comorin 

Pub. 173

2. Hoist, by day, appropriate International Code Flag

Signal (CB6, IT, etc.). 

3. Telephone Port Fire Station, the Port’s Fire Float, or

Harbormaster. 

3.30 A vessel requiring assistance in an emergency (moorings

carrying away, oil leakage, urgent medical and police assistance, etc.) may sound at frequent intervals: 

1. A succession of blasts on its whistle or siren to attract

attention. 

2. Sound V (3 short and 1 long blast) to mean “I require

assistance.”

3. Sound W (1 short and 2 long blasts) to mean “I require medical assistance.”

4. Hoist V or W of the International Code of Signals.

3.30 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. Call sign: Kochi Port Control

2. VHF: VHF channels 14 and 16

3. Telephone: 91-984-7049056 (mobile)

91-484-2667105

4. Facsimile: 91-484-2668163

5. E-mail: mail@cochinport.com

3.30 Anchorage.—Anchorage is available off the port of Kochi

(Cochin), in 14.5m, with Kochi (Cochin) Light bearing 075°,

4.5 miles. During the Southwest Monsoon, the best anchorage,

with good communication with Kochi (Cochin), is about 2

miles NNW of Fairway Lighted Buoy. 

3.30 Directions.—Vessels approaching Kochi (Cochin) should

keep in depths of not less than 11m and W of Fairway Lighted

Buoy. When in this position, hoist the signal for a pilot and

await the pilot’s arrival. The outer channel was dredged to

12.8m in 1986; the inner stretch of the channel to was dredged

11.9m in 1986. 

3.30 Caution.—Two Submarine Exercise Areas are centered 25

miles W and 100 miles SW of the entrance to Kochi (Cochin)

Harbor. These areas may best be seen on the chart.

3.31 Alleppey (9°59.8'N., 76°13.3'E.) lies about 29 miles S

of Kochi (Cochin); the coast between the ports is low, sandy,

thickly fringed with palms, and densely populated. The port is

an open roadstead under the superintendence of the Senior Port

Conservator. The port is closed during the Southwest Monsoon

season (May 15 to September 15). 

3.31 Tides—Currents.—The current at the anchorage sets S with

a velocity up to 2 knots. From October to February, a N set,

usually weak, is sometimes experienced.

3.31 Depths—Limitations.—There is a 387m long pier, with a

depth of 1.8m at its head. The pier has been reported to give

good radar returns at 10 miles.

3.31 Aspect.—Alleppey Light is shown from a white, round, masonry tower, about 0.3 mile E of the root of Alleppey Pier. As

the town of Alleppey is difficult to distinguish from seaward, it

is advisable to make a landfall while it is still dark to ensure

identifying the lighthouse.

3.31 Manakkodam Light, a white square tower with red bands,

lies 15.5 miles N of Alleppey Light. A tall radio mast lies about

4 miles N of Alleppey Light.

3.31 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not available in this port.

3.31 Regulations.—A continuous listening watch on VHF channel 16 should be maintained by all vessels visiting the port. 

3.31 Signals.—A signal station and flagstaff, the latter 37m high

and prominent, is situated W of Alleppey Light. Day; night

communication is carried out by flashing light mounted on a

pillar at an elevation of 16m and by flags of the International

Code.

3.31 Storm signals, using the General System, are displayed from

the signal station. Further information on these storm signals

may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide)

South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

3.31 Anchorage.—During the Northeast Monsoon, vessels of

moderate size can obtain anchorage, in about 8m, with Alleppey Light bearing 077°, distant 2 miles, but sounding is essential as the mud bank shifts frequently so that the charted

depths are unreliable. During the Southwest Monsoon, the best

anchorage is farther offshore, in about 9.1m, with Alleppey

Light bearing 056°, but this anchorage depends upon the position of the mud bank which cannot be determined until after

the monsoon.

3.31 Caution.—The mud bank off Alleppey is so stirred up by

the swell as to break up the force of the waves, and cause a

large area of smooth water, on the outer part of which vessels

anchor.

Alleppey Light
Sector 3. India—West Coast—Cape Rama to Cape Comorin 83

Pub. 173

3.31 The dark green mud is fine and oily to the touch. The

smoothness of the water is probably caused by the oil which

the mud has been found to contain. In calm weather this bank

is not perceptible. This mud bank shifts position from year to

year, and is sometimes found up to 11 miles S of Alleppey. It is

subject to mud volcanoes, which bubble up, bringing dead fish,

roots, and trunks of trees to the surface. The mud bank develops toward the end of June after the backwater has become

swollen by the rains. The cause of this mud bank is said to be

the greater elevation, about 1m, of the water level in the vast

backwater over that of the sea. The hydraulic pressure forces

out mud and vegetable matter through the several outlets during the Southwest Monsoon, and forms mudbanks along the

beaches and in the shallow waters offshore. Evidence has been

found of a subterranean connection, through mud, between the

backwater and the sea. There is said to be a swell, during the

Southwest Monsoon, to N of a position 2 miles N of Alleppey,

but to the S the swell is quite deadened by this shifting mud

bank.

Alleppey to Quilon (Kollam)

3.32 The coast from Alleppey to Quilon (Kollam), about

40 miles SSE, is sandy, and in general, fringed with palms.

From Alleppey to Pirakkad (Porakad), about 9 miles SSE, the

coast is more thickly fringed by palms. A mud bank off Pirakkad was reported in to be extending seawards. 

3.32 There is anchorage off Kottapalli (South Vazhapuram)

(9°19'N., 76°23'E.), but local knowledge is necessary. This anchorage is sometimes used as a port when Alleppey is closed

during the Southwest Monsoon or when its mud bank has

moved elsewhere. 

3.32 A light is shown near Padiyamkara Tekku (Pathiyankara)

(9°14'N., 76°25'E.) during the Southwest Monsoon. The position of the light is dependent on the movement of the Alleppey

mud bank.

3.32 At Kovilthottam (Koilthottam) (8°59'N., 76°32'E.), there is

a water tower; a light is shown from a white, square, masonry

tower with two black bands, close NW of the water tower. 

3.32 Foul ground extends up to about 2 miles offshore from a position on the coast about 1 mile S of Kovilthottam to Tangasseri

Point, about 6 miles farther SSE. Vessels approaching this part

of the coast at night should not proceed into depths of less than

about 27m. 

3.33 Nindakara (8°56'N., 76°33'E.), about 3 miles S of

Kovilthottam, is an open roadstead port at the entrance to Ashtamudi Backwaters. At the entrance, two breakwaters shelter a

shallow basin, with jetties on its N side where barges load ilmenite sand. The entrance can be identified from seaward by a

break in the palms fringing the shore, and by a bridge, which is

prominent, spanning the outlet.

3.33 The port is seasonal, operating from mid-November to midApril.

3.33 Pilotage is not available. 

3.33 Storm signals are displayed; the Brief System is used. Further information on these storm signals may be found in Pub.

160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean

and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

3.33 The port can be contacted from 0800 to 2200, only when a

vessel is loading, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channel 16

2. Telephone: 91-474-743825

3. Facsimile: 91-474-743825

3.33 Anchorage, for large vessels working cargo, can be obtained,

in about 12.8m, WSW of the entrance. Care must be taken to

avoid a 4.4m shoal about 1.8 miles SW of the seaward end of

the N breakwater. In good weather, anchorage may be taken, in

about 9.1m, about 0.8 mile off the water tower at Kovilthottam.

Anchorage can be taken about 1.3 miles W of Padiyamkara

Tekku Light, in a depth of 8m. 

3.34 The port of Quilon (Kollam) (8°53'N., 76°35'E.)

(World Port Index No. 49160) is a small roadstead lying in the

bight close SE of Tangasseri Point. The N and S limits of the

port are defined by lines extending in a 247° direction from

two boundary pillars. The N pillar and the S pillar lie about 0.7

mile E and 3 miles ESE, respectively, of Tangasseri Point. The

W limit is defined by a line extending 180° from the point. 

Depths—Limitations.—Tangasseri Reef, consisting of foul

ground and shoal water, extends about 1.5 miles W and 1 mile

SW of Tangasseri Point. Pallikall Shoal, with a depth of 2m,

lies about 0.7 mile ESE of Tangasseri Point, near the SE end of

the coastal reef. A black buoy and a red conical buoy are

moored about 1 mile and 1.3 miles SE, respectively, of Tangasseri Point. 

3.34 The port is protected by the Tangasseri Breakwater, extending about 1.1 miles SSE of Tangasseri Point. The breakwater

was completely restored and strengthened in 2009 after tsunami damage that had occurred 5 years previous and now has a

permanent road laid along the entire length. There is also a lee

breakwater extending about 500m SSW of the old Post Office

with a wharf, 116m in length, located at the W end of this

breakwater. There are plans (2009) to increase the length of

this wharf to 220m but no time has been set.

3.34 There is a least depth of 8.9m in the fairway of the channel

between the buoys and a depth of 8.6m about 0.2 mile SSE of

the black buoy. The red conical buoy marks the NW end of a

group of dangers, with a least depth of 6.4m, extending ESE. 

Quilon (Kollam) Harbor
84 Sector 3. India—West Coast—Cape Rama to Cape Comorin 

Pub. 173

3.34 The basin presently accommodates vessels up to a draft of

7m but there are plans (2009) to increase this to 10m.

3.34 Gamaria Rock, with a depth of 7m and marked close N by a

black and white conical buoy, lies about 1.3 miles ESE of Tangasseri Point. The above buoys are in position from October to

May. There is heavy surf along the steep beach fronting the

bight and landing is dangerous except in native boats.

3.34 Aspect.—Tangasseri Point Light (8°53'N., 76°43'E.) is

shown from a concrete tower, 41m high, painted in black and

white diagonal stripes, on the point. The point has been reported to be a good radar target at 17 miles. 

3.34 The coast from close E of Tangasseri Point to about 3 miles

NNW of it is rocky with groves of palms growing close to the

HW line. 

3.34 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and is provided by the

Port Officer, Nindakara. Vessels can contact Nindakara Port on

VHF channel 16. The pilot boards in position 8°51.7'N,

76°35.3'E. 

3.34 Signals.—Signals for vessels at anchor are displayed from

the flagstaff near the light.

3.34 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted at any

time, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channel 16

2. Telephone: 91-474-743825

3. Facsimile: 91-474-743825

4. E-mail: portkollam@yahoo.co.in

3.34 Anchorage.—Anchorage off Quilon (Kollam) is exposed to

winds from the NW through W to SE, and is little frequented

during the Southwest Monsoon, when communication with the

shore is only practicable by signal. During the Southwest Monsoon vessels should anchor, in not less than 15m, with Tangasseri Point bearing about 000°, distant over 1 mile. 

3.34 Between October and May, vessels can anchor in the inner

anchorage, between Gamaria Rock and Pallikall Shoal, in

about 9.1m, sand, with the red chimney of the tile works bearing 040°, and Tangasseri Light bearing 299°. A large vessel

may find a position about 0.3 mile farther SW more comfortable. 

3.34 Directions.—Vessels approaching Quilon (Kollam) from the

N should not approach Tangasseri Point in depths of less than

20m to avoid the foul ground W and SW of the point. When the

tile work’s prominent red 35m high chimney bears 044°°, steer

for it on that bearing, which leads between Gamaria Rock and

Pallikall Shoal. 

Quilon (Kollam) to Kolachel

3.35 The coast between Quilon (Kollam) and Trivandrum,

about 31 miles SE, is sandy and fringed with palms. About 5

miles SE of Quilon (Kollam) a gap in the fringe of palms fronts

a large backwater. 

3.35 Anjengo (8°40'N., 76°46'E.), formerly of importance but

now a fishing village, is seldom visited as its anchorage is exposed to the surf at all times. It is not easy to identify, even

from a short distance, as the fort and other buildings are low

and screened by trees. A light shows at a height of 38m from a

circular concrete tower at Anjengo. A church with a white face

is visible on the coast NW of the fort; there is a bungalow on a

hill about 2 miles N. A red tableland, about 4 miles N of Anjengo, may be of assistance in identifying it. 

3.35 Anchorage may be taken, in a depth of 21m, sand and shell,

about 1 mile offshore abreast Anjengo. The bottom is foul and

rocky in depths of less than about 18.3m.

3.35 The coast between Anjengo and Trivandrum is safe to approach, and the country inland is hilly and undulating. Patches

of red tableland, when seen from beyond about 7 miles, appear

as red cliffs above the palms fringing the coast. 

3.35 Agastya Malai (8°37'N., 77°15'E.), 1,869m high and the

highest peak of the Western Ghats, lies about 20 miles ENE of

Trivandrum. Lower hills lie between the Ghats and the coast.

Mukkunni Malai, 252m high, with a round, gradually sloping

summit, about 4 miles ESE of Trivandrum, can be seen from a

good distance to the S and also from the roadstead at Anjengo.

3.36 Trivandrum (8°29'N., 76°57'E.) (World Port Index

No. 49170), the capital city of the state of Kerala, lies about 1

mile from the coast. The ruins of a pier, extending to the LW

line, are prominent on the coast S of the city; a flagstaff, 29m

high, lies near the root of the pier; and a church, about 0.5 mile

NE of the pier, is easily identified. A palace, consisting of a

white rectangular building with a dull red roof, lies on the coast

about 1.3 miles NW of the ruined pier; a white house is conspicuous close NW. Trivandrum Observatory, with two white

domes, 61m high, lies on a hill 2 miles N of the city. A radio

mast, marked by an obstruction light, is situated about 5 miles

NNW of the ruined pier. Good radar returns have been reported

from Trivandrum at 12 miles. 

3.36 Trivandrum is a lighterage port with no docking facilities

available. ETA messages should be sent via Bahrain or Singapore Radio 24 hours, 7 hours, 5 hours, 3 hours, and 2 hours

prior to arrival to either the charterers/shippers or consignees of

the cargo being carried. Pilotage is not compulsory but one is

available. 

3.36 Trivandrum is closed during the Summer Monsoon season,

usually May through August. 

3.36 Anchorage can be obtained, in a depth of 18.3m, with the

flagstaff near the ruined pier bearing 077°, about 0.4 mile. The

coast between Trivandrum and Kolachel, about 26 miles SE, is

sandy and fringed with coconut trees; it is safe to approach except near Enciam Islet. 

3.36 Landing should not be attempted by small boats due to a

strong surf running along the coastline during the winter monsoon season.

3.37 Kovalam Point (Covelong Point) (8°23'N., 76°58'E.)

is a bluff point with a conspicuous red-roofed building on it.

Good radar returns have been reported from the point at 19

miles. Vilinjam Light is shown from a white round masonry

tower, 36m high, about 0.7 mile SE of the conspicuous building. Vilinjam Point lies about 0.5 mile farther SE.

3.37 At Vilinjam, 3 miles NW of Karichal, there is a modern

(1980) fishing harbor. The harbor is protected by two breakwaters. A fish factory, lying close to the shore, is conspicuous.

Many small fishing craft may be encountered up to 9 miles SW

of Vilinjam. A light is shown from a round, white, masonry

tower with red bands, 36m high, on a bluff 0.5 mile SE of Kovalam Point. 

3.37 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of about 15m, 0.5 mile S

of the ice factory.

3.37 Enciam Islet (8°13'N., 77°11'E.), with a conspicuous church
Sector 3. India—West Coast—Cape Rama to Cape Comorin 85

Pub. 173

on it, lies about 0.3 mile offshore. Rocks, above and below-water, extend about 0.5 mile SW and NE of the islet. A large conspicuous building, light gray with three towers at its N end, has

been reported to lie near the coast about 3 miles NW of Enicam

Islet. 

3.37 Caution.—Vessels, when in the vicinity of Enciam Islet at

night, should not approach into depths of less than 35m, which

are encountered barely 2 miles seaward of the rocks in the vicinity.

Kolachel (8°10'N., 77°15'E.)

World Port Index No. 49180

3.38 Kolachel is an open roadstead with anchorage in

about 13m in the lee of four small islets. The port is important

for the export of ilmenite sand. Vessels of 10,000 15,000 grt

have called here. Landing during good weather is fairly easy as

the rocks off the village form a practical breakwater to the

heavy surf on the coast.

3.38 Depths—Limitations.—The depths shoal gradually from

21m in the outer anchorage to 10m about 0.2 mile offshore in

the area E of the town. 

3.38 Several rocks, above and below-water, extend up to about 0.3

mile S and SW of Kolachel. Kurusukal, 6m high and surmounted by a white shrine carrying a black cross, lies about 183m S

of Kolachel Light. Ahnakal, 3m high, lies close SSE of Kurusukal, with a rock awash close SE of it.

3.38 Pulleri, 1m high, the SE danger in the approach to Kolachel,

lies about 0.3 mile SSE of Kurusakal. Patna Rock and Constance Rock, with depths of 2m, lie about 183m W and 0.5

mile WNW, respectively, of Pulleri.

3.38 Aspect.—The 209m summit of the Aunipauri Hills, about

4.5 miles N of Kolachel, is a good landmark in making the

port.

3.38 On closer approach, the following conspicuous objects can

be identified:

1. Kolachel Light, shown from a white platform on a

mound close to the foreshore SW of the town.

2. The flagstaff close to the light.

3. The Roman Catholic church about 46m NNW of the

light structure.

4. A low warehouse about 0.25 mile E of the light structure.

5. A small house with tiled roof, about 90m farther ESE.

6. A white cross close SE of the house.

7. A white pillar with black bands, from which a light is

periodically shown, close ESE of the white cross.

3.38 Signals.—Storm signals, using the Brief System, are displayed from a flagstaff 0.4 mile E of Kolachel Light. Further

information on these storm signals may be found in Pub. 160,

Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and

Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

3.38 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained, in a depth of

21m, with the flagstaff bearing 060°, 1.3 miles. Small vessels

can obtain anchorage, in about 13m, sand, with the flagstaff

bearing 327°, 0.7 mile. Mooring buoys are moored about 0.3

mile SE of Kolachel Light.

Kolachel to Cape Comorin

3.39 Muttam Point (Muttum Point) (8°07'N., 77°19'E.),

35m high and with steep red cliffs, lies about 5.5 miles SE of

Kolachel. The village of Muttamtura lies on the point. A light,

with a racon, is shown on the point. A group of palmyra trees

on high red ground, about 1 mile N of the light structure, forms

a good landmark which can usually be seen above mist which

may obscure the lighthouse. Muttam Point has been reported to

give a good radar response at 18 miles. 

3.39 Vessels in the vicinity of Muttam Point, at night, should not

approach into depths of less than 45m due to the dangers W

and SW of the point. 

3.39 Crocodile Rock, a dangerous sunken rock about 3 miles SW

of Muttam Point Light, is the outermost danger; the sea does

not break over it in calm weather. Adunda Rock, 5m high, lies

about 1.3 miles SW of the point. It is difficult to identify from

seaward, and foul ground extends about 0.2 mile NNW from it.

Kota Rock, 6m high and steep-to on its W side, lies about 1.3

miles WNW of Adunda Rock. Vessels should not pass inside

of Adunda and Kota Rocks.

3.39 The coast extends about 14 miles ESE from Muttam Point to

Cape Comorin (8°05'N., 77°35'E.). A heavy surf prevails

along this coast and ship’s boats should not attempt to land; the

local inhabitants use only catamarans. 

3.39 Wedge Bank, with a least depth of 55m, lies about 25 miles

SW of Cape Comorin.

3.39 Kanyakumari Port (8°05'N., 77°32'E.) is a minor port used

primarily for ferry traffic. Depths in the boat basin and alongside the pier are 2.3m or less. 

Muttam Point Light
Pub. 173

4. Sri Lanka (including the Gulf of Mannar, Palk Strait, and Palk Bay) and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere

4.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 4 — CHART INFORMATION
89

Pub. 173

SECTOR 4 

SRI LANKA (INCLUDING THE GULF OF MANNAR, PALK STRAIT, AND PALK BAY) AND INDIA—EAST COAST—CAPE COMORIN TO POINT CALIMERE

4.0 Plan.—This sector describes the Gulf of Mannar, Sri Lanka

(Ceylon), and then Palk Strait and Bay. The arrangement of the

sector is NE from Cape Comorin along the SE coast of India,

from there S, E, and N along the coasts of Sri Lanka, followed

by the description of Palk Strait and Palk Bay.

4.0 The sector includes the roadstead port of Tuticorin on the SE

coast of India, and the important ports of Colombo, Galle, and

Trincomalee of Sri Lanka. 

General Remarks

4.1 The Gulf of Mannar lies between the SE coast of the

Indian Peninsula and the W coast of Sri Lanka. Its S boundary

lies between Cape Comorin, the S extremity of India, and Point

de Galle, the SW point of Sri Lanka. The gulf is bounded N by

Adam’s Bridge, a chain of islets and rocks extending from the

E end of Pamban Island (9°11'N., 79°25'E.) to Mannar Island,

about 16 miles ESE. 

4.1 The NW coast of the Gulf of Mannar is, with the exception

of the mountains extending N from Cape Comorin, generally

low and sandy, with the mountains lying about 55 miles inland.

This level plain has an average elevation of about 50m, and

gradually rises toward Cape Comorin. 

4.1 The W coast of Sri Lanka is low and planted with coconut

trees. Inland, the foothills of the mountain district abreast Colombo begin about 20 miles from the coast. 

4.1 Adam’s Peak (6°48'N., 80°30'E.), 2,243m high and the

highest land visible off the W coast of Sri Lanka, is an excellent mark during the Northeast Monsoon, but is seldom visible

during the remainder of the year.

4.1 Winds—Weather.—The coast covered by this sector is, like

the rest of Sri Lanka, predominantly in a region of the monsoon. Of the four phases to be considered the Southwest Monsoon is the most important, followed by the Northeast

Monsoon. Between these two monsoon are the spring and autumn transitions with their light and unsteady winds. 

4.1 In the Gulf of Mannar, the Northeast Monsoon is steadiest in

January and has much weakened by March. The wind becomes

light and variable toward the end of April, and squally showers

are common.

4.1 The Southwest Monsoon is usually established sometime in

May and gains strength in June. From July to the end of September fresh SW winds prevail, with mainly fair weather at the

end of the gulf. The wind usually moderates near the head of

the gulf at night and in the early morning and freshens again in

the afternoon as a result of land and sea breeze effect. In October the wind is more variable and there are heavy squalls with

rain in the latter part of the month.

4.1 In November, the wind is normally between WNW and NE

and the weather is very unsettled with frequent heavy squalls

and rain; the Northeast Monsoon usually becomes established

by about the end of the month.

4.2 Hiniduma Kanda (Haycock) (6°20'N., 80°18'E.),

658m high, about 19 miles N of Point de Galle, appears as a

large round-topped mountain from all directions; it is conspicuous and rarely obscured. 

4.2 The central part of the S half of Sri Lanka is mountainous,

and on a clear day its outline is visible from W. The higher

peaks are generally veiled in haze, particularly during the

Southwest Monsoon, but are often visible during the morning

hours at other times of the year and, occasionally, all day during the month of March. The mountains terminate somewhat

abruptly E at Namunakuli (6°57'N., 81°06'E.), 2,033m high. 

4.2 With the exception of several isolated hills rising abruptly

from the E plain, the remainder of the island is practically flat.

The whole island is densely covered with tropical forest and

jungle with the exception of the open grassland, and in the

parts which have been cleared for agriculture, or in the hills

where hundreds of square miles have been cleared for the

planting of coffee, tea, and rubber.

4.2 The entire W and S coasts of Sri Lanka and many parts of the

E coast are densely planted with coconut trees. Fresh and salt

water lagoons, lying a short distance inland, exist on both the E

and W coasts, and notably at the N extremity of the island, but

only to a limited extent to the S. 

4.2 Depths in the approaches to the Gulf of Mannar are deep and

clear of dangers, with the 200m curve lying 40 miles SSE of

Cape Comorin and about 13.5 miles W of Colombo. Immediately within this curve, W of Colombo, there are depths of less

than 55m; this steep edge forms a valuable guide when approaching the land in thick weather or at night. 

4.2 The coastal bank is fairly level, and off Colombo there are

depths of 18.3m to within between 1 and 3.5 miles of the shore. 

4.2 Depths in the approaches to the S and E coasts of Sri Lanka

are deep and clear outside the 200m curve, which lies from 2 to

18 miles offshore until N of Trincomalee Bay, where the 200m

curve is charted about 38 miles W of Point Pedro. In Trincomalee Bay depths of over 200m lie within a few hundred meters of

the shore. 

4.2 The 20m curve in general lies between 1 and 3 miles off the

S and E coasts of Sri Lanka, except in the vicinity of Great

Basses Reef, Little Basses Reef and Egeria Patch, and until N

of 9°N, where the 20m curve lies about 12 miles off Point

Pedro. 

India—Cape Comorin to Tuticorin

4.3 Cape Comorin (8°05'N., 77°33'E.), the S extremity

of India, is low and sandy, with a small white pagoda on its extremity. This pagoda is surrounded by a high wall, above which

the top of the pagoda may be seen. A bungalow lies NW of the

pagoda. A conspicuous memorial, 37m high, lies close W of

the cape. The coast close W of the pagoda is barren and sandy,

but is wooded NE of it. 
90 Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 

Pub. 173

4.3 Cape Comorin Light is shown from a square white tower,

34m high, and painted in red bands, about 0.3 mile NW of the

cape. A church, 54m high, lies in a village about 0.5 mile N of

the cape. 

4.3 Good radar returns have been reported from Cape Comorin

at 23 miles. 

4.3 Foul ground extends about 0.5 mile S and SE from the cape.

An area of foul ground lies 1.5 miles offshore, about 6 miles W

of Cape Comorin. 

4.3 The land rises gradually N of Cape Comorin so that from a

distance the cape appears as a sandy promontory. A mountain,

370m high, about 4 miles NW of the cape, appears as a pointed

cone except from E or S. A range, about 9 miles farther N, with

heights up to 1,041m, resembles a camel’s hump.

4.3 Mahendragiri, 1,654m high, lies about 19 miles N of the

cape. These high peaks of the Western Ghats may be mistaken

at a great distance for the 370m mountain nearer to the cape. 

4.3 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents off Cape Comorin set

E during the flood and W during the ebb, but their direction

and strength are much affected by the ocean currents. 

4.3 The coast between Cape Comorin and Manappad Point,

about 35.5 miles ENE, is somewhat higher than the remainder

of the NW coast of the Gulf of Mannar, with undulating sand

hills up to 60m high. The background consists of reddish soil

and rises gradually to the foot of the Southern Ghats a few

miles inland. Many villages and whitewashed churches lie

along this coast, but landing in a ship’s boat is always difficult

and dangerous.

4.3 An obelisk, 8m high, lies on the coast about 2 miles N of

Cape Comorin, and serves to mark the position of a stranded

wreck about 0.5 mile ESE.

4.3 Caution.—When approaching Cape Comorin from the NW

during the Northeast Monsoon, a vessel sheltered by the coast

as far as Muttam Point, about 14 miles W of the cape, may suddenly pass from a calm into the strength of the monsoon, even

if already well offshore. 

4.3 A dangerous obstruction was reported (2002) to lie about 8

miles WSW of Comorin Point. 

4.4 East Cape (8°12'N., 77°47'E.) is prominent, and the

coastal reef, with depths of 5.5m, extends about 1 mile offshore

near the cape. 

4.4 Anchorage.—Shelter from W winds can be found in the

bight between Cape Comorin and East Cape, but during the

Southwest Monsoon landing by ship’s boats should not be attempted as swells roll into the bight. 

4.4 Anchorage for small vessels can be obtained, in 7.3m, in the

bight N of East Cape, partially protected from W winds and

swell by the coast SW. 

4.4 Manappad Point (8°22'N., 78°04'E.) is a high sandy promontory with a rock base. A light is shown from a white, round

concrete tower with red diagonal stripes. The village of

Manappad lies 0.8 mile W of the point. 

4.4 Manappad Outer Shoal, with a least depth of 6.4m, lies about

8 miles SE of Manappad Point. A 13.4m shoal, reported in

1976, lies about 6 miles farther E. Other shoals lie WNW and

WSW. Vessels should avoid passing through this area, and in

thick weather should not get into depths less than 35m. 

4.4 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be obtained during the

Northeast Monsoon, in 11m, about 1 mile offshore between

Manappad Point and the town of Periya Talai, about 6 miles

WSW of the point. From June through August, when the

Southwest Monsoon is strong, heavy seas roll in on this part of

the coast, and vessels should then anchor off Alantalai or Punnakayal.

4.4 The coast between Manappad Point and Tuticorin is low,

sandy, and fringed with coconut trees. 

4.4 Between Manappad Point and the village of Alantalai (Alendal), about 5.5 miles NNE, an area of foul rocky ground extends about 2.8 miles offshore. There are heavy breakers over

this area during the Northeast Monsoon; these breakers extend

1 mile SE of Manappad Point. 

4.4 Alendal Shoals, with depths of 3.7m, extend to about 4 miles

ESE of Alantalai. 

4.4 Anchorage.—Anchorage by small vessels can be taken off

Alantalai, in 7.3m, mud, with the church bearing 292°, distant

1.8 miles. Protection from SW winds is afforded by the coastal

reef to the S.

4.5 Tiruchendur Point (8°30'N., 78°08'E.) is a low,

rocky bluff headland, with a prominent dark-colored temple,

54m high, at its extremity. This pagoda is a useful mark and

can be seen for a distance of about 15 miles. A conspicuous

chimney, 28m high, painted in red and white bands and emitting a flame, lies about 5 miles NNW of the point. In 1976, a

depth of 14m was reported 9.3 miles ESE of the point. 

4.5 From Tiruchendur Point to abreast the fishing village of Punnaikkayal, about 8 miles N, the coastal reef extends about 2.3

miles offshore. In heavy weather, the sea breaks on this reef in

depths of 4.6 to 5.5m; usually it breaks farther inshore in

depths of 3.7m. 

4.5 Punnaikkayal, about 1 mile inland, can be identified by the

ruins of a church and by a group of palmyra trees on the beach.

A 4.6m patch lies about 3 miles E of the village. 

4.5 Anchorage.—Anchorage for small vessels, in 7.3m, can be

found off Punnaikkayal, about 1.5 miles offshore, with the

clump of trees bearing 258° remaining clear of the dangerous

wreck N of the anchorage. The coastal reef to the S provides

shelter from S winds, but local knowledge is necessary. 

Tuticorin (V. O. Chidambaranar Port)

(8°48'N., 78°10'E.)

World Port Index No. 49320

4.6 Tuticorin (Tuttukuddi) is the largest commercial town

on the W side of the Gulf of Mannar. The port is an open roadstead, well-protected by the land to the W from the Southwest

Monsoon; it is available in all seasons. 

4.6 The former Titicorin Port Trust changed its name to V. O.

Chidambaranar Port Trustin January, 2011. 

4.6 The all-weather harbor of New Tuticorin, about 0.5 mile S of

Tuticorin, handles the majority of cargo for the port. The port is

protected on its N side by North Breakwater, which is 2.3 miles

long, and on its S side by South Breakwater and Eastern Breakwater. The rocky sea bottom, making dredging closer inshore

impossible, necessitates these long breakwaters. Natural depths

of 11m become available only at a distance of approximately 2

miles from shore. The entrance to the harbor lies 3 miles SE of

Pandyan Tivu Light. 
Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 91

Pub. 173

4.6 Tuticorin also has a passenger terminal for ferry services between the port and Colombo, Sri Lanka. 

4.6 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Tuticorin is 1m at MHWS and 0.7m at near HWN.

4.6 The currents along the coast, outside the islands near Tuticorin, generally set with the wind, varying in strength from 1 to 2

knots. They are weak and variable at the change of the monsoons. When there is a lull in the monsoon, there is a tendency

for current to set into, instead of across, the Gulf of Mannar. 

4.6 The tidal currents at Tuticorin set in a N direction with the

flood tide and in a S direction with the ebb. 

4.6 Depths—Limitations.—The approach channel, which is

2,400m long and 183m wide, is dredged to a depth of 12.5m. 

4.6 The turning basin, which is just inside the breakwaters has a

depth of 11.9m and is 500m in diameter.

4.6 Berth information is given in the accompanying table titled

Tuticorin—Berth Information. 

4.6 A drying reef extends up to 0.5 mile E of Pandyan Island.

Orripar, a rock shoal with a least depth of 0.9m, lies about 0.3

mile N of Pandyan Island. 

4.6 Kariapar, a rocky pinnacle with a depth of 1.5m, lies about

0.8 mile NE of the NE extremity of Pandyan Island. Rocky

pinnacles, each with a depth of 1.5m, lie about 0.2 mile E and

0.5 mile ENE, respectively, of Kariapar. 

4.6 Van Tivu, about 2.8 miles NNE of Pandyan Tivy, lies on a

reef which extends about 0.5 mile NE and 0.4 mile SE from it.

A beacon, 10m high, lies on the S extremity of Van Tivu. 

4.6 A boat channel, about 137m wide, marked by lighted buoys

and a lighted range, leads to the old piers at Tuticorin from a

position about 1.8 miles NE of the N end of Pandyan Island.

The least depth alongside the piers and wharves at Tuticorin is

2.4m. 

4.6 Aspect.—Vallanad (8°43'N., 77°54'E.), a conspicuous red

hill, 314m high, about 17 miles WSW of Tuticorin, may be

seen before Pandyan Island Light is visible. 

4.6 Pandyan Island Light is shown from the N end of Pandyan

Island; a racon is situated at the light. 

Tuticorin Light

V. O. Chidambaranar Port Trust

http://www.tuticorinport.gov.in

Tuticorin—Berth Information

Berth No. Depth 

alongside

Maximum vessel

Remarks

Length Draft

South Breakwater

1 10.0m 168m 9.3m General cargo.

2 10.0m 168m 9.3m General cargo.

3 11.4m 192m 10.7m Dry bulk.

4 10.0m 192m 10.7m Dry bulk.

5 9.1m 168m 8.6m Multi-purpose.

6 10.3m 168m 9.3m Multi-purpose.

7 10.7m 370m 10.7m Containers.

8 11.4m 345m 10.7m Multi-purpose and containers.

North Breakwater

Coal I 11.4m 225m 10.7m Coal for the power station.

Coal II 11.4m 225m 10.7m Coal for the power station.

Oil — 228m 10.7m Oil products. Minimum acceptable length is 150m.
92 Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 

Pub. 173

4.6 A beacon, consisting of a white masonry obelisk, 10m high,

lies near the root of the S breakwater. Two water towers, with

heights of 29 and 22m, are conspicuous about 0.3 mile and 1.3

miles W, respectively, of the above light. 

4.6 Range lights, in line bearing 311.5°, lead into New Tuticorin;

the front light is shown from a metal framework tower lying

about midway along the N breakwater while the rear light is

shown from a similar tower 1 mile S of Pandyan Tivu Light. A

light is shown from the head of the N breakwater. The channel

leading NW to the entrance of the new harbor is marked by

lighted buoys. 

4.6 The following objects in Tuticorin are conspicuous and easily identified:

1. The yellow spire of Sacred Heart Cathedral, about 0.2

mile NW of the pierhead light at Tuticorin.

2. A chimney, 45m high, and a water tower, about 0.2

mile ENE of the cathedral.

3. The gray spire of the Roman Catholic Church, about

0.3 mile S of the cathedral.

4.6 Pilotage.—Pilotage for Tuticorin and New Tuticorin is compulsory; it is available 24 hours. Pilots board, as follows:

1. Vessels with a draft of less than 9m—0.6 mile SE of

Fairway Lighted Buoy.

2. Vessels with a draft of 9m and over—1.5 miles ESE

of Fairway Lighted Buoy.

4.6 Pilots should be requested through the ship’s agent 72 hours

in advance. 

4.6 Pilots can be contacted (call sign: Tuticorin Pilots) on VHF

channels 6, 14, and 16. 

4.6 Regulations.—The vessel’s ETA should be sent, via the

agent, 72 hours and 24 hours in advance and confirmed or

amended no less than 6 hours in advance. 

4.6 The ETA messages should contain the following information: 

1. Vessel’s name, nationality, and call sign.

2. Length, draft, and gross tonnage.

3. Last port of call and cargo.

4. Port of origina/destination of cargo.

5. Last port of call/next port of call.

4.6 Vessels must contact the signal station 1 hour prior to arrival

and upon arrival on VHF channel 12 or 16. 

4.6 Signals.—A signal station, with a flagstaff 29m high, lies on

the N end of Pandiyan Island. This station, manned day and

night, is connected to the mainland by telephone. Communication is by International Code of Signals.

4.6 Storm signals are displayed from the signal station; the General System is used. Further information on these storm signals

may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide)

South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

4.6 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. Call sign: Tuticorin Port

2. VHF: VHF channels 6, 12, 14, and 16

3. Telephone: 91-461-2352290

4. Facsimile: 91-461-2352301

5. Telegraph: PORTRUST TUTICORIN

6. E-mail: tutport@sancharnet.in

4.6 Anchorage.—There are six recommended anchorages, with

positions from East Breakwater Head Light, as follows:

1. Vessels less than 100m in length, 1.25 miles ENE, in

depths up to 9.9m.

2. Vessels over 100m in length, 2.25 miles E, in depths

up to 14.2m.

3. Tankers can anchor, in depths up to 15.9m, 3.5 miles

ENE.

4. Deep water anchorage is 3.25 miles ENE, with depths

from 14.2 to 15.5m.

5. The explosive anchorage is 0.75 mile E, in depths of

10m.

6. General anchorage can be taken, in depths up to 12m,

2.25 miles SE.

4.6 During the Northeast Monsoon, vessels should have a good

scope of anchor chain and a second anchor always ready as

there are many dangers to leeward. 

4.6 During the Southwest Monsoon, from about mid-May to

mid-August, the wind, though sometimes violent, is invariably

offshore, and the sea is calm or slight.

4.6 Caution.—Vessels approaching the anchorage should make

sure of their position, as the coast is low and the shoals extend

some distance from it. Vessels making the anchorage at night

should approach to seaward of all off-lying dangers. 

4.6 Several wrecks and foul ground lie between 1.5 and 2.3

miles E and ESE of Pandiyan Island Light. 

4.6 There is a jetty under construction close SW of position

8°45.2'N, 78°12.6'E; dredging operations are being conducted

in the same general area.

India—Tuticorin to Valinokkam Point

4.7 The town of Pattanamarudur (8°55'N., 78°11'E.),

with some large trees visible up to 10 miles offshore, lies at the

head of this bight, about 7 miles N of Tuticorin. The bight is

filled by a flat, with depths of less than 5.5m, extending up to

about 4.5 miles offshore. Kariya Shuli and Vilangu Shuli, two

low-lying sandy islets, lie on this flat. 

4.7 Between the Vaippar River and Vembar, about 7 miles NE,

shoal water, with depths under 5.5m, extends up to 3.5 miles

offshore. Two shoals, with least depths of 4.6 and 2.7m, lie 4.5

miles SE and 4 miles S, respectively, of Vembar. 

4.7 Between Vembar and Valinokkam Point, about 18 miles

ENE, the coast is low, sandy, and covered with palm trees. Detached shallow flats, on some of which are islands, lie from 1

to 5 miles offshore along this coast.

4.7 Caution.—Vessels, other than small coasting vessels, should

not approach the coast between Tuticorin and Valinokkam

Point, about 37 miles NE, closer than 6 or 7 miles due to the

many off-lying shoals. The coastline forms a bight between Tuticorin and the entrance of the Vaippar River, about 13 miles

NNE.

India—Valinokkam Point to Pamban Pass

4.8 The coast between Valinokkam Point and Ramen

Point, about 32 miles ENE, is fronted by a chain of islands and

shoals extending up to 6 miles offshore. Depths outside this

chain of islands and shoals are regular, but in places overfalls

occur. 

4.8 An anchorage is located 2.5 miles NE of Valinokkam Point.

A dangerous rock lies about 1 mile WSW of the anchorage. 
Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 93

Pub. 173

4.8 Large vessels should not navigate in depths less than 22m off

this stretch of coast as the area is imperfectly surveyed and several relatively shoal patches are charted. They should not sight

any of the islands of which the chain is composed. 

4.8 Kilakkarai Passage, the shallow passage between the chain

and the coast, can only be used by small vessels; local knowledge is necessary due to the numerous shoals, with depths of

less than 1.8m, and the narrow, undefined channels between

them. The passage affords a smooth passage for small coastal

vessels for half the distance between Tuticorin and Pamban. 

4.8 Valinokkam Point (9°09'N., 78°39'E.) is marked by a beacon, 6m high. A submerged rock is marked by a beacon about

1.5 miles NE. These beacons are useful marks for vessels making the W entrance of Kilakarrai Passage, between Valinokkam

Point and Anaipar Tivu (Anapipar Tivu), about 2 miles E.

4.8 The passage then leads S of a submerged rock, marked by a

beacon, about 4 miles ENE of Valinokkam Point, and then to

the anchorage off Kilakarrai. A light is shown from a white

hexagonal concrete tower with red bands, 30m high, at

Kilakkarai. 

4.8 Pilotage.—Pilots for Kilakarrai Passage and for Pamban

Pass are stationed at Kilakarrai (9°14'N., 78°47'E.). 

4.8 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken off Kilakarrai by

small vessels; local knowledge is necessary. Anchorage, somewhat sheltered from the Southwest Monsoon, can also be taken

off Muttupetai Betel (9°16'N., 78°55'E.). 

The Gulf of Mannar—North Side

4.9 The N side of the Gulf of Mannar is formed by Pamban Island and Adam’s Bridge, both described in paragraph

4.11, and Mannar Island, described in paragraph 4.12. 

4.9 Pamban Pass (9°17'N., 79°12'E.) is the navigable channel,

partly artificial, through the banks which occupy the space between the W end of Pamban Island and the mainland. It is of

great advantage to coastal craft trading between ports on the W

coast of India and ports of the Bay of Bengal. 

A rocky barrier extends in a straight line between the W

coast of Pamban Island and Ramen Point, about 1.3 miles W.

Pamban Viaduct, which carries the South India Railway is built

on this barrier. 

4.9 A cutting, 61m wide, through the barrier and crossed by a

rolling lift bridge, lies about 0.2 mile W of Pamban Island. The

bridge is under the control of the Port Conservator at Pamban,

who requires 30 minutes notice to open the bridge; in an emergency it can be opened immediately. 

4.9 On the W side of Pamban Pass the barrier is named The

Great Dam. It consists of large masses of flat-surfaced rocks,

which were formerly portions of a causeway that extended

from Pamban Island to the mainland. The N face of the dam is

steep-to, and at LW presents a wall-like appearance, but the

boulders are sufficiently separated to allow a free passage to

the water. 

4.9 Ramen Point is the E extremity of a narrow tongue of land

projecting E from the coast. A temple in ruins lies about 183m

W of the point; a coconut plantation lies about 183m farther W.

4.9 Depths—Limitations.—In 1979, it was reported that the

maximum draft for vessels using the pass was limited to 2.1m.

4.9 The pass is used by some coastal vessels of from 200 to 800

grt and about 61m in length; these are as large as can safely

transit the channel. 

4.9 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Pamban Pass is 0.7m at

MHWS, and 0.5m at MHWN. 

4.9 The pass is well-marked with beacons, buoys, and is easy to

navigate. 

4.9 Tidal currents are only noticeable at the change of the monsoon in March, April, and October. At other times they are

masked by the S current during the Northeast Monsoon, and by

the N current during the Southwest Monsoon. These currents

often attain velocities of 6 knots, making passage of the pass

difficult.

4.9 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for merchant vessels. Licensed pilots at Pamban are under the orders of the Pamban

Port Conservator. Pilots are stationed at Kundagal (Kundugal)

Point (9°15'N., 79°13'E.), the SW extremity of Pamban Island,

Mundel Point at the W end of Pamban Island, and on the N

side of Pamban Pass, to look out for vessels approaching Pamban. There are no official signals for vessels needing a pilot,

but local craft usually display a red or white flag. 

4.9 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken 1 mile NW of Pamban Island Light, in a depth of about 7m, mud, good holding

ground, with Pamban Island Light bearing between 122° and

134°.

4.9 Signals.—Flag P of the International Code of Signals, displayed from the port offices flagstaff at Pamban, indicates the

bridge is fully open. This flag displayed from the N yardarm

indicates that vessels from N may pass through, and from the S

yardarm indicates that vessels from the S have priority. 

Pamban Pass—Approaches

4.10 Mansfield Patch (9°10'N., 79°18'E.), with a least

depth of 5.8m, about 7 miles SE of Kundagal Point, is the N

and shallowest of a group of detached patches. Batt Patch, with

a least depth of 4.9m, lies about 2.8 miles WNW of Mansfield

Patch; the sea breaks on Batt Patch in a fresh breeze.

4.10 Manauli Reef, with its E edge about 4 miles SW of Kundagal

Point, consists of coral and dries in places. The E end of the

reef is marked by beacons. Manauli Tivu (Manilla Tivu), with a

conspicuous white beacon close E, lies about 2 miles from the

E end of the Reef.

4.10 Pulli Shoal, with a least depth of 1.2m and over which the

sea breaks, lies about 3 miles E of Manauli Tivu. Puma Channel, leading to Pamban Pass, lies between Manauli Reef and

Pulli Shoal.

4.10 Pulli Reef, N of Pulli Shoal, has three islands on it. Pumurichan, along the W edge, has a conspicuous beacon, 10m high,

on its SW side; Pumurichan Tivu, farther SE; and Kurisadi Tivu (Kursadi Tivu). The extensive coral reef dries in places; its

N edge is well defined at low water, but its S edge is indented

and the sea breaks on it. Beacons mark the S and NW sides of

Pulli Reef. 

4.10 Kurisadi Beacon No. 2, 7m high, lies in the middle of

Kurisadi Tivu. Kurisadi Beacon No. 1, 4.8m high, lies about

0.2 mile NW of Kurisadi Beacon No. 2, on the N edge of Pulli

Reef. 

4.10 Shingle Island, low and covered with scrub, lies nearly 1

mile ESE of Kurisadi Tivu. The island lies on Kallaru Reef, a

coral reef, on the SW edge of which the sea breaks heavily. A

conspicuous triangular white beacon, 9.5m high with a black
94 Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 

Pub. 173

band, lies on the E end of Shingle Island. 

4.10 Kundagal Channel leads into Kundagal Gut, between

Kundagal Point and the N side of Kurisadi Tivu, then NW into

Sand Bank Channel, then NNE through The Basin to Pamban

Pass. 

4.10 The tidal current sets W through Kundagal Channel on the

flood, and then W along the N edge of Pulli Reef, where it

joins with the flood current through Puma Channel. The combined currents then set N, but they are weak unless influenced

by strong S winds.

4.10 Anchorage.—There is anchorage, in 5.8 to 7m, in Kundagal

Channel. 

4.10 Directions.—Vessels approaching Pamban Pass from the S

should use great care as the off-lying islands are low, and there

are no hills or conspicuous landmarks. During the Southwest

Monsoon, haze frequently overhangs and obscures the islands.

Vessels over 4.6m draft should not approach within depths of

14.6m until their position is accurately determined.

4.10 The first landmarks identifiable from seaward are Rameswaram Temple (9°17'N., 79°19'E.), 50m high, appearing as a

large square tower viewed from NE or SW and as a narrow pinnacle from SE or NW; Gandhamana Temple, 44m high, about

1 mile NW, lying in a large enclosure, but less conspicuous;

Pamban Light, a white tower, on a sandhill on the NW point of

Pamban Island; a red square water tower on a framework structure, 18m high, about 5 miles W of Pamban Light, and conspicuous when bearing less than 050°; and the beacon close E

of Manauli Tivu, Pumurichan, and Shingle Island. 

4.10 Vessels approaching Kundagal Channel, which is the better

and more direct approach, should, after having passed the outlying dangers, steer to pass about 0.4 mile E of Shingle Island,

taking care to avoid the shoals E. When the beacon about 0.3

mile NE of Kundagal Point bears 286°, steer for Kundagal Gut,

passing S of Kundagal Point. Continue W and bring Kurisadi

Beacon No. 1 and Kurisadi Beacon No. 2 in line, astern, bearing 130°; this range leads through Sand Bank Channel passing

close SW both of a buoy, moored 0.6 mile W of Kundugal

Point, and a buoy moored 0.5 mile further WNW. Keep close to

beacons marking the SW side of the latter channel, and SW of

Elbow Buoy, a red conical buoy at the junction of Sand Bank

Channel and The Basin, a narrow channel leading NNE, with

depths of 4.6 to 6.7m in the fairway, which is marked by beacons. A NNE course through The Basin leads to the S end of

Pamban Pass.

4.10 A buoy moored 0.5 mile SW of Elbow Buoy marks a shoal

ground of less than 1m on the W side of the deeper water at the

intersection of Sand Bank Channel and The Basin. 

4.10 Puma Channel, the SW approach, only available to those

with local knowledge, demands navigation by eye. Manauli

Reef, on the W side, is well-marked on its S and E sides by

breaking seas. 

4.10 Mandapam South Beacon (9°17'N., 79°09'E.), in line bearing 338° with a beacon on a low hill NNW, leads into Puma

Channel. When the beacon on the SW side of Pumurichan

bears 060°, vessels should steer NE through Puma East Channel; then steer along the N edge of Pulli Reef and into the channel N of Pulli Reef, marked by beacons; and finally steering

into Sand Bank Channel and following the directions given

above.

4.10 The vessels bound for the drydock at Mandapam, about 0.5

mile E of Mandapam South Beacon, should pass through Puma

Channel as described and, leaving Cana Paru Reef about 0.3

mile to port, continue on the 338° range line until 1.3 miles

from Mandapam South Beacon; local knowledge is necessary

from this point. 

4.10 The drydock at Mandapam is 81m long and 15m wide, with

the sill 2m below chart datum.

Pamban Island

4.11 Pamban Island (9°17'N., 79°18'E.) is low, sandy, and

well-planted with coconut trees towards its W end, where a

broad peninsula extends about 3 miles N. A light stands on the

NE extremity of this peninsula. 

4.11 Lands End (9°10'N., 79°26'E.) is the SE extremity of Pamban Island; a small but conspicuous building lies near the point. 

4.11 Dhanushkodi, about 2 miles NW of Lands End, is a railroad

terminal; the red-roofed railway buildings are conspicuous. 

4.11 Chuttram, close SE of Dhanushkodi, lies within a clump of

palm trees about 24m high and is easily identified.

4.11 Mukkundaraya Chattram, a bushy dune about 2.5 miles farther NW, is easily identified.

4.11 Adam’s Bridge is a narrow ridge of sand and rocks, mostly

dry, which connects Pamban Island with Mannar Island, about

16 miles ESE. It is composed mostly of shifting sand banks,

with intricate shallow channels between them. 

4.11 Shoal water extends up to 5 miles from the ridge, with

depths under 11m. Farther seaward, depths increase sharply to

over 183m about 12 miles SW of Adam’s Bridge. 

Mannar Island

4.12 Mannar Island (9°05'N., 79°50'E.) is separated from

Sri Lanka by a boat channel which is crossed by a conspicuous

railway bridge and a road bridge. The island is wooded and has

low sand hills on its SW side for a distance of about 5 miles

from its SE end. At the W end, there are coconut and other

palms near the villages. 

4.12 A disused structure, consisting of a conspicuous black steel

framework tower, 28m high, lies on the W end of Mannar Island.

4.12 Tides—Currents.—During the Southwest Monsoon, a

strong current sets N over Adam’s Bridge, but abates towards

the W and towards the Indian coast. A confused sea is generally encountered near Mannar Island.

4.12 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained, in 5.5m, mud,

with the railway bridge between Mannar Island and Sri Lanka

bearing 099°, about 5 miles.

4.12 During the Northeast Monsoon, good anchorage can be obtained by vessels drawing not more than 4.3m, about 1.5 miles

off the W part of the island. 

Sri Lanka—West Coast—Mannar Island to Kudremalai Point

4.13 Doric Beacon (8°47'N., 79°56'E.), a white masonry

tower about 7.5 miles N of the mouth of the Kal Aru, is conspicuous seaward in favorable light. About 1.5 miles N of the

tower is the S of several mouths of the Aruvi Aru. A white obelisk lies on the N entrance point of the Kal Aru. 
Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 95

Pub. 173

4.13 In the bight between the mouth of the Kal Aru and Adam’s

Bridge, about 30 miles NW, are pearl banks extending up to 10

miles offshore and with depths of less than 11m. 

4.13 Numerous rocks nearly awash lie about 1 to 5 miles S of

Doric Beacon.

4.13 Silavatturai Reef lies about 4 miles SW of Doric Beacon. Arripu Reef extends from close NW of the above reef to about 4

miles farther NW. Both reefs have depths of less than 1.8m. A

beacon marks the N end of Arippu Reef. Vankalai Reef, about

5 miles NW of Arippu Reef, dries at its SE end; between the

two reefs there is a 0.9m patch. 

4.13 Shoal water, with depths of less than 11m, extends about 12

miles offshore between the mouth of the Kal Aru and Moderegam Point (8°36'N., 79°55'E.). 

4.13 Cheval Bank, with a least depth of 4.6m, lies about 11 miles

W of the mouth of the Kal Aru. A submerged obstruction, dangerous to navigation, was reported (1958) on the bank. 

4.13 A beacon, consisting of a white obelisk, 29m high, lies about

0.5 mile S of Moderegam Point, and is visible up to 15 miles

seaward when the light is favorable. 

4.13 Anchorage.—Small vessels can anchor, in about 6.1m, from

2 to 3 miles W of the above beacon. Vessels should approach

this anchorage passing N of Cheval Bank. 

4.13 Caution.—It is not advisable to close the coast of Sri Lanka

when N of Karaitivu (8°32'N., 79°47'E.), because of the extensive shoal banks lying off the coast. 

4.13 Great caution should be exercised if obliged to navigate in

depths of less than 5.5m for a distance of about 10 miles N of

Moderegam Point due to several uncharted coral heads with

depths of less than 0.6m in the area. 

Sri Lanka—West Coast—Kudremalai Point to

Negombo Point

4.14 Kudremalai Point (8°32'N., 79°52'E.) is steep and

rocky, with three long sand mounds S of it. A white masonry

tower, 68.5m high, known as Kudremalai Tower, lies on the

highest of these mounds. A beacon, 38m high, consisting of a

black tripod with a diamond-shaped topmark, stands on the

point. 

4.14 Karaitivu (Kara Tivu), long and narrow, lies with its N end

about 5.5 miles W of Kudremalai Point; the island is breached

about 2 miles from its S end. The area between Karaitivu and

Cheval Bank has not been completely examined; further shoaling has been reported.

4.14 Portugal Bay, E of Karaitivu, is shallow and offers anchorage

to small vessels, in a depth of 5.5m, but local knowledge is

necessary. 

4.14 Anchorage.—Vessels with a draft not exceeding 4.3m can

obtain good anchorage, in a charted depth of about 6.1m, about

2 miles W of Kudremalai Tower.

4.14 Dutch Bay, entered S of Karaitivu, is shallow. 

4.14 Bar Reef, which dries, lies about 3 miles W of the entrance

to Dutch Bay. 

4.15 The coast between Dutch Bay and Chilaw Point,

about 45 miles S, is formed by the seaward side of a narrow

peninsula. 

4.15 A white tower, known as Aruakalu Tower, lies on the summit

of a 79m hill about 4.5 miles NE of Kalpitya (8°14'N.,

79°46'E.). 

4.15 A shallow flat of rock and sand extends about 7 miles SW

from the coast abreast Mampuri (7°59'N., 79°45'E.). A 3.7m

shoal lies on this flat about 4.3 miles WSW of Mampuri and

about 3.5 miles offshore; this shoal is particularly dangerous as

depths over 183m are about 1.5 miles W of it. 

4.15 Vessels passing the peninsula should keep 7 miles offshore

and in depths over 37m to avoid the above-mentioned shoal.

4.15 A reef, above and below-water, lies about 3.5 miles N of

Chilaw Point and about 0.5 mile offshore.

4.15 Chilaw Point (7°36'N., 79°48'E.) can be identified by a sand

hill and a round hummock nearby. A red can buoy is moored

about 3.5 miles WSW of the point. 

4.15 Anchorage.—Anchorage for small vessels can be obtained,

in 11m, about 1.8 miles NW of Chilaw Point. Vessels making

this anchorage from the S should keep 4 or 5 miles offshore

and close to the land near the point. 

4.15 The coast from Chilaw Point to Negombo Point, about 24

miles S, is almost featureless except for a break in its fringe of

coconut trees, about 4 miles N of Negombo Point, marking the

entrance to Maha Oya.

Sri Lanka—West Coast—Negombo Point to Colombo

4.16 Negombo Point (7°12'N., 79°48'E.) has been reported to give good radar returns at 22 miles. The twin towers of a

church in Negombo, E of the point, are conspicuous. A church

with a red roof and low twin towers, together with a school

house about 183m NNW, is conspicuous about 5.5 miles S of

the point. 

4.16 A narrow reef, with a least charted depth of 2.7m, lies with

its S end about 2 miles NNW of Negombo Point; a dangerous

wreck lies at the SE of the reef.

4.16 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken about 1 mile W of

this reef, except during the Southwest Monsoon. Small vessels,

with local knowledge, can anchor E of the reef, in about 6.1m,

about 0.5 mile offshore. 

4.16 Caution.—A 14.2m shoal extends over 3 miles N from a position about 8.5 miles WSW of Negombo Point. 

4.16 Mutwal Point (6°58'N., 79°51'E.), at the N end of Colombo

Harbor, lies about 14.5 miles S of Negombo Point. A trawler

harbor, with a fishing harbor close E, lies NE of the point; a

breakwater shelters each harbor from W.

4.16 Kalapu Gala, a narrow rocky reef, extends about 4 miles N

from about 0.3 mile ENE of Mutwal Point; the reef lies parallel

to the coast and about 0.5 mile offshore, with several rocky

heads with depths of less than 1.8m. The sea breaks over the

reef during the Southwest Monsoon, and even in calm weather

rollers occur. 

4.16 The entrance to the Kelani Ganga lies about 0.8 mile NE of

Mutwal Point. The coast, for about 5 miles N of the river entrance, is sandy and thickly fringed with coconut trees. 

4.16 A beacon, 8m high and painted white, lies about 2.3 miles N

of the entrance to the Kelani Ganga. 
96 Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 

Pub. 173

Colombo (6°57'N., 79°51'E.)

World Port Index No. 49240

4.17 Colombo, the principal port of Sri Lanka, lies between Galbokka Point (6°56'N., 79°50'E.) and Mutwal Point,

about 2 miles NNE. Galbokka Point is a black rocky knoll connected by a short sandy isthmus to the land at the S end of Colombo Harbor. 

4.17 The harbor is artificially formed by three breakwaters, as follows:

1. Southwest Breakwater (Queen Elizabeth Quay)—extending NNE from the shore at the S end of the harbor. 

2. Northwest Breakwater—a detached breakwater.

3. Northeast Breakwater—extending W from Mutwal

Point.

4.17 There is a foul area on the inner side of the Northwest

Breakwater. The S end of the harbor is connected with Beira

Lake by a canal with locks; the canal is dredged to a depth of

3m. 

4.17 South Harbor, an expansion of the port, is currently (2011)

under construction W of the Southwest Breakwater. South Harbor will consist of four 1,200m long terminals, each having

three berths with 18m depths alongside; future plans include

increasing the alongside depths to 23m. The entrance channel

will have a width of 560m and a depth of 20m. The harbor basinwill have a turning circle with a diameter of 600m. 

4.17 At present (2011) the project is about 50 per cent complete;

the outer breakwater has been completed and the dredging is

in progress. 

4.17 Winds—Weather.—The Southwest Monsoon brings heavy

rain and winds which occasionally reach gale force. During

this time a moderate swell runs in the harbor, making cargo

handling difficult. 

4.17 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Colombo is 0.7m at

MHWS, and 0.5m at MHWN. 

4.17 The current off Colombo is variable; its velocity seldom exceeds 0.5 knot. Near shoal water the current sets N at a velocity

of 1.5 knots during the Northeast Monsoon, resulting in an E

set off the W entrance; this has also been reported during the

Southwest Monsoon.

4.17 Depths—Limitations.—The W entrance, between Southwest Breakwater and Northwest Breakwater, has a dredged

depth of 16m; the approach, marked by lighted buoys and a directional light, has been dredged to a depth of 16m. There is a

disturbed swell across this entrance during the Southwest Monsoon. 

4.17 The N entrance, between Northwest Breakwater and Northeast Breakwater, has a dredged depth of 13m in its approaches.

An 8.6m rock lies close outside this entrance, about 0.1 mile N

of the head of Northeast Breakwater. 

4.17 Dredging is carried out periodically to maintain the dredged

depths. 

4.17 A scend of up to 1m can be experienced in the harbor.

4.17 Vessels may enter and leave the harbor by whichever entrance is more convenient, subject to the depth limitation for

the N entrance. 

4.17 Vessels are not permitted to navigate the harbor, or to lie at

moorings with less than 0.6m under their bottoms, except by

special permission of the port authorities. 

4.17 Colombo Marine Terminal (6°58.7'N., 79°46.5'E.), a tanker

SPM buoy, is situated 4.5 miles NW of Colombo Light. Vessels

with a maximum draft of 19m can be accommodated. A submarine pipeline is laid in an ESE direction from the buoy to the

root of the Northeast Breakwater. All shipping, other than tankers using the SPM buoy, are advised to keep clear of the area

covering a radius of 1.2 miles centered on the SPM. Passage

through this area is prohibited.

4.17 Kerawalapitiya Terminal (7°00.9'N., 79°49.8'E.) is an offshore LNG terminal consisting of a CBM and four mooring

buoys. Vessels up to 20,000m3

 and 10,000 dwt, with a maximum draft of 7m, and a lengths of 90 to 165m, can be accommodated. The terminal is surrounded by a restricted area with a

radius of 1,000m. Another SBM for oil tankers is located about

1.5 miles NW of the LNG terminal and is surrounded by a restricted area with a radius of about 0.4 mile. All vessels not using the terminals are required to keep clear. 

Sri Lanka Ports Authority Home Page

http://www.slpa.lk

Colombo—Berth Information

Berth Length Draft Remarks

Prince Vijaya Quay

Berth 1 150m 9.2m Break bulk and dry bulk

Berth 2 188m 9.7m Break bulk and dry bulk

Samagi Jetty

CT1-2 365m 9.0-9.5m Containers and break bulk

Unity Container Terminal

Berth 1-2 340m 9.0-11.0m Containers

South Pier

234m 9.5m Break bulk
Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 97

Pub. 173

Guide Pier (See Note)

Berth GP1 196m 7.9m Vehicles and break bulk

Berth GP2 167m 9.5m Vehicles and break bulk

Jaya Container Terminal

Berth JCT 1 300m 12.0m Containers

Berth JCT 2 332m 13.0m Containers

Berth JCT 3 330m 13.5m Containers

Berth JCT 4 330m 14.0m Containers

North 172m 9.0m Containers

South 180m 9.0m Containers

Feeder Berth 200m 9.5m Containers

Bandaranaika Quay

Berth BQ 1 163m 7.3-9.5m Break bulk and dry bulk

Berth BQ 2 181m 9.8m Break bulk and dry bulk

Berth BQ 2A 125m 8.6m Break bulk and dry bulk

Berth BQ 3 194m 9.1m Break bulk and dry bulk

Berth BQ 4 194m 9.1m Break bulk and dry bulk

Berth CB 1 99m 6.1m Coastal vessels

Berth CB 2 94m 4.6m Coastal vessels

South Asian Gateway Terminal

Berth SAGT 1 340m 15.0m General cargo and passengers

Berth SAGT 2 310m 15.0m General cargo

Berth SAGT 3 290m 15.0m General cargo

Berths 4-6 244m 10.4m Containers and ro-ro

Dolphin Berth

— — 14.0m Bulk liquids. Inner side of Northwest 

Breakwater

Note.—The entrance to the drydocks is located at the end of this pier; vessels berthed

to it have to be moved clear when vessels are entering or leaving the drydocks.

Colombo—Drydock Information

Drydock Breadth * Depth over 

sill ** Length Capacity

Drydock No. 1 26.0m 9.7m 213m 30,000 dwt

Drydock No. 2 16.5m 6.7m 107m 9,000 dwt

Drydock No. 3 16.0m 5.5m 122m 8,000 dwt

Drydock No. 4 44.0m 8.9m 263m 100,000 dwt

* At the entrance

** At MHWS

Colombo—Berth Information

Berth Length Draft Remarks
98 Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 

Pub. 173

4.17 Aspect.—The land in the vicinity of Colombo is low and

will not be seen from any great distance, but in exceptionally

clear weather, Adam’s Peak and the other mountains of Sri

Lanka may be visible from a great distance.

4.17 Approaching from the W, the buildings in that part of the

town, at the S end of the harbor, and known as The Fort, will

first be seen at a distance of about 12 miles. Hotel Taprobane,

with three small round turrets; the Clock Tower, which is conspicuous; and the offices of the Bank of Ceylon, are among the

several prominent buildings in The Fort.

4.17 Colombo Light (6°56'N., 79°50'E.), on the W side of The

Fort, about 91m within Galbokka Point, is a circular stone tower, 15m high, painted in black and white checkers. 

4.17 Good radar returns have been reported from Colombo Light

and Colombo breakwaters at 20 and 18 miles, respectively. A

conspicuous white monument on four yellow curved legs lies

at an elevation of 82m about 0.3 NNW of Galbokka Point.

4.17 On nearer approach to the harbor, the following landmarks

may be identified:

1. A flour mill, 65m high and marked by red obstruction

lights, at the NE corner of the harbor.

2. A tall red brick chimney, close W of the drydock, in

the NE part of the harbor.

3. St. James Church, with twin towers, and St. Lucia’s

Cathedral, with a dome, about 1.5 miles NE of Galbokka

Point.

4. All Saints’ Church, with a tall spire, about 1.3 miles E

of Galbokka Point.

4.17 Two steel framework radio masts, 93m high and showing red

obstruction lights, lie about 2.5 miles ESE of Galbokka Point.

Galle Face Hotel, a large red building, is conspicuous on the

coast, about 1 mile S of the latter point. The Town Hall, with a

white dome, is also conspicuous about 1 mile farther E. 

4.17 South of Galbokka Point to Mount Lavinia, about 6.5 miles

S, a narrow ridge of rocks, awash in some places and with the

appearance of a barrier reef, lies about 183m offshore. Along

this stretch, the railway stations at Kollupitiya, Bambalapitiya,

Wellawatt, and Dehiwala, with their stone-covered louvered

exteriors, show up prominently at the edge of the beach in the

afternoon light. 

4.17 Mount Lavinia (6°50'N., 79°52'E.) can be identified by a

hotel which is radar conspicuous, a large white building, 29m

high, lying on a rocky point on the shore. The land rises behind

the hotel, forming a dark background, rendering it the most

conspicuous object on this part of the coast, and visible in favorable light, 12 miles offshore. 

4.17 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all merchant vessels

except those exempted by the port authorities. Pilots are available 24 hours, although it is unusual for a pilot to board between 0000 and 0400. 

4.17 Requests for pilots, stating the vessel’s ETA, should be made

24 hours in advance, with later corrections to the ETA if necessary.

4.17 In 1980, it was reported that all vessels that can be accommodated in Galle Harbor (under 122m in length and 6.4m

draft) were being diverted to Galle, even though berths were

available in Colombo Harbor. From these anchorages, vessels

should contact the pilot station on VHF channel 16 for further

instructions. 

4.17 The pilot station is located on the spur of Southwest Breakwater. 

4.17 A vessel wishing to take a pilot should make one of the signals prescribed by the International Code of Signals and indicate the name and draft as soon as the vessel arrives within

visual signaling distance of the port.

4.17 To facilitate embarkation of the pilot, vessels should, unless

they have been previously intercepted by the pilot launch, pick

up the pilot in position 6°59.3'N, 79°48.3'E. A pilot motor

launch, showing the customary signals, will come alongside

vessels in this position. 

4.17 Vessels are cautioned, unless boarded by a pilot or previously ordered to do so, not to approach the port within the 1 mile

limit. Vessels should also stay clear of the reclamation and restricted areas. 

4.17 The following provisions should be made to assist the pilot

in boarding: 

1. A pilot ladder on the lee side. A boat rope is not required.

2. Two manropes of at least 3 inch line, with the lower

ends free, are to be hung from the vessel’s rail. 

3. By night, a bright light to be shown midway between

the rail and the water to indicate the position of the ladder

and the manropes.

4. In vessels of high freeboard fitted with gangway

doors, the lee door should be opened and the ladder hung

from there. In the event of weather conditions being such as

to prevent the vessel being boarded by a pilot outside the harbor, the appropriate signals will be displayed at the pilot station. The vessel may, at the discretion of the port authorities,

be given the option of proceeding into harbor and picking up

the pilot inside, the vessel being instructed by signal whether

to run in or stand off. 

4.17 The option to enter is not given at night under normal circumstances. 

4.17 Vessels waiting to enter should remain under way as convenient, well clear of both entrances. 

4.17 A vessel intending to leave the harbor should contact Colombo Pilot on VHF channel 16, stating its ETD and confirming

the departure time 30 minutes prior to departure. 

4.17 In normal circumstances the pilot will leave an outbound

vessel as it passes the pilot station.

4.17 If at any time assistance is required from the port authorities,

the signal should be made for a pilot. 

4.17 Regulations.—Vessels in Colombo Harbor, after they have

been moored to the satisfaction of the port authorities, are

responsible for tending their own lines. 

4.17 Signals.—The signals in use in Colombo Harbor are shown

in the accompanying table titled Colombo—Port Signals; the

flags are from the International Code of Signals. 

4.17 The port signal station and pilot station are sited together.

The signal station maintains a day watch, but the pilot station

maintains a 24-hour watch. 

4.17 Any vessel observing that a person has fallen overboard from

any ship, boat, lighter, or other craft should make the following

signals: 

1. By day:

a. Hoist International Code Flag O, and haul it up and

down to attract attention.

b. Sound short blasts on the siren or whistle.

2. At night:
Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 99

Pub. 173

a. Flash the letter O in Morse Code in the direction of

the pilot station.

b. Sound short blasts on the siren or whistle.

4.17 The above signals will be observed by either the pilot station,

the harbor police, or the port fire brigade; a motorboat will then

be dispatched to the scene. 

4.17 When a large red flag is displayed on a floating crane engaged on new construction work, all vessels passing or in the

vicinity are to proceed at such a speed that they cause no wash

or any kind, or disturbance affecting the crane.

4.17 The appropriate quarantine signal is to be displayed by all

vessels arriving in the harbor and no person except the pilot is

to be allowed to board or leave the vessel until pratique is given. Vessels having, or having had within 10 days prior to arrival, any infectious disease are placed in quarantine for a period

decided by the port health officials. In such a case, the vessel

may have to anchor in the roadstead or other place as directed

by the port authorities.

4.17 Vessels in quarantine must display the necessary signals.

4.17 Vessels discharging dangerous petroleum are surrounded, at

a distance of not less than 30m, by a rope boom floated on red

wooden buoys and displaying the following signals; by day, a

red flag over a green flag; by night, four lights vertically disposed, red and green alternately. 

4.17 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. Telephone: 94-1-2421201

94-1-2421231

2. Facsimile: 94-1-2440651

3. Telex: 803-21805 PORTS CE

4. E-mail: slpainfo@slpa.lk

4.17 Directions.—When making Colombo from the W, it is better for a vessel to be S than N of the port, as there are no conspicuous landmarks N. 

4.17 Approaching from the W, steer to bring Colombo Light bearing about 090° until the vessel’s position is accurately determined; then a course clear of dangers can be laid for the harbor.

4.17 Vessels coming from the N or S, should keep in depths over

37m until Colombo Light bears 090°, then proceed as previously directed. 

4.17 Caution.—Ona Gala, a narrow ridge, with its S end about

3.3 miles N of Galbokka Point, has a least depth of 6.4m at

Galawala, near its N end. Vessels approaching Colombo from

the N are advised to keep to seaward of Ona Gala (7°00'N.,

79°50'E.). During the Southwest Monsoon, vessels are

cautioned against being set to the NE onto Ona Gala. 

4.17 Kelani Gala, a narrow bank with a least depth of 16.5m, lies

with its S end about 1.8 miles WNW of Galboka Point. 

4.17 Pala Gala, also known as Tartar Rock, is a pinnacle rock with

a depth of 5.8m, nearly 0.5 mile NW of Galbokka Point. It is

steep-to and never breaks.

4.17 Galua, also known as Drunken Sailor Rock, has a least depth

of 1.2m, about 0.4 mile SW of Golbakka Point. The shoal consists of two rocky heads over which the sea breaks during the

Southwest Monsoon. A red conical buoy is moored about 0.2

mile W of the W rocky head.

4.17 Firing practice areas are centered 24 miles SW and 34 miles

WNW of Colombo Harbor.

4.17 A restricted area, best seen on the chart, is established and

passage through this area is prohibited around the outfall pipeline extending 1 mile NW from the N end of the port area,

marked by a lighted buoy moored about 0.8 mile NNW of the

N entrance. 

4.17 Depths of up to 6m less than charted have been reported

(2007) in the inner harbor in the charted area dredged to 15m. 

Sri Lanka—West Coast—Colombo to Beruwala

Point

4.18 The coast between Mount Lavinia (6°50'N.,

79°52'E.), described with Colombo Harbor in paragraph 4.17,

and Beruwala Point, about 23 miles S, is formed by a straight

sandy beach with dense groves of coconut palms, rising to a

uniform height of 26m behind it. The hinterland is densely

wooded and there are numerous towns and villages.

The coastal railroad runs along the coast; the railroad stations and the steel bridges which span the entrances of rivers,

lagoons, and lakes are usually visible from seaward. From a

distance of about 4 miles offshore there are no conspicuous

landmarks along this stretch of coast.

Colombo—Port Signals

Day Night Meaning

Red ball Fixed red light.

Hoisted at the pilot station flagstaff when vessels are 

required to run out extra mooring lines to the buoys 

and to prepare a second anchor for letting go.

Flags UM Four red lights vertically disposed.

Hoisted at the pilot station flagstaff when weather 

conditions are such as to prevent the pilot boarding 

vessels outside the harbor. 

Flags IT Three red lights vertically disposed, 2m apart, 

hoisted where best seen.

Vessel is on fire. Attention can be called to this signal 

by a continuous sounding with any fog signaling 

apparatus.

Flag G Two red lights vertically disposed. A pilot is required.

Flags POL White, red, and white lights vertically disposed. The police are required.

Flag W Red, white and red lights vertically disposed. The port surgeon is required.
100 Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 

Pub. 173

4.18 A narrow bank, with depths of less than 1.8m, runs parallel

to the coast and about 0.5 mile off it, for a distance of a 2 miles

S of Mount Lavinia. 

4.18 Moratuwa, a fair-sized town, lies about 3.5 miles SSE of

Mount Lavinia; Immanuel Church, with a red square tower and

a large gray water tower, 0.5 mile SE of it, are conspicuous. 

4.18 Panadura, a small town about 4 miles SSE of Moratuwa, has

a lone round-topped banyan tree about 1 mile S of it.

4.18 Gono Gala (6°42'N., 79°53'E.), 4.5m high and roundtopped, is the outer of two rocks lying about 1 mile WSW of

Panadura Station. Nilkete Rock, with a depth of 3.6m, and Po

Gala, with a depth of 5m, lie about 1.3 and 1.5 miles, respectively, S of Gono Gala. 

4.18 Kaluwatte Gala (6°39'N., 79°53'E.), with a depth of 9.1m

and steep-to, lies about 2.5 miles offshore. Uan Gala, with a

depth of 5.5m, also steep-to, lies about 0.6 mile farther SE. 

4.19 Kalutara (6°35'N., 79°58'E.), an important town,

straddles the Kalu Ganga near its mouth. A temple, with a conspicuous white dome, lies on the S bank of the Kalu Ganga, in

Kalutara. The white dome of the temple is floodlit; a fixed

green light is shown at its top.

4.19 Bombuwala Hill, about 3.5 miles E of Kalutara, is a small

range about 2 miles long, and the N of low hills behind the

coast between Kalutara and Beruwala Point. Near its S end is a

conspicuous flat-topped hill, 159m high. 

4.19 Weragala Kanda (Weragoda Kanda), about 4 miles SSE of

Kalutara, is conical, 107m high, and conspicuous. This hill is

isolated and wooded except at its summit, where there is a

white shrine.

4.19 Uheliya Reef, with depths of 7.3 to 9.1m, lies about 2.5

miles W of Kalutara, at the outer end of an area of shoals and

uneven ground. 

4.19 Pittaniya Rock, with a depth of 5.5m, lies 1.3 miles WSW of

the temple at Kalutara. Pallaipara Rock, with a depth of 2.7m,

and Modara Muduwa Rock, lie about 0.5 mile and 1 mile, respectively, S of Pittaniya Rock.

4.19 Anchorage.—Small vessels may anchor off Kalutara, in a

depth of about 10m; local knowledge is necessary. This anchorage should be approached by passing between Uheliya

Reef and Pittaniya Rock. 

4.19 Maggona Point, about 5 miles S of Kalutara, is a small rocky

headland, about 9m high. Tria Gala, 1.5m high and steep-to,

lies about 1 mile NW of Maggona Point. A 6.4m shoal lies

about 1.8 miles NW of Tria Gala, at the outer end of foul

ground; a rock, which always breaks, lies about 0.4 mile S of

Tria Gala. 

4.20 Beruwala Point (6°28'N., 79°58'E.), with a rocky

promontory at its N end, forms the W side of a small bay.

Yakada Gala, 2.4m high, about 0.5 mile W of the point, is the

outermost rocky islet off Beruwala Point. 

4.20 Prompt Rock, with a depth of 8.2m, and Madda Gala, with a

depth of 5.9m, lie about 3 miles and 2.7 miles, respectively,

WNW of Beruwala Point; both dangers are steep-to and soundings give no warning of approach to them. The above dangers

are the outermost of numerous dangers lying W and NW of

Beruwala Point. 

4.20 Welmaduwa Island, about 0.7 mile SSW of Beruwala Point,

is covered with tall coconut palms, and its highest part is a

rocky cliff, 14m high, on its seaward side. Vessels navigating

along the coast should give the island a berth of 4 miles. 

4.20 Barberyn Light is shown from a white tower on the summit

of Welmadura Island.

4.20 Good radar returns have been reported from Barberyn Light

and Beruwala Point at 15 and 17 miles, respectively. 

4.20 Anchorage.—It is not advisable to anchor off Beruwala

Point in depths less than 11m because of the off-lying dangers

and the swell that is usually experienced. 

Sri Lanka—West Coast—Beruwala Point to

Galle Harbor

4.21 Between the entrance of Bentota Ganga (6°26'N.,

79°59'E.) and Galle Harbor, about 29 miles SSE, vessels

should remain in depths over 37m, or about 6 miles from the

coast, although at this distance there are few landmarks from

which to fix position. The most prominent landmarks lying

near the coast are the monument on Galboda Kanda (6°24'N.,

80°01'E.) in the afternoon and Waal Islet (6°08'N., 80°06'E.).

However, it was reported that the coast between Beruwala

Point and Balapitiya Point, 13 miles SSE, gives good radar image up to 35 miles. 

4.21 If visible, Hiniduma Kanda (6°20'N., 80°18'E.) is conspicuous, and Hindelnattu (6°07'N., 80°24'E.), about 12.5 miles

ENE of Point de Galle, though its summit is poorly defined,

forms a valuable mark when E of Waal Islet. 

4.21 Yakinigeduwa (5°58'N., 80°23'E.), an islet which when

seen from the W appears as a tuft rising over the extreme point

of low land E of Galle, also forms a valuable mark and is described in paragraph 4.25. 

4.21 Godagala Point (6°25'N., 80°00'E.) is a dark-colored rocky

headland, about 9.1m high, which is not very conspicuous; a

rest house lying among some trees on the coast, about 0.5 mile

N, is fairly conspicuous. 

4.21 Handram Gala, a black bare rock, 2.4m high, lies about 0.5

mile WNW of the point. Deba Gala, a boulder with depths of

2.7m, lies about 0.5 mile WSW of Godagala Point, with other

dangers S and SE of it. 

4.21 Galboda Kanda, about 2 miles SSE of Godagala Point, is a

flat-topped hill, 47m high, with a temple and white monument

on its summit. It is conspicuous from seaward and visible 10

miles in clear weather. 

4.21 Kaikawalagala Point is a low rocky headland, about 2.5

miles SSE of Godagala Point. Dodampara Rocks, two small

rocks, 0.9m high, are part of a group of rocks and reefs lying

within 0.8 mile of Kaikawalagala Point.

4.21 Babungala Point (Sabungala Point), about 0.5 mile farther S,

is a reddish point, about 8m high. A ridge, with depths of 6.4 to

9.1m, extends from about 1 mile W of the point, S for about 2

miles, parallel to the coast, about 1.5 miles offshore. 

4.21 Arangala Point, about 0.8 mile SSE of Babungala Point, is

about 12m high and rocky. A small hill, 33m high, about 0.5

mile E of the point, is surmounted by a temple and monument;

it is obscured by trees from some directions. 

4.21 Duwemodera Hill, 53m high, about 1 mile E of Arangala

Point, is isolated and fairly conspicuous, with a ridge extending

E. Pelagas Kanda, about 1.8 miles farther E, is 71m high and

flat-topped with a single tree on its summit.

4.21 Ahungalla Point (6°19'N., 80°02'E.) is 43m high, cliffy, and
Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 101

Pub. 173

covered with coconut palms. Kola Islet, with a few palm trees

on it, lies close S of the point. A small rock, awash and steepto, lies 1.5 miles NW of the point. A ridge, with a least depth of

6.4m, lies about 1 mile offshore, and extends about 1 mile S of

the rock. 

4.21 Balapitiya Point, about 2.8 miles S of Ahungala Point, is a

low, flat, double point, covered with coconut trees; a large

boulder, 10.7m high, lies on the coast, nearly 1 mile N of the

point. Foul ground extends W and N of the point. Depths of 5.9

to 8.2m lie about 1 mile offshore for a distance of about 1.5

miles S of the point. 

4.22 Akurala Point (6°12'N., 80°03'E.) has been reported

to give good radar returns at 14 miles. About 0.5 mile N of the

point, the coastal belt of coconut trees is broken by a wide gap,

clearly visible from seaward; Delmar (Galgoda), a 37m hill

with a single tree on its summit, can be seen through the gap. 

4.22 Passi Rock, about 1 mile W of Akurala Point, is dark-colored

and consists of five heads; the sea always breaks over one of

the heads, which is about 0.6m high. The rock should be given

a wide berth, as the bottom is irregular for about 0.4 mile W of

it. 

4.22 Foul ground extends up to 1 mile offshore between Akurala

Point and Telwatta Point, about 3 miles SSE. Foul ground extends 0.8 mile offshore between Akurala Point and Patingala

Point, 2 miles NNW. The latter point consists of several large

rocks, and has the ruins of a temple on it. Debaha Rock, 1.2m

high, lies about 0.4 mile W of Telwatta Point. 

4.22 Hikkaduwa Point (6°08'N., 80°06'E.) is low, flat, and covered with coconut trees, among which a rest house is almost

hidden. Waal Islet, 9m high, is a large group of flat-topped

rocks lying on the outer edge of the foul ground extending

about 0.4 mile W from the point. The islet is fairly conspicuous

from seaward. 

4.22 Hikkaduwa Gala is a rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, on

a shoal about 1.3 miles S of Hikkaduwa Point 

4.22 Dodanduwa, about 2.3 miles SE of Hikkaduwa Point, is a

low point terminating in two islets; Manda Gala, 2m high, the

outer islet, continues seaward to form a rocky point and has a

clump of coconut trees near its shoreward end which serves to

identify it. 

4.22 The coast between Dodanduwa and Point de Galle, about 7.5

miles SE, is formed of a brown sandy beach with rocky projections at intervals, and backed by low hills rising to elevations of

45 to 70m about 0.5 mile inland. The coastline is thickly planted with coconut trees and the hillsides are densely wooded.

Within or on the edge of foul ground fronting this coast are

several rocks above-water, but none are particularly conspicuous. 

4.22 Goda Gala, a rocky patch with a depth of 8.2m, lies about 1.5

miles SW of Dodanduwa Point. 

4.22 Caution.—An 18.3m patch was reported (1944) to lie about

13.5 miles W of Dodanduwa Point. 

4.23 Bataina Gala (6°02'N., 80°10'E.), about 3 miles NW

of Point Galle, is a rocky bluff, 14m high, at the S entrance of

the Gin Ganga. Pedruana Gala, two rocks close together, lie

about 0.4 mile S of Bataina Gala; the inner rock is 1.8m high. 

4.23 Mada Gala (6°02'N., 80°09'E.), about 2 miles SW of Bataina Gala, has depths of less than 1.8m, is steep-to, and lies near

the W end of a bank with depths of less than 18.3m. 

4.23 Alu Gala, about 1.3 miles W of Point de Galle, is 0.9 high

and steep-to. Ala Gala, about 1.5 miles farther W, is a rock

with a depth of less than 1.8m, marked by breakers during both

monsoons, and should be given a berth of at least 0.3 mile. A

dangerous wreck lies on the E side of Ala Gala. 

4.23 A government hospital, a long two-story building, painted

light buff, with pillared verandahs, is conspicuous on the coast

about 1.3 miles NW of Point de Galle. The Public Works Department bungalow, painted white, lies about 0.7 mile farther

WNW on the top of Nindan Godella, a rocky projection, 5.5m

high. A road bridge crosses the entrance of a lake about midway between the two buildings. 

Galle Harbor (6°01'N., 80°13'E.)

World Port Index No. 49250

4.24 Galle Harbor is entered between Point de Galle and

Watering Point, about 1 mile ESE. Point de Galle is the S extremity of a peninsula projecting about 0.5 mile S from the adjoining coast, and forming the W side of the harbor. The town

of Galle is built on the S part of the peninsula and is surrounded by fortifications; it is joined to the mainland by a low flat

isthmus. There are coconut palms and other trees among the

houses, but the W side of the peninsula is clear and covered by

grass. 

4.24 The harbor is approached through Western Channel, Central

Channel, and Eastern Channel. Western Channel is unmarked

and used by local craft only. Dredging of the channel to the

harbor N of Gibbett Island to a depth of 9.7m was completed in

1984. 

4.24 A new yacht harbor has been completed (2011) to replace

the previous yacht facilities which had been damaged by a tsunami. 

4.24 Winds—Weather.—Winds from the W and NW predominate from April to November; winds from the E and NE predominate from December to March.

4.24 During the months of May and June, very disturbed conditions, sometimes lasting for 3 days, may be experienced in the

harbor, accompanied by swells up to 4.3m high. 

4.24 The climate in Galle is hot and humid in March and April

before the Southwest Monsoon breaks.

4.24 Tides—Currents.—Tides the tidal rise at Galle is 0.6m at

MHWS, and 0.4m at MHWN.

4.24 During the Southwest Monsoon, the current sets E along the

coast, and during the Northeast Monsoon in the opposite direction. 

4.24 Depths—Limitations.—Eastern Channel is entered between Unawatuna Point (6°00'N., 80°15'E.) and Alut Ground,

with a least charted depth of 11.7m about 0.3 mile SW of Watering Point. 

4.24 Central Channel has depths of 12.8 to 16.5m in its outer part,

and a depth of 11m in its narrowest part, about 0.4 mile E of

Point de Galle. The S part of this channel had been swept to a

depth of 9.1m; the swept depth decreases N of Gibbet Island to

6.1m. In 1980, pending further dredging, a channel draft limitation of 5.5m was in force. Further caution is necessary as it

has been reported (2005) that there are least depths of 12.2 to

14.5m in the outer part of the channel and least depths of 2.6 to
102 Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 

Pub. 173

9.6m in the inner part of the channel. 

4.24 Western Channel has been reported (2005) to have least

depths of 2.6 to 8.1m. 

4.24 The charted 9.8m and 8.9m maintained areas N and W of

Gibbet Island no longer exist. Depths of 3.7 to 8.6m may exist

in these formerly maintained areas. 

4.24 The piers on the NE side of Galle each have a depth of 1.8m

for about 30m from the outer end. An artificial harbor enclosed

by two breakwaters is situated N of Gibbet Island (6°02'N.,

80°14'E.); in 1984 it was dredged to a depth of 8.8m. Closenburg Pier, which fronts the N side of Gibbet Island, is 427m

long and can accommodate vessels with a draft of 7.9m. The N

section of this harbor is a fishing port providing a pier where

vessels with drafts to 3m can berth. A rocky spit, with depths

from 2.5m to 5m, extends 183m SW from the root of the breakwater which extends WNW from Gibbet Island; about 0.2 mile

W of the head of this breakwater there are depths of 6.2m.

4.24 Galu Gala, a bank with a least depth of 33m and frequented

by fishermen, lies about 3 miles SW of Point de Galle in the

approach to Galle Harbor. 

4.24 Kadda Rocks, three shoal patches, lie along the W side of the

central channel, between 0.6 and 0.8 mile SSE of Point de

Galle. Outer Kadda Rock has a least depth of 3.7m. Middle

Kadda Rock has a least depth of 4.4m. Inner Kadda Rock, with

a stranded wreck close E of it, has a least depth of 2.4m. During the Southwest Monsoon, the sea breaks heavily over the

entire length of these rocks, but during the Northeast Monsoon

the water over them is seldom disturbed. 

4.24 Sealark Rock, with a depth of 6.7m, lies on the W side of the

channel, about 0.5 mile SSE of Point de Galle Light. It is

marked on its S side by a black and white checkered buoy. 

4.24 Secundra Rock, with a least depth of 9.1m, lies on the E side

of the channel, about 0.8 mile SSE of Point de Galle Light. A

red conical buoy is moored close SW of it.

4.24 Polkote Gala, a 0.9m patch on which the sea breaks during

the Southwest Monsoon, lies about 0.5 mile SE of Point de

Galle Light; a black and white checkered buoy is moored SE of

the rock. 

4.24 Belikatu Wawa, a 3.8m patch, lies on the W side of Central

Channel, about 0.2 mile E of Point de Galle Light; it is marked

NE by a black and white checkered buoy.

4.24 Matte Mada, a shoal with three heads and a least depth of

2.6m, lies on the E side of the channel, about 0.1 mile E of Belikatu Wawa. It is marked W by a buoy; the sea breaks over it

during the Southwest Monsoon. 

4.24 Welihukka, a rock patch with a least depth of 0.9m, lies

about 183m E of the fortifications on the E side of the town

abreast Sailor’s Bastion. 

4.24 Katta Gala has a least depth of 2.4m over a head about 0.5

mile ENE of Point de Galle Light. Outer Katta, an 6.1m patch,

lies about 183m SSW of this head. 

4.24 Gal Pare, consisting of several heads with a least depth of

7.8m, lies on the SW side of Eastern Channel, about 0.5 mile

WSW of Watering Point. 

4.24 Bloomfield Rock, with a least depth of 7.8m, lies close NW

of Gal Pare, on the SW side of Eastern Channel and also on the

E side of Central Channel. It is marked on its NW side by a

buoy. 

4.24 Imbu Ranne Gala, consisting of several heads, has a least

depth of 6.4m about 0.3 mile WNW of Watering Point. 

4.24 Diya Mudawa, a 4.9m shoal, on which the sea breaks during

the Southwest Monsoon, lies on the NE side of the channel,

about 0.2 mile NW of Imbu Ranne Gala. 

4.24 Aspect.—Inland, the country is generally flat, but becomes

more hilly N. Among these hills is Kurundu Kanda, 90m high

and flat-topped, about 3.5 miles NNE of Point de Galle and

Hiniduma Kanda (Haycock), about 16 miles farther NNE. On

clear mornings in the early months of the year.

4.24 Adam’s Peak, previously described in paragraph 4.1, may be

seen a little to the E of Hiniduma Kanda, previously described

in paragraph 4.2, appearing as a sharp regular cone flanked by

lesser peaks appearing as though on the shoulders of its slopes. 

4.24 Approaching Galle, Point de Galle Light and Edwards Pillar

form good landmarks. Point de Galle Light (6°01'N.,

80°13'E.) is shown from a round tower on Utrecht Bastion, at

the SE extremity of the peninsula. Galle Tower (Edwards Pillar), about 1.5 miles farther E, is a black and white tower, 15m

high, lying on the summit of Rumassala Kanda, a large wooded

hill, 75m high, sloping down to the sea to form the E side of

Galle Harbor. A dangerous wreck lies 2.5 miles W of Point de

Galle Light on the E side of Ala Gala. 

4.24 The following landmarks are on the W side of the harbor

within the town of Galle:

1. The mosque, a large white two-story building with

two small domes and some low minarets at the SE corner of

the peninsula.

2. All Saint’s Church, with a square tower, surmounted

by a red four-sided pointed roof and a large weather vane in

the middle of the town.

3. The clock tower, a square stone structure with an elevation of 43m

4.24 The Roman Catholic Chapel, about 0.8 mile WNW of Point

de Galle, is a large conspicuous building, painted white with

two towers on its front facing the sea and a dome behind. The

chapel lies on a hill and has an elevation of 41m. 

4.24 To the N of the town are extensive low wooded hills. The

only ones likely to be recognized are Residency Hill (6°02'N.,

80°13'E.), 62m high, and Hirimbure Kanda, 76m high, about 2

miles farther N. 

4.24 Good radar returns have been reported from Point de Galle

and Point de Galle Light, at 19 and 18 miles, respectively. 

4.24 Central Channel and Eastern Channel are buoyed. When vessels are leaving the harbor at night, certain buoys are lighted as

required by the port authorities.

4.24 A red and white checkered buoy, surmounted by a staff and

cage, is moored nearly 1 mile S of Point de Galle Light, and

marks the W side of the entrance to Central Channel. Point de

Galle Light is shown on Utrecht Bastion at the SE extremity of

the peninsula. 

4.24 If this buoy is not in position a signal to that effect is made

from the signal station. Under no circumstances should implicit reliance be placed on the buoys being in their charted positions. 

4.24 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels unless exempted by the authority of the Master Attendant, Colombo,

represented at Galle by the Assistant Master Attendant, who is

in charge of the port and is also pilot at Galle. The latter is provided with a pilot launch painted white with “Galle Pilot”

painted in black letters on the bow, and a mooring boat. The pilot can be contacted by VHF, but is not available at night. 
Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 103

Pub. 173

4.24 The usual signal for a pilot should be displayed by vessels

approaching the port; vessels should await the arrival of the pilot close to the buoy at the W entrance of Central Channel. A

pilot ladder on the lee side, and two manropes of at least 3-inch

rope with the ends free, are required to be provided. Vessels are

not taken into the harbor at night, but should anchor at the outer

anchorage until daylight. Vessels can be taken out of the harbor

at night in good weather.

4.24 The pilot boards 1 mile S of Point de Galle Light. 

4.24 Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA 24 hours in

advance. The message should be passed through Colombo Port

Radio and the local agents.

4.24 Vessels without qualified medical officers may not have

communication with the shore, nor may any person, except the

pilot, board them until permission is obtained from the health

authorities; in no circumstances may cases of infectious disease be landed without the consent of the Government Health

Officer. 

4.24 The regulations governing vessels having plague, cholera, or

yellow fever on board, and the signals required for all vessels

arriving off the port, are the same as those for Colombo. 

4.24 Anchorage.—During the Southwest Monsoon, the best

berth, in 28m, sand, lies with Pointe de Galle Light bearing

012°, and Ereminia Galla Point, a large black rock, 6.1m high,

with a pointed top, about 1 mile ESE of Unawatuna Point,

bearing 094°. 

4.24 During the Northeast Monsoon, vessels usually anchor in the

outer anchorages, in a depth of 18.3m, with Point de Galle

Light bearing 335°, and with Kota Gala, a black rock close SE

of Unawatuna Point, in line bearing 101° with Ereminia Gala

Point. 

4.24 During the Northeast Monsoon, in the inner anchorages

there are eight anchorage berths, one of which will accommodate a vessel up to 121.9m in length and 6.4m draft. 

4.24 During the Southwest Monsoon, there are six anchorage

berths, one of which will accommodate a vessel 145m in

length and 7.6m draft. 

4.24 In 1977, there were two inner anchor berths for use by vessels with a draft between 7.9 and 7m in the Northeast Monsoon, and between 7.6 and 6.4m in the Southwest Monsoon.

The bottom at the anchorage is sand and mud, good holding

ground.

4.24 Vessels moor head and stern, using both power anchors, with

their bows S and port anchors to the E. The stern moorings are

laid by the pilot, some being laid as required and others kept

ready with ends secured to small white conical buoys. Vessels

are required to be ready to veer chain when required to do so

by the port authorities, and must have their main engines ready

to use at short notice. 

4.24 There is also good anchorage during the Northeast Monsoon

for vessels up to 152.4m in length and 9.1m draft, with Watering Point bearing 162°, distant 0.2 mile.

4.24 Vessels should anchor well clear of Central Channel and

Eastern Channel and their approaches. 

4.24 Directions.—Vessels approaching Galle Harbor from the

NW should keep Point de Galle Light bearing less than 078°,

which will lead clear of the dangers W of the point. Vessels approaching from seaward should keep the above light bearing

012°, which leads to the outer anchorage. 

4.24 Vessels entering Central Channel should pass about 0.2 mile

E of the outermost buoy and follow the recommended track indicated on the chart. When Point de Galle Light is abeam,

course may be shaped as required, keeping E of Capera Buoy

and the similar buoy 183m N of it, and W of the Outer and Inner Katta Buoys.

4.24 Before the anchorage is reached speed should be reduced to

the minimum consistent with retaining command of the vessel.

4.24 A vessel entering by Eastern Channel should take care to

avoid the dangers and foul ground extending from Unawatuna

Point to Goda Gala (Bellows Reef), a rocky patch, with a depth

of 1.8m, over which the sea always breaks, about 0.8 mile SE.

Then bring the N end of Kachcheri, a conspicuous buff-colored

building about 0.2 mile N of Utrecht Bastion, in line with the

Roman Catholic Chapel bearing 322°. Steer on this range until

Central Channel is reached, then follow the directions for that

channel.

Sri Lanka—West Coast—Galle Harbor to Weligama Bay

4.25 The coast between Unawatuna Point (6°00'N.,

80°15'E.) and Eriminia Gala Point, about 1 mile ESE, recedes

to form a small sandy bay. A large white house is conspicuous

about 0.5 mile ENE of Unawatuna Point. 

4.25 Between Ereminia Gala Point and Yakinigeduwa (Katukunrund Islet), about 7.5 miles ESE, the coast consists of an irregular sandy beach backed by a thick belt of coconut trees through

which runs the railroad between Galle and Matara (5°56'N.,

80°33'E.). The shore is fronted by reefs and foul ground, on

Photo Courtesy of Sri Lanka Maritime Achaeological Unit

Point de Galle Light
104 Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 

Pub. 173

which the sea always breaks, extending up to 0.4 mile offshore.

The depths are irregular outside the breakers, but there are apparently no off-lying dangers except for a 9.1m patch, about 3

miles WNW of Yakinigeduwa. 

4.25 The railway station at Talpe lies about 0.8 mile E of Ereminia Gala Point. Malagoda Kanda, a conical hill, 93m high, lies

about 1.3 miles N of Talpe; a conspicuous tree is on its summit,

and the summit of a shoulder extending SW is also prominent. 

4.25 Kotavanni, a solitary black rock, 15m high, about 3.5 miles

ESE of Talpe and fairly prominent, helps to identify the outlet

of the Koggala Lake, about 0.4 mile farther E. Debaha Rock,

0.9m high, lies about 0.8 mile SE of the lake outlet. 

4.25 About 2 miles N of Koggala Lake, the land begins to rise,

sloping gradually to Hindelunattu, 410m high, about 8 miles

NNE of the lake. This mountain forms a good landmark all

around the S and SW coasts; it is conspicuous with its large

rounded summit and a small pointed shoulder on its NE flank. 

4.25 Yakinigeduwa (Katukurundu) (5°58'N., 80°23'E.), an islet,

with steep, cliffy sides, is joined to the mainland by a causeway. Trees on the islet are 39m high, with tufted tops. A rocky

reef, with some above-water heads, extends about 0.2 mile SE

from the islet. A prominent reddish cliff, 21 to 30m high,

projects from the coast about 0.6 mile W of the islet. 

4.25 The coast between Yakinigeduwa and Rassamunai Point,

about 2.5 miles E, consists of a sandy beach backed by coconut

palms, until within 0.5 mile of Rassamunai Point where the

land rises to terminate in red cliffs which form a prominent

mark. 

Weligama Bay (5°57'N., 80°26'E.)

World Port Index No. 49260

4.26 Weligama Bay, entered between Rassamunai Point

and Mirissa Point, about 1.5 miles ESE, is encumbered with

numerous islets and dangers; a SW swell may break on any

shoal patch with a depth of 5.5m or less. 

4.26 Rassamunai Point consists of red cliffs extending about 0.5

mile W and 0.3 mile N of it. Good radar returns have been reported from the point at 16 miles. The town of Weligama,

somewhat scattered, lies on the NW side of the bay. 

4.26 Mirissa Point forms the W end of a fairly high peninsula

partly covered with coconut palms. 

4.26 The W and N shores of the bay to the entrance of Polatu

Ganga is a sandy beach backed by coconut palms. The land at

the head of the bay is very low and not visible from the bay, but

hilly country about 3 miles inland starts to rise to Hindelunattu,

about 6 miles farther NNW, and is visible over the coconut

palms. Gongola, 1,386m high, about 30 miles NNE of the bay,

is visible in clear weather above the intervening hills. 

4.26 On the E shore of the bay, a sandy bight lies between Mirissa

Point and Wera Point, 27m high and cliffy, about 0.8 mile NE.

The village of Mirissa lies at the head of this bight. The shore

between Wera Point and the S entrance of Polatu Ganga is

mainly composed of moderately high, red cliffs. 

4.26 Yala Rock, with a least depth of 2.7m and steep-to, lies about

0.5 mile SW of Rassamunai Point. 

4.26 Pares Shoal, with a depth of 4.5m, lies about 0.5 mile ESE of

Rassamunai Point. The sea always breaks on the reef fringing

the point. 

4.26 Sealark Rock, with a depth of 8.7m, lies about 0.2 mile E of

Pares Shoal, and Kada Rock, with a depth of 4.6m, lies about

0.2 mile farther SE, near the middle of the entrance to the bay. 

4.26 Karamas Rock, with a depth of 6.9m, lies about 0.4 mile N

of Kada Rock. 

4.26 On the E side of the entrance, between Mirissa Point and Kola Point, about 0.7 mile ESE, the sea always breaks on the foul

ground extending up to 0.2 mile offshore. Palapana Gala, shoal

rocky ground with a least depth of 6.9m, lies about 0.4 mile S

of Mirissa Point. 

4.26 Diyumba Alut Rock, with a depth of 5m and on which the

sea occasionally breaks, lies about 0.3 mile W of Mirissa Point,

and about 0.4 mile E of Kada Rock. 

4.26 Diyumba Rocks, with a least depth of 2.3m, lie about 0.5

mile N of Mirissa Point. 

4.26 Prompt Shoal, with a depth of 5m, lies near the middle of the

bay, about 1 mile NNW of Mirissa Point. Puhamodal Rock,

with a least depth of 2.7m, lies about 0.2 mile farther NNW. 

4.26 Gan Island, 12.5m high, about 0.4 mile W of Parei Duwa, is

not easily distinguished from the shore W because of the coconut palms on it. 

4.26 Ruwana Rock, 1.8m high, lies about 0.6 mile NE off Rassamunai Point; a rocky head, awash, lies close E.

4.26 Parei Duwa (Pigeon Island), about 1.3 miles NE of Rassamunai Point and about 0.2 mile off the head of the bay, is 16.1m

high, rocky and covered with scrub; there are no palm trees on

it.

4.26 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 9.1 to 11m, sand

and rock, SE of Ruwana Rock, or in similar depths in the SE

part of the bay, off the village of Mirissa. A good berth off the

village of Mirissa is with the red cliff on Kada Point, the S entrance point of Polatu Ganga, bearing 039°, and Ruwana Rock

bearing 294°. Although no reliable information has been obtained it is probable that the anchorage SE of Ruwana Rock

can be used during the Southwest Monsoon. 

4.26 Directions.—Vessels approaching from the W should pass

about 0.8 mile S of Rassamunai Point to avoid Yala Rock. Vessels from the E should pass S of Prinz Heinrich Patch, which

lies about 1.5 miles SE of Mirissa Point. Proceed into Weligama Bay with Parei Duwa (Pigeon Island) in line bearing 352°,

with a gap in the hills inland. This course leads between Kada

Rock and Diyumba Alut Rock. Course may be altered ENE for

the anchorage off Mirissa when clear of Diyumba Alut Rock.

4.26 If proceeding to the anchorage SE of Ruwana Rock, enter on

the same range and pass E and N of Karamas Rock. 

Weligama Bay to Dondra Head

4.27 The coast between Mirissa Point and Galgodiya (Chula Lanka), about 5 miles E, is densely wooded with coconut

palms and appears moderately high. Several dagobas (shrines)

on this coast show up well when light conditions are favorable.

4.27 The bottom is rocky and uneven in depths of less 9.1m off

this stretch of coast. Vessels should ordinarily keep in depths

over 37m, and pass about 1.5 miles S of Veragalle Point. 

4.27 Tides—Currents.—Currents are irregular within 2 miles of

this coast and W of Dondra Head. There is often an indraft into

Matara Bay. 

4.27 Prinz Heinrich Patch, with a least depth of 7.3m, lies about

1.5 miles SE of Mirissa Point. Galgodiyana in line bearing
Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 105

Pub. 173

074° with Brown’s Hill, 1.8 miles ENE, leads S of the patch.

Mirissa Point in line bearing 347° with Hindelunattu, leads W

of Prinz Heinrich Patch. 

4.27 A rocky ledge, 3m high at its highest point, extends about

183m offshore from Veragalle Point (5°56'N., 80°27'E.), about

0.5 mile E of Kola Point. 

4.27 Talarambee Point, about 0.4 mile farther E, is rocky and elevated, with a dagoba, 36.5m high, showing above the tree tops

close behind it. Kalcotta Rocks, three heads, 0.3 to 0.6m high,

lie about 0.2 mile S of Talarambee Point.

4.27 Tanana Rocks, 0.9 to 1.5m high, about 1 mile farther E, lie

about 0.2 mile S of Atalahua Point, a low point. 

4.27 Moolkalle Point, about 1 mile E of Atalahua Point, is rocky

and has a dagoba on it; it contrasts with its surroundings as it is

covered with low scrubs instead of coconut palms. 

4.28 Galgodiyana (Chula Lanka) (5°56'N., 80°32'E.), an

islet 22m high and covered with coconut palms, is connected to

the coast by a causeway in bad repair. Several rocks, two of

which are about 2m high, lie about 0.3 mile S of the islet. 

4.28 Matara Bay, formed by the curving coastline between Galgodiyana and Dondra Head, about 3.3 miles E, is entirely open

S and mostly foul. 

4.28 Madumora Reef, about 0.8 mile SE of Galgodiyana, has

depths of less than 1.8m over its N edge, and a least depth of

2.7m near its S edge. Sleet Rock, about 1.5 miles farther ESE,

has a depth of 10m and is the outermost danger in the E part of

the bay.

4.28 Matara, on the NW side of the bay, is a town of considerable

size and importance, ranking next to Galle in the Southern

Provinces. The town is not easily seen from seaward, but the

clock tower shows up well in favorable light between the bearings of 347° and 302°. 

4.28 An islet, 12.5m high, just E of the clock tower, is connected

to the shore by a causeway on which the sea generally breaks.

Some conspicuous red cliffs, the highest 37m high, lie about 1

mile farther E. Brown’s Hill, 52m high and identified by a red

triangular patch on its SW slope, rises behind the red cliffs.

Sri Lanka—South Coast—Dondra Head to Hambantota Point

4.29 Dondra Head (5°55'N., 80°36'E.), the S extremity of

Sri Lanka, is low with a grove of tall coconut trees at its W extremity. The headland appears as an islet, although it is connected to the mainland. Dondra Head Light is shown from a

white octagonal tower, 49m high, near the E point of Dondra

Head. A white pyramidal beacon, with an elevation of 13.7m,

lies about 0.5 mile NE of the light.

4.29 Dondra Head has been reported to give good radar responses

at 19 miles. 

4.29 An IMO-adopted traffic scheme has been established off

Dondra Head. 

4.29 The coast between Dondra Head and Hambantota Point,

about 34 miles ENE, is generally low and has sandy and rocky

stretches; there are no dangers outside a distance of 1.3 miles

offshore. The W part, between Dondra Head and Nilewelli

Point, about 8 miles ENE, has a somewhat elevated appearance

due to the low-lying parts being covered with coconut palms.

From Nilewelli Point to Tangalla Point, about 6 miles NE, the

coast becomes generally rocky, fairly high, and indented by

bays. To the E of the latter point, it again becomes low, sandy,

and backed by coconut palms as far as Kalametiya Point, nearly 9 miles ENE. Then to Hambantota Point, about 12 miles

ENE, it is low, barren, and sandy, and is interrupted by only a

few cliffy points. 

4.29 The coast between Dondra Head and Gandura Point, a rocky

point about 1.8 miles ENE, consists of rocky cliffs which are

about 30m high in one part. Gandura Bay lies between the latter point and Kottagoda Point (5°57'N., 80°38'E.), a rocky

point with boulders. 

4.29 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage, in 18.3m, sand in

the W part of Gandura Bay, with Gandura Point bearing 248°,

about 0.6 mile. The anchorage is not protected from the swell. 

4.29 Etawa Reef, with a least depth of 3.6m, lies between 0.5 and

1 mile E of Kottagoda Point. Bambri Rocks, 1.2m high, lies

about 0.5 mile farther NE. 

4.30 Nilewelli Point (5°57'N., 80°43'E.) is rocky and

steep-to, with a clump of coconut trees, 24m high, on it. The

point is connected to the mainland by a narrow strip of sand

over which the surf washes in a moderate swell; when seen

from the E or W, it appears as an islet. A white dagoba lies 1

mile N of the point. 

4.30 Walakanda (Waulugala), a hill with a bare summit, 169m

high, about 3.3 miles NNW of Nilewelli Point, forms a good

mark for vessels coasting, but shows up less to vessels farther

offshore, because of the other hills behind it. 

4.30 Nilewelli Bay lies between Nilewelli Point and the S extremity of a rocky peninsula, about 1 mile NE. Two detached

above-water rocks lie off the S extremity of the peninsula. 

4.30 Anchorage can be obtained in the bay, in about 16m, sand,

about 0.4 mile NE of Nilewelli Point. 

4.30 Mahawelli Bay, about 2.5 miles NE of Nilewelli Point, lies

immediately N of Mahawelli Point. The latter point is the E extremity of a steep and rocky peninsula, moderately high, and

nearly bare of trees. Mahawelli Rock, awash, lies about 0.2

mile E of the point. Middle Rock, nearly awash and always

breaking, lies about 0.5 mile farther ENE. Unaeria Rocks, consisting of four distinct heads, 0.3 to 1.8m high, lie close E of

Middle Rock. 

4.30 Anchorage, with local knowledge, can be taken, in about

11m, sand, close N of Mahawelli Rock. The approach to the

anchorage is made between Mahawelli and Middle Rocks. 

4.30 Tangalle Bay (Tangalla Bay) lies between Tangalle Point

(6°01'N., 80°48'E.) and Rekawa Point, 15m high, rocky and

barren, about 4 miles ENE. The town of Tangalle (Tangalla),

with an old conspicuous white fort, lies on Tangalle Point.

Rocky reef, just below-water, fronts most of the shore of the

bay.

4.30 Two radio masts, marked by red obstruction lights, are situated about 8 miles NNW of Tangalle. 

4.30 Good radar returns have been reported from Tangalle Point

at 9 miles. 

4.30 Tangalle Rock, awash and steep-to on its S and E sides, lies

about 1 mile ESE of Tangalle Point. Ma Rock, with a depth of

4.6m, and Kadul Rock, with a depth of 3.2m, lie about 0.4 mile

NE and 0.2 mile NNW, respectively. 

4.30 To enter Tangalle Bay, pass 0.5 mile E of Tangalle Rock,

then steer about 021° until the coconut trees on the S bank of
106 Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 

Pub. 173

Kirama Oya (Kunkalle Ganga) are in line, bearing 265°, with

the small white dagoba, about 0.5 mile NW of the fort. Steer on

this range and anchor, in 9.1 to 11m, with Tangalle Rock bearing between 167° and 149° 

4.31 Kahandawa Rocks (6°03'N., 80°54'E.), 0.6m high,

lies about 0.8 mile S of Kahandawa Point. A rocky head, with a

depth of 8.7m, lies about 0.3 mile S of the rocks.

4.31 Kalametiya Point (6°04'N., 80°56'E.), moderately high and

rocky, terminates in a large boulder, from which a chain of

rocky islets extends SE to Watta Rock, a barren islet, 7m high

and prominent due to the light color of its upper part. Rocky

patches, with depths of 7.3 to 9.1m, lie within 0.5 mile SW, S,

and E of Watta Rock. 

4.31 Kalametiya Rock, of which a small pinnacle just shows, lies

about 0.4 mile E of Kalametiya Point. 

4.31 Anchorage, with local knowledge, can be obtained, in about

11m, sand and rock, from 0.3 to 0.5 mile ENE of Watta Rock. 

4.31 Ulandhe Point, about 2.8 miles ENE of Kalametiya Point, is

steep with red cliffs, and a summit, 18m high, behind it. 

4.31 Swell Rock, with a depth of 6.9m and upon which the sea

breaks in a moderate swell, lies 1 mile SW of Ulandhe Point. 

4.31 Rattan Point is similar to and about 0.8 mile NE of Ulandhe

Point, from which it is separated by two sandy bights. Rocks

extend nearly 0.4 mile offshore between the points. 

4.31 Rattan Point has been reported to give good radar responses

at 18 miles. 

4.31 The mouth of the Walawe Ganga, about 1.8 miles E of Rattan Point, is usually a small opening in the sandy beach. 

4.31 Godawaye Point (6°06'N., 80°03'E.), 15m high and rocky,

has a white dagoba within the point and a reef awash close E. 

4.31 Ibha Rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies about 0.8 mile

SSE of Godawaye Point; it is steep-to and the sea does not always break on it. 

4.31 Nehindi Rock, awash and steep-to, lies about 2 miles ESE of

Godawaye Point and 1 mile offshore. 

4.31 The coast between Godawaye Point and Hambantota Point,

about 5 miles ENE, is a continuous stretch of sand on which a

heavy surf breaks.

4.32 Hambantota (6°07'N., 81°08'E.) (World Port Index

No. 49270), a town and port, lies on the W side of the bay

formed between Hambantota Point and Pitawatan Point, about

1.3 miles NE. There is seldom much protection from swell in

this bay as even with winds the swell sets onto the coast. 

4.32 Hambantota Point is the SE extremity of a rocky promontory

with red sandy soil. A bare rocky ledge extends about 137m SE

of the point; the highest part of the ledge, at its outer end, is 4m

high. A large white martello tower and some houses lie on the

promontory; a disused light stands on its summit, about 0.2

mile W of Hambantota Point. 

4.32 Good radar returns have been reported from Hambantota

Point at 19 miles. 

4.32 Hambantota Light was formerly shown from a square white

tower on the summit of the promontory, about 0.2 mile W of

Hambantota Point. Since 1977, the light has been extinguished. 

4.32 Anchorage.—The best berth in the bay, in 10m, lies 0.4 mile

NE of Hambantota Point. 

4.33 Magampura Port (6°07'N., 81°06'E.) is being built

to provide a second harbor in Sri Lanka able to handle international commerce. Its strategic location puts it close to international shipping lanes. A unique feature of this port is that it was

built inland and then was connected to the Indian Ocean.

4.33 The entrance channel has a width of 210m and is dredged to

17m in depth. Phase 1 of the project, which should be complete

in April 2011, has a General Cargo Quay, 600m in length; a

Service Quay, 105m in length; and an Oil Quay, 610m in

length. There is a turning basin with a 600m turning circle and

a depth of 17m. The port can handle vessels up to 100,000 dwt.

4.33 Phase 2, which is now underway (2011), will allow for the

simultaneous handling of nine vessels by adding a considerable

amount of quayage. There is also plans for a Phase 3, which

would ultimately allow for the handling of 33 vessels simultaneously and to dredge the entrance channel to a depth of 21m. 

Sri Lanka—South Coast—Hambantota to Butawa Point

4.34 The coast between Hambantota and Illukatiya Point,

42 miles ENE, is sandy and barren, with points from 15 to 50m

Magampura Port General Cargo Quay

Magampura Port—Proposed Future Development
Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 107

Pub. 173

high. The land between and behind the points is low, with hills

here and there which usually rise abruptly. In clear weather the

mountain district of Sri Lanka will be seen in the background.

The usual and recommended route for vessels proceeding

along this coast is outside of Great Basses Reef (6°11'N.,

81°29'E.) and Little Basses Reef to the NE, passing about 2

miles SE of the lighthouses marking the reefs upon these ridges. Care should be taken in passing Little Basses Reef, described in paragraph 4.37, where depths of less than 18.3m

extend to about 3 miles ENE of the lighthouse at the E end of

this reef. 

4.34 Katagarama Peak (6°23'N., 81°20'E.), 425m high, is the

summit of a range; it is sharp-topped when viewed from SW,

but flat-topped from E or SE. Good radar returns have been reported from the peak at 37 miles. 

4.34 Rocky Knob, 98m high, about 7 miles SE of Katagarama

Peak, is a remarkable pillar of rock protruding from a rocky

ridge.

4.34 Akasachetiya, 162m high, about 4 miles NE of Rocky Knob,

is a very prominent mass of bare rock. 

4.34 Open anchorage, over a bottom of sand and rock, can be obtained off almost any part of this stretch of coast, but none of

the bights afford shelter during either monsoon. During the

Southwest Monsoon, however, if the wind is well to W, the sea

is less disturbed off the E part of the coast. Close to the beach,

there are several rocky patches, below and above-water, over

which the sea breaks heavily. 

4.35 Patirajja Point (6°10'N., 81°14'E.), about 6.3 miles

ENE of Hambantota, is reddish in color and terminates in a

rocky ledge, 0.6m high. A bare sandhill lies about 0.3 mile W

of the point. 

4.35 Urani Point, about 3.3 miles farther ENE, may be identified

by a small grove of coconut palms lying behind it; such palms

are rare in this area. The village of Bundala is near this grove.

4.35 Dorava Point (6°12'N., 81°19'E.), 18m high, is bare, rocky,

and easily identified. 

4.35 Lansiya Rock, 6.4m high, lies 0.5 mile S of Dorava Point;

foul ground extends 1 mile W of the rock. 

4.35 Dorava Rock, with a least depth of 5.5m, lies about 0.8 mile

SE of Dorava Point, and is the outermost off the point. 

4.35 Between Dorava Point and Butawa Point, about 11.5 miles

NE, sand hills and rocky formations of moderate height lie

close behind the coast. 

4.35 Kirindi Point, a rocky formation, lies about 1.3 miles NE of

Dorava Point. Kirindi Knob, a group of boulders, 34m high,

lies about 0.3 mile W of the point. From the W, it may be seen

over the land inside Dorava Point, appearing as a conical summit. 

4.35 A rocky ledge, with Korha Rock, 0.6m high, at its extremity,

extends about 0.3 mile ESE of Kirindi Point. 

4.35 The village of Kirindi lies close to the beach N of the point.

4.35 Anchorage.—Open anchorage can be obtained, in about

15.8m, S of Kirindi Point, rather than E of the point where

there appears to be much rock. Vessels approaching the anchorage should keep Kataragama Peak well open E of Kirindi

Knob, bearing about 359°, which leads just E of Dorava Rock.

Mutugala Point lies about 2 miles ENE of Palatupana Point,

and is somewhat similar to it. The point is fronted by patches of

rocky reef, and a rock, 1.8m high, lies about 91m SE of it.

Shoal patches, with a depth of 6.9m over the outer one, extend

about 0.5 mile S of the point. 

4.36 Palatupana Point (6°14'N., 81°22'E.) is the extremity of a sandy elevation, about 2.5 miles NE of Kirindi Point.

4.36 A bushy summit, 59m high, and another, 39m high, lie about

1.3 miles NW, and 0.8 mile NNW, respectively, of Mutugala

Point. The latter summit is used as a range mark for the passage inside Little Basses Ridge. 

4.36 Amaduwa Point, about 2.5 miles NE of Mutugala Point, is

low and rocky at its extremity. A rocky reef, its outer part

awash, midway between the points, extends about 0.3 mile offshore. A rock, 5m high, lies about 0.1 mile S of Amaduwa

Point. 

4.36 The sandy coast between Amaduwa Point and Butawa Point,

about 3.8 miles NE, forms several bights with rocks lying from

0.1 to 0.2 mile offshore. Two of these rocks, close together, the

higher one 4.6m high, lie about 0.2 mile offshore. Shoal water,

the outer part with a least depth of 5m, extends about 0.5 mile

from the coast, about 1.5 miles NE of Amaduwa Point. 

4.36 Great Basses Ridge, a steep-to and narrow rocky ridge, with

depths of less than 18.3m, extends 13.8 miles ENE from a position about 3 miles S of Urani Point (6°11'N., 81°17'E.). 

4.36 Great Basses Reef (6°11'N., 81°29'E.) lies on the ridge,

about 2 miles from its E end; parts of the reef, which is about

0.2 mile long, are above-water. 

4.36 Great Basses Reef Light is shown from the NE and highest

part of Great Basses Reef, from a white granite tower, 38m

high, with a conical top; the tower is surrounded by two galleries, one above the base and the other close under the lantern.

Good radar returns have been reported from the light structure

at 17 miles. 

4.36 No depth of less than 12.8m has been found on Great Basses

Ridge, except within 2 miles of the lighthouse, and vessels

should not approach within that distance of the light in either

an ENE or WSW direction. 

Photo Courtesy of Udena Atygalle, The Sunday Times (Sri Lanka)

Great Basses Reef Light
108 Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 

Pub. 173

4.36 Ship Rock, about 5.5 miles NE of Great Basses Light, has a

depth of 9.1m and lies in the middle of a narrow, rocky shoal. 

Sri Lanka—South Coast—Butawa Point to Illukatiya Point

4.37 Butawa Point (6°19'N., 81°29'E.) is rounded and

moderately high. Butawa Rock, 1.8m high and steep-to on its

SW and SE sides, lies about 0.2 mile SE of Butawa Point.

4.37 Chiddle Rock, with a depth of 9.6m and steep-to, lies about

0.4 mile SE of Butawa Rock. 

4.37 Shoal and uneven depths extend up to 0.8 mile offshore between Butawa Point and Patanagala Point, about 2 miles NE.

The outermost danger is a rock, with a least depth of 6.9m,

about 0.8 mile SSE of Patanagala Point. 

4.37 Patanagala Point is the extremity of a bare rocky hill, 42m

high, and somewhat resembling a haycock. Elephant Rock,

0.6m high, lies about 0.4 mile ESE of the point. 

4.37 Transit Hill, a bare, rocky elevation, with two peaks of nearly

equal elevation and joined by a ridge slightly lower, lies about

0.4 mile WNW of Patangala Point. The W peak is 50m high. 

4.37 A sand hill, 33m high, lies about 4 miles NE of Patanagala

Point, terminating in two rocky points about 0.8 mile apart; the

NE point is Pillanawa Point. This sandhill, backed by low land,

appears as an island from a distance. Two rocky heads extend

about 0.3 mile S of the SW rocky head, and shoal water extends about 0.5 mile farther offshore. The coast for about 2

miles SW of Pillanawa Point should not be approached within

0.8 mile. 

4.37 The coast, from about 1 mile NE of Pillanawa Point to Uda

Point, about 3.3 miles farther NE, is closely backed by sand

hills of moderate height, partly covered by scrub.

4.37 Pahala Point, about 3.3 miles NE of Uda Point, is the extremity of a sand hill slope; rocky ledges and sunken reefs extend about 0.2 mile offshore for about 1 mile on either side of

the point.

4.37 Lewin Rock, with a least depth of 5.5m, lies about 1 mile

offshore, about 3 miles ENE of Pahala Point. 

4.37 Daedalus Rock, about 0.8 mile SSE of Lewin Rock, has a

least depth of 3.2m, and appears to be a boulder resting on a

narrow ledge, with depths of 5.5 to 9.1m extending about 0.5

mile S.

4.37 Illukatiya Point (6°30'N., 81°42'E.), poorly defined, is the S

entrance point of Kumbukkan Oya, about 4 miles NE of Pahala

Point. The coast between the two points is principally composed of sand hills, partly covered with scrub. Kumbukkan Oya

is fronted at its mouth by patches of sunken reef extending

about 0.2 mile offshore. 

4.37 Little Basses Ridge, with depths of not more than 9.1m, extends from its SW end about 1 mile SE of Butawa Point

(6°19'N., 81°29'E.), for about 17 miles ENE. The ridge is in

most parts very narrow and steep-to, and there are many rocky

heads, especially in its SW part, on which the sea often breaks. 

4.37 An extensive bank lies S of the W half of Little Basses

Ridge, and has a least depth of 10m about 3.8 miles SE of Pillinawa Point (6°22'N., 81°34'E.). 

4.38 Little Basses Reef (6°24'N., 81°44'E.) lies about 1.5

miles within the NE end of Little Basses Ridge, and is about

0.6m high. The approach to the reef is steep on its S and SE

sides, the 200m curve lying about 1 mile SE of the reef. 

4.38 The wreck of a 7,000 grt vessel, stranded and broken in two,

lies about 3.5 miles WSW of Little Basses Reef. 

4.38 Little Basses Light is shown from a white granite tower, with

a black band, 38m high, on Little Basses Reef. The tower has a

domed roof, and is surrounded by two galleries under the lantern. 

4.38 Good radar returns have been reported from the light structure at 16 miles. 

4.38 Winds—Weather.—Winds from the W and SW prevail

from April to November. 

4.38 In January, the sea is rough; vessels bound NE should avoid

the SE coast of Sri Lanka. In March, the passage up and down

the coast is easy. 

4.38 Tides—Currents.—Tides and currents on Little Basses

Reef are, as follows:

1. January—The currents set SSW at 2 to 2.5 knots.

2. February—The currents usually set SSW at 2 knots,

but may be less.

3. March—The currents generally set SSW, but are variable and weak at times.

4. April—The currents are variable, but occasionally set

SW; they are usually weak but can be strong when setting

SW.

5. May—The currents set NE at 1 to 3 knots.

6. June, July, August, and September—The currents set

NNE at 1 to 3 knots.

7. October—The currents set NNE at 5 knots, changing

about the middle of the month to SSW.

8. December—The currents set SSW at 5 knots.

4.38 Caution.—An area of shoal ground lies NNW of Little

Photo Courtesy of Udena Atygalle, The Sunday Times (Sri Lanka)

Little Basses Reef Light
Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 109

Pub. 173

Basses Reef; vessels should not approach within 1.5 miles of

the reef with the lighthouse bearing between 148° and 185°. If

wishing to communicate with the lighthouse, it should be approached between the bearings of 134° and 109°; the approach

to the reef should be avoided on all other bearings. 

4.38 Depths beyond the E end of Little Basses Ridge are irregular

and overfalls occur. 

4.38 The sea may break on any part of Little Basses Ridge with a

moderate swell, where depths do not exceed 5.5m, and probably in greater depths. It is inadvisable for other than vessels of

light draft to attempt to cross any part of the ridge; such vessels

should cross between 2 to 6 miles SW of Little Basses Light. 

4.38 Atlas Rock, with a depth of 5.5m, lies about 1.5 miles NE of

Little Basses Light.

Sri Lanka—East Coast—Illukatiya Point to Batticaloa Roads

4.39 The coast between Illukatiya Point and Sangamankanda Point, about 33 miles NNE, is nearly all sandy and

backed by jungle, which extends over low, flat ground to isolated hills inland. from there to Batticaloa Roads, about 45 miles

farther NNW, the coast is cultivated in many places with coconut palms, and the land behind the coast is low and flat. 

4.39 The depths off this coast are fairly regular, gradually decreasing toward the land, except N of Arugam Bay (6°50'N.,

81°50'E.) to Sangamankanda Point. 

4.39 Mayagala, 221m high, about 13 miles W of Illukatiya Point,

has a remarkable cone-shaped appearance when seen from the

E. Dematagala, about 2 miles ENE of Mayagala, has two summits, the higher of which is 306m high. Mandagala, 159m

high, about 6 miles farther E, is conspicuous; its summit has a

light-colored precipice facing E, and the top of the precipice,

seen from the SE, appears clear of the summit. 

4.39 Chimney Hill, about 11 miles NW of Mandagala, is unusual,

appearing as a truncated cone, surmounted by a vertical rock

resembling a chimney. This hill, which is isolated, can be seen

outside a distance of 4 miles off the coast. Kongola (6°34'N.,

81°42'E.) lies nearer the coast.

4.39 Asses Ears, about 5 miles NNE of Kongola, and Kudumbegala, about 2.3 miles farther NNE, are easily recognized. 

4.39 Panawa, a sandy jungle-covered ridge, terminates in a scrubcovered, rocky point, 26m high. The point, from N or S, appears as a flat-topped islet, and a stretch of bare sand lies S of

the point. Bolt Point, about 2.8 miles farther N, is a scrub-covered rock, 28m high. 

4.39 Nilagalahela, 194m high, lies about 8 miles W of the entrance to Arugam Bay, and has two summits. The hill, from the

E, appears as a single peak, steep on its S side. It is a good

landmark, as it is the highest in the vicinity, and darker than its

surroundings. 

4.40 Sangamankanda Point (7°01'N., 81°52'E.) lies close

N of a long, sandy stretch of coast line; a white martello tower,

6.1m high, lies near the point. Good radar returns have been reported from the point at 17 miles.

4.40 Sangamankanda Light is shown at an elevation of 7.6m,

from a white concrete tower on a brown base, at the point. 

4.40 Sangaman Kanda, 86m high, lies about 3 miles WSW of the

point.

4.40 Egeria Patch, a narrow ridge of coral and sand, with a least

depth of 12.8m, lies with its NE extremity about 5.3 miles SE

of Sangamankanda Point. The bottom has been seen clearly in

16.5m.

4.40 Komari Ridge (Komariya Ridge) lies with its N end about

1.5 miles E of Sangamankanda Point. It is composed of sand

and coral, and has a least depth of 5m. The bottom is very uneven for about 3 miles seaward of the ridge; heavy breakers

may be caused by winds and currents.

4.40 In the vicinity of Sangamankanda Point, several mountains

form landmarks. In clear weather, Namunakuli, a sharp peak,

2,036m high, and Maragal Kanda, a long and rounded mountain, about 1,100m high, are visible about 45 and 31 miles, respectively, WSW of Sangamankanda Point. 

4.40 Westminster Abbey, 558m high at its NW point, lies about

20 miles W of Sangamankanda Point; it is a remarkable towerlike mountain, best seen from E or S and very prominent. 

4.40 Konduruhela (Kumburahela), 345m high, lies 12.5 miles W

of the same point; it is a very prominent, isolated sugarloaf

peak. 

4.40 Wadinagala, 736m high, lies about 22 miles WNW of Sangamankanda Point and has a sharp peak, conspicuous from all directions. 

4.40 Thomson Hill is about 10 miles NW of Sangamankanda

Point; Sharp Hill and Bennington Hill, the latter wooded and

wedge-shaped, lie about 1.8 miles NNE and 5.5 miles NW, respectively, of Thomson Hill. 

4.40 Friar’s Hood (7°26'N., 81°30'E.), 655m high, is well-named

and shows up well among the surrounding hills. It is usually

the first landmark coming from the N, is unmistakable, and

readily identified from great distances in clear weather. 

4.40 A cluster of red roofs is conspicuous about 10 miles N of

Sangamankanda Point; a white tower, about 13 miles farther N,

is also conspicuous.

4.40 The depths off the coast between Sangamankanda Point and

Batticaloa Roads are regular, except for a few rocky patches

within 1 mile of the coast. The 200m curve lies between 4 and

10 miles offshore; outside this curve the depths increase suddenly and heavy overfalls occur even in good weather. 

4.40 Alphee Shoal (7°25'N., 81°52'E.), with a least depth of

5.9m, lies about 2 miles ENE of the conspicuous white tower.

4.41 Port Oluvil (7°17'N., 81°51'E.) is currently in development, with plans to open in the near future. The proposed

project consisits of a commercial harbor and an area for fishing

vessels. At present (2011), the fishing and commercial quays

and buildings have been completed, the breakwaters and infrastructure are being constructed, and the harbor is being

dredged.

4.41 The anticipated depth for the commercial harbor will initially be 8m, but may be increased to 11m in Stage 2. The fishing

harbor will have a depth of 3m. The breakwater has a length of

1,320m, the commercial quay has a length of 330m, and the

fishing quay has a length of 220m. Stage 2 of development will

also include an additional 470m of berthing to accomodate vessels up to 16,000 tons. 
110 Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 

Pub. 173

Batticaloa Roads (7°46'N., 81°41'E.)

World Port Index No. 49280

4.42 Batticaloa Roads, an open roadstead, off the entrance

of Batticaloa Lake affords good anchorage during the Southwest Monsoon, but is dangerous during the Northeast Monsoon. 

4.42 The town of Batticaloa lies about 3 miles S of the lake entrance; a railroad bridge crosses the lake in the vicinity. 

4.42 Winds—Weather.—At Batticaloa, W or SW winds prevail

from February to November. 

4.42 During the night and morning at Batticaloa, the wind is usually light and variable, particularly during the Southwest Monsoon, and in the transitional periods between the monsoons. In

the afternoon, sea breezes, usually from NE to SE, are prevalent.

4.42 During the Southwest Monsoon, a hot, dry wind, usually W

or SW, may blow down from the hills. It is most prevalent during June and July, when winds from these directions are recorded in the afternoon, on an average of 7 days per month,

instead of the usual sea breeze from E. 

4.42 Depressions from the Bay of Bengal may affect Batticaloa at

the close of the Southwest Monsoon. The Northeast Monsoon

sets in towards the end of November. 

4.42 Aspect.—Batticaloa Light (7°45'N., 81°41'E.) is shown

from a white tower, 28m high, on the W side of the entrance to

Batticalao Lake. 

4.42 A conspicuous lattice tower, marked by red obstruction

lights, stands about 1.5 miles SSE of the light. 

4.42 Beacon Rock, with a least depth of 2.7m, lies about 1.5 miles

ENE of Batticaloa Light, and is the outermost danger. 

4.42 Brennus Shoal, with a least depth of 3.2m, lies about 1 mile

NE of the same light. A 5.5m patch lies about 0.3 mile NNW

of the shoal, and Tower Rock, with a least depth of 1.8m, lies

about 183m SSE of the shoal. 

4.42 Numerous other dangers lie between Beacon Rock and Batticaloa Light. 

4.42 Surveyor Rock, with a least depth of 6.4m, lies nearly 1 mile

N of Batticaloa Light. Khandalla Bank, with a least depth of

6.4m, lies about 183m SW of Surveyor Rock. 

4.42 Anchorage.—A good berth for a large vessel, in 13.7m, lies

with Batticaloa Light bearing 151°, distant 1 mile. 

4.42 A small vessel may anchor, in 12m, about 0.2 mile ESE of

Khandalla Bank, with Batticaloa Light bearing 176°. This is a

convenient berth for communicating with the shore. 

4.42 Caution.—Approaching from the S, a vessel should not enter into depths of less than 18.3m until Batticaloa Light bears

199°. A light-draft vessel may approach the anchorage ESE of

Khandalla Bank, with Batticaloa Light bearing not less than

180°.

Sri Lanka—East Coast—Batticaloa Roads to

Trincomalee

4.43 The coast between Batticaloa Light and Clarke Point,

about 16 miles NNW, is covered with numerous coconut palms

and backed by several conspicuous hills. From there to Foul

Point, about 35 miles NNW, the coast is low and covered with

jungle, and the hills inland are few and unimportant. 

4.43 Beyond the 200m curve, along this coast, the depths increase

suddenly and overfalls occur, even in good weather. 

4.43 In thick weather, it is safe to navigate off this coast by remaining in depths of not less than 37m. 

4.43 Tower Hill (7°43'N., 81°24'E.), 244m high, about 17 miles

W of Batticaloa Light, is hog-backed, with a conspicuous rock,

resembling a tower, on its summit. 

4.43 Barons Cap, 210m high, about 7 miles N of Tower Hill, is a

sugarloaf hill; it is conspicuous when clear of other hills, especially from about due E, but from NE its top appears broader

and merges with the hills farther S. 

4.43 Gunner’s Quoin, about 15 miles W of Baron’s Cap, is a large

wedge-shaped mountain and a good mark. 

4.43 Kirimechiodai Malai (Grimechiodai Malai), 7 miles WNW

of Clarke Point, is 56m high, and only seen between bearings

of 247° and 292°, when it appears as a low wedge-shaped hill

with a small peak, rising steeply from S and sloping N. 

4.43 Kunchan Kallu, 125m high, lies about 10.5 miles WNW of

Clarke Point; from the SE it appears wedge-shaped and moderately steep-to S, but from the NE it has no well-defined summit. 

4.43 Small Quoin, about 4.3 miles farther WNW, is 158m and

from the SE slopes to a single rounded summit.

4.43 Baker Rocks lie on reefs extending about 1.3 miles NE of

Vandeloos Point (7°55'N., 81°35'E.). 

4.43 Clarke Point, about 4.5 miles farther NNW, is low and

fringed by rocks and foul ground. Elephant Rock, 7m high and

light-colored, lies close N of Clarke Point. 

4.43 Challitivu Island, about 8.5 miles NNW of Clarke Point, is

9.1m high and wooded. Panditiva Munai, about 4.3 miles farther NNW, is sharp and rocky, with a small above-water rock

close off it.

4.44 Kadeawella Point (Muricaadi Munai) (8°12'N.,

81°26'E.) is fronted by rocks, the highest of which is 3m high.

4.44 Virgel Rocks (Virugel Rocks), about 2.5 miles N of Kadeawella Point and about 1 mile offshore, consist of two sunken

rocks and a rock, 0.9m high.

4.44 Tree Rock, 13m high, with a tree on it, lies about 5 miles

NNW of Kadeawella Point and about 0.3 mile offshore; a rock,

Port Oluvil—Proposed Development
Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 111

Pub. 173

0.6m high, lies about 0.5 mile E of Tree Rock. 

4.44 Ship Rock, 19m high, lies about 1.8 mile NNW of Tree

Rock, abreast a conspicuous rock on the coast. Alligator Rock,

0.9m high, with a sunken rock close NE, lies about 1.5 miles E

of Ship Rock. 

4.44 The entrance of a lagoon lies about 2.8 miles N of Ship

Rock. Several islets lie off the entrance; the highest islet,

18.3m high, with some trees on it, is conspicuous. 

4.44 White Rock, 7.6m high, lies on the beach about 3 miles N of

the lagoon entrance and shows up well during the forenoon. 

4.44 Heming Rocks extend about 1.5 miles NE from White Rock;

the highest rock is 6.1m high, and the outermost is 2.1m high

and about 1 mile offshore. 

4.44 Coral Point, about 6 miles NNW of White Rock, is surrounded by coral reef. 

4.44 Kevuliya (Foul Point) (8°32'N., 81°19'E.), about 2.8 miles

NW of Coral Point, is low, covered with coconut trees, and

forms the SE entrance point of Trincomalee Bay. 

4.44 Munayai Paru, a coral patch with large boulders, with a least

depth of 4.3m and steep-to, lies about 1 mile NNW of Kevuliya

(Foul Point), and close off a reef extending NW of the point.

4.44 Tides—Currents.—Near Trincomalee, the current sets as

follows:

1. October to February—usually S at 0.5 to 3 knots.

2. March and April—usually N at 0.5 to 1.3 knots.

3. May to July—generally inappreciable, but irregular

currents set strongly N and sometimes S.

4. August—usually N at 0.5 to 1.3 knots.

5. September—Same as for May to July.

Approaches to Trincomalee Harbor

4.45 Trincomalee Harbor is approached through Trincomalee Bay, which is entered between Kevuliya (Foul Point)

(8°32'N., 81°19'E.) and Flagstaff Point, about 5.5 miles NW.

The entrance of Trincomalee Harbor lies on the NW side of the

bay. 

4.45 Koddiyar Bay occupies the S portion of Trincomalee Bay;

Tambalagam Bay, a shallow lagoon, extends from the NW corner of Koddiyar Bay. 

4.45 Round Island (8°30'N., 81°13'E.) lies in the W part of Trincomalee Bay, about 5.5 miles W of Kevuliya (Foul Point). A

light is shown from a white round tower, 21m high, on the

summit of the island.

4.45 Depths in Trincomalee Bay, in the approach to Trincomalee

Harbor, are deep. 

Trincomalee Bay—Southeast Side

4.46 The coast between Kevuliya (Foul Point) and Norway

Point, about 2.5 miles WSW, is low and fronted by a shoal

bank. Northesk Rocks, a patch with a least depth of 1.2m, lies

about 1.5 miles WSW of Kevuliya (Foul Point). 

4.46 Norway Islet, 13m high, lies about 0.3 mile WSW of Norway Point. Beacon Rock, 2.4m high, lies about 0.2 mile SW of

Norway Islet. 

4.46 Koddiyar Bay, entered between Norway Point and Marble

Point, about 4 miles W, has low shores, with several rivers

emptying into it. 

4.46 Koddiyar Sands fronts the shore for about 1 mile E and 2

miles W of the mouth of the Koddiyar Aru. When the rivers are

in flood, shoal depths extend farther seaward off the mouths of

the Koddiyar Aru and the river about 1.8 miles farther W; an

extension of about 91m has been recorded after heavy rains. 

4.46 Brown Shoal, with a least depth of 9.1m, lies about 1.3 miles

NW of the W entrance of the Koddiyar Aru. 

4.46 Elizabeth Island (8°30'N., 81°13'E.), about 1 mile S of

Round Island, consists of bare rock with a well-defined summit, 10m high; the island appears conical from the N. The island is surrounded by rocks and shoals to a distance of 0.2

mile, except on its E side. A beacon, 9.4m high, lies near the

summit of the island. 

4.46 Niger Rock lies about 0.5 mile NW of Elizabeth Island.

Trincomalee Bay—Northwest Side

4.47 Flagstaff Point (8°35'N., 81°15'E.), the NW entrance

point of Trincomalee Bay, is the N end of Fort Frederick. It is a

bold promontory with black vertical cliffs on its E side, which

gradually diminish in height from 9.1m at Flagstaff Point, to

sea level in a rocky point at the SE corner. The promontory

gives a wedge-shaped appearance from the N or S as the top of

the headland slopes with the cliffs. The summit, 51m high,

with a building and a radio mast marked by a red obstruction

light on it, is about 0.2 mile from the N point. A large, detached

rock, with perpendicular sides and a flat top, lies close off the

N end of Flagstaff Point.

4.47 The Maidan, an open grassy space between the fort and the

town of Trincomalee, is the SW end of Fort Frederick, where

there is a fortification wall, 15m high, with bastions at each angle. The white gateway of the fort, on the S front, is very conspicuous from S, as is the Irrigation Office, a large white

building near the sea, on the S front. 

4.47 Dutch Bay lies between Fort Frederick and Dutch Point,

about 0.7 mile S. It has low sandy shores, and the flatland, on

which the S part of Trincomalee is built, stretches back to Trincomalee Harbor. Dutch Point, 34m high to the tops of the trees,

has a cliffy and rocky sea face.

4.47 The N part of Dutch Bay is shoal and rocky, and Prai Malai,

a small rocky islet, lies about 91m offshore. The white dome of

the Roman Catholic Church, showing above the trees, is conspicuous about 0.5 mile NW of Dutch Point. The Naval Commissioner’s House, a white flat-topped two-story structure,

with a pillared veranda and lying among trees, is conspicuous

about 137m farther N. 

4.47 Anchorage.—During the height of the Southwest Monsoon,

Dutch Bay will be found to be a more convenient anchorage for

boat work than Trincomalee Harbor, as there is an excellent lee

for landing anywhere along the shore, and as a rule, no swell.

The best anchorage, in 12m, lies with Dutch Point bearing

174°, distant about 0.5 mile. 

4.47 Rocky Point, about 0.3 mile S of Dutch Point, is the NE end

of Ostenburg Ridge. The point is narrow and cliffy, and extends

about 0.3 mile NE in a series of remarkable knife-edged rocks;

among these rocks is a rocky pillar that very conspicuous from

the N or S. The rocks forming the point diminish in height

gradually, and end in a shoal ridge about 91m outside the outermost rock, where it is steep-to. 

4.48 Chapel Point (8°33'N., 81°15'E.), nearly 1 mile S of
112 Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 

Pub. 173

Rocky Point, is rocky with a rounded base, behind which the

land rises steeply to Chapel Hill, 103m high. The hill forms the

NE end of Elephant Ridge, and is covered with jungle; the remainder of the ridge is more sparsely wooded, and between the

trees, are long vertical streaks and spaces of red earth. 

4.48 Chapel Island, about 0.2 mile SSE of Chapel Point, is flat in

its N part with trees and bushes, but the higher portion is bare

rock, the summit consisting of a large square-topped and flatfronted boulder. 

4.48 Chapel Rock, about 0.5 mile NE of Chapel Point, is 0.9m

high; a rocky ridge, with a rock awash at its outer end, extends

about 0.2 mile NE from the rock. 

4.48 Elephant Point, about 1.3 miles SW of Chapel Point, is low

and can be easily recognized by the low bastion of an old fort

at its extremity. Hoods Tower lies near the summit of a 77m

hill, about 0.3 mile NE of Elephant Point. 

4.48 Elephant Island, about 0.4 mile ESE of Elephant Point, is

36m high to the tops of the trees. The W part of the island is a

narrow rocky point terminating in a small cone, 2.4m high. 

4.48 Elephant Rock, with a least depth of 1.2m, lies about 183m

W of the SW end of Elephant Island.

Trincomalee Bay—West Side

4.49 Marble Point (8°31'N., 81°13'E.), about 0.8 mile

WSW of Round Island, appears from the E as a small round

hill, 30m high, terminating S in a low, rocky ridge, about 0.9m

high. 

4.49 Diamond Hill, a wooded and fairly conspicuous peak, 79m

high, rises about 0.5 mile NNW of Marble Point. White Top

Rock, 7m high, lies close offshore about 0.2 mile NE of Diamond Hill. 

4.49 Clappenburg Point, the W entrance point of Trincomalee

Harbor, lies about 1.3 miles N of Marble Point. It is the E extremity of a narrow cockscomb ridge, extending about 0.5 mile

WSW and forming a straight bare cliff on its S side; the ridge

has two summits, 33 and 30m high, and small shrubs grow

along the crest. About 0.3 mile WSW of Clappenburg Point,

the cliffs are broken to the waterline by a precipitous gap,

spanned by a narrow causeway. The part E of the gap is known

as Clappenburg Island.

4.49 A conspicuous masonry beacon, 3m high, painted in black

and white bands, and surmounted by a disc topmark, lies on

Clappenburg Point. 

4.49 Clappenburg Hill, 105m high and covered with dense jungle,

rises to a double summit, named Kari Malai Utu Malai, about 1

mile WSW of Clappenburg Point.

4.49 Grommet Rock, awash, lies about 0.5 mile S of Clappenburg

Point. The rock is often not visible on a calm day, but during

the Southwest Monsoon the sea usually breaks over it. A 2.3m

patch, marked by a buoy, lies about 0.2 mile NE of Grommet

Rock. 

4.49 Minden Rock, with a least depth of 3.7m, and Nade Munai

Paar, a 2.3m patch, lie about 0.3 and 0.5 mile, respectively, SE

of Clappenburg Point. These steep-to dangers are seldom

marked by breakers or show in any way. 

4.49 Tides—Currents.—Near Round Island, a current, apparently tidal, runs ESE and WSW, sometimes attaining a velocity of

1.5 knots. 

4.49 A current has been experienced off Norway Point, setting

NE at a velocity of 2 knots, out of Koddiyar Bay. 

Trincomalee Harbor (8°33'N., 81°13'E.)

World Port Index No. 49290

4.50 Trincomalee Harbor, entered between Clappenburg

Point (8°32'N., 81°13'E.) and Elephant Point, is the only entirely sheltered natural harbor in the South Asian subcontinent.

The shores of the harbor are indented by picturesque bays and

coves separated by hilly, wooded points; it also encloses several islands and islets. 

4.50 The harbor, which was formerly a naval base, is now under

development, to include improved alongside berthing, as a

commercial port. 

4.50 There are considerable depths extending about 1.3 miles

within the harbor entrance, then gradually shoaling with a fair

degree of regularity into the various bays and coves. Vessels of

almost any size can obtain anchorage in the harbor. 

4.50 Winds—Weather.—The climate of Trincomalee is generally healthy. The dry season is from May to September, during

the Southwest Monsoon, although there is a tendency for

showers in nthe afternoon and evening. A wind sometimes develops in the harbor causing small breaking waves which may

endanger boats. 

4.50 During the Northeast Monsoon, there is a heavy swell on the

outer beaches; wind and rain storms of short duration, but violent, occur. 

4.50 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Trincomalee is 0.7m at

MHWS, and 0.5m at MHWN. 

4.50 During November and December, the months with the greatest average rainfall, the surface water is practically always running out of the harbor, at velocities varying from 0.5 to 1 knot

in mid-channel, but with a greater velocity near the shore. After passing Elephant Point, the current sets SE at a velocity of 1

knot. 

4.50 At a depth of 18.3m, and probably at lesser depths, the water

flows inward at half the velocity of the outgoing surface current. Little is known of the current inside Trincomalee Harbor

during the Southwest Monsoon. 

4.50 Depths—Limitations.—Although there are a number of

piers in various parts of the harbor, the large majority of cargo

is transferred by lighters. 

4.50 Prima Jetty, a T-headed jetty, is situated in Malay Cove close

SW of Round Point. 

4.50 Oiling Berth No. 1 (Oil Bunkering Jetty) lies on the S side of

China Bay about 0.2 mile W of Round Point. Oiling Berth No.

2 and Oiling Berth No. 3, located about 0.2 mile W of Oiling

Berth No. 1, are in ruins. 

4.50 Ashroff Quay, a T-headed pier, extends SE from the NW side

of China Bay. 

4.50 Tokyo Cement Jetty, located on the NW side of Cod Bay, is a

detached dolphin jetty, with a mooring buoy at each end. A

conveyor extends NW to the shore. 

4.50 Further information on the berthing facilities in Trincomalee

can be found in the table titled Trincomalee—Berth Information. 

4.50 Pandi Aricha Munai Paar (8°32'N., 81°13'E.), a shoal with

a least depth of 4.6m, lies about 0.2 mile ENE of Clappenburg

Point, the W entrance point of the harbor. 
Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 113

Pub. 173

4.50 Round Point Shoals consists of two shoal patches, about

183m apart, lying about 0.1 mile N and 0.2 mile NW, respectively of Round Point (8°33.4'N., 81°12.3'E.). There is a least

depth of 3.7m over the E shoal, which is marked E and NW by

buoys. The W shoal, marked NW by a buoy, has a least depth

of 4.6m.

4.50 Dockyard Shoal, consisting of two rocky heads with depths

of less than 1.8m, lies about 0.5 mile N of Ostenburg Point

(8°32.5'N., 81°13.3'E.). Buoys are situated close NW of the inner head and close SW of the outer head. 

4.50 York Shoal, about 0.3 mile NNW of Dockyard Shoal, lies

about 0.4 mile WSW of York Island and its marked S by a

buoy. Koroela Rock, close N of York Shoal, has a least depth of

4.1m. 

4.50 Aspect.—The W side of Trincomalee Harbor is indented by

four principal bays, which also contain several coves. 

4.50 Clappenburg Bay lies on the N side of Clappenburg Island.

Clappenburg Wharf lies at the head of the bay. 

4.50 Great Sober Island (Pambuttivu), in the SW part of the harbor, is dominated by Gravel Hill, 70m high, the wooded summit of the island. A ruined causeway joins the NW part of

Great Sober Island to a boulder-strewn spit extending NE from

the coast. 

4.50 Small Sober Island, 35m high, lies close E of Great Sober Island, to which it is connected by a ruined causeway. Eagle

Point, the E extremity of Small Sober Island, is marked close S

by a beacon. A lighted buoy is moored NE of the beacon. A

small 12.8m patch, existance doubtful, lies about 0.2 mile N of

Eagle Point. 

4.50 Orlando Cove lies N of Little Sober Island, on the E side of

Great Sober Island.

4.50 Round Point, the N entrance point of Malay Cove, lies about

1 mile NW of Eagle Point. Sister Shoal, with a least depth of

0.6m, lies in the entrance of Malay Cove, about 0.5 mile S of

Round Point. A 3.7m shoal patch and a foul area lie SW of Sister Shoal and are best seen on the chart. 

4.50 China Bay lies N of Malay Cove and is separated from it by

a promontory terminating in Round Point, on which Mount

Challenger lies, rising to a height of 48m, 0.4 mile WSW of the

point. 

4.50 A conspicuous flour mill and silos, marked by red obstruction lights, stand 0.2 mile WSW of Round Point. On the S side,

the mill is fronted by Prima Jetty, used by bulk carriers to supply the mill. 

4.50 Cod Bay, at the head of the harbor, is entered between Middle Point (8°34'N., 81°12'E.) and Cod Point, about 0.2 mile

WNW. 

4.50 Railway Spit Buoy is moored close E of two shoal patches

about 0.3 mile SW of Middle Point. 

4.50 Elephant Point, previously described in paragraph 4.48, is

the E entrance point of Trincomalee Harbor, and the SW extremity of Elephant Ridge. 

4.50 Ostenburg Point, about 0.5 mile NW of Elephant Point, lies

at the SW extremity of Ostenburg Ridge. Ostenburg Light is

shown from a lantern on the SW corner of a wall of a conspicuous building, about 1,137m N of Ostenburg Point. A radio mast

is situated about 0.8 mile E of the light. Elephant Ridge and

Ostenburg Ridge, two straight-topped hills, parallel to each

other, form the S part of the E shore of Trincomalee Harbor. 

4.50 Town Bay and Powder Bay lie in the area between Ostenburg Point and Plantain Point, about 1.7 miles NW. Powder Island, separating the two bays, is 9m high to the tops of the trees

and is connected to the coast by a causeway. 

4.50 Powder Rocks, a group of low black rocks, lie about 0.5 mile

SW of Powder Island. The highest rock is 2.7m high, with

some mangrove bushes on it. Powder Spit Buoy marks the W

end of shoal water surrounding Powder Rocks. 

4.50 Plantain Point is the SW end of a narrow wooded peninsula;

Orrs Hill, 25m high, about 0.5 mile NW of the point, is the

summit of the ridge. A white cylindrical beacon stands on the

point, with a lookout tower about 0.2 mile NE. There are a

number of houses on the point, partially obscured by trees. A

shoal spit extends about 0.1 mile SW of Plaintain Point. 

4.50 Yard Cove is entered W of Plaintain Point.

4.50 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and is available during

daylight hours only. The pilots board 0.2 mile N of Round Island.

4.50 Vessels awaiting a pilot should anchor 0.5 mile NW of

Round Island; if arriving between 1800 and 2100, vessels may

be brought in at the discretion of the Deputy Master Attendant. 

4.50 Vessels embarking a pilot should preferably lower an accommodation ladder; if this is not practicable they should let down

a pilot ladder and two stout man ropes. 

4.50 Vessels can communicate with the pilot station via VHF. 

4.50 Regulations.—There is a naval signal station near Ostenburg Point.

Trincomalee—Berth Information

Facility Pier length

Maximum vessel

Remarks

Draft Length

Prima Outer Jetty 227m 13.00m 229m Bulk grain. Maximum beam of 34m. Maximum air 

draft of 17.5m.

Prima Inner Jetty 122m 5.90m 122m Bagged flour.

Tokyo Cement Jetty 155m 8.60m 156m Bulk cement and gypsum. Can accommodate vessels up to 15,000 dwt.

Oil Bunkering Jetty 200m 9.75m 200m Refined petroleum products.

Ashroff Quay 250m 13.0m — Containers and general cargo. Can accommodate 

vessels up to 40,000 dwt.
114 Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 

Pub. 173

4.50 The vessel’s ETA, together with a dangerous cargo

declaration, should be sent through Colombo at least 24 hours

in advance. The pilots board 0.2 mile N of Round Island. 

4.50 Vessels may enter during daylight hours only.

4.50 The Port Health Officer boards vessels after arrival at the anchorage; pratique for vessels arriving from another port in Sri

Lanka is automatic. 

4.50 Signals.—The following signals, consisting of flags from

the International Code of Signals, are required from all vessels

arriving off the port:

1. Flag Q by day, or red and white lights, vertically displayed, at night—The vessel has not yet received pratique.

2. House flag under the ensign at the stern, by day, or

white light under stern light, at night—Restricted pratique

has been granted.

3. Signal QQQ by day, or three green lights, vertically

disposed, at night—The vessel is infected.

4.50 Anchorage.—A good anchorage can be found in almost any

part of Trincomalee Harbor during fair weather. The most sheltered anchorage in the harbor is in Orlando Cove, in 28m, with

the NE point of Great Sober Island bearing 316°. 

4.50 Anchorage in the approaches to the port is only permitted to

vessels awaiting a pilot, but vessels may find sheltered and

convenient anchorage in Dutch Bay, Orlando Cove, and NW of

Round Island.

4.50 Directions.—Approaching from the S, pass 2 miles E of

Foul Point, steering 314° until Round Island bears 235°; steer

for it on that bearing until the beacon on Clappenburg Point

bears 295°. Then head for the beacon on that bearing until

Round Island Light bears 168°, when course should be altered

NNW into the harbor, keeping the same light bearing 168°

astern.

4.50 Approaching from the N, keep Foul Point Light bearing 179°

until Round Island Light bears 236°; steer for it on that bearing

until the beacon on Clappenburg Point bears 295°,then proceed

as directed above. 

4.50 At night, approaching from S, do not bring Foul Island Light

to bear less than 193° until Round Island Light bears 247° on

this bearing the sector changes from red to white. Keeping in

the white sector, steer for the same light until Foul Point Light

bears E. Then alter course to W, keeping Foul Point Light bearing 090° astern, and passing through the red sector of Round

Island Light. On entering the white sector of Round Island

Light, alter course to 348° keeping the same light astern in the

white sector, bearing 168°. 

4.50 Approaching from the N at night, keep Foul Point Light

bearing 179° until Round Island Light bears 236°. Keeping in

the white sector, steer for Round Island Light on the same bearing until Foul Point Light bears E, then proceed as directed

above.

4.50 Caution.—All anchorages and landings in the approaches to

Trincomalee and those within the harbor are subject to security

clearance from the Sri Lanka Navy and prior notification to the

pilot station before use.

4.50 An entry prohibited area, best seen on the chart, extends

from Ostenburg Point NE to Pepperpot Jetty, in the SE portion

of Town Bay. 

4.50 Firing practice areas are centered 17 miles NE and 23 miles

ESE of Trincomalee Harbor.

Sri Lanka—East Coast—Trincomalee to Point

Pedro

4.51 Back Bay, entered between Flagstaff Point(8°35'N.,

81°15'E.) and Elizabeth Point, about 3 miles NNW, is largely

used by local craft trading with Trincomalee during the Southwest Monsoon. 

4.51 The SE side of the bay, formed by the NW side of Fort Frederick, has a rocky shore with steep, wooded, and grassy slopes

above. The W shore of the bay, between Fort Frederick and

Red Bluff, about 3 miles NNW, is formed by a smooth sweep

of sand, backed by a low shore fringed with coconut palms;

farther inland is a low range of wooded hills. Red Bluff consists of two patches of bare earthy cliffs, 14m high and covered

with jungle. 

4.51 Back Bay Light is shown during the Southwest Monsoon

from a house about 0.8 mile WSW of Flagstaff Point. 

4.51 Bazaar Rock, 0.6m high, lies on the outer part of a reef, surrounded by foul ground, extending about 0.3 mile NNE from

the beach, about 1 mile W of Flagstaff Point. 

4.51 Elizabeth Point is low and not easily distinguished, the land

behind being slightly elevated, wooded, and fronted by coconut

trees. Coral reef extends about 183m offshore SW of the point. 

4.51 Lively Rocks lie at the E end of a shoal spit extending about

0.5 mile E of Elizabeth Point. Two of these rocks are always

above-water; one of these is 0.6m high. The sea nearly always

breaks on another of these rocks. 

4.51 Anchorage may be taken anywhere in Back Bay during the

Southwest Monsoon, but it is dangerous during the Northeast

Monsoon. The most convenient berth, in 14m, sand, lies with

Flagstaff Point bearing 137°, distant about 0.6 mile. 

4.51 The coast between Elizabeth Point and Koduwakattu Malai,

about 17 miles NW, consists of long, sandy beaches fronting

several lagoons. The shore is generally wooded and backed by

low hills. Reefs and foul ground extend over 1.5 miles offshore

between Elizabeth Point and Ava Point, about 7 miles NNW,

and for about 1 mile offshore between Ava Point and Koduwakattu Malai, about 10 miles farther NW.

4.51 Caution.—A number of rocks and shoals, lie off this section

of coast, and uncharted dangers may lie within the 20m curve. 

4.51 Nilaveli Hill, 55m high and shaped like a sugarloaf, is conspicuous about 3 miles NNW of Elizabeth Point; radio masts

are conspicuous about 1.5 miles farther N. 

4.51 Malai Porru Putta Paar, with a least depth of 4.3m, lies about

1 mile NE of Elizabeth Point. This dangerous shoal is steep-to

and the sea does not break over it. The E extremities of Fort

Frederick and Chapel Island, in line bearing 179°, lead E of

this danger.

4.51 Fairlie Rocks, awash, extend 0.5 mile offshore E of Nilaweli

Hill. Diomede Rock, awash, and a 3m depth lie about 1.8 miles

NE and 2.3 miles ENE, respectively, of Nilaweli Hill.

4.51 Pigeon Island, 30m high and rocky, lies about 2 miles ESE of

Ava Point. Shoals extend E, and a rocky islet lies about 0.7

mile SSE of the island. 

4.51 Caution.—At night or in thick weather, vessels should not

approach the coast between Elizabeth Point and Pigeon Island

in depths of less than 46m.

4.51 Foul ground extends about 1.3 miles ENE from Ava Point. 
Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 115

Pub. 173

4.52 Andamban Malai, a rounded hill 116m high, lies

about 5 miles WNW of Ava Point. Pinnacle Rock, a sharp finger-like peak, 65m high, is conspicuous about 1.3 miles NE of

Andamban Malai. 

4.52 Flat Rock, 6.4m high, lies about 5 miles NW of Ava Point.

Pinnacle Rock, 1.5m high, with a shoal area extending E, lies

about 1 mile SSE of Flat Rock. 

4.52 Koduwakattu Malai (8°52'N., 81°05'E.) is the N of two

rocky headlands separated by a sandy bay. A framework tower,

61m high, is conspicuous about 0.8 mile S of the point. Another tower stands about 2.3 miles farther SSE. A group of rocks,

one of which is 6.1m high, lies about 2 miles WNW of the

point. Good radar returns have been reported from the point at

17 miles.

4.52 Anchorage.—During the Southwest Monsoon, vessels may

obtain sheltered anchorage up to 2 miles offshore S of Koduwakattu Malai, in depths of 18.3 to 28m, mud, and farther NW

along the coast, in 16.5 to 18.3m. 

4.52 Shoulder Point, a low rocky headland, lies about 6 miles NW

of Koduwakattu Malai. It is fringed by reefs with two rocks 4.5

and 6.1m high A light is shown from the point. A dangerous

reef, on which the sea breaks, and which was not examined in

1945, lies about 1 mile SE of Shoulder Point. 

4.52 Black Point (9°06'N., 80°54'E.) has conspicuous cliffs, 36m

high, close N. The entrance to a lagoon, N of the cliffs, is also

conspicuous. 

4.52 Mullaittivu Light (9°16'N., 80°49'E.) is shown from a metal

framework obelisk with a dome top, 19.8m high, in the village

of Mullaittivu. Mullaittivu Shoals, with depth of less than

9.1m, extend about 7 miles N from a position 4 miles SSE of

Mullaittivu Light. These shoals also extend about 3 miles E of

Mullaittivu Light; rocks, with depths of less than 1.8m, lie between 1 and 2 miles NNE and NNW of the lighthouse. During

the Northeast Monsoon the sea breaks heavily on the N side of

Mullaittivu Shoals. 

4.52 Caution.—Vessels should not approach the coast within 2

miles between Shoulder Point and Mullaittivu Shoals; there are

no reported off-lying dangers with the possible exception of a

9.1m patch and an 11.3m patch, about 1 mile NE and 3.3 miles

N, respectively, of Shoulder Point. 

4.52 Vessels passing Mullaittivu Shoals should not approach

within depths of 37m.

4.53 A conspicuous hillock lies about 4.5 miles NW of

Mullaittivu. 

4.53 About 8 miles farther NW, a gap appears distinctive between

the bearings of 200° and 248°; a conspicuous tree lies on the

NW side of the gap. 

4.53 Another very distinctive gap in the coast, with a conspicuous

tree SE, lies about 3.5 miles NW of the above gap.

4.53 Chundikkulam, about 2.5 miles farther NW, has several gaps

SE which are not always visible, but are conspicuous at times. 

4.53 Kaddaikadu (9°34'N., 80°29'E.), about 8 miles NW of

Chundikkulam, has a church which is conspicuous between the

bearings of 180° and 200°. 

4.53 Pedro Channel South Obelisk, a white obelisk, 15m high,

surmounted by a white diamond, is conspicuous about 2 miles

NW of Kaddaikadu; the top of the obelisk has a height of

22.2m. 

4.53 Saint Anthony’s Church lies 4.5 miles NW of the obelisk.

Saint Mary’s Church, with a red roof, at Kudarappu, about 4

miles farther NW, is visible at intervals between the trees. 

4.53 Pedro Channel Middle Beacon, a concrete beacon, painted in

black and white bands, lies about 1.3 miles NNW of Saint

Mary’s Church. 

4.53 Some very conspicuous sand dunes lie near the coast about

4.5 miles NW of Saint Mary’s Church. A Hindu shrine, visible

from seaward and close to a red-roofed church, stands about

1.5 miles NW of the sand dunes. 

4.53 There are several other Hindu shrines at Manalkadu and Katkovalam, about 2.5 and 5 miles, respectively, NNW of the sand

dunes. Manalkadu Church was reported to be distinctive between the bearings of 188° and 270°. 

4.53 The coast between Katkovalam and Point Pedro is lined with

casuarina trees and palms, about 21m high. 

4.54 Point Pedro (9°50'N., 80°15'E.), the NE point of Sri

Lanka, is marked by Point Pedro Light, shown from a white

masonry tower, 32m high. 

4.54 Point Pedro Shoal, with depths of less than 9.1m, lies roughly parallel with the coast and from 3 to as much as 8 miles offshore. From abreast Point Pedro, it stretches about 23 miles

SE, and several miles NW. Stork Shoal, with a least depth of

1.8m, about 6 miles ESE of Point Pedro, and Ethiopia Shoal,

with a depth of 2.3m, about 3.5 miles farther SE, are the two

shallowest heads.

4.54 Pedro Channel, the passage between Pedro Shoal and the

coast, has depths of 11.4 to 14.6m.

4.54 Point Pedro, a town and port open from mid-February to

mid-October, lies about 0.8 mile W of Point Pedro. There is a

custom house with a red roof and several bungalows in the vicinity. It has been reported (2002) that a small dolphin jetty at

Point Pedro can work lighters of up to 2.5m draft. 

4.54 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be obtained in any part

of Pedro Channel, except in the prohibited anchorage area near

Point Pedro.

4.54 Directions.—A vessel passing outside of Pedro Point Shoal

should not approach land inside depths of 37m by day, or inside depths of 46m at night, between Pigeon Inland (8°43'N.,

81°12'E.) and Point Pedro.

4.54 A vessel proceeding through Pedro Channel should pass

Mullaittivu Shoals in a depth of not less than 37m, and should

not approach the coast NW of these shoals inside depths of

18.3m, until Pedro Channel South Obelisk bears 280°. The

coast should then be approached on this bearing, as discolored

water and shallower depths than charted have been reported in

this vicinity. This course leads N of the shoals extending NW

from Mullaittivu and S of the SE end of Point Pedro Shoal. After clearing the latter shoal, alter course NW keeping about 1.5

miles off the coast. 

4.54 Caution.—During SW winds, a red sand haze forms over

the land between Mullaittivu and Point Pedro; the haze may reduce coastal visibility to about 3 miles. 

4.54 The best time to make the obelisk is during the forenoon, so

as to arrive at the S end of the channel about noon. The obelisk

will then be visible from the N until the high trees and light

structure at Point Pedro are made out, and there will be no difficulty in avoiding Ethiopia Shoal. 
116 Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 

Pub. 173

Palk Strait

4.55 Palk Strait (10°00'N., 80°00'E.), forming the N entrance to Palk Bay, lies between the N coast of Sri Lanka and

the E coast of India. The strait is occupied largely by banks,

with depths of from 5.5 to 9.1m, and by numerous shoals with

less depths over then. 

4.55 The three principal entrance channels are South Channel,

Middle Channel, and North Channel. South Channel, consisting of East Channel and West Channel, and North Channel are

generally used by local vessels. Large vessels use Pedro Channel and West Channel. 

4.55 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise in Palk Strait (Point

Pedro) is 0.7m at MHWS, and 0.5m at MHWN. 

4.55 The tidal currents in Palk Strait and Palk Bay are irregular,

being influenced by the prevailing winds. During February,

March, and April the tidal currents are more regular, changing

every 6.5 hours at high and low water in the bay. They set W

during the rising tide and E during the falling tide at Trincomalee. 

4.55 From West Channel to Delft Island, about 18 miles SSW, the

tidal currents follow the direction of the coast, setting SW and

SE during the falling tide at Trincomalee. At springs, the currents reach a velocity of nearly 1 knot in Delft Channel and

about 0.8 knot in the West Channel. 

4.55 Currents generally set with the wind, except in May and October when they are variable. During February, March, and

April, in a calm, there is no current in the entrance of Palk Bay. 

4.55 In the middle of Palk Bay, the current sets leeward in either

monsoon. 

4.55 When a N current is running outside Palk Strait, a current

setting out of the strait is usually found. When a S current is

running, it is presumed that the reverse takes place. Close inshore, tidal currents are felt, and they vary the strength of the

current in the vicinity of Middle Banks. 

4.55 Depths—Limitations.—South Banks (9°57'N., 79°57'E.)

consist of a number of shoals with depths of less than 5.5m.

Depths of 7.3 to 9.1m extend E of these banks to join Point

Pedro Shoal, N of Point Pedro. A depth of 5.5m was reported

(1973) to lie in approximate position 10°01'N, 80°03'E. 

4.55 Middle Banks consist of numerous shoals, with depths of

less than 5.5m, lying N of South Banks. The banks include

Eight Foot Bank, with a least depth of 2.3m, about 6.5 miles S

of Point Calimere (10°18'N., 79°52'E.). 

4.55 South Channel consists of E Channel and West Channel.

East Channel, with a least depth of 7.3m, lies between South

Banks and Point Pedro Shoal; a depth of 5.5m was reported

(1973) about 16.5 miles NW of Point Pedro. The channel, with

a least depth of 10.1m in the fairway, lies between South Banks

and the shoal water extending NW from Karaitivu (9°44'N.,

79°53'E.). A least depth of 10.7m could be carried (1944)

through West Channel over a width of 0.3 mile, but local

knowledge is necessary to ensure safe navigation in this depth. 

4.55 Middle Channel, between South Banks and Middle Banks, is

about 4 miles wide, with a least depth of 4.6m in the center of

the channel; elsewhere the least depth in this channel is 5.5m. 

4.55 North Channel, between Middle Banks and Point Calimere

to the N, has a least depth of 5.9m over a width of about 1.8

miles, between the shore bank fringing Point Calimere and a

4.1m patch about 4 miles SSE of the point. 

4.55 Caution.—It has been reported (1993) that vessels may not

use Palk Strait and the E territorial waters of Sri Lanka without

prior permission of the Sri Lankan Naval Command.

4.55 A stranded wreck lies in Middle Channel SE of Middle

Banks. Other dangerous wrecks in Palk Bay and Palk Strait are

best seen on the chart. 

4.55 Sri Lanka has prohibited use of Palk Strait and waters east of

Sri Lanka from any unauthorized vessels due to acts of terrorism. Sri Lanka requires all vessels in this vicinity contact the

Sri Lankan Command by telephone at 941-42-3019 or by facsimile at 941-43-3986 if they wish to enter this area.

Palk Strait—South Side (Sri Lanka)

4.56 The S shore of Palk Strait is formed by the N coast of

the Jaffna Peninsula, which extends about 21 miles WSW from

Point Pedro (9°50'N., 80°15'E.). This coast is generally low

and sandy, with some cliffs and sandhills visible from seaward.

It is backed by salt water lagoons and stony plains.The Jaffna

Peninsula is most fertile, being irrigated from numerous wells. 

4.56 The coast from Point Pedro to Palmyra Point, the N extremity of Sri Lanka, then to Tondaimanar, 4.5 miles farther WSW,

is lined with palmyra and coconut palms from 21 to 27m high,

and fringed by a narrow reef extending up to 183m offshore.

Tandaimanar is marked by a cliff, 7.6m high; the lagoon entrance close W serves as a leading mark for East Channel. 

4.56 Between Tondaimanar and Kankesanturai, about 5.5 miles

W, the coast is stony, lined with tall palms, and fringed with a

reef. Vessels should not approach within 0.5 mile of this coast. 

4.57 Kankesanturai (9°49'N., 80°03'E.) (World Port Index No. 49300) is the chief port of call on the N coast of Sri

Lanka, for vessels during the Southwest Monsoon. It has considerable trade with ports in S India, and there is a custom

house. 

4.57 There are two stone bastions on the beach and a small pier. A

light is shown from a round masonry tower, 22.3m high, near

the W bastion. 

4.57 Cargo boats, which may be used as lighters, anchor off the

beach during good weather; lighterage operations are only conducted from March to October during the Southwest Monsoon. 

4.57 A chimney, about 61m high, of the cement works, is conspicuous about 1 mile WSW of Kankesanturai. There are two radio

masts at Jaffna Airport, about 2.5 miles ESE of the port. 

4.57 A breakwater extends about 0.5 mile NW from the shore 0.5

mile W of Western Bastion. A spur extends 0.2 mile W from

the breakwater near its NW end; a quay for vessels discharging

coal and gypsum for the cement works was under construction

in 1983 on the S side of the spur. 

4.57 There is a berth for coastal vessels drawing up to 4.2m on the

SW side of the breakwater near its root. 

4.57 Vessels of 20,000 dwt, with a draft of 7.3m, berth between

two mooring buoys at the harbor entrance until the quay has

been completed. 

4.57 Anchorage for vessels waiting to berth can be obtained about

0.5 mile NW of the breakwater head. A pilot will board at the

anchorage. Vessels not supplying the cement works anchor off

the beach near Western Bastion in good weather.

4.57 The coast between Kankesanturai and the NW extremity of

the Jaffna Peninsula, about 9 miles WSW, is bordered by
Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 117

Pub. 173

palmyra and coconut palms, and fringed by coral reef. A conspicuous sand hill lies about 1 mile W of Matakal, a village

about 5 miles WSW of Kankesanturai. 

4.57 A bank, with depths of 5.5m and less, extends up to 2 miles

offshore in places off the NW end of the Jaffna Peninsula. A

3.2m coral patch lies near the outer edge of this bank, nearly

1.8 miles NW of the conspicuous sand hill W of Matakal. 

4.57 Karaitivu (9°44'N., 79°53'E.), off the NW end of the Jaffna

Peninsula, has a sandhill, 6.1m high, on the NE point of the island; the sand hill has some palms on it and is conspicuous

from NW. A light is shown from a white masonry tower, 29.5m

high, on Kovilan Point, the NW extremity of Karaitivu. 

4.57 A flat, with depths of less than 5.5m, fronts the W side of

Karaitivu, extending up to 3 miles offshore. Several shoals,

with depths of 3.7 to 5.5m, lie N and NW of this flat, and with

Kovilan Point bearing between 125° and 075°; the outermost

of these shoals, with a least depth of 4.1m, lies about 5.8 miles

WNW of Kovilan Point. 

Palk Strait—North Side (India)

4.58 The N shore of Palk Strait consists of the low-lying

coast between Point Calimere (10°17'N., 79°53'E.) and a low

point, about 39 miles WSW, which projects from the coast

close S of the entrance to the Vellar River.

4.58 Point Calimere Light is shown from a concrete tower, 18.2m

high, close within the point; a racon transmits from the tower.

A drying sand bank, inside of which local craft find shelter in

bad weather, extends about 1.5 miles NE of the point. 

4.58 Between Point Calimere and Atirampattinam, about 29 miles

W, the coast consists of mud flats, covered with mangrove

bushes, and flooded during heavy rains and high spring tides. 

4.58 Atirampattinam (Adirampatnam) is a port of refuge for local

craft between May and September. It has a considerable local

trade, principally with Sri Lanka.

4.58 Shaullavanaigenpatam, about 6 miles SW of Atirampattinam, has a a high column which is conspicuous and visible 15

miles.

4.58 Anchorage may be obtained, in about 5.8m, soft mud, with

the white tall mast at Atirampattinam bearing 000°, about 4.5

miles, and with the column at Shallavanaigapatam bearing

281°. Smaller vessels may anchor closer to the town. With S or

SE winds, a heavy swell sets on this coast making the anchorage unsafe, but during the Northeast Monsoon it is considered

good. 

4.58 A spit of hard sand, with depths of less than 5.5m, extends

13 miles ESE from the low point close S of the entrance to the

Vellar River. A detached 5.5m patch lies about 1 mile SE of the

outer end of the spit. 

4.58 A heavy swell generally runs over the spit and it should not

be approached from the E within a depth of 11m. 

4.58 Large vessels should use Pedro Channel and West Channel.

The least depth in the fairway of West Channel is 10.1m.

4.58 Vessels intending to enter through South Channel should

make for a position about 12.5 miles N of Tondaimanar

(9°49'N., 80°08'E.); when the lagoon entrance close W of the

village can be distinguished, it should be steered for bearing

185° until depths increase to 11m. Then alter course W towards

the entrance to West Channel, keeping in depths of 11 to

12.8m. 

4.58 At the E entrance to West Channel, with Kovilan Light bearing about 158° and the obelisk on the N end of Analativu

(9°41'N., 79°47'E.) bearing about 207°, a course of 281°

should be made good through West Channel, exercising great

care, by keeping in the middle of the fairway to avoid the bank

off Matakal and the shoals extending NW of Karaitivu. 

4.58 Vessels intending to enter Palk Strait through North Channel

should sound continuously, and if coming from the SE, should

not get into depths of less than 14.6m until Point Calimere can

be distinguished. 

4.58 Caution.—Many fish traps are laid off the N coast of Sri

Lanka and constitute a danger to powered vessels, especially at

night, due to the large blocks of wood and strong moorings attached to them. 

Palk Bay

4.59 Palk Bay (9°30'N., 79°30'E.), the continuation S of

Palk Strait, is bounded on the E by the coast of Sri Lanka, on

the S by Mannar Island, Adam’s Bridge, and Pamban Island,

and on the W by the coast of India. 

4.59 The bay has general depths of 11 to 12.8m, but on its E side

depths of 9.1m and less extend up to 15 miles from the coast of

Sri Lanka, and within it are several islands, rocks, and shoals.

On the S side of the bay depths of less than 9.1m extend up to 7

miles from the coast. The NW part of the bay has not been fully surveyed. 

4.59 Caution.—Dangerous wrecks and other hazards to navigation in Palk Strait are best seen on the chart. 

Palk Bay—East Side (Sri Lanka)

4.60 A flat, with depths of less than 5.5m, extends about 10

miles W of the W end of Jaffna Peninsula; several islands and

shoals lie on this flat, and enclose a large basin with depths of

2.3 to 3.2m. 

4.60 Karaitivu (9°44'N., 79°53'E.), the northernmost of the islands, was previously described in paragraph 4.57. 

4.60 Eluvativu, about 2.5 miles WSW of the S end of Karaitivu, is

low and covered with tall trees. 

4.60 Analativu, about 1.5 miles SW of Eluvativu, is covered with

tall trees; a white obelisk, 26.8m high, is conspicuous at its N

end. 

4.60 Nayinativu, 1.5 miles S of Analativu, also has tall trees on it;

there is a conspicuous small temple, with a red roof, near the

SW end of the island. 

4.60 Punkudutivu, separated from Nayinativu by a channel about

1 mile wide, is planted with some coconut palms. Punkudutivu

Light is shown from a conspicuous stone building near the SE

end of the island.

4.60 Velanai, NE of Punkudutivu, is the largest island of the

group. Mandaitivu, separated from Velanai by a narrow channel, is marshy in its N end, but there are some coconut palms

on its S end. 

4.60 Kayts (9°42'N., 79°51'E.) is a small port on the N end of Velanai, near the middle of the S side the channel separating Velanai and Karaitivu. The port is open throughout the year, but is

most frequented during the Southwest Monsoon. 

4.60 Fort Hammenhiel, the quarantine station, lies about 0.3 mile

SW of the SW extremity of Karaitivu. A light is shown from a
118 Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 

Pub. 173

structure on the fort. 

4.60 Anchorage may be obtained, in 7.3m, sand, with the N point

of Eluvativu bearing 135°, distant 1 mile. Small local vessels

anchor, in about 3.7 to 5.5m, from 1.5 to 3 miles NW of Fort

Hammenhiel, and discharge part of their cargo before entering

port. 

4.61 Delft Island (9°31'N., 79°41'E.) is separated from

Nayinativu by Delft Channel. Tall palm trees are on the W and

NE parts of the island, while the S part is grassland, divided by

loose stone walls, with trees about 6.1m high. When seen from

some distance N, the island appears as two islands, due to a

shallow salt water lake which occupies the middle of the island.

4.61 A white iron framework beacon, 16.1m high and surmounted

by a white disc, marks the NW extremity of Delft Island. A

light for the use of fishermen is shown from the NE extremity

of the island. A beacon, consisting of a white brick tower with

an elevation of 14.6m, marks the SE extremity of the island. 

4.61 Temporary anchorage, during strong NE winds, may be obtained off the W side of Delft Island, with the S end of the high

palms bearing 067°.

4.61 The fairway of Delft Channel has a least depth of 9.1m over

a width of about 1.5 miles between the 10m curve lines off

Nayinativu and the NE extremity of Delft Island; a depth of

9.1m can be carried over the N end of the shoal bank which extends NNE from Delft Island. 

4.61 Neduntivu Shoal, with a least depth of 3.7m, lies on the W

side of the channel, and extends from 0.5 mile to 2.5 miles

NNW from the NE extremity of Delft Island. 

4.61 On the E side of the channel, a narrow detached shoal ridge

of sand and coral, with depths of 4.9 to 5.5m, lies about 0.6

mile off and nearly parallel with the W side of Nayinativu.

4.61 Kakerativu (Kakeraitivu), about 9.8 miles ESE of Delft Island, is a sandy islet, 4.6m high and covered with scrub. A conspicuous white framework beacon, 16.1m high and

surmounted by a white disc, stands on the SW side of the island. 

4.61 Palaitivu, 8 miles ENE of Kakerativu, is mostly covered with

coarse grass and scrub, up to 6.1m high. A white tower, 7.6m

high, stands near the NE end of the island. 

4.61 A rocky shoal, with a least depth of 1.2m, lies about 4 miles

NW of Palaitivu. 

4.61 Jaffna Lagoon, a large, shallow expanse of water, is entered

between Kalmunai Point (9°36'N., 80°03'E.) and Mandaitivu,

about 3 miles W. A white tower, 7.6m high, stands on Kalmunai Point. 

4.61 A light is shown from Jaffna Obelisk, a white concrete tower

about 2 miles NW of Kalmunai Point. 

4.61 Jaffna (9°39'N., 80°01'E.), the principal town of the Jaffna

Peninsula, lies on the N shore of Jaffna Lagoon, about 4 miles

NW of Kalmunai Point. 

4.61 A radio mast, 21.3m high and marked by a red obstruction

light, stands in Jaffna, about 2.3 miles NW of Jaffna Obelisk. 

4.61 The Northeast Monsoon prevails at Jaffna from the end of

November to February; the Southwest Monsoon blows from

the middle of May to October. The prevailing winds are SE

during March and the first half of April. 

4.61 Irnativu North (9°17'N., 79°59'E.) and Irnativu South are

two low, coral islands, separated by a canoe passage. Irnativu

North, the W island, has a village lying among palms in its N

part; a tower, with an elevation of 16.1m, stands near the NE

end of the island. 

Palk Bay—South Side

4.62 Talaimannar (9°06'N., 79°43'E.), near the W end of

Mannar Island, is connected to the railway system of Sri Lanka. A pier extends about 264m N of the coast at Talaimannar;

the pier support a double railway track, and has depths of 3m at

its head. There is regular ferry service between Talaimannar

and Dhanushkodi, about 19 miles WNW. 

4.62 Mannar Island Light is shown from a conspicuous white

concrete tower at the root of the pier. 

4.62 Pamban Island and Adam’s Bridge have been previously described in paragraph 4.11; Mannar Island has been previously

described in paragraph 4.12. 

4.62 Dhanushkodi (9°11'N., 79°25'E.), about 2 miles NW of

Lands End, is connected to the railway system of India. A pier,

for use by vessels of the ferry service between Dhanushkodi

and Talaimannar, extends from the NE coast of Pamban Island

abreast the town. The pier is 219m long, with depths of 3.4m

on each side of the pier head; the pier carries a double railway

track. 

4.62 Kachchaitivu (Kachchtivu) (9°23'N., 79°25'E.), about 10

miles SW of Delft Island, is 12m high and covered with scrub.

There is a well and a small shrine on the NE side of the island.

Depths of less than 9.1m extend 1 mile SE of the island.

4.62 Depths of less than 5.5m extend about 2.5 mile NE from the

broad peninsula extending N from Pamban Island. 

4.63 Pamban (9°17'N., 79°13'E.) (World Port Index No.

49330), administered by a conservator, lies close N of the W

extremity of Pamban Island. Cargo is handled by lighters to

and from the beach. 

4.63 South and SW winds prevail from April to October. Pamban

Light is shown from a conspicuous white tower on a sandhill

on the NW point of Pamban Island. NE Beacon, 5.5m high and

white, lies close N of the light. 

4.63 Kanthe Thuki Reef, composed of partly drying coral heads,

lies between 0.3 and 0.5 mile W of Pamban Island Light. A

boat channel between this reef and the coast is used by pilots

when boarding vessels during the Northeast Monsoon.

4.63 Outer Fairway Buoy, painted in black and white checkers, is

moored in the N approach to Pamban Pass, about 0.3 mile NW

of Kanthe Thuki Reef, and about 0.7 mile WNW of Pamban Island Light. 

4.63 Anchorage may be obtained, in 6.7m, mud, good holding

ground, with Pamban Island Light bearing between 122° and

134°, distant 1 mile. 

4.63 Good anchorage may be obtained, in 10m, mud, with Pamban Island Light bearing 135°, distant about 3.3 miles. 

4.63 Pamban Pass was previously described in paragraph 4.10.

The channel N of the rolling lift bridge over Pamban Pass is

marked by buoys and beacons. 

4.63 The coast from Ramen Point (9°17'N., 79°11'E.) to Devipattanam, about 21 miles NW, is generally low and level. 

4.63 Kathu Vallimuni Reef, consisting of scattered coral heads,

extends up to 0.5 mile offshore, and lies parallel with the coast

for about 1.8 miles W of Ramen Point. There are several heads,
Sector 4. Sri Lanka and India—East Coast—Cape Comorin to Point Calimere 119

Pub. 173

which dry 0.6m, at the E end of the reef. 

4.63 Vella Pertumuni Reef extends about 3 miles W of Kathu Vallimuni Reef, from which it is separated by a boat channel.

4.63 A water tower, 17.7m high, consisting of a red square tank

on a framework structure, is conspicuous about 3 miles W of

Ramen Point.

4.63 The town of Attangarai lies on the NW side of the entrance

of a river, about midway along this stretch of coast. A detached

6.9m patch lies about 7.5 miles NE of the river entrance.

Palk Bay—West Side (India)

4.64 The W shore of Palk Bay between the low point S of

the Vellar River (10°04'N., 79°14'E.) and Devipattana, about

40 miles SW, is generally low and level. Depths of 5.5m and

less extend from 3 to 5 miles off this coast. 

4.64 Pasipattanam Mosque stands on the coast, about 17.5 miles

SW of the above low point.

4.64 Tondi (9°45'N., 79°01'E.), about 5 miles farther SW, is a

small port for local coasting craft. Two white masonry beacons, 4.5m high, mark the port limits. A light stands about 4.5

miles NE of Tondi. 

4.64 Anchorage may obtained, in 6m, mud, about 5 miles ESE of

Tondi, but this position is exposed to all but offshore winds.

Small vessels anchor nearer the town, in about 4.9m, stiff mud. 
121

Pub. 173

5. 

The Laccadive Islands and the Maldive Islands

5.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 5 — CHART INFORMATION
123

Pub. 173

SECTOR 5 

THE LACCADIVE ISLANDS AND THE MALDIVE ISLANDS

5.0 Plan.—This sector describes the islands, atolls, and reefs

which make up the Laccadive Islands and the Maldive Islands.

The arrangement of the sector is from N to S. 

The Laccadive Islands

5.1 The Laccadive Islands (10°00'N., 72°30'E.), meaning the hundred thousand islands, consist of a group of coral

atolls lying between 115 and 215 miles off the SW coast of India; several detached shoals and banks lie off the islands.

5.1 The islands are divided into two groups, N and S, separated

approximately by the parallel of 11°N. The N group, known as

the Amindivi Islands, consists of Chetlat, Bitra, Kiltan, Cardamum, and Amini. The S group, known as the Cannanore Islands, consists of Agatti, Androth, Pitti Islet, Kavaratti, Suheli

Par, and Kalpeni, on the N side of Nine Degree Channel, and

Minicoy (8°18'N., 73°02'E.), on the S side of Nine Degree

Channel. Minicoy lies about 110 miles S of other islands of the

S group and is of special importance due to its location in the

principal navigational route of the Indian Ocean.

5.1 Each of these islands lies on extensive coral shoals and no

parts of these formations are more than about 4m high. The

outer edges, which generally enclose a regularly formed lagoon, are higher than the body of these shoals; the lagoons remain calm in the worst weather. The receding tide leaves the

outer edges of the reef nearly dry and the tide runs out of the

lagoon through breaks in the edges, which are large enough to

admit light craft into the natural harbor.

5.1 Due to the great depths in the vicinity of the islands soundings give no warning of their proximity, and great caution

should be taken in thick weather.

5.1 As these islets and islands are low, with coconut trees only

18 to 24m high and not discernible for any great distance, they

should be avoided. There are, however, some wide and deep

channels between them. 

5.1 Caution.—Fish aggregating devices, marked by yellow

lights, are located throughout the islands. Mariners should keep

at least 500m off these devices. 

The Laccadive Islands—North Group

5.2 Cherbaniani Reef (12°20'N., 71°55'E.) is the northernmost dangerous reef of the Laccadive Islands. A sand cay,

with an islet and some sand banks on its N and E sides, lies at

the S end of the reef, but the greater part of the reef is only visible towards LW. Some boat passages apparently lead into the

lagoon. 

5.2 The NW, N, and E sides NEof Cherbaniani Reef are steep-to,

but a bank extends about 1 mile offshore from its W and S

sides. 

5.2 Anchorage may be obtained, in 16.5 to 18.3m, on this bank

during the Northeast Monsoon. 

5.2 Byramgore Reef (11°55'N., 71°45'E.) is separated from

Cherbaniani Reef to NNE by a channel about 17 miles wide,

very deep, and free from dangers. 

5.2 Byramgore Reef is below-water, except for its SE point,

which dries. Shoal depths lie all around this reef, but the shoal

area on the N side, with depths of 7.3 to 14.6m, is about 2

miles wide and is indicated by overfalls. This N shoal area

should be avoided as it may be shallower and is encumbered

with coral reefs which can be plainly seen by a vessel passing

over them. The coral rocks forming the reef are discernible at

LW.

5.2 Bitra Par, about 24 miles SE of Byramgore Reef, is an atoll

which encloses a lagoon. The barrier reef, which dries from 0.3

to 0.9m, is narrow on its W and N sides, but it increases in

width on its E and S sides. A light is shown from a white

framework tower on Bitra Islet.

5.3 Tree Islet (11°36'N., 72°11'E.), at the N end of the

atoll, is about 0.5 mile long in a NW-SE direction and about

183m wide. 

5.3 An opening in the reef, close S of Tree Islet, has a depth of

2.7m; boats can enter the lagoon through this opening. Depths

within the lagoon are from 5.5 to 7.3m, but it is encumbered

with coral reefs, drying and awash, especially toward the S

end.

5.3 Anchorage can be taken, in 19.2m, abreast the opening S of

Tree Islet, with the NE extremity of the islet bearing 335°, distant about 0.6 mile. A vessel reported this anchorage was unsafe for a vessel 91.5m in length, and that there was no safe

anchorage off Bitra. 

5.3 Tidal currents at springs set strongly in and out of the lagoon; care is necessary when making the anchorage.

5.3 Chetlat Island (11°41'N., 72°42'E.), about 31 miles ENE of

Bitra, is wooded and inhabited. There is a jetty on the NW side

of the island. A coral reef stretches around the S and W sides of

the island, extending about 0.5 mile from its W side. Shoal water extends about 0.2 mile N and 0.6 mile WNW from the N

end of the island, about 0.4 mile W from the coral reef, and

about 0.4 mile SSW from the S extremity of the island. 

5.3 Anchorage can be obtained, in good weather, on the shoal areas extending N from the N end and SSW from the S end of the

island.

5.3 During the Northeast Monsoon, the best anchorage, in 11 to

18.3m, lies about 0.4 mile offshore, with the SW end of the

barrier reef bearing about 338°, and with the SW and SE points

of Chetlat Island bearing 011° and 045°, respectively. 

5.3 When landing on the island, it is advisable to use a local

boat. The best landing place is on the S side of the island, near

the SE point, where there is a depth of 2.1m at HW and 1.2m at

LW.

Kiltan Island

5.4 Kiltan Island (11°29'N., 73°00'E.), about 20 miles

ESE of Chetlat Island, is covered with coconut palms, about

27m high, A reef fringes the W side of the island extending
124 Sector 5. The Laccadive Islands and the Maldive Islands 

Pub. 173

about 0.4 mile W; shoal water extends about 0.2 mile farther

W. Kiltan Island was reported to be a good radar target at 13

miles. 

5.4 Rocks and foul ground border the rest of the island; shoal

water extends about 0.3 mile from the N end and about 0.2

mile from the S end of the island. A dangerous submerged

wreck lies about 0.3 mile NW of the NW end of the island.

5.4 Kiltan North Light is shown from a white, round concrete

tower at the NW corner of the island. Kiltan South Light is

shown from a round stone tower, painted in red and white

checkers, situated at the S end of the island. 

5.4 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained off Kiltan Island

in fair weather. The best position, in about 9.1m, lies with the

light structure bearing 129°, distant about 0.6 mile. During S

winds, vessels should anchor a little closer inshore.

5.4 Anchorage can also be obtained off the S end of the island,

in 9.1 to 11m, about 0.4 mile offshore, if the swell is not heavy. 

5.4 A boat passage leads through the N end of the reef to a shallow lagoon where there is a jetty on the W side of the island; a

gap in the reef, about 0.6 mile S, is sometimes smoother. Each

gap is marked by buoys. 

5.4 In calm weather, there is a good landing at the middle of the

E side of the island, where a steep-to sandy beach breaks the

fringing foul ground.

5.4 Caution.—Two patches of discolored water, about 0.5 mile

apart and of a light greenish-brown color, were reported (1919)

about 45 miles NNE of Kiltan Island. 

5.5 Basses de Pedro (13°05'N., 72°25'E.), the S end of

which lies about 63 miles NNW of Kiltan Island, has depths of

16.4 to 73m. The bank is large, steep-to, and composed of

sand, shells, and decayed coral; the water on the bank is not

discolored. In 1974, the bank was reported to lie from 4 to 5

miles SE of its charted position.

5.5 Sesostris Bank (13°08'N., 72°00'E.), about 11 miles W of

Basses de Pedro, has depths of 20m to 77m and is steep-to. 

5.5 Cora Divh, with its SW point about 21 miles NNE of Sesostris Bank, has depths of 27.4 to 55m, sand, decayed coral, and

broken shells.

5.5 A depth of 24m was reported (1963) to lie about 13 miles

ENE of the S end of Cora Divh. 

5.5 Elicalpeni Bank (11°15'N., 74°03'E.), about 60 miles ESE

of Kiltan Island, is about 4 miles in extent, with general depths

of 12.8 to 16.5m and a least depth of 10.4m near its SE edge. 

5.5 Depths from 18.3 to 29m, some unexamined, lie between 16

and 21 miles ENE of Elicalpeni Bank, and a depth of 20.1m,

existence doubtful, was reported (1964) to lie 20 miles E of the

bank. Depths of 49m (in 1949) and 35m (in 1971) were reported about 5 miles NNW and 47 miles N, respectively, of Elicalpeni Bank. These areas should be avoided, particularly when

the Southwest Monsoon is strong enough to raise a considerable sea.

Cardamum Island and Amini Island

5.6 Cardamum Island (Kardamum Island), about 18 miles

SW of Kiltan Island, forms the E side of a coral atoll. The ends

of the island are covered with a low growth of scrub. There is a

village in the middle of the island. 

5.6 The drying coral reef, which encloses a shallow lagoon, extends nearly parallel with the island, about 0.8 mile from its W

side, and surrounds both the N and S ends of the island. It extends about 0.3 mile N of the N end of the island, and about 0.8

miles S of the S end of the island. 

5.6 There are two narrow boat passages through the reef, both

marked on each side by a stone post; one passage is at the N

end of the atoll and the other 3 miles SSW of the N end.

5.6 Anchorage in good weather can be obtained off the reef S of

Kadmat, in depths of 8m to 20m, and from 0.2 to 0.5 mile from

the reef. 

5.6 Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in 31m, near

the boat passage, and about 0.2 mile from the reef. 

5.7 Amini Island (Ameni Island) (11°07'N., 72°44'E.),

the most important of the Amindivi Islands, is fringed by a reef

from about 0.2 to 0.4 mile wide. The island has a post office

and a hospital. The channel between Amini Island and Cardamum Island is safe and deep, but depths of less than 10m

project 0.5 mile S from the S tip of the reefs surrounding Cardamum Island. 

5.7 Amini Island Light is shown on the S point of the island. 

5.7 The village is in the middle of the W side of the Island. A

raised stone platform, with steps leading to the beach, is in

front of the village. A stone pillar lies behind the platform.

Fronting the platform is a narrow passage across the reef which

should be navigated with caution; boats approach the steps

through a channel marked by pillars.

5.7 Anchorage can be obtained off the W side of Amini, in

depths of 7 to 15m; outside the 20m depth contour, depths increase rapidly. The recommended anchorage is with the S point

of the island bearing 137°, distant 1.1 miles, in a depth of about

15m. In 1948, a vessel approached its anchorage, with the steps

in front of the village bearing 107°, and anchored on that bearing, in a depth of 9.1m, about 0.5 mile from the beach. 

5.7 Peremul Par, about 37 miles W of Amini Island, is a narrow

drying reef enclosing a lagoon; at HW, with a smooth sea,

much of the reef does not break, making the edge of the reef

difficult to distinguish. 

5.7 Inside the reef, a shoal, with depths of less than 1.8m, extends about 0.8 mile from its SW and N sides towards the middle of the island. The remainder of the lagoon is encumbered

with drying coral reefs, with depths of 1.8 to 11m between

them. 

5.7 Several good boat entrances are on the E side of the island;

two boat entrances are on the W side of the island. 

5.7 Anchorage can be obtained, in 18.3m, about 0.3 mile offshore, abreast the boat entrances on the SW side of Peremul

Par; local knowledge is necessary. Anchorage can also be obtained, in 18.3 to 22m, off the NE side of the reef, with the sand

cay bearing 213°, distant about 0.5 mile. 

The Laccadive Islands—South Group

5.8 Androth Island (10°49'N., 73°41'E.), the most fertile

of the Laccadive Islands, is densely planted with coconut

palms. It is the residence of the Tehsilder, who administers the

Laccadive Islands. The village lies about 1 mile from the W

end of the island. There is a small hospital and a leper colony

on the island. 

5.8 A light, with a racon, is shown from a white, square masonry
Sector 5. The Laccadive Islands and the Maldive Islands 125

Pub. 173

structure, 33m high with black bands, on the E point of the island, and a light is shown from a white concrete tower, 10m

high, on the NW corner of the island. A depth of 12.5m is located about 6 miles ENE of Androth. 

5.8 The island is surrounded by a coral reef, through which there

is a small channel for boats on the N side. The S side of this

reef is steep-to, but from the N side a coral bank projects about

6 miles N, and has a greatest width of about 10 miles, with

depths from 10.4 to 31m. Shoals, with depths of 5m and 5.9m,

lie about 0.6 mile SSW and 0.4 mile W, respectively, of the

NW end of the island. Several isolated shoals, with depths of

10.5 and 11m, lie up to 1.1 miles N of the N coast of the island. 

5.8 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

about 10m, sand and coral, anywhere off the N side of the island, about 0.5 mile offshore; local knowledge is necessary. 

5.8 Good anchorage can be obtained, in 9.1m, coarse sand and

broken shells, about 0.7 mile N of a flagstaff on the shore close

N of a red-roofed mosque at the W end of the village. 

5.8 Anchorage can also be obtained, in 16.5 to 18.3m, off the E

end of the island where the bottom appears to be smoother, but

local knowledge is necessary. 

5.8 During the Northeast Monsoon, vessels can anchor, in 18.3

to 22m, about 0.5 mile offshore on the SW coast of the island,

but there is little shelter.

5.8 Caution.—Elikalpeni Bank, with a least depth of 10.4m, lies

about 33 miles NE of Androth Island. Other unexamined

depths of as little as 18.3m lie about 20 miles ENE of Elikalpeni Bank.

5.9 Pitti Islet (Piti Sand (10°46'N., 72°33'E.), about 66

miles W of Androth Island, is a low islet. The N and NE sides

are sandy. A black rock is on the E side and there were several

stone cairns, about 6.1m high, on the islet.

5.9 Piti Sand Bank, a bank of sand, with charted depths of 10 to

37m, extends about 3 miles S and 24 miles NNE from the islet.

The bank has not been fully examined and depths may be less

than charted. 

5.9 Agatti Island (10°51'N., 72°12'E.), about 21 miles W of Pitti Islet, lies towards the S end of an unnamed atoll, with

Kalputhi Islet (Kalputi Islet) close SSW. A clump of palm lies

about 1 mile from the S end of Agatti Island. A light is occasionally shown from the N end of Agatti Island. 

5.9 The coral reef surrounding Agatti Island and Kalputhi Islet

extends about 2 miles offshore on the W side and encloses a

shallow lagoon; boats may enter the lagoon through a passage

with the clump of palms on Agatti Island bearing 142°. Landing is on the NW side of Agatti Island on a steep-to beach. 

5.9 Depths of less than 10m extend 0.5 mile S of Kalputhi Islet

and the same distance N of the N end of Agatti Island. 

5.9 Bingaram, an islet in the N part of the atoll, lies 6 miles NE

of the N point of Agatti Island; it is 0.7 mile long in a N-S direction and 0.5 mile wide at its widest part. 

5.9 Tinnakara, another islet 1 mile long, lies 1.5 miles ENE of

Bingaram. These two islets are nearly encircled by a steep-to

reef which, from a position 2.5 miles NW of Bingaram, trends

ESE for 4.5 miles, then SW for 3 miles, and then W for 3.5

miles, lying about 1 mile N and S of Bingaram. The Parali Islets, three small sand cays, lie on the NE corner of the reef and

are almost connected to the E end of Tinnakara, which lies

about 0.3 mile within the E side of the reef.

5.9 Landing can be effected on Bingaram and Tinnakara, but

both are uninhabited and have no good water. The area between the W extremities of the encircling reef is shallow, with

numerous coral heads with depths of less than 1m; much of the

lagoon within the reef dries. 

5.9 Anchorage can be taken, in 18.3 to 22m, coral, off the entrance to the reef surrounding Agatti Island, but it is not recommended.

5.9 Good anchorage can be taken, in depths of 10m to 15m, in an

area 2 miles wide between the N end of Agatti Island and the

reef encircling Bingaram; this area is apparently free from dangers, but ships should proceed with caution. The recommended

anchorage is with the NE extremity of Agatti Island bearing

215°, distant 1.5 miles, in a depth of 13.7m, coral.

5.9 On the W side of the atoll, near its N end, there is an entrance to the lagoon about 0.8 mile wide. Good anchorage can

be obtained W of this entrance, in 10m, coral, with the N point

of Bingaram Islet bearing 078°, distant 3.5 miles. 

5.10 Kavaratti Island (10°34'N., 72°39'E.), about 61

miles WSW of Androth Island, is low and was densely covered

with palms, about 28m high, in 1964. The N part of the island

is more heavily populated; the Administrator for the Laccadive

Islands resides on the island. Kavaratti Island Light, a round

white concrete tower with black bands and a racon, is situated

on the SE point of the island.

5.10 On the NW side of the island, a reef lies about 0.6 mile offshore, nearly parallel to the beach, and encloses a shallow lagoon. The reef, steep-to except at its S end, has depths of 183m

within 0.2 mile of its edge. There is a boat entrance at the N

end of the lagoon, with a least depth of 0.9m. A lighted beacon

marks the W side of the entrance; within the entrance, lighted

buoys mark the channel between the reef and shoal water fringing the island.

5.10 There are two jetties are situated on the N part of the NW

side of the island. 

5.10 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents near Kavaratti Island

were observed, in October, to set SE with the flood and NW

with the ebb, at a velocity of 0.5 to 1 knot.

5.10 Anchorage.—Anchorage, during the Northeast Monsoon

and in fair weather, can be obtained, in 7.3 to 12.8m, sand and

coral, on a shoal about 0.7 mile wide, which extends about 0.7

mile S from the island.

5.11 Suheli Par (10°05'N., 72°16'E.), the SW atoll of the

Laccadive Islands, consists of a drying barrier reef enclosing a

lagoon. North Islet (Valiyakara Islet) and South Islet (Cheriyakara Islet), both uninhabited, lie in the lagoon. The reef was

reported to extend 2 miles SW in 1980. 

5.11 Suheli Par Light is shown from a white metal column, with

red bands, on the SE end of South Islet. A light is shown from a

white, wooden framework tower on North Islet.

5.11 It was reported in 1980 and in 1982, that the reef extended 3

to 3.5 miles SW from the light. 

5.11 Good radar returns have been reported from Suheli Par at 16

miles. 

5.11 Two openings are on the NW side of the barrier reef, which

are navigable by small vessels with a draft not exceeding 1.8m,

but local knowledge is necessary. 

5.11 Good anchorage was found (1948), in 12m, sand, with the N
126 Sector 5. The Laccadive Islands and the Maldive Islands 

Pub. 173

end of North Islet bearing 163° and the S end of South Islet

bearing 201°. In 1979, it was reported that the reef projected 4

miles WSW from the light. 

5.12 Kalpeni (10°06'N., 73°39'E.), the SE atoll of the Laccadive Islands, lies about 39 miles S of Androth Island. It consists of two narrow, low islands lying on the E side of a reef

which encloses a lagoon. 

5.12 Kalpeni Island, the S and larger island, was densely planted

with coconut palms, about 30m, high in 1967. A steep-to bank,

with depths between 10 and 20m, extends about 0.4 mile S

from the S end of the island. Kalpeni Light is shown from a

round stone tower, 40m high, lying 1.8 miles N of the S extremity of Kalpeni Island. A bungalow and a mosque, 3m high,

are reported to stand nearby.

5.12 Cheriyam Island (Cheria Island), the N island, is also covered in palm trees. 

5.12 The barrier reef is steep-to and the sea breaks heavily on it.

A narrow boat channel leads through the reef into the lagoon.

Landing can sometimes be made on the E side of Kalpeni Island. 

5.12 Good radar returns have been reported from Kalpeni Island

at 20 miles. 

5.12 Anchorage.—A vessel anchored (1950) in 12.8m, coral,

sand, and rock, about 0.4 mile offshore, off the S side of Kalpeni Island. Anchorage has been reported 0.7 mile N of Cheriyan

Island, in 9m, sand and coral.

Minicoy Island

5.13 Minicoy Island (8°17'N., 73°03'E.), forming the SE

side of an atoll, is included with the Laccadive Islands for administration, although it lies about 110 miles SSW from the

nearest of these. The island lies about 70 miles N of Ihavandiffulu Atoll, the N atoll of the Maldive Islands. 

5.13 Kodi Point, at the NE extremity of the island, may be identified by a single conspicuous palm; a rock, 0.6m high, lies about

183m NE of the point, and the barrier reef extends about 183m

farther NE. A shoal, with a depth of 6.1m, lies nearly 0.5 mile

NE of Kodi Point. 

5.13 The town of Minicoy lies near the center of the island, about

2.5 miles SSW of Kodi Point. There is a dense cover of coconut palms, about 18.9m high, on the E side of Minicoy Island. 

5.13 Roebera Point forms the SW extremity of Minicoy Island;

Wiringili Islet (Small Pox Islet) lies on the barrier reef about

0.5 mile NW of the point.

5.13 The W side of the barrier reef dries in places; it dries 0.6m

about 1.3 miles N of Wiringili.

5.13 The lagoon is encumbered with numerous shoals and dangers, and the SW part dries. Saleh Magu Channel, at the NE

end of the atoll, is the principal opening into the lagoon, with

depths of 1.8 to 3.7m, but can only be used by small vessels

with local knowledge.

5.13 Minicoy Island Light is shown from a white tower on the

SW end of the island, about 0.4 mile ESE of Roebera Point.

The top of the light structure is obscured by trees on certain

bearings and within distances of less than 6 miles. 

5.13 Good radar returns have been reported from Minicoy Island

at 18 miles. It was also reported that the shape of the island becomes identifiable on radar at 15 miles. 

5.13 It was reported that a racon was established on the light and

a conspicuous red and white pylon stood close S of it. 

5.13 Local boats meet ships and may be summoned through the

lighthouse keeper who can communicate with vessels using the

International Code of Signals. 

5.13 Anchorage.—The island offers no suitable anchorage, as the

bottom rises steeply toward the reef. Ships may drift safely under power in fairly calm water close offshore E of the island

during the Southwest Monsoon. 

5.13 Caution.—Minicoy Island should be approached from the S,

passing about 4 miles S of the light structure. In bad weather,

landfall in morning twilight is considered safe. 

5.13 Vessels have been wrecked on Minicoy Island due apparently to shaping a course to pass a few miles N of Minicoy Island

Light (in some cases after sighting the light from E), instead of

passing S of it where the light is a useful guide. 

5.13 The practice of passing a few miles N of the island, especially at night, is a dangerous one as the island is over 4 miles long

in N-S direction, and unpredictable strong S sets are encountered at times. 

Nine Degree Channel

5.14 Nine Degree Channel (9°00'N., 73°00'E.) lies between Minicoy Island to the S and Suheli Par about 113 miles

NNW, and Kalpeni Island to the N. It is very deep and free

from dangers.

5.14 Investigator Bank (8°32'N., 73°17'E.), NE of Minicoy Island, has a least depth of 217m, with depths over 914m in the

vicinity. 

Eight Degree Channel

5.15 Eight Degree Channel (7°40'N., 73°00'E.), between

Minicoy Island and Ihavandiffulu Atoll, about 70 miles S, is

free from known dangers. It is recommended to keep nearer to

Minicoy Island than to the Maldive Islands, as the current sets

S from the end of September to the end of the year, and there is

the added advantage of sighting Minicoy Island Light. 

5.15 The currents in this channel are much the same as those in

the N end of the Maldive Islands, but in the Northeast Monsoon they at times set NW; occasionally they set N with S

winds.

The Maldive Islands

5.16 The Maldive Islands (3°30'N., 73°00'E.), a chain of

atolls, extend from Turakuna (7°06'N., 72°54'E.), the N island

of the Ihavandiffulu Atoll to about 40 miles S of the Equator,

along the meridian of 73°E. 

5.16 Much of the detailed information in this sector is very old, as

little recent information can be obtained from places so seldom

visited. Dates of recent definite information have been included in the text. 

5.16 Between the different atolls of the Maldive Islands there are

several good deep channels. Some of these are intricate and demand local knowledge; such channels should be avoided by

low-powered vessels as currents set strongly through them, setting E or W according to the season; marked variations in direction have been reported. 
Sector 5. The Laccadive Islands and the Maldive Islands 127

Pub. 173

5.16 The coral islands on the atolls, although very low, may be

detected by radar at ranges over 20 miles, while the arrangement of individual islands may be obtained at about 15 miles,

and the breakers at the edges of reefs detected at about 2 miles. 

5.16 There are numerous deep openings through the barrier reefs,

which are difficult to identify beyond a distance of 3 or 4 miles,

when the reefs appear as one continuous line. Within 1 or 2

miles, the openings will be distinctly seen when the sun is high

and behind the observer. 

5.16 Extra care should be taken at periods of spring tides when

strong rips and eddies in the reef entrances make for difficulty

in seeing submerged hazards. 

5.16 By day and with the sun in a favorable position, even the less

readily navigable channels can be negotiated without undue

difficulty, as all the underwater dangers are generally visible

for some distance from the masthead. 

5.16 By night, a vessel should pass through only the four larger

channels between the atolls, and even these should be avoided

unless the vessel has an accurate fix before entering. 

5.16 Within the atolls good anchorage can be obtained in very

smooth water of moderate depth, with a coral and sand bottom. 

5.16 On the inhabited islands, boat channels leading over the reefs

to the villages are marked by distinctive stakes. 

Ihavandiffulu Atoll

5.17 Ihavandiffulu Atoll (7°02'N., 72°54'E.), the N atoll

of the Maldive Islands, is administered with Tiladummati

Atoll, and consists of about 24 islands, most of which lie on the

circumference of the barrier reef. Seven of the islands were inhabited in 1970. 

5.17 General depths of 37 to 55m are in the E half and 18.3 to

37m in the W half of the lagoon. Numerous shoals are in the lagoon, particularly in the W half. These shoals, with the sun

well up, can easily be seen as pale green against the dark deeper water; they are not readily seen if the sky is overcast. 

5.17 The main occupations are fishing and the cultivation of coconuts, most of the islands being heavily wooded with palms. 

5.17 Tides—Currents.—Currents at Ihavandiffulu Atoll are only

experienced occasionally and are probably influenced entirely

by local weather conditions. There appears to be no regular tidal currents. 

5.17 A current of 2 knots setting N was experienced (December,

1933) about 50 miles E of the atoll, but practically no current

in this position was experienced about a month later. 

5.17 During December and January in the offing, the current generally sets N or W, but it is irregular. 

5.17 A set to NW between Uleguma and Wagaru, and to W between Uleguma and Murdu, was sometimes observed (December, 1933 and January, 1934). The maximum velocity was

about 1 knot. In the middle of the lagoon there was an occasional set to NW. 

5.18 Turakuna (7°07'N., 72°54'E.), the N island of Ihavandiffulu Atoll, was inhabited in 1970 with a small village on

its N side. On its S side, landing can be effected through a gap

in the encircling reef. 

5.18 Good radar returns have been reported from Turakuna at 15

miles. 

5.18 Ulegama, about 1.3 miles SE of Turakuna, is low, level, and

thickly wooded. The village lies near the center of the island,

surrounded by coconut palms and breadfruit trees. A narrow

reef fringes the seaward side of the island; a beacon lies on this

reef nearly 1 mile SE of the N end of the island. The reef on the

inner side of the island is separated from the shore, forming a

lagoon; there are two openings for fishing boats. 

5.18 Good radar returns have been reported from Ulegama at 15

miles. 

5.18 Muladu, about 5 miles SE of Ulegama, has a small village on

its W side. There is a boat passage, abreast the village, through

the otherwise unbroken reef surrounding the island. 

5.18 Between Muladu and Ulegama lie three small thickly-wooded uninhabited islets known from NW to SE, respectively, as

Murdu, Beramundu, and Gumati.

5.18 The islet of Gallandu lies about 3.5 miles SSW of Muladu.

Sunken reefs lie about 1 and 2 miles, respectively, N of Gallandu. 

Digufuri Reef (Digfurhi Reef) (6°56'N., 72°57'E.), at the S

end of Ihavandiffulu Atoll, has an islet at its E end; a small

sandbank, with palms on it, lies about 0.8 mile ENE of the islet. 

5.18 Ihavandu, one of the few islands within the lagoon, lies close

N of Digufuri Reef and about 3 miles W of Gallandu. The island is densely populated, and there is a landing on the S side. 

5.18 Hauwandu, about 0.8 mile W of Ihavandu, lies at the SE end

of a section of the barrier reef which extends about 9 miles

NW, then 3 miles NE; of the eight islands and islets on this

stretch of reef, Umbala and Hatefuri were inhabited in 1970.

Umbala, with a large village, lies about 0.5 mile NNW of Hauwandu, and is the principal island of the atoll; its natural harbor, formed between the island and the seaward side of the

reef, provides good anchorage for numerous fishing craft.

Hatefuri, about 4 miles farther NW, has a fishing village on its

NE side.

5.18 Matari, about 0.8 mile NW of Hatefuri, was used as a cemetery and had a flag staff and small temple on it; elsewhere it

was well-wooded. 

5.18 The islet of Kandufuri (Kankolufuri) lies on the above

stretch of reef, near the NW point of Ihavandiffulu Atoll. Good

radar returns have been reported from the islet at 15 miles. 

5.19 Wagaru (7°06'N., 72°52'E.), near the N end of the

atoll, about 4 miles ENE of Kandufuri, is low and well-wooded; it is surrounded by a reef except on its SE side. North Rock,

with a least depth of 5.2m, lies about 1 mile W of Wagaru. 

5.19 Anchorage.—The best anchorage, in 28 to 37m, sand and

coral, lies W of Ulegama. 

5.19 There is a good anchorage E of the reef between Hauwandu

and Umbala, in the SW part of the lagoon, in 33 to 37m. This is

probably the best anchorage during the Southwest Monsoon,

but a heavy swell might reach it through Southwestern Entrance. 

5.19 Good anchorage during the Northeast Monsoon may be obtained, in 46 to 55m, W of Muladu and Gumati in the E part of

the lagoon.

5.19 Anchorages are also available S of Turakuma and Wagaru. 

5.19 Directions.—Vessels approaching from N enter through

North Rock Passage, between Wagaru and North Rock, 1 mile

W; through North Western Entrance, between Wagaru and

Turakana; or through Northern Entrance, between Turakana
128 Sector 5. The Laccadive Islands and the Maldive Islands 

Pub. 173

and Ulegama. 

5.19 North Rock Passage may be entered in depths of not less

than 18.3m by keeping towards Wagaru; the other entrances

have depths of not less than 20.1m in the fairway midway between the islands, but there are shallower depths close within

the lagoon in the Northern Entrance. The edges of the reefs on

each side of the passage can be seen from aloft at a good distance. 

5.19 Vessels approaching from E use North Eastern Entrance between Ulegama and Murdu, about 1.8 miles SE, or East Entrance between Muladu and Gallandu. North Eastern Entrance

has a least depth of 35m midway between the islands. 

5.19 In East Entrance, there is a shoal patch midway between the

flanking islands and a second patch farther SSW. If using this

entrance, bring the NE end of Medfuri to bear 287° and enter

the lagoon on this heading. When the S end of Muladu bears

070°, steer for the N end of Hauwandu bearing 250°, and then

to the anchorage off that island.

5.19 Caution.—Collingrufuri, Medufuri, and Manafur, three islands surrounded by rocky heads, foul ground, and shoal water,

lie about 3.3 and 3 miles N, and 2.3 miles NNE, respectively,

of Ihavandu. Two drying rocks lie on a rocky shoal close N of

Medufuri. 

5.19 Endeavour Shoal, a large coral patch with a least depth of

6.1m, lies about 3.3 miles SSW of Uleguma. 

5.19 Ormonde Rock, with a least depth of 4.6m, lies about 2 miles

SW of Ulegama. 

5.19 In addition, there are numerous shoals and rocky patches in

the lagoon, particularly toward the NW and SW sides; under

suitable conditions all can be easily seen from aloft. 

Gallandu Channel

5.20 Gallandu Channel (6°54'N., 72°57'E.), between the

S end of Ihavandiffulu Atoll and the NW end of Tiladummati

Atoll, about 2.8 miles S, is very deep and free from dangers in

the fairway. Passages on each side of the channel lead into the

lagoons, where anchorage may be obtained. 

5.20 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents set ENE through the

channel with the flood tide and WSW with the ebb. 

Tiladummati Atoll

5.21 Tiladummati Atoll (6°45'N., 73°00'E.) consists of

about 40 islands and islets; most lie farther apart and are larger

than those in the Maldives farther S. The islands in the NE part

of the atoll are the largest. 

5.21 There are fewer islets but more reefs on the W side of the

atoll than on the E side. The passages through the barrier reef

on the W side are navigable but should be avoided. Safe passages leading into the lagoon are on the E side of the atoll, but

the vessel must be conned from aloft. 

5.21 Caution.— Aerial photographs show the shapes and size of

islands to differ substantially from surveys originally dated

from 1940. In addition, some features charted as reefs are, in

some cases, dry at HW and wooded.

5.22 Maduni Faro (6°51'N., 72°57'E.), a lagoon reef,

forms the NW extremity of the atoll. The islets of Marandu,

Tukandu, and Miledu, the first two inhabited in 1970, lie, respectively, on the barrier reef between the N end of Maduni Faro and the islet of Gafuri, about 5 miles ESE. Gafuri lies on the

W side of a detached reef with an unnamed lagoon reef close

W. 

5.22 An unnamed lagoon reef, the islet of Dedu, and Warifuri Faro lie about 2.5, 4, and 6 miles, respectively, NE of Gafuri.

Warifuri Faro is a large lagoon with the islet of Warifuri at its S

end. A lighted beacon lies on the N side of Warifuri Faro. The

islets of Dedu and Warifuri are inhabited; the islet of Noradu

lies between the latter two islets. 

5.23 Kelai (6°58'N., 73°13'E.), at the NE extremity of the

atoll, was inhabited in 1970. Good radar returns have been reported from Kelai at 14 miles. The islet of Tinadu lies about 3

miles WSW of Kelai.

5.23 The island of Filadu has an opening between it and Kelai, 1.5

miles N, and between it and Baura, 3 miles SSW, but the latter

is encumbered by several rocky patches in the fairway. 

5.23 The barrier reef extends from Baura to the island of

Mavaidu, about 20 miles SSW. From N to S, the islands of

Hanimadu, Noliwang Faro, Nuriwari, Kuludu Faro, and Komangdu form the E side of the atoll, and have wide openings

into the atoll on each side of them. All the islands on this side

of the atoll were inhabited in 1970, as well as ten others within

the lagoon. 

5.23 Kuludu Faro has a large village fronted by a sandy beach and

lagoon, which is enclosed by a coral reef on its W side. The

boat channel to the small harbor (1942) was wider and deeper

than those usually found in these islands.

5.23 Muradu (6°33'N., 72°54'E.) lies on a circular reef near the

W edge of the atoll; the latest maps prepared from aerial photography (1968) show that this island has joined the islet charted 0.8 mile W of it. Some rocky patches lie S and SE of

Muradu. 

5.23 Naguri, an island with a circular lagoon reef, lies about 7

miles N of Muradu; two large reefs lie between these islands.

5.23 A lighted beacon lies at the NW point of a reef, about 3.3

miles NW of Muradu. 

5.23 Nawadu, about 5 miles NNE of Naguri, was populated in

1970. 

5.23 There is an opening into the lagoon, about 4 miles wide, between Rufuri, a small islet, 0.5 mile N of Nawadu, and Maduni

Faro, at the NW corner of the atoll. 

Miladummadulu Atoll

5.24 Miladummadulu Atoll (6°10'N., 73°08'E.) lies on

the same submarine plateau as Tiladummati Atoll and is the

continuation S of it. The N boundary of this atoll approximately follows the parallel of 6°29'N.

5.24 Miladummadulu Atoll contains about 100 islands and islets

lying principally on the E side; over 40 of these were populated

in 1970, and almost all are wooded, with palms predominating. 

5.24 The lagoon can be navigated in daylight with ease as there

are few dangers, especially in the N part, but the vessel must be

conned from aloft. Depths in the lagoon are moderate; the bottom is sand, with clay in places.

5.24 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents at Miladummadulu Atoll

set ENE with the flood and WSW with the ebb, attaining a velocity of 1.5 to 2 knots at springs. The tidal currents are greatly
Sector 5. The Laccadive Islands and the Maldive Islands 129

Pub. 173

influenced by the prevailing monsoon currents.

5.24 The island of Numara (6°26'N., 73°03'E.), with the islet of

Nu close NNW, lies at the NE corner of Miladummadulu Atoll. 

5.24 A very wide opening into the lagoon lies between Numara

and Fivaku, about 9 miles ESE. Fivaku was inhabited in 1970. 

5.24 The barrier reef then extends about 13 miles SSE from Fivaku to the S end of a detached reef on which lies the island of

Farukolu, with Furnadu on the S part of the reef. The island of

Makandudu lies about 2 miles NW of the reef. The latter three

islands were inhabited in 1970. The islands of Nalandu and

Milandu lie farther N. There are deep wide openings into the

lagoon between all these islands and also between Makandudu

and Farukolu. 

5.24 From the S end of Furnadu, the barrier reef extends about 8.5

miles S and 6 miles ESE to Kuludu (Kendikolu), the largest island of the atoll and inhabited in 1970. Many of the islets on

this stretch were inhabited in 1970. The passage into the lagoon S of Kuludu is wide and safe. 

5.24 Ma Faro (Mafarru), a reef, lies about 4.5 miles SE of Kuludu; an island of the same name occupies the S part of this

reef on the seaward side. 

5.24 Edu Faro (Eddufarru), a reef enclosing a lagoon, lies about 5

miles SSW of Ma Faro. 

5.25 Manadu (5°47'N., 73°24'E.), close within the lagoon

between Ma Faro and Edu Faro, was densely populated in

1970, when the main village was near the middle of the N side

of the island. The island is profusely covered in vegetation, including coconut palms, banyan, breadfruit, and almond. 

5.25 Good anchorage may be obtained on the N or S side of Manadu according to the season. 

5.25 A boat channel passes through the reef, which extends the

whole length of the N side of the island; the passage is narrow,

about 1.8m deep, and fringed by large boulders of coral rock.

Inside the reef is a deep channel, from 18 to 28m wide, skirting

the beach. 

5.25 Ten other islets within 9 miles of Manadu, and also within

the lagoon, were inhabited in 1970. 

5.25 The islet of Karema lies about 5 miles SW of Edu Faro. 

5.25 Kandudu (Kharndudu) (5°39'N., 73°16'E.), inhabited in

1970, lies on the barrier reef at the S extremity of Miladummadulu Atoll, about 2 miles W of Karema. 

5.25 From Kandudu, the barrier reef extends 12 miles NW to Mavila (Malwillarwarru); the latter islet and the islets of Rafuri,

Watedu, Didu, and Fadu on this SW face of the atoll were inhabited in 1970. 

5.25 Between Mavila and Kumandu, about 16 miles NNW, are

several lagoon reefs and islets. The island of Kumandu was inhabited in 1970; from about 1 mile SE of the island to about 3

miles farther SE, banks of sand and coral lie along the seaward

side of a large lagoon reef. Close N of Kumandu, two small islets lie on the E side of a detached reef; the latest maps show

the islets to lie N and S of each other. 

5.25 The NW part of the barrier reef consists almost entirely of

reef, enclosing separate lagoons.

5.25 Tree Sand Bank, about 6 miles NNW of Kumandu, extends

about 2.5 miles into the lagoon and has an islet near its center;

about 1 mile S lies another detached sandbank. A lighted beacon lies on the N side of the reef, 2 miles N of the W extremity

of Tree Sand Bank. 

5.25 Goadu (6°25'N., 72°55'E.) and Kandute, about 1 mile NW,

lie within the main lagoon and were inhabited in 1970; the

main village was in the center of each island. It was reported

that landing can be made anywhere along the SE side of

Kandute, where the fringing reef has depths of 1.2 to 1.8m. 

Makunudu Atoll

5.26 Makunudu Atoll (6°20'N., 72°36'E.), once known as

Malcom Atoll, is a large reef encircling a deep but reef-encumbered lagoon, and is administered as part of Tiladummati Atoll;

it is separated from the NW side of Miladummadulu Atoll by a

deep channel, about 9 miles wide. Two openings on the E face

of the lagoon can only be used by boats. 

5.26 Faro Doru (Defarudorhi), an islet on the E side of the atoll,

about 6 miles SSW of Makundu, was wooded in 1970. The S

and W sides of the atoll have only the surf and an islet at its

NW extremity to indicate their outline.

Fadiffolu Atoll

5.27 Fadiffolu Atoll (5°25'N., 73°30'E.) consists of about

30 islets, only four of which were inhabited in 1970. The principal occupations are sail weaving and coir making. The depths

in the lagoon are moderate and the bottom is sandy; there are

many drying and submerged coral heads with depths of 1.8 to

3.7m. 

5.27 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents set strongly through the

openings into the lagoon.

5.27 Fehingili (5°33'N., 73°29'E.) is the N islet of the atoll. There

is an opening into the lagoon between Fehingili and Kuredu,

about 0.8 mile W; there are moderate depths in the entrance,

but about 0.8 mile within the opening, some reefs lie in the

fairway. Furifaro, about 4 miles SSE of Fehingili, lies in the

center of an opening into the lagoon. The islet, with a rocky

shoal close NW, lies on a reef. 

5.27 The barrier reef, with several islets on it, extends about 7

miles ESE to Difuri (Divepure), at the NE end of the atoll. The

latter islet and Faidu, about 1 mile NW, were inhabited in 1970. 

5.27 From Difuri, an unbroken line of barrier reef curves SW to

Aligau, at the S extremity of the atoll; several islets are on this

section of reef. 

5.27 During the Northeast Monsoon, the sea breaks with violence

upon this unbroken stretch of barrier reef; coral rock and sand

banks appear at low water along this stretch.

5.27 There is a wide opening into the atoll between Aligau and

Lowalfuri, about 3.5 miles NNW; the islet of Madewaru lies

near the middle of the opening. 

5.27 From Lowalfuri, the barrier reef, enclosing several islets, extends about 7 miles NW to Dehu, a group of islets. Several

good channels lead into the lagoon between the islets on the

barrier reef. Kanifuri (Kanifurhi), about 2 miles W of Dehu,

forms the W extremity of the atoll. 

5.27 From Kanifuri, the barrier reef extends about 7 miles NNE to

Fallwaru (Faileweru). The islet of Naifaro, the most densely

populated of the atoll in 1970, lies on the reef about 2 miles

SSW of Fallwaru.

5.27 Between Fallwaru and Hurawali, about 4.5 miles NE, several

islets and detached reefs lie some distance SE of the enclosing

reef. There are several channels into the lagoon between islets
130 Sector 5. The Laccadive Islands and the Maldive Islands 

Pub. 173

in this section of the atoll.

Malosmadulu Atoll

5.28 Malosmadulu Atoll (5°30'N., 72°55'E.) consists of

North Malosmadulu Atoll and South Malosmadulu Atoll,

which are separated by Moresby Channel, about 1.8 miles

wide. These two atolls are similar in character, their W sides

being composed of a series of lagoon reefs, some prominent

and others in the background. This is a feature common to the

N atolls of the Maldive Islands. 

5.29 North Malosmadulu Atoll.—Maduni Faro

(5°53'N., 72°54'E.), a lagoon reef, lies at the N of the atoll.

Wadu, inhabited in 1970, lies about 3 miles ESE of Maduni Faro, at the S end of a large lagoon reef.

5.29 A wide opening into the lagoon lies between Maduni Faro

and Wadu; it is free of known dangers in the middle of the fairway, with depths of 37 to 44m, sand. Some rocks lie about 3

miles NNW of Wadu. 

5.29 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage in the channel between Wadu and Maduni Faro or farther S in the lagoon.

The Powell Islands (5°58'N., 72°55'E.) consists of two islands on a detached reef. Etingili is the NW island and Alifuri

is the SE island; the latter island was inhabited in 1970. 

The channel between the Powell Islands and Maduni Faro,

about 3 miles S, is deep and free from known dangers. 

5.29 The E side of North Malosmadulu Atoll consists of about 20

islands and islets separated by good passages leading into the

lagoon. About 5 per cent of the above islands and islets were

inhabited in 1970. 

5.29 Navigation in the central part of the atoll is impracticable

due to the numerous coral heads. 

5.29 The S side of the atoll is formed by reefs lying between Berriam Faro (5°26'N., 73°00'E.) and Mamanago Faro, about 7

miles SW; three islets lie on this section of the barrier reef. 

5.29 The SW face of the atoll is formed by Mamanago Faro, at its

SW extremity, and three similar lagoon reefs farther N. 

5.29 Maregiri (5°31'N., 72°49'E.) lies at the S end of the NW

side of the atoll. From this islet the barrier reef, consisting of a

series of lagoon reefs, some with small unnamed islets, extends

about 25 miles NNE. These reefs lack above-water features

and are therefore difficult to identify; the channels between

them are therefore better avoided, especially since the central

part of the lagoon is unsafe for navigation. 

5.29 Moresby Channel, separating North Malosmadulu Atoll and

South Malosmadulu Atoll, has depths over 183m and is free

from known dangers. The W entrance to this channel has no

wooded islet near it and is difficult to identify.

5.30 South Malosmadulu Atoll.—Hanikandu Faro

(5°17'N., 72°51'E.), at the NW extremity of the atoll, is separated from Kari Faro, about 0.8 mile S, by an opening into the

lagoon. Dukandu, an island, lies in the middle of the inner end

of the opening. Kari Faro is a reef enclosing a lagoon, with the

islets of Iwafuri and Fahris on its S side.

5.30 From the opening between Hanikandu Faro and Medu Faro,

about 1.3 miles NE, a deep channel leads E to the NE side of

the atoll. 

5.30 Islets and reefs on the S side of the channel extend E from

Hanikandu Faro. Fendu was reported inhabited in 1970. Sudaroa, about 6 miles farther E, lies at the E entrance of the

channel. Kumadu lies 1 mile E of Sudaroa. 

5.30 The N part of South Malosmadulu Atoll is triangular in

shape. There are numerous openings into the main lagoon on

the N and E sides of the atoll. 

5.30 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained off the N side of

Hitadu.

5.30 There is a wide opening into the lagoon between Olugeri,

close W of Hitadu, and Boduffnur, about 2.8 miles farther W. A

rock shoal, with a depth of 12.8m, lies in the opening. 

Horsburgh Atoll

5.31 Horsburgh Atoll (Goidu Atoll) (4°52'N., 72°55'E.),

about 6 miles S of South Malosmadulu Atoll, is considered as

part of the latter atoll for administrative purposes. Horsburgh

Atoll was reported (1987) to lie approximately 2 miles SE of

its charted position. 

5.31 Goidu, at the NE end of the atoll, is the largest islet, and was

inhabited in 1970. It has been reported (1994) that the shape of

the island changes over time. 

5.31 Fehendu and Furudu, about 1 mile and 3 miles, respectively,

W of Goidu, were inhabited in 1970, when both were wooded,

with palm trees predominant. The villages on the N sides of

these islands are visible from seaward. 

5.31 Inafuri (Furhi), an islet, 15m high and bushy, lies on the reef

about 3 miles W of Furudu. 

5.31 The islet of Fehenfuri, reported (1994) difficult to identify,

lies on the S side of the barrier reef, about 4 miles SSE of Inafuri. The islet of Mafuri lies about 1.3 miles W of Fehenfuri. 

5.31 The lagoon is fringed with dangers, but the center of the lagoon is clear. 

5.31 Anchorage.—Anchorage, in 27 to 42m, good holding

ground of sand, mud, and clay, can be obtained in the lagoon. 

5.31 The only opening into the lagoon lies between Mafuri and

Fehenfuri. The Dorukandu, as the channel through this opening

is known, lies on the W side between the barrier reef and the

shoal water extending nearly 0.8 mile W from the reef on

which Fehenfuri lies. The channel is about 183m wide, with a

least depth of 18.3m. Depths in the opening E of the Dorukandu are shoal and irregular; a 4.3m patch lies near the edge

of the Dorukandu, about 0.3 mile E of Mafuri. 

5.31 The E part of Fehendu, bearing 052°, leads from SW towards

the opening. 

5.31 Caution.—Vessels should not attempt to enter the lagoon

except through the Dorukandu. 

Kardiva Channel

5.32 Kardiva Channel (5°00'N., 73°30'E.), deep and free

from dangers in the fairway, lies between Fadiffolu Atol, South

Malosmadulu Atol, and Horsburgh Atoll to NW, and Male Atol

and Ari Atoll to SE. 

5.32 Tides—Currents.—The tidal current sets ENE through

Kardiva Channel with the flood and WSW with the ebb, at a

velocity of 2 knots. 

5.32 During the Northeast Monsoon, the tidal current is inappreciable during the flood, but the ebb is reinforced by the surface

current generated by the monsoon. Similarly, during the South-
Sector 5. The Laccadive Islands and the Maldive Islands 131

Pub. 173

west Monsoon the ebb current is weak or absent and the flood

current is strong. 

5.32 Aspect.—The N side of the E entrance of Kardiva is welldefined by Olivelifur (5°17'N., 73°36'E.), at the SE end of

Fadiffolu Atoll. Kardiva, about 19 miles farther SSW, is a good

landmark from the E, having two conspicuous palm trees on

the N side of the reef upon which it lies. Gaha Faro Reef, on

the S side of the entrance to Kardiva, has no landmarks on its N

and S sides. 

5.32 The W entrance of Kardiva Channel is not easily identified

as the wooded islets on Ari and Horsburgh Atolls lie several

miles within the salient points of their barrier reef. However,

Toddu (4°26'N., 72°58'E.), an island off the N end of Ari

Atoll, can be sighted at a considerable distance, and forms a

good landmark in the approach from W. 

5.32 Caution.—Kardiva was reported (1974) to lie about 2.3

miles SSE of its charted position.

5.33 Kardiva (4°58'N., 73°27'E.), formerly known as

Karidu, was thickly covered with coconut palms, 14 to 20m

high in 1974. There is a township on its N side; its SE side is

steep-to. 

5.33 A reef on the N side encloses a lagoon where local craft are

moored. The entrance to the lagoon lies about 0.5 mile NW of

the NE point of the island. Landing can only be made on

Kardiva by entering the lagoon, as there is generally a heavy

surf around the island and reef, except at the lagoon entrance. 

Gaa Faro Reef

5.34 Gaa Faro Reef (4°44'N., 73°26'E.), in the form of a

small atoll, lies about 1.5 miles N of Male Atoll, from which it

is separated by a deep channel, free from dangers in the fairway. Gaa Faro (Gafaru) (4°44'N., 73°29'E.), an islet at the E

end of the reef, was inhabited in 1970. A clump of trees lies on

the reef about 1 mile WSW of this islet. 

5.34 Two very small openings lead into the lagoon, one on the

NW side and another on the N side, about 4 miles E. Abovewater rocks mark the E side of the N opening and apparently,

the S side of the NW opening. 

Male Atoll

5.35 Male Atoll (4°25'N., 73°30'E.), the principal atoll of

the Maldive Islands, contains about 50 islets and islands. Several islets, especially in the S part of the atoll, are developed as

tourist villages. 

5.35 The depths within the lagoon are from 40 to 50m; the bottom

is of coarse sand except over coral reefs. Shoals within the lagoon are easily discernible in favorable conditions of sun and

sea.

5.35 Olahali (4°41'N., 73°26'E.), a low bush-covered islet, marks

the NW point of Male Atoll. A major channel into the main lagoon lies close E of the islet; it was reported, in 1974, that there

appeared to be a least depth of 50m in the center of the channel

and that the reef edges could be clearly seen. 

5.35 Tides—Currents.—During the Northeast Monsoon, a 2 to 3

knot western current sweeps through the channel between

Male Atoll and Gaha Faro Reef, causing strong eddies and turbulence where it meets tidal currents from the lagoon. During

this season, it is advisable to pass through the N reef at about

slack water. 

5.35 Kagi, a small wooded islet, lies about 3 miles ESE of Olahali, and 1.5 miles within the lagoon. A good unobstructed channel through the reef lies N of this islet; its entrance is marked

by drying rocks, and in 1974, by the stump remains of a pile

beacon.

5.35 Helengili, a long low wooded islet, lies on the barrier reef

about 4.5 miles SE of Kagi. Openings through the reef lie on

each side of the islet; in 1974, the N opening was narrow and

appeared to have a least depth of 20m, while the S channel was

broader, with a least depth of 40m. 

5.35 Lighted Beacon No. 1, a gray framework tower on a concrete

base, lies on the S side of a reef 4 miles SW of Helengili. 

5.35 Between Helengili and Mirufuri (4°27'N., 73°42'E.), there

are several deep channels without landmarks to identify them;

a vessel may pass through in favorable conditions and keeping

a good lookout. 

5.35 Asdu, in the lagoon, about 3 miles W of Mirufuri, was covered with coconut palms in 1974. 

5.35 Mirufuri was inhabited in 1974 and wooded with coconut

palms. Difuri, close S, was inhabited in 1974 and thickly

wooded. 

5.35 Between Difuri and Male, 20 miles SW, a chain of islands

lies upon the reef which is sharply marked by change of water

color or, in swell conditions, by breakers upon it. 

5.36 Imma (4°18'N., 73°34'E.), inhabited in 1970, and

Lankanfinolhu (Lankanfushifinolhu), about 1.8 miles SW, lie

on the same reef, with a low islet about midway between. 

5.36 Bodu Kalhi (Kadvoigiri Passage), the best and widest opening in the barrier reef, lies between Lankanfinolhu and

Kaduoiygiri, an island 1.8 miles SW. There are depths of over

50m in this N side of this channel about 0.6 mile S of Lankanfinolhu, but a bank with depths of 21 to 28m extends 1.3 miles

N into the channel from Furanafushi (Furena), an island about

0.5 mile SE of Kaduoiygiri. 

5.36 A shoal area, about 1.3 miles W of Lankanfinolhu, has a

least depth of 7m. A reef lies 0.5 mile WNW of Kaduoiygiri,

with numerous shoal patches S of it. 

5.36 An lagoon lies off the W side of Furanafushi, entered at the

SW corner of the fringing reef. Within the lagoon are depths to

9m, with a bottom of sand and coral heads. This lagoon provides good anchorage for small craft. A stone jetty extends

from the W end of the island. 

Male (4°10'N., 73°30'E.)

World Port Index No. 49200

5.37 Male, at the S end of Male Atoll, is the capital of the

Republic of Maldives and is the seat of office of the President

whose residence is on Aarah (Aramh), a wooded islet about 3.5

miles NNW. A tower, from which a light is shown, lies at the

center of Arah. The island is thickly wooded with many modern houses, particularly on its N side. It is almost entirely built

up with a network of earth roads. The harbor facilities are on

the N side of the island. 

5.37 Tides—Currents.—From the few observations made in the

vicinity of Male, it seems likely that the water movement there
132 Sector 5. The Laccadive Islands and the Maldive Islands 

Pub. 173

Male

Hulule
Sector 5. The Laccadive Islands and the Maldive Islands 133

Pub. 173

is far more influenced by the monsoon currents than the tidal

currents. When the currents are flowing strongly, it seems likely that the tidal currents are only strong enough to increase or

decrease the resulting flow and rarely strong enough to reverse

its direction. Due to the probability of strong and unpredictable

currents, an approach by night was not recommended (1987). 

5.37 In the channel E of Male, the currents from Vaadhoo Kandu

(Wadu Channel) set across. During the Northeast Monsoon, a

component of the current sets NW through this channel, setting

a vessel towards the reef fringing the E side of Male. The flow

turns W between Male and Funadoo.

5.37 It was reported (1972) that this flow commenced 1.5 hours

before HW, and ran until 1.5 hours before LW, attaining a maximum velocity of 2.5 to 3 knots at about HW N of Male breakwater, where it sets strongly across the N face of the

breakwater. At the same time the flow was weak and variable E

of Funadhoo. Strong sets have also been reported during the

Northeast Monsoon in Male Harbor. 

5.37 During the Southwest Monsoon, a component of the current

enters the lagoon through the channel S of Giravaru, flowing

out principally through the channel W of Male and between

Male and Funadhoo, and then S into Vaadhoo Kandu (Wadu

Channel) . 

5.37 It was reported (1972) that an E set existed until within the

line joining Male and Hulule, then slack water between Funadhoo and Dunidu, when a strong E set was experienced to the

anchorage. Four hours after LW, with the flood current tending

to oppose the current, a moderate NE flow was experienced in

the lagoon. 

5.37 No observations have been made during the change in the

monsoons when the currents could be weak and variable at

times, but strong sets may always be encountered. 

5.37 Aspect.—Male is identified from N and NE by a white

mosque and minaret, and radio masts at its SE corner. 

5.37 The E, S, and W coasts of Male are fringed by an unbroken

reef, awash, extending from 23m to 0.2 mile from the S coast. 

5.37 The N side of the island is protected by a breakwater, about

1.2m high and 4m wide, which is connected to the land at each

end. Six passages lead through the breakwater into the harbor,

with another into a shallow pool at the W end. Lights are

shown from beacons, painted in black and white bands, lying

on each side of each of the passages passages. 

5.37 The inner harbor is used by small local craft and has depths

of 1.8 to 3m. The main passage, in the middle of the breakwater and 0.5 mile WNW of Sawmill Point, the NE point of the

island, is 17m wide. 

5.37 South West Harbor is protected by a rough breakwater of

heaped coral extending 0.15 mile from the SW extremity of

Male. The harbor is used by inter-island trading boats, cargo

lighters, and deep-draft vessels at anchor. 

5.37 The Custom House lies on the main quay facing the main

passage through the breakwater. 

5.37 Red obstruction lights are shown from the radio masts at the

SE end of Male.

Funadhoo (Funidu) lies about 0.3 mile N of the E end of

Male, and is surrounded by a reef which dries in places. A

small tank farm, with three large and about six smaller tanks,

stands on the island. 

Dhoonidhoo, a wooded islet, lies about 0.8 mile NW of

Funadhoo. A large silver tankstands on the E central part of the

island; a breakwater extends about 25m N on the N side of the

island. 

5.37 Hulule, about 0.6 mile E of Funadhoo, bears some tall coconut palms; an airstrip runs the full length of the island and joins

it to an islet close S. Airport buildings and a small village lie

along the central part of the W side of Hulule.

5.37 A channel, with a depth of 1.2m and subject to silting, gives

access to small piers on the W side of Hulule; two large yellow

mooring buoys were laid close WNW of the entrance. Breakwaters extend N and S from the entrance to the 1.5m channel.

5.37 The airport control tower, a white building with a red roof, is

a conspicuous landmark. A radio mast, marked by red obstruction lights, stands about 0.25 mile N of the airport control tower, E of the 1.2m entrance channel. 

5.37 Viligili (Wilingili), a low wooded islet used as a tourist village, lies 1 mile W of Male. It is surrounded by steep-to foul

ground extending up to 0.3 mile offshore. The light on the islet

is reported to be a good landmark.

5.37 The channel between Viligili and Male has a 5.5m shoal in

the middle, with 11m and 15.4m shoals lying about 0.2 mile

and 0.4 mile, respectively, N of it. Tidal currents in this channel

are strong and tide rips form near the shoals; navigation of the

channel is not recommended. 

5.37 Feydhoo, a bare sandy islet, surrounded by a steep-to reef

which dries in places, lies 2.3 miles N of Viligili. Breakwaters

extend from the islet; reclamation work was in progress (1994)

on the NW side of the island.

5.37 Galu Falhu, a circular reef about 1 mile SE of Feydhoo, appears to contain deep water. 

Tulusdu (Thulusdhoo) (4°22'N., 73°38'E.) has a small quay

within a protected harbor area. The lagoon has been deepened

and its entrance widened with a jetty built. Vessels up to 2,000

dwt have been reported to use the port. Several small warehouses are located near the quay. 

5.37 Viligili (Mathidhahuraa) lies 0.5 mile ENE and another islet,

with some palms and covered with bush, lies about 1.5 miles

WSW. 

5.37 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 100

grt and is available daily from 0630 to 2300 Saturday through

Thursday, and from 0630 to 1030 and 1430 to 2300 on Friday.

Pilotage for departing vessels is available 24 hours. 

5.37 Pilots board in position 4°10'N, 73°32'E. 

5.37 Vessels sailing from Male should request a pilot from the

agent 3 hours prior to sailing. 

5.37 Regulations.—Vessels must report their ETA 24 hours in

advance. The ETA message should contain the following information:

1. Vessel’s name.

2. Master’s name and nationality.

3. Agent’s name.

4. Owner’s name.

5. Last port of call and next port of call.

6. Type of vessel.

7. Port of registry and number.

8. Deadweight tons, grt, and nrt.

9. LOA and maximum draft.

10. Call sign.

11. Details of dangerous cargo for discharging or in transit.

12. ETA at Male.
134 Sector 5. The Laccadive Islands and the Maldive Islands 

Pub. 173

13. Cargo for the Maldives or in transit.

14. Air draft.

5.37 Approval is required from harbor control for any work that

could immobilize a vessel for 2 hours or more.

5.37 Vessels must get written approval from the Port Authority

for any hot work to be done in port.

5.37 All trade must be made through Male. Surrounding atolls

cannot trade with foreign vessels due to customs regulations.

5.37 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. Call sign: Male Harbor Control

2. VHF: VHF channels 10 and 11

3. Telephone: 960-3329339

960-3327883

960-3328624

4. Telephone: 960-3325293

960-3328624

5. E-mail: maldport@dhivenet.net.mv

5.37 Anchorage.—Vessels anchor in the designated anchorage

areas best seen on the chart. 

5.37 Small vessels, during the Southwest Monsoon, can moor on

the E side of the circular reef about 0.8 mile NW of

Dhoonidhu. A vessel can secure to an anchor set in the coral of

this reef, with a stern anchor laid out to E. Two anchors on the

SE side of Dhoonidhu can be used in the same way.

5.37 Directions.—Gaadhoo Koa (Male Passage), the channel

close E of Male, is the recommended channel. The fairway is

about 0.4 mile wide between the reefs extending SE of Male

and S of Hulule airstrip. Caution is necessary as strong cross

sets of up to 6 knots caused by the season monssons occur

across the mouth of the channel. The W channel between Male

and Viligili is not recommended. 

5.37 Gaadhoo Koa (Male Passage) is approached with the E side

of Dhoonidhu bearing 337°, and open NE of Funadhoo until

the S end of Hulule runway bears 085°. Then steer through the

middle of the channel between Funadhoo and Hulule, and as

required round the N side of Funadhoo to approach the anchorage. The outline of the reefs is very distinct. 

5.37 In 1983, it was reported that because of the extended runway

S on Hulule Island, a more appropriate approach through Male

Passage should be made from farther SE, maintaining a midchannel course. A vessel, at the approach on course 345°, reported observing a current setting NNE at 3.5 knots until the S

tip of the runway was abeam to starboard, when a strong S to

SW set of 4 knots was encountered with numerous eddies between Smallmill Point and Wild Point. To remain in mid-channel and to counteract the set and drift, a course of 008° was

steered, thereafter, adjusting as necessary to the anchorage. 

5.37 If approaching Male from W, enter Kaashidoo Channel

(Kaashidoo) between Thoddoo (Thuddu) (4°26'N., 72°57'E.)

and Goidhoo Atoll (Horsburgh Atoll), 25 miles N of it. Pass

close N clear of Toddu and then steer SE for Vaadhoo Kandu

(Wadu Channel). When Male is identified and approached, follow the directions as mentioned above. 

5.37 Low-powered vessels, sailing vessels, and vessels arriving

from E, may use the opening in the reef 6 miles NNE of Male.

Steer to pass about 0.6 mile S of Lankanfinolhu, then N and W

of the reef lying 0.5 mile NW of Kaduoiygiri. Then steer S to

pass W of Vihamanaafushi, a wooded islet 3 miles N of Male,

and then W of Dhoonidhu to the anchorage.

5.38 Giravaru (4°12'N., 73°24'E.), an islet covered in

scrub and with a few coconut palms, lies on the SW side of

Male Atoll, about 0.5 mile within the outer edge of the barrier

reef. In 1974, a small bare islet lay at the extremity of the reef

extending 1 mile W of Giravaru; a similar islet lies 1 mile S of

Giravaru. 

5.38 A good, easily discernible channel, S of Giravaru, with a

least depth of 48m in its center, leads through the barrier reef.

A wider, less deep channel lies NW of Giravaru; a shoal patch,

with a least depth of 3.4m, lies in the channel, about 0.7 mile

NW of Giravaru, where it broadens out into the lagoon. 

5.38 Between Giravaru and Akirifuri, about 26 miles N, several

low bush-covered islets, about 7m high, lie on the W fringing

reef, giving effective warning of the reef lying about 0.2 mile

outside them. 

5.38 Several openings into the lagoon lie along this stretch of

coast. The largest opening is abreast Hembadu, a heavilywooded islet, about 17 miles N of Giravaru and 2 miles within

the lagoon; the latest maps (1970), based on aerial photography, indicate dangers in the entrance to the W of those charted

near Hembadu. 

5.38 A low islet, covered in trees and scrub in 1970, lies on the

barrier reef 6 miles SSW of Hembadu; a sandbank, similarly

wooded, lies about 2 miles farther SSE. 

5.38 Akirifuri (4°38'N., 73°24'E.) is low and covered with bushes; there is a small but safe opening on each side of this islet

and another 1 mile ENE of it. 

5.38 Maps based on 1968 aerial photography indicate that other

openings between Giravaru and Akirifuri have dangers within

the channels or close within the atoll abreast them. A survey

vessel observed similar indications of such dangers in 1974. 

Waddu Channel

5.39 Waddu Channel (4°09'N.,73°27'E.), between the S

end of Male Atoll and the N end of South Male Atoll, about 2.3

mile S, is very deep and free from dangers. 

5.39 The tidal currents in the channel are very strong, the flood

setting E and the ebb W. During the monsoons, the tidal current

accelerated by the prevailing current, setting W during the

Northeast Monsoon and E during the Southwest Monsoon, attains a velocity of 4 knots, causing severe tide rips.

South Male Atoll

5.40 South Male Atoll (4°00'N., 73°25'E.) comprises

about 25 islets, of which five were inhabited in 1970. Most of

the islets lie along the E side, but some are on the W side. Safe

passages are on one or both sides of all these islets, except for

the four or five islets on the SE part of the atoll. Almost all the

islets are wooded, with many palm trees. 

5.40 The lagoon is deep, but is encumbered with coral reefs,

which may be avoided in favorable light with a good lookout at

the masthead.

5.40 Wadu (4°07'N., 73°27'E.), in the middle of the N side of the

atoll, has good openings in the reef on each side. There are

some sandbanks on the reef between Wadu and Huras, about

4.5 miles ESE. 

5.40 A good passage, with a depth of 20m in the fairway, lies

about 1 mile S of Huras. This channel was reported (1917) to
Sector 5. The Laccadive Islands and the Maldive Islands 135

Pub. 173

be narrower than charted and this is confirmed by the latest

maps (1970) based on air photography; it should therefore be

used with caution. Hembunda (Eboodhoo) is an uninhabited islet about 1.5 miles SW of Hurus (Eboodhoofinolho). A shoal

depth of 5m is reported to lie SE of Hembuda, between the island and the reef, therefore restricting passage to the S. 

5.40 Between the S side of this opening and the SE extremity of

the atoll, there are a few openings with several islets and sand

banks on the E side of South Male Atoll. 

5.41 Guru (Gulhi) (3°59'N., 73°30'E.), Mafuri and

Guradu, about 3 and 5.5 miles, respectively, farther SSW, were

inhabited in 1970. 

5.41 A good channel, 0.5 mile wide with a least depth of 37m, lies

at the SW end of the atoll; this channel lies between the W end

of the reef forming the S side of the atoll, and the E side of a

detached reef NW and on which Rocky Islet lies. Rocky Islet,

according to the latest maps (1970) prepared from aerial photography, may be much smaller than charted or may have disappeared. In 1987, this islet was reported to be nearly

submerged at HW. 

5.41 Warigili, an islet remarkable for a bushy sandbank extending

from its W side, lies about 8 miles N of the above opening. The

widest of several openings in the W side of the atoll lies about

4 miles N of Warigili; a sand bank lies on the S side of this

opening. 

Ari Atoll

5.42 Ari Atoll (3°55'N., 72°50'E.) consists of many islands

and islets, of which 22 were inhabited in 1970. The principal

occupations are catching turtles and weaving sails. 

5.42 There are many good passages into the lagoon on all faces of

the encircling reef, except the S face, where there is only one

break. 

5.42 The atoll lagoon is much encumbered with coral reefs, some

with depths of 3.7 to 5.5m; others dry, leaving lagoons within.

The coral heads may be avoided on a clear day with a good

lookout aloft. 

5.42 The influence of spring tides is felt in the lagoon. 

5.42 The channel between Ari Atoll and South Male Atoll is deep

and sheltered from the ocean swell. 

Toddu (4°26'N., 72°57'E.), an island about 12.5 miles NE of

the N end of Ari Atoll, was inhabited in 1970 and partially

wooded. The island may be sighted from a considerable distance. It was reported (1934) to be larger than charted, and this

is confirmed by the latest maps (1970) based on aerial photography. These also show the reef to extend about 0.6 mile farther

W than charted. 

Rasdu Atoll

5.43 Rasdu Atoll (Rasdhoo Atoll) (4°16'N., 73°00'E.),

about 5.5 miles S of Toddu, is connected with the NE part of

Ari Atoll by a submarine plateau with depths of 183 to 274m.

It forms part of Ari Atoll for administrative purposes. 

5.43 In 1987, Rasdhoo was reported visible from a distance of 20

miles. 

5.43 The channel between Rasdu Atoll and Toddu was reported

(1963) to be about 1.3 miles wider than charted. 

5.43 Rasdu (4°16'N., 73°00'E.) and Kuramati, both inhabited in

1970, are islets on the S side of the atoll; the opening between

them can be used only by vessels if local knowledge is available. In 1963, Rasdu had trees 24m high, and Kuramati was

thickly wooded with some very tall trees. 

5.43 Weligandu, about 2.5 miles NNE of Rasdu, had trees 14m

high in 1963. The other opening into the lagoon lies about 1

mile N of Weligandu, and has a least depth of 14.6m in the fairway. 

5.43 The lagoon is deep, but it is encumbered with coral reefs.

5.43 Gaha Faro (4°16'N., 72°45'E.), a large reef with a lagoon

within, forms the N side of the W side of the atoll; a similar but

smaller reef lies about 2.5 miles E. Observations in 1940 revealed depths of 16 and 23m in place of much greater depths in

the original survey and thus the probability that the above reefs

are joining by a ridge of fast growing coral. 

5.43 Caution.—Caution is necessary in the vicinity of the N end

of Ari Atoll, because of the changes reported.

5.44 Ukulahu (Ukulhas) (4°13'N., 72°51'E.), at the NE

end of the atoll, was inhabited in 1970; a good channel lies W

of the islet. An islet about 1 mile N of Ukulahi had almost disappeared in 1970. A sand bank lying about 1 mile E of Ukulhas

was reported (1987) a good radar target. 

5.44 From an islet about 1 mile E of Ukulahu, a chain of small

reefs extends about 6.5 miles SSE to Toroka (Beyrumadivaru),

the N islet on the E side of the atoll. A red obstruction light was

reported (1987) shown from a radio mast on Bathala (Butala),

lying about 3.8 miles S of Toroka, was visible from a distance

of 12 miles. 

5.44 Midu, about 15.5 miles S of Toroka, had a landing place

about the center of the S side abreast a village; there appears to

be another at the W end. A strong current sets through the

channel S of Midu. 

5.44 Aumedu, about 3.5 miles S of Midu, was inhabited in 1970

and had breakwaters on its N side. Mahiadu, about 2 miles farther S, was inhabited in 1970 and had breakwaters on its N and

S sides. 

5.44 Digura (3°33'N., 72°55'E.), on the SE side of the atoll, and

Kurafuri and Didu, farther SW, were inhabited in 1970. 

5.44 Numerous passages lead into the E side of the lagoon and are

about 1 mile apart. Some are narrow, but all are safe if a good

lookout is kept. The passage N of Digura is the widest and has

a 3.7m patch on its S side. 

5.45 Mamigili (3°30'N., 72°50'E.) and Ariyaddu, about 0.5

mile E, lie at the S extremity of the atoll and were inhabited in

1970. The channels into the lagoon on either side of Ariyaddu,

though narrow, are free from dangers. The E channel has a

least depth of 51m and the W channel a least depth of 48m in

the fairway. A small reef lies about 1.5 miles N of Mamigili. 

5.45 The W side of the atoll, in a general N-S direction, is composed of large reefs enclosing lagoons. The passages between

are mostly wide and deep.

5.45 Mandu, 15 miles NNW of Mamigili; Himendu, 12 miles farther N; Malos, 4 miles N of Himendu; and Feridu, 4 miles farther N, were all inhabited in 1970. 

5.45 An opening in the reef about 7.5 miles WNW of Mamigili is

narrow, as are the openings 2 and 3 miles farther N. 

5.45 Passages, about 2 miles wide, lie N and S of the reef on
136 Sector 5. The Laccadive Islands and the Maldive Islands 

Pub. 173

which Mandu lies. All the rest of the passages on the W side

are deep and safe. 

5.45 Matiwari (4°12'N., 72°44'E.) and an unnamed islet, about

1.8 miles ESE, were inhabited in 1970. Good anchorage was

obtained in 1942 about 2 miles E of Matiwari. 

Fulidu Channel and Ariyaddu Channel

5.46 Fulidu Channel (3°45'N., 73°25'E.), between the S

end of South Male Atoll and the N end of Felidu Atoll, about 7

miles S, is deep and free from dangers. 

5.46 Ariyaddu Channel (3°25'N., 72°53'E.), between the S end

of Ari Atoll and the N end of Nilandu Atoll, about 9.5 miles S,

is also deep and free from dangers. 

5.46 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents, which are very strong

during spring tides, set E through Fulidu Channel and Ariyaddu Channel with the flood, and E with the ebb. The tidal currents are periodically retarded or accelerated by the current. 

Felidu Atoll

5.47 Felidu Atoll (3°30'N., 73°30'E.) consists of several islets, seven of which were inhabited in 1970. The principal occupation is net weaving. 

5.47 Fulidu (3°41'N., 73°24'E.), an islet at the N point of the

atoll, is well-wooded, with a conspicuous clump of trees at its

center, and was inhabited in 1970. 

5.47 There are several safe but narrow openings along the N and

NE sides of the atoll. The opening 1.5 miles E of Fulidu has a

least charted depth of 9.1m in the fairways. In 1987, it was reported that patches with minimum depth of 6m existed and the

area was breaking heavy seas. Two miles further ESE another

opening has a submerged rock in mid-channel. There is a channel 1 mile E of Digeri (3°38'N., 73°28'E.), and on each side of

Alimata, about 3 miles S. In 1987, the N channel was not recommended. 

5.47 Tinadu, about 6.5 miles SSE of Alimata, with Felidu and

Keadu farther SSE, are three islets at the head of the bight on

the NE side of Felidu Atoll. The three islets were inhabited in

1970; Felidu is the island of the Chief of the Atoll. The openings between these islets and the reefs between are narrow and

a heavy swell sets on them during the Northeast Monsoon; the

currents and tidal current are strong. 

5.47 Between Keadu and Foteo, at the E extremity of the atoll,

there are other openings, narrow and without landmarks. This

part of the barrier reef as well as the whole S face of the atoll

may be considered one continuous reef. 

5.47 Foteo was inhabited in 1970 and has some tall trees on it. 

5.47 Caution.—The latest maps confirm earlier reports that the

NE edge of the reef N of Foteo extends about 1 mile farther NE

than charted.

5.48 Rakidu (3°19'N., 73°27'E.), the S islet of the atoll,

was inhabited in 1970. There is a very narrow and deep channel, leading into the lagoon, on each side of Rakidu; both are

free from dangers in the fairways. 

5.48 From the W channel at Rakidu to the W point of the atoll,

there are nine openings in the barrier reef, but there are no

landmarks to help locate them. Lighted Beacon No. 2 lies on

the reef at the W point of the atoll. 

5.48 Several openings in the NW side of the atoll are not easily

seen. Gunawari, about 4 miles SW of Fulidu, has two conspicuous palms showing over dense scrub; an islet, about 1 mile

ESE, has eight coconut palms. 

5.48 The latest maps (1970), based on aerial photography, confirm an earlier report that the reef between Gunawari and

Fulidu has extended about 1 mile NW. 

Wataru Channel

5.49 Wataru Channel (3°15'N., 73°30'E.), between Felidu

Atoll and Mulaku Atoll, about 8 miles S, is divided into two

channels at its W end by Wataru Reef. The S channel is wider

and both channels are deep. The currents and tidal currents are

strong. Off Wataru Reef, heavy W swells are experienced.

5.49 Wataru Reef is a small atoll with a small opening at its S end,

which can only be used by boats. An islet lies on each side of

the opening; the E islet had palms on it in 1970. According to

the latest maps, the W islet may have disappeared; they also

show the reef to be about 1 mile longer in an E-W direction

than charted. 

5.49 Rakidu, the S islet of Felidu Atoll, marks the N side of Wataru Channel. 

Mulaku Atoll

5.50 Mulaku Atoll (3°00'N., 73°29'E.) consists of several

islets, ten of which were inhabited in 1970. All the islets lie on

the barrier reef, except Mulaku, the largest islet, which lies

close within the E side of the lagoon.

5.50 There are many coral reefs in the lagoon, which has a sandy

bottom.

5.50 The reefs on the S and E sides of the atoll were reported

(1920) to be extending seaward; the latest maps prepared from

aerial photography confirm this. 

5.50 Between the NW extremity of the atoll and Digaru, about 11

miles ESE, there are three narrow openings without nearby islets to identify them. Digaru and Maduwari, about 0.8 mile

ESE, were inhabited in 1970. Close SE of the latter two islets

are channels about 45.7m wide, with a least depth of 9.1m 

5.50 Raimandu, inhabited in 1970, lies about 1 mile SSW of the

NE point of the atoll.

5.50 An opening in the barrier reef lies between the islets of Vevaru and Muli, about 8.5 and 10.5 miles, respectively, SSW of

Raimandu. The opening is narrowed to about 0.6 mile by the

reefs extending from both islets. There is a deep channel

through the opening, but the entrance is intricate, with a least

depth of 5.5m in places. Mulaku lies close NW of the opening;

a village lies on the N side of the island. 

5.50 Landing can only be made on the W side of the islets. The

nearest entrance to the lagoon lies 2 miles W of Kolufuri. 

5.50 From Kureli (2°47'N., 73°21'E.), inhabited in 1970, the reef

extends N for 24 miles, with 14 safe openings into the lagoon.

Some of these openings are small, but none has a depth of less

than 18.3m. 

5.50 Tuvaru, about 7 miles N of Kureli, was inhabited in 1970. An

opening, close S of the islet, forms a good channel with depths

55m, but there are coral reefs just within the entrance. 
Sector 5. The Laccadive Islands and the Maldive Islands 137

Pub. 173

Nilandu Atoll

5.51 Nilandu Atoll consists of North Nilandu Atoll and

South Nilandu Atoll, separated by a deep channel 3.5 miles

wide. This channel is free from dangers. The islands of both

atolls are mostly covered by vegetation with many coconut

palms. 

5.52 North Nilandu Atoll (3°31'N., 72°56'E.) has few islets on the barrier reef. There are several islets in the lagoon,

which is deep but encumbered with drying coral reefs.

5.52 The islet of Ari Faro (3°20'N., 72°54'E.) marks the N end of

the atoll. An opening, with depths of 27 to 37m, lies about 1.3

miles W of Ari Faro, and a broad deep opening, with a reef in

the middle, lies on the E side of Ari Faro. 

5.52 From the latter opening, around the E boundary of the atoll

to its S point, there are openings from 1 to 4 miles apart; all

have moderate depths except the narrow passage S of Farna

(3°19'N., 72°59'E.), which has a charted depth of 5.5m. 

5.52 Biladu (3°09'N., 72°59'E.), about 2 miles within the lagoon,

was inhabited in 1970 and had a boat harbor on its NW side. 

5.52 Nilandu (3°05'N., 72°54'E.), the S island of the atoll, was inhabited in 1970. The S opening into the lagoon, E of Nilandu,

is 1 mile wide with depths of 12.8 to 37m in the fairway.

Daumbuda, about 2 miles ENE of Nilandu, lies on the reef bordering the E side of the opening. Hekara, Maguda (the chief’s

island), and Daumbuda were inhabited in 1970. 

5.52 A wide, deep passage lies at the N end of the reef extending

4 miles NNW from Nilandu. On the N side of this passage is a

circular reef, N of which is a deep narrow passage. 

5.52 Hemiti, about 12 miles NNW of Nilandu, is the W islet of

the atoll and was inhabited in 1970. An opening, with a depth

of 24m, lies N of Hemiti and is bounded by the edge of the reef

projecting 1.5 miles N of the islet and the reef N. 

5.52 There are some shoals in the opening about 6 miles SSE of

Farna, between Feartu and Mawafuri. The latter island is much

smaller than charted due to erosion by the sea, but there were a

few palms on it in 1970. 

5.53 South Nilandu Atoll (2°50'N., 72°56'E.) has many islets on the barrier reef on the E side of the atoll, but few on the

W side. The islets on the SE side of the atoll are closely

grouped. 

5.53 The atoll has many openings in the barrier reef but is inaccessible on its SW side. 

5.53 The lagoon is deep but encumbered with large and small coral reefs, some of which dry; these reefs are steep-to and easily

discernible. Most of the many islets in the lagoon are in the N

part and about 3 miles within the lagoon.

5.53 Furi (3°01'N., 73°01'E.), the N islet on the E side of the

atoll, was uninhabited in 1970. There is an opening close SE of

Furi. 

5.53 From the latter opening the reef, with six other openings and

about 20 islets upon it, extends to Kandimas, about 16 miles S. 

5.53 A narrow opening on the reef, between Kandimas and Wani,

about 1 mile SW, has a least depth of 37m in the fairway. The

latter islet was inhabited in 1970. 

5.53 Another opening, about 2.8 miles farther SW and NE of

Maimbudu, has a least depth of 12.8m in the fairway. 

5.54 Kuda Huvadu (2°41'N., 72°54'E.), at the S extremity

of the atoll, was inhabited in 1970 and is the atoll chief’s island. The opening, E of the island, is about 1.5 miles wide with

a least depth of 16.5m in the fairway.

5.54 Huludali, about 12 miles NNW of Kuda Huvadu, was inabited in 1970 and has openings N and S of it. The S opening,

about 0.2 mile wide between the edges of the reef, has a least

charted depth of 27m. The N opening, between Huludali and

Madali, about 1.3 miles NW, is about 0.8 mile wide between

the reefs, and has a least depth of 35m in the fairway; this

opening is better defined than the opening S of Huludali. A

reef extends about 0.8 mile E of Madali. 

5.54 There are three openings on the barrier reef between Madali

and Furi, about 12.5 miles NE, but there are no other islets on

this part of the reef. The NW side of the atoll is unsafe to approach, as some islets inside the lagoon have trees on them visible from a distance, but they lie too far within to provide safe

navigational marks. 

5.54 Dures and Rimbudu lie within the lagoon, about 3 and 4

miles, respectively, NE of Madali; they are called the Jeweller’s Islands because the inhabitants were at one time the chief

jewellers of the Maldive Islands. Rimbudu was inhabited in

1970. 

5.54 Anchorage NE of Rimbudu is more comfortable in a SW

swell than that S of the island. 

Kudahuvadu Channel

5.55 Kudahuvadu Channel (2°40'N., 73°15'E.), between

Mulaka and Nilandu Atolls to N, and Kolumadulu Atoll to S, is

deep and free from dangers. It is about 15 miles wide at its E

entrance and about 9.5 miles wide at its W entrance. 

5.55 The W entrance of the channel is well-defined on its N side

by Kuda Huvada; the S side of the entrance is not so wellmarked. 

5.55 Tides—Currents.—Currents in Kudahuvadu Channel are

more obstructed than those in the channels farther S because of

the nearby atolls, and consequently are more uncertain in direction and their velocities are greater. 

5.55 Tidal currents set E through the channel with the flood and

W with the ebb.

Kolumadulu Atoll

5.56 Kolumadulu Atoll (2°23'N., 73°08'E.) has several

openings in its barrier reef; there are islets on its E, S, and W

sides, but very few on its N side. The lagoon is encumbered

with numerous drying coral reefs. 

5.56 The few islets on the N side of the atoll were wooded in

1970, and had many coconut trees.

5.56 Kandufuri (2°32'N., 73°00'E.) has openings in the reef

about 1.3 miles WSW and close E; both openings are deep.

Kandufuri was reported to be a good radar target at 15 miles.

5.56 Buruni, about 8 miles E of Kandufuri, has a channel close E

with a depth of 12.8m. Another opening, about 2.5 miles E and

close W of Koragandu, has a least charted depth of 29m, but

care must be taken to avoid reefs about 1 mile S of the opening.

5.56 Olugeri lies about 6 miles ESE of Karagandu. The E entrance on the N side of the atoll lies close E of Olugeri, and has

a least charted depth of 9.1m.
138 Sector 5. The Laccadive Islands and the Maldive Islands 

Pub. 173

5.56 Wilifuri, at the NE end of the atoll, was populated in 1970. 

5.56 From close N of Wilifuri, the reef extends about 12 miles S

to Diyagili and has no openings. Diyagili and Mudifuri, about

2 miles NE, are inhabited.

5.56 A good channel, about 0.7 mile between the reefs and with a

least depth of 14.6m, lies close SW of Diyagili; there is a tide

rip across the entrance. 

5.56 Guradu, on which there is a village, lies 1 mile SW of Diyagili. 

5.56 Between Guradu and Timarafuri, about 13 miles SW, there

are no openings in the barrier reef; numerous islets lie on this

reef. 

5.56 There are three openings between Timafuri and Veimandu,

about 3 miles WSW; the latter two islets are inhabited. The

channel close W of Timafuri has a least charted depth of 68m

and is free from dangers. The channel, about 1 mile farther W,

is not recommended; it has a least depth of 11m and care must

be taken to avoid rocks on its E side. A broad, deep channel

lies about 1 mile farther W and close E of Veimandu, but a

large coral patch, with off-lying rocks, lies about 0.8 mile within the entrance.

5.56 The barrier reef then extends from Veimandu to Naraka,

about 8 miles W, and then about 5 miles NNW to Hirilandu.

5.56 The most convenient entrance from the W, and the only one

on the W side, lies between Hirilandu and Kandudu, about 2

miles N. The entrance is constructed by a reef, partly abovewater, in the middle of the opening, with an islet about 1 mile

E. Vessels may best avoid the reef by keeping well to the S or

N sides of the opening, while maintaining a sharp lookout for

the reefs extending N from Hirilandu and S from Kandudu. 

5.56 Anchorage.—There is anchorage, according to the prevailing wind, on the E side of Hirilandu or the E side of Kandudu,

but care must be taken to anchor clear of coral patches. 

Veimandu Channel

5.57 Veimandu Channel (2°10'N., 73°20'E.), between

Kolumandulu Atoll and Haddummati Atoll, about 16 miles SE,

is deep and free from dangers, but it is inadvisable to proceed

through it at night. 

5.57 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in this channel have a velocity of about 2 knots at springs, but this velocity may be accelerated or retarted by the prevailing current. 

5.57 A current of 1.8 to 3.5 knots, setting in 070° direction, was

experienced in Veimandu Channel in October, 1960. 

Haddummati Atoll

5.58 Haddummati Atoll (1°55'N., 73°25'E.) has six openings in the barrier reef surrounding it, four of which are suitable for large vessels. The lagoon is encumbered by many coral

reefs, but these can be seen by a lookout at the masthead on a

clear day with the sun behind.

5.58 Isdu (2°07'N., 73°35'E.), at the N extremity of the atoll, had

several villages on it. It was reported (1963) that Isdu lies about

3 miles NNW of its charted position. 

5.58 The inhabited islet of Mabadu lies about 5.5 miles SSW of

Isdu. Passages lie N and S of Mabadu; the N passage is shallow, but the S passage is about 0.2 mile wide, with depths of

14.6m. 

5.58 From the latter opening, the barrier reef extends about 12.5

miles SSW to close W of Gadu, at the E opening of the S entrance to the lagoon. Of the several islets on this section of reef,

Mandu, Baresdu, Gang, and Funadu are inhabited. Gang and

Funadu were reported (1970) to lie about 2 miles NW of their

charted positions. 

5.58 Funadu was reported to be a good radar target at 18 miles. 

5.58 The S opening into the lagoon lies between the reef extending 0.5 mile SW of Gadu and the reef close E of Hitadu, about

2.5 miles SW. The opening is divided into two passages by

three reef-fringed islets lying just within and on the W side of

the entrance. The E passage has a least depth of 55m and the W

passage has a least charted depth of 27m. Several coral reefs lie

in the fairway W of the three islets, and care must be taken if

using the W passage. 

5.59 Hitadu (1°48'N., 73°25'E.), on the W side of the S

opening, is the atoll chief’s island; with Kunahandu, close W,

the two islands appear as one. In 1984, a light was reported on

the W end of Hitadu Island. 

5.59 The barrier reef extends from close E of Hitadu for about 12

miles NW to about 1.5 miles N of Mavaru. The latter island, at

the W extremity of the atoll, is the principal island. 

5.59 Anchorage.—Convenient anchorage has been reported, in

44m, N of Hitadu. Landing was easily made on a sandy beach

after passing over the reef which extends about 183m offshore.

5.59 Good anchorage, sheltered from W winds, can be found, in

31 to 37m, about 0.8 mile E of Mavaru.

One and Half Degree Channel

5.60 One and Half Degree Channel (1°30'N., 73°20'E.),

between Haddummati Atoll and Suvadiva Atoll, about 52 miles

S, is deep and free from dangers. 

5.60 A detached shoal, with a depth of 15.5m, was reported

(1963) to lie about 21 miles N of the N of Suvadiva Atoll. 

5.60 Currents setting E, with velocities up to 3.5 knots, have been

experienced in October and November. During the Northeast

Monsoon period (December to March), a set W of nearly 4

knots was reported in 1972. 

Suvadiva Atoll

5.61 Suvadiva Atoll (Huvadu Atoll) (0°30'N., 73°15'E.) is

one of the largest of the Maldive Islands, and also one of the

unhealthiest of the atolls. Elephantiasis is said to be common

and cases of leucodermia have been reported; isolation of such

cases is strictly enforced by the government. 

5.61 Many islets are on the barrier reef and within the lagoon, but

not all are inhabited. The lagoon has greater depths than the

other atolls of the Maldive Islands, and is less obstructed by

coral reefs. 

5.61 The atoll is the center of the Maldivian mat industry, as the

rushes from which the mats are made are found in great quantities.

5.61 The N of the atoll is bounded by detached reefs, with a few

islets about 2 miles within. There are several safe passages, but

as there are no islets on this portion of the barrier reef to provide landmarks, a careful lookout is necessary. 

5.61 From its N point on the E side, the barrier reef extends about
Sector 5. The Laccadive Islands and the Maldive Islands 139

Pub. 173

11 miles SSE and is impassable. Mametu, about 4.5 miles from

the above N point, consists of two islets, and are the first islets

to be seen when approaching from NE. 

5.61 Wiringili (0°45'N., 73°23'E.), densely inhabited in 1970,

lies at the S end of the impassable reef. Kudu lies about 0.5

mile farther S. There are passages N and S of Kudu. The N passage is about 0.2 mile wide with a least depth of 22m, and the S

passage is about 0.3 mile wide with a least depth of 24m.

5.61 Between Kudu and Kandu Huludu, about 23 miles SSE,

there are a number of openings in the reef and numerous islets

lying on it. Of the islets, Nilandu, Dandu, Hura Mula, Kondai,

Diaddu, Mawaru, and Kandu Huludu were inhabited in 1970. 

5.61 It was reported (1963) that the islands between Diaddu

(0°29'N., 73°30'E.) and Kubura, about 5.5 miles S, were about

3 miles E of their charted positions. 

5.61 A passage, about 0.5 mile wide, with depths of 12.8 to 14.6m

in the fairway, lies between Kandu Huludu and Huluwarolu,

about 1 mile WSW. 

5.61 From the NE end of Huluwarolu, the barrier reef extends

about 5.5 miles SW, and just within its SW end is an islet

called Gadu, inhabited in 1970. Several islets are on this part of

the reef, and from the offing appear as one. A narrow passage

SW of Gadu has a least depth of 3.6m in the fairway. 

5.62 Gan (0°17'N., 73°22'E.), inhabited in 1970 and the

largest island of the atoll, lies about 1 mile W of Gadu.

5.62 Gan Channel, W of Gan, is about 1.5 miles wide, with a least

depth of 55m in the fairway. An islet, about 2 miles NNW of

the SW end of Gan, can be passed on either side, but care must

be taken to avoid a reef extending 1.3 miles SSW of it, and also

Low Bushy Island off the W end of this reef. Inside the entrance of this channel, the lagoon is encumbered with islands

and reefs all plainly visible from aloft in favorable light.

5.62 Several channels are in the barrier reef, between the W side

of the entrance to Gan Channel and Wadu, about 7 miles WSW.

The channel between Rasfanu, 6 miles W of Gan, and Kuri,

about 1.8 miles farther W, has a least depth of 37m and leads

N.

5.62 Wadu, inhabited in 1970, is the site of ancient mosques and

burial places; the barrier reef extends about 2.5 miles WSW of

Wadu. The channel into the lagoon, close W of the latter reef,

has a least depth of 12.8m in the fairway. 

5.62 Matoda, about 6 miles W of Wadu, lies on the W end of the S

coral reef of the atoll. This reef contains several islets and extends about 4.3 miles ESE from Matoda. 

5.62 Fiori (0°14'N., 73°05'E.), inhabited in 1970, lies about 1

mile W of Matoda. A deep channel, about 0.3 mile wide and

fringed by reef, lies between the two islets. 

5.62 From Fiori, the reef extends about 7 miles NW to Nadale,

and then about 10 miles NNW to Madaveli; this portion of reef

is so densely encumbered with small islets as to appear as a

single large island from some directions. 

5.62 Kandudu Channel, between Madaveli and Kandudu, about 1

mile N, is the more convenient and principal entrance into the

lagoon. It is about 0.8 mile wide, with a least depth of 11m.

5.62 Havaru Tinadu, about 4 miles N of Madaveli, is well-wooded, very low, and swampy in parts. It is densely populated and

reported to be the seat of government of the atoll, with radio

communication with Male. From SW or W, this islet may appear as the N point of the atoll, because none of the low-lying

islets N of it are wooded.

5.62 Between Havaru Tinadu and Mafuri, about 21 miles NNE,

the barrier reef recedes to form a bight. There are numerous

openings into the lagoon on the NW side, but no useful landmarks; however, a vessel might pass through one of these

openings in an emergency with a good lookout at the masthead

and with favorable light conditions. 

5.63 Mafuri (0°50'N., 73°08'E.), the principal islet on the

NW side of the atoll, was densely inhabited in 1970. Its fringing reef extends about 1 mile N of the islet. Landing is at the

village near the middle of the E side of the islet. The boat channel is not marked and only boats of shallow draft can land here

at LW.

5.63 Hibadu, within the lagoon and about 3.5 miles E of Mafuri,

was uninhabited in 1970 and very unhealthy. It lacks palm trees

but is marked by tall luxuriant trees. 

5.63 Anchorage.—During the Northeast Monsoon, sheltered anchorage can be found on the W side of Nilandu (0°38'N.,

73°23'E.). Vessels with local knowledge can enter the lagoon

on either side of the reef on which Nilandu lies; care must be

taken to avoid a coral reef that lies in the middle of the N channel. Anchorage can also be found on the W side of Kondai

about 10 miles SE, but local knowledge is necessary. 

5.63 Good anchorage can be obtained about 0.5 mile NW of Gadu

and also off Gan.

5.63 Hondedu (0°27'N., 72°57'E.), S of Madaveli, affords good

anchorage, in 49 to 64m, on its E side during the Southwest

Monsoon; local knowledge is necessary. 

5.63 Anchorage may be obtained in the NW part of the lagoon, in

18.3m, with Mafuri bearing 267°, distant 1 mile.

Equatorial Channel

5.64 Equatorial Channel (0°00', 73°15'E.) is the name

generally applied to the channel between Suvadiva Atoll and

Addu Atoll, about 46 miles S, but the name should be more

properly applied to the channel between the S point of Suvadiva Atoll and Fua Mulaku, which lie about 12 miles N and 16

miles S, respectively, of the Equator. There are no known dangers between Suvadiva Atoll and Addu Atoll.

5.64 Tides—Currents.—Strong E and W sets, with velocities up

to 5.5 knots, have been reported in Equatorial Channel, but in

its S part the easterly counter equatorial current, with a velocity

up to about 4 knots, seems to prevail. 

Fua Mulaku Island

5.65 Fua Mulaku Island (0°17'S., 73°26'E.) is wooded

and inhabited. In 1968, the island was reported to lie about 3

miles WNW of its charted position. In 1963, the island was reported to extend 1.5 miles more in a NW-SE direction than

shown on the chart; recent air photography (1969) confirmed

an extension in these directions of 1 mile. 

5.65 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in the vicinity of Fua

Mulaku set W on the ebb and E on the flood, but are little felt

except in retarding or accelerating the current. 

5.65 Fua Mulaku is steep-to on its W, N, and E sides, but a shelving bank, on which the sea breaks heavily up to 0.8 mile offshore, extends about 1.5 miles SSE from the S end of the
140 Sector 5. The Laccadive Islands and the Maldive Islands 

Pub. 173

island. This bank, composed of hard sand, with small coral

rock is steep-to. 

5.65 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained during moderate

weather, in 11 to 12.8m, on the S end of the shelving bank. 

5.65 A landing place on the E side of the islands can be recognized by a collection of boat sheds. Landing on the W side is

dangerous and should not be attempted. 

Addu Atoll (Addoo Atoll) 

5.66 Addu Atoll (0°39'S., 78°10'E.), the S atoll of the

Maldive Islands, is fertile and consists of many islands and islets lying on a barrier reef enclosing a lagoon which provides

good anchorage. 

5.66 The barrier reef, which dries, extends about 0.5 mile seaward

of the islands. Four deep channels lead through the barrier reef

into the lagoon, which has general depths of 18.3 to 75m.

5.66 The islands and islets on the W side are more densely wooded than those on the E side, which are covered with scrub. 

5.66 Good radar returns have been reported from Addu Atoll at

11 miles 

5.66 Winds—Weather.—Wind direction has a seasonal pattern

not conforming to that of the monsoon. Winds from NNE predominate in January and February, backing to W in March,

April, and May and to S in July and August. In September, the

predominant direction veers to become W in October and November, and N by December. Wind speeds are generally below

15 knots, with greatest mean speeds in May and October. Occasional gusts exceeding 40 knots occur at any time of year in

association with rain showers from SW or NW. 

5.66 Winds from E are rare and usually light. 

5.66 Tides—Currents.—Addu Atoll and Equatorial Channel lie

in the N fringe of the Equatorial Countercurrent. The predominant direction of the current appears to be E or NE throughout

the year, but observations are scanty and marked variations no

doubt occur. 

5.66 Observations suggest the current increases in strength within

50 miles from the atoll. 

5.66 Approaching Addu Atoll from W in approximate latitude

0°45'S, a vessel reported (1965) that the countercurrent was

running at 1 knot or less. When E of meridian 72°E, the current

increased setting ENE at an estimated 3 knots and possibly increasing to 5 knots when about 30 miles W of Gan. 

5.66 On the S side of the atoll,the flood current sets strongly into

the lagoon through Wilingili Channel (Viligili Kandu) and out

of the lagoon through Gan Channel (Gan Kandu). The ebb current sets out through both channels; thus the current through

Gan Channel (Gan Kandu) is continuously out of the lagoon. 

5.66 The current sets strongly across the entrance to Gan Channel

(Gan Kandu), usually in an E direction, but after a spell of E

winds a set to the SW is experienced. 

5.66 On the N side of the atoll, in Kudu Kandu Channel (Kuda

Kandu), the current sets in with the flood and out with the ebb,

but in Man Kandu Channel (Maa Kandu) it sets continuously

out of the lagoon. The tidal current in Man Kandu Channel is

reported to attain a velocity of 5 knots. 

5.66 The tidal rise at Addu Atoll is 1.2m at MHWS and 0.8m at

MHWN.

5.67 East side.—Meedhoo (Hulhumeedhoo) (0°35'S.,

73°14'E.), the NE islet of the atoll, is thickly wooded (1973),

except near the village Meedhoo at its NW end and near the

village of Huludu at its S end. 

5.67 Heratera, a narrow isthmus, thickly wooded (1973) in its N

part, extends about 2.5 miles S from the S end of Meedhoo.

5.67 Kaluhera and Mulikadu lie about 0.2 mile and about 1 mile

S, respectively, of the S end of Heratera; a coconut palm stands

near the E side of Mulikadu. The barrier reef extends about 0.8

mile SW of Mulikadu. 

5.67 Viligili, an island with its N end about 1.4 miles SW of Mulikadu, lies on a detached reef. The NE part of the island is covered with scrub and is heavily wooded. The island was

uninhabited in 1973, but is sometimes visited by fishermen.

Wilingili Channel (Viligili Kandu), an opening into the lagoon,

lies NE of Viligili. Gan Channel (Gan Kandu), another opening, lies SW of Viligili. 

5.68 Gan (0°41'S., 73°10'E.), at the S end of Addu Atoll,

lies about 1 mile W of the SW end of Viligili. The island was

lent in 1960 to the British Government as a staging post for the

Royal Air Force. The British presence on the island ceased on

March 31, 1976. 

5.68 Depths—Limitations.—A concrete pier, 135m long and

13.4m wide, is situated about 0.3 mile E of the NW end of the

island. There is a channel 15.2m wide, with a depth of 2.3m on

both sides of the jetty. There is a least depth of 2.7m at the seaward end of the jetty. 

5.68 An oil pier, about 0.2 mile ESE of the concrete pier, extends

134m to the edge of the barrier reef. Tankers using the oil pier

anchor off and secure the stern to moorings buoys off the head

of the pier. 

5.68 Aspect.—The island is very fertile, with many palm and casuarina trees on its NW side, but the S part is covered with

scrub. The N shore is lined with buildings associated with the

airfield on the island. A conspicuous clump of casuarina trees

stands at the SE end of the island. 

5.68 Numerous radio masts, with elevations of 40m, some of

which are marked by red obstruction lights, are situated on the

S side of the island. In the same area is a lattice tower, with an

elevation of 30m, and fitted with reflector devices, the upper

rectangular and the lower crescent-shaped. A black lattice tower, fitted with crosstrees, lies close NE of this tower.

5.68 Two blue square towers, with elevations of 9m, lie on the N

side of the island about 0.8 mile farther NW; they are conspicuous from N and E, but obscured from the NW. A similar tower

and several radio masts, all with an elevation of 29m, lie about

0.2 mile W of the water towers; the tower and some of the

masts are marked by red obstruction lights. 

5.68 Pilotage.—No licensed pilot is available.

5.68 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in about 40m, good

holding ground of coral and sand, from 0.4 to 0.5 mile ENE of

the jetties on the N side of Gan. There is very little swell here,

but farther inside the lagoon it may be moderate to heavy. 

5.68 Ships up to 12,000 grt anchor regularly in this area. Ships

formerly anchored farther WNW, but this area is now fouled by

a submarine cable. 

5.68 Caution.—The lighted buoys and buoys in the channels and

the lagoon should not be relied upon.

5.69 West side.—The barrier reef, with several islands on
Sector 5. The Laccadive Islands and the Maldive Islands 141

Pub. 173

it, extends about 7.5 miles NW of Gan. 

5.69 Feydhoo, close NW of Gan, to which it is connected by a ruined causeway, is thickly wooded. 

5.69 Maradhoo, thickly wooded in its SE part, lies close NW of

Feydhoo and is connected to it by a causeway. 

5.69 Hankada, about 183m NW of Maradhoo, is connected to it

by a causeway and also to Abuhera farther NW.

5.69 Abuhera is connected by a narrow isthmus to Hithadhoo, the

NW and largest island of Addu Atoll. The latter island is thickly wooded N of its junction with Abuherra. Two radio masts,

exhibiting red obstruction lights at an elevation of 73m, lie near

the S point of Hithadhoo. Close S of the masts is a radome,

conspicuous to seaward from S and W, with numerous unlit radio masts, with elevations of about 36m, extending 0.5 mile

NW. A large village, with three mosques, is situated on the N

part of the island.

5.69 Koattey (Demon Point) (0°35'S., 73°05'E.), the N extremity

of Hithadhoo, lies about 3.3 miles N of the radome. 

5.70 North side.—From Koattey (Demon Point), the outer

edge of the barrier reef trends SE and E for about 3.5 miles to

the W entrance point of Kudu Kandu Channel. Man Kandu

Channel, about 0.8 mile farther E, is separated from Kudu

Kandu Channel by two sandy cays; Kandu Huraa (Bushy Islet),

the E cay, has a prominent group of trees on it. 

5.70 From the E entrance point of Man Kandu Channel, the barrier reef extends about 5.5 miles ENE to the NE extremity of

Meedhoo. Mahira Island, on this reef, extends to about 1 mile

W of the NW extremity of Meedhoo.

5.71 Lagoon.—The reef fringing the islands extends about

0.5 mile into the lagoon, except in the SW corner, where it is

less than 0.2 mile off Gan and Fedu. The fringing reef extends

much farther in the NE and NW parts of the lagoon, which are

encumbered with coral reefs; the NE part has not been thoroughly examined, and vessels should not approach these areas

too closely. 

5.71 Medu Gaa and Arivara are two coral heads which dry, lying

in the middle of the lagoon, about 3 and 3.5 miles, respectively,

N of the NW extremity of Gan. Hulhuvaa Galaal, with a least

depth of 4.9m, lies about 0.2 mile S of Medu Gaa. 

5.71 Aa Galaa,a drying coral shoal, lies about 1.3 miles NW of

the NW extremity of Gan. 

5.71 Dhebai Halaa, with a least depth of 8.5m, lies about 1 mile N

of Aa Galaa. 

5.71 Anchorage.—Anchorage, during E winds, can be taken off

the W side of the E islands, and in W or S winds off the NE

side of the SW islands; local knowledge is necessary. These are

the most convenient anchorages for communication with the

inhabitants. Anchorage off Gan was previously described in

paragraph 5.68.

5.71 Swell may be experienced in the lagoon throughout the year,

but most often and most severely with W or S winds, when refueling alongside a tanker or loading and discharging a ship

may be difficult.

5.71 Caution.—A submarine cable, on the W side of the lagoon,

is laid between the NW end of Gan and Hithadhoo. Vessels are

warned not to anchor within 0.5 mile of this cable, which carries high voltage. 

5.72 Entrance channels.—Gan Channel and Wilingili

Channel, the S channels, are to be preferred to the N channels,

as they are broader and less intricate; a daylight approach is

recommended. Aircraft runway lights at each end of the runway at Gan are switched on when it is in use; the lights are in

line 098.5°, but have no navigational significance for ships. 

5.72 Gan Channel is about 0.4 mile wide, with depths of 16.5 to

18.3m in the fairway. 

5.72 Wilingili Channel, about 0.4 mile wide between the reefs,

has a least depth of 18.3m and is entered on a NW course. Care

should be taken to avoid a 12.2m shoal at the lagoon end of the

channel close off the reef on the SW side and Medagala Reef

with the shoal S.

5.72 Man Kandu Channel and Kudu Kandu Channel, the N channels, are not easy to distinguish from N.

5.72 Man Kandu Channel, about 0.2 mile wide between the shoal

ground extending from the reefs on either side, has a least

depth of 12.2m in the fairway. 

5.72 Kudu Kandu Channel, about 0.1 mile wide between the

fringing reefs, has a least depth of 24m in the fairway. Kudu

Kandu Channel is longer and narrower than Man Kandu Channel, and is unlit.
143

Pub. 173

6. 

India—East Coast—Point Calimere to Balisahi Point

6.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 6 — CHART INFORMATION
145

Pub. 173

SECTOR 6 

INDIA—EAST COAST—POINT CALIMERE TO BALISAHI POINT

6.0 Plan.—This sector describes the E coast of India, from Point

Calimere to Balisahi Point, and includes the Coromandel Coast

and the Orissa coast within its limits; Chennai (Madras) and

Vishakhapatnam are the main harbors. The descriptive sequence is from S to N as far as Cocanada and then NE to Balisahi Point. 

General Remarks

6.1 The E coast of India, from Point Calimere N to Cocanada, is about 500 miles long and is known as the Coromandel Coast. That part of the coast between Cocanada and

Balisahi Point, about 364 miles NE, is known as the Orissa

Coast. 

6.1 The low sandy coast fronting the W side of the Bay of Bengal is exposed to a very heavy surf. As a result, there is little or

no shelter provided for vessels other than small craft. The harbors at Chennai and Vishakhapatnam are the only large ports

providing shelter and berthing facilities for all classes of vessels. The coast S of Chennai appears to have been encroached

upon by the sea to a considerable extent. 

6.1 Between Pondicherry and Chennai, scattered hills rise to

heights of 46 to 198m, at distances of 2 to 16 miles inland.

Similar hills lie in the vicinity of Nellore, and as far N as the

Gundlakamma River. 

6.1 Between Godavari Point and Shortt Island, about 360 miles

NE, the coast is low and barren in places and relatively high

and densely wooded in other places. With the exception of Cocanada and False Bays, there are no indentations of any appreciable size.

6.1 The depth curves generally parallel the coast with the 200m

curves lying about 15 to 25 miles offshore between Godavari

Point and the mouth of the Devi River (19°59'N., 86°24'E.). 

6.1 Winds—Weather.—Changes in the monsoons are usually

accompanied by bad weather. Cyclonic storms, although rare,

sometimes occur near the middle of November or the beginning of April. The rainy season commences toward the end of

June and ends in the latter part of November.

6.1 Tides—Currents.—The direct effect of the Northeast Monsoon and the Southwest Monsoon winds on the surface waters

of the Bay of Bengal is the development of seasonal currents in

opposite directions.

6.1 Along the E coast of India, on the W side of the bay, it is not

unusual to experience currents setting with velocities of 2 to 3

knots. From February through May, a strong current sets to the

N, and from September through December, a similar current

setting to the S may be experienced. A survey party found currents with velocities of 1 to 2 knots outside the 45m curve, less

current between the 35 and 18m curves, and little or no current

inside the latter curve. Close to the shore, the current was occasionally reversed. 

6.1 When the current was setting to the N in the offing, a set out

of Palk Strait was usually found, and presumably the reverse

takes place when the current sets to the S. Tidal currents are experienced close offshore and they vary the strength of the current in the neighborhood of Middle Banks in Palk Strait.

Point Calimere to Chennai (Madras)

6.2 Point Calimere (10°18'N., 79°52'E.) is the southernmost extremity of the Coromandel Coast and the NW entrance

point of Palk Strait. The following conspicuous objects lie in

the vicinity of the point:

1. Point Calimere Light.

2. Kodiyakkarai Bungalows, about 3 miles WSW of the

point.

3. Two dark-colored pagodas about 5 miles N of the

point and 1 mile inland. These pagodas are shaped like oblong haystacks and are in range 270°.

6.2 Depths—Limitations.—Between Point Calimere and Madras, there are no charted or known dangers seaward of the

35m curve. 

6.2 The 120m curve lies about 2 to 16 miles offshore, lying at its

greatest distance off the E of Point Calimere. 

6.2 An 8.7m detached shoal lies about 7.5 miles ENE of Point

Calimere. A drying sand bank extends about 2 miles NE of the

same point. During bad weather small craft shelter inside this

bank. 

6.2 Nagapattinam Shoal, about 5 miles long and composed of

hard sand and stones, lies parallel to the coast about 4 to 5

Point Calimere Light
146 Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 

Pub. 173

miles offshore. The N end of this shoal lies about 6.8 miles SE

of Nagapattinam Light. Depths over this shoal range from 6.1

to 8.5m.

6.2 Several 18.3m patches lie outside the 18m curve, about 12.5

to 17.5 miles NE of Pondicherry Light. 

6.2 The coast between Point Calimere and Nagapattinam, about

28 miles to the N, is low and fringed by trees. Sand ridges, 3 to

10m high, also fringe the coast.

6.2 The two dark-colored pagodas, previously described above,

and the church at Velanganni, about 5 mile S of Nagapattinam,

are the only distinguishable landmarks between Point Calimere

and Nagapattinam.

6.3 Nagapattinam (Negapatam) (10°46'N., 79°51'E.)

(World Port Index No. 49350), the principal port of the Thanjavur District, lies at the mouth of the Uppanar River. 

6.3 Vessels anchor in the roadstead off the port to work cargo.

All cargo is handled at the anchorage by lighters. About 114 of

these lighters are available, each with a capacity of 40 tons.

These lighters unload and load at the river’s quays at HW. 

6.3 Winds—Weather.—During the Northeast Monsoon, the

predominant wind is from the NE at a force of 6 to 7. The port

is closed to shipping at this time. During the Southwest Monsoon, the wind is W a force 6.

6.3 Tides—Currents.—In general, the currents off Nagapattinam set with the wind and vary with its direction and force.

The tides off the port are semidiurnal.

6.3 Depths—Limitations.—The 10m curve lies about 2 miles

off the port; the depths shoal gradually toward the shore. 

6.3 There is a least depth of 1.2m over the bar which crosses the

mouth of the Uppanar River. The river channel leading to the

river quays has a dredged depth of 2.4m. Cargo lighters must

have a draft of less than 1.2m to cross the bar and enter the river. The sea breaks over the bar in nearly all weathers and crossing can be dangerous for boats unless carefully handled. Boats

are not permitted to cross the bar after dark.

6.3 Aspect—A minaret at Nagore, 46m high, about 3.3 miles N

of Nagapattinam, can be seen before the adjacent coast becomes visible. Upon closer approach, Nagapattinam Light, the

tall church spire to the NW and two chimneys at the railway

workshop to the SW, are conspicuous from the offing. 

6.3 Nagapattinam has been reported to be a good radar target up

to 17 miles. 

6.3 Regulations—Vessels should send their ETA to their local

agent 48 hours in advance. 

6.3 Signals—A signal station which vessels at anchor can communicate with using the International Code of Signals by day,

and the Morse Code by night, is located 0.1 mile NNE of the

old lighthouse. Flags of the International Code of Signals are

displayed from the station to assist vessels in anchoring on the

most suitable bearing from the lighthouse; Flag K indicates a

bearing of 260°, with each subsequent letter indicating a 5° increase to Flag Q, which indicates a bearing of 290°. 

6.3 Storm signals are displayed from the lighthouse in accordance with the Indian Extended System. Further information

on these storm signals may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian

Ocean under “India—Signals.”

6.3 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. Call sign: Nagapattinam Port Radio

2. VHF: VHF channels 11, 13, 14, and 16

3. Telephone: 91-4365-22255

91-4365-22363

4. Telegraph: PORT OFFICE NAGAPATTINAM

6.3 Anchorage—The anchorage off Nagapattinam is open to all

but W winds; the holding ground of mud and sand is good.

Vessels usually anchor according to drafts and the state of the

weather, with the lighthouse bearing between 290° and 260°.

Vessels of moderate draft can take good anchorage, in a depth

of 7.8m, about 1.3 miles E of the lighthouse. In heavy weather,

a short broken sea is encountered; during the Northeast Monsoon it is inadvisable to anchor in depths of less than 9.1m. 

6.4 Nagore (10°50'N., 79°50'E.) lies at the mouth of the

Vettar River, about 3.3 miles N of Nagapattinam. The river

mouth is obstructed by a bar with a least depth of 1.2m. 

6.4 The Chennai Petroleum Corporation Limited Jetty (CPCL

Jetty) is a T-shaped facility extending about 0.7 mile seaward

from a point on the S bank of the entrance to the Vetter River.

The berthing face of the jetty is 65m long, with an alongside

depth of 8.9m. The jetty is used to discharge crude oil for the

refinery in Nagore. 

6.4 The Marine Facility Terminal Jetty is a T-shaped facility extending about 0.7 mile seaward from a point about 2 miles N of

the CPCL Jetty. The berthing face of the jetty is 40m long, with

an alongside depth of 8.3m. The jetty is used to discharge ethylene. 

6.4 Anchorage can be taken about 1 mile E of Nagore, in depths

Nagapattinam Home Page

http://www.indiaport.com/minorports/nagapatti.htm

Nagapattinam Light
Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 147

Pub. 173

of 6.4 to 8.2m. The holding ground is good, but the anchorage

is considered dangerous during the Northeast Monsoon. 

The coast up to 9 miles N of Nagapattinam remains very flat

and low. Two rivers, obstructed by bars at their mouths, flow

into the sea between Nagore and Karikal. These rivers can be

navigated by flat-bottomed boats only after heavy rains. 

6.5 Karaikal Port (10°50'N., 79°52'E.) (World Port Index No. 49370) is a coastal lagoon type harbor located about

about 200 miles S of Chennai (Madras) and about 9 miles S of

the inland city of Karaikal(10°59'N., 79°50'E.). The port is privately operated by Karaikal Port Private Limited (KPPL) and is

located between the Pravadayanar River and the Vettar River. 

6.5 Karaikal Port is a new harbor facility opened in 2009 to handle Panamax vessels up to 75,000 dwt, with a maximum length

of 225m and a maximum draft of 13.0m. The port primarily

handles cement, coal, rice, maize, and machinery. 

6.5 Winds—Weather.—The area has a monsoon climate comprised of a wet and dry season. During the summer wet season,

generally from June into October, the predominant winds are

from the SW at force 6 to 7. Most of the annual rainfall of nearly 1,270mm during this time, continuing into December. During the winter dry season, the predominant winds are from the

NE at force 4 to 5. 

6.5 Tides—Currents.—The tides within the port area are semidiurnal, rising about 0.65m at MHWS, and 0.47m at MHWN, and about 0.2m at MLWN and 0.03m at MLWS.

6.5 Depths—Limitations.—The approach channel is dredged

to a depth of 14.5m. A turning circle, with radius 190m, is located in the center of the harbor. 

6.5 There are two berths, each 230m in length and dredged to a

depth of 14.5m alongside. 

6.5 Aspect.—The harbor protected by two breakwaters, with

their seaward extents marked by lighted beacons.

6.5 About 0.5 mile N of the N breakwater is the Chemplast Pipeline, extending about 1,300m ESE from the coastline. About

0.6 mile S of the S breakwater, a jetty extends about 1,200m E

from the coast. 

6.5 Karaikal Light, a white circular concrete tower, 18m in

height, stands on the N bank of the Arasalar River (10°54.9'N,

6.5 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels and requests should be made through the ships agents at least 3 hours

prior to arrival. It should be noted that berthing at the Sanmar

Marine Terminal takes place only during daylight hours and

vessels heading to this terminal should contact Sanmar Port

Control on VHF Channel 16 at least 3 hours prior to arrival.

Communications between the vessel and the Pilot is carried out

on VHF channel 71. Pilot boards in position 10°50.2'N,

79°57'E, or 3 miles ENE of the jetty for vessels bound for Sanmar Marine Terminal.

6.5 Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA to Karaikal

Port Control starting 7 days, 5 days, 4 days, 3 days, 2 days, 24

hours, and 12 hours prior arrival. 

6.5 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows:

1. VHF: VHF channels 16 and 71

2. Telephone: 91-4365-256600

 91-9790-960448 (mobile)

3. Facsimile: 91-4365-256603

4. E-mail: enquiries@karaikalport.com

6.5 Sanmar Marine Terminal can be contacted, as follows:

1. VHF: VHF channels 16 and 67

2. Telephone: 91-4368-292846

3. Facsimile: 91-4365-256473

6.5 Anchorage.—Four areas are available, in depths of 9 to

18m, good holding ground, are available, as follows

1. A general area with a depth of 9m at position

10°48.56'N, 79°52.96'E.

2. A circular repairing area, with a depth of 11m, with a

radius of 220m centered on position 10°51.85'N, 79°52.95'E. 

3. A circular area, with a depth of 12m, with a radius of

0.5 mile centered on position 10°51.50'N, 79°53.50'E.

4. A general area, for vessels with drafts of 12m to 18m,

bounded by lines joining the following positions:

a. 10°51.90'N, 79°54.03'E

b. 10°51.00'N, 79°54.03'E

c. 10°51.00'N, 79°57.00'E

Karaikal Home Page

http://www.karaikalport.com

Karaikal Port Breakwaters

Karaikal Light
148 Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 

Pub. 173

d. 10°51.90'N, 79°57.00'E

6.5 Directions.—Approach is made through a 5-mile long entrance channel, 160m wide, and dredged to an initial depth of

14.5m. The channel is marked by Fairway Buoy in position

10°50.42'N, 79°56.59'E, and four pair of buoys in accordance

with the IALA system continuing until about 600m from the

breakwaters. 

6.5 Buoys mark a turning circle within the harbor.

6.5 Range light tower mark the center of the turning circle and

approach channel.

6.5 Caution.—The port remains under construction so it would

not be unusual to see dredging and other heavy equipment

within the harbor area. It has been reported (2010) that Phase 2

and Phase 3 of additional development are planned. Phase 2

will add five berths with expected completion in 2012; Phase 3

will add nine more berths by 2015.

6.6 The coast between Karikal and Cuddalore, about 50

miles to the N, is low with but few distinguishing features. Vessels occasionally anchor off the towns of Tranquebar, Tirumullaivasal, and Porto Novo.

Tranquebar (11°01'N., 79°51'E.), a small town about 6.5

miles N of Karikal, lies on the N bank of a river used only by

native boats. An old fort and several white houses, visible from

seaward, serve as landmarks. A grove of trees lies on the S side

of the town. 

6.6 The port of Tranquebar has been closed to commercial shipping.

6.6 Anchorage can be taken about 1 mile offshore, in depths of

10 to 11.9m, sand and mud, with the fort bearing 281°. 

6.6 Tirukkadaiyur Port lies 3.3 miles N of Tranquebar. An SPM,

with a safety zone with a radius of 500m surrounding it, lies in

position 11°04'N, 79°53'E. It is connected to the shore 1.3

miles W by a submarine pipeline.

6.6 A conspicuous chimney with a height of 98m stands 1.2

miles inland in position 11°04.4'N, 79°50.2'E. 

6.6 The harbor limits are defined by the following coordinates: 

a. 11°04.4'N, 79°51.5'E (shore).

b. 11°05.5'N, 79°52.5'E.

c. 11°05.5'N, 79°56.0'E.

d. 11°03.3'N, 79°56.0'E.

e. 11°03.3'N, 79°52.5'E.

f. 11°04.4'N, 79°51.5'E (shore).

6.6 Two pagodas lie in the village of Kaveripatnam, about 7

miles N of Tranquebar. North of this village the coast commences to rise slightly. 

6.6 Caution.—A dangerous wreck lies about 2.75 miles ESE off

Kaveripatnam. 

6.7 Tirumullaivasal (11°15'N., 79°51'E.), a small town

about 6.5 miles N of Kaveripatnam, lies on the N bank of the

Kaveri River near the entrance. A flagstaff, 18m high, lies

close N of the low customhouse building. This flagstaff is the

only landmark visible on this part of the coast, and can be seen

over the tops of the trees when approaching from the S. 

6.7 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 9.1 to 11m, mud, with

the flagstaff bearing between 270° and 247°.

6.7 A shoal, about 1.5 miles long and lying parallel to the coast,

was reported to lie about 7 miles N of Tirumullaivasal and 1.5

miles offshore. 

6.7 The Coleroon River discharges into the sea through two

mouths about 10 and 13.5 miles N of Tirumullaivasal. Coleroon Point is the N end of a long sandy spit which extends N

between the two mouths. This point has been reported to be a

good radar target up to 19 miles. The Coleroon River Bridge

has been reported to be a good radar target up to 24 miles. 

6.7 A shoal, over which the sea breaks heavily during the Northeast Monsoon, was reported to extend about 2 miles offshore

between the S mouth of the Coleroon River and a position NE

of Coleroon Point. Vessels should not shoal to a depth of less

than 27.4m by day or within a distance of 4 miles by night

along this section of coast. 

6.7 The four pagodas, although about 7 miles inland, can be seen

over the trees when abeam of the Coleroon River, and have

been reported to be good radar targets up to 20 miles.

6.7 Caution.—An oil field development area, best seen on the

chart, lies about 10 miles SW of the mouth of the Coleroon

River.

6.8 Porto Novo (11°30'N., 79°46'E.), a town about 3

miles NW of Coleroon Point, lies on the N bank of the Vellar

River about 1 mile within the mouth. A white flagstaff on the N

bank of the river entrance and the two white boundary markers,

one N and one S of the town, are conspicuous landmarks. 

6.8 A light is shown from a white tower with red bands, 30m

high, 0.8 mile N of the flagstaff. 

6.8 Anchorage should be taken, in a depth of 16.5m, about 3

miles offshore, from the middle of October until nearly the end

of December. During fine weather in the other months, anchorage can be taken closer to shore according to draft. All cargo is

handled by native craft at the anchorage. 

6.8 The coast between Porto Novo and Cuddalore, about 13

miles to the N, is low and marked by scattered trees. From the

offing, the few sand hills which are visible appear as islets. 

6.9 Cuddalore (11°43'N., 79°46'E.) (World Port Index

No. 49410) port area comprises the open anchorage off the

town and the backwater formed by the confluence of the estuaries of the Gadilam River and the Uppanar River, both of

which are subject to heavy flooding in the rainy season.

The old town, which shows up well from the N, especially

Porto Novo Light
Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 149

Pub. 173

the buildings to the E, lies on the Uppanar Backwater; the new

town lies on the Gadilam River, about 1 mile N of the old town. 

6.9 Depths off the port shoal gradually from the 20m curve

about 3.5 miles E of the port, to the 5m curve about 0.3 to 0.5

mile offshore. 

6.9 An unmarked shifting boat channel crosses the bar at the entrance of the Uppanar River, about 0.8 mile S of the light. This

channel has a least depth of 1.2m. 

6.9 A dangerous wreck with its mast visible is located about 1.2

miles ENE of Cuddalore Light.

6.9 Cuddalore Light is exhibited from a white round concrete

tower 0.2 mile W of the mouth of the Uppanar River. A white

flagstaff, 31m high and conspicuous, stands 0.6 mile NNE of

the lighthouse.

6.9 Cuddalore Light has been reported to be a good radar target

up to 21 miles. 

6.9 Vessels should send their ETA 24 hours in advance. 

6.9 A signal station, by which vessels can communicate by Morse code, lies close S of the lighthouse. Storm signals are displayed in accordance with the Indian Extended System.

Further information on these storm signals may be found in

Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic

Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

6.9 When surf conditions require the closing of the channel

across the bar, flag K of the International Code of Signals is

displayed. Flag M indicates a strong ebb current; flag S indicates a strong flood current. 

6.9 The port can be contacted weekdays only, from 0900-1300

and from 1400-1800, as follows: 

1. Call sign: Cuddalore Port Radio

2. VHF: VHF channels 11 and 16

3. Telephone: 91-4142-238025

4. Facsimile: 91-4142-238026

5. E-mail: cuddaloreport@gmail.com

6.9 Anchorage can be taken, in a depths of 10 to 15m, about 1

mile offshore, with Cuddalore Light bearing between 265° and

295°. An anchor boat will indicate the approximate position

where vessels may anchor clear of the two dangerous wrecks

shown on the chart.

6.9 An anchorage for vessels carrying dangerous cargo is situated 2.5 miles E of the S breakwater.

6.9 During the Northeast Monsoon, vessels are advised to anchor N of the river entrance and S of the entrance during the

Southwest Monsoon. 

6.9 All cargo is handled by boats and lighters at the anchorage.

About 350 lighters, from 15 to 45 tons, are available for normal

working hours of the port, which are from 0600 to 1800. However, permission for night operations will be considered based

on the prevailing weather conditions. 

6.10 Pondicherry (Pondicherri) (11°56'N., 79°50'E.)

(World Port Index No. 49430), the capital and seat of government of the Union Territory of Pondicherry, lies about 13 miles

N of Cuddalore. All cargo is handled by lighters at the anchorage off the town. 

6.10 Winds—Weather.—During the Northeast Monsoon, which

usually prevails from October through January, rough seas are

raised, hampering cargo operations. During the rest of the year

the prevailing wind is from the W in the morning; a choppy sea

is raised by the SE wind in the afternoon. 

6.10 Depths—Limitations.—Depths surrounding the port range

from the 20m curve, which lies about 2.5 miles E of the port, to

about the 5m curve, which lies about 0.3 mile from the shore. 

6.10 The new pier is located about 0.7 mile S of Pondicherry

Light. The pier is about 287m long and 15.2m wide across the

outer face. Cargo is handled by lighters between the anchorage

and this pier. About 50 small lighters, with a capacity of 2.5

tons each, are available for cargo handling. 

6.10 Aspect.—The low sandy shore S of the town is marked by

trees. The land, from 3 to 5 miles NW and N of the town, is 45

to 73m high and helps to identify the locality. 

6.10 Pondicherry Light (11°54.9'N., 79°49.9'E.), with a racon, is

 Cuddalore Home Pages

http://www.cuddalore.nic.in/port.htm 

http://tamilnadumarine.vndv.com 

Dangerous wreck ENE of Cuddalore Light

Cuddalore Light
150 Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 

Pub. 173

shown from a white tower with black bands. A ruined iron pier

projects E about 0.2 mile from the shore, 1 mile NNE of the

light. 

6.10 The following landmarks are conspicuous from the offing:

1. A red chimney, 56m high, about 1 mile WNW of the

light.

2. Two square towers and cupola of the cathedral about 1

mile NNE.

3. The port flagstaff about 0.5 mile NNE of the light.

4. A conspicuous TV tower lying 0.4 mile WSW of the

port flagstaff.

6.10 Pondicherry has been reported to be a good radar target up to

18 miles. Pondicherry Hills, which lie 3 to 5 miles NW and N

of the town, have been reported to be good radar targets up to

24 miles. 

6.10 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not available. 

6.10 Regulations.—Local quarantine and port regulations are in

force in Pondicherry. A copy of these regulations can be obtained from the local port authorities. 

6.10 Signals.—A signal station lies at the inner end of the new

pier at the S end of the town. Vessels can communicate with

the station by using the International Code of Signals by day

and Morse code at night. 

6.10 Storm and weather signals are displayed from the signal station; the General System is used. Further information on these

storm signals may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions

(Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

6.10 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channels 12 and 16

2. Telephone: 91-413-2337114

3. E-mail port@pon.nic.in

6.10 Anchorage.—During good weather, anchorage can be taken, in depths of 9.1 to 11m, about 0.8 mile off the coast at

Pondicherry. From October to December, when bad weather

may be expected, it is advisable to anchor about 1 mile farther

offshore, using a good scope of chain. The holding ground is

not very good. 

6.10 Anchorage can also be taken, in depths of 9.1 to 11m, about

0.5 mile E of the head of the new pier. At this anchorage the

powerhouse chimney and Rodiar Chimney are in line, bearing

276.5°. 

6.11 The coast between Pondicherry and Chennai, about

76 miles NNE, is low and backed in several places by hills

which are conspicuous for some distance seaward.

6.11 Allamparwa Fort (12°16'N., 80°01'E.), in ruins, lies on the

N entrance point of Kaliveli Lagoon about 22 miles NNE of

Pondicherry. A dark prominent grove of trees lies close N of

the fort. Some hills, which rise to heights of 73 to 198m, lie

NW of the fort about 6 to 16 miles island. 

6.11 The Palar River (12°28'N., 80°10'E.), marked by some tall

coconut trees on the N side of its entrance, is obstructed by a

bar. A shoal spit, marked by breakers, extends about 1 mile E

from the entrance. 

6.11 Sadras, a small village abreast hidden by trees, lie about 3

miles N of the Palar River. A brick fort, in ruins, lies on the

coast abreast of the village and is visible from seaward. 

6.11 The Sadras Hills, the most conspicuous hills on this part of

the coast, lie about 7 to 10 miles WNW of the entrance of the

Palar River. The highest peak rises to an elevation of 215m.

Finger Peak, 152m high, lies 1.3 miles ESE of this peak. A

conspicuous temple lies on Finger Peak. Several other conspicuous peaks lie in the vicinity. 

6.11 Mahabalipur, a rocky point with several pagodas on it, lies

about 6 miles NNE of Sadras Fort. A light stands on a conspicuous rock about 0.5 mile within the extremity of the point. The

lighthouse has been reported to be a good radar target up to 16

miles. 

6.11 Tripalur Reef (12°37'N., 80°12'E.), a rocky ledge with a

depth of 7.9m at its outer edge, extends about 0.8 mile E from

Mahabalipur. 

6.11 Rockingham Patches (12°41'N., 80°15'E.), a group of shoal

patches with a least depth of 4.6m, lies up to 1.5 miles offshore

about 4.5 miles NNE of Mahabalipur Light. 

6.12 Covelong Point (12°47'N., 80°15'E.), a small projection with a village on it, lies about 11 miles NNE of Mahabalipur Light. The point has been reported to be a good radar

target up to 13 miles.

6.12 Open anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 12.8m, about 1

mile E of the village on Covelong Point. Care should be taken

to avoid the rocks, awash, which extend about 0.3 mile NE

from the point. 

6.12 The low coast between Covelong Point and Chennai, about

18 miles to the N, is clear of dangers. 

6.12 Caution.—About 30 miles ESE of Covelong Point lies a firing practice area centered at position 12°41'N, 80°45'E.

6.12 Ottivakam Hill (12°48'N., 80°07'E.), 167m high, sharp and

conspicuous, lies 8 miles W of Covelong Point at the S end of a

Pondicherry Light
Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 151

Pub. 173

low range of hills which extend along this coast for 7 miles.

Panchapandavar Malai (Pallavaram) Hills, high and double

peaked, lie about 10 miles N of Ottivakam Hill. A temple lies

on the highest peak and is prominent. St. Thomas Mount, about

3 miles farther NE, is crowned by some conspicuous white

buildings. 

6.12 Perumbakam Hill, 80m high and flat-topped, lies about 7

miles NW of Covelong Point and is a fair landmark. 

6.12 A Submarine Exercise Area lies with its center about 20

miles ENE of Covelong Point. A good lookout should be maintained in the vicinity.

Chennai (Madras) (13°06'N., 80°18'E.)

World Port Index No. 49450

6.13 Chennai (Madras), the capital and seat of government

of Chennai State, is the principal harbor on the Coromandel

Coast and the third largest port in India. The harbor area, which

is entirely artificial, fronts the center of the city, and contains

ample berthing facilities for all classes of vessels.

6.13 Winds—Weather.—Cyclones at Chennai usually commence with the wind between NNW and NNE, the wind direction changing to the E or W according to whether the port is in

the right-hand or left-hand semicircle of the storm. The Chennai coast is normally frequented by cyclones during May, October, and November.

6.13 Rainfall is almost entirely confined to the period from November to January during the Northeast Monsoon. In April and

May, there are occasional squalls from the NW, usually in the

early part of the night. 

6.13 Weather reports are broadcast by the radio station at Chennai.

6.13 The climate of Chennai is considered quite hot. Even in the

cooler months of December and January, the mean temperature

is about 25°C. 

6.13 Tides—Currents.—The tides at Chennai are semidiurnal

and subject to a diurnal inequality which may advance or retard

the times of HW and LW; this inequality may increase or diminish the rise by as much as 0.3m. 

6.13 Vessels may encounter a strong S current when making the

approach to the harbor.

6.13 Depths—Limitations.—The approach channel, marked by

the IALA Maritime Buoyage System (Region A), is dredged

and maintained at a depth of 19.2m. Vessels are to keep at least

0.5 mile off the channel entry unless a pilot is on board. 

6.13 The harbor entrance is maintained to a depth of 18.6m, and

there is a swinging basin, 0.3 mile in diameter, lying immediately inside the harbor entrance with a maintained depth of

18m. In 1986, it was reported the port could accommodate vesels up to 274m length, with a draft of 16.2m. 

6.13 Bharathi Dock, the N part of the harbor, is protected by the

North Breakwater and East Breakwater; a light stands near the

head of East Breakwater. Dock 1 and Dock 3, on the E side of

Barathi Dock, are oil berths. Dock 2, located in the NW corner

of the dock, is an iron ore berth. 

6.13 A fully mechanized container terminal, with alongside charted depths of 11.5 to 12.5m, is located on the W side of Bharathi Dock close NW of North Pier. 

6.13 The S part of the harbor, forming the Inner Harbor is protected by East Quay. The entrance lies between North Pier and a

spur projecting from East Quay; it is 122m wide with a depth

Mahabalipur Light

 Chennai Port Trust

http://www.chennaiport.gov.in 

Chennai (Madras) Light
152 Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 

Pub. 173

of 9.4m and marked by lighted beacons at each side of the entrance. The protecting breakwater N of the spur is known as the

sheltering arm; a light stands at the head of the arm. Dr.

Ambedkar Dock (Inner Harbor) contains 12 berths alongside

the quays and one fixed mooring. It has been reported (2006)

that the alongside depths are being increased to 15m. 

6.13 Jawahar Dock, entered along the mid-section of South Quay

of the inner harbor, has an overall length of 655m. The S end of

the dock is used by LASH barges. It has been reported (2006)

that the depth in the dock has been increased to 11.5m. 

6.13 Berthing information is given in the accompanying table titled Chennai ()—Berth Information.

6.13 Chennai Fishing Harbor is located 1 mile N of Bharathi

Dock and is sheltered by two extensive breakwaters which provides berths for up to 500 fishing vessels. 

6.13 Depths off the harbor shoal gradually from the 20m curve,

about 1.5 to 2 miles offshore, to a depth of 11m less than 0.3

mile E of the breakwaters.

Chennai (Madras)—Berth Information 

Berth Length

Maximum vessel

Remarks

Draft Length

Dr. Ambedkar Dock (Inner Harbor)

North Quay 198m 8.5m 164.5m Passengers and general cargo

West Quay 1 170m 11.0m 146.3m Bulk, breakbulk, and general cargo

West Quay 2 170m 12.0m 146.3m Bulk, breakbulk, and general cargo

West Quay 3 170m 12.0m 146.3m General cargo

West Quay 4 170m 11.0m 146.3m General cargo

Center Quay 170m 12.0m 146.3m Bulk, breakbulk, and general cargo

South Quay 1 246m 9.50m 219.4m Bulk, breakbulk, and general cargo

South Quay 2 179m 9.50m 153.9m Bulk, breakbulk, and general cargo

South Quay 3 181m 9.14m 157.8m Bulk, breakbulk, and general cargo

Naval Berth North 60m 9.0m — Located on East Quay

Naval Berth South 140m 12.0m — Located on East Quay

Mooring 3 — 10.66m 152.8m

Jawahar Dock

Berth No. 1 218m 10.4m 193m Bulk and breakbulk cargo

Berth No. 2 218m 11.0m 193m Bulk and breakbulk cargo, phosphoric acid, and 

molasses

Berth No. 3 218m 10.4m 193m Bulk and breakbulk cargo

Berth No. 4 218m 11.0m 193m Bulk and breakbulk cargo, phosphoric acid, and 

molasses

Berth No. 5 218m 10.4m 193m Bulk and breakbulk cargo

Berth No. 6 218m 11.0m 193m Bulk and breakbulk cargo and fertilizer

Bharathi Dock

Container Berth No. 1 200m 13.4m 177.8m

Container Berth No. 2 200m 13.4m 177.8m

Container Berth No. 3 200m 13.4m 177.8m

Container Berth No. 4 285m 13.4m —

Bharathi Dock 1 339m 14.6m 274.3m Oil berth for vessels up to 100,000 dwt

Bharathi Dock 2 222m 16.15m 274.3m Iron ore berth for vessels up to 150,000 dwt

Bharathi Dock 3 304m 16.15m 274.3m Oil berth for vessels up to 140,000 dwt
Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 153

Pub. 173

6.13 The surf N and S of the harbor generally breaks about 122m

from the beach in fine weather and about 183m in squally

weather. During gales from the E, breakers were observed

about 244m offshore; with an offshore wind, the surf is often

very high and in the form of a heavy roller. During normal

weather the surf wave is about 0.9 to 1.8m high, and during a

gale from 3 to 3.7m high. 

6.13 Aspect.—In the vicinity of Chennai, the low sandy shore is

marked by casuarina and palm trees N and S of the city. 

6.13 The following landmarks are conspicuous from the offing:

1. The main tower of the Court House standing about 1.3

miles SW of the outer harbor entrance.

2. Fort St. George, with its 52m high flagstaff about 0.5

mile S of the Court House.

3. A building, 57m high, about 1.5 miles SW of Fort St.

George.

4. The spire of San Thome Cathedral, 49m high, almost

3 miles S of Fort St. George.

5. The 40m high University Clock Tower, about 0.8 mile

S of Fort St. George.

6. Two high radio masts close N of Fort St. George.

7. Three high cooling towers about 1.5 miles NW of the

Court House.

8. A white-domed building, 23m high, standing at the

month of the Adyar River.

6.13 Chennai Breakwater has been reported to be a good radar

target up to 8 miles. The Court House has been reported to be a

good radar target up to 22 miles. Chennai Harbor is formed by

two breakwaters; contained within is the inner harbor in the S.

The inner harbor extends farther S and connects into two separate basins, on the W with the boat basin having a yacht club,

on the E with Jawahar Dock. The harbor is protected from the

N and NE by North Breakwater and East Breakwater, which

extend about 0.5 mile SE, then 0.4 mile SSW from a position

2.3 miles NNE of the Fort St. George flagstaff. From the E and

SE of the entrance, it is protected by East Quay and New Outer

Arm, which extends about 2 miles NE from the same flagstaff.

A light shows from the New Outer Arm; the approach channel

entrance lies about 3.5 miles ENE of the light.

6.13 Foul areas are centered 2 miles N and 2 miles ESE from the

harbor entrance. 

6.13 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 200 grt.

No merchant vessel is allowed to enter or leave Chennai Harbor without a pilot on board, unless prior permission has been

given in writing by the Conservator of the port. 

6.13 Vessels are taken in or out of the harbor at any time of the

day or night. Movements in and out of Jawahar Dock are restricted to the hours between 0600 and 2200 daily. 

6.13 Vessels less than 230m long await the pilot in Waiting Area

No. 1, about 1 mile NE of the harbor entrance. Vessels 230m

long and over board the pilot in Waiting Area No. 2, about 1.5

miles further NE.

6.13 Vessels bound for the Chemical Pipeline Terminal board the

pilot in the waiting area centered on position 13°13'N, 80°22'E.

6.13 A strong reliable pilot ladder, equipped with manropes, must

be provided, otherwise the pilot will not board. Masters of vessels are cautioned to leave ample room for the pilot to maneuver the vessel for entering the harbor. 

6.13 When approaching the harbor or the anchorage, a sharp

watch should be kept for signals from the Port Signal Station.

Ships’ agents normally pass berthing messages to vessels

through the Port Signal Station and only in case of failure do

they contact vessels by radio. 

6.13 Regulations.—Copies of the port regulations for the Port of

Chennai are available to entering vessels. Instructions and regulations which masters should be congnizant of before arrival

are, as follows: 

1. Only one vessel at a time may enter or leave the harbor. 

2. Ballast, bilge water, and trash shall not be pumped or

thrown overboard within the limits of the port. 

3. All ocean-going vessels entering or leaving the port

between sunrise and sunset must fly their national flag, and

when entering, each vessel must show her number. 

4. Vessels remaining outside the harbor, but within the

roadstead or port limits, are required to take positions, with

allowances made for swinging room, well clear of the entrance of the harbor.

5. The master of any vessel arriving at Chennai Roadstead, with explosives on board as cargo, must give immediate notice thereof to the pilot or harbormaster.

6. Vessels arriving with explosives on board are not permitted to enter the enclosed harbor. They are moored at the

explosives anchorage E of the harbor entrance, where the explosives are discharged into lighters. The maximum quantity

of explosives which can be handled is 125 tons. 

7. Vessels carrying explosives in transit are not permitted to enter the harbor, nor will they be allowed to discharge

the cargo at the explosives anchorage. 

6.13 Vessels may obtain radio pratique upon request, not more

than 12 hours or less than 4 hours prior to arrival. Otherwise,

pratique is granted by the Port Health Officer upon arrival. 

6.13 Customs officials board a vessel at its berth or mooring inside the harbor. 

6.13 Vessels should send their ETA 48 hours in advance. 

6.13 Signals.—The Port Signal Station is located on the Harbor

Office on the seaward end of the Transit Shed and Passenger

Terminal on North Pier. International Code of Signals Flags

and Morse code are employed. It has been reported that at a

distance of 2 or 3 miles from the harbor, the signal tower can

easily be mistaken for one of the breakwater light structures.

6.13 A black ball, displayed at the Port Signal Station, indicates a

vessel in the harbor is getting underway and will be leaving the

harbor. Vessels approaching the harbor should, until the pilot

assumes control, remain clear of the outer end of the sheltering

arm and allow sufficient sea room for the outbound vessel. 

6.13 Vessels about to leave should display the International Code

flag N at the fore; vessels about to enter should display International Code pennant 4 at the fore. Neither of these signals

should be displayed until the pilot is aboard.

6.13 Storm and weather signals are displayed at the signal station

on North Quay in accordance with the Extended System. Further information on these storm signals may be found in Pub.

160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean

and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

6.13 During the prevalence of suspicious or threatening weather,

or upon the warning signal being displayed, the master of every

vessel anchored within the limits of the roadstead is required:

1. Not to be absent from the vessel between sunset and

sunrise. 
154 Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 

Pub. 173

2. To keep the vessel prepared in every respect to proceed to sea on short notice. 

3. To proceed to sea without waiting for instructions

should it be deemed it prudent to do so. 

4. When the danger signal is displayed, to take such

measures for securing the safety of the vessel as may be considered necessary. No further instructions on that point will

be furnished by port authorities.

6.13 Masters of vessels must use their own discretion whether to

proceed to sea or remain in the harbor in cyclonic weather.

Preference for mooring berths will be given to vessels with

bulk cargo and to those vessels which have broken their cargo.

6.13 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. Call sign: Port Control

2. VHF: VHF channels 10 and 16

3. Telephone: 91-44-25360833

4. Facsimile: 91-44-25384012

5. E-mail: dc@chennaiport.gov.in

6.13 Anchorage.—Chennai Roadstead is open to all except offshore winds. There is usually a swell from seaward which

causes vessels to labor or roll considerably. 

6.13 Vessels which are not awaiting berth on arrival are not to anchor N of latitude 13°06'N, and within Pilot Boarding Area No.

1 or Pilot Boarding Area No. 2, without prior approval from

Port Control. 

6.13 A dangerous wreck, with masts exposed, lies about 0.8 mile

SE of the harbor entrance. It is marked by a lighted buoy lying

0.2 mile E.

6.13 An Examination Anchorage area is shown on the chart.

6.13 Vessels of less than 230m in length should embark the pilot

in Waiting Area No. 1, located about 1 mile E of the harbor entrance; those of more than 230m in length should embark the

pilot in Waiting Area No. 2, located 3.3 miles ENE of the harbor entrance. 

6.13 At night, vessels should not anchor, in depths of less than

16.5m. A second anchor should be ready to let go and all anchors should be buoyed. 

6.13 A submarine cable extends offshore from a position approximately 1 mile S of the Fort St. George flagstaff. 

6.13 Vessels carrying explosives must anchor in the explosives

anchorage located about 1 mile E of the harbor entrance. Such

vessels are required to display a red flag by day and a red light

at night. 

6.13 Vessels unable to enter the harbor during periods when cyclones may be expected should anchor well offshore and be

ready to put to sea before the wind shifts to the NE. Vessels remaining at anchor or anchoring too far in during such times

may find it impossible to get away and are likely to be driven

ashore.

6.13 Caution.—Vessels are advised to be on the lookout for pirates attempting to board at night, especially in the vicinity of

the pilot boarding area.

The roadstead fronting the harbor area is subject to a heavy

surf. 

6.14 Ennore (Ennur) (13°18'N., 80°19'E.) is a port located

about 7 miles N of Chennai. The first phase of Ennore consists

of two coal berths. It is planned that the port will eventually

handle LNG, petroleum, chemicals, and fertilizer. There are

plans for a container terminal to be built by 2013 and presently

(2011) an iron ore terminal is under construction. Ennore is a

24-hour port. 

6.14 Depths—Limitations.—The port has two breakwaters;

North Breakwater is 3,080m long while South Breakwater is

1,080m long. The entrance channel, about 3,750m long and

250m wide, is dredged to a depth of 16m. The harbor basin is

dredged to a depth of 15m and consists of two 280m long coal

berths. One berth can accommodate vessels up to 65,000 dwt;

the other berth can accommodate vessels up to 77,000 dwt. 

6.14 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. The pilot boards about

0.1 mile S of Fairway Lighted Buoy (13°12.9'N., 80°22.4'E.). 

6.14 Regulations.—Vessels should report their ETA to Ennore

Port Control 48 hours, 24 hours, and 3 hours in advance. Any

changes of more than 2 hours should be immediately reported.

Vessels should also contact Ennore Port Control 3 hours prior

to entering or leaving the harbor. 

6.14 The ETA message should contain the following information:

1. Vessel’s name, call sign, grt, nrt, dwt, loa, and beam.

2. Draft forward and aft.

3. Cargo grade and quantity on board.

4. ETA at Fairway Lighted Buoy (in local time).

5. Local agent.

6.14 Contact Information.—Port contact information can be

found in the accompanying table titled Ennore—Contact Information. 

 Ennore Home Page

http://www.ennoreport.gov.in

Ennore Harbor Area

Ennore—Contact Information

Pilots (only) Port Control Port Authority

Call sign Ennore Port Control Ennore Port Control —

VHF VHF channel 74 VHF channels 16, 74, and 77 —
Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 155

Pub. 173

Chennai (Madras) to Machilipatnam

6.15 The coast between Chennai and Machilipatnam, about

240 miles N and NE, is low, sandy, and marked by a number of

small towns. 

6.15 Ennur Shoal (13°17'N., 80°23'E.), with depths of 0.9 to

8.5m, extends 2.5 miles NE from a position on the coast about

10.5 miles NNE of Chennai Harbor. 

6.15 Pulicat Shoals (13°22'N., 80°23'E.), a chain of hard, sandy

patches with depths ranging from 4.3 to 9.1m, extends about

7.5 miles NNE from the N end of Ennur Shoal. Several detached patches, with depths of 8.2 to 11m, lie within 3.8 miles

N and NNW of the N end of Pulicat Shoals. These shoals were

reported to be extending to the E. 

6.15 Armagon Shoal (13°54'N., 80°18'E.), with depths ranging

from 3 to 9.1m, extends about 15 miles N from a position 1.5

miles NE of Point Pudi. A narrow, detached shoal, about 2.5

miles long, with depths of 10 to 11m, lies close N of the N end

of Armagon Shoal. The sea sometimes breaks over the shallowest part of Armagon Shoal. 

6.15 A shoal, with a least depth of 4.9m, lies about 2.3 miles offshore abreast of Tummalapenta (14°54'N., 80°04'E.). The

depths are very irregular in the vicinity of this shoal and up to 7

miles N of it. 

Mutapolli Bank (15°26'N., 80°21'E.), with depths of 6.4 to

11m, lies centered about 11 miles E of Kottapatnam. Overfalls

usually mark this bank. Two detached shoals, with depths of 10

to 11m, lie within 5.8 miles SW and three detached shoals,

with depths of 9.1 to 11m, lie within 11.3 miles NE of this

bank.

6.15 Currents.—The currents N of Chennai vary considerably in

velocity and direction and sometimes set toward the land.

Great caution is necessary. 

6.15 In the vicinity of Pulicat Shoals, the current is weak and sets

parallel to the coast.

6.15 In the approach to Blackwood Harbor, the current along this

part of the coast, which includes Armagon Shoal, usually sets

with the prevailing wind, but at times reverses itself. 

6.15 The current off False Divi Point sets parallel to the coast with

the prevailing monsoon, having its greatest velocity near the

185m curve about 8 miles offshore. 

6.15 In Nizampatam Bay, weak tidal currents are experienced inshore only at spring tides. 

6.15 During March, the current off Divi Point has been found to

set E at a rate of 1.5 knots. The coast between Chennai and Ennur, about 9.5 miles NNE, is bordered by plantations of casuarina and palm trees. A conspicuous white temple, 10.7m high,

lies about 6 miles NNE of Chennai (Madras) Light (13°02'N.,

80°17'E.) a factory and a conspicuous water tower lie 7.5 miles

NNE of the same light. A prominent water tower, 35m high,

lies 0.5 mile NE of the above-water tower. 

6.15 Caution.—Care should be taken when navigating along this

section of coast between Chennai and Machilipatnam because

the land is often obscured by haze. 

6.16 The coast between Ennur and Pulicat, about 10.8

miles to the N, is backed by an extensive plain which is densely

wooded near the beach. The town of Pulicat lies on an island at

the S end of Pulicat Lake and is visible from the offing. A tall

conspicuous monument lies close N of the lighthouse near the

beach. 

6.16 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 11.9 to 12.8m, with Pulicat Light bearing 270°, distant 2.5 miles. 

The Nagari Hills (13°34'N., 79°37'E.) lie about 30 to 45

miles inland abreast Pulicat and the coast to the N. Nagari

Nose, a sharp peak 858m high with its upper part crooked, lies

about 45 miles W of Pulicat Light. This peak is visible only in

clear weather.

6.16 A beacon lies about 13 miles NNW of Pulicat Light but is

not conspicuous from seaward. 

6.16 The coast between Pulicat and Point Pudi, about 22 miles

NNW, is marked by casuarina plantations for about 11 miles N

of Pulicat Lake. A conspicuous clump of coconut trees, 24m

high, lies on a sand hill about 1 mile S of Point Pudi. 

Telephone — 91-44-27950031 to

91-44-27950040 91-44-25251666

Facsimile — 91-44-27950002 91-44-25251665

E-mail — marine@ennoreportltd.com marine@ennoreportltd.com

Ennore—Contact Information

Pilots (only) Port Control Port Authority

Pulicat Light
156 Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 

Pub. 173

6.16 Point Pudi (13°47'N., 80°15'E.), a low sandy point, is

marked by clumps of palm trees. Armagon Shoal, which extends N from Point Pudi, has been previously described in

paragraph 6.15. 

6.16 Armagon Light is shown from a white round concrete tower

with red bands, lying near the coast 7 miles NNW of Point Pudi. 

6.16 Gudali Hill (14°01'N., 80°01'E.), about 13 miles NW of the

disused lighthouse, is flat and 90m high with a pagoda near its

center. The hill is conspicuous except from positions near the

outer part of Armagon Shoal. 

6.16 A beacon lies on the shore about 13 miles NNW of the disused lighthouse. 

6.16 An anchorage, formerly known as Blackwood Harbor, lies

between Armagon Shoal and the coast to the W. 

6.16 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 9.1m, good holding

ground, with the disused lighthouse at Armagon bearing between 282° and 290°. During the Southwest Monsoon, anchorage can be taken with the disused lighthouse bearing 259°,

distant 2.8 miles. 

6.16 Vessels approaching the anchorage should not shoal to a

depth of less than 30m until the disused lighthouse bears 207°,

or Gudali Hill bears 259°. Gudali Hill should then be steered

for on this heading, passing N of Armagon Shoal in depths of

11m. 

6.17 Krishnapatnam (14°15'N., 80°08'E.), a bulk port,

lies near the mouth of the Upputeru River about 28 miles NNW

of Point Pudi. This port has become one of the newest deepwater ports along the Indian coast. Coasting vessels usually anchor about 2 miles seaward of the river entrance, in depths of

10.1 to 11m, but this anchorage is only safe during good

weather. 

6.17 Depths—Limitations.—There are four berths with maximum depths of 15m alongside. Two berths handle coal, one

handles iron ore and one handles general cargo. The port plans

on eventually expanding to 17 more berths in two phases.

6.17 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots board vessels with

drafts less than 10m at Pilot Boarding Station A, in position

14°14.5'N, 80°12.5'E. Pilots board vessels with a draft of 10m

or greater at Pilot Boarding Station B, in position 14°14.9'N,

80°15.3'E. 

6.17 Regulations.—Vessels should report their ETA to Port Operations 7 days, 5 days, 48 hours, and 24 hours, in advance. 

6.17 The ETA message should contain the following information:

1. Draft forward and aft.

2. ETA at the pilot boarding station. 

6.17 Signals.—Storm signals are shown; the Brief System is

used. Further information on these storm signals may be found

in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

6.18 Casuarina plantations line the coast up to 3 miles N of

the mouth of the Upputeru River, then abruptly changes to sand

hills for 5 miles and becomes low and sandy as far N as the

Penner River, about 13 miles farther N. 

6.18 Shallinger Shoal (14°23'N., 80°12'E.), a spit with depths of

3.2 to 4.6m, extends about 2.5 miles NE from the coast, 7.5

miles N of the mouth of the Upputeru River. A detached 5.5m

patch lies 1.5 miles S of the NE extremity of Shallinger Shoal. 

6.18 The Penner River Entrance (14°35'N., 80°11'E.) is not easily distinguished as the river enters the sea behind a sandy

point which is only 1m high. Nellore, the chief town of the district, lies on the S bank of the river about 15 miles inland. A

white pagoda lies on a high hill about 6 miles W of Nellore, but

is not very prominent. The pagoda is sometimes visible between the bearings of 248° and 293°. 

6.18 During fine weather with offshore winds, anchorage can be

taken off the mouth of the Penner River, in depths of 9.1 to

12.8m, sand and mud, about 1.5 miles offshore. 

6.18 A flagstaff, visible above the trees, lies on the beach at Isakapalli Village about 10 miles NNW of the mouth of the Penner

River. 

6.18 Nishanbotu (14°42'N., 79°56'E.), the N end of a mountain

range which parallels the coast, lies 10 miles WSW of Isakapalli. 

6.18 Anchorage can be taken off Isakapalli, in depths of 12.8 to

14.6m, sand and mud, about 1 mile offshore SE of the flagstaff.

The holding ground is good, but a heavy surf sets onto the

beach. 

6.18 Between Isakapalli and Ramaypatnam, about 19 miles to the

N, the coast continues low and sandy for 7 miles, but becomes

tree covered for the remaining distance. 

6.19 Ramaypatnam Village (15°03'N., 80°03'E.) is

marked by a church and some high clumps of casuarinas. The

red church spire is visible over the trees. Tettu Temple, white in

color and 41m high, lies 2 miles W of the village, but is not

very prominent. Ramaypatnam Light, from which a radiobea-

 Krishnapatnam Port

http://www.krishnapatnamport.com

Krishnapatnam Light
Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 157

Pub. 173

con transmits, is shown from a hexagonal concrete tower lying

on the coast 0.8 mile NE of the church at Ramaypatnam.

6.19 Between Ramaypatnam and the town of Kottapatam, about

25 miles NNE, the coast remains low and sandy. Several detached clumps of casuarinas lie near the coast between Ramaypatnam and the entrance to the Upputeru River, about 10.5

miles to the N. Singarayakonda Temple, painted red, lies on a

51m high hill about 3.5 miles W of the Upputeru River, and is

one of the few conspicuous landmarks between Ramaypatnam

and Kottapatam. The rising ground near the temple is visible in

places between the trees. 

6.19 The Paleru River (15°19'N., 80°06'E.), marked by a beacon

on its S entrance point, discharges about 6 miles N of the Upputeru River mouth. 

6.19 Kandalur and Konijedu, two hills connected by a ridge, lie

about 11 miles W of Kottapatam and are useful marks. Chimakurti, 638m high, lies 22 miles WNW of Kottapatam and is

also a useful mark. 

6.19 Kottapatam (15°26'N., 80°10'E.), of little importance commercially, lies about 1 mile inland. A prominent white obelisk,

about 15m high, lies about 1 mile NW of the town. 

6.19 A shoal, with a least depth of 2.7m, lies about 1.5 miles offshore and from 3 to 5 miles NE of the town. Depths of 7.3m

and less lie between this shoal and the shore. Shoal patches,

with depths of 5.5 to 8.5m, lie up to 7 miles E of the town. Mutapolli Bank has been previously described in paragraph 6.15. 

6.19 During good weather, anchorage can be taken 2.3 miles offshore, in a depth of 9.1m, with Kottapatam bearing 295°.

Depths should not be shoaled to less than 18.3m until certain of

the vessel’s position. 

6.20 Nizampatam Bay (15°42'N., 80°33'E.) lies between

Kottapatam and False Divi Point, about 41 miles ENE, and recedes about 14 miles to the N. Except for the shoals in the vicinity of Mutapolli Bank, the bay is free from dangers and its

shores may be approached with safety to a depth of 9.1m. 

6.20 A backwater is formed 4 to 6 miles NNE of Kottapatam by

the confluence of the Mudigorda Yeru River and the Gundlakamma River. During fine weather, the latter river is available to

small boats. 

6.20 A beacon lies about 0.5 mile within the Mudigorda Yeru

River.

6.20 From the mouth of the Gundlakamma River, the bay shore

curves NE for about 35 miles to the entrance of a creek leading

to the town of Nizampatam. Dindi House, a large building with

a big high tree close E of it, lies on the N entrance point of the

creek. A light is shown from a white tower, 30m high, with red

bands. 

6.20 Between Dindi House and False Divi Point, almost 13 miles

to the SE, the coast remains low and sandy. A beacon lies on

the NW entrance point of a boat creek about 5 miles E of Dindi

House. 

6.20 False Divi Point (15°43'N., 80°50'E.) is low and covered by

small mangroves.

6.20 A bank, which dries in patches, extends about 1 mile S and

about 3 miles W of False Divi Point. 

6.20 Anchorage can be taken in Nizampatam Bay, in a depth of

9.1m, mud, about 6 miles offshore, with Dindi House and the

conspicuous tree at Nizampatam bearing 021°.

6.20 Coastal vessels can anchor, in 9.1 to 11m, sand and mud,

about 1.5 miles off the village of Vadarevu, 19 miles NNE of

the Gundlakamma River. A flagstaff and a conspicuous bungalow lie on the shore fronting the village. 

6.20 A submarine cable and pipeline area has been established between the Godavari River entrance and False Divi Point. The

limits of this area, known as the Ravva Oilfield Development

Area, may best be seen on the chart. Anchoring and fishing are

prohibited.

6.20 The Krishna River (15°45'N., 80°54'E.) rises in Bombay

State and flows E across the peninsula of India, into the Bay of

Bengal by several branches, the mouth of one being near False

Divi Point. 

6.20 The enormous amount of silt carried by the river has formed

a wide alluvial delta which extends seaward between the towns

of Nizampatam and Machilipatnam. Divi Point is the SE extremity and False Divi Point is the SW extremity of the delta.

Ocean-going local craft use the river for about 6 months of the

year.

6.20 Krishna Old Light, a white masonry tower, 44m high, lies

about 9.5 miles ENE of False Divi Point. Another old lighthouse, a similar structure, 15m high, lies 2.3 miles NW of Divi

Point and is maintained as a landmark. 

Machilipatnam to Godavari Point

6.21 The coast between Machilipatnam and Godavari

Point, about 97 miles distant, is generally low, sandy, and intersected by several rivers. The shore in places is densely wooded,

and between the mouth of the Gautami Godavari and Godavari

Point, the terrain is very low. Along this latter section of coast

distances judged by eye may be in error because of sand haze.

6.21 Ravva Oil Field Development Area, best seen on the chart,

extends up to 15 miles offshore. There are numerous lit and unlit structures and submerged obstructions in the area. Not all

hazards may be charted.

6.21 Between Machilipatnam Point and Godavar Point, no other

dangers exist seaward of the 20m curve which lies between 1.5

and 10 miles offshore. Between the mouth of the Guatami GoRamaypatnam Light
158 Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 

Pub. 173

davari and Godavari Point the 15m curve never lies more than

2.5 miles offshore. 

6.21 Sacramento Shoal (16°32'N., 82°20'E.), hard shifting sand,

lies off the entrance to the Guatami Godavari and extends

about 4 miles SE and 3.5 miles E from Sacramento Light.

Depths over this breaking shoal range from 2.7 to 5.5m. This

shoal is subject to frequent changes in position and depth. 

6.21 Tides—Currents.—The current from January through April

sets steadily to the NE along the coast between Machilipatnam

and Godavari Point. In the vicinity of Sacramento Shoal a rate

of 4 knots is usually experienced about 5 miles offshore. 

6.21 The current in the bay to the W of Narasapur Point is weak

and variable. 

6.22 Machilipatnam (Masulipatam) (16°09'N., 81°09'E.)

(World Port Index No. 49460), the only port of the Krishna

District, lies about 5 miles within the mouth of the creek of the

same name about 11 miles N of Divi Point. Vessels anchor in

the roadstead to handle all cargo to and from native lighters. 

6.22 New Machilipatnam Light is shown from a white, round,

concrete tower with black bands, 3.8 miles NNE of the mouth

of Machilipatnam Creek. 

6.22 The gates of the tidal lock have been closed and the wharves

are not used. The old wharves are partially destroyed and are

used by fishing vessels. A new wharf, 60m long, lies E of the

old wharves and is also used by fishing vessels. 

6.22 Groynes are under development to protect the entrance to the

creek and to increase depths at the entrance. 

6.22 Depths in the approach to the port range from 11m, about 5.3

mile E of the entrance of the creek, to a depth of 1.8m about 1

mile offshore. The mouth of the creek is blocked by sand banks

and can only be navigated at HW by vessels with a draft of less

than 1.5m. 

6.22 When approaching the port, the following objects are prominent:

1. Karameda Beacon, 13.7m high, about 5 miles SSW of

the New Machilipatnam Light, is tilted on its base 10° to

15°. 

2. A chimney, with an elevation of about 29m, 1.5 miles

NNW of Karameda Beacon. This chimney is reported to be

the first object sighted when approaching from the E.

6.22 Storm and weather signals are displayed at Machilipatnam;

the General System is used. Further information on these storm

signals may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—

Signals.”

6.22 Anchorage.—The roadstead is large and the holding

ground, fine sand and mud, is good. 

6.22 From January through September, vessels should anchor according to draft, with the lighthouse bearing 270°, and from

October through December, with the lighthouse bearing 288°. 

6.23 The coast between Machilipatnam and Narasapur

Point, about 32 miles ENE, is low, sandy, and densely wooded

in places. 

6.23 An inconspicuous beacon, about 6.1m high, stands on the

coast 11.5 miles NE of New Machilipatnam Light. A beacon

stands on the coast 19.3 miles NE of the same lighthouse. 

Narasapur Point (16°18'N., 81°43'E.), low and wooded,

lies on the E side of the mouth of the Vasishta Godavari, which

is the southernmost branch of the Godavari River. An obelisk,

24.4m high, lies about 1 mile N of the point. 

6.23 Antarvedi Light, with a racon and a radiobeacon, is shown

from a white square masonry tower with red bands standing 0.3

mile ENE of the obelisk.

6.23 Between Narasapur Point and the mouth of the Vanteyam

Godavari River, about 15 miles ENE, the low coast is densely

wooded. The entrance to this river is known as Warreo; during

freshets, a spit forms off it. Two large prominent clumps of casuarinas lie on the E side of the river entrance. This section of

coast may be approached safely to depths of 18.3m. 

6.23 During January and February, the current sets W at a maximum rate of 2 knots off the coast between Narasapur Point and

the mouth of the Vanteyam Godavari. 

6.23 The entrance of the Guatami Godavari lies about 23 miles

ENE of the entrance of the Vanteyam Godavari. Only small

craft with local knowledge can enter the river in fine weather.

6.23 The river is joined by two tributaries close within its mouth;

during the rainy season the ebb current may attain a rate of 4

knots. 

6.23 The coast between the mouth of the Gautami Godavari and

Godavari Point, about 24 miles to the N, is very low and intersected by many small outlets. 

6.23 Sacramento Shoal, which lies off the mouth of the Gautami

Godavari, has been previously described in paragraph 6.21. 

Masanutippa Temple (16°39'N., 82°19'E.) stands near the

coast, about 3 miles N of the Gautami Godavari, and is one of

the few objects that can be identified between the entrance of

the Gautami Godavari and Hope Island to the N. The temple is

not conspicuous.

6.23 Hope Island (16°49'N., 82°20'E.), one of a chain of similar

islands which form part of the delta of the Godavari River, is

low, swampy, and covered with jungle. A black and white

banded, disused lighthouse stands on Hope Island. 

6.23 Anchorage can be taken by small vessels with local knowledge E of Masanutippa, in a depth of 7.3m, mud, about 1 mile

offshore. Anchorage can also be taken 2 miles S of Sacramento

Light in a similar depth. 

Godavari Point to Vishakhapatnam

6.24 Godavari Point (16°59'N., 82°20'E.) is the N extremity of a low sandy spit and narrow sand bank, which forms a

part of the coast N of Hope Island. It had been reported (1974)

the point had extended to a position 0.8 mile NW of Godavari

Point light, shown from a white pillar with black bands on Godavari Point.

6.24 The coast between Godavari Point and Ganjam, about 215

miles NE, is mostly low, sandy, and backed by conspicuous

hills at various distances inland. Between Pudimadaka, about

50 miles NE of Godavari Point, and Kalingapatam, about 80

miles farther NE, the coast is broken and rocky. Some of the

headlands in the vicinity of Vishakhapatnam are bold and

prominent. The coast between Kalingapatam and Ganjam becomes fairly regular with a few slight indentations.

6.24 Tides—Currents.—The current between Godavari Point

and Bimlipatam lies farther offshore than off Sacramento

Shoal, but its velocity is less. Inshore of this current, slack water is usually found. Tidal currents will sometimes be experienced close offshore. In July and August, the velocity of the
Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 159

Pub. 173

offshore current is less than 1 knot.

6.24 The currents off the coast from Bimlipatam to Gopalpur, between December and June, are mainly influenced by the wind,

the tidal current, even at springs, having very little effect. In

December and January, when NE winds prevail, the current

about 1 mile offshore sets steadily SW parallel to the coast at a

velocity of 0.5 to 0.8 knot. 

6.24 Toward the end of February, the wind hauls around to the

SW, and in March, blows steadily from that quarter. In the

morning the wind is generally light, but freshens during the afternoon to a force of 5 to 6. The current at this time sets NE

parallel with the coast; its velocity close inshore is about 0.5

knot. At 10 miles or more off the coast, its velocity is frequently 2 to 3 knots. 

6.24 The greatest velocity of the current observed between Santapilli Rocks and the mainland was 1 knot. 

6.24 Depths—Limitations.—Between Godavari Point and Ganjam there are no known or charted dangers between the 18m

and 35m curves. The former curve lies between 0.5 and 6 miles

offshore and the latter curve between 2 and 9 miles offshore. 

6.24 Santapilli Rocks (Chintapalli Rocks) (18°01'N., 83°43'E.),

with a least depth of 1.5m and dangerous wrecks close E, lie

between 5.5 and 6 miles SE of Santapilli Light. The sea breaks

heavily over these dangers with a moderate swell, but not in

good weather. 

6.24 The channel between these rocks and the mainland is safe

only during daylight. At night, vessels should keep in depths of

over 35m when Santapilli Light bears between 322° and 290°.

6.24 The summit of an isolated bare red double-peaked hill, 117m

high, about 2 miles N of Santapilli Light, in line bearing 304°

with Kandivalasa Peak, leads N of Santapilli Rocks. Santapilli

Light in line bearing 322° with Kandivalasa Peak, leads S of

these rocks.

6.25 Cocanada Bay (Kakinada Bay) (17°00'N., 82°19'E.)

(World Port Index No. 49470), a shallow body of water filled

with extensive drying mud flats at its head, is entered between

Godavari Point and the coast about 2.8 miles WNW. For many

years the bay has been silting up because of the discharge from

the Godavari River, about 8 miles S of the entrance, but is the

safest natural harbor on the E coast of the Indian subcontinent.

The town and port of Cocanada lie on the W side of the bay,

about 2 miles within the entrance of the Cocanada River. 

6.25 The low bay shores are subject to periodic inundations during cyclonic storms. 

6.25 The port of Cocanada (17°00'N., 82°17'E.) comprises a partly-exposed anchorage located about 3 to 4 miles NNE of the

entrance of the Cocanada River and is suitable for ocean-going

vessels; cargo is transported by lighters between the anchorage

and the wharves on the river bank abreast of the town. 

6.25 Tides—Currents.—Tidal current effects are noticeable

nearly 0.5 mile off Godavari Point. The current follows the

contour of the land, with the flood current having a maximum

velocity of 0.5 knot and the ebb current having maximum velocities of 1.5 to 2 knots. 

6.25 In Cocanada Bay, the flood current sets SW and the ebb current sets NE. These tidal currents are strong at springs, especially from October to February, and must be taken into

consideration when approaching in this vicinity. 

6.25 Tides at Cocanada are semi-diurnal. 

6.25 Depths—Limitations.—The coastal waters in the approach

to Cocanada Bay have shoaled considerably more than shown

on the chart. Depths are reported to be 2.7m less than charted. 

6.25 Depths S of a line drawn between Godavari Point and Vakalapudi Light to the NW shoal gradually to a depth of less than

1.8m about 4 miles to the S. Depths N and E of this line range

from 7.3 to 11m, about on the meridian of Godavari Point.

Depths in the dredged buoyed channel leading to the barge facilities on the banks of the Cocanada River average about

2.1m. Depths alongside the lighter wharves range from 1.2 to

2.1m.

6.25 Deep Water Port is 610m long, with an alongside depth of

10m. It consists of two multi-purpose berths and one liquid

cargo berth. Vessels up to 190m long, with a maximum beam

of 32.4m and a maximum draft of 11.5m at HW, can be accommodated. 

6.25 Lighterage Area M1, which has been designated for lighterage operations, has a radius of 1 mile centered on a position

about 7.5 miles ESE of Goadaveri Point, as seen on the chart.

A designated anchorage for vessel awaiting lighterage operations lies about 3 miles NW of Lighterage Area M1 and is also

best seen on the chart. 

6.25 Aspect.—North of Cocanada, the land appears bold, with

high land extending NE. South of the port, the low sandy coast

is marked by some sand hills and trees. 

6.25 In the approach to the port, the disused lighthouse on Hope

Island, Godavari Point Light, and Vakalapudi Light are conspicuous landmarks.

6.25 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels using Deep

Water Port. The vessel’s agent makes the request for pilotage

72 hours prior to arrival. The pilot station can be contacted on

VHF channel 14 or 16.

6.25 Pilots board in the following positions:

a. 17°01.0'N, 82°22.5'E.

b. 17°00.6'N, 82°20.6'E. 

6.25 Pilotage is not required for vessels calling at the Anchorage

Port. 

6.25 Regulations.—Vessels using the Anchorage Port should advise their agent of their ETA. Vessels should also obtain bearing position from the harbormaster to ensure safe anchorage in

the Anchorage Port. 

6.25 Signals.—A signal station is located at Vakalapudi Light.

Vessels can communicate with the station by Morse code. 

6.25 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channels 12, 14, and 16

2. Telephone: 91-884-2365089

91-884-2365889

3. Facsimile: 91-884-2385402

4. E-mail: mailkkd@kakinadaseaports.in

6.25 Anchorage.—Anchorage in the bay, E of Vakalapudi Light,

is subject to considerable ground swell from the SE, even when

there is no wind. Anchorage may be obtained 2.25 miles ESE

of Vakalapudi Light, in a depth of about 9m. Safe anchorage

may also be obtained, in a depth of about 6m, about 3.25 miles

SE of Vakalapudi Light. There is very little tidal current at

these anchorages. 

6.25 Directions.—During the Northeast Monsoon, vessels should

make a landfall near Pentakota, 30 miles NE of Cocanada, and

should then run along the coast in depths of not less than
160 Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 

Pub. 173

21.9m. By day, when Vakalapudi Light bears about 248°,

course should be shaped for the anchorage. At night, Vakalapudi Light should be kept on that bearing until the depths decrease to 18.3m, when course should be altered to 230°,

keeping the Cocanada River Entrance Light on that bearing

when sighted until reaching the channel lighted buoys.

6.25 Caution.—Vessels are advised not to anchor between 1 mile

and 1.8 miles N and NW of Godavari Point Light, because of

the numerous wrecks which lie in this area. Some of these

wrecks are dangerous to surface navigation. 

6.25 There is a foul patch about 0.4 mile NNW of the point, with

dangerous wrecks within 0.5 mile N of the foul patch. Other

foul areas, best seen on the chart, lie NNE and NE of Godavari

Light. 

6.25 Extensive developments, including the construction of

wharves and breakwaters and the establishment of dredged areas and dumping grounds, have taken place in Cocanada Bay.

Depths may also be less than charted.

6.26 The coast, up to 10 miles NE of Vakalapudi, is low

and marked by numerous villages and coconut trees. Low sand

hills then appear and continue as far as Pentakota, about 16

miles farther NE.

6.26 Round Hill (17°22'N., 82°16'E.), 653m high, lies about 22

miles N of Vakalapudi Light and shows up well from positions

near Cocanada. 

6.26 Upada (17°04'N., 82°20'E.), a port of call for small local

coasters, lies on the coast about 4.5 miles NE of Vakalapudi

Light.

6.26 Pentakota, a small village, lies at the mouth of a river about

21 miles NE of Upada. A coconut grove lies near two fairly

high sand hills near the entrance of the river. A white temple

stands on a high hill about 4 miles NW of the village. Sudikonda, a high cone-shaped hill, lies 2.5 miles N of the same village. Both the temple and the hill are good landmarks. The hill

is the most conspicuous because of its shape and color. 

6.26 Between Pentakota and the Dolphins Nose, about 45 miles

ENE, the coast is backed by a series of rounded hills which lie

on a plain and show up well at night. A prominent white obelisk stands on rising ground about 4 miles NE of Pentakota and

0.5 mile inland. 

6.26 A beacon stands on a small very prominent rocky eminence

at Pata Polavaram, about 13 miles ENE of Pentakota. Sanjib

Peak, a remarkable conical mountain with a flattened broken

summit, rises to a height of 652m about 11 miles NW of Pata

Polavaram. 

6.26 Wattara (17°25'N., 82°52'E.), a small village, lies at the

common entrance of three small rivers, about 3.4 miles ENE of

Pata Polavaram. 

6.26 A beacon stands on a 185m high hill abreast of Rambilli Village about 4.8 miles ENE of Wattara. 

6.26 Pudimadaka Village (17°30'N., 83°00'E.) lies on the shore

of a bight about 4 miles NE of Rambilli Beacon. A red stone

temple, with three towers, lies in the village. 

6.27 Pillar Rock (17°29'N., 83°01'E.), 9.1m high, lies

about 0.3 mile SSE of Pudimadaka Village. This rock and

some dark cliffs on the coast show up prominently against the

white sandy beaches. A ledge of rocks lies between Pillar Rock

and the coast, and serves as a breakwater during the Southwest

Monsoon. 

6.27 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 9.1m, with Pillar Rock

bearing 214° and the sheds on the beach bearing 282°.

6.27 The coast between Pudimadaka Village and the Dolphin’s

Nose, about 20 miles NE, is rocky and backed by a hilly plain.

Conspicuous sandy patches mark the SW sides of some of

these hills. A rock on the beach, about 4 miles NE of Pillar

Rock, appears as a low, black, double rock when viewed from

the NE. Kutu Konda, a prominent small rocky headland

marked by a beacon, lies about 10.5 miles ENE of Pillar Rock.

6.27 Gangavarem (17°36'N., 83°14'E.) lies about 4.5 miles NE

of Kutu Konda and is being developed as an all-weather deepwater multi-purpose port scheduled to open in early 2008. The

port limits are best seen on the chart. 

6.27 Pigeon Islet (17°37'N., 83°14'E.), 21m high and rocky, lies

in a small bay 5 miles NE of Kutu Konda. 

6.27 Dolphin’s Nose (17°41'N., 83°17'E.), a bluff headland 163m

high, is conspicuous when viewed from the NE or SW. A lighthouse with a racon, two radio masts, and a flagstaff stand on

Dolphin’s Nose. 

6.27 Dolphin’s Nose has been reported to be a good radar target

up to 17 miles. 

6.27 Caution.—A wreck, whose charted position is approximate,

and which is dangerous to navigation, lies about 3 miles E of

Dolphin’s Nose. 

6.27 Submarine Exercise Areas lie centered 20 miles SSE and E

of Dolphin’s Nose. A good lookout should be maintained when

transiting these areas. 

Vishakhapatnam (Vizag) (17°41'N., 83°18'E.)

World Port Index No. 49480

6.28 Vishakhapatnam, a port of growing importance and

the fourth largest port in India, lies at the mouth of the

Meghadri River, close NW of Dolphin’s Nose. Port limits extend from Dolphin’s Nose Light in the direction of 160° for 4.3

miles, then in the direction of 038° for 7.5 miles, then in the direction of 270° to a pillar on Scandal Point, 2 miles NE of the

harbor entrance. Petroleum and iron ore products are the principal exports.

The only shipyard in India capable of building ocean-going

merchant vessels is in operation within the harbor area. Ample

berthing facilities are available to accommodate all classes of

vessels. 

6.28 Winds—Weather.—Southwest winds prevail from March

to August; NE winds prevail from October to December. During the day, the NE winds are fresh, but at night they are light

and westerly. Heavy, windy, rain squalls occur during October

and November, but most of the rainfall occurs from June

through November. 

6.28 A considerable swell is experienced almost all year in the vicinity of the port. Vessels have remained in the harbor with

safety during cyclonic weather. 

6.28 The climate is subtropical and varies from warm to hot, with

 Vishakhapatnam Home Page 

http://www.vizagport.com
Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 161

Pub. 173

high humidity throughout the year. Maximum temperatures occur in May, while minimum temperatures are usually recorded

in December and January. Through May, June, and July, temperatures often exceed 38°C.

6.28 Tides—Currents.—From about August to November, the

current sets SW; from about the middle of December through

June, it sets NE. Inside the 35m curve, the current is much

weaker than farther offshore. Close offshore tidal currents will

sometimes be experienced. 

6.28 Depths—Limitations.—In the seaward approach to the harbor, a depth of 18.2m exists about 0.4 mile E of the head of

South Breakwater. 

6.28 The outer entrance channel between the outer breakwaters is

183m wide and maintained to a depth of 19m prior to the entrance and to a depth of 18m beginning just inside the breakwaters, as best seen on the chart. In 2007, it was reported that

vessels up to 225m long, with a maximum beam of 32.5m and

a maximum draft of 9.25m could be accommodated in the Inner Harbor and only daytime navigation was allowed. 

6.28 The ore berth, in the outer harbor, is dredged to a depth of

17.5m on its NE side and 17.5m on its SE side, and can accommodate two bulk carriers of 150,000 dwt. It has been reported

that draft on the SW side of the ore berth was restricted to

15.3m. The entrance to the inner harbor isn dredged to 18m.

6.28 A general cargo berth, 270m long, with a dredged depth of

15.2m alongside, can accommodate vessels up to 232m long

and 14.5m draft, and is located SW of the ore berth; facilities at

the berth include a conveyor system for the importation of coking coal. It has been reported (1996) that during the Northeast

Monsoon, the berth may be subject to considerable swell and

vessels may have to be moved.

6.28 A container berth located NE of the ore berths has a dredged

depth of 11.0m alongside. The terminal is 449m long and can

accommodate vessels with a maximum draft of 14.9m. 

6.28 A turning circle, maintained to a depth of 19m, lies between

the ore berth and the inner end of the outer entrance channel.

6.28 The entrance channel to the inner harbor is dredged to a

depth of 10.7m.

6.28 A turning basin, dredged to 11.6m, lies at the N end of the

entrance channel to the inner harbor. The three basins which

project from the turning basin are all dredged to 10.7m.

6.28 East Quay Berths lie on the E side of Northern Arm. Berth

Q1 to Berth Q5, with a total berthing length of 905m and

alongside depths of 10.0m, can accommodate vessels with a

maximum draft of 10.06m. Berth Q6 and Berth Q7, with a total

berthing length of 350m and alongside depths of 10.4m, can

accommodate vessels with a maximum draft of 10.21m. 

6.28 West Quay Berths lie on the W side of Northern Arm. Berth

J1 (Berth Q1), with a berthing length of 160m and an alongside

depth of 9.5m, can accommodate vessels with a maximum

draft of 10.06m. Berth Q2 and Berth Q3, with a berthing length

of 428m and an alongside depth of 10.7m, can accommodate

vessels with a maximum draft of 10.06m. Berth Q4 and Berth

Q5, with a berthing length of 440m and an alongside depth of

10.7m, can accommodate vessels with a maximum draft of

10.21m. 

6.28 East Quay No. 8, a new multi-purpose berth, can accommodate vessels up to 180m long, with a beam of 32m and a draft

of 10m on a rising tide. Further details can be obtained from

the port authority. 

6.28 There is a shipbuilding yard SW of the inner harbor turning

basin; a fitting-out wharf lies on the S side of the W arm.

6.28 On the N side of Western Arm are two oil berths, with a total

berthing length of 365m and alongside depths of 9.8m, which

are connected by pipeline to the oil refinery and can accommodate vessels with a maximum draft of 10.06m at Berth 1 and

9.75m at Berth 2. A fertilizer wharf close W of the oil berths,

with a length of 167m an alongside depth of 10.7m, can accommodate vessels with a maximum length to 168m and maximum draft of 10.06m. Vessels whose length exceeds 171m or

whose draft exceeds 9.1m, may only enter the harbor at HW

between the hours of 0600 and 1800. Smaller vessels may enter at any time. 

6.28 The mooring berths, which lie adjacent to the turning basin,

have depths of 10.7m alongside the buoys. T.T. Up Jetty (M1

Berth), between the mooring buoys, lies close E of the turning

basin. It is 213m long and can accommodate a maximum draft

of 10.06m 

6.28 A berth for discharging oil, with an alongside depth of 19m,

is located close NW of South Breakwater. Tankers of 260m

length and 14.3m draft can be accepted. A submarine oil pipeline is laid from the berth, W to a trestle bridge, and then leads

to the coast. 

6.28 A new offshore oil berth has been added to accommodate

tankers up to 150,000 dwt, 280m in length, and with a draft of

17m.

6.28 Aspect.—The landmarks which lie on Dolphin’s Nose have

been previously described in paragraph 6.27.

6.28 Vishakhapatnam Fishing Harbor is separated from Outer

Harbor by Groyne No. 2 which connects to East Breakwater

and it is entered between N end of the East Breakwater and

North Breakwaters. A light shows at the end of the North

Breakwater. Several jetties extend NE from Groyne No. 2 with

a depth of 4.5m alongside the quayage. 

6.28 Lights in line, bearing on 234.5°, located 0.2 mile SW of the

North Breakwater Light, leads into the fishing harbor. A short

breakwater extends SW from a position on the shore 0.3 mile

NE of the head of North Breakwater and a light shows from its

head. 

6.28 In 1988, the work in the shipyard was completed and the ferry berths were in use.

6.28 A conspicuous white chapel, 68m high, lies on the summit of

Ross Hill on the N side of the harbor entrance channel about 1

mile NNW of Dolphin’s Nose Light. A conspicuous minaret

lies on the E side of Dargah Hill about 0.2 mile E of the chapel.

A conspicuous signal station lies at an elevation of 65m on

Sand Hill about 1.25 miles NE of the chapel. 

6.28 North of the port area, Circuit House flagstaff, 2.8 miles

NNE, and the University clock tower, 3.5 miles NE of Dolphin’s Nose Light, are also conspicuous from the offing. 

6.28 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for power-driven and

ocean-going vessels over 100 grt who wish to enter, depart, or

shift berth within the harbor area. Pilots board 1.3 miles SE of

South Breakwater Light. 

6.28 Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA 48 hours and

24 hours in advance. Vessels planning to enter the harbor on

the same day of arrival should arrive off the entrance prior to

2100.

6.28 The following local port regulations are in force:

1. Only one vessel may enter or leave the harbor at a
162 Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 

Pub. 173

time.

2. Tugs are maintained to assist vessels, as necessary, in

entering the harbor or shifting berths.

3. A pilot is required to be on board a vessel whenever a

tug is employed.

4. Sailing vessels of 100 grt or greater shall not enter or

leave the harbor unless towed by one or more tugs.

5. No ballast may be thrown or discharged overboard

within the harbor limits.

6.28 Signals.—Signal Station No. 1, with a flagstaff 26m high,

lies midway on the East Breakwater about 1 mile E of Ross

Hill. 

6.28 Signal Station No. 2 (Dufferin Signal Station), with a flagstaff, lies on the W side of Ross Hill, close E of another flagstaff, 68m high. 

6.28 Sand Hill Signal Station lies about 1.8 miles NNE of the

Dolphin’s Nose Light. 

6.28 These stations communicate visually with vessels approaching or departing the harbor. 

6.28 The following signals are displayed for the use of entering

and departing vessels:

1. Signal Station No. 1, upon sighting a vessel approaching the port, displays the International Code Flag P until the

pilot answers by the entering signal

2. Vessels entering the harbor must display International

Code Pennant 4 and enter only after Signal Station No. 1 has

repeated the signal hoist. A green metal pennant with a white

circle hoisted at Signal Station No. 1 and Signal Station No.

2 indicates the channel is clear for shipping.

3. A vessel waiting to enter the harbor should, if International Code Pennant 1 is displayed at Signal Station No.1,

keep well clear of the entrance to allow the departing vessel

plenty of room.

4. Vessels about to leave should display International

Code Pennant 1 and proceed only after Signal Station No. 2

has repeated the signal hoist. 

5. A vessel entering or departing at night and requiring a

pilot displays a white light over a red light where it can best

be seen by the signal stations. 

6.28 Storm and weather signals are displayed; the General System

is used. Further information on these storm signals may be

found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South

Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

6.28 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. Call sign: Vizag Port or Vizag Control

2. VHF: VHF channels 12 and 16

3. Telephone: 91-891-2564841

4. Facsimile: 91-891-2565023

5. E-mail: info@vizagport.com

6.28 Anchorage.—Vessels awaiting to enter the harbor should

anchor, in a depth of 22m, about 1.5 miles E of Dolphin’s Nose

Light. 

6.28 Because of the currents and shoaling on the N side of the entrance channel, vessels should not approach inshore of the anchorage without a pilot. 

6.28 Vessels anchoring in the roadstead must leave sufficient

room for vessels entering or departing. Anchors should be

buoyed.

6.28 Anchorage is prohibited in an area at the inner end of the entrance channel, as shown on the chart. 

6.28 An Examination Anchorage Area is enclosed by a line as

shown on the chart. 

6.28 Anchorages for petroleum tankers are situated 1.5 and 3

miles SE of Dolphin’s Nose Light. A gas and explosives anchorage lies 3.5 miles SSE of the light.

6.28 It has been reported (1996) that during the Northeast Monsoon, vessels at anchor lie to the current, bow NE, regardless of

wind and swell.

6.28 Directions.—Vessels approaching the harbor should pass

through a position about 7 miles bearing 135° from Sand Hill

Light, then steer 315° until a depth of 18.3m is sounded.

Course should then be altered to bring the lighted entrance beacons in line bearing 280°, which lead through the entrance

channel between the breakwater heads and into the harbor. The

alignment of the various channel reaches leading into the inner

harbor are well defined by lighted range beacons. 

6.28 The coast between Vishakhapatnam and Bhimunipatnam,

about 16 miles NNE, continues hilly. 

6.28 Caution.—There have been a number of pirate attacks on

merchant vessels in this area. Mariners are advised to keep a

sharp lookout, especially at night, for pirates attempting to

board their vessel.

Vishakhapatnam to Ganjam

6.29 Waltair Point (17°44'N., 83°21'E.), about 4.3 miles

NE of the Dolphin’s Nose Light, is low, sandy, and backed by

red sand hills which show up well from the offing at times.

Two houses on the side of a small hill about 4.5 miles NE, and

the ruins of two houses on the summit of the Kailasa Range almost 4 miles N, respectively, of the N entrance point of Vishakhapatnam Harbor, are prominent. Rushi Hill, 154m high,

conspicuous and topped by a beacon, lies 3.8 miles NNE of

Waltair Point. Oppadu Konda, about 3.5 miles farther NNE, are

127m high and have the appearance of flat table lands with

steep seaward faces. The high land terminates about 4 miles N

of Rushi Hill and continues low as far as the Gostani River

about 4 miles farther NNE. A few isolated, conical hills mark

this latter stretch of coast. A large high conspicuous sand hill

lies 2 miles SW of Bhimunipatnam Hill. 

6.29 Caution.—Vessels should not anchor in foul ground which

surrounds Waltair Point within a depth of 15m. Also, vessels

should keep clear of spoil ground lying 0.5 mile SE of East

Point Light.

6.29 A Submarine Exercise Area, in which submarines frequently

exercise, lies with its center about 5 miles ENE of Waltair

Point.

6.30 Bhimunipatnam (17°54'N., 83°29'E.) lies on the S

side of the mouth of the large and shallow Gostani River. Vessels anchor in the open roadstead off the town to work cargo.

The town is built on the E slopes of a hill, 166m high, which is

topped by some trees and a pyramidal obelisk. A white temple

lies about midway up the E slope of the hill and shows up well

when the sun shines on it. A tall factory chimney lies about 2.5

miles NNW of the town, and is a good mark. 

6.30 In the approach to the roadstead, the depths shoal gradually

from the 18m curve about 2 to 3 miles offshore to a depth of

11m at the anchorage 1 mile offshore. 
Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 163

Pub. 173

6.30 Two wharves lie on the S shore of the river but are available

only to lighters. Cargo is carried to these wharves from vessels

at the anchorage. 

6.30 Weather signals are displayed from a flagstaff close SW of

the lighthouse; the General System is used. Further information on these storm signals may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing

Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian

Ocean under “India—Signals.”

6.30 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 11 to 12.8m, sand and

mud, with good holding ground, about 1 mile offshore abreast

of the town. During the Southwest Monsoon, a vessel should

anchor with the lighthouse bearing 264°; during the Northeast

Monsoon, anchorage should be taken with the lighthouse bearing between 249° and 259°.

6.30 The coast between Bhimunipatnam and Konada, about 10

miles to the NE, is sandy and broken about midway along its

length by some low red cliffs which show up well when the sun

shines on them. 

6.30 Amnam (17°57'N., 83°29'E.), a prominent flat-topped hill

254m high and bare, lies about 3.8 miles NNE of Bhimunipatnam Light. Kaulvada, a high hill topped by a beacon, lies about

2 miles farther ENE. 

6.31 Konada (18°01'N., 83°34'E.) lies at the mouth of a

small river. Several white buildings and some trees lie on the N

side of the river. 

6.31 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 9.1 to 11m, sand, off

the river mouth. 

6.31 The coast between Konada and Kalingapatam, about 37

miles ENE, consists of a sandy beach backed by low sandhills.

Kandivalasa, the highest and most prominent peak in this locality, rises to an elevation of 537m, about 7 miles N of Konada

and appears nearly conical on all bearings from seaward. 

6.31 Santapilli Rocks, which lie about 8.8 miles E of Konada,

have been previously described in paragraph 6.24. 

6.31 Ramachandrapur, a flat-topped hill, 164m high, surmounted

by a beacon, lies about 10.3 miles NE of Konada.

6.31 Agra Rock (18°07'N., 83°46'E.), with a least depth of 5.5m,

lies about 3.5 miles E of Ramachandrapur. The sea seldom

breaks over this danger. 

6.31 The Nagavali River, which enters the sea about 14 miles

ENE of Ramachandrapur, is shallow and available only to

light-draft craft. A beacon stands on the E side of the entrance

of the river. 

6.32 Kalingapatam (18°20'N., 84°09'E.) lies close S of

the mouth of the Vamsadhara River and about 1.5 miles NNW

of Sandy Point. There are no berthing facilities. All cargo is

transported by lighters from the anchorage in the roadstead.

The town no longer has any importance as a trading center. 

6.32 Kalingapatam has been reported to be a good radar target up

to 27 miles. 

6.32 The land in the vicinity of the port is low and flat but the locality may be identified by Sahliundam, an isolated ridge 125m

high, which has its summit near its W end about 5.5 miles W of

the town. This bare prominent wedge-shaped ridge has two

white temples and a tree on its E slope. 

6.32 Storm and weather signals are displayed in the town. 

Satara Reef (18°20'N., 84°09'E.), which extends about 0.8

mile NE from Sandy Point, has general depths of 9.1m and a

least depth of 6.4m at its outer end. The reef is steep-to on its N

and E sides. 

6.32 Considerably less depths than charted have been reported to

exist in the roadstead.

6.32 An obstruction, with a least depth of 7.3m, was reported to

lie about 1.5 miles NNE of Sandy Point. 

6.32 Anchorage can be taken during the Northeast Monsoon, in a

depth of about 9.1m, with the port flagstaff bearing about 284°,

distant 0.8 mile.

6.33 The coast between Kalingapatam and Pundi, about 26

miles NE, continues sandy and is backed by numerous isolated

hills. Bavanapadu Village lies about 19 miles NE of Kalingapatam. 

6.33 A rounded rocky point lies about 7.5 miles NE of Bavanapadu Village; the entrance of Bendi Creek lies about 1 mile farther N. Pundi Village lies 0.8 mile above the entrance of the

creek. A white obelisk and a flagstaff lie in the village. The village is not visible from the offing. 

6.33 Bendi Hills, a flat range 175m high, lies about 3 miles NW

of Pundi. Khirsinga Hill, small, red, and 51m high, lies on the

coast about 1.5 miles NNE of the obelisk at Pundi. 

6.33 Anchorage can be taken off Pundi, in depths of 12.8 to

14.6m, about 0.8 mile offshore, with the white obelisk bearing

about 281°. 

6.33 Rati Beacon (18°47'N., 84°32'E.), a 4.3m high obelisk,

stands on a double-peaked hill, about 8 miles NE of Pundi and

0.8 mile inland. This hill lies at the end of a small range of

about the same height which slopes down to the coast. This

range is prominent when viewed from the NE or SW, and at a

distance of 4 to 5 miles has the appearance of a headland. The

steep Mahendragiri Range, about 15 miles NNW of Rati Beacon, rises to an elevation of 1,524m. 

6.33 A rocky patch, with a depth of 11.9m, lies about 2.8 miles E

of Rati Beacon. 

6.34 Baruva (18°52'N., 84°35'E.), a small town of little

importance to shipping, lies on the N bank of a river, about 6.3

miles NE of Rati Beacon. The customhouse and a few huts are

the only objects in the town which can be seen from the offing.

A group of trees SW of the customhouse is conspicuous. 

6.34 Two beacons, about 64m apart, lie about 0.8 mile ENE of the

town. Baruva North Beacon is black and white banded; Baruva

South Beacon is white. 

6.34 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 8m, sand and mud,

with Baruva South Beacon bearing between 308° and 318°. 

6.34 The coast between Baruva and Gopalpur, about 29 miles NE,

is sandy and backed inland by ranges of hills. In the vicinity of

Kaviti, about 10 miles NE of Baruva, the land rises gradually

to an elevation of about 91m. The higher ranges inland are frequently obscured and are of little use to the mariner. 

6.34 A masonry beacon lies on a large sand bank near the coast,

about 9.8 miles NE of Baruva South Beacon. 

6.34 Kaviti Beacon (19°02'N., 84°42'E.), reported to be partially

obscured by trees, lies on a plateau at an elevation of 85m, 2.5

miles NW of the masonry beacon. 

6.34 Ichapur, a prominent sharp hill, rises about 4.5 miles N of

Kaviti Beacon and is 156m high. Dandrasi, a 206m high hill,

lies 5.5 miles NE of Ichapur. When viewed from the E, this hill

appears round-topped, but when viewed from the S it appears
164 Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 

Pub. 173

as a long summit with two peaks. The W peak is slighty higher.

Raegara, a conspicuous range with four peaks, lies 8 miles NW

of Dandrasi. 

6.34 Investigator Rock (18°58'N., 84°42'E.), with a least depth

of 2.3m, lies about 8.5 miles NE of Baruva South Beacon. The

water over the rock is not discolored and it is not marked by

breakers. A shoal area, with a least depth of 9.3m, lies 2 miles

SSW of Investigator Rock. 

6.35 Sonnapuram (19°07'N., 84°47'E.), a small port on

the N bank of the Bahuda River, lies about 17 miles NE of

Baruva South Beacon. A white obelisk and a white column,

each about 15m high, lie on an islet in the entrance of the river.

A customhouse, with a black flagstaff, stands on the beach at

Sonnapuram. 

6.35 Gopalpur (19°15'N., 84°55'E.), fronted by an open exposed

roadstead, lies about 11 miles NE of Sonnapuram. The town is

no longer a port of call for ocean shipping. 

6.35 Winds constantly blow along the coast near Gopalpur in

March and April; the Southwest Monsoon usually breaks about

in the middle of June. Farther N the winds are only occasional. 

6.35 The currents usually set with the prevailing wind. About the

middle of January, the NE current begins and by the middle of

February it sets steadily ENE with velocities of 0.5 knot close

offshore, and increasing to 1.5 knots about 12 miles offshore.

At the latter distance it sets NE. 

6.35 The NE current continues to run until July and then sets SW,

gradually strengthening to a rate of 2 knots and more. 

6.35 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 13.7m, sand and mud,

with Gopalpur Light, a white round masonry tower with red

bands, bearing 299°, distant about 0.6 mile. Anchorage can also be taken, in a depth of 13.7m, about 0.3 mile SW of the

above position. 

6.35 During the windy months, April to July, it is recommended

that anchorage be taken, in a depth of 16.5m, with ample chain

veered. Two hard patches, one 0.8 mile SSE and the other 0.7

mile E of Gopalpur Light, should be avoided when anchoring. 

6.35 Caution.—Firing practice areas are located NE and SE of

Gopalpur, as follows: 

a. 19°23'N, 85°23'E.

b. 19°02'N, 85°25'E.

6.35 The coast between Gopalpur and Ganjam, about 12 miles

NE, is marked by several isolated conspicuous hills which are

visible over the coastal sand hills. Manusurukota, a rocky hill

54m high, rises about 2.3 miles N of Gopalpur. Landabaums,

the easternmost of two hills, is 198m high and lies about 8

miles N of Gopalpur. This hill appears as a conical sugarloaf

shape from all directions. 

Ganjam to Balisahi Point

6.36 The coast between Ganjam and Balisaki Point, about

147 miles NE, is regular and intersected by numerous rivers.

False Bay, a small, exposed indentation, lies between False

Point and Shortt Island to the NE. The Dhamra River discharges N of this bay, to the W of Shortt Island, and to the S of Balisahi Point. 

6.36 Chilka Lake, a large, shallow body of water, lies close to the

coast between Ganjam and Puri, about 50 miles to the ENE.

6.36 With the exception of the high mountain ranges which rise N

of Ganjam in the interior, this section of coast is generally low

and sandy and marked in places by sandhills, scattered trees,

and jungle growth. On a clear day, some of the mountain peaks

inland are conspicuous and useful marks. 

6.36 All of the known dangers which lie off this section of coast

are mostly contained within the 18m curve which lies between

1.5 and 13.5 miles offshore. This curve lies at its greatest distance offshore in the vicinity of False Bay and to the E of

Shortt Island. 

6.36 Six detached 18.3m patches lie within 4.5 miles SE through

5.8 miles SSE of Puri Light (19°48'N., 85°50'E.). 

6.36 Central Sand (19°58'N., 86°24'E.), a shoal with depths

ranging from 0.4 to 9.1m, extends about 1.5 miles E through

NE from Devi Point (19°59'N., 86°24'E.). A detached 5.5m

patch lies about 1.5 miles S of the same point. Central Sand is

reported to have extended about 1 mile farther SE. In fine

weather, the sea does not always break over this shoal.

6.36 Palmyras Shoals (20°47'N., 87°12'E.), with depths of 2.3 to

10.1m, lie within a radius of 8 miles ENE through SE of the

central part of Short Island. 

6.36 Caution.—Care is necessary when approaching Palmyras

Shoals from the E, because the depths decrease rapidly and

soundings will give no warning of the proximity of these dangers. 

6.36 Care is also necessary when navigating in the vicinity of

False Point. The lighthouse is difficult to identify during a heat

haze, because of its light-colored top and lack of background.

During January through March, fog may occasionally obscure

the light or cause it to show a deep red color. Frequent soundings should be taken and depths should not be shoaled to less

than 20.1m.

6.36 During the Northeast Monsoon or with NE winds, the current in the vicinity of False Point generally sets to the W. 

6.36 Tidal currents in the vicinity of Palmyras Shoals set at a rate

of 2 knots at springs. On the NE side of the shoals, the flood

sets to the NW and the ebb to the SE. At the S end of these

shoals the flood sets to the N and the ebb sets to the S. 

6.36 From the end of June to the end of November, there is little

or no flood or W current off False Point and Palmyras Shoals,

except at spring tides; a strong outset is experienced from the

rivers during freshets. 

6.36 Off False Bay the flood sets to the NW to N and the ebb sets

SW, each at a velocity of about 1 knot. The velocity is greatly

influenced by the prevailing winds. The tidal current, together

with the coastal current during the Southwest Monsoon, sometimes attains a velocity of 4 knots. 

6.37 Ganjam (19°23'N., 85°04'E.) lies on the N bank of

the Rushikulya River close W of its entrance, but very little of

the town can be seen from seaward. A fort in ruins lies on rising ground on the S side of the town; N of the town the land is

low. 

6.37 The port of Ganjam is little used because of the heavy surf

and shifting banks. 

6.37 Paluru Bluff (19°26'N., 85°08'E.), 177m high, lies about 6

miles NE of Ganjam and is the bold NE termination of the high

mountain ranges of the Ganjam District. Kujidheppo Peak,

saddle-shaped and 340m high, rises about 6 miles N of Ganjam. Mount Chandikho rises to an elevation of 462m on the W

shore of Chilka Lake. The summit, which lies about 16 miles N
Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 165

Pub. 173

of Paluru Bluff, appears as a double-peak when viewed from

the S, and lies out against the high ranges to the W.

6.37 A low beach of sand hills extends 32 miles NE from Paluru

Bluff to Chilka Mouth, the entrance of Chilka Lake. There are

few landmarks found along this part of the coast. Mita Kua

Bungalow, a small white house on a sand hill close to the coast

about 20 miles ENE of Paluru Bluff, is the most conspicuous.

A beacon lies on the coast about 13 miles ENE of the above

bluff. Sandari Beacon lies about 5 miles ENE of Mita Kua

Bungalow. Babeswal Temple, painted black, lies about 2.3

miles NE of Sandari Beacon and is sometimes visible among

the trees. 

6.37 Danai (19°59'N., 85°20'E.), a conspicuous sharp peak, rises

to an elevation of 577m about 22 miles NNW of Mita Kua

Bungalow and is a useful mark on a clear day. 

6.37 Chilka Lake (19°45'N., 85°23'E.), a large shallow expanse

of water, is separated from the sea by a long, narrow sandy

ridge. Only boats can be accommodated. 

6.37 The coast between Chilka Mouth and Puri continues low and

sandy. Harchandi Temple lies on a sandhill about 0.8 mile inland and about 4 miles NE of Chilka Mouth. 

6.37 Puri (19°48'N., 85°50'E.)(World Port Index No. 49530), an

open roadstead, lies on a low sandy ridge on the coast where

large buildings stretch about 3 miles fronting the sea. Puri

Light is shown from a white pedestal on the wall of a two story

building.

6.37 Storm signals are displayed at the flagstaff which lies 0.2

mile SW of the light structure; the Brief System is used. Further information on these storm signals may be found in Pub.

160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean

and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

6.37 Anchorage can be obtained off the town, in fine weather, in a

depth of about 14m, good holding ground. The soundings of

depths should be continuous while an approach is being made

to the anchorage.

6.38 Baleshwar Temple (19°50'N., 85°56'E.), a small

black pagoda-shaped building surrounded by trees, stands

about 7 miles ENE of Puri Light. Only the upper part of the

temple is visible from seaward.

6.38 The Kushbhadra River entrance, marked by a temple with

two palms near it, discharges about 13.5 miles ENE of Puri

Light. The river is shallow and of no importance to shipping. 

6.38 A black pagoda in ruins lies in the village of Konarak, about

16 miles ENE of Puri Light and 2 miles inland. This pagoda is

about 40m high and prominent. From the NE it resembles a

black pyramid. 

6.38 Tundaha Obelisk (19°54'N., 86°13'E.), 4.6m high, stands

on a sandhill about 7 miles E of the above black pagoda.

6.38 The Devi River (19°59'N., 86°24'E.), one of the largest

branches of the Mahanadi River, flows into the sea N of Devi

Point. This point can best be identified by Balijori Obelisk,

which lies about 2.5 miles NNE of the point. Nulyasai Village

is also conspicuous to approaching vessels in the vicinity of

Devi Point. The river is frequented only by native craft. 

6.38 Central Sand, the shoal which extends from the river mouth,

has been previously described in paragraph 6.36. 

6.38 Vessels with local knowledge can anchor off the mouth of

the river NE and E of Devi Point. With onshore winds, anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 14.6m, with Balijori Obelisk

bearing 317°, distant 1.5 miles. Anchorage can also be taken

about 1 mile S of the above position when the winds are W. 

6.38 Small vessels, with local knowledge and a draft not exceeding 3m, can anchor inside the river mouth, in a depth of 5.5m,

with Devi Point bearing 057°, distant 0.5 mile.

6.38 The coast between Devi Point and the entrance of the Jatadharmohan River, about 17 miles NE, consists of low sandy

beach marked by small hillocks. Breakers are always visible

across the shallow entrance of this river. The entrance of the

shallow Patakund River lies about 6 miles ENE of the mouth of

the Jatadharmohan River. A prominent building lies near the

shore, about 2 miles SW of the entrance of the Patakund River.

A conspicuous water tower lies about 1 mile NE of the same

entrance. 

6.38 Caution.—An SPM has been established about 10 miles SE

of the entrance to the Jatadharmohan River. A submarine pipeline extends from the SPM to a point on the coast about 4.5

miles WSW of the entrance to Paradip Harbor. Anchorage areas for VLCCs, each with a radius of 1.5 miles, are centered

about 4.5 miles S and about 5.5 miles ENE of the SPM. Anchorage is prohibited within 2 miles of the SPM and within 1

mile of the submarine pipeline. 

6.38 A dangerous wreck is reported (2006) to lie about 11 miles

offshore, about 18.5 miles ENE of Devi Point. 

Paradip (20°16'N., 86°41'E.)

World Port Index No. 49535

6.39 Paradip lies on the coast about 6.5 miles ENE of the

entrance of the Jatadharmhan River. The port handles containers, general cargo, dry bulk cargo, and liquid bulk cargo. 

6.39 Depth—Limitations.— The port is approached through a

channel with dredged depth of 12.8m. Vessels with a draft of

13m can utilize this port, which offers problem-free berthing

year round. Berth information is given in the accompanying table. 

6.39 LASH operations are normally carried out between the

mother ship at the anchorage and the lighter berths at the S end

of the general cargo wharf.

6.39 The port has a large turning basin 520m in diameter, with a

dredged depth of 12.8m. 

6.39 Aspect.—Paradip Light is shown from a round concrete

tower, 1.5 miles W of the entrance to the port. The entrance to

the port is protected by a N and a S breakwater. A trestle pier

projects from the S breakwater. 

6.39 The channel leading into the inner harbor passes about midway between two breakwaters and then extends NW to the

turning basin close SW of the T-head jetty on the E side of the

harbor. The alignment of the main fairway is indicated by two

pairs of range lights. 

6.39 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsoryfor all vessels greater than

200 gross tons and is available 24 hours. Pilots board 2 miles

SE of the harbor entrance.

6.39 Departing vessels should reuest a pilot from Port Control on

 Port Authority of Paradip

http://www.paradipport.gov.in
166 Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 

Pub. 173

VHF channel 16 at least 2 hours prior to departure.

6.39 Regulations.—Vessels should send their ETA 24 hours in

advance. 

6.39 The following information should be sent by radio when a

vessel is within 40 to 60 miles to the port:

1. Vessel’s name.

2. Last port of call.

3. ETA.

4. Gross tonnage.

5. Length overall.

6. Breadth.

7. Draft.

8. Deadweight tonnage.

9. Speed.

10. Dangerous cargo.

11. Type and quantity of cargo.

12. Name of agent and requirements.

6.39 Signals.—Storm and weather signals are shown at Paradip;

the General System is used. Further information on these storm

signals may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—

Signals.”

6.39 Contact Information.—Port Control can be contacted, as

follows: 

1. Call sign: Paradip Port

2. VHF: VHF channels 6, 9, 12, and 16

3. E-mail: pptinet@dte.vsnl.net.in

6.39 The harbormaster can be contacted, as follows: 

1. Telephone: 91-6722-222012

2. Facsimile: 91-6722-223498

3. E-mail: harbourmaster_ppt@email.com

Paradip Port

Paradip Light

Paradip—Berth Information

Berth

Maximum vessel

Remarks

Draft Length Size

Fertilizer Berth

No. 1 12.5m 230m 60,000-65,000 dwt Tankers are regularly handled at this berth.

No. 2 12.5m 230m 60,000-65,000 dwt Tankers are regularly handled at this berth.

North Quay

No. 1 5.0m — — Barge operations.

No. 2 — — — Construction completed in 2007. 

Central Quay

No. 1 12.5m 230m 60,000-65,000 dwt

No. 2 12.5m 230m 60,000-65,000 dwt

No. 3 — — 60,000-65,000 dwt Under construction.
Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 167

Pub. 173

6.39 Anchorage.—A general anchorage area, with a radius of 0.5

mile, lies centered on a point about 3 miles SE of the harbor

entrance. A tanker anchorage area, with a radius of 0.5 mile,

lies centered on a point about 1.3 miles E of the center of the

general anchorage area.

6.39 Anchoring is prohibited in a triangular-shaped area lying in

the approach to Paradip NE of the designated anchorage areas.

This area is bound by lines joining the following positions:

a. 20°14.6'N, 86°42.8'E.

b. 20°13.0'N, 86°45.8'E.

c. 20°16.1'N, 86°46.2'E.

6.39 The low coast extends about 3 miles ENE and terminates at

the Lion’s Rump, on the S side of the entrance of the Mahanadi

River. A conspicuous white house and a water tower stand

about 0.5 mile SW of the Lion’s Rump. 

6.40 False Point (20°20'N., 86°44'E.), about 2.5 miles

NNE of the Lion’s Rump, lies between the two entrances of the

Mahanadi River and has been reported to be a good radar target

up to 17 miles. The lighthouse on the point is shown from a

white round masonry tower with red bands; the lighthouse is

difficult to see if there is a heat haze because it has a light-colored top and there is no background. 

6.40 False Point has been reported to be a good radar target up to

17 miles. 

6.40 A long tongue of land extends about 3.8 miles NE from

False Point and almost meets and sometimes joins the S extremity of Nurrea Banga Nassi, a low grass-covered narrow island about 5.8 miles long. A large stone building, with a

banyan tree close by, stands on the W side of the island. 

6.40 A drying shifting sand spit extends N and W from the N end

of Nurrea Banga Nassi. 

6.40 The Mahanadi River (20°18'N., 86°44'E.), a shallow passage available only to boats with local knowledge, is entered

through two entrances. One passes S and E of the land on

which False Point lies; the other passes W and N of this land. 

6.40 The city of Cuttack, 55 miles above the river mouth, is the

headquarters of the Orissa District. 

6.40 False Point Anchorage (20°28'N., 86°47'E.) lies in the bay

W of the N part of Nurrea Banga Nassi. 

6.40 The outer anchorage, about 1 mile N of the N extremity of

Nurrea Banga Nassi, has a depth of about 7.9m. A depth of

10m exists about 1 mile farther NE. The holding ground is fairly good, but a heavy swell is experienced. Anchorage is not

recommended. 

6.40 Small vessels can anchor in a depression about 1.5 miles

long which lies W of the N part of Nurrea Banga Nassi, but local knowledge is necessary. Anchorage within the bay is safe,

but the depths are shallow because of silting. 

6.40 Caution.—With strong S winds, the flood sets toward the

coast in the vicinity of Satbaia Sandhill about 15 miles N of the

N end of Nurrea Banga Nassi. Vessels approaching from the N

must guard against this current.

6.40 With a strong flood it is advisable to approach the anchorage

on a S course. Such a current is noticeable by the rapid drift of

the vessels to the N. Stemming the current by turning the vessel

to port, to the E or NE, from a S course is advisable before anchoring. Vessels attempting to turn to starboard, or to the SW

and NW, have been swept rapidly to the W and have grounded

on the shoals extending from Temple Point (20°25'N.,

East Quay

No. 1 11.0m 260m 40,000 dwt

No. 2 11.0m 260m 40,000 dwt

No. 3 12.0m 230m 60,000 dwt

Coal Berths

No. 1 12.5m 260m 60,000-75,000 dwt

Vessels permitted to load to a maximum draft of 

13.0m when departing at HW from October to 

April.

No. 2 12.5m 260m 60,000-75,000 dwt

Vessels permitted to load to a maximum draft of 

13.0m when departing at HW from October to 

April.

Other Berths

Multpurpose Berth — — 40,000-45,000 dwt Under construction.

South Quay 12.0m 230m 50,000 dwt Tankers are regularly handled at this berth.

Iron Ore Berth 12.5m 260m 60,000-75,000 dwt

Maximum permitted beam of 40m. Vessels permitted to load to a maximum draft of 13.0m when

departing at HW from October to April. Tankers

are regularly handled at this berth.

Oil Berth 13.0m 260m 65,000 dwt

Paradip—Berth Information

Berth

Maximum vessel

Remarks

Draft Length Size
168 Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 

Pub. 173

86°44'E.).

6.40 The currents within the bay, W of Nurrea Banga Nassi, set

through the channels at an average velocity of 2 knots at

springs. During freshets on the Kharnasi River and the Jambu

River, the ebb sometimes attains a rate of 4 to 5 knots and sets

around the N end of Nurrea Banga Nassi. 

6.40 The tides at False Point are semidiurnal. 

6.40 Vessels approaching from the S, and having made False

Point Light, should not shoal to depths of less than 18.3m until

the light bears about 244°, distant 10 miles, and the large building on Nurrea Banga Nassi bears 100°. Course should then be

altered to about 320° which will lead to the anchorage. 

6.40 The Kharnasi River and the Jambu River, which flow into the

W side of the bay W of Nurrea Banga Nassi, are shallow, subject to change, and available only to small vessels with local

knowledge. 

6.40 False Bay (20°31'N., 86°55'E.) lies between Nurrea Banga

Nassi and Maipura Point, about 20 miles NE, at the entrance of

the Maipura River. Depths in the bay decrease gradually toward the shore over a bottom of olive-green mud, in the S part,

to a bottom of sand and mud, in the N part. The shore on the W

of the bay consists of moderately-high sand hills. 

6.40 Caution.—The Gahiramatha Marine Wildlife Sanctuary,

best seen on the chart, lies roughly between the 10m and 20m

contours in False Bay. Fishing, trawling, or any other activity

harmful to marine life within this area is prohibited.

6.41 Satbaia Sand Hill (20°38'N., 86°56'E.), 18m high,

with an isolated clump of trees at its NE end, lies 4.5 miles SW

of Maipura Point. This hill is a good landmark.

6.41 Long Sand, an extensive drying shoal with the six small

Wheeler Islands on its N part, extends about 2.5 miles N and

NW from Maipura Point. The sea breaks heavily over this shoal. 

The Maipura River (20°42'N., 87°00'E.), about 5 miles W

of Maipura Point, is entered between this point and the SW extremity of Long Sand. Although the river is deep, numerous

flats obstruct its entrance and it can only be entered by boats at

half tide when the water is smooth. 

6.41 Anchorage can be taken off Maipura Point, in depths of 11 to

12.8m, with the N end of the sand hills on Maipura Point bearing NW, distant 2.8 miles. Protection is provided from NW

winds. 

6.41 Shortt Island (20°47'N., 87°05'E.), 3m high, is the largest of

four small islands which lie on a drying shoal about 3 miles N

of Maipura Point. The configuration of the island is constantly

changing due to the continuous action of the sea. A tower,

17.3m high, stands close off the E side of the island.

6.41 Palmyras Shoals, which lie off the seaward side of Shortt Island, have been previously described in paragraph 6.36. 

6.41 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 11 to 12.8m, about 4

miles NE of Shortt Island. During strong SW winds good anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 12.8m, with the middle of

Shortt Island bearing 206°. Vessels intending to anchor should

approach with the middle part of Shortt Island bearing 226°. At

night, anchorage should be taken, in depths of 11 to 12.8m. 

6.42 The Dhamra River (20°47'N., 86°58'E.), the most

important of the navigable rivers of the Orissa District, forms

the N outlet for the confluence of the Brahmani River, the

Kharsua River, and the Baitarani River.

6.42 The town of Chandbali lies on the N bank of the Baitarani

River, about 8 miles above the junction of the Baitaran River

and the Dhamra River, and about 18 miles above the entrance

of the latter river. 

6.42 The area off the Dhamra River entrance embraces Shortt Island, Wheeler Island, Long Sand, Palmyras Shoals, and extensive drying sand and mud flats. 

6.42 The river is entered about 6 miles W of Shortt Island, between Palmyras Point on the S side and an unnamed low muddy point about 1 mile NW. 

6.42 The extensive drying mud and sand flats extend about 2.5

miles offshore between the entrances of the Maipura River and

the Dhamra River.

6.42 Shallow flats extend up to 6 and 7 miles offshore between

the entrance of the Dhamra River and Balisahi Point, about 4.3

miles to the N. Kanika Sand is the S extremity of these flats. 

6.43 Kanika Sand (20°47'N., 87°00'E.), an extensive drying mud and sand flat, lies on the N side of the entrance channel about 0.8 to 5.5 miles W of Shortt Island. This flat has been

reported extending to the SE.

6.43 The outer bar, which has a least depth of 1.5m, lies about 1.3

miles NNW of the middle of Shortt Island. The inner bar, S of

Kanika Sand, has a least depth of 2.4m. 

6.43 The outer bar maintains its position and depths, but the inner

bar is subject to change. 

6.43 Chandnipal Bar lies in the fairway N of Kalibhanja Dian, a

long, narrow island which lies on the middle of the river close

within the river. This bar had a least depth of 5.2m.

6.43 The several other bars which lie within the river were reported

to have depths of 2.4 to 2.7m at certain stages of the tide. 

6.43 In 1960, a vessel drawing up to 3.7m at HW and up to 1.5m

at LW, could ascend the river to Chandbali. 

6.43 The Matai Nadi joins the Dhamra River about 3.8 miles

above the entrance of the latter river entrance. Vessels with a

draft of 2.4m have been reported able to navigate the Matai Nadi at LW. 

6.43 Palmyras Point (20°46'N., 86°59'E.), about 6 miles W of

Shortt Island, is the N extremity of the low land which lies between the Maipura River and the Dhamra River. The point is

difficult to distinguish because of the dense jungle growth

which covers it. The low land on the N side of the Dhamra River presents a similar aspect as far N as Balisahi Point, about 4

miles distant.

6.43 Three beacons, each 24m high with a ball topmark, stand in

the vicinity of the entrance of the Dhamra River. These aids are

visible from seaward, but are not easy to identify outside the

outer bar. 

6.43 The entrance channel over the outer and inner bars is buoyed

and the channels within the river are buoyed in places. These

buoys are liable to be moved to conform to changes in the

channels and are not to be relied upon. 

6.43 The buoyed entrance channel passes about 0.8 mile N of

Shortt Island, and then leads between the shoals extending

from it and Kanika Sand. It then leads W between Kanika Sand

and the N edge of the flats which extend E from Palmyras

Point. This latter stretch leads to the entrance of the Dhamra

River and passes N of the island lying in the middle of the river

close within the entrance. 
Sector 6. India—East Coast —Point Calimere to Balisahi Point 169

Pub. 173

6.43 Pilotage is not compulsory, but advisable for strangers.

6.43 The jetty at Chandbali provides berths for three small vessels

with a maximum draft of 3.7m. Passengers and cargo are usually embarked and discharged alongside the jetty. 

6.43 Weather signals are displayed at Chandbali; the Brief System

is used. Further information on these storm signals may be

found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South

Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

6.43 Vessels with local knowledge can anchor in mid-channel off

the town of Chandbali, in depths of 8.2 to 12.2m. 
Pub. 173

7. India—East Coast—Balisahi Point to New Moore Island—Bangladesh and Burma—West Coast

7.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 7 — CHART INFORMATION
173

Pub. 173

SECTOR 7 

INDIA—EAST COAST—BALISAHI POINT TO NEW MOORE ISLAND—BANGLADESH, AND 

BURMA—WEST COAST

7.0 Plan.—This sector describes the E coast of India E of Balisahi Point and then the coast of Bangladesh and the W coast of

Burma. The descriptive sequence is from W to E and then S. 

General Remarks

7.1 The Hugli River, in the NW part of the Bay of Bengal,

is the W branch of the Ganges and the means of access for

ocean-going vessels calling at the port of Calcutta. Flowing

through the Sundarbans, the Pussur River, another branch of

the Ganges, is navigable by ocean-going vessels to the port of

Chalna. Similar type vessels also ascend the Karnaphuli River

to the port of Chittagong. 

7.1 The Orissa Coast and the Sundarbans Coast are generally

low, whereas the Chittagong Coast is marked by high mountain

ranges.

7.1 Cape Negrais lies about 333 miles SSE of Elephant Point,

with the intervening coast being irregular and broken in many

places by the rivers which discharge into the sea on the E side

of the Bay of Bengal. High hills and mountains back this section of coast at varying distances inland, and in most cases generally lie in a N-S direction parallel to the coast. Mayu and

Arakan Yoma are the principal ranges. Many of the peaks of

these ranges are useful marks to vessels navigating along this

coast. 

7.1 Ramree Island and Mun Aung Island, the two largest islands

of many which lie off this coast, lie about midway between Elephant Point and Cape Negrais. Combermore Bay and Hunters

Bay indent the shore N of the former island. 

7.1 Akyab is the most important commercial port, although

Kyaukpyu is of some importance. 

7.1 Winds—Weather.—The weather and climate of the area described in this sector is primarily influenced and determined by

the Northeast Monsoon and the Southwest Monsoon and the

short transitional periods between them. The year is divided into four seasons referred to as the Northeast Monsoon (winter

monsoon, cool or dry season), the spring transitional or hot

season, the Southwest Monsoon (summer monsoon, wet or

rainy season), and the autumn transitional season. 

7.1 The Northeast Monsoon, December through March, is

marked by good weather, with very little rainfall. 

7.1 The hot season, April and May, is an interim period of weak

and variable winds prior to the Southwest Monsoon. Increases

in rainfall in April and May do not equal the amounts of rainfall during June through August; this results in greater heating

of the air masses.

7.1 The Southwest Monsoon, June through September, is characterized by cloudiness, overcast skies, light rain almost daily,

interspersed with rain squalls or thunderstorms accompanied

by torrential downpours. Restricted visibility, high humidity,

and general adverse weather conditions are associated with the

Southwest Monsoon.

7.1 The autumn transitional season, a period of weak and variable winds with land and sea breezes prevailing, occurs in early

October after the withdrawal of the Southwest Monsoon and

before the cooler drier weather of the Northeast Monsoon is established in late November. 

7.1 Tropical storms, with destructive winds, occasionally affect

the coastal regions N of 15°00'N. 

7.1 Tropical cyclones, which develop in the Bay of Bengal, occur most frequently during the transitional season. The Arakan

Coast of Burma is more likely to be struck by a cyclone during

the autumn transitional season than at any other time, but rarely

is the Gulf of Martaban affected. During the hot season, some

tropical cyclones cross the coast of the Gulf of Martaban. 

7.1 Tides—Currents.—Surface currents across the head of the

Bay of Bengal, as elsewhere in the bay, are developed and influenced by the effects of the monsoon winds. 

7.1 At the Sandheads in August, a strong current sets to the W;

in September, after the retreat of the Southwest Monsoon, the

current setting to the W depends on the force and duration of

the E winds. During October, the current sets W and SW.

7.1 Seaward of the Sundarbans Coast, there are strong rotary tidal currents. The flood current begins setting W at the end of the

first quarter, its direction is WNW and at half flood about N.

During the last quarter of the flood, the current sets ENE. At

commencement the ebb current sets E, at half ebb it sets S, and

during the last quarter of the ebb it sets WSW, thus making a

complete rotation.

7.1 Tidal currents along the Chittagong Coast S of Elephant

Point set parallel with the coast, with the flood current setting

N and the ebb current setting S. 

7.1 Tidal currents along the Arakan Coast set N on the flood and

S on the ebb; they are greatly influenced by the immense volume of tidal backwater. Local in drafts of the current are strong

during the flood and the outset is small during the ebb. 

7.1 Caution.—Reefs, shoals, and sands extend seaward in a

general S direction from the delta shore at the head of the Bay

of Bengal. These dangers, with depths of 5.5m and less, lie

within the 11m curve and in places extend up to almost 30

miles offshore. 

7.1 Soundings provide a guide when approaching these shoals,

but if in doubt as to the vessel’s position, it is advisable not to

shoal to depths of less than 36.6m until certain of the position. 

7.1 Mariners should be aware of and have regard for the numerous dangers which lie offshore between Elephant Point and

Cape Negrais. 

India—Balisahi Point to the Sundarbans Coast,

including the Hugli River to Calcutta

7.2 Balisahi Point (20°51'N., 86°58'E.) is the extremity

of the low land N of the entrance of the Dhamra River. 

7.2 The coast between Balisahi Point and the entrance of the

Hugli River, about 69 miles NE, is low, flat, and covered with

scrub and mangroves along its S part. Southwest of Chandipur,
174 Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 

Pub. 173

the trees are higher than elsewhere. Northeast of Chandipur,

the coast remains low and sandy, but the sandhills are more

plentiful. There are no distinctive landmarks.

7.2 The Orissa Coast terminates at the entrance of the Hugli River.

7.2 Winds—Weather.—A general description of the winds and

weather along the coast has been previously given in paragraph

7.1. 

7.2 Baleshwar Road is in the track of cyclonic storms which pass

through this area. Many disasters have been caused by these

storms. 

7.2 Tides—Currents.—At Balramgari, which is just within the

Burhabalang River Entrance (21°29'N., 87°03'E.), springs

rise 3.7m and neaps rise 2.4m. 

7.2 The tidal currents in Baleshwar Road set NE during the flood

and SW during the ebb. Both currents set at a rate of 2 knots at

springs. 

7.2 In the Burhabalang River, the ebb lasts 8 or 9 hours and sets

at a rate of as high as 4 knots. The set of the flood averages

only 0.5 knot. 

7.2 Depths—Limitations.—Between Balisahi Point and the entrance of the Hugli River, the 18m curve lies about 9.5 miles E

of Balisahi Point and extends NE to a position about 22 miles S

of the entrance of the Subarnarekha River (21°34'N.,

87°23'E.), and then extends ESE to a position about 40 miles S

of the entrance of the Hugli River. With the exception of a detached 34.7m patch, which was reported to lie about 72 miles

SE of Balisahi Point, there are known dangers seaward of the

18m curve. Those dangers which lie within the 5.5m curve adjacent to the coast are described under the principal description

of the features which they front. 

7.2 The coast between Balisahi Point and the entrance of the

Burhabalang River is bordered by drying flats. The coast is low

as far as the village of Bideipur, about 13 miles NNW of Balisahi Point. Between this village and Kalikoti, about 8 miles to

the N, the flat coast is bordered by dense mangroves. At Nauri,

about 11 miles NNE, the coast is marked by low sand hills and

taller trees. These coastal features continue for an additional 10

miles NE to the village of Chandipur. A large double pagoda,

about midway between Nauri and Chandipur and 2 miles inland, is visible among the trees on NW bearings. 

7.2 A sand cliff, 16m high, lies in Chandipur. A black flagstaff

lies near a large white bungalow, about 0.8 mile NE of Chandipur. 

7.2 The entrance of the Burhabalang River lies 2.3 miles NE of

Chandipur and is marked by low, barren, sandhills.

7.2 Anchorage.—Baleshwar Road (21°23'N., 87°07'E.), which

lies off the entrance of the Burhabalang River, provides anchorage, in a depth of about 7.3m, sand and mud, good holding

ground, with the flagstaff NE of Chandipur bearing 312°, distant 7 miles. This is the best anchorage for vessels with a draft

of about 6.1m. Anchorage can also be taken closer inshore in

lesser depths.

7.2 The anchorage can be approached with the highest part of

Nilgiri Mountain (Dhobasila Pahar), about 16 miles W of the

river entrance, bearing about 293°. 

7.2 During stormy weather, anchorage can be taken off Kalikoti

over a bottom of soft mud. The Burhabalang River is tidal for

about 23 miles, but is navigable for only about 4 miles of this

distance above the entrance. Native craft, with drafts up to

2.7m, can transit this part of the river. 

7.3 Baleshwar (21°29'N., 86°57'E.) (World Port Index

No. 49550) lies on the S bank of the Burhabalang River, about

16 miles above its mouth. This town was formerly a port of

some importance, but in recent years there has been no

seaborne trade. 

7.3 Cargo is transported by barges from the anchorage in

Baleshwar Road. 

7.3 The Panchpara River (21°31'N., 87°07'E.) discharges into

the sea about 4.5 miles NE of the entrance of the Burhabalang

River. The river is navigable only by small native craft capable

of crossing the bar. 

7.3 The coast between the entrance of the Panchpara River and

the Subarnarekha River, about 13 miles ENE, is marked by

several sandhills. Pippli Sand, which dries, lies about 2 miles S

of the latter river entrance.

7.3 The Subarnarekha River (21°34'N., 87°23'E.) is reported

to have moderate depths within its entrance and is navigable by

native craft for about 16 miles of its distance. The former port

of Subarnarekha lies at the mouth of the river, but is available

only to fishing boats. A pagoda and a clump of trees lie near

the mouth of the river on the W bank. 

7.3 Anchorage can be taken off the mouth of the river, in depths

of 8.2 to 9.1m, with the pagoda bearing 327°, distant 8 miles. 

7.3 Digwash Mohan and Munder Mohan, both shallow streams,

discharge about 13 and 17 miles ENE, respectively, of the

mouth of the Subarnarekha River. The Pichaboni River discharges about 6 miles farther E.

7.3 The Rasulpur River (21°47'N., 87°54'E.), about 9.5 miles

NE of the Pichaboni River, discharges on the W side of the

Hugli River just within its entrance. 

7.3 Quoin Sandhill (21°36'N., 87°28'E.) lies on the shore about

6.3 miles WSW of the entrance of Digwash Mohan, otherwise

this stretch of coast is without any prominent features.

7.3 South of the mouth of Digwash Mohan, the 5m curve is

tongue-shaped, with its outer edge about 10 miles offshore.

Depths within this curve decrease to 4.6m. During bad weather, heavy breakers are raised over this shoal projection. 

7.3 Jensen Sand, which dries 4.6m on its inner part and 4m on its

outer part, extends about 8 miles SSW from the mouth of the

Rasulpur River. Spense Sand, which dries from 0.3 to 2.4m in

places, extends about 7 miles SSW from the S extremity of

Jensen Sand. A shoal, with depths of 0.6 to 4.9m, extends

about 19 miles S from Spense Sand and terminates in Western

Sea Reef. 

7.3 Buoy EB is moored 1 mile WSW of the outer end of Western

Sea Reef. 

India—Approaches to the Entrance of the Hugli

River

7.4 Vessels entering the Hugli River approach Eastern

Channel Light Vessel, which is moored about 46.5 miles SSE

of Sagar Island Light (21°39'N., 88°03'E.). 

7.4 During the Southwest Monsoon, it is best to make the coast

near Puri (18°40'N., 84°27'E.) or between Pundi and Ganjam,

where higher land backs the coast. When the weather is very

hazy, the land is obscured until a very near approach is made. It

is advisable to determine a vessel’s position before proceeding
Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 175

Pub. 173

N of Puri.

7.4 Soundings provide a guide when approaching this coast; the

183m curve lies about 21 miles SE of Pundi, 23 miles SE of

Ganjam, and 15 miles S of Puri. At night, vessels should make

Kalingapatam Light, Gopalpur Light, or Puri Light. Depths of

36.6m lie about 4 miles off Kalingapatam, 3.5 miles off Ganjam, and 13 miles S of Puri; continuous soundings should be

taken when approaching the coast.

7.4 At night or in bad weather, a vessel should proceed along the

coast in depths of about 36.6m. During the day, in clear weather, the Jagannath Pagodas at Puri and the black pagoda at

Konarak should be sighted when passing. When about 10 miles

beyond the black pagoda at Konarak, course should be shaped

for Eastern Channel Light Vessel. Care should be given to the

soundings when passing False Point, as the depths decrease

gradually toward the shoal ground around it. At night, vessels

should keep in depths of not less than 26m or even 37m when

the wind is SE. 

7.4 In September, toward the end of the Southwest Monsoon, the

current sets strongly to the SW, and if a vessel’s position is

fixed, landfall should not be made so far to the S. 

7.4 During the Northeast Monsoon, if a vessel is on the E side of

the Bay of Bengal, course should be shaped directly for Eastern Channel Light Vessel. 

7.4 Depths—Limitations.—A bank, located in position

20°44'N, 87°35'E and extending off the coast between False

Point and Palmyras Point, is an excellent guide when approaching the entrance of the Hugli River. The bottom, when in

depths of 36.6 to 42.1m, consists of reddish-colored shell and

sand and gravel; in deeper water to the E or seaward, the bottom consists of sand and mud with shining specks, or olive-colored mud with broken shells. The E edge of the ridge is rather

steep, with depths seaward of it ranging from 51 to 55m. 

7.4 The 35m curve follows the NE curve of the coast and lies

about 24 miles E of False Point Light and 25 miles E of

Palmyras Shoals. 

7.4 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory N of latitude 21°39'N for

all vessels of over 200 nrt. Pilots are available 24 hours.

7.4 All vessels approaching Sandheads, in the vicinity of Eastern

Channel Light Vessel, should contact the pilot vessel by calling

Sandheads Pilot on VHF channel 12, 14, or 16 for instructions.

Vessels should also contact the Vessel Traffic Management

System (VTMS) Station by calling VTMS Control on VHF

channel 16 or 68 for anchoring or pilot boarding instructions.

Vessels requiring a pilot are advised not to proceed N of latitude 21°00'N without being advised by Sandheads Pilot or VTMS Control to do so. 

7.4 Sandheads Pilots or VTMS Control may instruct vessels to

proceed to anchor S of Talent Light Vessel (Intermediate Light

Vessel) or between Talent Light Vessel (Intermediate Light

Vessel) and Lower Gasper Light Vessel.

7.4 Vessels anchoring should state their time of anchoring (in local time) and position to Sandheads Pilot or VTMS Control after anchoring and maintain a continuous listening watch on

VHF channel 16.

7.4 Pilots board N of Lower Gaspar Light Vessel (21°21.9'N.,

88°09.6'E.). Harbor pilots board in Garden Reach in position

22°33.3'N, 88°17.5'E.

7.4 For tankers and vessels greater than 160m long, pilots may

board S of Upper Gasper Light Vessel, depending on the prevailing weather conditions. 

7.4 The normal draft for vessels that can be taken upriver at

springs, under normal conditions, is about 7.9 and 7.3m at neaps. Occasionally the maximum draft at neaps decreases to

5.2m. A forecast of monthly drafts is published by the port authorities; for deeper draft vessels or vessels of 7 knots and under, special arrangements must be made and the date selected

by the port pilotage office. 

7.4 In 1976, a barrage, 60 miles N of Calcutta, was in operation.

This is expected to control the river flow so as to enable vessels

of 8.5m draft to reach Calcutta throughout the year and to reduce the effect of tidal bores. 

7.4 The pilot vessel is stationed between Gasper Channel and

Sagar Island. In very strong winds and heavy seas, the pilot

vessel cruises about 10 miles S of the light vessel. 

7.4 The pilot vessel, when sending a pilot to board a vessel, will

lie with the wind on its port side at all times throughout the

year. When supplying a pilot, the pilot vessel will be underway

during the Southwest Monsoon from March 15 to October 31

inclusive; it may be found at anchor during the Northeast Monsoon, either in the vicinity of the light vessel, or up to 10 miles

N of the Eastern Channel Light Vessel. No vessel shall anchor

within a radius of 2 miles from Eastern Channel Light Vessel.

7.4 Masters of vessels wishing to board a pilot are advised to approach the pilot vessel from astern of it, heading in the same

direction, and about three ship’s length distant. The pilot vessel

will proceed ahead, dropping a pulling or motor boat, which

should be picked up. The pilot vessel will always either turn

around or move far enough ahead to allow the following vessel

sufficient sea room to maneuver. Deep-draft vessels, approaching slowly during the Southwest Monsoon, should bear in mind

that the pilot vessel is drifting to leeward and should approach

slightly on its starboard quarter. A long boat rope and a pilot

ladder fitted with man ropes should be ready on the starboard

side. 

7.4 During the Southwest Monsoon, from March 15 to October

31, the pilot vessel, when on station at the Sandheads will display, between sunset and sunrise, a flashing white light every 3

seconds. The light is displayed from the top of the superstructure, but is not easily made out because of its low power.

7.4 The pilot vessel displays the usual signals for a pilot vessel

on station when underway and, in addition, a light at the foremast head, which is displayed in accordance with orders issued

by the local port authorities. A stern light is also displayed. A

red and white pilot flag is displayed by day. This flag is only

displayed when a pilot is available on board. 

7.4 Should the pilot vessel be at anchor, it will display the International Code of Signals signifying that it is at anchor. At

night, it will display the lights for a pilot vessel at anchor, together with the anchor lights. 

7.4 Should a vessel arrive at the Sandheads and not find a vessel

displaying the above signals, it will signify that no pilots are

available on the station. Instructions should then be requested

by radio. 

7.4 Vessels arriving at the Sandheads should have their clocks

set to Bengal time, which is 5.5 hours fast of GMT; this time is

kept by the pilot vessel and at Calcutta. Vessels should attempt

to inform the pilot vessel by radio at least 24 hours in advance

of their ETA at the pilot vessel, stating their grt, draft in fresh

water, speed, length overall, whether any explosives are on
176 Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 

Pub. 173

board, number of passengers if any, and details about any livestock. 

7.4 An ETA should be sent to the pilot vessel at the Sandheads

immediately upon vessel’s departure from a port less than 24

hours steaming distance away. Vessels wishing to make any

sound signals should do so in accordance with the Regulations

for Preventing Collisions at Sea. 

7.4 To enable a vessel to reach Calcutta on one tide it is best to

arrive at the Sandheads at the time of low water at Sagar Island.

However, it is necessary to have daylight for the last 4 hours of

the passage.

7.4 With a strong E wind, there is a strong set to the W. It is then

especially important that masters be guided by the advice given

by the pilot vessel.

7.4 Signals from the pilot vessel to prepare for bad weather

should not be ignored. 

7.4 The tidal current should be studied; with the first of the flood

setting to the W, a vessel should lie E, and with the first of the

ebb setting E, lie W and N. 

7.4 Lloyd’s agents at Calcutta have facilities for delivering communications to vessels at the Sandheads. 

7.4 When within the Hugli River, vessels embarking a pilot hoist

a black ball at the masthead, lowering it to half-staff when at

low speed.

7.4 Regulations.—Vessels should advise the pilots of the ETA

at Eastern Channel Light Vessel well in advance. The message

should include the following information:

1. Vessel name, call sign, and MMSI number.

2. Number of working VHF radios on board.

3. If AIS is on board and operational.

4. Gross tonnage and nrt.

5. Fresh water draft fore and aft.

6. Speed.

7. Length overall.

8. Cargo on board (type and quantity).

7.4 A Vessel Traffic Management System (VTMS) is in operation to improve the safety of vessels entering Calcutta and Haldia. Three radar surveillance stations located at Sagar Island,

Frasergunj, and Haldia will allow vessels to enter the navigation channel safely on the Hugli Delta between Talent Wreck

Light Vessel (21°17.0'N., 88°11.5'E.) and the pilot boarding

ground. The VTMS guidance is provided by the Hugli River

Pilots. The VTMS can be contacted on VHF channel 68, call

sign “VTMS Control.” 

7.4 Anchorage.—If for any reason it should become necessary

to anchor when approaching the pilot vessel, a vessel should do

so S of a line bearing 270° from Matia Station Buoy

(20°59'N., 88°38'E.), in a depth of not less than 27.4m, mud,

and not too close to the pilot vessel. 

7.4 When anchoring, vessels should stem the tide before letting

go an anchor, because the current sets strongly at the Sandheads. 

India—The Hugli River Entrance 

(21°39'N., 88°01'E.)

7.5 Eastern Channel Light Vessel, which is frequently

moved, marks the entrance of Eastern Channel, the main fairway leading to the Hugli River. Eastern Channel is available

for use both by day and night and leads into Gaspar Channel,

which in turn leads into Sagar Roads

7.5 Caution is necessary, as several dangerous wrecks, best seen

on chart, have been reported in the immediate vicinity of Eastern Channel Light Vessel.

7.5 Western Channel leads into Beaumont’s Gut and then into

Sagar Roads. Western Channel Station Buoy, conical, black

and white stripes, with black framework topmark, is moored 19

miles S of the S end of Eastern Sea Reef.

7.5 Sagar Roads (21°39'N., 88°01'E.), the navigable entrance at

the mouth of the Hugli River, lies about 2 miles W of the SW

extremity of Sagar Island. 

7.5 The navigable entrance channel leading to Sagar Roads is

subject to change in position and direction to accompany the

change in depths, which occur from time to time. Local knowledge and assistance is essential to safe navigation.

7.5 Winds—Weather.—The wind and weather prevalent at the

Sandheads is given in the accompanying table titled The Sandheads—Winds and Weather. 

The Sandheads—Winds and Weather

Months Wind Force Weather Remarks

September, after break 

up of the Southwest 

Monsoon

East Light and variable Showers of rain

West current depending on 

force and duration of E winds; 

weather generally clear

October East and calms Variable Stormy, sultry at 

times

West and SW current; generally a gale or cyclonic storm

November, December, JanuaryNorth in morning 

and evening

Fresh in morning 

and evening, calm 

midday.

Fine weather with 

cool mornings and 

evenings

Cessation of the strong tides 

of the Hugli River; fogs in 

January in morning

February

Variable, S at 

night; NW sometimesLight Warm toward end 

of month

Thick fogs in morning; floods 

strong in the Hugli River toward end of month

March, April, May

Variable, until end 

of March; W and 

SW in April and 

May

Light at first; 

sometimes strong 

at end.

Northwesters, with 

rain, thunder, and 

lightning, frequent; 

hazy

Flood tide occasionally accompanied by bore; sometimes a gale or cyclonic storm 

in April or May
Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 177

Pub. 173

7.5 Tides—Currents.—Seaward of the Sundarbans, there are

strong rotatory currents. During the rising tide, the tidal current

commences by setting W and gradually turns through N to NE.

During the falling tide, it commences by setting E and gradually turns through S to SW. 

7.5 At the Sandheads there is a strong W current in August; during September, after the cessation of the Southwest Monsoon,

the W current depends on the force and duration of the E

winds; in October, there is a W and SW current. During cyclonic weather, a strong W set of 2 to 5 knots is experienced.

During W gales, an E set of 1 to 2 knots develops. 

7.5 Tides at the Sandheads and in Sagar Roads are semidiurnal.

Sagar Tidal Semaphore, displaying day and night signals, lies

about 0.5 mile SSW of Sagar Island Light. Dublat Mark lies on

Sidney Point, the SE extremity of Sagar Island. 

7.5 In Eastern Channel, the tidal currents set, when not influenced by the wind, as given in the accompanying table titled

Eastern Channel—Tidal Currents. 

7.5 The maximum velocities range from 2 to 3 knots at springs,

and 1 to 1.5 knots during neaps, following the direction of the

channel. 

7.5 Depths—Limitations.—Eastern Sea Reef (21°14'N.,

88°03'E.), with depths of 0.6 to 4.9m, has its S extremity about

29 miles S of Sagar Island Light. This reef extends S from

Lower Long Sand, a drying shoal with its N end about 4.5

miles SSW of Sagar Island Light. A shoal, with depths of 0.6

to 4.9m, extends about 26 miles SSE from New Island

(21°33'N., 88°11'E.). During the Southwest Monsoon, the sea

breaks heavily over the S end of this shoal. 

7.5 Middle Ground, with depths of 1.2 to 5.5m, lies between

Western Sea Reef and Eastern Sea Reef. Depths over this shoal

range from a drying patch on its N end to a depth of 5.2m over

its S end. This shoal breaks heavily during the Southwest Monsoon. Lower Gasper Light Vessel (21°21.9'N., 88°09.6'E.)

has a red hull with one mast surmounted by a topmark.

7.5 A similar breaking shoal, with depths of 0.6 to 5.5m, lies between Eastern Sea Reef and the previously-described shoal

which extends SSE from New Island. 

7.5 Eastern Channel, with Gasper Channel, its N extension, lies

between Eastern Sea Reef and the shoal to the E which extends

about 26 miles SSE from New Island. Sagar Roads is entered N

of this latter channel. Both Gasper Channel and Sagar Roads

are marked by lighted buoys. A number of dangerous wrecks,

marked by buoys, are encountered at the junction of the two

fairways. 

7.5 Western Channel lies between Western Sea Reef and Eastern

Sea Reef, and leads into Beaumont’s Gut, which leads into Sagar Roads. 

7.5 Upper Long Sand (21°34'N., 87°57'E.), a drying bank about

5 miles long, lies with its upper end about 5.3 miles SW of Sagar Island Light. A narrow shoal, with depths of 1.8 to 4.6m,

extends 10.5 miles S from Upper Long Sand and then curves

NE to join the upper part of Eastern Sea Reef. 

7.5 Mizen Sand, a small drying bank, lies about 2.3 miles N of

Upper Long Sand; Tigris Sand lies about 1 mile farther N.

Lighted Buoy LWA is moored close off the NE end of Mizen

Sand. Lighted Buoy AD is moored close off the E side of Tigris Sand, 2 miles NNW of Lighted Buoy LWA.

7.5 Auckland Bar (21°45'N., 87°59'E.) has depths of over 4.6m.

A passage from Auckland Bar to Haldia Port is made through

Jellingham Channel, marked by lighted buoys. 

7.5 In 1986, it was reported that sand banks and islands SW of

Aguimari Char (22°00'N., 88°08'E.) were to have been

washed away to form a crossing to run from Jellingham ChanJune Southwest Strong at first

Northwesters decreasing in force; 

heavy thunderstorms

In June, the “chota bursat” or 

small rain, generally lasts two 

weeks

July Southwest and W Strong; gales frequent Squally heavy rains Freshets in the river, much 

swell in Eastern Channel

August

Southwest and W; 

W during day, 

hauling to S toward 

evening

Lighter

Squally, heavy 

rains; generally 

clear

Strong W current at the Sandheads

The Sandheads—Winds and Weather

Months Wind Force Weather Remarks

Eastern Channel—Tidal Currents

Flood bearing Ebb bearing

First quarter 270°-032° 045°-112°

Second quarter 310° 160°

Third quarter 000° 180°

Fourth quarter 022° 220°-240°

Lower Gasper Light Vessel
178 Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 

Pub. 173

nel to Rangafala Channel, lying E of Aguimari Char. This connecting channel will allow an alternate route to Kulpi Roads

and Calcutta, a detour from Haldia Channel. In 1988, Rangafala Channel was marked by lighted buoys. In 1989, it was reported that vessels make passage through Rangafala Crossing

SSW of Aguimari into Rangafala Channel. 

7.5 Middleton Bar (21°36'N., 88°03'E.), which dries 1.2m near

its S end, lies centered about 3.3 miles S of Sagar Island Light,

on the W side of Gaspar Channel. North of Middleton Bar a

narrow shoal, with depths of less than 3m, extends about 4

miles N to join the drying coastal flat about 2 miles N of Sagar

Island Light. A drying bank lies on this shoal about 1.5 miles

WSW of the same lighthouse. 

7.5 Aspect.—Sagar Island (21°44'N., 88°07'E.) lies on the E

side of the Hugli River entrance and is flanked on its E side by

the Baratala River, and on its W side by Bedford Channel. The

main fairway leading into the Hugli River passes close off the

SW extremity of this island. Although well-populated and

heavily cultivated, the island has few distinguishing features. 

7.5 Regulations.—The master of an inbound vessel should report the health condition of the vessel to the pilot when the pilot boards at the Sandheads and act in accordance with the pilot’s instructions. 

7.5 A vessel arriving at the Sandheads from an infected port, or

having plague on board, or a vessel on board which one or

more cases of plague have developed within 12 days of the date

of arrival, shall hoist and keep flying a yellow flag, and the signal indicating the port departed. Permission to haul them down

must be obtained in writing from the health officer. 

7.5 During this period, no communication shall be held with the

shore, or with any other boat or vessel, with the exception of

the pilot boat. 

7.5 In the case of a vessel with sickness on board, which the pilot has reason to believe is plague, the pilot shall notify the

health officer from Sagar and shall not proceed beyond Diamond Harbor without permission of the health officer. If the pilot has no reason to believe that there is anyone suffering from

plague on board, the pilot shall bring the vessel up the river to

Garden Reach and anchor it off Matia Bruz until visited by the

health officer.

7.5 Vessels with cases of smallpox, cholera, measles, or other

epidemic diseases common in India, or of diphtheria or scarlatina on board, or those on which two or more deaths from

suspicious causes have occurred during the voyage, must report the facts to the pilot immediately after boarding the vessel;

the pilot will give instructions as to the signals to be hoisted. 

7.5 A vessel that has called at any yellow fever infected port

within 1 month of arrival in Calcutta, even though it may have

entered another Indian port during that period, will not be

granted free pratique. Health officials will board such a vessel

at its berth. 

7.5 Radio pratique may be obtained prior to arrival at Calcutta in

accordance with local instructions. 

7.5 The quarantine station is situated at Diamond Harbor.

7.5 Signals.—Storm signals are displayed at Sagar Island Light;

the Extended System is used. Further information on these

storm signals may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions

(Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

7.5 Anchorage.—Sagar Roads provides anchorage, in 9.1 to

14.6m, in ordinary weather. During heavy gales, a considerable

swell rolls into the roads.

7.5 Caution.—A dangerous wreck, with a least depth of 1.5m,

lies in Bedford Channel about 0.6 mile off the W coast of Sagar

Island, about 3.5 miles SW of the N extremity of the island.

7.5 Mariners must always be aware that depths and aids to navigation in the river may be different than charted.

7.5 The coastal features on the W side of the mouth of the Hugli

River to the Rasulpur River (21°47'N., 87°54'E.) have been

previously described. 

India—The Hugli River to Calcutta, including

Haldia and Diamond Harbor

7.6 Navigation on the Hugli River is reported to be difficult. The 39-mile stretch from Hugli Point (22°13'N., 88°04'E.)

to Calcutta is the most treacherous. In 1984, it was reported

that the channel buoys were not well maintained, many were

either unlit or missing. It was reported (1976) that night navigation above Hugli Point was prohibited. 

7.6 The navigable channel in the river is subject to annual variations; these are caused by the scour of the freshets and the

flood current, as the season is wet or dry, respectively. The

channel through the estuary is subject to such changes as occur

in all wide, sandy, tidal estuaries.

7.6 Vessels take advantage of the rise in tide and cross the shallowest bars at HW; this results in bunching of vessels. A vessel

inbound can generally go up the river with the tide without any

stops, but sometimes it might take about 24 hours with an anchorage stop along the way. An outbound vessel cannot cover

the total distance of the river during the same high tide; the

transit down the river is made in stages. According to the speed

and type of vessel, sailing down the river takes about 36 to 48

hours, with stops at Ulubaria (abreast of Achipur Point), Diamond Harbor or Kulpi Roads, and Sagar Roads Anchorage. 

7.6 Sharp bends in the river upstream of Diamond Harbor limit

the length of a vessel to 189m at Buj-Buj and 172m at Calcutta.

7.6 During times of predicted tidal bores, the overall length of

vessels will be regulated by the harbor master. 

7.6 The navigable channels of the Hugli River, leading to Calcutta N of the parallel of latitude 21°01'N, are under the jurisdiction of the Port Commissioners of Calcutta.

7.6 Vessels proceeding against the current should slow down or

stop if it appears that other vessels will be met with at difficult

parts of the river, or on bars where the deep-water channels are

narrow. The usual rule of the road is adhered to in the river and

estuary. A prolonged blast of the whistle, quickly followed by

three short blasts, is an optional signal that the vessel making

the signal is obliged to stop and cannot get out of the way.

7.6 Winds—Weather.—The wind and weather conditions usually encountered in the upper reaches of the Bay of Bengal and

the approaches to the Hugli River have been previously described in paragraph 7.1. Storm and weather signals, in accordance with the Indian General System, are displayed at the

following points when the weather in the Bay of Bengal is disturbed:

1. Diamond Harbor, near the telegraph office.

2. Budge, near the telegraph office.

3. Kidderpore Docks, from the clock tower near the entrance.
Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 179

Pub. 173

4. From the flagstaff on the Port Commissioner’s Office

in Calcutta.

7.6 Further information on these storm signals may be found in

Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic

Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

7.6 The following signals and instructions from the General System have been approved by the Deputy Conservator of the Port

of Calcutta for the security of shipping and are described in

greater detail so as to have local significance. 

1. Danger Signal V—Indicates that a storm of slight or

moderate severity will probably cross the coast to the E of

Sagar Island and W of Chittagong. Vessels may proceed to

sea if the height of the barometer, state of the sea, and weather are such as to lead masters and pilots to infer that there is

no danger. The wind at the mouth of the Hugli will probably

haul from NE through N to NW or W.

2. Danger Signal VI—Indicates that a storm of slight or

moderate severity will probably cross the coast to the W of

Sagar Island and N of False Point. The wind at the mouth of

the Hugli will probably veer from NE through E to SE or S.

As these E winds will raise a heavy swell and produce a

strong W set in the channel at the Sandheads, it is advisable

that none but fast steamers in light trim should put to sea,

and those only if the weather appearances and state of the

sea are not too unfavorable. 

3. Danger Signal VII—Indicates the approach toward

Sagar Roads of a storm of slight or moderate intensity. It is

advisable that no vessels, except fast vessels in light trim,

should put to sea until the wind direction and force, the state

of weather and sea, and the rise of the barometer indicate

that the storm has either broken up or passed inland. It

should remembered that cyclonic storms of small extent in

the Bay of Bengal sometimes blow with hurricane force, and

raises a high sea near their centers. 

4. Great Danger Signal VIII—Indicates that a storm of

great intensity will cross the coast to the E of Sagar Island

and W of Chittagong. It is advisable that sailing vessels, with

or without steam, and deep-draft or slow vessels should not

proceed to sea. The wind at the mouth of the Hugli will probably haul from the NE through N to NW or W. 

5. Great Danger Signal IX—Indicates that a storm of

great intensity will cross the coast to the W of Sagar Island

and N of False Point. Vessels should not go to sea; masters

and pilots of outbound vessels should be guided by the appearance of the weather and height of the barometer in deciding whether it is advisable to proceed below Diamond

Harbor or Mud Point. The wind at the mouth of the Hugli

River will probably veer from NE through E to SE or S. 

6. Great Danger Signal X—Indicates the approach of a

storm of great intensity toward the mouth of the Hugli River

and Calcutta. Vessels should not go to sea from Sagar Island,

or proceed down the river from Diamond Harbor; all vessels

should be properly secured. 

7.6 The masters of vessels in the port should take the special precautions for safety laid down in the port rules.

7.6 A cyclonic storm of severe intensity is frequently accompanied by a storm wave, which is not often the case with a small

cyclonic storm. The height and destructive effect of a storm depend almost as much on the state and character of the tide

when the cyclonic center reaches the coast, as upon the depression at the center, or the intensity and extent of the storm. 

7.6 Tides—Currents.—Tides in the Hugli River are semi-diurnal. 

7.6 Tidal semaphores have been established at the following

places to indicate the rise of the tide in the Hugli River:

1. About 0.5 mile SSW of Sagar Island Light. Tidal information is also broadcast on VHF channel 16. 

2. At Gangra, on the W bank about 7.5 miles NW of the

N point of Sagar Island. Tidal information is also broadcast

on VHF channel 16. 

3. At Balari, on the W bank about 12 miles NE of the

tidal semaphore at Gangra.

4. On Hugli Point, about 12 miles upriver from the

semaphore at Balari. Tidal information is also broadcast on

VHF channel 13. 

5. At Moyapur, about 17 miles downriver from Kidderpore Docks. Tidal information is also broadcast on VHF

channel 13. 

6. At Akra, about 6.5 miles downriver from Kidderpore

Docks. Tidal information is also broadcast on VHF channel

13. 

7. At Rajabagan, about 3 miles downriver from Kidderpore Docks.

7.6 The semaphores have three arms, the upper arm indicates

meters, the middle arm decimeters, and the lower arm centimeters, as depicted in the diagram below. 

7.6 At the moment of HW, a ball is hoisted to its upper position;

as the tide begins to fall, the ball is lowered to the lower position until the tide has fallen by 1m, when the ball is hauled

down. At LW, the ball is hoisted to the lower position; as the

tide begins to rise, the ball is hoisted to the upper until the tide

has risen by 1m, when the ball is hauled down. 

7.6 Night semaphores are situated at Sagar, Gangra, Balari, Hugli Point, and Moyapur. 

7.6 Each semaphore can display two flashing lights, an upper

light showing a 2-second flash every 8 seconds and a lower

Hugli River Tidal Semaphore Signals
180 Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 

Pub. 173

light showing one flash every second. 

7.6 The rise of the tide is indicated, as follows: 

7.6 One fixed red light is displayed if the semaphore is not working. 

7.6 The strength of the tidal current varies in different parts of

the Hugli River at different times of the year; its velocity is

least during the Northeast Monsoon from November to February, when it is 3 to 3.5 knots at springs and 1.5 to 2 knots at neaps. 

7.6 During the latter part of the dry season, the Southwest Monsoon blowing in the direction of the flood current increases its

velocity so that it flows up the river at 4 to 6 knots during

spring tides. 

7.6 The descent of the freshets, from July to October, causes the

ebb current to predominate and it reaches a maximum velocity

of 7 knots during spring tides; at this time the flood current is

imperceptible, except in the estuary. 

7.6 There are three distinct periods in the year, lasting approximately 4 months each. During the cold season, the flood current has a slight preponderance over that of the ebb, because of

its shorter period of flow. The flood current, during the second

half of the dry season, is made considerably stronger than the

ebb by the Southwest Monsoon. During the rainy season, the

flood current is overpowered by the descent of freshets and the

ebb current predominates accordingly. 

7.6 The great body of the tidal current flows in the direction of

the channels at velocities of 2 to 3 knots at springs and 1 knot

to 1.5 knots at neaps. 

7.6 At LW during spring tides, the flow of the flood current is

checked by the shallow and restricted bed of the river and by

the seaward flow of water from the upper reaches. These conditions can lead to the creation of a tidal bore. 

7.6 Bores in the Hugli River occur only with a greater than average spring tide, and usually when the seaward flow is augmented by freshets. Extreme tidal bores are most prevalent in March

and September and reach heights of 2.4 to 6.1m. 

7.6 During the Northeast Monsoon, from November to February,

freshets do not occur and for this reason, bores are a rarity.

When they do occur during this particular season, it is likely to

be at night. They are dangerous because they are unexpected. It

is advisable to anticipate their occurrence during this season

whenever greater than average spring tides are predicted. 

7.6 With the Southwest Monsoon, the occurrence of freshets

during greater than average spring tides will always cause

bores, those preceding the daylight HW being higher than

those at night. 

7.6 The first appearance of the bore is on Diamond Sand

(22°10'N., 88°10'E.), on the W side of the river abreast Diamond Harbor, where the ascending wave runs on as a breaking

roller. It is not of much consequence until it enters the contracted reaches above Hugli Point, when, besides swamping boats,

it affects vessels at anchor by causing them to run upstream, especially if there is a strong S breeze. The bore reaches a maximum at Chinsura, about 26 miles above Kidderpore Docks,

and disappears about 14 miles farther up the river above Naya

Serai. 

7.6 Vessels at moorings surge and roll during the passage of the

bore as there is a sudden lift of 1.2 to 1.8m; when bores are expected, springs must be put on the flood moorings close down

to the buoys to relieve the jerk on the cable and bits. Vessels at

anchor have been known to break their anchor chains during

extreme tidal bores. 

7.6 Depths—Limitations.—Bars, bends, and bores, known as

the three Bs, constitute the main dangers to shipping in the

Hugli River. Numerous bars, with continuous fluctuating

depths over them, encumber the winding channel of the river. 

7.6 The river is high from June to October and during this period, vessels drawing up to 8.5m can reach Calcutta at HWS.

Vessels drawing up to 7.9m can reach the port at HWN. From

October to June, the river is low and the maximum permissible

draft is 7.3m. Maximum drafts may vary from year to year according to the season, but vessels drawing up to 8.8m have ascended the river to Calcutta; special arrangements have to be

made and the date selected by the Port Pilotage Office. 

7.6 Vessels proceeding to Calcutta should arrive at the pilot station with drafts as close to an even keel as possible. 

7.6 In some parts of the river, the changes in depths and the directions of the channels are very rapid and no attempt will be

made to describe them or the navigational aids which mark

them. 

7.6 Although the charts may currently be correct, they can not be

relied on to give an accurate presentation of the depths and

dangers which may be encountered because of these rapid

changes.

7.6 Signals.—Signal stations are situated near the lighthouse on

Sagar Island, on the E bank at Diamond Harbor, and at Hugli

Point, about 6 miles above Diamond Harbor. Diamond Harbor

Signal Station is connected by telegraph, and the other stations

are connected by telephone with Calcutta. 

Haldia (22°01'N., 88°05'E.)

World Port Index No. 49555

7.7 Haldia, a subsidiary port and anchorage, lies on the W

bank of the Hugli River about 56 miles downriver from CalcutSignal Tidal Rise

Upper light green 1.0m and 4.0m

Both lights green 1.2m and 4.2m

Green over red 1.4m and 4.4m

Green over white 1.6m and 4.6m

Lower light green 1.8m and 4.8m

Upper light red 2.0m and 5.0m

Red over green 2.2m and 5.2m

Both lights red 2.4m and 5.4m

Red over white 2.6m and 5.6m

Lower light red 2.8m and 5.8m

Upper light white 3.0m and 6.0m

White over green 3.2m and 6.2m

White over red 3.4m and 6.4m 

Both lights white 3.6m and 6.6m 
Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 181

Pub. 173

ta. An important secondary port; the oil port serves an oil refinery at Barauni, 280 miles NW by pipeline. 

7.7 Extensive works are in progress to dredge and deepen the approaches, channels, and berthing areas. The results of dredging

in shipping lanes are constantly reviewed to affirm permissible

drafts. Drafts are issued as the draft of the day and forecasted 6

weeks in advance. 

7.7 Haldia Terminal Oil Jetty No. 1 and Haldia Terminal Oil Jetty No. 2 are situated 2.3 and 2 miles ENE of Haldia Point

(22°01'N., 88°04'E.). Berth No. 1 has a berthing face of 91.5m

and can accommodate tankers up to 90,000 dwt, with a maximum length of 238m. Berth No. 2 can accommodate tankers up

to 150,000 dwt. Haldia Oil Jetty No. 3 can accommodate vessels up to 150,000 dwt. Currents may exceed 5 knots.

7.7 It has been reported (1996) that shoaling has begun to limit

the size of vessels able to use Berth No. 1.

7.7 The Haldia dock system is approached through a lock entrance at Haldia Point, with a least depth of 8.5m. Vessels up to

230m in length can utilize this entrance, which leads to a large

turning basin and an enclosed dock extending about 900m

NNE. There is a depth of at least 8.5m throughout the turning

basin and dock system. 

7.7 The E side, from S to N, provides ore, coal, and phosphate

berths, with modern cargo handling equipment. A 235m finger

pier projects S from the N head of the dock. This berth, which

can accommodate vessels on either side, is utilized for the discharge of salt, sulfur, and fertilizer. 

7.7 At the N end of the W side of the dock is a general cargo

berth, with two container berths S of it. 

7.7 LASH vessels are at present (1978) worked at the anchorage

0.3 mile S of the oil jetty. 

7.7 The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channel 16

2. Telephone: 91-3224-252104

3. Facsimile: 91-3224-252251

4. E-mail: haldia@hub.nic.in

7.7 Anchorage can be taken in mid-channel, in a depth of 11m,

abreast of the port area over a bottom of medium to hard mud

and sand, good holding ground. 

7.7 A vessel has anchored, in a depth of 12.8m, mud, with the

anchorage lights in range 244° and Bagnapara Mark bearing

350° on the ebb and 339° on the flood. A good anchor watch is

required because of the strong currents.

7.7 Two mooring buoys are available; vessels are required to secure to these buoys with unshackled anchor chains. Mooring

takes place under the direction of the pilot and an experienced

mooring crew is provided. 

7.7 The maximum rate of the current in the river is about 5

knots, both on the flood and the ebb. 

7.7 The pilot and the customs officer remain on board during the

vessels stay at Haldia and accommodations must be furnished. 

Diamond Harbor Anchorage 

7.8 Diamond Harbor Anchorage (22°11'N., 88°11'E.)

lies on the E bank of the Hugli River about 38 miles above Sagar Roads, and provides anchorage for large vessels, in depths

of 11 to 23.8m. Because of the strong river current, at least five

shots of chain must be used and a good anchor watch maintained. Mooring buoys are available for vessels requiring them. 

7.8 Explosives destined for Calcutta are usually unloaded into

special barges at this anchorage. 

7.8 A signal and telegraph station and a customhouse are situated in the town. 

7.8 An examination anchorage area is enclosed by a line joining

the following positions: 

a. 22°11'30"N., 88°11'00"E. 

b. 22°11'30"N., 88°08'30"E. 

c. 22°11'00"N., 88°08'30"E. 

d. 22°11'00"N., 88°11'00"E. 

Calcutta (Kolkata) (22°33'N., 88°19'E.)

World Port Index No. 49560

7.9 The port of Calcutta extends from Budge Budge,

about 21 miles above Hugli Point, to Konnagar, about 21 miles

farther upriver, the limits being marked by boundary pillars.

The port is about 83 miles above the entrance of the Hugli River, and about 128 miles from Eastern Channel Light Vessel,

near The Sandheads. 

7.9 The Howrah Bridge, about 15 miles above the downriver

boundary of the port, crosses the river above Howrah Railway

Terminus and is a steel cantilever structure, with tower on either side of the river which rises to a height of 91m. Several

ferries ply across the river. The bridge marks the upper limit of

navigation for ocean-going vessels. 

7.9 Modern well-equipped berthing facilities are provided for all

classes of vessels alongside and at the mooring buoys in the

river. 

7.9 Calcutta, the second largest commercial port in India, is also

the site of the largest city. 

7.9 Tides—Currents.—Tides in the Hugli River at Calcutta are

semidiurnal.

7.9 When regular, the flood runs 5 hours and the ebb runs 7

hours. During the Northeast Monsoon, the velocity of the current is 3 to 3.5 knots at springs and 1.5 to 2 knots at neaps. Between March and July, the velocity of the flood is increased

and reaches a maximum velocity of 4 to 7 knots at springs.

During the freshets, July to October, the flood is weak and of

short duration and at neaps may be nearly imperceptible; the

ebb during freshets has a maximum velocity of 7 knots at

springs. Anchors are then quickly buried by the silt, so that

sometimes it is necessary to slip the cable and leave the anchor

to be picked up by the Port Commissioners. The tidal currents

set fair up and down Calcutta Reach. 

7.9 Depths—Limitations.—Mooring berths in the river have

sufficient depths to accommodate any vessel that can enter the

river. Depths at the moorings range from 5.5 to 15.2m, but vary

according to their location in the river. 

7.9 Kidderpore Docks comprise No. 1 Dock, No. 2 Docks, and a

turning basin. The lock entrance from the river is 176.8m long

and 24.4m wide. Vessels up to a maximum length of 157m and

a beam of 21.3m can enter Kidderpore Docks. No. 1 Dock has

11 berths; No. 2 Dock has eight berths for general cargo and

 Kolkata Port Trust

http://www.kolkataporttrust.gov.in
182 Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 

Pub. 173

six coal berths. A depth of 9.1m exists alongside the berths in

both docks.

7.9 Nataji Subhas Docks (King George Dock) lock entrance is

213.4m long and 27.4m wide. Vessels up to 172m may enter

the dock. Seven berths, with a depth of 10m alongside, are

available for ocean-going vessels. The other berthing facilities

within the dock are for the sole use of lighters. In 1985, there

were two container berths and cranes in Nataji Subhas Docks. 

7.9 Garden Reach Jetties consist of five jetties for ocean-going

vessels. Vessels, with lengths from 137 to 172m can be accommodated alongside. 

7.9 Vessels berthed at Garden Reach Jetties are limited to a draft

of 5.5m during bore periods. 

7.9 Calcutta Jetties, which lie below Howrah Bridge, consist of

nine jetties, but only five are available to ocean-going vessels. 

7.9 The petroleum facilities at Buj-Buj (Budge Budge) consist of

eight pontoon jetties. Vessels, with a maximum draft of 9.1m,

can be accommodated alongside these berths. 

7.9 Vessels mooring in the river are required to moor head stern,

with two lower and stern cables shackled to the permanent

moorings which are laid parallel with the banks. 

7.9 Regulations.—Port Regulations are supplied to vessels on

arrival by the harbor master.

7.9 Rules regulating the handling of explosives are issued by the

port authorities. Masters of vessels with explosives on board

are required to give an advance notice of arrival of 72 hours. 

7.9 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channel 16

2. Telephone: 91-33-22303451

3. Facsimile: 91-33-22204901

4. E-mail: portofcalcutta@portofcalcutta.com

India—The Sundarbans to the Chittagong Coast

7.10 The Sundarbans, broken by many outlets of the

Ganges, extends E from the entrance of the Hugli River for

about 165 miles to the entrance of the Tetulia River, the W

mouth of the Meghna River. 

7.10 The Sundarbans, an extensive, heavily-wooded swampy area

in the S part of the Ganges Delta, is intersected by many creeks

and rivers. The more important rivers are the Matla River, the

Raimangal River, the Malancha River, the Pussu Riverr, the

Haringhata River, and the Rabnabad River. An intricate series

of branches connect these rivers whose courses are continually

shifting their positions. Boats can be piloted through the Calcutta Canals towards Kulna, about 65 miles to the E. Kulna is

the most important center situated in the Sundarbans. The

Meghna River, the E branch of the Ganges, discharges the main

volume of the Ganges waters. 

7.10 Depths—Limitations.—Swatch of No Ground (21°05'N.,

89°17'E.) is a remarkable tongue-shaped depression lying S of

the entrance of the Pussur River. The NE side of the depression

is centered in about position 21°24'N, 89°36'E. Depths around

the perimeter of this depression decrease rapidly from 36.6m to

over 183m within a distance of 1 to 2 miles along the N and

NW sides, and to much greater depths in its central and S parts. 

7.10 Swatch of No Ground ranges in width from 6 to 12 miles

within the 183m curve and is about 50 miles long. It has been

reported (2006) that depths of as little as 12m and 17m are located in Swatch of No Ground, about 43 miles SSE of Putney

Island. 

7.10 The 11m curve, like the 18 and 35m curves to the S, extends

in a general E and W direction from a position about 25 miles

S of the entrance of the Matla River to a position about 60

miles S of the mouth of the Hatia River. The 11m curve lies

nearest to the coast about 11 miles S of the entrance of the Pusur River. 

7.10 Those depths and dangers which lie within the 11m curve are

described together with the principal description of the coastal

features which they front. 

7.10 East of Sagar Island is a series of low alluvial jungle-covered

islands intersected by numerous creeks and rivers. 

Port of Kolkata

Special Storm Signals—Rivers of the Sundarbans

Signal Day Night Meaning

Cautionary Signal I Black diamond White light over red light Squally weather threatens your area

Warning Signal II Black ball Red light A storm may affect you shortly

Danger Signal III Cone, point up Two red lights displayed 

vertically A storm will soon strike you

Great Danger Signal IV Cylinder, displayed vertically

Three red lights displayed 

vertically A violent storm will soon strike you
Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 183

Pub. 173

7.10 Saptamukhi Sand (21°20'N., 88°27'E.) and Bulcherry

Sand, both with depths of 5.5m and less, extend about 28 and

20 miles S, respectively, from the shore. Reliable information

about this part of the coast is scanty and the chart should be

used with great caution. Changes on the SW part of the Sundarbans have been particularly rapid in recent years.

7.10 Lacams Channel (21°13'N., 88°24'E.), which lies close W

of Saptamukhi Sand leads N into the Baratala River on the E

side of Sagar Island. Saptamukhi Channel, which lies close E

of Saptamukhi Sand and is the common entrance of the Jamira

River on the E and the Saptamukhi River on the W. Ocean-going vessels cannot use the channels. 

7.10 A dangerous wreck is situated in the outer approach to

Lacam’s Channel, about 18 miles E of Eastern Channel Light.

7.10 Signals.—Special storm signals, used on the rivers of the

Sundarbans, are displayed at Namkhana, Barisal, Goalunda,

Noakhali, Narayanganj, Chandpar, Mongla, and at some river

police stations in Bengal, Assam, and Bangladesh; for further

information, see the accompanying table titled Special Storm

Signals—Rivers of the Sundarbans.

India—The Matla River

7.11 The Matla River (21°37'N., 88°41'E.), about 34

miles E of Sagar Island Light, lies with its mouth between Dalhousie Island and Bulcherry Island. The river is entered

through Eastern Channel and Western Channel, which are divided by a partly drying shoal known as Raimatla Sand (West

Spit), about 10 miles S of Dalhousie Island. Shoals at the entrance are subject to change and, since pilotage is not available,

caution is necessary in navigating these two channels and the

Matla River. 

7.11 Eastern Channel has least charted depths of 7.9 to 12.8m;

Western Channel has least charted depths of 6.1 to 11m. Western Channel is preferred to Eastern Channel, but navigation is

dangerous because the depths in the approach to the SW side of

Dalhousie Island are fairly regular and the lead gives no warning of the proximity of the steep-to bordering sands. This condition also exists within the river. 

7.11 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents below Dalhousie

Sand appear to rotate; the flood current sets WNW at its commencement and works through N around ENE. The ebb current

sets ESE through S to WSW. Velocities of the flood and ebb

currents are 2 to 3 knots at springs and 1 to 1.5 knots at neaps.

7.11 In the channel, the flood current runs toward the E shore until abreast of Dalhousie River at the N end of Dalhousie Island,

then it crosses S of Grappler Sand and runs toward Peel Point,

forming eddies. It then runs N for about 8 miles to Roger

Point (21°55'N., 88°40'E.) where it bifurcates, the greater portion going up Bidda River and the balance running around

Roger Point into Katalli Bight, leaving slack water in the vicinity of Bidda River Point. The velocity of the flood current varies in different parts of the river, but 5 knots is the maximum

velocity recorded. 

7.11 The ebb current sets fairly down the river; off Roger Point it

forms numerous eddies. At the last of the ebb, the current sets

from abreast the N end of Dalhousie Island across the river toward Halliday Island. The maximum recorded velocity of the

ebb current is 2.5 knots. 

7.11 Aspect.—Clumps of trees lie on Dalhousie Point on the W

side of the island of the same name. This point and Halliday Island to the NW, may be seen from a distance of 10 miles when

the height of eye is about 7.3m. When close to Dalhousie

Point, conspicuous when the sun is shining, appears as a high,

white sandy beach. 

7.11 Below Kattali, which lies 12 miles N of the N end of Dalhousie Island, the land is so low that at HWS the water runs

some distance inland. From the sea to Eedoo Reach, about 23

miles above Kattali, the land is covered by dense jungle. Between this reach and Port Canning, about 8 miles distant, the

banks are marked by villages.

7.12 Port Canning (22°19'N., 88°39'E.), about 60 miles

above the entrance of the Matla River, is connected with Calcutta by railroad. 

7.12 Anchorage can be taken off the port, in depths of 7.3 to

14.6m, but local knowledge is essential.

7.12 The coast between the Matla River and the Pusur River,

about 50 miles to the E, is marked by the entrances of the Bangaduni River, the Gosaba River, the Raimaugal River, and the

Malancha River. All of these rivers are fronted by shoals which

extend from 3 to 17 miles offshore. 

7.12 Dalhousie Sand (21°24'N., 88°51'E.) extends about 17

miles SSE from Dalhousie Point. 

7.12 Bhangaduni Island (21°33'N., 88°52'E.), which lies between the mouths of the Bhangaduni River and the Gosaba

River, is fronted by Bhangaduni Sand, which extends about 17

miles SE from it. Both of these rivers have shallow entrances

and are of no commercial value. The Raimangal River and the

Malacha River farther to the E are both shallow. 

7.12 The Haribhanga River opens 12 miles ENE of the Gosaba

River; the Raimangal River is about about 4 miles E; both enter

the sea through a common estuary which extends miles S. It

has a least depth of 6.4m in its approach, but local knowledge

is essential for entering. 

7.12 New Moore Island (South Talpatty Island) (Purbasha Island

(21°37'N., 89°09'E.) is located on the W side of the main entrance channel to the Haribhanga River; the boundary between

India and Bangladesh lies in the vicinity.

Bangladesh—The Pusur River to Khulna, including the Mongla Anchorage

7.13 The Pusur River (21°46'N., 89°30'E.) is entered between Jefford Point and West Point, about 8 miles to the W.

Zulfiquar Channel extends N from the bar which lies between

these two points and joins the deep channel leading through the

estuary to Akram Point about 15 miles to the N. This point lies

at the junction of the Sipsah River and the Pusur River. Boar

Point lies on the E side of Zulfiquar Channel about 5 miles N

of Jefford Point. Hiran Point lies on the W side of the channel

about 6.5 miles NE of West Point. 

7.13 The Pusur River, between Akram Point and the anchorage

off Mungla, is fairly broad and navigable 24 hours. 

7.13 Vessels with a speed of less than 8.5 knots shall not be permitted to transit the river during springs. Under special circumstances, provided permission is granted, a tug will have to be

hired from the port to assist a vessel within the port limits. Requests for a tug must be made at least 24 hours in advance. For

reasons of safety, Mongla Anchorage is normally departed
184 Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 

Pub. 173

only on the flood. Deep-draft vessels depart on the first of the

flood. 

7.13 This coast must be approached with caution at all times and

soundings taken continuously. Swatch of No Ground is a good

aid for vessels coming from the W. The change in the water

from blue or blue-green to a yellow color normally indicates

the approach to shallow water. During the ebb at springs, yellow water is found as far seaward as Swatch of No Ground. 

7.13 In 1985, lesser than charted depth was reported 17.5 miles

SSW of Jefford Point. 

7.13 A dangerous wreck lies about 18 miles SSW of Jefford Point

and is marked on its SW side by a lighted buoy.

7.13 Winds—Weather.—Haze generally prevails in the approaches to the low coast, except at the change of the seasons.

Fog, off the coast and in the river, occasionally occurs during

the change of seasons, but it usually lifts during the forenoon.

In general, thick weather can be expected during the Southwest

Monsoon from May to September. 

7.13 At the anchorage off Mungla, vessels are required to have

steam ready for meeting any emergency during northwesters,

March through May, and during the Southwest Monsoon.

Northwesters are usually directional as their name implies;

they are storms accompanied by heavy rain and high winds,

with velocities up to 30 to 40 knots. Northwesters give about 2

or 3 hours notice, and vessels are usually advised in the day’s

weather forecast.

7.13 Tides—Currents.—Tides in the Pusur River are semi-diurnal. High water over the bar occurs about 1 hour before predicted HW for the river entrance. 

7.13 Tide gauges lie on the river banks at Hiran Point, abreast

Sundar Kota, about 9 miles above Akram Point, about 5 miles

below Mongla, and about 1.5 miles below Chalna Bazar. 

7.13 Tidal heights vary with the season, being lower in February

and March and higher in July through November.

7.13 At Mongla Fairway Lighted Buoy (21°27'N., 89°34'E.),

17.5 miles S of Jefford Point, the ebb sets about SSE and the

flood sets NNW. The velocity of the current is about 2 knots at

springs during the Northeast Monsoon. At the time of the

Southwest Monsoon, the ebb is stronger and the flood is weaker. 

7.13 In Zulfiquar Channel, the ebb flows at a velocity of about 3

knots at springs. The currents turn about 1 hour after high and

low water in the entrance of the Pusur River. Extensive rips and

eddies mark the edges of Sarwar Sand and Dubla Shoal.

7.13 At the anchorage off Mongla the ebb has a velocity of about

4 knots at springs. The currents turn about 4.5 hours after HW

and LW in the entrance. 

7.13 A report states the currents turn in Zulfiquar Channel about 2

hours and at the anchorage off Mongla about 3 hours, respectively, after HW and LW in the entrance. The velocity of the

ebb was reported to be 6 knots at springs at the anchorage off

Mongla. 

7.13 Depths—Limitations.—A bar, about 5 miles wide with a

least depth of 5.5m, lies in the approach to the Pusur River between 5 and 10 miles S of the entrance. Lighted Buoy B1 to

Lighted Buoy B10 mark both sides of the channel across the

bar. A dangerous wreck, marked by a buoy moored close S, lies

on the E side close S of the channel entrance.

7.13 Following pilot instructions, vessels drawing up to 7m may

cross the bar in all seasons. During Southwest Monsoon, 7.8m

draft may be permitted. The maximum permissible fresh water

draft for Chalna Port is published each day in advance by the

Chalna Port Authorities. Draft permitting, the bar can be

crossed anytime both by day and night.

7.13 When crossing the bar during the Southwest Monsoon, vessels should have not less than 1.2m of water under the keel and

not exceed a speed of 12 knots. During the Northeast Monsoon, a minimum clearance of 1m under the keel is considered

a safe margin for crossing the bar. 

7.13 The best time to cross the bar inbound is about 1 hour before

HW in the entrance. Outbound vessels should cross the bar

during the last 45 minutes of the flood. During the first stage of

the ebb, the river level drops very rapidly. 

7.13 The depths over the crossings inside the river range from 5.8

to 7m. Vessels with a fresh water draft of 7.3m and vessels with

drafts of 7.5 to 7.6m can enter the river during spring tides in

September through December, and proceed as far as the anchorage off Mongla, about 48 miles above Jefford Point. Vessels with a maximum draft of 4.9m can proceed to Khulna,

about 25 miles above Mongla Anchorage.

7.13 A dangerous wreck with exposed masts lies about 11 miles

SSW from Jefford Point; close W of Buoy B5. Another dangerous wreck lies approximately 6 miles NW of Fairway Buoy.

7.13 Numerous fishing boats and nets have been reported in the

vicinity of the river entrance. 

7.13 Sarwah Sand (21°42'N., 89°28'E.), awash at HW, lies on the

W side of Zulfiquar Channel with its N edge 4.5 miles S of Hiran Point. An unnamed sand, which dries in patches, lies about

midway between Sarwah Sand and Hiran Point. 

7.13 Dubla Shoal (21°46'N., 89°31'E.), with depths of less than

1.8m and patches which dry up to 0.9m, lies on the E side of

the channel between Jefford and Boar Points.

7.13 Pavanga Shoal (21°51'N., 89°30'E.), with depths of less

than 5.5m and a central drying area, lies on the W side of the

main fairway with its S end about 1.5 miles SW of Boar Point.

The S end of this shoal has been reported extending to the S.

Less water has been reported in the channel W of the N part of

Pavanga Shoal. 

7.13 The channels and depths within the Pusur River and its approaches are subject to frequent change. Depths of up to 2m

less than charted have been reported. Buoyage and other aids to

navigation are adjusted accordingly. Mariners should contact

the pilot station at Hiran Point on VHF channel 11 or 16 for detailed instructions prior to approaching Mongla Fairway Lighted Buoy. 

7.13 Aspect.—The terrain in the vicinity of the river is low and

has no distinctive landmarks which can be seen from the offing. Land is not normally sighted until the outer bar is crossed.

Jefford Point Light (21°44'N., 89°32'E.) is shown from a gray

metal-framed tower. Reports indicate that the entrance is a poor

radar target.

7.13 The radiobeacon antenna, about 1.5 miles NNW of Hiran

Point is reported to be a good landmark when approaching the

entrance. Some white houses stand near this radiobeacon.

7.13 Hiran Point Light is shown from a grey metal-framed tower. 

7.13 The entrance of the river, between the approach to the bar

and the central part of Zulfiquar Channel, is normally buoyed

and marked in places by light floats. Lighted Buoy Z2, Lighted

Buoy Z3, and Lighted Buoy Z4 mark the fairway through Zulfiquar Channel. After the annual winter survey of the bar, the
Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 185

Pub. 173

floating aids are moved to conform with the changes in the

channel; replacement of aids is not always made. 

7.13 During severe weather, the buoys are liable to be blown off

station; their charted positions cannot always be relied on. 

7.13 A lighted fairway buoy, equipped with a radar reflector, is

moored about 20 miles SSW of Jefford Point. Within the river

above the bar, the main fairway, as far N as Chalna Bazar, is

well-marked by navigational aids. Some of these are equipped

with radar reflectors. 

7.13 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 200

gross tons. Pilots board 2 miles SE of Hiran Point or, in bad

weather, off Akram Point (21°59.4'N., 89°31.9'E.). 

7.13 Regulations.—Vessels should arrive at Mongla Fairway

Lighted Buoy at least 3 hours prior to HW at Hiran Point to enter that day. 

7.13 The Port Director at Khulna is to be notified 24 hours in advance of vessel’s arrival as to the state of health on board and

vessel’s last port of call. Radio pratique may be granted. A report states that health officials board vessels about 7 miles below Mongla Anchorage (Chalna Anchorage). The port health

officer is stationed at Khulna. 

7.13 Vessels should send their ETA to Port Control, via their

agent, and to the pilots, on VHF channel 11, at least 24 hours

prior to arriving at Mongla Fairway Lighted Buoy. The ETA

message should include the following information: 

1. ETA at Mongla Fairway Lighted Buoy.

2. Fresh water draft.

3. Speed.

4. Length overall.

5. Gross tonnage.

6. Flag.

7. Fresh water requirements.

8. Type and amount of cargo.

9. Local agent.

7.13 On, or before, arriving at Mongla Fairway Lighted Buoy,

vessels should contact the pilot station on VHF channel 16 for

instructions on crossing the bar. 

7.13 Anchorage.—During the Northeast Monsoon, anchorage

can be taken outside the bar, in depths of 7.3 to 9.1m, good

holding ground, about 14.5 miles S of Jefford Point. Deeper

water exists about 0.8 mile N of this position. 

7.13 Unsheltered anchorage, with good holding ground, can be

taken, in a depth of 8.2m, about 1.5 miles NE of Sarwar Sand

Lighted Beacon.

7.13 A vessel should not anchor N of 21°47'N to avoid Pavanga

Shoal. 

7.13 Caution.—In 1976, strict security measures were in force in

the port area. A ban on bathing and swimming in the anchorage

was strictly enforced.

7.13 Mongla Port Rules are used primarily by the pilots and port

service organizations.

7.13 If repairs are to be made to a vessel at the anchorage and the

work requires the immobilization of the vessel, permission

should be obtained from the port authorities. 

7.13 The aids to navigation in the Pusur River are reported (2007)

to be unreliable; they may be missing, unlit, or out of position.

7.13 The 5m curve of Pavanga Shoal was reported to be extending

S to Buoy B18; a shoal patch, with a least depth of 5.3m, was

reported between Buoy B18 and Buoy B15.

7.13 Anchored vessels may be encountered in the vicinity of

Mongla Fairway Lighted Buoy, in the vicinity of Buoy B18,

and anywhere along the Pussur River from latitude 21°46.0'N

to Mongla Anchorage. 

7.14 Mongla Anchorage (Chalna Bazar) (22°28'N.,

89°35'E.) (World Port Index No. 49580), the lighterage port for

Chalna, consists of a river anchorage in the Pusur River, about

66 miles above Mongla Fairway Lighted Buoy and 9 miles

downstream from Mongla Bazar.

7.14 Depths—Limitations.—The anchorage area stretches along

the river for about 3 miles and has depths which range from 6.4

to 13.7m. Several swing moorings are available. One of the

vessel’s chains is made fast to a buoy with the assistance of a

mooring tug. Vessels can also anchor in midstream at nine additional anchorage berths. The holding ground is good. All cargo is discharged into lighters and transferred to Mongla.

Vessels up to 6.9m draft may use the anchorage, and of slightly

greater draft in the flood season.

7.14 To prevent dragging anchors when a strong ebb is running,

especially during the Southwest Monsoon spring tides, it is advisable not to moor more than two large or four average-size

lighters alongside a vessel. 

7.14 Hazardous cargo can be discharged about 5 to 6 miles below

the anchorage. 

7.14 Tugs are available for handling the lighters. 

7.14 Pilotage.—Pilotage is provided by Hiran Point. The vessel’s

ETA should be sent 24 hours in advance through the pilot station at Hiran Point. Further information regarding pilotage and

regulations can be found in paragraph 7.13. 

7.14 Signals.—Storm signals are displayed for the Bay of Bengal

from the signal tower on the E side of the river at Mongla. 

7.14 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. Port Control—

• VHF: VHF channels 6, 11, 12, 14, 16,

and 18

• Telephone: 880-41-761830

2. Harbormaster—

• Telephone: 880-468-75221

3. Port Authority—

• Telephone: 880-41-762331

880-468-75200

• Facsimile: 880-468-75224

• E-mail: mpa@bttb.net.bd

7.14 Old Chalna Anchorage, about 9 miles above Mongla Anchorage, extends about 1 mile below Mongla Bazar and has a

least depth of 3.8m. In 1974, the maximum draft allowed at

Mongla was 7.3m. This site was found to be unsuitable because moored vessels were frequently set adrift by the strong

freshets and eddies. Ocean-going vessels no longer use this anchorage.

7.14 Mongla Wharf, five berths with a total length of 920m and

an alongside dredged depth of 6.1m, stand on the E bank of the

Pusur River, about 2 miles N of the anchorage off Mongla. 

7.14 Regulations.—No vessel should attempt to cross the outer

 Mongla Home Page

http://www.monglaport.com.bd
186 Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 

Pub. 173

bar without a pilot on board. If the pilot is unable to board at

the fairway buoy, the vessel should wait until detailed instructions are received by radio. At this time navigational aids,

depths, and pilotage information should be verified. Mongla

pilots emphasize that all instructions received over VHF are repeated by the Master to ensure understanding. 

7.14 Directions.—From a position close E of Fairway Lighted

Buoy, steer N for about 3 miles to the buoyed channel entrance.

This buoyed channel should be followed, according to radioed

instructions, to the anchorage area about 1.3 miles SE Hiran

Point Light.

7.14 When entering or leaving, Dubia Shoal Lighted Buoy should

be passed to the W and the lighted buoys off Sarwar Sand and

Pavanga Shoal should be passed to the E. 

7.14 Vessels are required to display their call sign by International

Code Signal Flags when entering port and while at the anchorage off Hiran Point awaiting a pilot. 

7.15 The Haringhata River (21°50'N., 89°57'E.), one of

the principal outlets of the Ganges, is entered through an estuary about 7 miles wide at the entrance. Tiger Point lies on the

W side of the entrance, about 17.5 miles NE of Pusur Point. 

7.15 The river is navigable by ocean vessels as far inland as Morreigani, about 37 miles from the entrance, and throughout its

entire course by the largest native boats. Navigation of this river is said to be easier than that of any other river at the head of

the Bay of Bengal, as the river is free from tidal bores and midchannel dangers. 

7.15 The river should not be entered without local knowledge or a

pilot aboard. 

7.15 Tidal currents within the river are reported to exceed a velocity of 4 knots at springs.

7.15 Caution.—A bar, with a LW depth of about 4.6m, fronts the

mouth of the Haringhata.

7.16 Argo Flat (21°44'N., 89°57'E.), an extensive area of

shoal ground with depths of less than 5.5m, lies between Pusur

Point and Landfall Point, about 30 miles ENE. The flat extends

up to 19 miles offshore and dries in patches up to 8 miles S of

Tiger Point. Heavy breakers have been observed over these

patches. 

7.16 Morrelgani, a local rice exporting center, lies on the river

bank about 37 miles above the entrance. Local river steamers

frequent the port. 

7.16 Good holding ground and shelter is provided at the anchorage in the river abreast of the town. 

7.16 Rabnabad Channel Entrance (21°50'N., 90°16'E.) lies

about 8 miles ENE of Landfall Point. The narrow channel

within the entrance has a least charted depth of 4.3m in its N

part, which lies between the westernmost Rabnabad Island and

the mainland to the W. Above this island, the channel connects

with the Ganges River through the Kaja Riverl and the Tetulia

River. Little is known of these latter two rivers. 

7.16 An area between the S point of the E Rabnabad Island and a

position about 18 miles to the E, has not been surveyed. A similar unsurveyed area lies N of a line extending about 50 miles

ENE from the S point of the E Rabnabad Island to a position

about 6 miles E of the SE point of South Hatia Island

(22°15'N., 91°05'E.). 

7.16 Meghna Flats (21°30'N., 90°24'E.), an area of shoal ground

with depths of 5.5m and less, lie between the entrance of the

Haringhata River and the entrance of the Shahbazpur River,

about 60 miles to the NE. These flats and shoals extend up to

45 miles S of the mouths of the Meghna River. 

7.16 D’Apres Shoal (22°00'N., 91°09'E.), a drying sand bank

with a 2.4m depth, lies on the E side of the entrance of the

Shahbazpur River, about 14 miles S of the SE point of South

Hatia Island. 

7.17 Sandwip Island (22°28'N., 91°29'E.), the furthest E,

is one of the largest of the numerous islands which lie between

the entrances of the Meghna River. 

7.17 Several shoal spurs, with depths of 5.5m and less, extend up

to 22 miles S from South Hatia Island and extend irregularly

NE to a position about 15 miles S of Sandwip Island. In 1979,

less water than charted was reported 35 miles S of South Hatia

Island. Two detached shoals, with depths of 2.4 and 5.5m, lie in

the entrance of the narrow channel on the W side of Sandwip

Island, about 6.5 and 7.5 miles S of the SW point of that island. 

7.17 Tides—Currents.—The velocity of the tidal current in the

vicinity of D’Apres Shoal is about 4 knots. 

7.17 During the first 30 minutes of the flood, there is always a

swell in depths of 9.1m and less. 

7.17 About 40 miles SW of D’Apres Shoal the tidal current continues to run N and NE for 1 hour after HW and SSW and SW

for 1.5 hours after LW. During spring tides the tidal currents set

N and S and at neaps they gradually turn in a clockwise direction. Tidal currents setting more to the W than the E are experienced during good weather. The estimated velocity of the ebb

current at springs is from 4 to 6 knots and at neaps about 2.5

knots. 

7.17 Depths—Limitations.—The Meghna River discharges the

main volume of the waters of the Ganges River and the Brahmaputra River through its four principal mouths (the Tetulia

River, the Shahbazpur River, the Hatia River, and Sandwip

Channel). The Brahmaputraa River joins the Ganges River at

Goalunda; the combined waters enter the Meghna River at

Chandpur. In 1979, the banks S of the entrances to these two

rivers were extending S and less water was reported. 

7.17 The Hatia River, the only navigable passage of the Meghna

River, passes between Sandwip Island on the E and the Hatia

Islands group to the W. Sandwip Channel, between Sandwip

Island and the mainland coast to the E, is closed by sandbanks

N of the N end of Sandwip Island.

7.17 Vessels, with a draft of 3m, can proceed upriver as far as

Narayanganj.

7.17 In 1964, Hatia Channel, the navigable entrance of the Meghna River, had its entrance about 9 miles SE of the S extremity

of Sandwip Island. The buoyed channel leading from the entrance extends NW and W to a position midway between South

Hatia Island and North Hatia Island. 

7.17 Depths in Hatia Channel and over the adjoining shoals are

subject to rapid changes, and the buoys may be moved to conform to these changes. Extreme caution is advised.

7.17 Directions cannot be given because of the rapid changes in

the depths and no one without local knowledge or a pilot

aboard should attempt to enter. Pilots are available at Chittagong. 

7.17 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken off the W side of

Sandwip Island, abreast of the village of Sandwip or in Sand-
Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 187

Pub. 173

wip Channel E of that island. A shallow flat extends about 6

miles S of the island. Authority Lghted Buoy is moored about

9.5 miles SE of Sandwip and 2.5 miles SSW of a dangerous

wreck. The lighted buoys marking the S approaches to Hatia

Channel are moved as the channel changes. 

7.17 Caution.—Sandwip and the Hatia Islands are particularly

subject to flooding by storm waves. 

7.17 A stranded wreck lies approximately 7 miles off the mainland coast at the S end of Sandwip Channel. 

7.17 A dangerous wreck, marked by a lighted buoy, is situated 10

miles SE of the S end of Sandwip Island. 

7.17 It has been reported that the Meghan River can be dangerous

for navigation between February and November. A tidal bore

affects the lower parts of the river, especially around the equinoxes. Shifting banks and snags also present a hazard. Vessels

should always use local knowledge.

7.17 Chandpur (23°09'N., 90°33'E.), a small river port frequented by local steamers, lies at the junction of the Meghna River

and Chandpur Khal. The port has little commercial value.

7.17 Narayanganj (23°37'N., 90°32'E.), a small river port and

transshipment point, lies about 8 miles SE of Dacca on the left

bank of the Lakhya River near its junction with the Meghna

River. Local steamers frequent the port. 

Bangladesh—The Chittagong Coast to Elephant

Point

7.18 The coast of the Chittagong District extends S from

the Feni River for about 150 miles to the Naf River, the boundary between Bangladesh and Burma, which lies about 5 miles

NE of St. Martins Island. The Feni River empties into Sandwip

Channel about 8 miles N of the N extremity of Sandwip Island.

Between the entrance of the Karnaphuli River and Cox’s Bazar,

the coast is broken by Kutubdia Island and Maiskhal Island.

South of Cox’s Bazar to Elephant Point, low hills rise close inland and cliffs mark the coastline. Chains of mountain ranges

rise parallel with the Chittagong Coast at varying distances inland.

7.18 Winds—Weather.—During the Northeast Monsoon, from

October to March, small fog banks or thick mists occur on the

Chittagong Coast on an average of 2.5 days a month. These

weather conditions cause the lights in some instances to assume a deep red color and in other instances to completely obscure them. 

7.18 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in this part of the Bay

of Bengal set N and S with the trend of the coast; the velocity

at spring tides ranges from 4 to 6 knots. In hazy weather, vessels have been swept past the entrance of the Karnaphuli River

by the flood or N current and set upon the sands S and SW of

Sandwip Island, without sighting Kutubdia Island Light by

night or the land by day. 

7.18 Depths—Limitations.—Off the Chittagong coast the depths

decrease gradually from the 36.6m curve, about 22 miles W of

Elephant Point (21°11'N., 92°03'E.), to the 11m curve about

15 miles SSW of the entrance of the Karnaphuli River. With

but few exceptions, all of the known dangers which lie off this

section of coast are contained within the 11m curve.

7.19 Dolphin Shoal (21°51'N., 91°46'E.), with a least

depth of 6.4m, lies between 3.3 and 5 miles WSW of Kutubdia Light (21°52'N., 91°51'E.). A shoal, with a least depth of

8.2m, lies about 7 miles WSW of the lighthouse. 

7.19 North Patches (21°43'N., 91°44'E.), a group of hard, sand

shoals with depths of 4.1 to 5.5m, extend about 8 miles S from

a position about 7.5 miles SW of Kutubdia Light. Less water

than charted may exist over these shoals.

7.19 A narrow shoal bank, about 4.5 miles long with a least depth

of 9.4m, lies centered about 23.8 miles SSW of Kutubdia

Light. 

7.19 South Patches (21°26'N., 91°40'E.), a narrow shoal bank

with a least depth of 9.1m, lies centered about 28 miles SSW of

Kutubdia Light. 

7.19 Reju Shoal (21°17'N., 91°59'E.), small in extent with a least

depth of 4.9m, lies about 7 miles NNW of Elephant Point. 

7.19 In 1977, the shoal was reported to be 0.5 mile NW of its

charted position.

7.19 A detached 14.6m patch lies about 25.8 miles NW, and a

similar detached patch lies 27.5 miles WNW of Elephant Point. 

7.19 Kohinur Shoal (21°07'N., 91°38'E.), with a least depth of

21.9m, was reported to exist about 23.5 miles W of Elephant

Point. 

7.19 Caution.—The greatest care is necessary in making the entrance of the Karnaphuli River. Whatever the state of the

weather or the time of the year, but especially during the

Southwest Monsoon from April to September, mariners should

exercise extreme caution, being cognizant of the depths and

dangers. 

7.19 Even with favorable weather and when a vessel’s position is

known, strict attention to the depth as well as to the course and

distance made good over the ground is necessary. 

7.19 If the position is doubtful and there is a strong flood or N

current, it is well to anchor to avoid being set on the shoals lying off Sandwip Island and the entrance of the Meghna River.

These shoals may lie farther S than indicated on the chart.

7.19 When approaching from the SW and uncertain of a vessel’s

position, a landfall can be made in the vicinity of the conspicuous white cliffs about 4 miles SSE of Cox’s Bazar. 

7.19 Vessels should pass outside of South Patches, North Patches,

and Dolphin Shoal. Soundings should be taken frequently and

allowances made for tidal currents. 

7.19 Sitakund Mountain (22°38'N., 91°41'E.) rises to an elevation of 352m, about 20 miles NNW of Chittagong. A ridge of

hills extends SSE from this mountain and roughly parallels the

coast for about 18 miles. Nagarkha, 88m high, lies about 17

miles SSE of Sitakund Mountain. Fakir Hill, 73m high, lies

about 1 mile farther S at the S end of the ridge close N of Chittagong. A black pillar, 6.1m high, lies atop this hill. 

7.19 From a position along the coast E of the N part of Sandwip

Island, a white sandy beach borders the shore for about 27

miles SSE to the mouth of the Karnaphuli River. 

Bangladesh—Approach to the Karnaphuli River

7.20 The entrance of the Karnaphuli River lies between

Patenga Point (22°13'N., 91°48'E.) and Norman’s Point, about

2 miles SSE. 

7.20 Tides—Currents.—About 0.5 mile W of the outer bar at the

entrance of the Karnaphuli River, the flood current sets NNW

and the ebb current sets SSE. The tidal current turns about 1.5

hours after HW and LW near Juldia, and 1.3 hours after HW
188 Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 

Pub. 173

and LW at Chittagong. The ebb current is very strong during

the rainy season from April to September. Under ordinary conditions, the velocity of the tidal current is about 2 knots at neaps and 3 to 4 knots at springs. 

7.20 The mean range of the tide at Chittagong is 2.9m; the spring

range is 3.6m. 

7.20 Depths—Limitations.—On the W side of the approach to

the entrance of the Karnaphuli River from the SSW, depths of

less than 9.1m lie SE of Meghna Flats and S of Sandwip Island. 

7.20 Dangers on the E side of the approach consists of South

Patches, North Patches, Dolphin Shoal, and the 8.2m shoal, all

of which have been previously described in paragraph 7.19. 

7.20 In 1984, the stranded wreck of a coastal sailing vessel, with

masts visible, was reported to be lying 5 miles offshore, 7.5

miles SSW of Patenga Point.

7.20 Aspect.—Patenga Point (22°13'N., 91°48'E.), on the N side

of the entrance of the Karnaphuli River, is low, flat, and

marked by a few trees. A drying sandy mud flat extends about

0.5 mile SW from the point. Range lights in line bearing 037°,

lie approximately 0.5 mile NE of Patenga Point, but are reportedly difficult to distinguish. A dangerous wreck lies close NW

of the range line 2.5 miles SW of Patenga Point. A stranded

wreck, marked by a light, lies about 10.5 miles WSW of Patenga Point. 

7.20 Norman’s Point (22°12'N., 91°49'E.), a low extremity of the

coast, lies on the S side of the entrance of the Karnaphuli. Extensive mud flats lie between this point and the entrance of the

river. The outer part of these flats dries. Middle Island lies in

the center of these flats, about 0.8 mile NNE of Norman’s

Point. The greater part of the island is awash at HWS, during

the Southwest Monsoon.

7.20 Norman’s Point Light shows from a red and white framework tower, 1.3 miles S of Norman’s Point; a racon is located

at the light. A disused light lies 0.2 mile WSW of the light. 

7.20 Four Tree Hill, 38m high and topped by trees, lies 2.5 miles

ENE of Norman’s Point. From a distance, the hill appears to

form the S end of a tableland of which Juldia Hill, about 1.5

miles NNW of Four Tree Hill, is a part. A flagstaff and some

radio towers lie on Juldia Hill. 

7.20 Coombs Pillar (22°15'N., 91°51'E.), a white mark 9.1m

high, stands on the highest part of the ridge, about 0.8 mile N

of Juldia Hill. 

7.20 A conspicuous flare stands 2.3 miles N of Patenga Point. 

7.20 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all merchant vessels.

The river entrance is constantly changing and no vessel should

attempt to enter without a pilot on board. The following information should be sent to Chittagong 72 hours and confirmed

24 hours in advance of arrival:

1. Vessel’s ETA at Kutubdia and Chittagong outer anchorage.

2. Date and hour of departure last port of call.

3. Nature and quantity of cargo to be discharged.

4. Maximum fresh water draft on arrival. The arrival

draft should be forwarded in writing if it is expected to be

within 0.2m of the maximum permissible draft.

7.20 The pilot launch is stationed off Juldia and is equipped with

radar and VHF radiotelephone.

7.20 Vessels should arrive at the pilot station at least 3 hours before the daylight HW. Priority vessels should arrive at least 6

hours prior to daylight HW. 

7.20 Vessels with a speed of under 7 knots will not normally be

handled during spring tides. 

7.20 Vessels are usually boarded about 2 miles SW of the outer

bar lighted buoy. The harbormaster boards in the river, about

0.5 mile below the SW extremity of the railway jetties and take

vessels to their assigned berth.

7.20 Pilots are available only from sunrise to sunset. 

7.20 Signals.—A signal station lies on Juldia Hill and is equipped

with radiotelephones and facilities for signaling by the International Code of Signals, on a 24-hour basis. 

7.20 Storm signals are displayed on Juldia Hill and at Norman’s

Point; the Indian General System is used. Further information

on these storm signals may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian

Ocean under “India—Signals.”

7.20 Weather signals will be displayed from the Port Commissioner’s Office for inland vessels and small craft. 

7.20 All vessels entering or leaving port should display their signal letters.

7.20 Anchorage.—Three anchorage areas, lettered A through C,

lie off the entrance of the Karnaphuli River. The least charted

depth in each anchorage area is, as follows: 

1. Anchorage A—9.5m.

2. Anchorage B—8.4m.

3. Anchorage C—8.5m.

7.20 Anchorage A is for vessels with a draft of over 9.1m. Anchorage B is for vessels entering within 24 hours. Anchorage C

is for lightering and other vessels not scheduled to enter for 24

hours. The limits of these three areas, together with the prohibited anchorage area, can best be seen on the chart. An obstruction lies on the NW limit of Anchorage C. 

7.20 North of a bearing of 055° on Patenga Lighted Beacon, the

holding ground is soft mud and vessels are liable to drag. The

mud is firmer farther S of this bearing, but attention should be

given to the strong ebb which is experienced here especially

during the Southwest Monsoon. A vessel using this anchorage

should note the way it swings at the change of the tide, because

it is liable to swing in one direction only. Vessels anchor should

be sighted at regular intervals to avoid fouling. 

7.20 A vessel reported anchoring in a depth of 10.5m with Norman’s Point Light bearing 109°, distant 2 miles, good holding

ground. During a stay of 11 days at this anchorage, the maximum current experienced was 5 knots. 

7.20 During spring tides, a vessel reported good holding ground

with Patenga Lighted Beacon bearing 070° and Norman’s

Point Light bearing 120°. 

7.20 An abandoned submarine pipeline extends 1.5 miles WSW

from a position about 2.5 miles NW of Patenga Point. Anchoring is prohibited in this vicinity. 

7.20 Dangerous wrecks lie up to 7 miles NW of Patenga Point and

are best seen on the chart; several of these wrecks are located

in Anchorage A. 

7.20 Caution.—Small fishing craft without lights, and fish nets

marked by small black and white stakes, were reported to be a

hazard to vessels approaching the river entrance.

7.20 The channels and depths in the Karnaphuli River and its approaches are subject to frequent change. Aids to navigation are

adjusted accordingly. Consult the harbormaster at Chittagong

for the latest information.

7.20 It has been reported (2006) that numerous charted and un-
Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 189

Pub. 173

charted wrecks lie in the anchorage areas as well as the approaches to Chittagong. In addition, it has been reported (2002)

that two vessels with drafts of 10.5m have grounded while in

Anchorage A. Mariners are advised to contact local port authorities for current information on depths and wrecks prior to

arrival.

Chittagong (22°19'N., 91°49'E.)

World Port Index No. 49590

7.21 Chittagong, one of the leading ports in Bangladesh,

lies on the W bank of the Karnaphuli River, about 10 miles

above its entrance. Ample, modern berthing facilities are provided for all classes of vessels capable of crossing the river

bars.

Chittagong is a first port of entry. 

7.21 Winds—Weather.—Chittagong is in the track of cyclones

and as a result, the port has been damaged on numerous occasions. 

7.21 A hot sultry day followed by still air conditions in the

evening usually results in thunderstorms. The peculiarity of

these storms is that they approach from the N and W in the

form of a line squall accompanied by intense lightning, thunder, rain and/or cyclonic rotation winds which may reach a velocity of upwards of 50 knots. When signs of such a storm

exist, masters must exercise great caution. Vessels at fixed

moorings and pontoon jetties must exercise extreme caution

when a storm is blowing.

7.21 In general, rainfall is heavy during the Southwest Monsoon;

dense fogs occasionally occur. Early morning fogs, clearing by

mid-morning, also occur from December through February and

sometimes in March. The fine weather period is from the middle of October to March. 

7.21 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents set across the outer

part of the bar with the flood setting NNW and the ebb to the

SSE. 

7.21 During the Southwest Monsoon season, in the months of

June to September and sometimes in October, strong freshets

are experienced at which time there may be no flood current

for several days. During freshets the velocity of the current increases to 6 to 8 knots. Notices regarding them are circulated

well in advance by the local port authorities.

7.21 During the Southwest Monsoon, the spring range of the tide

is about 6.1m; the neap range is about 2.7m. During the winter

the spring range is 2.7 to 4m and the neap range is 1.5 to 2.4m. 

7.21 Tide gauges, marked in 3-inch divisions, lie on the sides of

the river at various locations to assist in determining the level

of the tides. 

7.21 Depths—Limitations.—Outer Bar lies at the seaward end

of the entrance range and has a least depth of about 4.6m. The

least charted depths over the Inner Bar and Gupta Crossing are

5.5 and 4.9m, respectively. Depths over the bars and in the river

are subject to constant change. 

7.21 The maximum safe fresh water drafts in the Karnaphuli River may range from 5.5 to 8.5m, depending on the time of the

year and local conditions. In general, the greatest depths are

available in the summer and the least in the winter. 

7.21 A monthly forecast of drafts is published by the port authorities. Daily maximum anticipated safe drafts in the Karnafulli

River for the months can alter with prevailing winds and unusual siltation. Local authorities should be consulted to affirm

maximum permissible draft for the day, generally referred to as

fresh water draft. 

7.21 Ship movements generally commence about 4 to 5 hours before the day’s HW. Outbound ships of light draft sail on the

first daylight flood; ships with the maximum draft for a particular day sail about 2 hours before daylight HW.

7.21 Vessels entering or leaving port must have full steam on

main engine and deck, and both anchors with full lengths of

chain must be available for use at all times. 

7.21 A confused and dangerous sea breaks on the outer bar during

strong SW winds. 

Chittagong Port Authority

http://www.cpa.gov.bd

Port of Chittagong
190 Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 

Pub. 173

7.21 To determine the draft for entering or leaving port, the depth

of 3.6m over the inner bar is added to the height of water in the

tide tables, allowing for an error of 30.5 to 35.6cm, depending

on the phase of the moon and season. 

7.21 A deep-draft vessel, intending to discharge cargo, may gain a

7.6 to 15.2cm draft advantage by entering close to time of HW

and berth, whenever practicable, on the ebb current. 

7.21 A 1965 report states the water salinity at the outer anchorages changes from almost salt water to practically fresh water,

depending on the tide. This causes corresponding differences

in vessels’ drafts and is important in that maximum drafts are

based on fresh water. Pilots check drafts of deeply-loaded vessels. It was further reported that due to siltation, the channel for

crossing the bar is a sharp zigzag and the usual extra draft allowances, such as 3 inches for vessels of less than 152.4m in

length and a speed of over 14 knots, are not granted. 

7.21 The port has 17 jetties, including two pontoon jetties. Vessels

having a length of 167 to 186m, with the day’s permissible

draft, but not exceeding 8.5m, berth at Jetty No. 1 to Jetty No.

13. Vessels having a length of 164m, with a maximum draft of

8.5m, are berthed at Jetty No. 14 and Jetty No. 15. Vessels up

to 164m in length, drawing the day’s permissible draft, are berthed at Jetty No. 16 and Jetty No. 17. 

7.21 There are nine river mooring berths, of which two have pontoons for supporting pipelines. The largest berths can accommodate vessels of up to 186m in length.

7.21 Jamuna Oil Jetty is situated 0.5 mile upriver of Gupta Khal

No. 9. The draft limits at the jetty vary seasonally with tide

from 7.9 to 9.4m. 

7.21 Two container berths, with total length of 450m and a depth

of 10m alongside, are situated on the W bank of the river, 1.5

miles above Jamuna Oil Jetty. 

7.21 A fitting-out quay, 342m long, and a dry dock, which can accommodate vessels up to 16,500 dwt, stand on the W bank, 1.8

miles WNW of Gupta Point. 

7.21 An offshore oil terminal is situated about 4.8 miles NW of

Norman’s Point. The deepest draft that can be accommodated

is 10.4m. A special pilot is required to place the tanker alongside the terminal buoy. 

7.21 Two ocean-going tugs and a sufficient number of barges are

available for handling cargo at the anchorages off the river entrance. 

7.21 Explosives are handled at the outer anchorage. Safety explosives can be handled alongside the jetties.

7.21 A vessel entering on the flood normally turns off the assigned berth using the starboard anchor; after turning, the anchor is weighed and the vessel proceeds to either a berth or

mooring buoy using the port anchor. 

7.21 Aspect.—The entrance of the river lies between a training

wall on the W side, which retains a sand and mud flat extending about 0.5 mile SW from Patenga Point, and a stone apron

on the side, which is the SW extension of Juldia Training Wall.

Mud flats and Middle Island lie SE of the stone apron and Juldia Training Wall. The stone apron and training walls at the entrance of the river have been reported to be submerged at HW. 

7.21 The alignment of the fairways, with the best water over the

bars and within the river, are denoted by lighted range beacons.

The lighted beacons, indicating the fairway in the entrance and

over the outer bar, are in line bearing 037°04'. 

7.21 Lighted and unlighted buoys mark the channel limits and

some of the sunken wrecks in the river. The charted range beacons and buoys in the river are moved as necessary to conform

to depth changes in the channel.

7.21 The outer bar fronts the entrance of the river about 1.5 miles

SW of Patenga Lighted Beacon. The inner bar lies about 2.5

miles within the entrance and W of Juldia Hill. Gupta Bar is

about 5 miles above the river’s entrance. 

7.21 About 1 mile NNW of Norman’s Point, the E bank of the river curves NE for a distance of 2.5 miles to a position NW of

Juldia Hill. Large mud flats lie along this part of the bank and

embankments have been constructed to prevent inundation.

Several small villages are situated on this section of the bank.

About 2.3 miles farther N, the E bank becomes low and

swampy and is cultivated.

7.21 Mud islands (chars), the largest of which are Gupta Island

and Lukia Island, are part of this bank and low-lying land to

the E. Back Channel Khal and a passage for boats at half tide

separate Gupta Island and Lukia Island, respectively, from the

mainland to the E. 

7.21 The W bank of the Karnaphuli trends NE from Patenga Point

for about 3 miles to Gupta Point (22°17'N., 91°50'E.). Active

Spit, the greater part of which is enclosed by a training wall,

lies between the W bank and the training wall, E through S of

Gupta Point. Numerous creeks (khals) intersect the W bank of

the river for a distance of about 4 miles between Gupta Point

and the jetties at Chittagong. 

7.21 Two high tension power line pylons, 105m high with obstruction lights, lie one on each side of the Karnaphuli River, 2

miles SW of Sadarghat. The overhead clearance under the

power line is 52m. 

7.21 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels of 200

gross tons and over. Pilotage is available during daylight hours

only. Contact the pilots on VHF channel 12 or 16.

7.21 Vessels should arrive at the Pilot Boarding Ground, 1 mile

SW of Outer Bar Lighted Buoy, at least 3 hours before daylight

high water. 

7.21 Regulations.—Vessels are advised to report any incidents of

piracy and armed robbery to the Port Radio Control on VHF

channel 12.

7.21 Vessels should report their ETA on VHF channel 16 when 12

miles from the port. 

7.21 Vessels due to enter the port in the upcoming 24-hour period

should anchor in the appropriate anchorage and keep a listening watch on VHF beginning at least 3 hours before the pilot

boarding time. 

7.21 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. Call sign: Port Radio Control

2. VHF: VHF channels 12 and 16

3. Radiotelephone: 2182 kHz

4. Telephone: 880-31-812200

880-31-812234 (switchboard)

5. Facsimile: 880-31-710593

6. E-mail: info@cpa.gov.bd

7.21 Signals.—Tidal signals are displayed from a tidal semaphore

station on Juldia Hill. The signals indicate, by day, the height

of water above tidal datum. The diagram (See Tidal Semaphore

Signals for Calcutta in paragraph 7.6) shows the position of the

semaphore arms and their meanings, as viewed from a vessel

approaching from seaward. 
Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 191

Pub. 173

7.21 A black ball is displayed on top of the semaphore at HW, and

dropped when the tide has fallen 3 inches below HW level. 

7.21 Vessels approaching the outer bar, in order to be certain the

rise of tide as indicated by the semaphore, will not display a

black ball at the foremast head. 

7.21 Tidal lights for night pilotage are displayed from two framework masts, each 49m high. Three lights, vertically displayed,

5.5m apart and displayed from each mast, indicate the rise of

the tide in feet and inches. These lights are visible both from

the jetties and outside the outer bar. 

7.21 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor temporarily in certain

reaches of the river on their way to or from Chittagong. However, there is only swinging room at or near HW, and then only

with the assistance of the engines. Vessels cannot remain at anchor at low water.

7.21 There are three main anchorage areas outside the harbor. For

further information, see paragraph 7.20. 

7.21 Vessels with plague or other infectious diseases on board

must anchor off Coombs Pillar until inspected by the Health

Officer. 

7.21 Caution.—Piracy remains a concern at Chittagong. The port

was reported to have the second highest number of piracy incidents in 2001. Armed attacks from small boats can occur in

Chittagong Anchorage or in the harbor. In addition, vessels

have reported a high incidence of theft of zinc anodes from

vessel hulls and rudders. Mariners are advised to keep a sharp

lookout. Vessels are advised to report any piracy incidents immediately to Port Radio Control on VHF channel 12. 

7.21 Sangu Gas Platform (22°01'N., 91°31'E.) is lighted and is

situated about 23 miles SW of Chittagong. A dangerous gas

well head is situated about 2.5 miles NW of the platform.

7.21 A high pressure gas line extends from the platform to the

shore about 2 miles N of Chittagong, as best seen on the chart.

Bangladesh—Norman’s Point to Elephant Point

7.22 The Chittagong Coast from the entrance of the Karnaphuli River extends about 66 miles S and SSE to Elephant

Point. A group of deltaic islands, separated by shallow channels, lie about midway between the river and the point. 

7.22 Between Norman’s Point and the N point of the Sangu River,

about 5.5 miles SSE, the low coast is wooded and marked in

places by small sand hills. 

7.22 The N entrance point of the river is marked by low sand hills

and a clump of trees. The river is entered about 3 miles S of

this point, but is available only to large native boats. 

7.22 South of the mouth of the Sangu River the coast is low,

wooded, and marked by low sand hills. About 7 miles S of the

Sangu River, the coast recedes at Cuckold Point. A drying mud

flat extends up to 2 miles offshore along this section of coast. 

7.22 Cuckold Point has been reported to be a good radar target up

to 24 miles. 

7.22 Kutudbia Island (21°51'N., 91°52'E.), which lies with its N

end about 1 mile SW of Cuckold Point, is low, flat, covered

with trees, and is about 12 miles long. The island is visible for

about 8 miles. 

7.22 Kutubdia Island has been reported to be a good radar target

up to 16 miles. 

7.22 Kutudbia Island Light has been reported to have a radiobeacon and a racon.

7.22 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 12.8m,

with Kutubdia Island Light bearing 068°, distant 1 mile. The

anchorage is fairly well protected, but the currents are strong.

Approach to this anchorage should be made from N of Dolphin

Shoal.

7.22 A channel, about 30 miles long in a N-S direction, lies between Kutubdia Island, Maiskhal Island, and Sonadia Island on

the E and Dolphin Shoal, North Patches, and South Patches on

the W. Depths in the channel range from 10 to 31.1m. Tidal

currents set through this channel at a high velocity and it

should not be attempted without local knowledge. 

7.22 Maiskhal Island (21°37'N., 91°56'E.) lies SE of Kutubdia

Island, Matarbari Island lies in between them. 

7.23 Kutubdia Channel (21°44'N., 91°52'E.), a narrow

passage with depths of 4.3 to 11m, lies between Kutubdia Island and the mainland. Channel depths are subject to rapid

changes and cannot be relied on. 

7.23 Maiskhal Island is marked by a range of hills about 91.4m

high near its central part. Garamchari Hill is not distinctive as

the range is of uniform height. Low hills lie along most of the

E side of the island, whereas, the other sides are low. Maiskhal

Bluff, 61m high and conspicuous, lies near the SE extremity of

the island. A marshy flat extends up to 3 miles offshore S of the

Matarbari Channel entrance.

7.23 Sonadia Island (21°29'N., 91°53'E.), about 2 miles SSW of

Maiskhal Island, is marked by low white sand hills. A flat,

which dries in places, extends about 3 miles from the island.

With a flood current the sea breaks heavily over this flat. 

7.23 Lattadia Island (21°35'N., 91°51'E.), which dries 1.5m, lies

about in the middle of the marshy flat which fronts the W side

of Maiskhal Island.

Sangu Gas Platform
192 Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 

Pub. 173

7.23 Maiskhal Channel (21°30'N., 91°59'E.), which lies between

the E side of Maiskhal Island and the mainland, is narrow with

rapidly changing depths. This channel should not be attempted. 

7.23 Rupadia Sands (21°27'N., 91°57'E.), bare in places with

shallow depths elsewhere, extend up to 2.3 miles S of the SE

end of Sonadia Island. These sands lie on the W side of the entrance of Maiskhal Channel. 

7.24 Cox’s Bazar (21°27'N., 91°58'E.), which consists of a

small town and export center, lies about 4 miles S of the SE extremity of Maiskhal Island. The town lies on a low range of

sand hills on the mainland and on the SW bank of the Baghkhali River. This river discharges into Maiskhal Channel about

1.5 miles N of the town. Cox’s Bluff, about 0.5 mile S of the

town, rises steeply to an elevation of 48m. Twin casuarina

trees, both conspicuous, lie almost 0.5 mile NE of Cox’s Bluff.

Cox’s Bazar Light is shown from a gray, metal framework tower on a white concrete building on Cox’s Bluff; the light structure is topped by a conspicuous orange dome, and is fitted with

a radiobeacon and racon. 

7.24 A spit, which dries in patches, extends about 2.8 miles W

and 3.5 miles WNW from Cox’s Bluff. The sea breaks heavily

over this spit, especially during the flood tide. 

7.24 The principal channel leading into Maiskhal Channel lies between the spits extending from Cox’s Bluff and S from Sonadia

Island over a shifting bar about 3 miles W of Cox’s Bluff. In

1960, there was a least depth of 2.1m in this channel. 

7.24 Another channel crosses the spit extending S from Sonadia

Island, but the depths are shallow.

7.24 There are usually heavy rollers off the entrances of both

channels and the bars break occasionally. Depths in these channels are subject to rapid changes. 

7.24 A shoal, composed of sand and mud with depths of less than

1.8m and which dries in places, lies on the NW side of the fairway of Maiskhal Channel about 0.5 mile S of Hamidardia Island (21°30'N., 91°57'E.).

7.24 The Baghkhali River, which enters Maiskhal Channel about

1.5 miles S of the E end of Hamidardia Island, is narrow and

shallow and dries in places. 

7.24 Deep-draft vessels can anchor S of the entrance of the main

channel, in a depth of 9.1m, sand and mud, with Cox’s Bluff

bearing 055°, distant 3 miles. Light-draft vessels can anchor, in

a depth of about 5.5m, sand and mud, with Cox’s Bluff bearing

043°, distant about 2.3 miles. Caution is necessary as a submarine cable lies close SSE of the anchorages. 

7.24 Vessels capable of crossing the bar can anchor off the mouth

of the Baghkhali River in Maiskhal Channel, in depths of 9.1 to

18.3m, mud. 

7.24 Reliable pilots are not available and the bar and channel

should be examined and buoyed before entering, because they

are subject to change during the monsoon. The best time to enter is at about half flood when the breakers will mark the edges

of the shoals. 

7.24 The coast between Cox’s Bazar and Elephant Point, about

15.5 miles SSE of Cox’s Bluff, is backed by low hills. 

7.24 Red cliffs, about 61m high, line the coast from 3.5 to 6.5

miles SSE of Cox’s Bluff. South Cliff, the S cliff, is 82m high.

From offshore these cliffs appear white when the sun is shining

on them, and on a clear day they may be visible up to 20 miles.

These cliffs are a good landmark for vessels approaching Chittagong from the S. 

7.24 Waila Taung (Sugarloaf Hill) rises to a height of 413m about

11 miles ENE of Elephant Point.

Burma—Elephant Point to Thames Point

7.25 Cape Negrais lies about 333 miles SSE of Elephant

Point. The intervening coast is irregular and broken by the

many rivers which discharge their waters into the E side of the

Bay of Bengal. Hills and mountain ranges back the coast at

varying distances inland, generally lying parallel to the coast in

a N-S direction. Mayu and Arakan Yoma are the principal

mountain ranges. Ramree Island and Mun Aung Island, the

largest islands along this section of coast, lie about midway between Elephant Point and Cape Negrais. Combermere Bay and

Hunters Bay indent the coast N of Ramree Island. Akyab is the

most important port, although Kyaukpyu is of some importance. 

7.25 Winds—Weather.—The weather and climate of Burma is

primarily influenced and determined by the Northeast Monsoon and the Southwest Monsoon and the short transitional periods between them. The year is divided into four seasons, referred to as the Northeast Monsoon (winter monsoon, cool or

dry season), the spring transitional or hot season, the Southwest Monsoon (summer monsoon, wet or rainy season), and

the autumn transitional season. 

7.25 The Northeast Monsoon, December through March, is

marked by fine weather with very little rainfall. 

7.25 The hot season, April and May, is an interim period of weak

and variable winds prior to the Southwest Monsoon. Increases

in rainfall in April and May do not equal the amounts of rainfall during June through August; this results in greater heating

of the air masses.

7.25 The Southwest Monsoon, June through September, is characterized by cloudiness, overcast skies, light rain almost daily,

interspersed with rain squalls or thunderstorms accompanied

by torrential downpours. Restricted visibility, high humidity,

and general adverse weather conditions are associated with the

Southwest Monsoon.

7.25 The autumn transitional season, a period of weak and variable winds with land and sea breezes prevailing, occurs in early

October after the withdrawal of the Southwest Monsoon and

before the cooler, drier weather of the Northeast Monsoon is

established in late November. 

7.25 Tropical storms with destructive winds occasionally affect

the coastal regions N of 15°00'N. 

7.25 Tropical cyclones, which develop in the Bay of Bengal, occur most frequently during the transitional season. The Arakan

Coast of Burma is more likely to be struck by a cyclone during

the autumn transitional season than at any other time, but rarely

is the Gulf of Martaban affected. During the hot season some

tropical cyclones cross the coast of the Gulf of Martaban. 

7.25 Tides—Currents.—The monsoon winds affect and influence the surface currents. To a great extent the currents are

variable and at the height of each monsoon, currents may

sometimes be met setting in the opposite to the monsoon current, or in general in any direction. The currents are still more

variable during the transition periods of the monsoons. The

Northeast Monsoon tends to produce a seasonal current setting

to the W; the Southwest Monsoon a similar current setting to
Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 193

Pub. 173

the E in the open waters of the Bay of Bengal.

7.25 Tidal currents along the Chittagong Coast S of Elephant

Point set parallel with the coast, with the flood setting N and

the ebb setting S. 

7.25 Tidal currents along the Arakan Coast set N on the flood and

S on the ebb; they are greatly influenced by the immense volume of tidal backwater. Local in drafts of the current are strong

during the flood and the outset is small during the ebb. 

7.25 Depths—Limitations.—The 35m curve is not defined off

the coast between Elephant Point and a position about 18 miles

WSW of the entrance of the Mayu River. From the above position, the 35m curve extends SE to a position about 18 miles

WSW of Thames Point on the W side of Ramree Island. The

35m curve lies within 10 miles of the W side of the NW extremity of Ramree Island and about 16 miles WSW of the entrance of the Kaladan River. 

7.25 The 18m curve lies about 7 miles W of Elephant Point and 3

miles W of the W side of Ramree Island. Southwest of the entrance of the Kaladan River, the 18m curve is defined in an irregular pattern lying between 15 and 7 miles off the entrance.

Southeast of the entrance of the Kaladan River, the 18m curve

lies near the shore in the proximity of the W side of Myengun

Kyun (West Boronga Island) and Boronga Point, the island’s S

extremity. 

7.25 Between Boronga Point and Ramree Island, depths within

the outer 36.6m curve W of Combermere Bay and in the approach to Kyaukpyu Harbor are irregular. 

7.25 Numerous islands, reefs, rocks, and shoals lie seaward of the

coast up to 16 miles offshore between Elephant Point and

Thames Point.

7.25 Shore dangers which lie within the 9.1 and 11m curves are

described under the principal description of that section of

coast which they front. 

7.25 Mud volcanoes occasionally rise from the sea off the coast

between the entrance of the Kaladan River and Mun Aung Island. Many of these exist only temporarily and disappear, leaving a shoal. Mariners should keep a constant and careful lookout, as it is not possible to keep their existence charted.

7.26 The St. Martins Islands (20°37'N., 92°20'E.), a

group of one island and two islets, lie between 5.5 and 9 miles

SSW of Shahpuri Point, the N entrance point of the Naf River.

North Tall Trees, a group of casuarinas, lie at the N end of the

large island and a similar clump of trees lie near the S end.

Sunken dangers extend up to 1 mile offshore along the W side

of the island. Depths between the St. Martins Islands and the

mainland are less than 9.1m. St. Martins Island Light is shown

from a gray metal framework tower on a white concrete building near the N end of the island. Red and white daymarks are

fixed to the top of the light structure which is also fitted with a

racon. 

7.26 Anchorage.—Sheltered anchorage can be taken about 0.5

mile E of the N end of the large island, in a depth of 7.3m,

good holding ground. In the approach to the anchorage, the

best water lies E and S of the St. Martins Islands.

7.27 St. Martins Reef (20°37'N., 92°13'E.), a 4 mile long

ridge of sunken rocks, lies about 10 miles WSW of Shahpuri

Point. A rock, awash, lies on the S part of the reef. Depths elsewhere on the reef range from 0.9 to 10.5m. The sea breaks over

the reef in heavy weather or with a S swell.

7.27 North Delay Shoal (20°30'N., 92°15'E.), a small patch of

hard ground with a least depth of 6.9m, lies about 6.5 miles

SW of the S extremity of the St. Martins Islands. 

7.27 South Delay Shoal (20°28'N., 92°15'E.), with a least depth

of 9.7m, lies about 2 miles S of North Delay Shoal. This shoal

should not be crossed because lesser depths may exist. 

7.27 Sitaparokia Patches (20°32'N., 92°26'E.), a group of shoal

patches with depths of 2.7 to 9.1m, lies centered about 5.3

miles SE of the southernmost St. Martins Islands. 

7.27 Asirgarh Shoal (20°28'N., 92°28'E.), small and rocky with a

depth of less than 1.8m, lies about 6.5 miles SW of Sitaprokia

(20°33'N., 92°32'E.) which is on the mainland. During heavy

weather and at LW, the sea breaks over this shoal. A detached

9.8m patch lies about 1.5 miles WNW of Asirgarh Shoal. 

7.27 Oyster Island (20°12'N., 92°32'E.), low, sandy, and almost

devoid of vegetation, lies about 12.5 miles WSW of Foul Point.

This island lies on the E side of a rocky ledge from which foul

ground extends about 1.5 miles NNW and 3.5 miles SE. 

7.27 A flagstaff, Mayu Light, some buildings, and low trees lie on

the NE side of the island. A stranded wreck lies in shoal water

about 2 miles SSE of Oyster Island. A dangerous wreck lies

about 6 miles NNE of Mayu Light. 

7.27 Taylor Shoal (20°15'N., 92°25'E.), with a least depth of

7.8m, lies about 8 miles WNW of Oyster Island. Vessels

should avoid this shoal because lesser depths than charted may

exist. 

7.27 Oyster Reef (20°05'N., 92°39'E.), about 1.8 miles in extent,

lies centered about 9 miles SE of Oyster Island. The least

charted depth is 1.8m, but lesser depths have been reported to

exist. A heavy sea breaks over this reef during bad weather or

when a swell sets in.

7.27 The red can buoy moored about 1.8 miles S of Oyster Reef is

withdrawn from May 1 to November 1. 

7.28 Heckford Patch (19°57'N., 92°44'E.), with a least

depth of 9.7m, lies about 18.5 miles SE of Oyster Island. Vessels should not attempt to cross this danger. Prain Daung

(20°01'N., 92°57'E.), bearing 080°, leads N of, and bearing

060°, S of Heckford Patch. 

7.28 A patch of discolored water was reported to exist about 8

miles SW of Boronga Point (19°49'N., 93°02'E.). A depth of

16.5m, whose existence is doubtful, was reported to exist about

13.5 miles SW of the same point. 

7.28 Shoal water and breakers have been reported in an area 8 to 9

miles S of Boronga Point. A mud volcano was reported to have

existed in this area. 

7.28 The Terribles (19°24'N., 93°17'E.), three groups of rocks,

lie on the S side of the W approach to Kyankpyu Harbor, between 8 miles WNW and 10.5 miles WSW of Saddle Island

(19°26'N., 93°27'E.).

7.28 North Terrible (19°27'N., 93°16'E.), 3.7m high, is the N

rock of the group. Drying rocks lie within 1.8 miles N and a

rock, awash, lies about 0.5 mile S of it. 

7.28 Middle Terrible, 4.3m high, lies about 1.3 miles SW of North

Terrible. Isolated drying rocks lie 1.5 miles WNW and 1 mile

SSW of Middle Terrible. 

7.28 South Terrible (19°23'N., 93°16'E.), almost 3 miles SSW of

Middle Terrible, consists of several low rocks, the highest being 3.7m. 
194 Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 

Pub. 173

7.28 South Rock, which dries 1.8m, lies about 1.5 miles S of

South Terrible. The sea breaks between South Rock and South

Terrible. 

7.28 Volcanic disturbances have been reported to have occurred

about 3.3 miles NNW of North Terrible. Less water than charted may exist in this area. 

7.28 A shoal, with a depth of 7.8m, lies about 4.5 miles SW of

North Terrible. This shoal, which is the remains of a mud volcano, was marked by discolored water and should be avoided. 

7.29 Irrawaddy Rock (19°25'N., 93°23'E.), which dries

0.6m, lies about midway between Middle Terrible and Saddle

Island. Depths within a 0.5 mile radius of this rock are less than

11m. The rock is hard to make out with a smooth sea. A breaking shoal lies about 0.3 mile ENE of Irrawaddy Rock. A mud

volcano was observed about 3.8 miles S of Irrawaddy Rock. 

7.29 Research Rock, a sunken reef with depths of 1.8 to 8.2m, lies

about 3 miles SSW of West Point(19°22'N., 93°28'E.) on the

NW extremity of Ramree Island. 

7.29 Elephant Point (21°11'N., 92°03'E.), about 9.5 miles S of

South Cliff, is backed by Elephant Point summit, a conspicuous 124m high hill, visible on a clear day for about 20 miles.

Stranded wrecks lie 13 miles WNW and 9 miles SW of the

point.

7.29 Elephant Point has been reported to be a good radar target up

to 35 miles. 

7.29 The coast between Elephant Point and the entrance of the

Naf River, about 33 miles SSE, is formed by the W side of the

Naf Peninsula. The peninsula terminates to the S in Shahpuri

Island, which is low, flat, and covered with jungle growth.

Shahpuri Point, the S extremity of the island, is the NW entrance point of the Naf River. 

7.29 Taungnyo Hill (21°04'N., 92°12'E.), 267m high and the

highest peak on the Naf Peninsula, lies about 11 miles SE of

Elephant Point. A conspicuous peak, 253m high, lies about 9

miles farther SSE. 

7.29 East of the Naf Peninsula the Mayu Range rises to heights of

332 to 670m. Wetkyein Tauno, 460m high, rises at the N end of

the Mayu Range, about 19 miles E of Elephant Point. 

7.30 Shahpuri Flat (20°43'N., 92°18'E.), composed of

mud and sand with depths of 5.5m and less, extends S from the

shore about 9 miles NNW of Shahpuri Point to a position about

5 miles SW of the point. A heavy breaking sea usually exists

over this flat in depths of 3.7m and less. 

7.30 The Naf River (20°43'N., 92°22'E.) is entered between

Shahpuri Point and Cypress Point, about 1.5 miles to the SE.

The entrance can be identified by the high trees which lie in the

vicinity of the entrance points.

7.30 The tidal currents set across the approach to the bar, with the

flood setting to the N and the ebb to the S, at velocities of 0.8 to

1 knot at spring tides. The tidal currents run mainly fair in

Patricks Gut. In the Naf River, the tidal current runs full at velocities up to 4 knots. There is little or no river current. 

7.30 Cypress Sands (20°40'N., 92°18'E.) consist of a number of

shallow ridges, some of which dry, which lie on the flat extending about 4 miles SW from Cypress Point. Depths are less than

3.7m. Their location is marked by breakers. 

7.30 The bar which obstructs the river entrance lies between

Shahpuri Flat and Cypress Sands. 

7.30 In 1960, the least charted depth over the Shahpuri Flat part

of the bar N and NW of Cypress Sands was about 3.2m. The

least depth in Patricks Gut and in the deepest channel between

the ridges of Cypress Sands was about 2.4m at MLWS 

7.30 In 1960, charted depths of 5.5 to 14.6m existed up to 12

miles above the entrance of the Naf River. In 1966, it was reported that considerable shoaling had taken place within the

river. 

7.30 Two buoyed channels lead across the bar to the river entrance. The SE channel leads in a N direction through Patricks

Gut and then through Cypress Sands. The NW channel leads in

an E direction and lies N of the St. Martins Islands and Cypress

Sands. 

7.30 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 8.2m, off Maungdaw,

about 7 miles above the entrance of the Naf River. 

7.30 Vessels should approach the entrance of the SE channel

(Patricks Gut) by passing S and E of the St. Martins Islands.

Patricks Gut, close S of Cypress Sands, is sheltered from the

swell and passage should be possible during the Southwest

Monsoon. The approach to the entrance of the NW channel

should be made from the NW, passing N of St. Martins Reef

and the St. Martins Islands. A mid-channel course should be

steered in the river. 

7.30 Local knowledge or the services of a pilot is essential to enter the river. 

7.30 Between Cypress Point and Foul Point, about 34 miles SE,

the numerous sharp peaks of the Mayu Range back this section

of coast from 1 to 6 miles inland. Fakirmura Hill, 133m high

and conspicuous, lies at the SE end of this range about 3 miles

NW of Foul Point. 

7.31 Mount Todd (20°23'N., 92°42'E.), 338m high, lies

about 4.3 miles NNW of Fakirmura Hill, and when seen from

the W appears flat-topped and slightly higher than the peaks on

either side. When viewed from the S, it appears as a conspicuous sharp peak. 

7.31 Agandu Hill, 192m high with a pagoda on its summit, lies 7

miles ENE of Fakirmura Hill. Pimple Hill, 107m high, lies

about 1.5 miles SE of Agandu Hill.

7.31 Bengara Hill, 414m high, rises about 19 miles NE of Fakirmura Hill. This conspicuous hill, when open S of the latter hill,

is easily identified. 

7.31 Sitaparokia (20°33'N., 92°32'E.), a small conical hill 65m

high, with the ruins of a temple on its summit, lies on a point

13 miles SE of Cypress Point. A conspicuous rock, 36.6m high

and shaped like a chair, lies about 183m offshore 0.5 mile NW

of Sitaparokia. A rock, with a least depth of 3m, lies about 1.8

miles offshore and almost 2 miles S of Sitaparokia. 

7.31 A flat, with depths of less than 5.5m, extends from a position

close offshore, about 8 miles NW of Foul Point, to a position

about 7.5 miles SSW of the point where it terminates in North

Spit. 

7.31 The Mayu River (20°13'N., 92°45'E.) is entered between

Foul Point and Mayu Point, about 3.5 miles SSE. The river has

been surveyed for a distance of about 13 miles above Foul

Point and flows almost due S. A long narrow shoal, with

depths of less than 1.8m and which dries in places, divides the

river into two channels. This shoal extends from 1.5 miles

NNE to almost 9 miles N of Foul Point. Kazidiya Kyun, an island covered by mangroves, lies at the N end of the shoal with
Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 195

Pub. 173

a drying spit extending almost 3 miles S from it. About 4 miles

N of Mayu Point, the Kywede River, flowing from the E, joins

the Mayu River within its entrance. 

7.31 The tidal currents at the bar have a velocity of about 2.5

knots at springs and 1.5 knots at neaps. The flood sets NNE

and the ebb in the opposite direction. 

7.31 The tidal currents within the river attain a velocity of 3.5

knots at springs.

7.31 The bar obstructing the river entrance has a least depth of

5.8m and lies between North Spit and South Spit, about 4.5

miles SW of Mayu Point.

7.31 Dangers on the NW side of the entrance include North Spit,

Martini Sands, and Burne Rocks. Between Foul Point and

Burne Rocks, about 1.5 miles to the S, there are numerous

patches and rocks which dry from 0.6 to 2.4m. 

7.32 Burne Rocks (20°15'N., 92°45'E.), one of which is

above-water, with the rest drying in places. Two small islets lie

between these rocks and Foul Point. 

7.32 Martini Sands (20°13'N., 92°44'E.), which extend about 3

miles S and SSW from Burne Rocks, are subject to constant

change and are marked by breakers. 

7.32 On the SE side of the entrance, a flat with depths of 5.5m

and less, extends about 4 miles SW from Mayu Point. Mayu

Spit lies on the inner part of this flat; South Spit lies on its outer edge.

7.32 Depths inside the bar increase from 5.8m to over 9.1m and

increase to depths of 16.5 to 20.1m W of Mayu Point. 

7.32 The E channel within the river E of Kazidiya Kyun and the

shoal extending S from that island had a least depth of 5.5m in

past years. The channel W of the island and the shoal had a

least depth of 5.8m. 

7.32 The E channel is obstructed by fishing stakes, but it is easier

to navigate. The entrance of the W channel is narrower and

dangerous.

7.32 Depths of 9.1 to 12.8m lie in the fairway of the Kywede River up to 4 miles above its entrance. 

7.32 It has been reported that considerable shoaling has taken

place in the E channel within the Mayu River NE of Foul Point

and at the junction of that river and the Kywede River. 

7.32 Good anchorage can be taken, in depths of 11 to 18.3m, in

the fairway E of Burne Rocks. Anchorage can also be taken in

the channel which lies between Foul Point and the shoal about

1.3 miles to the E.

7.32 Anchorage can also be taken in the Mayu River abreast of

the town of Rathedaung, about 12 miles N of foul Point or in a

position about 2.3 miles S of the town. 

7.32 A distant bluff, in line bearing 001° with a wooden pagoda

atop an 82m elevation, leads across the bar between North Spit

and South Spit. The pagoda, which is difficult to make out, lies

almost 0.8 mile E of Fakirmura Hill. When Bengara Peak is in

line bearing 032° with Pimple Hill, this course should be

steered until Mayu Point bears 158°. Course should then be altered to the N so as to pass about 0.8 mile E of Burne Rocks. 

7.32 Fakir Point (20°07'N., 92°54'E.), on the NW side of the entrance of the Kaladan River about 10 miles SE of Mayu Point,

is decribed in paragraph 7.33.

7.32 The entrance of the Kaladan River lies between Fakir Point

and Savage Island, about 1.5 miles to the S.

7.32 Sittwe Harbor (20°08'N., 92°54'E.) lies just within the entrance N of Fakir Point.

7.32 The harbor area has been reported to be a good radar target

up to 17 miles. 

7.32 Vessels are prohibited from entering Sittwe Harbor between

sunset and sunrise.

Sittwe Harbor (Akyab Harbor) (20°08'N.,

92°54'E.)

World Port Index No. 49620

7.33 Sittwe Harbor, the chief port and administrative center

of the Arakan Division of Burma, lies on the W bank of the

Kaladan River, close N of Fakir Point and is the oldest rice exporting center in the country. 

7.33 Vessels anchor to work cargo from barges or berth at the

main wharf abreast of the city. 

7.33 Sittwe Harbor is a first port of entry. 

7.33 Winds—Weather.—The Southwest Monsoon begins early

in May and lasts until the end of October, during which period

the rainfall is so heavy as to almost inundate the country. The

rivers become swollen at this time. Vessels do not normally

load in Sittwe during this period.

7.33 The Northeast Monsoon, from November to April, is very

dry. During the winter months, thick fog may be expected with

the flood tide. 

7.33 Tides—Currents.—Tides in the entrance of the Kaladan

River and at Sittwe are semidiurnal. The tide rises and falls

quickly with slack water lasting about 1 hour during springs

and from 2 to 3 hours during neaps. 

7.33 During the rainy season, the mean level of the Kaladan River

rises about 0.6m. 

7.33 The tidal currents are regular and rapid at springs; overfalls

form on the ebb running between Fakir Reef and Passage

Rock. The velocity at springs on the outer bar is from 0.8 to 2

knots, but between Fakir Point and Passage Rock the velocity

is 3 to 4 knots, and during the Southwest Monsoon as much as

7 knots. During neaps, the tidal currents are very weak. 

7.33 The tidal currents set directly across Fakir Reef, and a vessel

leaving an inner anchorage when the ebb current is running

will be set towards the reef after passing Fakir Point. 

7.33 Vessels entering the harbor during the flood current, when in

the vicinity of White Rocks, require careful navigation as the

current sets directly towards the rocks. When leaving the harbor on the ebb current, vessels should keep as close to White

Rocks as practicable to prevent being set on Horseshoe Shoal. 

7.33 Depths—Limitations.—The outer bar lies between the W

coast of Myengun Kyun, located SE of Fakir Point, and the

tongue-shaped spur of Horseshoe Shoal, which lies about 4

miles S of Fakir Point. In 1984, the least depth over the bar was

6.4m; with. During the Southwest Monsoon, vessels crossing

the outer bar should have 0.9 to 1.2m of water under their keels

because of heavy swells.

7.33 The inner bar lies within the entrance of the Kaladan River,

between the mainland N of Fakir Point and the SW end of Flat

Island Spit. In 1976, the bar had a least depth of 4.9m. Silting

is a problem because of inadequate dredging facilities. 

7.33 North of the Main Wharf, which lies in the inner harbor

about 1.8 miles N of Fakir Point, channel depths range from

6.1 to 9.1m. 
196 Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 

Pub. 173

7.33 Main Wharf, about 1.5 miles N of Fakir Point, consists of a

T-head pier with a berthing length of 98.8m across the outer

face. The main wharf can accommodate vessels up to 99m in

length and up to 4.9m draft at the T-head pier. 

7.33 Supplemental berthing facilities consist of the Naval Pier at

Fakir Point; Stone Pier, about 0.3 mile S of Main Wharf; and

the oil pier, about 1.5 miles N of Main Wharf .

7.33 A tanker berth, 152.4m long, lies about 1 mile S of Main

Wharf. A pipeline extends to the shore from this berth. 

7.33 Five vessels moored to their own two anchors can be loaded

simultaneously to drafts of 6.4m in the inner harbor. 

7.33 Vessels moved from the inner harbor to the outer harbor can

be loaded to a draft of 7.9m. 

7.33 Horseshoe Shoal (20°05'N., 92°51'E.), a large body of shoal

water with depths of 5.5m and less, extends about 5 miles SE

from Fakir Point and then about 3.8 miles E, as a narrow tail

about 1 mile wide. During the Southwest Monsoon, the sea

breaks heavily over the outer part of this shoal. 

7.33 Passage Rock, Savage Island, Peaked Rocks, and White

Rocks lie on the E side of the fairway between 1.5m and 2.5

miles S of Fakir Point. Passage Rock, 4.3m high and the outermost danger, is bordered by deep water on all except its E side.

A disused lighthouse lies on the NW point of Savage Island. 

7.33 Fakir Reef (20°06'N., 92°54'E.), topped by drying rocks, extends almost 0.5 mile SSE from Fakir Point. 

7.33 Saunders Shoal (20°07'N., 92°56'E.), a detached 5.5m

patch, lies in the fairway about 2 miles ENE of Fakir Point. 

7.33 Flat Island (20°11'N., 92°58'E.), low and brush covered, lies

in the middle of the river about 5.3 miles NE of Fakir Point.

Paw Kyun, a similarly-covered island, lies close N of Flat Island. 

7.33 Flat Island Spit (20°10'N., 92°57'E.), an extensive mud

shoal which dries in places, extends about 4.3 miles SW from

the S side of Flat Island. The inner bar leading into Sittwe Inner Harbor lies between the SW end of this spit and the shoal

bank extending E from the mainland.

7.33 Aspect.—Fakir Point (20°07'N., 92°54'E.), the NW entrance point of the Kalandan River, is low and marked by two

conspicuous radio masts, a lookout tower, and a lighthouse.

The disused lighthouse on Savage Island, on the E side of the

fairway, is a useful landmark. A depth of 5.5m lies 0.8 mile

SSE of Fakir Point.

7.33 Myengun Kyun (20°00'N., 92°58'E.), a high densely-wooded island about 17 miles long, lies S of the entrance of the Kaladan River about 2 miles SE of Fakir Point. Prain Daung, a

high tableland located about 4 miles SSE of the N end of the island, rises to a height of 293m. This tableland is conspicuous

from seaward, except when viewed from the SSE, where it is

obscured by a high mountain. The latter appears as a sharp

peak when viewed from the S, but as a saw-toothed ridge when

viewed from the W. It has no conspicuous summit. Two prominent hummocks, 106 and 137m high, lie near the N end of the

island. 

7.33 South Hummock, a conspicuous 73m high hill, lies near the

S end of Myengun Kyun. This hill is a good landmark when

viewed from the W.

7.33 A conspicuous white pagoda stands on a low hill about 1.5

miles N of Boronga Point, the S extremity of the island. Pagoda Summit, 225m high, backs this low hill and the white pagoda. 

7.33 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels. 

7.33 Licensed Burmese pilots are stationed at Fakir Point where

the lookout tower is situated. Pilots board from a white launch,

displaying the usual signals, about 4 miles S of Savage Island.

7.33 Port authorities must be notified 48 hours prior to a vessel’s

ETA. 

7.33 In the event no pilots are available, a vessel should anchor

about 3.5 miles SSW of Hodge Point until one can be obtained.

7.33 Regulations.—As silting may have occurred, it is advisable

to obtain information prior to anchoring. 

7.33 Signals.—Storm and weather signals are displayed at Sittwe; the Indian Extended System is used. Further information

on these storm signals may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian

Ocean under “India—Signals.”

7.33 Anchorage.—Temporary anchorage can be taken outside

the outer bar, in depths of 12.8 to 14.6m, between 3.8 and 4

miles S of Savage Island. During the Southwest Monsoon, this

anchorage may not be practicable. 

7.33 When necessary, vessels can anchor in the outer harbor outside of the inner bar. Good anchorage berths lie N of Saunders

Shoal Buoy, in depths of 6.7 to 9.4m. The ebb tide, which runs

at a considerable rate in this vicinity, may cause vessels to drag

their anchors. It is recommended that eight shots of chain be

veered when anchoring anywhere within Fakir Point. 

7.33 Cargo vessels usually anchor close offshore, in the inner harbor W of Flat Island Spit between the Main Wharf and Charugyea Chaung. Vessels drawing less than 5.5m can anchor abreast

of the hospital, about 0.3 mile S of the Main Wharf. 

7.33 Anchorage is prohibited in the area lying between the tanker

berth and the shore. 

7.33 Directions.—Deep-draft vessels approaching from the W

during the Southwest Monsoon should steer 091° for Prain

Daung on Myengun Kyun, which leads between Oyster Reef

and Heckford Patch to the entrance range over the outer bar. 

7.33 The beacon on White Rocks, in line bearing 350° with Savage Island Light, leads over the outer bar. A course of 330°

should be steered from a position about 1.3 miles S of the beacon on White Rocks, which leads about 0.5 mile W of this beacon and about 0.3 mile W of Peaked Rocks. When W of

Savage Island, course should be altered to pass 0.3 mile NW of

Passage Rock and then a course of about 060° will pass about

Sittwe Harbor—Main Wharf
Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 197

Pub. 173

0.3 mile SE of the buoy moored off Fakir Reef, which leads to

a position with Fakir Point Light bearing 315°, distant 1 mile.

Course should then be altered to the N between Fakir Point and

Saunders Shoal, and thence to the inner bar or to the anchorage

in outer harbor. 

7.33 The strong S and W set of the ebb tidal current must be allowed for; vessels should be well kept up after passing the

buoy off Fakir Reef and before turning toward the inner bar or

the anchorage. 

7.34 Boronga Point (19°49'N., 93°02'E.), the S extremity

of Myengun Kyun, has a narrow ledge of rocks extending

about 1 mile S from it. Some of these rocks dry. 

7.34 The broken and irregular coasts between Boronga Point and

Ramree Island, about 35 miles SE, is deeply indented by Hunters Bay and Combermere Bay. 

7.34 Peinnechaung Kyun (19°57'N., 93°05'E.), a high and thickly-wooded island, lies 1 to 6 miles E of Myengun Kyun and

roughly parallel to it. 

7.34 Research Strait (19°58'N., 93°02'E.), which lies between

Myengun Kyun and Peinnechaung Kyun, provides sheltered

passage to small craft with local knowledge, especially during

the Southwest Monsoon. The S end of the strait is deep, but

shoals rapidly toward the N end. A shoal, with a least depth of

6.1m caused by a mud volcano, lies in the S part of the strait

about 2.3 miles ENE of Boronga Point. 

7.34 A chain of small islands, rocks, and foul ground extends

about 7 miles SSE from the S End of Peinnechaung Kyun.

Painaisa Island, 58m high, and Conspicuous Rock, 9.1m high,

are easily distinguished. Bingham Rock, which dries, lies at the

S end of the chain. 

7.34 Painaisa Island has been reported to be a good radar target up

to 14 miles. 

7.34 Ingrinchaing Kyun, inconspicuous from seaward, lies about

3.5 miles E of and parallel to Peinnechaung Kyun. Linlok

Kyun, a small island 80m high, lies close SE of the S end of Ingrinchaing Kyun. A chain of above and belowwater obstructions extend about 4 miles SE from Linlok Kyun.

7.34 Hunters Bay (19°55'N., 93°19'E.), entered between Linlok

Kyun and Kyunthaya about 9 miles SE, is shallow over most of

its area and has no commercial value to ocean shipping. 

7.34 Kyunthaya (19°43'N., 93°27'E.), bold and high, rises to an

elevation of 262m at its NW end, the most conspicuous part of

the island. 

7.35 Retkamauk Taung (19°48'N., 93°28'E.), a conspicuous peak 480m high, lies about 4.5 miles NE of the NW end of

Kyunthaya. In clear weather, this peak is sometimes visible for

45 miles when viewed from the S. 

7.35 Combermere Bay (19°37'N., 93°29'E.) is entered between

Kyunthaya and the N point of Nakhaungbauk Kyun, about 6.5

miles to the S. Nasapo Kyun, 111m high and conspicuous, lies

about 2.3 miles SE of Kyunthaya. This wedge-shaped island

makes a good landmark. Naungdaw Kyun, 1 mile E of Nasapo

Kyun, attains an elevation of 256m in the conspicuous coneshaped summit of Seppings Peak. The peak slopes gradually

on its SE side. 

7.35 Black Rocks (19°38'N., 93°29'E.), which dry 2.4m, lie in the

entrance of Combermere Bay about 2.8 miles SSW of the SE

extremity of Kyunthaya. 

7.35 Many islands, islets, and shoals lie within the entrance of

Combermere Bay. Only native craft attempt to enter it as a rule,

because of these dangers and intricate channels. 

7.35 Temporary open anchorage can be taken, in depths of 12.8 to

16.5m, mud with good holding ground, off the entrance of

Combermere Bay. 

7.35 A shoal, with depths of 9.1 to 11m, lies between 5 and 8

miles NW of Nakhaungbauk Kyun. 

7.36 Kyaukpyu Harbor (19°27'N., 93°34'E.) is situated

between Tankharo Island, on the S side of Combermere Bay,

and the N side of the NW end of Ramree Island. The harbor

provides sheltered anchorage. The town of Kyaukapyu lies on

the N shore of Ramree Island. Fletcher Hayes Strait leads E

from the harbor, E of Ramree Island, and then SE to Ramree

Harbor, about 32 miles distant. Only boats use this passage. 

7.36 The tides in Kyaukpyu Harbor are semidiurnal. 

7.36 The velocity of the tidal current ranges from 1 to 3 knots.

Seaward of Saddle Island, the flood sets N and the ebb sets S,

frequently with considerable velocity. At neaps, the currents

are very weak. Between the islands, the currents follow the directions of the channels. 

7.36 Tankharo Island (19°30'N., 93°32'E.), long, narrow, and

thickly wooded, lies about 1.5 miles SE of Nakhaungbauk

Kyun and separates Combermere Bay from Kyaukpyu Harbor.

Wood Harbor, a small inlet, lies close N of the NW end of

Tankharo Island.

7.36 An extensive shoal area, with depths of 11m and less, extends about 2.5 to 4.3 miles W from the N half of the Island.

7.36 Kyaukpandu (19°29'N., 93°30'E.) lies about 2.3 miles SSW

of the NW extremity of Tankharo Island and is 25m high. The

rock, conical-shaped and toped by two sharp points close together, occasionally has its seaward side white washed which

makes an excellent mark. The S and W sides of the rock are

steep-to. 

7.36 North Shoal (19°28'N., 93°30'E.), a small rocky patch, part

of which dries, lies about 1.5 miles SSE of Kyaukpandu. 

Giles Bank (19°28'N., 93°27'E.), small in extent with a least

depth of 6.7m, lies about 2.8 miles WSW of Kyaukpandu and

is the outermost danger on the N side of the entrance of Kyaukpandu Harbor. 

7.36 Sinbaikchaing and Ledaung Kyun, two small islands, lie

close W of the N half of Tankharo Island. The N island is low,

whereas the S island is high. A small pagoda stands at the NW

end of a ridge of hills on the N island. 

7.36 Squadron Rocks, low and covered with scrub growth, lie

close off the SW end of Sinbaikchaing. 

7.36 Laws Island (19°26'N., 93°37'E.), 158m high and covered

with foliage, lies in the E part of Kyaukpyu Harbor, about 0.8

mile SE of the S extremity of Tankharo Island. A shoal spit extends about 1 mile W from the NW side of Laws Island.

7.37 Saddle Island (19°25'N., 93°27'E.), located on the S

side of the entrance of Kyaukpyu Harbor, rises to two rounded

summits near its N end. This island lies about in the middle of

a narrow area of shoal ground about 2.8 miles long and 0.7

mile wide. A group of drying rocks lie on a shoal about 1.5

miles S of the S end of Saddle Island. Bowman Passage lies between this latter group of rocks and the foul ground extending

S from Saddle Island. A detached 5.5m patch lies about in the
198 Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 

Pub. 173

middle of the passage, 1.3 miles S of the S end of Saddle Island. 

7.37 Dicey Shoal (19°27'N., 93°27'E.), over which the sea breaks

heavily, lies at the N end of the foul ground extending N from

Saddle Island. 

7.37 Dickenson Channel, with depths of 14.6 to 20.1m, lies between Irrawaddy Rock and the foul ground which extends W

from Saddle Island. 

7.37 Helen Passage (19°24'N., 93°27'E.), the channel between

Saddle Island and Ramree Island, is unsafe because of the numerous reefs and rocky patches which foul it. A close approach

to Saddle Island should not be made from any direction. 

7.37 Cap Islet, 45m high and conspicuous, lies about 1.5 miles SE

of the S end of Saddle Island. Knot Islet, about 1 mile NNE of

Cap Islet, is low with some scrub growth. Both islets lie on an

area of foul ground which extends about 1 mile WNW and 1.8

miles NW from Adams Point (19°24'N., 93°29'E.) on Ramree

Island. 

7.37 Adams Point, the NW extremity of Ramree Island, is low

and backed by a ridge of hills. Mount Peter, 101m high, lies

about 0.5 mile E of Adams Point.

7.37 The coast between Adams Point and Georgina Point, about 3

miles NE, and then to Dalhousie Point 2 miles farther E, is bordered by several beaches and rocky points. 

7.37 The NW end of Ladies Ridge, about 0.8 mile long, lies with

its N edge about 0.5 mile S of Georgina Point. Conspicuous

from the W are some trees lying at an elevation of 66m, near

the NW end of the ridge. 

7.37 Bombay Shoal (19°26'N., 93°31'E.), a rocky foul area with

a least depth of 2.7m, lies at the outer edge of an area of foul

ground extending from the coast almost 0.8 mile NNW of

Georgina Point. A detached 4.9m patch lies about 1 mile W

and a similar patch lies about 0.8 mile E of Bombay Shoal. 

7.38 Reliance Shoal (19°27'N., 93°32'E.), a detached

patch with a least depth of 3m, lies about 1.3 miles NE of

Georgina Point. 

7.38 Dalhousie Point, low and sandy, is well-marked by high

trees. The ruins of a fort and a large clump of coconut trees lie

on the point. A small shoal, with a least depth of 4.9m, lies

about 0.5 mile SE of the point.

7.38 The N part of Ramree Island, which forms the S side of

Kyaukpyu Harbor, is thickly wooded. A sandy beach, with a

foreshore of mud which dries up to 0.3 mile offshore, lies on

the S side of the harbor between Dalhousie Point and the entrance of Ngalapwe Chaung, about 0.8 miles SE. 

7.38 Soundings in Ngalapwe Chaung differ from charted depths.

In 1964, there was a least depth of 4.8m in the channel leading

to the piers within the creek. The least depth was found on the

alignment of the entrance range across the bar at the mouth of

the creek. 

7.38 Anchorage can be taken SE of Dalhousie Point, in depths of

16.5 to 18.3m, mud, with the pier bearing between 271° and

288°, 0.5 mile distant. Care should be taken to avoid the shoal

and the wreck SE of Dalhousie Point. Strong eddies occur at

springs. 

7.38 Vessels approaching from the W or NW should enter Kyaukpyu Harbor by steering 091° for Kyaukpandu and remain on

that course until North Terrible bears more than 212°. When

North Terrible bears more than 212°, or when the N extremity

of Saddle Island bears 119°, course should be altered to 099° to

enter the harbor, steering for Laws Island Light and passing S

of Giles Bank and North Shoal and N of Dicey Shoal and Reliance Shoal. Having passed Reliance Shoal, course may be

shaped for the anchorage SE of Dalhousie Point.

7.38 Vessels approaching from the S may pass E of the Terribles.

The approach should be made with the summit of Nasapo

Kyun (19°39'N., 93°33'E.) in line bearing 029° with the N

point of Nakhaungbauk Kyun. When South Terrible bears

316°,course should be altered to 001° to pass about 2 miles W

of Irrawaddy Rock. When the summit of Nasapo Kyun bears

040°, and is well open NW of Nakhaungbauk Kyun, it should

be steered for on a course of 040° until Paungnetkyi Light

bears 099°. The directions previously given should then be followed for entering the harbor. 

7.39 Kyaukpyu (19°25'N., 93°33'E.) (World Port Index

No. 49630), a small town and trading center, lies near the shore

about 0.8 mile SE of Dalhousie Point. 

7.39 An iron pier, about 0.2 mile SSE of Dalhousie Point, has a

depth of 3.7m alongside. A submarine pipeline has been laid

between a tanker berth and the shore, about 0.8 mile ESE of

this pier. 

7.39 An all-weather jetty, with a 73.2m long pontoon head, safe

for coastal vessels to berth alongside at any time, lies on the W

bank of the Ngalapwe Chaung, about 1.5 miles above its entrance. A depth of 5.5m exists alongside the pontoon. A T-head

wooden pier, in poor condition, is also situated in the creek. 

7.39 Ramree Island (19°07'N., 93°47'E.) is about 43 miles long

in a NW and SE direction and about 20 miles wide across its

center, the widest part of the island. 

7.39 West Point (19°22'N., 93°28'E.), the W extremity of Ramree

Island, is located about 2 miles SSW of Adams Point. 

7.39 The coast between West Point and Thames Point, about 15

miles SSE, has a rocky appearance and rises steeply to a range

of high hills. Outer Peak, North Paps, and Tree Summit are the

most prominent summits of this range. All of these summits

are easily identified when not obscured by the coastal range. 

7.39 All of the dangers along this section of coast are contained

within the 9.1m curve, which nowhere lies more than 1 mile

offshore. Research Rock, about 2.8 miles SSW of West Point,

has been previously described in paragraph 7.29.

Burma—Thames Point to Cape Negrais

7.40 Thames Point (19°09'N., 93°36'E.), a low-lying projection marked by some tall trees, is located on the W coast of

Ramree Island, about 12 miles NNW of the entrance of Mun

Aung Strait.

7.40 The coast S of Ramree Island to Cape Negrais is rocky, irregular, and indented by numerous small bays, none of which provide good shelter during the Southwest Monsoon. 

7.40 From Andrew Bay to the S, the coastal land is hilly, mountainous, and marked by high peaks which are visible from seaward and serve as useful landmarks. The Arakan Yoma Range

rises from the mountainous country along the W edge of Burma. South of Taungnela, the range is lower and terminates in

the vicinity of Cape Negrais.

7.40 Ramree Harbor, the Saudoway River, and Andrew Bay are of

some commercial importance.
Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 199

Pub. 173

7.40 Depths—Limitations.—Numerous small islands, rocks,

and shoals lie inside the 183m curve SE of Mun Aung Island to

a position about 20 miles W of Bluff Cape. 

7.40 Between Gwa Bay and Cape Negrais, numerous dangers also

lie off the coast within the 35m curve. St. John’s Rocks and the

Northwest Group of the Calventuras Islands lie outside the

35m curve.

7.40 Depths within the 18 and 35m curves along the coast between Ramree Island and Cape Negrais are irregular for the

most part.

7.41 Nantha Kyun (18°04'N., 94°05'E.), an active mud

volcanic island 168m high, lies about 20 miles WNW of Bluff

Cape. The island is thickly wooded, but has a bare scar extending from the crater to the water on its W side. 

7.41 Good anchorage can be taken, in depths of 14.6 to 18.3m,

sand and mud, about 1 mile N of the island. The dangers lying

E of Nantha Kyun can be avoided by passing within 3 miles E

of the island. 

7.41 Brougham Shoal (18°09'N., 94°07'E.), rocky and dangerous, with a least depth of 1.8m, lies about 4.5 miles NNE of

Nantha Kyun. The sea usually breaks over this danger. Detached shoal patches, with depths of 11 to 16.5m, lie up to 2

miles NE of the shoal.

7.41 Carpenter Shoals (18°15'N., 94°02'E.) consist of two separate shoal areas, one with a least depth of 4.9m and the other

with a least depth of 6.7m. The shallowest patch lies about 10

miles NNW of Nantha Kyun; the deepest patch lies about 3

miles WNW of the shallowest patch. Numerous coral heads

and shoal patches, with depths of 12.8 to 18.3m, lie within a radius of 6.5 miles of the E patch. 

7.41 New Shoal (18°05'N., 94°15'E.), a small rocky patch with a

depth of 5.5m, lies about 8.8 miles ENE of Nantha Kyun.

7.41 Satellite Ledge (18°07'N., 94°18'E.), a coral shoal with a

depth of 25.6m, lies about 12.5 miles ENE of Nantha Kyun. 

7.41 Vestal Shoal (18°03'N., 94°13'E.), a small coral patch with a

least depth of 1.5m, lies about 6.5 miles ESE of Nantha Kyun.

Robinson Shoal, about 1.8 miles E of Vestal Shoal, has a least

depth of 1.2m coral. Breakers usually mark both shoals. 

7.41 Investigator Ledge (18°01'N., 94°09'E.), a coral patch with

a least depth of 21.9m, lies about 3.5 miles SE of Nantha Kyun. 

7.41 William Shoal, a rocky patch with a least depth of 4.6m, lies

about 13 miles ESE of Nantha Kyun. A narrow shoal bank extends about 5 miles WNW from William Shoal and has depths

of less than 36.6m. 

7.42 Thyne Bank (17°46'N., 94°19'E.), with a least depth

of 27.4m, lies about 9.5 miles WNW of Abhay Island

(17°45'N., 94°29'E.). White Bank, with a least depth of 21.9m,

lies about 5.3 miles WSW of the same island. Both banks are

of coral formation. 

7.42 St. John’s Rocks (17°28'N., 94°20'E.), a group of four

rocks, lie about 20 miles SSW of Abhay Island. The largest

rock is 12.2m high and resembles a church when viewed from

the N. 

7.42 The Calventuras Islands (16°54'N., 94°16'E.) comprise the

Northwest Group, located about 10 miles W of Broken Point

(16°55'N., 94°23'E.) and the Southeast Group. North Island

and South Island lie 7 miles WSW and 8 miles SW, respectively, of Broken Point. 

7.42 The highest island of the Northwest Group is 38m high. In

the Southeast Group, North Island is 39m high and South Island is 24m high. Their well-wooded summits form good landmarks. 

7.42 Navigable channels lie between the Northwest Group and

the Southeast Group, and between the latter group and the

mainland. The channel between North Island and South Island

should not be attempted. A rock, which dries 2.1m, obstructs

the channel midway between the islands and two large rocks

lie close N of South Island.

7.42 Juanita Shoals (16°00'N., 93°40'E.), a coral bank with a

least depth of 29.3m, lies about 30 miles W of Cape Negrais.

7.42 The coastal tides between Thames Point and Cape Negrais

are semidiurnal. 

7.42 Tidal currents along the SW side of Mun Aung Island follow

the general trend of the coast. Between the SE end of Mun

Aung Island and Ye Kyun there is a considerable indraft. During the Northeast Monsoon, the current may set to the S. 

7.42 The currents in the vicinity of the shoals, lying W of the

coast between Andrew Bay and Bluff Cape, are influenced and

affected by the monsoons and the tides, both in velocity and direction. The current sets strongly across these shoals. 

7.42 The current between Gwa Bay and Cape Negrais sets with

the direction of the coast, N or S according to the prevailing

monsoon, and barely exceeds a velocity of 1 knot. 

7.42 Rocky Point (19°00'N., 93°41'E.), a low rocky reef-fringed

projection marked by a white pole beacon, lies on the SE side

of Ramree Island, about 10 miles SSE of Thames Point. All of

the known dangers along this section of coast lie within 1.5

miles of the shore. 

Burma—Mun Aung Strait

7.43 Mun Aung Strait (Cheduba) (18°58'N., 93°38'E.)

lies between Ramree Island and Mun Aung Island and is entered between Rocky Point and Searle Point, the N extremity of

Mun Aung Island. The strait is about 4.5 miles wide, but the

navigable channel is much less because of the fringing dangers

along the sides. A least charted depth of 6.4m exists along the

recommended track leading through the strait. 

7.43 Beacon Island (18°56'N., 93°27'E.) lies near the outer end

of an extensive area of foul ground which extends about 10.5

miles W from Searle Point. This stony 9.1m high island is

marked by a white stone beacon on its highest part.

7.43 Mud volcanoes frequently raise islets and shoals in the vicinity of Mun Aung Strait. These islets may disappear suddenly,

leaving dangerous shoals.

7.43 Several volcanic shoals and islets were reported to lie between 4.8 and 8 miles NNW of Beacon Island. The dangers

break heavily during the Southwest Monsoon. 

7.43 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 9.1 to 11m, good holding ground, about 1.8 miles NE of Beacon Island, with the

lighthouse bearing about 215°, or in a depth of 11m with the

lighthouse bearing 242°, distant 4.8 miles. Small vessels can

anchor, in a depth of 6.4m, mud and sand, about 1.5 miles NNE

of Searle Point. 

7.44 Northeast side of Mun Aung Strait.—Zikha Taung

(18°56'N., 93°51'E.), the highest peak on Ramree Island, rises

to a height of 305m about 10 miles ESE of Rocky Point. Dark
200 Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 

Pub. 173

Hill, 79m high and wooded, lies near the shore about 2.8 miles

E of Rocky Point. Helmby Hummock, a small wooded hill

about 2.8 mile SSE of Dark Hill, shows up well from the NW.

A 123m high dome-shaped hill lies near the coast, about 4

miles NW of the S end of Ramree Island, and is a useful mark

for vessels entering the strait from the WNW.

7.44 Shoal water, with depths of 5.5m and less, fronts the S coast

of Ramree Island at distances up to 1.3 miles between Rocky

Point and Button Island, about 9 miles ESE. Between this island and the S extremity of Ramree Island, about 8.5 miles farther ESE, similar depths extend up to 0.8 mile offshore.

7.44 Middle Ground, an extensive shoal area with depths of 4.3 to

5.5m, occupies about 0.7 mile of the channel to the E of the

recommended track through the strait between Sandy Point and

the S extremity of Ramree Island. Between Middle Ground and

the coastal shoal to the W, the channel is about 1 mile wide and

has a least depth of 6.4m. The channel between Middle Ground

and the S coast of Ramree Island is about 0.3m mile wide with

a least depth of 6.1m. 

7.45 Southwest side of Mun Aung Strait.—The N coast

of Mun Aung Island is generally low and fronted by foul

ground; above-water rocks lie on parts of this foul ground. 

7.45 A patch, with a depth of 5.5m, lies about 3 miles SSW of

Rocky Point and is the furthest west of a line of shoals which

extends about 5 miles ESE. The shallowest patch has a least

depth of 2.4m. The recommended track passes N of these dangers. 

7.45 A mud volcano shoal, with a least depth of 2.7m, lies about

1.8 miles NE of Sandy Point and close W of the recommended

track. Great caution must be exercised when navigating in this

vicinity. 

7.45 The E coast of Mun Aung Island is low for about 8 miles and

then becomes high as far S as the southernmost point of the island. 

7.45 On Chaung enters the sea about 2 miles S of Sandy Point,\

and is marked by a white pagoda about 1 mile WNW of its entrance. 

7.45 Mun Aung Village lies about 0.8 mile within the creek entrance. 

7.45 The coastal bank, as defined by the 5.5m curve, extends from

1 to 6 miles offshore from the E side of Mun Aung Island. Taik

Kyun, 78m high with an even-rounded summit, lies near the

outer edge of this shoal, about 10 miles SSE of Sandy Point. 

7.45 Ywathit Taung and Taungni Taung, both on Mun Aung Island, and the high hills on Ramree Island will be visible to vessels approaching Mun Aung Strait from the NW. Helby

Hummock and Dark Hill are seen over the low ground of

Rocky Point. 

7.45 From a position about 5.5 miles W of Rocky Point with

Zikha Taung bearing 102° and Ywathit Taung bearing 170°,

vessels should steer 109° on the recommended track indicated

on the chart and toward the dome-shaped hill on Ramree Island. When Dark Hill bears 338°, course should be altered to

158°. If Dark Hill is kept bearing not more than 338° astern,

the mud volcano shoal NE of Sandy Point will be cleared to

starboard. When 2 miles have been made on the 158° course, a

bare blunt conical hill will appear open W of Dark Hill. 

7.45 As the edge of the coastal bank E of Mun Aung Island is fairly

steep-to in places, preference should be given to the E or Middle

Ground side of the channel. When Taik Kyun bears 203°, Middle Ground will have been cleared. From abeam of Taik Kyun,

the bare blunt conical hill and Dark Hill will be just visible over

the horizon and will appear as a hill with twin summits. 

7.46 Mun Aung Island (18°47'N., 93°38'E.), roughly triangular in shape, lies about 5.8 miles SW of the SW side of

Ramree Island. The island is well-wooded and marked by several high hills on its W and SW sides.

7.46 Ywathit Taung (18°48'N., 93°37'E.), about 7 miles S of

Searle Point, is 172m high and conspicuous. Taungni Taung,

196m high, lies about 2 miles farther S and has two pagodas on

its summit. Palengu Taung, 257m high, lies 7 miles SE of

Taungni Taung on the S part of Mun Aung Island.

7.46 The N and E sides of the island have been previously described in paragraph 7.44. West Hill, 186m high and wooded,

lies 7 miles SE of the NW point of the island. 

7.46 The high SW coast of Mun Aung Island is bold and fronted

by above and below-water rocks.

7.46 Henry Rocks (18°52'N., 93°27'E.), a group of above and below-water rocks, lie on a reef about 2.3 miles WSW of the NW

point of Mun Aung Island. The highest rock rises to a height of

5.2m. 

7.46 Oyster Rock, above-water, lies about 1.8 miles SE of Henry

Rocks and has been reported to be a good radar target up to 22

miles. 

7.46 A rock, awash at LW, lies about 1.3 miles offshore W of

West Hill. 

7.46 Pyramid Bay (18°41'N., 93°39'E.), located near the S end of

Mun Aung Island, provides good anchorage to native craft during the Northeast Monsoon. A high pyramidal rock lies off the

entrance of this bay. 

7.46 A reef, marked by numerous above-water rocks, extends up

to 2 miles S from the S end of Mun Aung Island.

Burma—Islands and Approaches to Ramree

Harbor

7.47 Ye Kyun (18°37'N., 93°47'E.), Taung Kyun and numerous rocks lie on the foul ground which extends about 8

miles SE from the S extremity of Mun Aung Island.

7.47 Ye Kyun lies near the edge of the foul ground about 3 miles

S of Taik Kyun. Ye Kyun, reef-fringed, is generally low, but

rises to an elevation of 32m in its central part. Several detached

reefs lie between the two islands. 

7.47 Taung Kyun, 4.9m high, lies about 0.8 mile S of Ye Kyun.

South Rock, which dries 2.4m, lies near the outer edge of the

foul ground, about 0.5 mile S of Taung Kyun.

7.47 There is no clear passage between Mun Aung Island and Ye

Kyun. Taung Kyun should not be approached within a distance

of 2 miles from any direction. 

7.47 Ramree Harbor (19°01'N., 94°02'E.) lies between the SE

side of Ramree Island and the mainland. Ramree Roads and the

entrance of the harbor are approached from the NW through

Mun Aung Strait and from the SW through Heywood Channel,

Childers Channel, and the channel W of Nerbudda Shoal, all of

which lie between numerous islands and dangers. 

7.47 West Shoal (18°30'N., 93°50'E.), a group of sunken rocks,

lies about 5 miles SSE of Taung Kyun. The rocks are sometimes visible at LW when the sea breaks over them. Taung
Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 201

Pub. 173

Kyun, bearing more than 338°, leads W of this danger. 

7.47 Sail Rock (18°33'N., 93°51'E.), 2.4m high and small in extent, lies almost 4.8 miles ESE of Taung Kyun. False Rock, 3m

high, lies about 4.5 miles NNE of Sail Rock and is joined to it

by a chain of sunken rocks and reefs. 

7.47 Heywood Channel (18°34'N., 93°49'E.) lies between Sail

Rock and False Rock, and the shoal ground extending E from

Taung Kyun and Ye Kyun. In the narrowest part of this channel

NW of False Rock, there is a least depth of 9.8m. Passage

through this channel is not recommended.

7.48 Unguan Island (18°26'N., 93°55'E.), about 11 miles

SE of Taung Kyun, is 40m high with a dense clump of trees on

its summit. This island lies on the W side of an area of foul

ground about 2 miles long and 1.3 miles wide. A detached

7.3m patch was reported to lie about 0.5 mile NW of Unguan

Island. 

7.48 East Reef (18°30'N., 93°56'E.), an area of foul ground

which uncovers 1.2m, lies about 4 miles NNE of Unguan Island. Shoal depths of 9.1m and less extend about 0.8 mile NE

from the reef. 

7.48 Cutters Patch (18°28'N., 93°54'E.), a detached 4.6m patch,

lies about 2 miles NNW of Unguan Island. 

7.48 Childers Channel (18°30'N., 93°52'E.) lies between West

Shoal, Sail Rock, and False Rock to the W and Unguan Island,

Cutters Patch, and East Reef to the E. This channel, which has

a least depth of 16.5m, is recommended when West Shoal is

breaking.

7.48 Nerbudda Shoal (18°22'N., 93°59'E.), irregular in shape

with depths of 1.2 to 18.3m, lies centered about 5.3 miles SE of

Unguan Island. The channel between Unguan Island and Nerbudda Shoal is almost 3 miles wide at its narrowest part and

has a least depth of 18.3m. This channel is frequently used because of the light on Unguan Island. A patch, with a depth of

1.2m which breaks, lies on the SW end of Nerbudda Shoal.

This shoal is the remains of a volcanic eruption which occurred

in 1908.

7.48 Osprey Rocks (18°40'N., 94°05'E.), 2.4m high, lie within

the coastal bank about 5.5 miles SE of Magyi Kyun (18°44'N.,

94°00'E.), an island on the E side of Ramree Roads.

7.48 Gungasager Rocks, 0.9m high, lie at the SW end of a narrow

shoal about 4.8 miles SSE of Osprey Rocks. A detached area of

foul ground, with depths of 6.7 to 7.9m, lies about 1.5 miles N

of Gungasager Rocks. 

7.48 Pantaw Rocks (18°40'N., 94°09'E.), a group of above and

below-water dangers, lie about 4 miles ENE of Osprey Rocks.

The N rock lies 0.6m high.

7.49 Ramree Harbor (19°00'N., 94°00'E.) comprises the

estuary of the Kaleindaung River, which flows into the sea between the S extremity of Ramree Island and the mainland to

the E. 

7.49 A group of islands obstructs and divides the harbor entrance

into two channels, the E and W entrances. The W or main entrance channel is known as The Gates. Ramree Roads lie about

5 miles SW of The Gates. 

7.49 The tides in Ramree Harbor are semidiurnal.

7.49 In the harbor at springs, the flood sets N and the ebb sets S at

a velocity of 3 knots. The tidal current sets through The Gates

in the direction of the channel at velocities of 3 to 4 knots. 

7.49 Magyi Kyun (18°44'N., 94°00'E.), the S island in the approach to Ramree Harbor, lies about 6.3 miles SSE of the S extremity of Ramree Island. This 80m high island is surrounded

by foul ground. Nyaunghin Kyun, a small islet, lies about 0.5

mile SW of Magyi Kyun and marks the SW edge of the foul

ground surrounding the latter island. A small islet lies about in

the middle of the foul ground which extends about 1.5 miles W

from the W extremity of Magyi Kyun. 

7.49 Sagu Kyun (18°48'N., 93°58'E.), 106m high near its SW

side, is the largest island in the approach to Ramree Harbor and

forms the S side of The Gates. Channel Clump, a lone conspicuous group of high trees, lies near the N coast of Sagu Kynun

about 1.3 miles WSW of the N point of the island, and forms a

useful landmark for The Gates from the SW. Big Rock, 18.3m

high, lies on the foul ground close off the S side of Sagu Kyun. 

7.49 Between the 10m curves in Ramree Roads SSW of The

Gates, there is a least charted depth of 9.6m. Depths elsewhere

in the approach channel range from 10.1 to 43.9m. Fishing

stakes are usually found in the channel about 2 miles S of The

Gates. 

7.49 Channel depths within The Gates are for the most part deep,

ranging from 9.6 to 65.9m. Harbor depths up to 10 miles within The Gates range from 10.1 to 20.1m. 

7.49 Alligator Rocks, which dry, lie near the N shore of Sagu

Kyun and are surrounded by deep water. A beacon lies on the

shore reef extending about 1.3 miles NE from the NE extremity

of Sagu Kyun. 

7.49 The E entrance of Ramree Harbor lies between the E side of

Sagu Kyun and the mainland, but is fouled by numerous reefs

and shoals and is available only to fishing vessels and small

craft with local knowledge. 

7.50 Dragon Shoal (18°53'N., 93°59'E.), parts of which

dry, is about 4.3 miles long and narrow and lies with its S end 1

mile NNE of the N extremity of Sagu Kyun. White Rock, 0.9m

high and one of a group of above-water rocks on the shoal, lies

about 1.3 miles S of the N end of Dragon Shoal. 

7.50 Two white marks lie on the W shore of the harbor 1.3 and 3.8

miles NNE of the S extremity of Ramree Island. The fairway of

the channel between Dragon Shoal and the shore bank to the W

is about 0.8 mile wide with depths of 10.5 to 18.3m. 

7.50 Flat Reef (18°55'N., 94°00'E.), which covers at HW, lies between the N end of Dragon Shoal and the shore bank to the W.

The SE and NW sides of the reef are marked by beacons. The

reef may be passed on either side, but the channel to the E is

preferred. 

7.50 Low Islet (18°58'N., 94°00'E.), marked by a beacon and

steep-to on its E side, lies about 2.3 miles N of Flat Reef and

about 0.5 mile SE of Kyangyaung Point, a high bluff. 

7.50 A rocky patch, almost awash at low water springs, lies about

0.8 mile N of Low Islet. This patch lies about midway between

Low Islet and a white mark on the W shore about 1.5 miles

NNW of Low Islet. 

7.50 Oyster Rock (19°00'N., 93°59'E.), which covers at HW and

is marked by a beacon, lies 3 miles N of Low Islet.

7.50 Cutters Rock lies 1 mile N of Oyster Rock. For about 4 miles

N of Cutters Rock to a position abeam of the entrance of the

Ramree River, there are depths of 5.9 to 7.3m, but the channel

is narrowed by mud banks. 
202 Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 

Pub. 173

7.51 Middle Bank (19°04'N., 93°59'E.) lies about 1 mile

SW of an island located 3 miles E of the Ramree River entrance. This bank partly dries and has a group of rocks awash

on its W side. 

7.51 Nepal Rock, with a least depth of 2.7m, lies about C mile E

of the Ramree River entrance. The rock is sometimes marked

by a swirl. 

7.51 Between Nepal Rock and the narrow entrance of the Mingaung Chaung, about 2 miles farther N, depths of 7.3 to 12.8m

exist in the fairway. 

7.51 Fishing stakes are placed at various places in the harbor and

may constitute a hazard to navigation. 

7.51 Excellent anchorage can be taken, in depths up to 18.3m, in

all parts of Ramree Harbor, not obstructed by shoals or fishing

stakes.

7.51 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 11m, between the W

side of Dragon Shoal and the shore bank to the W, about 3.8

miles NNE of the S end of Ramree Island. 

7.51 Vessels may approach Ramree Harbor from the S and in

such case the channel between Unguan Island and Nerbudda

Shoal is recommended. Unguan Island must not be brought to

bear less than 350° until well N of Nerbudda Island, when a

046° course may be steered through mid-channel. 

7.51 Vessels approaching from the SE should pass SW of Gungasager Rocks and Osprey Rocks at distances of 2 and 2.5

miles, respectively. Vessels should pass between 2.5 and 4

miles W of Magyi Kyun and then a N course towards The

Gates then steered, taking care to avoid fishing stakes in the

near approach to the entrance of the harbor. A course of 054°

leads through The Gates in mid-channel. 

7.51 Then, when the N point of Sagu Kyun bears 140°, course

should be altered to the NNE and the W of the two clumps of

trees on the N coast of Sagu Kyun kept bearing 208° astern.

This leads between Dragon Shoal and the shoals and rocky

patches lying off the Ramree Island shore and between Dragon

Shoal and Flat Reef. Vessels should be kept to the deeper water

towards Flat Reef. Caution is advised. Having passed Flat

Reef, course should be shaped to pass about 0.5 mile E of Low

Islet and then at similar distances E of Oyster Rock and Cutters

Rock, taking care to avoid any fishing stakes.

7.51 When N of Cutters Rock, vessels approaching the entrance

of the Ramree River should keep about 0.8 mile off the W

shore of the harbor. Caution is necessary between White Rock

and Flat Reef, and in the vicinity of Oyster Rock, Cutters

Rock, and Nepal Rock.

7.51 Mingaung Chaung connects the head of Ramree Harbor with

the inner part of Kyaukpyu Harbor, via Fletcher Hayes Strait.

Vessels drawing 2.4m or less can use this channel. 

7.51 The Ramree River has its entrance almost 8 miles N of Kyangyaung Point and about 17 miles within The Gates. At ordinary HW, vessels drawing 2.7m or less can enter the river and

proceed to within 1.5 miles of the village of Ramree. Local

knowledge is necessary.

7.51 A road connects the village with a wharf about 5 miles within the river’s entrance. 

7.51 The entrance of the shallow Kayaing River (18°45'N.,

94°09'E.) lies about 11 miles SE of the N point of Sagu Kyun.

7.51 A series of long, low islands forms the coast for about 14

miles SSE of the entrance of the Kayaing River to the entrance

of the Sandoway River. The Kyaukpyu mountain range backs

this part of the coast. The SW point of Singaung Kyun, the

southernmost island along this section of coast, lies on the N

side of the entrance of the Sandoway River. A rest house stands

on the SW point. 

7.51 Several detached reefs and rocks, which dry, lie between the

entrance of the Kayaing River and Magyi Kyun to the W. The

positions of these dangers can best be seen on the chart. 

7.52 Whalers Rock (18°37'N., 94°12'E.), awash, lies

about 2.5 miles WNW of the N end of Singaung Kyun and 2

miles offshore. 

7.52 Between Whalers Rock and Drunken Sailor Rock, about 5

miles to the S, the coast is bordered by an area of foul ground

which extends up to 2.5 miles offshore in places.

7.52 Drunken Sailor Rock (18°33'N., 94°13'E.), which nearly

dries and breaks at LW, lies about 2 miles W of the SW point of

Singaung Kyun. Under certain conditions of tide and wave

height, the rock may be visible at other times.

7.52 Zalat Taung, an island 52m high, lies on the S side of the entrance of the Sandoway River, about 0.8 mile SW of the SW

point of Singaung Kyun. Foul ground extends about 0.8 mile

SW from the central part of the island and a detached 9.1m

patch lies about 0.5 mile farther SW. 

7.52 Singyat Kyun lies close SE of Zalat Taung and is separated

from it by a foul channel. 

7.52 Gaw Taung (18°31'N., 19°16'E.), a 168m high hill, lies near

the coast about 3 miles SE of the Sandoway River entrance.

This hill is a good landmark, being the highest elevation along

this section of coast.

7.52 Open anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 11m, mud, about

1.3 miles N of Drunken Sailor Rock, with the rest house on

Singaung Kyun bearing 120°, distant 2.3 miles. 

7.52 During the Northeast Monsoon, vessels with local knowledge can anchor about 0.8 mile S of Drunken Sailor Rock.

During the Southwest Monsoon, this anchorage is exposed and

dangerous. 

7.52 A heavy surf breaks on this coast in the vicinity of the Sandoway River entrance when the wind is W of N. 

7.53 The Sandoway River (18°33'N., 94°13'E.) is entered

between the SW point of Singaung Kyun and Zalat Taung Island. The river is tidal for a short distance above the town of

Sandoway. Vessels drawing 2.4m can ascend the river at ordinary HW from its entrance to within 4 miles of the town. Only

small craft can be accommodated. 

7.53 The low sandy rock-fringed coast between Gaw Taung and

Apaw-ye Kyun, about 9 miles SSE, is backed inland by some

isolated hills and ranges.

7.53 Apaw-ye Kyun (18°23'N., 94°19'E.), a bluff island, rises to

an elevation of 90m. Mud volcanoes were reported to lie about

1.8 miles W and almost 1 mile SSW of this island.

7.53 Andrews Bay (18°20'N., 94°20'E.), entered between an unnamed point and Money Point, about 3.3 miles SSW, is clear of

dangers in its central part, but bordered by foul ground around

its shores and inner reaches. 

7.53 Money Summit rises to an elevation of 0.8 mile SSW of

Money Point. This summit, topped with detached trees, is a

conspicuous landmark and easily identified from the offing.

7.53 Mills Patch (18°19'N., 94°15'E.), the shoal remains of a

mud volcano with a least depth of 6.1m, lies about 4.5 miles W
Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 203

Pub. 173

of Money Point and is a hazard to vessels bound for Andrew

Bay. 

7.53 Depths are regular in the near approach to Andrew Bay, decreasing gradually to a depth of 18.3m between the entrance

points. Depths within the bay, up to 2 miles within the entrance, range from 18.3 to 9.1m, but much less elsewhere.

Depths have been reported to be less than charted in Andrew

Bay.

7.53 Good anchorage is provided with good holding ground, but

the bay is exposed to the full force of the Southwest Monsoon.

Shelter is provided from the force of the monsoon in Mayo Bay

in the SE part of Andrew Bay, but the swinging room is restricted by a shoal patch in the middle part of the bay.

7.53 Sandoway Bay (18°22'N., 94°21'E.), a small shallow indentation, lies on the N shore of Andrew Bay close within the entrance. Two beacons, in line bearing 348°, lead to the

anchorage within the bay. 

7.53 A beacon lies on the E side of the bay about 0.8 mile E of the

lighthouse on the N entrance point of Andrew Bay. A radar

buoy is moored about 0.5 mile E of the same lighthouse. 

7.54 Mayo Bay (18°18'N., 94°22'E.) lies near the SE corner of Andrew Bay and provides sheltered anchorage during

the Southwest Monsoon.

7.54 Berthing facilities consist of a pontoon jetty and a 112.8m

causeway with a depth of 5.2m alongside. Beacons, in line

bearing 147°, lead to a position close off the head of this pier. 

7.54 A large promontory, with Money Point as its NW extremity,

extends about 5 miles W from the general line of the coast

close S of Andrew Bay. Mawyon Pagoda, conspicuous from

seaward when the sun shines on it, stands on the SW part of

this promontory. 

7.54 Dangerous foul ground, marked by numerous above and below-water rocks, fronts the W side of the promontory up to 3.5

miles offshore. A detached drying rocky patch lies about 4.3

miles WSW of Money Point and is the outermost danger. A

drying rock lies about 1.3 miles S of the SW extremity of the

promontory; a foul patch lies about 1.5 miles SE of the same

extremity. 

7.54 Remarkable Rock (18°14'N., 94°22'E.), 9.1m high and conspicuous, lies about 2.5 miles ESE of the pagoda mentioned

above. 

7.54 The shallow Kamgit River and the Salu River enter the sea

about 4.8 miles SE and 6.8 miles SSE of Remarkable Rock. 

7.55 Bluff Cape (18°00'N., 94°26'E.), about 14 miles SSE

of Remarkable Rock, rises steeply from the sea to a height of

137m and is a fairly conspicuous landmark. The shallow

Kyeintali River discharges about 2 miles E of the cape. 

7.55 Between Bluff Cape and the Gwa River, about 24 miles SSE,

the coast is bordered by several hills and peaks which are easily

identified from the offing. Taungnela, 1,146m high, lies about

12.5 miles E of Bluff Cape. Kungyaung Taung, 707m high, lies

about 14 miles SE of Bluff Cape. High Peak, 12 miles SSE of

Bluff Cape, rises to a height of 585m. Taunglun Taung, 253m

high, lies almost 4 miles S of High Peak and Button Hill, 124m

high, lies 3 miles S of Taunglun Taung. 

7.55 The Satthwa Chaung (Hswathwa River), almost entirely obstructed by a reef at its entrance, discharges into the sea about

14 miles S of Bluff Cape. A narrow passage leads through the

reefs to the village of Hswathwa just within the entrance. 

7.55 An area of foul ground, marked by numerous drying rocks,

extends about 2.5 miles SW from the entrance of the Satthwa

Chaung. A 9.1m patch lies about 0.8 mile W of the outer edge

of this foul ground. 

7.55 Gwa Bay (17°37'N., 94°34'E.) is entered between a 63m

high peninsula and an unnamed point about 2 miles S. 

7.55 The N entrance point is fringed by foul ground which extends about 0.5 mile SSW and 0.8 mile W from it. A detached

drying reef lies 1.8 miles W of the S entrance point. A similar

reef lies 0.5 mile SSW of this reef. Gwa Kyun (17°34'N.,

94°31'E.), 44m high, lies near the outer edge of the foul ground

which extends about 3 miles SW from the S entrance point of

Gwa Bay. The island is an excellent landmark. 

7.55 Anchorage is provided, in depths of 7.3 to 11m, within Gwa

Bay, but W winds are experienced. 

7.55 During the Northeast Monsoon, vessels occasionally call at

the village of Gwa on the E side of the entrance of the river on

the S side of the bay. 

7.55 The coast between Gwa Bay and Broken Point, about 42

miles SSW, is indented by several small bays which provide

anchorage in good weather. During the Southwest Monsoon,

little shelter is provided except in Danson Bay.

7.55 Depths of 4.9 to 5.5m lie within 2 miles S of Gwa Island and

up to 1.8 miles offshore. With the exception of the above

depths, all of the other dangers lie within 1.3 miles of the shore

between Gwa Island and Bomie Bay, about 13.7 miles to the S. 

7.55 Bomie Bay (17°20'N., 94°33'E.), small in extent and shallow, is available only to small craft.

7.56 Pontamau Island (17°19'N., 94°30'E.), 54m high and

reef-fringed, lies about 3 miles W of Bomie Bay. Myauk Island

lies near the outer edge of the shoal ground which extends

about 0.5 mile NE from Pontamau Island. 

7.56 Round Hill, 194m high, and Thumb Hill, 238m high, lie 5.3

and 8 miles SSE of Pontamau Island. Both hills are conspicuous and form excellent landmarks.

7.56 Danson Bay (17°12'N., 94°29'E.) is entered about 6 miles

SSW of Pontamau Island; unlike other bays found along this

section of the coast, is sheltered from S and SW winds. Foul

ground, marked by numerous rocks, extends about 3.5 miles W

from the SW entrance point of Danson Bay. West Sandy Islet,

4.6m high, lies on this foul ground about 0.5 mile from its outer edge. 

7.56 The central part of the bay has depths ranging from 5.5 to

14.6m, but its shores are bordered by foul ground which extends up to 1 mile offshore in places. 

7.56 Large vessels can anchor, in depths of 9.1 to 11m, with

Round Hill bearing 056° and Thumb Hill bearing 098°. This

anchorage is sheltered from all except NW winds. Vessels,

when entering, should give West Sandy Islet a berth of 2 miles. 

7.56 The coast between West Sandy Islet and High Island, about

9.3 miles S, is indented by an open bay in its N part and fringed

by shoal ground which extends up to 2 miles offshore in places.

High Island rises to a height of 40m. Shoal ground, with depths

of 5.5m and less, extends about 3.3 miles NW from High Island. Sandy Island, 10.5m high, lies on this shoal ground about

1.3 miles NW of High Island.

7.57 The Kyaungtha River (16°57'N., 94°26'E.), entered
204 Sector 7. India—East Coast —Bangladesh, and Burma—West Coast 

Pub. 173

close N of High Island, is shallow and available only to native

boats. 

7.57 Between Broken Point, about 3.3 miles SW of High Island,

and Koronge Island, about 24 miles SSW, the coast is rocky

and irregular. 

7.57 The Thitpok River enters the sea about 11 miles S of Broken

Point. Round Island, 39.6m high, lies about 0.8 mile N of the

entrance and 0.5 mile offshore. The river is available only to

boats. 

7.57 Vibart Shoal (16°43'N., 94°19'E.), small in extent and irregular, with a least depth of 4.6m, lies about 2.8 miles SW of

Round Island.

7.57 Alligator Head (16°36'N., 94°19'E.) is the S extremity of a

large, rocky promontory about 19 miles S of Broken Point.

When viewed from the offing, it resembles an alligator’s head

facing S. 

7.57 Ngayot Taung (16°32'N., 94°24'E.), one of the most conspicuous peaks along this coast, rises to a height of 401m,

about 6.3 miles SE of Alligator Head. 

7.57 Milestone Rock (16°40'N., 94°17'E.), a detached steep-to

rock 12.2m high, lies 4.5 miles NNW of Alligator Head. 

7.57 Little Quoin Island (16°39'N., 94°20'E.) lies about 3.5

miles NNE of Alligator Head. 

7.57 High Island (16°37'N., 94°18'E.) lies about 2 miles NW of

Alligator Head, North Reef, South Reef, and West Reef lie

about 1 mile S through W to N of High Island. Saba Island lies

between South Reef and Alligator Head. Two small shoals,

with depths of 8.2 and 16.5m, lie about 2.8 miles WNW of

High Island. 

7.57 Ngayot Bay (16°34'N., 94°18'E.), entered between Alligator

Head and the N end of Koronge Island, about 5.3 miles SW,

provides little protection except from the S. Large vessels

should not enter this bay because of the numerous dangers lying within it. A small shallow river empties into the S part of

the bay. 

7.58 Koronge Island (Goyangyi Kyun) (16°32'N.,

94°15'E.), 81m high and rugged, is wedge-shaped and rocky.

North Rock lies close off the NE end and West Rock lies close

off the SW end of the island.

7.58 Koronge Island has been reported to be a good radar target

up to 16 miles. 

7.58 Goyaugyi Kyun Light is shown from a black framed tower

with white bands standng on a rising ground near the center of

the island. 

7.58 Good anchorage, protected from the N and NW, can be taken, in a depth of 11m, sand, between the S end of Koronge Island and the mainland. The anchorage should be approached

cautiously to avoid Crawford Shoal and the drying rock on the

S side of the approach. 

7.58 Between Koronge Island and Cape Negrais, about 29 miles

to the S, the coast is indented by numerous small coastal inlets. 

7.58 Round Cape, 104m high, thickly wooded, and conspicuous,

lies about 15.5 miles S of Koronge Island. Conical Mount,

224m high and cone-shaped, lies about 4 miles SE of Round

Cape and is conspicuous from all directions. 

7.58 Spike Hill (16°22'N., 94°18'E.), about 7.5 miles NE of

Round Cape, rises to a height of 259m. Fat Hill, 4 miles NE of

Cape Negrais, is 198m high. All of the above peaks comprise

the most conspicuous summits between Koronge Island and

Cape Negrais.

7.58 Crawford Shoal (16°29'N., 94°13'E.), a group of drying

rocks, lie about 3 miles SW of Koronge Island. A spit, with a

depth of 5.5m at its outer end, extends about 0.5 miles S from

Crawford Shoal. 

7.59 White Rock (16°29'N., 94°15'E.), which dries, lies

about 2.3 miles SSE of Koronge Island. 

7.59 May Gaumgaun, Ung Chune, and Lichune form a group of

islands which lies between 6 and 9 miles S of Koronge Island.

Rocks and foul ground fringe the three islands. A narrow shoal,

with a least depth of 4.9m, lies centered about 1.3 miles SW of

May Gaumgaun. A rock, 3.4m high, lies on the S edge of a

shoal area about 0.5 mile SW of Lichune. 

7.59 A stranded wreck lies close N of Lichune (Leik Kyun).

7.59 Saingbain Kieu (16°20'N., 94°11'E.), a group of large conspicuous rocks, some appearing white, parallel the coast for

about 3 miles and 2.5 miles offshore. North Twin, the N rock,

lies 6 miles NNW of Round Cape. South Twin, the S rock, lies

about 4 miles NW of Round Cape. Several detached shoal

patches lie between this group and the coast.

7.59 Mushroom Rock, 2.7m high, lies about 2 miles N of Round

Cape. Several detached shoal patches, with depths of 9.1m and

less, lie within 1.5 miles W through 1.5 miles NW of Round

Cape.

7.59 Black Rock, 1.2m high and dark-colored, lies about 4.5

miles SW of Round Cape. 
205

Pub. 173

8. 

Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast

8.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 8 — CHART INFORMATION
207

Pub. 173

SECTOR 8 

BURMA—SOUTH AND WEST COASTS AND THAILAND—WEST COAST

8.0 Plan.—This sector describes the S and W coasts of Burma

(Myanmar) and the W coast of Thailand between Cape Negrais

and Ko Phucket and includes the Irrawaddy River Delta, the

Gulf of Martaban, and the Mergui Archipelago. The descriptive sequence is E and then S.

General Remarks

8.1 Between Cape Negrais and the Sittang River, the Irrawaddy coast, the Bassein River and the Rangoon River,

which include the ports of Bassein and Rangoon are described

first. A description of the Tenasserim Coast then follows as far

S as the Tavoy River and includes the port of Moulmein,

Bentinck Sound, the Ye River, Heinze Chaung, and the off-lying Moscos Islands. Bentinck Sound provides some shelter.

8.1 The coast of Burma, between Tavoy Point and Victoria

Point, is indented by many inlets of little or no commercial value to ocean shipping. Many mountain ranges parallel this

coast. The only ports of any importance along this entire section of coast are Tavoy and Mergui.

8.1 The Pakchan River forms the boundary between Burma and

Thailand. Victoria Point (9°58'N., 98°33'E.) lies on the N side

of the entrance of this river.

8.1 The coast of Thailand, between the entrance of the Pakchan

River and the entrance of Takua Pa Inlet, is mostly low, densely

wooded, and intersected by many rivers and creeks. It has not

been closely examined. A range of mountains backs this coast.

A number of islands, many surrounded by reefs, lie off this

coast; others are joined to the mainland by sandbanks. Takua

Pa Inlet is formed by a large river which flows into the sea by

way of four channels between the parallels of 9°15'N and

8°52'N.

8.1 The coast between the S entrance of the Takua Pa Inlet and

the N entrance of Chong Pak Phra is regular and is fronted by

the Similan Islands. Chong Pak Phra is the narrow strait between the coast and Ko Phuket, a large island to the S. The W

coast of the latter island is indented by several open bays. The

N part of this coast, with the exception of a small area, is low,

wooded, and backed by hills of moderate elevation. The S part

rises steeply to a mountain range from about 262 to 518m high,

densely wooded, and sloping gradually to the N and S.

8.1 The Mergui Archipelago, which consists of approximately

1,000 islands ranging in size from mere hummocks of rock to

King Island, the largest of the group, with an area of about 175

square miles, lies within the 95m curve. The archipelago extends from Tavoy Island, the N extremity of which is nearly 20

miles S of Tavoy Point, to the Similan Islands, a distance of

about 285 miles.The Great Western Torres Islands, the outermost islands, lie about 70 miles off the mainland. Some of the

islands have mountain peaks which attain a height of 762m.

The outer islands are steep and wooded; the nearshore islands

are low and covered with jungle. There are no ports of significance, but there are many sheltered anchorages.

8.1 Winds—Weather.—The weather and climate of Burma

have been previously described in paragraph 7.25.

8.1 The climatic seasons of the Tenasserim Coast and the W

coast of Thailand are based on two major wind systems, namely the Northeast Monsoon and the Southwest Monsoon, each

with its own weather characteristics.

8.1 The Northeast Monsoon, which is associated with the Northern Hemisphere winter, extends from early December through

late March. This is the dry season, but a flow of warm moist air

from across the South China Sea covers the before-mentioned

coasts and causes somewhat higher cloudiness, occasional

thunderstorms, higher temperatures, and humidities than over

the remaining areas. The greatest contrasts are in November,

December, and January, when these coasts are hot, humid, and

rainy. Thunderstorms reach their lowest frequency during the

Northeast Monsoon. Temperatures reach their lowest values,

except at some stations along these coasts where all seasons are

about equally warm and humid. Cloudiness is at a minimum,

with the lowest averages usually occurring in January. Visibilities are usually good, but there is some early morning fog.

8.1 The spring intermonsoon season, usually from mid-March to

mid-May, is the period in which the dry NE winds give way to

the moist SW winds. Weak and variable winds occur in April

and May. There is a slight increase in rainfall in April and a big

increase in May. Thunderstorm frequencies rise sharply, and

are most frequent during May. Temperatures reach their maximum values in April. Relative humidities and cloudiness increase.

8.1 The Southwest Monsoon, which extends from mid-May

through late September, is the rainy season. Daily intermittent

light rain, interspersed with occasional heavy rainstorms or

thunderstorms accompanied by torrential downpours, occur.

Cloudiness reaches a maximum during the Southwest Monsoon. Maximum cloud cover reaches 80 to 95 per cent. Temperatures decrease slightly at most places due to the increased

cloud cover. The average daily temperatures are in the upper

27° or low 32°C; relative humidity reaches its highest values.

Visibility is usually good. Poor visibility occurs mainly during

heavy rain squalls.

8.1 The autumn intermonsoon season is normally limited to the

months of October and November. During this period, the

moist Southwester Monsoon is replaced by moist E winds over

these coasts. Weak and variable winds, with land and sea

breezes prevailing, occur until the Northeast Monsoon is established. Rainfall decreases, but thunderstorms increase slightly

over these coasts. Temperatures and relative humidity remain

high. Cloudiness decreases, except over the S of the Tenasserim coast and the W coast of Thailand. Periods of low visibilities are rare.

8.1 Tides—Currents.—The current W of the entrance of the Irrawaddy River is irregular in the fine weather season and varies

with the direction of wind, here the current has no apparent

connection with the rise and fall of the tide.

8.1 During November, December, and January, little or no flood

current is observed S of Alguada Reefs, except at springs.
208 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

8.1 The tides along the Tenasserim coast and along the W coast

of Thailand are semidiurnal with a small diurnal inequality in

both time and height. The tides approach these coasts from the

SSW and progress N. The mean spring ranges increase from

about 3m at the Burma-Thailand border to over 5.2m at Mergui.

8.1 The currents flow at an average rate of 0.4 knot, with a maximum of about 0.7 knot. The set and drift of the currents in local areas often varies from the patterns shown below. This is

due to frequent storms. Near the coast, the tidal currents will

also exert great influence and will either augment or deter the

non-tidal currents.

8.1 The currents along the Tenasserim coast and along the W

coast of Thailand usually set N in January and S in February. In

March the water flowing N from the Strait of Malacca causes a

N current to flow along these coasts. This flow continues

through April. In May the currents set from S to SW, except for

the extreme S part of this area where a N current still exists.

The currents set S in June and July and N from August through

December.

8.1 The tidal current movement is usually semidiurnal in character with some variations in the velocities and durations of the

flows. The tidal currents, as a rule, set from ENE to NNW on

the rising tide and from WSW to SSE on the falling tide. Considerable variation in set and drift is to be expected between the

many islands off these coasts and in the confined areas and estuaries.

8.1 Tidal currents are strong along the entire coast between Tavoy Point and the Burma-Thailand border. Between Tavoy

Point and Forrest Strait, the tidal currents usually set N on the

rising tide and S on the falling tide at rates of 2 to 4 knots. The

tidal currents attain a rate of 2.3 knots through Forrest Strait. In

deeper water offshore, the tidal effect becomes negligible and

the general circulation predominates. Tidal bores occur in the

mouths of rivers and bays.

8.1 There is comparatively little reliable information concerning

the tidal currents off the W coast of Thailand. These tidal currents seldom exceed 2 to 3 knots and are seldom experienced

over 8 miles offshore.

8.1 Caution.—Uncharted drilling rigs may be tempoarily located in the Andaman Sea. Uncharted well heads and other obstructions may also be located in the Andaman Sea. 

Cape Negrais to the Sittang River

8.2 Cape Negrais (16°02'N., 94°12'E.), the seaward extremity of a spur of the Arakan Yoma range, is fronted by conspicuous cliffs which rise about 0.8 mile inland to a high

summit. The cape has been reported to be a good radar target

up to 24 miles.

8.2 The coast of the Irrawaddy Delta is low along its entire

length between the Bassein River and the Sittang River. The

only high coastal ground lies on the W side of the mouth of the

Bassein River; here the S extremity of the Arakan Yoma Range

terminates in the vicinity of Maw Dengi. Between the Bassein

River and the China Bakir River there are no landmarks and the

navigational aids are few in number.

8.2 Depths—Limitations.—Between positions S of Purian

Point and Baragua Point, the 20m curve lies about 10 to 20

miles offshore. The 10m curve roughly parallels the 20m

curves at distances of about 2 to 8 miles within the latter curve.

Shoal depths of 5.5m and less lie between the 11m curve and

the shore.

8.2 The 20m curves lies about 18 miles SE and 21 miles E of

Baragua Point and then extends E to the vicinity of Kalegauk

Island, and approximates the outer limits of the Gulf of Martaban.

8.2 The 10m curve to the SE and E of Baragua Point lies only

about 1 to 2 miles within the 20m curve, but to the ENE it lies

between 8 and 30 miles offshore.

8.2 Those depths and dangers which lie within the 10m curve are

described together with the principal description of that part of

the coast which they front.

8.2 A shoal, with a depth of 9.1m, was reported to lie about 46

miles S of Elephant Point.

8.2 Caution.—Vessels should not approach within a distance of

3 miles of the coast in the vicinity of Cape Negrais. A fringing

reef and off-lying rocks make caution advisable even outside

this distance.

8.2 The shallow bank, which fronts the delta shore between Purian Point and Baragua Point, should not be shoaled to depths

of less than 18.3m.

8.3 Yadana Gas Field (15°08'N., 94°47'E.), consisting of

three lit platforms, situated about 48 miles SE of Purian Point.

Two submarine pipelines run ESE from the central platform to

the coast of Burma. 

8.3 The platforms are surrounded by a restricted area, best seen

on the chart. Navigation, fishing, and anchoring are prohibited

within 500m of the restricted area. 

8.3 The coast between Cape Negrais and Maw Dengi, about 6

miles SSE, consists of a series of low densely-wooded hills. In

the vicinity of Maw Dengi these hills have some conspicuous,

reddish slopes of driven sand which leave well-defined edges

of dark foliage near their summits.

8.3 The coast between Cape Negrais and Maw Dengi is fringed

by reefs and shoal patches which extend up to 1.3 miles offshore in places.

8.3 Maw Dengi (Pagoda Point) (15°57'N., 94°15'E.), about 30m

high and flat, terminates in a bare bluff. A pagoda lies on the

point and is visible above the trees. A small 2.7m high obelisk

lies on the reef on the SE extremity of Maw Dengi.

Yadana Platform
Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 209

Pub. 173

8.3 A shoal, with depths of 5.5m and less, lies up to 0.5 mile S

and W respectively of the point. A detached 5.5m patch lies

about 1 mile W of the point.

The Irrawaddy River Delta 

8.4 The Irrawaddy River rises in the N part of Burma and

generally flows to the S. Augmented by numerous tributaries,

the Irrawaddy River flows into the Bay of Bengal by way of

several channels through an extensive delta lying approximately between the meridians of 94°15'E and 96°50'E. This delta is

being constantly extended seaward by the deposit of silt. Many

low islands are formed near its seaward extremity by tidal

backwaters and smaller cross channels which connect with the

main channels.

8.4 The only channels through the Irrawaddy Delta used by

ocean-going vessels are the Bassein River and the Rangoon

River, the furthest W and E, respectively.

Approaches to the Bassein River

8.5 Maw Dengi, which lies on the NW side of the entrance of the Bassein River, has been previously described in

paragraph 8.2.

8.5 Purian Point (15°50'N., 94°24'E.), low and backed by a

group of trees 23m high, lies on the SE side of the entrance of

the Bassein River. White sandstone low bluffs extend 1.5 miles

NE from the point. Higher bluffs begin about 1 mile NNE of

the point and extend to the N for about 1.3 miles.

8.5 Tides—Currents.—Tides in the entrance of the Bassein

River are semidiurnal.

8.5 The tidal currents set strongly across Phaeton Shoals; the

flood current sets E and the ebb current sets W.

8.5 About 1 mile N of Thamihla Kyun the tidal currents are rotary during spring tides. At the beginning of the flood tide, the

current sets 152° and changes through 090°, so that at the end

of the flood it sets about 057°. With the commencement of the

ebb tide, the current sets about 315° and changes through 270°,

setting at the end about 225°. The greatest velocity, 1.5 knots,

is attained during the second and third quarters of each tide.

8.5 Near the entrance bar, the flood current sets about E and the

ebb current sets between SW and SSW at velocities of 1.5 to

3.5 knots during spring tides. At spring tides, during the rainy

season, the ebb current may reach a velocity of 6 knots.

8.5 Depths—Limitations.—.Alguada Reef (15°42'N., 94°

12'E.), almost awash at HWS, has detached sunken rocks extending a considerable distance from it. Hugh Rose Rock,

which is awash, lies off the N end of the reef about 2.5 miles

NNE of the light, which lies near the SW end of the reef. A

4.1m patch lies about 1.3 miles S of the light. Depths of 10.1m

and less extend about 0.8 miles farther SW. 

8.5 Caution.—Less water than charted has been reported to lie

in an area between 19 miles W and 18.5 miles SSW of Alguada

Reef Light. 

8.5 Several detached shoal patches, with depths of 5.5 to 14.6m,

have been reported to lie within a 1 mile radius of a position

about 17 miles WNW of Alguada Reef Light.

8.6 Phaeton Shoals (15°47'N., 94°14'E.), a group of

shoal patches with a least depth of 4.3m and 2 miles in extent,

lie centered about 10.3 miles S of Maw Dengi. Depths of 11 to

18.3m surround these shoals.

8.6 Thamihla Kyun (15°52'N., 94°17'E.), flat and wooded, lies

about 5.5 miles SSE of Maw Dengi. Reefs and shoals extend

about 2 miles SSW and 0.8 mile NE from the island. Rocky

patches, with a least depth of 7.9m, extend about 0.8 mile W

from the island. Thamihla Kyun has been reported to be a good

radar target up to 18 miles.

8.6 Baroni Rock (15°52'N., 94°17'E.), with a least depth of

4.9m, lies about 0.5 mile NE of the N end of Thamihla Kyun.

8.6 Haing Gyi Shoal (15°57'N., 94°17'E.), with depths of 5.5m

and less, extends about 5.5 miles S into the river entrance from

the shore about 3.3 miles NE of Maw Dengi.

8.6 Depths in the channel between Thamihla Kyun and the shore

bank extending about 6 miles WNW from Purian Point range

from 6.1 to 9.1m. Depths in the approach to and within the entrance channel W and N of Thamihla Kyun range from 18.3 to

7.3m.

8.6 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots will board off the

pilot station, located about 0.3 mile SE of Dalhousie Point.

8.6 During the Northeast Monsoon, if no pilot is readily available, a vessel should proceed to the anchorage SE of Thamihla

Kyun.

8.6 To avoid delay, the vessel’s ETA should be sent to the Port

Officer at Bassein at least 48 hours prior to arrival.

8.6 Directions.—Vessels approaching the entrance of the

Bassein River from the S should not approach Alguada Reef

Light closer than 3 miles. The summit of Haing Gyi Kyun

bearing 020°, and well open E of Thamihla Kyun, leads about

0.5 mile E of the easternmost shoal depths of Alguada Reef

and Phaeton Shoals. Having passed Phaeton Shoals, course

should be shaped for the anchorage SE of Thamihla Kyun.

Care should be taken to allow for the tidal current.

8.6 A course of 350° should be steered to pass E of the two lighted buoys E of Thamihla Kyun, passing N of Broni Rock and

then altering course to the NE, entering the river between Haing Gyi Shoal and Purian Bank. When 3 miles S of Rocky

Point, alter course NNE and pass not less than 0.2 mile W of

Burgess Rock. Having cleared that rock course should be altered to the NE and then proceed to the anchorage off the pilot

station at Dalhousie Point.

8.6 Vessels approaching the entrance of the river from the W, if

proceeding to the anchorage SE of Thamihla Kyun, should

pass about 1 mile N of the island so as to clear the shoal depths

N of Baroni Rock. When Thamihla Kyun Light bears 206°,

Alguada Reef Light bearing 092°
210 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

steer for the anchorage. This approach is not recommended

during the Southwest Monsoon, when the vessel should proceed directly to the anchorage off the pilot station.

8.6 Anchorage.—During the Northeast Monsoon, good anchorage can be taken, in depths of 8.2 to 9.1m, about 1 mile SE of

Thamihla Kyun. When anchored in this position, the summit

on Haing Gyi Kyun should bear about 016° and the light structure on Thamihla Kyun about 322°.

The Bassein River to Bassein

8.7 The Bassein River, the W of the channels leading

through the Irrawaddy Delta, is the means of access for oceangoing vessels calling at the port of Bassein, about 75 miles

above the river’s entrance.

8.7 The river entrance has been reported to be a good radar target

up to 15 miles.

8.7 Winds—Weather.—The weather generally is hot and humid. The heavy rainfall, which sometimes exceeds 2,700mm

annually, occurs during the Southwest Monsoon between June

and September.

8.7 Storm and weather signals are displayed at Thamihla Kyun

in accordance with the Indian Extended System. The Extended

System is in use at Bassein; the port receives information but

no signals are displayed. Further information on these storm

signals may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—

Signals.”

8.7 Tides—Currents.—Large diurnal inequalities and seasonal

variations best describe the tides at Bassein.

8.7 Tidal currents at springs attain velocities of 1.5 to 2 knots

during the flood and up to 3 knots during the ebb. During freshets the velocity may reach 5 knots.

8.7 A tide gauge lies on Ashby Rockys near the W bank of the

river and just N of Panmawaddy Flat. A white cage topmark

and red, black, and white plaques from the top downward, respectively, mark the tide gauge. Each plaque represents 0.3m;

the lower edge of the topmost white plaque marks the 7.9m

level.

8.7 Depths—Limitations.—The least depth in the channel over

the bar which lies across the entrance of the Bassein River is

about 6.1m. The bar lies between the shallow flat close E of the

Maw Dengi and the W and SW edges of Purian Bank. The

channel over the bar leads between Purian Bank to the E and

Haing Gyi Shoal to the W.

8.7 The controlling depth in the river channel between Thamihla

Kyun and Bassein is the depth over Panmawaddy Flat. In 1964,

the channel was dredged to 5.2m.

8.7 Changes in the channel are frequent and the navigational

aids are scarce. This lack of navigational aids makes navigation

at night impracticable.

8.7 Due to the narrowness of the river at Bassein, single-screw

vessels exceeding a length of 137m and twin-screw vessels exceeding a length of 145m are advised not to attempt the upriver

passage.

8.7 Deep-draft vessels await HW in order to cross the entrance

bar; HW is essential to cross Panmawaddy Flat. Successive periods of HW are usually required and the passage in both directions ordinarily takes more than a day.

8.7 In heavy weather, the best time to cross the bar is between

half tide and 2 hours after HW at Thamihla Kyun. During the

Southwest Monsoon, a clearance of at least 1.2m under the

keel is considered necessary when crossing the entrance bar.

8.7 Haing Gyi Kyun (16°00'N., 94°19'E.), an island with a

135m hugh densely-wooded summit on its NE extremity, lies

with Rocky Point, its S extremity, about 5 miles ENE of Maw

Dengi. A 22m high tree on Southeast Point, about 0.3 mile

NNE of Rocky Point, is a good mark.

8.7 Wolf Rock (15°59'N., 94°20'E.), with a depth of less than

1.8m, lies about 0.4 mile off the E side of Haing Gyi Kyun.

Foul ground extends about 0.4 mile E and S from the rock.

8.7 The E bank of the river between Purian Point and Ward

Point, about 10.8 miles to the N, forms the SE side of the river

entrance.

8.8 Purian Bank (15°53'N., 94°22'E.) lies within the limits of the shore bank which extends about 6 miles NW and then

9.8 miles NE to Ward Point. Depths over this bank and shoal

are less than 5.5m.

8.8 Burgess Rock (16°00'N., 94°22'E.), with a least depth of

5.5m, lies about in the middle of the main fairway, about 2.8

miles WSW of Ward Point.

8.8 Dalhousie Point, on the W bank about 2.5 miles N of Ward

Point, is marked by several pagodas.

8.8 Long Sand (16°04'N., 94°28'E.), which consists of two islands lying on a long, narrow shoal, lies about 3 miles ENE of

Ward Point. Shoal depths extend about 3 miles WSW and NNE

from Long Sand.

8.8 Tazingyun (16°09'N., 94°32'E.), which consists of two islands close together, lies on the E side of the fairway about 4

miles above Long Sand.

8.8 Ransom Reach (16°17'N., 94°39'E.) is entered about 7.5

miles upriver from Tazingyun. Sesostris Rocks lie on the W

side of the reach; two small islands lie on the E side of the

reach.

8.8 Sinswe Kyun (16°23'N., 94°42'E.) lies in mid-channel at the

N end of Ransom Reach. Alexander Rock, with a least depth of

4.6m, lies in mid-channel about 0.5 mile S of Sinswe Kyun.

Pariah Rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies about 1.8

miles N of Sinswe Kyun at the outer edge of Enterprise Flat.

8.8 Amazon Point (16°29'N., 94°41'E.), on the E bank of the

river about 5.3 miles N of Sinswe Kyun, marks the S entrance

point of the shallow Panmawaddy River. Panmawaddy Flat,

with a least depth of 0.3m and surrounded by shoal depths of

5.5m and less, lies with its N end about 1.3 miles SW of Amazon Point.

8.8 Cockatoo Point (16°30'N., 94°40'E.), on the W bank of the

river, lies 1.8 miles NW of Amazon Point. Ashby Rocks,

marked by a beacon, lie close N of Cockatoo Point.

8.8 Elbow Point (16°32'N., 94°41'E.) lies about 2.8 miles NNW

of Amazon Point. Elbow Shoal, as defined by the 6m curve,

lies about 1 mile SSW of Elbow Point at the outer end of a spit

extending from the shore.

8.8 Rangoon Creek, on the SE side of Junction Reach, flows into

the Bassein River about 8.5 miles above the entrance of the

Panmawaddy River. Two conspicuous masts support telegraph

wires across its entrance.

8.8 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 9.1 to

10.1m, about 1 mile E of Dalhousie Point.

8.8 Vessels suspected of or infected with yellow fever must an-
Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 211

Pub. 173

chor off Dalhousie Point, not less than 0.5 mile distant from the

LW line. Vessels with plague or cholera on board may anchor

off Takaing Pagoda on the W bank of the river about 2 miles

below Bassein. Vessels with other diseases on board may anchor anywhere below the wharves.

8.9 Bassein (16°47'N., 94°44'E.) (World Port Index No.

49640), Burma’s second-largest seaport, lies on the E bank of

the Bassein River, about 75 miles above the mouth. Vessels

usually frequent the port between January and September.

Bassein is primarily a rice-exporting center. The port is open to

vessels up to 145m in length and 7m draft during the fine season and up to 7.3m draft during the Southwest Monsoon.

8.9 Each rice mill has one or more jetties, with alongside depths

of 5.2 to 7.6m. About 732m of berthing space is provided for

lighters and native craft.

8.9 Three fixed moorings, capable of accommodating vessels up

to 107m in length, lie off the jetties, in depths of 5.5 to 6.7m.

Larger vessels sometimes anchor or moor off the jetties.

8.9 Tugs and an ample supply of lighters are available for handling cargo.

8.9 Between Purian Point and Baragua Point, the S extremity of

the Pyapon District, about 55 miles to the E, the coast is indented by many of the outlets of the Irrawaddy River, including

the Hetkethaung River, the Ywe River, the Pyamalaw River,

the Irrawaddy River, and the Bogale River, five of its principal

mouths. This section of coast is low and nothing conspicuous is

visible from outside the shallow banks which front it.

8.9 A bank, on which the depths are less than 5.5m, fronts the

whole coast between Purian Point and Baragua Point and extends as much as 17 miles offshore from a position about 10

miles W of the latter point; numerous drying patches lie on the

E part of the bank including Baragua Flats, which extend about

8 miles SW from Baragua Point. The coast is not visible from

the S extremity of this bank.

8.9 Vessels should not approach this section of coast in depths of

less than 18.3m.

8.9 Baragua Point has been reported to be a good radar target up

to 29 miles.

The Gulf of Martaban

8.10 The Gulf of Martaban is entered between Baragua

Point and the coast extending N abreast of Kalegauk Island,

about 140 miles to the E. The Sittang River flows into the head

of the gulf, about 75 miles N of the entrance. The Rangoon

River and the Moulmein River enter the sea on the NW and E

sides, respectively, of the gulf.

8.10 The entire area of the gulf is shallow and anchorage can be

taken anywhere with a suitable draft, but prior to anchoring the

direction of the tidal current should be noted and very little

chain veered until the vessel stems it.

8.10 In 1981, a dangerous wreck was reported to lie in position

15°20'20"N, 96°36'12"E, about 60 miles SSE of Rangoon River Western Channel Entrance. Other dangerous wrecks and

navigational hazards in the Gulf of Martaban can best be seen

on the charts. 

8.10 In 1985, natural gas was discovered in large quantities up to

100 miles offshore in the Gulf of Martaban.

8.10 From Baragua Point, the coast extends NE for about 35

miles to the mouth of the Pyapon River, the W outlet of the

China Bakir River, and then ENE for about 23 miles to the

main outlet of the China Bakir River, which enters the sea

through extensive mud flats.

8.10 U Pe Beacon (15°44'N., 95°24'E.) lies about 4.5 miles ENE

of Baragua Point and 1.5 miles inland. Pymbong Beacon lies

near the coast about 6.8 miles ENE of U Pe Beacon.

8.11 Krishna Shoal (15°41'N., 95°37'E.), with a least

depth of 2.3m, extends about 12.5 miles NE as a narrow ridge

of hard sand, from a position about 11 miles SE of U Pe Beacon.

8.11 Sanda Lightship is moored 7.5 miles ESE of the SW end of

Krishna Shoal, but was reported (1978) to lie 7 miles NE.

8.11 A mud volcano, the position of which is approximate, was

reported to lie about 30 miles ENE of Pymbong Beacon.

8.11 A 9.1m detached patch was reported to lie about 43 miles

ESE of Pymbong Beacon.

8.11 The China Bakir River (16°19'N., 96°06'E.) entrance may

be identified by a clump of coconut palms on the W side and

by Kanyingon Village on the E side. A ruined pagoda stands in

the village and Tazaung Tower stands about 2.5 miles farther E.

Bassein Creek, navigable by small craft at HW, branches off

from the main outlet of the China Bakir River about 2.5 miles

within the entrance and connects with the Rangoon River about

10 miles below the city of Rangoon.

8.11 An extensive mud bank, which dries, fronts the coast between the mouth of the China Bakir River and Elephant Point

and extends up to 4.5 miles offshore. Dedaye or Desaing Flats

forms the SW part of the bank; Mye Saon Sand forms the NE

part of the bank. The remains of China Bakir Light are near the

SE point of the bank. These mud flats form the NW side of

Western Channel.

The Rangoon River—Approaches

8.12 Elephant Point (16°28'N., 96°20'E.), about 16 miles

NE of the entrance of the China Bakir River, marks the W side

of the entrance of the Rangoon River.

8.12 Elephant Point Tower stands 0.3 mile SW of the point; another tower stands 0.5 mile farther SW.

8.12 Thante Point (16°30'N., 96°23'E.), which lies on the E side

of the entrance of the Rangoon River, is low and lies about 3.5

miles ENE of Elephant Point. The low land on both sides of the

entrance of the river is not visible from seaward until about 7

miles from the coast.

8.12 Beacons stand on Mye Saon Sand, about 2.3 miles S and 4.5

miles SSW, respectively, of Elephant Point and are reported to

be conspicuous. These white conical framework beacons with

black topmarks stand on black bases. 

8.12 Winds—Weather.—The winds at the entrance of the

Rangoon River are NE in December and veer E, blowing fresh

during the day. The weather is generally good. In January the

wind is more N, but sometimes a strong E wind prevails for

several days. Towards the end of the month, light land and sea

breezes are observed in conjunction with thick and hazy weather.

8.12 In February and March, the land and sea breezes are regular.

Near the shore the sea breezes are fresh and generally the

strongest at the time of spring tides. Thick fogs prevail.
212 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

8.12 The Southwest Monsoon commences about the middle of

April. After a few stormy days the weather is clear until the beginning of May, when the monsoon develops fully and continues with few breaks until the end of October. In May and October, there is heavy but not continuous rainfall; in July and

August continuous rainfall is often experienced.

8.12 Tides—Currents.—Tides in the approaches to and in the

Rangoon River are semi-diurnal.

8.12 Between a position about 22 miles SSW of Baragua Point

and the entrance of the Rangoon River, the tidal currents set

NE and SW, on the flood and on the ebb, respectively. During

the Northeast Monsoon, the velocity at springs is 2 to 4 knots;

near the entrance of the Rangoon River the velocity is greater.

The ebb current is the stronger. Occasionally in October and

November, a W set is observed sufficiently steady and strong

enough to overcome the flood which sets to the NE.

8.12 There are rotary tidal currents, which shift clockwise, off the

mouths of the Irrawaddy River and off Baragua Flats. During

the Northeast Monsoon, these currents attain velocities of 1.5

to 2 knots at springs and about 0.8 knot at neaps. Close to the

mouths the tidal currents set in and out of the channels, attaining their greatest velocities at HW and LW.

8.12 In the vicinity of the pilot vessel station, about 20 miles S of

Elephant Point, the flood current sets about 034° and the ebb

about 214°. The time of HW in this vicinity occurs about 1.5

hours earlier than at Elephant Point.

8.12 In Western Channel the flood current begins setting NE toward the entrance of the river, but after the flats nearby are covered, about 2.5 hours after LW, the flood current changes

direction and sets strongly onto Mye Soan Sand over which it

runs directly for Elephant Point. The velocity at springs is 5 to

6 knots.

8.12 Considerable eddies may be experienced off Elephant Point,

especially on the first of the flood. The great body of the flood

passes E into the Sittang River.

8.12 The ebb current sets SW in Western Channel outside Elephant Point. Southeast of Elephant Point, the ebb currents set

across the channel onto a part of Eastern Sands.

8.12 A tide gauge and a tide gauge tower stand on Elephant Point.

8.12 Depths—Limitations.—Changes in the depths and in the

positions of the flats and shoals in the Rangoon River and its

entrance are so constant that the chart must be used with great

caution. A shifting bar, with fluctuating depths, obstructs the

approaches to the entrance of the river. The bar has a soft silt

bottom.

8.12 The 11m curve lies about 26.5 miles S of the river entrance;

depths within this curve shoal gradually toward the flats which

lie in the river mouth and on either side of the main fairway.

8.12 Thante Flats (Eastern Grove Flats) (16°28'N., 96°28'E.), an

extensive drying bank, extend almost 7 miles SE from Thante

Point. A shoal area, with depths of less than 5.5m, extends up

to 8 miles farther SE from the S edge of Thante Flats (Eastern

Grove Flats). 

8.12 A detached 4.6m patch lies about 20 miles SE of Thante

Point. Depths in this vicinity have been reported to have

shoaled considerably.

8.12 Eastern Sands (16°26'N., 94°24'E.), a shoal which dries up

to 2.4m in places, lies between 2 and 7 miles S of Thante Point.

8.12 A flat, which dries 0.3m, lies about 5.8 miles SSW of Thante

Point.

8.12 The entrance channels leading into the Rangoon River shift

frequently as the result of excessive silting. The navigational

aids which mark these channels are moved as necessary to conform to these changes. Buoys may be missing or unlit.

8.12 Western Channel is the main channel for entry into the

Rangoon River. The channel is approached via Lanthaya Light

Float (Fairway Light Float) and Lower Lighted Buoy. The

channel then leads N for 12 miles, converging with Desaing

Flats and Mye Saon. The channel is marked by a light float and

by lighted buoys, a number of which have been reported unlit. 

8.12 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for merchant vessels of

over 200 grt.

8.12 The pilot vessel is usually at anchor about 17 miles S of Elephant Point. The pilot boards about 1.5 miles E of Lanthaya

Light Float.

8.12 In the vicinity of the pilot vessel, the current sets about 034°

during the flood and 214° during the ebb.

8.12 Vessels of 8m draft and over must anchor about 13 miles S of

the pilot station and await instructions. 

8.12 A vessel approaching the pilot vessel to obtain a pilot should

pass astern of and never ahead of the pilot vessel; when in this

position, the vessel should make a lee for the boarding boat to

the prevailing weather.

8.12 To enable vessels to locate the pilot vessel during thick

weather, whether at anchor or underway, on the sound of a vessel’s whistle or siren being heard, the pilot vessel will sound,

on its whistle or siren, two long and two short blasts (letter Z of

the Morse code), and will repeat this signal at such intervals,

and for so long a period, as may be necessary to enable the approaching vessel to locate the pilot vessel.

8.12 Regulations.—The ETA should be sent 48 hours and 24

hours prior to arrival at the pilot station and should include the

following information: 

1. Vessel’s name and call sign.

2. Length overall and length between perpendiculars.

3. Gross tons, nrt, and dwt.

4. Fresh water draft fore and aft.

5. Maneuvering speed and sea speed.

6. Condition of navigational equipment and anchors.

8.12 Signals.—The pilot vessel is radio equipped and displays the

following signals:

1. By day—The regulation pilot flag (Hotel) and, if at

anchor, a black ball.

2. At night—Lights and signals as prescribed by the

Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea.

8.12 Anchorage.—Deep-draft vessels, awaiting a pilot or anchoring for other reasons, should anchor SE of Lanthaya Light

Float. In good weather, sea and swell permitting, medium-draft

vessels may anchor about 2 miles E of Lanthaya Light Float

(Fairway Light Float) (16°13'N., 96°17'E.)

8.12 Deep-draft vessels drawing over 7.3m may not anchor at the

pilot station. A message from the pilot vessel will advise of a

safe anchorage and also when to return to embark the pilot.

8.12 Directions.—A vessel approaching the Rangoon River from

the W should pass about 5 miles S of Alguada Reef and then

steer to pass about 26 miles S of Baragua Point. Course may

then be altered to the NE to make for a position 8 miles S of

Rangoon Pilot Station, passing approximately 2 miles SE of

Sanda Light Vessel. Once S of the pilot station, course should

be altered N for the pilot vessel and then NNE to pass E of
Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 213

Pub. 173

Lanthaya Light Float (Fairway Light Float) and into the river

entrance.

8.12 During February and March, when thick fogs are liable to

occur, great caution is necessary when approaching the entrance of the Rangoon River, as there is not a sufficiently

marked change in the depths in the channel to enable a vessel

to determine its position by sounding.

8.12 Vessels approaching the Rangoon River from the E should

keep in depths of 10.1 to 11m until the position has been ascertained. Consideration must be given the tidal current, remembering that the flood or NE current sets very strongly toward

and over the shallows of the entrance of the Sittang River.

8.12 Caution.—Soundings are not an accurate guide in approaching the entrance of the Rangoon River. It is important to remember that the shore of the Irrawaddy Delta is so low as to be

invisible until within a few miles of it and that shallow banks

extend in places to considerable distances offshore. During

February and March, when thick fogs are frequent, great caution is necessary when approaching the entrance.

8.12 Changes in depths in the river and approaches are so rapid

and frequent that charts of the area should not be taken as a

sure guide.

8.12 Dangerous wrecks lie approximately 4 miles S of Thuriya

Light Float and 11 miles ENE of the charted position of Sanda

Light Vessel. Numerous wrecks, best seen on chart, lie ESE of

Lanthaya Light Float. The partially submerged wreck of the

Dagon Light Vessel lies approximately 12 miles SSW of Lanthaya Light Float. A large navigational buoy (LANBY) is anchored near the wreck.

The Rangoon River to Rangoon

8.13 The Rangoon River, the E channel through the Irrawaddy Delta, flows into the Gulf of Martaban between Elephant Point and Thante Point. The river channel leads in a

general NNW direction from Elephant Point to the port of

Rangoon, about 21 miles above the entrance. Most of the low,

flat, and sparsely-wooded land bordering the river consists of

rice paddies. Compact clumps of trees lie in the vicinity of the

villages.

8.13 Winds—Weather.—The climate in Rangoon is tropical

throughout the year, with three distinct seasons, which are the

monsoon period, the cool period, and the hot period.

8.13 During the monsoon season (Southwest Monsoon), from

about mid-May through September, Rangoon receives most of

its average 2,700mm rainfall for the year. Temperatures are

moderately warm, 24° to 32°C, but the humidity is very high.

8.13 After a brief period of warm, humid weather following the

monsoon, the cool season begins about mid-November. From

this time until March, the weather is pleasantly cool, 18 to

29°C, and dry with low humidity. Days are sunny with the

nights being cool and the weather is clear.

8.13 Beginning in March the temperature and humidity commence to rise uncomfortably and the dry land bakes in the hot

season until the first of the monsoon rains bring relief. During

this season the temperature may rise to 41°C, although the average would be about 35°C.

8.13 Tides—Currents.—Tides at Rangoon are semidiurnal. The

Rangoon River tides are subject to a large diurnal inequality;

the times of HW and LW may occur as much as 1 hour before

or after the computed times. The rise and fall of the tide at the

port as well as near the entrance of the river is considerable.

8.13 Several tide gauges stand on the banks of the river between

its entrance and the anchorage S of Hastings Sand.

8.13 A tide gauge and a tidal semaphore stand in the harbor, about

0.3 mile W of Monkey Point.

8.13 The position of the three arms of the tidal semaphore, as observed from S, indicate the height of the tide above LWS tide

level, as follows:

1. Upper arm

a. Inclined to the right at 45° angle—1.8m.

b. Placed horizontally to the right—3.7m.

c. Inclined to the right at 45° angle below horizontal—5.5m.

d. Inclined to the left at 45° angle—7.3m.

2. Center arm

a. Inclined to the right at 45° angle—1.8m.

b. Placed horizontally to the right—3.7m.

c. Inclined to the right at 45° angle below horizontal—5.5m.

d. Inclined to the left at 45° angle—1.2m.

e. Placed horizontally to the left—1.5m.

3. Lower arm

a. Inclined to the right at 45° angle—0.09m.

b. Placed horizontally to the right—0.18m.

c. Inclined to the right at 45° angle below horizontal—0.27m.

8.13 In the river, the current follows the course of the channel.

Along this course, during spring tides, there are strong eddies

off the points of land; the tidal currents attain excessive velocities.

8.13 Close within the entrance of the river above Elephant Point,

the channel is confined between Middle Bank and the W bank

of the river; here the flood current attains velocities of 5 to 6

knots at springs. Above Middle Bank the velocity decreases.

8.13 The tidal current attains its maximum velocity of 5 to 6 knots

in the channels on the night of the second day after full or new

moon. The interval of slack water is only a few minutes. After

neap tides the tidal current gradually increases in velocity and

is rapid until the moon quarters, when the velocity suddenly

decreases. On the second and third day after the moon quarters,

there is slack water on the flood current for 1.5 hours and for 1

hour on the ebb.

8.13 At springs, the flood current sets in abruptly and the tide rises 1.8m in the first hour. During this period the ebb current

continues running in mid-channel; slack water occurs at the

end of this hour. The flood current turns earlier inshore than in

mid-channel.

8.13 The effect of the rains which augment the river during the

rainy season, June to September inclusive, is to weaken the

flood current and strengthen the ebb. At times the flood current

is weakened to the extent that vessels moored in Rangoon Harbor do not swing to it.

8.13 During spring tides, at times other than the rainy season, tidal currents in the harbor may attain velocities of 5 to 6 knots.

The flood current commences about 0.5 hour after time of LW

and the ebb about 1.3 hours after time of HW.

8.13 Tidal bores, about 0.9m high, sweep up the Pegu River in the

sudden rising of the early flood, especially in February, March,

and April.
214 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

8.13 Depths—Limitations.—The port of Rangoon is accessible

to ocean-going vessels drawing 9.1m, subject to tide and monsoon conditions. A draft of 8.5 to 9.1m can be taken over the

bar at Monkey Point during spring tides, however; in early

1967, because of heavy silting, the maximum draft that could

be taken over the outer bar was reduced to 7.9m. The bend in

the channel at Monkey Point imposes a maximum length limitation of 182.9m to vessels which can be safely taken through

the channel in this vicinity. There is no beam restriction. Vessels over 183m in length are usually moored off Hastings Sand.

8.13 Night navigation on the river is practicable up to within the

harbor limit, S of Hastings Sand.

8.13 Bars in the river, caused in part by excessive silting, cause

fluctuations in the depths. Usually the controlling river depths

over the bars range between 7.3 and 9.4m at HW, but vary depending on the tides which have considerable variance

throughout the year. The maximum depths occur toward the

end of the monsoon season, August to November. The minimum depths occur prior to the monsoon season, February to

May.

8.13 The positions of the bars and banks, as well as the depths

over them, are constantly changing; the chart should not be accepted as completely accurate and up-to-date.

8.13 Draft limitations are calculated according to the prevailing

depths over the bar at the entrance of the river. Provisional

drafts, subject to change without notice, are forecast for each

month.

8.13 The description of the Rangoon River between its entrance

and the port of Rangoon is confined to the shoals and banks in

mid-river. Navigational aids mark most of these dangers.

Range lights lead up the river starting in Middle Bank Channel. 

8.13 Middle Bank (16°30'N., 96°20'E.), a continuation of Eastern Sands to the NW, lies in mid-channel with its NW end

about 4.5 miles NW of Elephant Point. The whole bank dries

from 0.3 to 2.7m. The SE end of this bank is marked by a lighted buoy. 

8.13 Hmawun Lumps (16°34'N., 96°15'E.), which barely dry, lie

on the E side of the main channel about 2 miles NW of the NW

extremity of Middle Bank.

8.13 An obstruction, with a depth of 3.7m, lies NNW of the N end

of Hmawun Lumps and is best seen on the chart. 

8.13 D’Silva Shoal (16°38'N., 96°15'E.), with a least depth of

0.3m, lies on the NE part of a narrow bank with depths of less

than 5.5m, which parallels the W bank of the river. The S end

of this bank lies 2.5 miles NNW of Hmawun Lumps and the N

end closes the shore about 3.3 miles to the N.

8.13 A line drawn between Sinha’s Beacon, on the shore abreast

of the N end of the above bank and North Beacon on the opposite shore, marks the S limit of Rangoon Harbor.

8.13 An obstruction, with a depth of 7m, lies about 1 mile E of

Sinha’s Beacon. A wreck, with a least depth of 1.8m, lies 0.3

mile ESE of the obstruction. 

8.13 Chokey Shoal (16°41'N., 96°14'E.), with depths of less than

5.5m, lies in the middle of the river with its S end about 1.5

miles NNW of Sinha’s Beacon.

8.13 Chokey Track, which leads between Chokey Shoal and the E

bank of the river, is subject to sudden shoaling and may have

depths of less than 3.7m between August and March.

8.13 Hastings Sand (16°44'N., 96°13'E.), a drying bank about 1

mile long, lies on the W side of the main fairway about 5.5

miles NNW of Sinha’s Beacon.

8.13 Kings Bank Sand (16°44'N., 96°12'E.), a similar drying

bank, lies about 0.5 mile SW of Hastings Sand.

8.13 The Pegu River (16°46'N., 96°13'E.) flows into the

Rangoon River between Syriam Point and Pegu Point. The

Pegu River is navigable by light-draft vessels only.

8.13 Monkey Point (16°46'N., 96°12'E.), the SW entrance point

of Pazundaung Creek, lies at the E end of the city of Rangoon

about 0.5 mile SW of Pegu Point. The port of Rangoon comprises a 3.5 mile-long section of the Rangoon River W of Monkey Point. A beacon stands on Mower’s Point, on the S bank of

the Rangoon River, about 3.3 miles W of Monkey Point.

8.13 Twante Canal (16°46'N., 96°08'E.) is entered close W of

Mower’s Point; Kanaungto Creek is entered about 0.5 mile SW

of the entrance to Twante Canal. The NW limit of the Port of

Rangoon is defined by beacons on both shores of the creek

about 3.5 miles NW of Mower’s Point.

Rangoon (Yangon) (16°46'N., 96°10'E)

World Port Index No. 49650

8.14 Rangoon (Yangon) is the capital, chief city, and principal port of the Union of Burma. It lies on the N bank of the

Rangoon River, between Monkey Point and Kanaungto Creek

3.8 miles to the W.

8.14 Modern alongside berthing facilities are provided as well as

numerous mooring berths in the river abreast of the city.

8.14 The port of Rangoon is a first port of entry.

8.14 Depths—Limitations.—Wrecks and obstructions still exist

in the river abreast of the city of Rangoon, especially between

positions 1.3 and 3.3 miles W of Monkey Point.

8.14 Between positions about 1 and 1.8 miles W of Monkey

Point, depths in the river range from 6.4 to 9.1m. These depths

exist abreast of the small wharves closest to Monkey Point, but

are subject to rapid change because of heavy silting. Farther W,

abreast of Brooking Street Wharfand Sule Pagoda Wharf, the

depths range from 7.6 to 12.2m. Abreast Mower’s Point, the

depths range from 9.1 to 18.3m.

Rangoon (Yangon) Port
Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 215

Pub. 173

8.14 The following wharves are available for ocean-going vessels:

1. Sule Pagoda Wharf, with depths alongside of 7.3 to

9.1m, can accommodate seven general cargo vessels. Berth

lengths are, as follows: 

a. Berth No. 1—137m.

b. Berth No. 2—137m.

c. Berth No. 3—137m.

d. Berth No. 4—137m.

e. Berth No. 5—160m.

f. Berth No. 6—160m.

g. Berth No. 7—158m.

2. Bo Aung Gyaw Wharf, with depths alongside of 7.3

to 9.1m, handles containers and general cargo. Berth lengths

are, as follows: 

a. Berth No. 1—137m.

b. Berth No. 2—137m.

c. Berth No. 3—183m.

3. Ahlone Wharf, with depths alongside of 7.9 to 8.5m,

handles containers and general cargo. Berth lengths are, as

follows: 

a. Berth No. 1—208m.

b. Berth No. 2—150m.

4. Hteedan Berth is 180m long, with depths alongside of

7.9 to 9.1m; it handles geberal cargo.

5. Hteedan Rice Berth, with depths alongside of 7.0 to

8.5m, is 139m long and handles rice and rice products. 

6. A pontoon jetty at the Port Health Station, with a large

floating pontoon 152m long, has depths alongside of 7.6 to

8.5m, and handles general cargo. 

7. Thaketa Wharf has two berths, each 106m long.

These berths handle general cargo, coasters, and passenger

vessels. 

8.14 Two tanker berths are available. One can accommodate a

vessel 160m long, with a draft of 8.7m; the other can accommodate a vessel 171m long, with a draft of 7.9m.

8.14 Numerous mooring buoys in the harbor W of Monkey Point

provide fixed and free-swinging berths.

8.14 The maximum length of vessel that can be accommodated,

due of the spacing of the mooring buoys, is 168 to 175m. Vessels with slightly longer lengths can be accommodated by removing a buoy. Mooring buoys are laid for large vessels in the

river off Syriam.Vessels secure to the pendants with their own

cables; all mooring shackles must be in good working order.

8.14 Myanmar International Terminal Thilawa (MITT) is a container facility situated on the E bank of the Rangoon River at

Thilawa, about 7 miles downriver from Rangoon. The facility

has a berthing length of 1,000m, with an alongside depth of

10m. 

8.14 Pilotage.—General pilotage information applicable to the

approaches to the Rangoon River has been previously described in paragraph 8.12.

8.14 Near the river bend abreast of Monkey Point, a harbormaster

and mooring crew take over direction of the inbound vessel

from the pilot. The vessel is berthed alongside a wharf, anchored, or moored to buoys at the discretion of the harbormaster. Unmooring is accomplished by a similar crew. Berthing

operations within the harbor are limited to daylight hours.

8.14 Masters of vessels preparing to depart must apply for a pilot

at least 24 hours prior to the time of sailing. Immediately after

a vessel has cleared its moorings or otherwise cast off, the outbound pilot takes over direction of the vessel.

8.14 Regulations.—Port officials board vessels off Monkey

Point. Vessels with a draft of 8m or more must anchor about 8

miles S of the pilot station,and await instructions from the pilot.

8.14 The boarding pilot will hand the master a book of port rules

and regulations. This book will cover in detail the majority of

the vessel’s activities in the port of Rangoon, as well as items

of general information. Fines are imposed for violation of

many of the rules; a close study of them is obviously important.

8.14 Signals.—Vessels intending to transit Monkey Point Channel during daylight should display the International Code Flag

Signal BB when passing Dry Tree Point. If the intentions of the

vessel are changed, the signal should be lowered for the information of outbound vessels.

8.14 Storm and weather signals are displayed from a flagstaff

near the port commissioner’s offices; the Indian Extended System is used. Further information on these storm signals may be

found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South

Atlantic Ocean and Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

8.14 Contact Information.—The port can be contacted, as follows: 

1. VHF: VHF channels 10, 12, 14, and 16

2. Radiotelephone: 2182 kHz, 8250 kHz, 8364 khz,

and 12422.4 kHz

3. Telephone: 95-1-256913

95-1-256903

95-1-256562

4. Facsimile: 95-1-256913

95-1-256321

95-1-256336

5. E-mail: mpa-sad@mptmail.net.mm

8.14 Anchorage.—Anchorages for cargo vessels, vessels carrying explosives, vessels carrying dangerous petroleum products,

and quarantine anchorages are described in the port rules book.

8.14 The anchorage for vessels carrying explosives lies in the E

side of the river NW of Chokey Point.

8.14 The lower quarantine anchorage, the same as that for vessels

carrying dangerous petroleum products, lies in the E side of the

river NNW of Chokey Point and N to Hastings Sand. This anchorage is used by vessels awaiting favorable tide conditions to

cross the bar at Monkey Point; vessels also use the anchorage

for topping-off purposes.

8.14 Other anchorages are best seen on the chart. 

8.14 Caution.—Submarine pipelines are laid across the mouth of

the Pegu River and close within the mouth of Pazundaung

Creek; anchorage is prohibited in these areas.

8.14 Two submarine cables border the limit of the harbor in the

Pegu River.

The Irrawaddy River

8.15 The navigable length of the Irrawaddy River and its

branches totals about 800 miles from the sea to Bhamo. Intensive traffic is carried on by native craft and by river craft of

varying draft belonging principally to the Inland Waterways

Transport Board. This traffic is facilitated by the rise of the river due to seasonal heavy rains.

8.15 Ocean-going vessels, as a rule, proceed no farther than the
216 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

ports of Bassein and Rangoon, where the industrial and maritime activities of the entire region converge.

8.15 Changes in the channels, the depths, and the velocity and direction of the current are so frequent and so marked that navigation of the Irrawaddy River is always complicated. For

example, different routes between the same two river towns often exist; the route is selected only after considering the draft

and length of the craft and the season of the year, dry or rainy.

8.15 Craft with drafts of 1.2m can reach Bhamo at all seasons;

craft with drafts of 1.8m can reach Thayetmo. The passage was

once accomplished in July by a vessel drawing 3.1m.

8.15 Tides—Currents.—The tidal influence is observed as far as

Danubyu, about 70 miles from the coast.

8.15 The seasonal rise of the river begins in March and attains its

maximum height in September. At Prome, 318 miles above

Rangoon, the mean high level is about 1m above the dry season

level. The rise varies, but as a rule the rise below Prome is

somewhat less and above Prome, it is somewhat more than the

mean high level.

8.15 The average velocity of the river current is 3 knots in portions of the river above the limit of the tidal influence. At some

points it is 5 to 6 knots; at Akauktaung (18°25'N., 95°11'E.), a

velocity of 7.5 knots has been recorded in August.

8.15 Pilotage.—The frequent fluctuations of the river can be

closely followed only by the local pilots, of which many are

natives. Each pilot is qualified for a portion of the river about

65 miles long. They are considered trustworthy.

8.16 Mandalay (21°59'N., 96°08'E.), about 350 miles N of

Rangoon, is the headquarters of the division and district of

Mandalay as well as the chief city of Upper Burma. Mandalay

is connected to the railway and telegraph systems; river steamers communicate regularly with the city. The following table

gives the names of the more important cities and towns on the

waterway and the distances, in miles, by river. 

The Gulf of Martaban

8.17 The Gulf of Martaban lies N of an imaginary line between Baragua Point and Kalegauk Island about 135 miles to

the E. The gulf is relatively shallow within its limits, with the

20m curve lying about even with the imaginary line between

Baragua Point and Kalegauk Island. Depths N of this curve decrease gradually N toward the shore and the mouth of the Sittang River.

8.17 The coast ENE of the entrance of the Rangoon River to the

mouth of the Sittang River is low and fronted by an extensive

shallow mud and sand bank. This area is very dangerous to

shipping.

The Sittang River to the Tavoy River

8.18 The Sittang River Entrance (16°50'N., 96°55'E.) lies

at the head of the Gulf of Martaban and is fronted by shallow

dangerous depths. Only native craft can transit the river. Canals

within the entrance lead through the inland waterway system.

8.18 A dangerous bore sweeps up the Sittang River at spring tides

and is often followed by an equally dangerous choppy sea.

8.18 The coast E of the entrance of the Sittang River and that part

of the coast fronting the Gulf of Martaban SSE to the entrance

of the Moulmein River is low and alluvial. From the entrance

of the Moulmein River SSE to abreast of Kaleguak Island, the

remaining coast is low with a few scattered hills of less than

305m high.

8.18 In the vicinity of the entrance of the Ye River, the hills become more numerous and mountain ranges begin to parallel

the coast. South of the Ye River to Heinze Chaung, some conspicuous peaks rise from these ranges.

8.18 Southsoutheast of Heinze Chaung to the entrance of the Tavoy River, coastal ranges with prominent peaks continue to

parallel the coast. Between Maungmagan Bay and Tavoy Point

the bold, rocky coast is broken by many small indentations.

8.18 Depths—Limitations.—Depths of 11 to 18.3m lie off the

coast between the SW shore of Bilugyun Island and the N end

of Kalegauk Island.

8.18 Between Kalegauk Island and Tavoy Point, the 20m curve

lies at distances of 11 miles to less than 1 mile offshore.

8.18 From a position about 10 miles W of the entrance of the Heinze Chaung, the 40m curve is charted in a very irregular pattern to the W. Toward the Gulf of Martaban, depths of less than

36.6m lie N of the curve.

8.18 Between Heinze Chaung and Tavoy Point, the 40m curve lies

at distances of about 7 to 24 miles offshore. All of the off-lying

islands and dangers between Bilugyun Island and Tavoy Point

lie inside the 40m curve.

8.18 Depths and dangers which lie inside the 20m curve are described in detail together with that part of the coast which they

front. Ross Sand is the only exception.

8.18 Headlam Patch (15°08'N., 97°38'E.), which has a least

depth of 11.9m, lies about 8.5 miles WSW of Pagoda Point and

is about 2.5 miles long and 1 mile wide.

8.18 Shearme Sand (15°04'N., 97°35'E.), a long, narrow shoal

with a least depth of 11m, lies about 12.8 miles SW of Pagoda

Point.

8.18 Ross Sand (14°55'N., 97°41'E.), a narrow shoal about 9

miles long, with depths of less than 11m, lies with its N end

about 5 miles W of Da That Island. The N part of the sand has

a least depth of 3m and is usually marked by discolored water

and tide rips. A narrow shoal, with depths of 11.9 to 18.3m,

lies about 2 miles W of Ross Sand.

8.18 Sinclair Shoal (14°53'N., 97°21'E.), with two detached

9.1m patches, lies about 14.5 miles WNW of the S end of Ross

Sand.

Rangoon to Thayetmyo 305

Thayetmyo to Minhla 46

Minhla to Yenangyaung 40

Yenangyaung to Pagan 42

Pagan to Myingyan 40

Myingyan to Mandalay 65

Mandalay to Kabwet 56

Kabwet to Myadaung 70

Miles Myadaung to Modah 45

Modah to Bhamo 53

Rangoon to Bhamo (total) 762
Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 217

Pub. 173

The Moscos Islands

8.19 The Moscos Islands (14°10'N., 97°48'E.) comprise

three groups of uninhabited islands known as the Heinze Islands (North Moscos), the Maungmagan Islands (Middle

Moscos), and the Launglon Bok Islands (South Moscos). The

groups lie parallel to the coast for a distance of 42 miles with

North Island, the N island, lying about 14 miles SSW of Kandaung Promontory. The group lies within the 40m curve and are

generally steep-to on their W sides.

8.19 North Island (14°28'N., 97°47'E.), 138m high, is the N island of the Heinze Islands. Some rocks, 8.5m high, lie 0.5 mile

NNE of North Island.

8.19 North Patch, which dries 2.4m, lies about 2 miles N of North

Island. East Ledge, which dries 4.6m, lies about 1.5 miles E of

North Island.

8.19 Heinze Bok, 312m high and the largest of the Heinze Islands, lies about 2 miles S of North Island. Two islands and

some above-water rocks lie in between. Reef Islet, 51.5m high,

lies 1.5 miles E of the S end of Heinze Bok. A rock, with a

depth of less than 1.8m, lies close S of Reef Islet.

8.19 Bok Ye-gan (14°16'N., 97°49'E.), 359m high and the furthest

S of the Heinze Islands, lies about 6.5 miles SSE of Heinze Bok.

Two islets lie within 1 mile of the NE side of Bok Ye-gan and

four islets lie between Bok Ye-gan and Heinze Bok.

8.19 The Maungmagan Islands comprise four densely-wooded islands. Sabyat (14°12'N., 97°47'E.), 119m high and the northernmost island of the group, lies 3.8 miles SSW of Bok Ye-gan.

North Island, the largest of the group, lies 1 mile farther S. Pasut Kyun lies 0.5 mile SE of the middle of the SE side of North

Island, and South Island lies 0.8 mile SE of the S extremity of

North Island.

8.19 Kyank Butaung and Nghettaik Taung lie 3 miles E of North

Island.

8.19 Maungmagan Passage (14°00'N., 97°50'E.), a deep clear

channel with depths of 25.6 to 42.1m, lie between the

Maungmagan Islands and the Launglon Bok Islands.

8.19 North Island, Hngetthaik Kyun, and South Island are the

principal islands of the Launglon Bok Islands. All lie close together in a N and S direction. Atema Kyun lies close off the E

side of North Island; Kama Kyun lies close off the E side of

South Island. All islands of the group are densely wooded.

8.19 Kyaukpyu Kyun (13°46'N., 97°55'E.), a jungle-covered

rocky islet 49m high, lies 1 mile SE of the S extremity of South

Island.

8.19 South Ledge, which dries 4.6m, lies about 0.8 mile S of the S

extremity of South Island.

8.19 During bad weather, it is recommended that anchorage be

taken E of Maungmagan Island, in depths of 16.5 to 21.9m, between Nghettaik Taung and South Island and, in depths of 16.5

to 18.3m, E of Sabyat Kyun.

8.19 Anchorage can be taken E of North Island of the Launglon

Bok Group, in depths of 21.9 to 25.6m, with Atema Kyun bearing 350°.

8.19 Moscos Channel (14°30'N., 97°51'E.) lies between the three

groups of the Moscos Islands and the coast to the E. Depths in

the fairway range from 18.3 to 36.6m, except at its N end E of

North Ledge and North Patch, where the depths are less than

18.3m.

The Moulmein River

8.20 The Moulmein River (16°09'N., 97°31'E.) has its

source about several hundred miles inland and discharges into

the Gulf of Martaban between the S end of Bilugyun Island and

the mainland. The Martaban River branches off from the Moulmein River abreast of the city of Moulmein and discharges into

the gulf between the N end of Bilugyun Island and the mainland. This latter river is not navigable.

8.20 The entrance of the Moulmein River lies between Tounzoun

Point and Amherst Point, about 9 miles to the S.

8.20 The port of Moulmein, about 26 miles N of the river’s entrance, lies opposite the NE extremity of Bilugyun Island.

8.20 Depths—Limitations.—The river is generally navigable

from the gulf to Moulmein by vessels drawing 3.7 to 4.9m at

HWN and 5.8 to 7.3m at HWS. The draft varies according to

the monsoon seasons. In 1960, vessels with drafts up to 7.6m

entered the port.

8.20 Vessels approaching the entrance of the Moulmein River

from the W should pass 6 to 8 miles S of Sanda Light Vessel in

depths of 25.6 to 29.3m and then steer to make Double Island.

This island should be passed a convenient distance to the W

and kept bearing less than 153° until the lighthouse on Green

Island bears 048°, when the outer anchorage should be steered

for on that bearing.

8.20 During March, when the land near the entrance of the Moulmein River is seldom seen from a greater distance than 0.5

mile, a landfall must be made well S of the entrance and a position off Double Island ascertained before shaping course for

the river entrance.

8.20 In clear weather and often on a bright moonlit night, the high

mountains on the mainland E of Double Island may be sighted

before the lighthouse or the light on Double Island.

8.20 In thick weather and during the Southwest Monsoon, the

land a little S of Kalegauk Island should be made if the position

of the vessel is doubtful. In bad weather, particularly at or near

spring tides, vessels should not proceed to the anchorage off

Amherst, but should pass inside of Kalegauk Island and anchor

in Bentinck Sound.

8.20 When proceeding from Rangoon to the entrance of the

Moulmein River in fine and clear weather, the lofty peak of the

Zingyaik Range and the high land of Bilugyun Island and of

Sin Taung may all be identified. In thick weather, especially

during February, March, and April, it is advisable to make the

land between Button Island and Setse Yele Paya.

8.20 Vessels frequently run aground on Bilugyun Sands in fog as

a result of being too far N of the landfalls mentioned for approaches in thick weather. Soundings do not give warnings of

the near approach to the banks, rocks, and shoals which border

the E shore of the Gulf of Martaban.

8.20 When proceeding from Rangoon to Moulmein, great care

should be exercised to allow for the strong tidal currents.

8.20 For a distance of about 10 miles S of Dolphin’s Nose, vessels

should not approach within 7 miles of the coast. The depths are

less than 9.1m. Farther S, a closer approach to the coast may be

made abreast Luce Hill and Sieve Hill.

8.20 Vessels transiting Moscos Channel during the day should

pass E of North Ledge. At the S entrance of the channel, vessels should not pass between Kyaukpyu Kyun and South

Ledge.
218 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

8.20 Tides—Currents.—Between the entrance of the Rangoon

River and the Moulmein River, the flood current sets toward

and into the Sittang River. On the Rangoon side of this area the

set is NNE and N; on the Moulmein side the set is NNW. The

general direction of the flood current in other parts of the Gulf

of Martaban is NNE. It becomes more N as the E shore is approached; within a distance of 10 miles it parallels the shore.

The ebb current in all parts of the gulf sets almost invariable in

a direction opposite to that of the flood current. The velocities

of the tidal currents at springs increase from 2 to 3 knots in

depths of over 36.6m to from 6 to 7 knots in position 16°15'N,

97°00'E. During and immediately after the Southwest Monsoon, the duration and velocity of the ebb current are increased

and those of the flood current are decreased. The duration of

slack water at springs does not usually exceed 0.5 hour.

8.20 In the approaches to the entrance of the Moulmein River the

flood current sets N along the coast. The ebb current at first

sets WSW and then S. The velocity of the ebb current is considerable as a result of the flow from the Sittang River and the

Moulmein River.

8.20 In the vicinity of Double Island, the flood current sets N and

the ebb S. The velocity at springs is 4.5 knots and neaps 2

knots. The tidal currents turn about 0.5 hour later than at Amherst Point.

8.20 Tidal currents attain velocities of 3 knots at springs in the

channel between Hnetthalk Kyun and the mainland W of Tavoy

Point.

8.21 The coast E of the entrance of the Sittang River is low

and backed by the Zingyaik Mountains, which roughly parallel

the coast about 9 miles inland N of Biligyun Island. Pagodas

stand on the northernmost summits which have the greatest elevation.

8.21 As the mountains rise a considerable distance inland from

navigable waters, their value as navigable aids are greatly reduced. However, on a clear day they are visible up to distances

in excess of 50 miles.

8.21 Bilugyun Island (16°23'N., 97°31'E.), about 17 miles long

and 8 miles wide, has a range of wooded hills on its N part

which attain elevations of over 180m. Several isolated lower

hills rise in the S part of the island. Steep-to shoals front the W

side of the N part of the island as far as 4 to 5 miles offshore.

Touzoun Point and an unnamed point about 0.8 mile to the E

are the S extremities of Bilugyun Island.

8.21 Under normal conditions, the length of a vessel entering the

port is limited to 137.2m if a single-screw vessel and 144.8m if

a twin-screw vessel. Reports indicate a vessel with a length of

152.4m may be taken to Moulmein under ideal conditions.

8.21 The navigable depth available is related to the power of the

vessel. Because of strong cross-channel currents, the deepest

channel is not always available to vessels not capable of a 10-

knot speed.

8.21 Entrance into the river at night is not permitted. No vessel

should attempt to enter the river without a pilot on board.

8.21 During the monsoon season, the maximum sailing draft from

Moulmein, in May to September, ranges from 4.6 to 7.4m.

During the dry season, October to April, the draft ranges from

3.4 to 6.9m.

8.21 Winds—Weather.—From July to September, the weather is

stormy. In December, January, and February, the winds are

light and the weather is fine.

8.21 The mornings and evenings of days in January are misty; towards the end of the month the weather becomes foggy. Fogs

become thick and frequent toward the end of February and

throughout March. During this interval, they last at times for 3

or 4 days and obscure even the banks of the river.

8.21 When the farmers burn waste paddy straw, dense smoke further reduces visibility.

8.21 Rainfall is heavy between May and September.

8.21 Storm and weather signals are displayed from the port office

flagstaff; the Indian General System is used. Further information on these storm signals may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing

Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and Indian

Ocean under “India—Signals.”

8.21 Tides—Currents.—Tides at Amherst Point and Moulmein

are semidiurnal.

8.21 Tides in the river to the port of Moulmein are subject to large

diurnal inequalities and seasonal variations.

8.21 Tide gauges stand in the following positions:

1. Near the landing about 0.5 mile ENE of Amherst

Point.

2. On the E bank of the river, about 7 miles NNE of Amherst Point.

3. Off the W side of New Kingyaung Island.

4. On the W side of the river, off the point at Nathmaw.

5. Off the E bank, about 0.5 mile SSW of Mupon Pagoda.

6. Off the port office at Moulmein.

8.21 These gauges are painted in red, black, and white bands

which comprise a 1.8m section. To the top of the red band is

1.8m, and to the top of the white band is 0.9m. Each band is

0.3m high; the 0.6m black bands between the red and white

bands have narrow white lines across the middle, marking two

equal divisions of 0.3m each.

8.21 Each bar in the river has its own particular tide gauge, which

is moved as the bar shifts.

8.21 The zeros of the tide gauges are set to the level of Indian

Spring LW.

8.21 A tidal semaphore, 24.4m high and painted red, stands on the

W bank of the river at Nathmaw, about 1 mile WSW of the S

end of Yele Kyun. It is visible from the S end of Ameila Crossing, about 2 miles E of the S extremity of Hintha Kyun. Another semaphore, 15.2m high and painted white, stands at Thetkaw on the W bank, about 2 miles above Nathmaw. It is visible

from the S from abreast the N part of Hintha Kyun and N from

the berths off Mupon.

8.21 The system is the same as the one used in the Karnaphuli

River and registers the rise of the tide during daylight hours.

8.21 In the offing abreast Amherst, the flood or N current commences about 0.5 hour after LW at Amherst Point; the ebb or S

current commences about 0.5 hour after HW. The velocity of

the current is 3.8 knots at springs and 2 knots at neaps. The interval of slack water is very short.

8.21 Off the entrance of the Moulmein River the flood current sets

towards Longstones Reef; when the outer banks are covered it

sets strongly E or NE over the sands.

8.21 Off Green Island during the dry season, the flood current

commences at the time of LW at Amherst while the ebb current
Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 219

Pub. 173

commences 1 hour after HW at Amherst.

8.21 During the dry season, the velocity of the river current is 3

knots. In the rainy season the velocity is higher; during August,

the rains raise the level of the river to 8.5m and a velocity of 7

knots is attained.

8.21 At Anchoring Creek, on the E side of the river abreast the S

end of Hintha Kyun, the flood current commences 2.3 hours after LW at Amherst; the ebb current commences 1.5 hours after

HW at Amherst.

8.21 At Nathmaw, the flood current commences 3.2 hours after

LW at Amherst while the ebb current 1.7 hours after HW at

Amherst.

8.21 The durations of the flood and ebb tidal currents at Amherst

are the same the year round.

8.21 Depths—Limitations.—Considerably less water than charted is reported to exist in the approaches to the entrance of the

Moulmein River.

8.21 After every monsoon, marked changes are observed; alterations in the arrangement of the channel and the river banks occur and the bars are often found in new positions, with altered

depths over them.

8.21 The entrance of the Moulmein River is greatly encumbered

by extensive sand banks and reefs.

8.21 Drying banks of mud and sand, with shoals with depths of

5.5m and less on the seaward side of them, lie within a distance

of about 3.8 miles SSW of Tounzoun Point. Similarly, the

above dangers lie about 3 and 4 miles W and WNW, respectively, of Tounzoun Point.

8.22 Bilugyun Sands (16°10'N., 97°32'E.), which dry in

places, cover most of the middle of the entrance and are separated from the shoals S of Bilugyun Island by a channel. This

passage is sometimes narrow and shallow and at other times

wide and deep. At such times it becomes the main channel

leading into the river. The sands are steep-to on their seaward

side and soundings give no warning when approaching them.

8.22 Goodwin Sands (16°07'N., 97°35'E.), which dry up to 3m,

lie on the S side of the river entrance E of Bilugyun Channel

and N and NE of Amherst Point.

8.22 Bilugyun Channel lies between Bilugyun Sands and Goodwin Sands. In 1966, there was a least depth of 6.4m in this

channel at MLWS. Channel depths to Moulmein have charted

depths of as little as 3m.

8.22 Longstones Reef (16°06'N., 97°32'E.), which has its outer

edge about 2 miles NW of Amherst Point, consists of drying

and sunken rocks, with depths of less then 5.5m.

8.22 An area of rocky shoals, with depths of 5.5m and less, lie

within 0.5 mile WSW and 0.8 mile S of the outer edge of

Longstone Reef. A detached 8.2m patch lies 2.8 miles W of

Amherst Point.

8.22 Devils Horn (16°05'N., 97°33'E.), a rock which dries up to

3.7m, lies between Longstone Reef and Amherst Point and

about 1 mile NW of the latter. Foul ground and shoal patches,

with depths of less than 5.5m, lie within 1 mile W to NW of

Amherst Point.

8.22 Except at slack water, the channels between the rocks should

not be attempted without local knowledge.

8.22 Green Island (16°04'N., 97°33'E.), about 1 mile SSW of

Amherst Point, is surrounded by foul ground. An approach of

less than 0.5 mile to the island is dangerous.

8.22 The coast up to several miles S of Amherst Point is fringed

by foul ground which extends about 0.5 mile offshore in places. Shoal depths of less than 5.5m lie up to 1 mile offshore

along this section of coast.

8.22 When approaching the Moulmein River Entrance, care

should be taken to avoid the fishing stakes about 5 miles WNW

of Tounzoun Point.

8.22 Aspect.—Tounzoun Point (16°14'N., 97°32'E.), on the N

side of the entrance, is the S extremity of a ridge about 0.5 mile

long which slopes toward the point from a height of about

51.8m. Kwanhla Pagoda stands on a hill about 1.3 mile NE of

the point and is a good landmark. Two other pagodas stand on a

hill about 0.8 mile E of the Point.

8.23 Amherst Point (16°05'N., 97°34'E.), on the S side of

the entrance, is fronted by a bluff with an old pagoda on it. A

conspicuous pagoda stands on piles on a drying reef close

NNW of Amherst Point. Another pagoda stands near a cliffy

point about 1 mile S of the point. Sin Taung, a 285m high hill,

about 4.8 miles SE of the point, is conspicuous when viewed

from the W. The village of Amherst stands just within Amherst

Point.

8.23 During the month of March the land near the Moulmein River Entrance is seldom visible more than 0.5 mile.

8.23 The various channels and crossings between Bilugyun Channel and the port of Moulmein are subject to constant change

and no detailed description will be made of them.

8.23 When entering the Moulmein River, red conical buoys indicate the E or starboard side of the channel and black can buoys

indicate the W or port side of the channel.

8.23 The buoys are numbered consecutively from seaward; on

each buoy is painted the initial letter of the channel it marks.

The buoys are moved to conform to the channel which shifts

with the seasons. After heavy freshets, the positions of the

buoys may be unreliable.

8.23 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken outside the entrance

of the Moulmein River, with Green Island Light bearing 090°,

distant 2 miles. Shelter is provided against the strong spring

ebb current during freshets. The depth in this position is about

18.3m, mud, with good holding ground.

8.23 There are several anchorages in the river, but vessels must

moor as they cannot lie at single anchor.

8.23 Anchorage can be taken by two vessels of not more than

137.2m in length, in a depth of 6.4m, at the N end of Long Island Channel E of the S end of Hintha Kyun.

8.23 Deep-draft vessels may moor off Natmaw, about 1 mile SW

Moulmein—Tidal Information

Time

Duration of

Flood Ebb

October through January 4 hours 8 hours

February through May 5 hours 7 hours

June 3 hours 9 hours

July through September

There is no flood

current except at

maximum spring

—
220 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

of the S end of Yele Kyun.

8.23 Mupon Anchorage lies off Mupon Pagoda, about 1.3 miles N

of the N end of Yele Kyun, with depths (1964) of 11 to 12.8m.

There are mooring buoys, for the use of naval vessels, close inshore, about 0.5 mile N of Mupon Pagoda.

8.23 Moulmein Anchorage lies abreast the town of Moulmein,

about 2 miles N of Mupon Pagoda. There are three mooring

buoys for vessels up to 152.4m in length and drawing up to 7m.

There is also an anchorage berth for a vessel of up to 1,000 grt.

8.23 Anchorage can also be taken abreast of the N part of Moulmein, where there are three berths for vessels with drafts of 6.1

to 7.6m; a mooring buoy is available at this anchorage.

8.23 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for merchant vessels of

over 200 grt displacement.

8.23 The pilot station is situated on Amherst Point. If arranged for

in advance, a pilot is available on display of the usual day signal or by a blue light at night. Entrance into the river at night

has been discontinued.

8.23 Vessels should send their ETA, draft, and speed about 24

hours before arrival to Port of Moulmein via Rangoon Radio.

The pilot must travel to Amherst by launch or car. There is no

pilot vessel

8.23 Pilots will board vessels in the vicinity of the outer anchorage, W of Green Island. It is advisable to arrive at the anchorage 2 hours before time of HW at Amherst and anchor while

awaiting the pilot.

8.23 A pilot beacon, 1.8m high, which is a wooden mast with a

white corrugated-iron topmark, stands about 0.2 mile SW of

Water Pagoda. A light, for the use of the pilot only, is displayed

from the mast.

8.23 A signal station is situated on Amherst Point; flags of the International Code of Signals are displayed from a mast.

8.23 Regulations.—There shall be no communication between

any vessel, which is liable under Quarantine Regulations to

display the International Code of Signals Flag L, and the shore

of any other boat or vessel, except to receive the pilot and his

servant and baggage, until permission is granted in writing by

the Health Officer.

8.23 If there is a suspected case of plague on board or if more

than two deaths from any cause have occurred during the voyage, the pilot anchors the vessel in Halfway Anchorage to

await the Health Officer; in other cases vessels are anchored in

the lower end of Mupon Reach.

8.23 Vessels which have, within a period of 2 months immediately preceding their arrival, started from or touched enroute at a

port infected with yellow fever, or communicated, except orally without contact or by signal, with a vessel which is either infected with yellow fever, or communicated, except orally

without contact or by signal, with a vessel which is either infected with yellow fever or which has left a port infected with

yellow fever within that period, shall be allowed to anchor only

at the outer anchorage W of Green Island.

Moulmein Harbor (16°29'N., 97°37'E.)

World Port Index No. 49660

8.24 Moulmein Harbor comprises a 4-mile section of the

river from Mupon Pagoda N to Battery Point. The width of the

river within the limits of the harbor range from 0.2 to 0.5 mile.

8.24 Moulmein, Burma’s third-largest city and third-ranking port,

lies on the E bank of river about 22 miles N of the entrance.

8.24 Ocean-going vessels capable of transiting the river load and

discharge cargo at the mooring buoy berths in the river abreast

of the city.

8.24 Moulmein is a first port of entry.

8.24 Depths—Limitations.—In 1966, the harbor depth in the

middle of the fairway, other than the depths over Fairway

Rocks and Town Rock, ranged from 4.9 to 2.5m. These depths

are subject to change because of silting.

8.24 Mupon Reef lies close off the E bank of the river, almost 0.5

mile N of Mupon Pagoda. Patches of rock on this reef dry

about 0.6m at LW during the dry season, February and March.

8.24 Sirrocco Rock, with a least depth of 2.4m, lies on the E side

of the channel a little more than 1 mile N of Mupon Pagoda

and about 0.4 mile off the E bank.

8.24 A rock, with a depth of 1.5m, lies on the E side of the channel about midway between Mupon Reef and Sirrocco Rock,

and about 0.8 mile N of Mupon Pagoda.

8.24 Rocky, foul ground lies about 0.2 mile NE of Sirrocco Rock.

8.24 Fairway Rocks (16°28'N., 97°37'E.), with a least depth of

2.1m, lie in mid-channel about 0.3 mile NNW of Sirrocco

Rock. A rocky patch, with a depth of 4.9m, lies midway between Sirrocco Rock and Fairway Rocks.

8.24 Wales Rock (16°28'N., 97°37'E.), with a depth of 0.9m, lies

close off the E bank about 1.5 miles N of Mupon Pagoda. A

3.3m patch lies close NW of Wales Rock.

8.24 Castle Rocks (16°28'N., 97°37'E.), with depths of less than

1.8m and rocks awash at their S end, lie about 0.5 mile N of

Wales Rock.

8.24 Town Rock (16°29'N., 97°37'E.), with a least depth of 1.8m,

lies near mid-channel about 0.5 mile NW of Castle Rocks. A

sunken rock, with depths of less than 1.8m in the vicinity, lies

close offshore about 0.5 mile NNE of Town Rock.

8.24 A reef lies close off the E bank, about 0.3 mile SW of Battery Point which lies at the N end of the city. Depths of less

than 1.8m surround the reef and border the shore in the vicinity

of Battery Point.

8.24 The port has about 304.9m of principal wharfage, which

consists mostly of small pontoons and finger piers.

8.24 Tavoy Jetty, a pontoon wharf about 76.2m in length with a

depth of 4.9m alongside at LW, lies about 2.5 miles N of

Mupon Pagoda.

8.24 Salween Wharf, a finger pier with a short outer face and a

depth of 3.4m alongside, lies close N of Tavoy Jetty.

8.24 Moulmein Railway Jetty, about 0.3 mile N of Salween

Wharf, is used primarily by local ferries.

8.24 Big Bazaar Jetty, 49m in length, is used only by river craft.

8.24 Numerous jetties line the shore between Mupon Pagoda and

Battery Point, but are for the sole use of lighters and river craft.

8.24 Several small tugs and an ample supply of barges and lighters are available to work cargo at the river mooring berths.

8.24 Martaban, a shallow port area used exclusively by river craft

and barges, stands on the W bank of the river about 2 miles N

of Battery Point.

8.24 The N part of this section of coast between Amherst Point

and Bluff Point, about 21 miles SSE, is high, rocky, indented,

and marked by occasional cliffs. The low S part of the coast is

covered with dense jungle growth.

8.24 Setse Yele Paya (15°57'N., 97°36'E.), a small islet close to
Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 221

Pub. 173

the coast about 8.25 miles SSE of Amherst Point, is marked by

a 21m high pagoda.

8.24 Button Island (16°00'N., 97°34'E.), 53m high and close offshore, lies about midway between Amherst Point and Setse

Yele Paya. Sin Taung, a high peak about 2.5 miles ENE of Button Island, is a good mark from the W along this section of

coast.

8.24 Bluff Point (15°46'N., 97°42'E.), which rises to a height of

100m, lies 12.5 miles SSE of Setse Yele Paya. A pagoda stands

on a reef about 1.3 miles N of Bluff Point.

8.24 Double Island (15°52'N., 97°35'E.), lies about 12.3 miles S

of Amherst Point and about 6.5 miles offshore. The island lies

on the NW edge of a shoal, with depths of less than 11m,

which is about 1.3 miles long and 0.3 mile wide. Less water

than charted has been reported to exist in the vicinity of Double

Island. Vessels when passing should give it a wide berth.

8.24 Caution.—Should the light on Double Island appear to

darken for short intervals, it signifies that the lighthouse keepers require assistance. Notify the local authorities as soon as

possible.

8.25 North Rocks (15°46'N., 97°39'E.) consist of two

groups of rocks, about 1.3 miles apart, which lie on a shoal

about 3 miles WNW and a similar distance NW of Bluff Point.

A rock in the S group is 6m high, but the N group dries up to

5.2m. The channel between North Rocks and the coast is unsafe and should not be attempted.

8.25 Pagoda Point (15°37'N., 97°44'E.), about 45m high, lies

about 8.5 miles S of Bluff Point. Drying mud and sand flats extend up to 1 mile offshore between these points.

8.25 Evans Ridge, a range of coastal hills 91 to 128m high, extends 2 miles SE from a position 3.3 miles SSE of Bluff Point.

8.25 Kakana Taung (15°41'N., 97°43'E.), a small islet 55m high,

lies 4.5 miles S of Bluff Point.

8.25 Bentinck Point (15°29'N., 97°44'E.), a low projection, lies 8

miles S of Pagoda Point. The coast between the points is fronted by shallows and drying flats which extend up to 1.5 miles

offshore. A reef and sunken rocks extend about 1 mile NW

from Bentinck Point.

8.25 Phaungkala Taung (15°35'N., 97°50'E.), 393m high and

conspicuous, is the highest summit of an isolated range which

rises about 6 miles ESE of Pagoda Point. Wara Taung, 440m

high, lies about 8 miles ESE of Bentinck Point and is a useful

mark for entering Bentinck Sound.

8.25 Kyaikhalaing Pagoda, 12m high, stands on a reef about 3

miles N of Bentinck Point. Another pagoda stands on a reef

about 0.5 mile NW of the point.

Bentinck Sound

8.26 Bentinck Sound (15°35'N., 97°42'E.) lies between

the coast to the E and Galloper Sand, Kalegauk Island, and

Cavendish Island to the W.

8.26 Galloper Sand (15°38'N., 97°40'E.), as defined by the 2m

curve, extends about 7.8 miles S from a position about 3.8

miles SSW of Bluff Point. Several drying patches lie within the

limits of this shoal.

8.26 Kalegauk Island (15°33'N., 97°40'E.), lies close S of and is

separated from Galloper Sand by a narrow clear passage. Portland Point lies at the N end of Kalegauk Island and at the NW

end of the passage mentioned above. Kalegauk Summit rises to

a height of 159m in the N part of the island and is a good landfall for vessels bound for Moulmein during the Southwest

Monsoon. Kalegauk Island lies abreast of the S limit of the

Gulf of Martaban.

8.26 Cavendish Island (15°30'N., 97°40'E.), 97m high, lies close

S of Kalegauk Island.

8.26 South Shoal (15°28'N., 97°39'E.), about 2.8 miles long with

a least depth of 8.2m, lies close S of the shoal extending about

0.5 mile S from Cavendish Island. A narrow passage separates

the two shoals. An obstruction, with a least depth of 4m, was

reported to lie on the outer edge of the NE part of South Shoal.

8.26 Tides—Currents.—In the N entrance of Bentinck Sound,

the tidal currents attain a rate of 5 knots and set across the

channel. Inside the sound the rates are 2 to 3 knots. The flood

sets on the inner side of Galloper Sand and the ebb sets on the

outer or seaward side.

8.26 Depths—Limitations.—The fairway depths in the N entrance of Bentinck Sound range from 10 to 16.5m, which has a

least width of 0.3 mile. The S entrance has depths of 12.8 to

16.5m and a width of about 3 miles.

8.27 Middle Ground (15°38'N., 97°42'E.), a long narrow

shoal with a least depth of 8.2m, lies in the middle of the N part

of the sound with its S end about 1.8 miles W of Pagoda Point.

8.27 Kalegauk Island is generally steep-to seaward of the 10m

curve which nowhere lies more than 0.5 mile offshore.

8.27 The Peepers, two small rocks close together and low, lie

about 1 mile NNW of the S extremity of Kalegauk Island.

8.27 The best anchorage, sheltered from the Southwest Monsoon,

lies, in depths of 11 to 14.6m, about 0.5 mile E of the middle of

the E side of Kalegauk Island.

8.27 Directions.—Deep-draft vessels without local knowledge

are advised not to use the N entrance leading into the sound.

Sufficient aids are not available to make good a course against

the strong cross channel currents.

8.27 When entering the N entrance pass midway between the N

end of Galloper Sand and the shallow LW fronting the coast N

of Pulau Kropik by keeping the S end of Pulau Kropik in range

129° with Phaungkala Taung. When the N summit of Evans

Ridge bears 078°, pass between Galloper Sand and Middle

Ground by steering 182°. Consideration should be given to the

set of the flood toward Galloper Sand and the ebb toward Middle Ground.

8.27 To enter Bentinck Sound by way of the S entrance, keep

Wara Taung bearing not more than 078° until the E side of Kalegauk Island is open E of the E side of Cavendish Island, bearing more than 002°. Course may then be shaped to the NNE to

Double Island Light
222 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

pass 1 mile E of Cavendish Island, having regard for the dangers S of that island.

8.27 Hope Point (15°21'N., 97°43'E.), about 8 miles S Bentinck

Point, is rocky with a 110m high hill behind it. The bay between the two points is covered with mud and sandy flats

which dry in places and extend up to 1.3 miles offshore in places.

8.27 The coast for about 6.8 miles S of Hope Point is cliffy and

backed by heavily-wooded hills. Palein, a peak 521m high, lies

about 4 miles SSE of Hope Point. Notched Peak, the highest of

five summits, is 334m high and lies 3 miles S of Palein Hill.

8.27 Kokunye Kyun (15°18'N., 97°43'E.), 140m high, lies about

3.3 miles SSW of Hope Point. Shoal ground, with depths of

less than 5.5m and parts of which dry, extend S from a position

0.5 mile NW of Hope Point to Kokunge Kyun.

8.27 Toby Rock (15°16'N., 97°43'E.), which dries to a height of

5.2m and is awash at HWS, lies about 2 miles S of the E end of

Kokunye Kyun.

The Ye River

8.28 The Ye River (15°11'N., 97°47'E.) enters the Bay of

Bengal between Pagoda Point and the W extremity of Sidaw

Taung. Sidaw Point, on the S side of the entrance, lies about

0.5 mile NE of the W extremity of Sidaw Taung. The town of

Ye stands about 8 miles above the river entrance.

8.28 Three sets of range beacons lead from the river entrance to

within 1 mile S of Sonma Kyun.

8.28 A beacon, consisting of a white globe in a tree, lies on a

point on the W side of the river, almost 1 mile N of Sidan

Point. A prominent pagoda stands on the W bank about 1 mile

N of the beacon.

8.28 The navigable channel of the river lies S of Sonma Kyun, a

large island about 2 miles above the entrance. The river from

its entrance to the town follows a winding course with many

abrupt bends. Only short vessels can negotiate them. Local

knowledge is required.

8.28 Pagoda Point (15°12'N., 97°46'E.) lies on the N side of the

entrance of the Ye River and should not be confused with Pagoda Point on the E side of Bentinck Sound. From the NW, this

point appears as a hummock at the end of a level stretch of

beach. Rising steeply from the beach this 46m point is conspicuous. A pagoda stands on the point.

8.28 Sidaw Taung (15°10'N., 97°48'E.), a bold headland 176m

high, lies about 1.8 miles SE of Pagoda Point, on the S side of

the entrance of the Ye River. This headland appears flat-topped

when viewed from the W and NW and conical when viewed

from the S.

8.28 Damatha Taung, a 158m high headland, lies 9.5 miles S of

Sidaw Taung. The coast between these two headlands is low,

but the high ranges inland give it the appearance of being steep.

8.28 There are no recommended passages between the islands and

sands which extend S and parallel the coast for about 22 miles

from a position about 2 miles WNW of Pagoda Point and terminate in Ross Sand.

8.28 Soundings provide the best guide when passing seaward of

Livermore Shoal, as it lies just within the 20m curve.

8.28 Pagoda Point, in line with the W slope of Sidaw Taung and a

dip in the distant high land bearing 129°, leads N of Livermore

Shoal and the shoal N of Wa Kyun.

8.28 Tides—Currents.—The flood tidal current in the vicinity of

the entrance of the Ye River sets N along the coast at a rate of

about 3 knots at springs. The ebb sets S at the same rate. At

springs, the water outside the islands is discolored.

8.28 Depths—Limitations.—Livermore Shoal, a 2.5 miles long

ridge of hard sand with depths of 3.7 to 9.1m, lies with its least

depth about 5.5 miles W of Pagoda Point.

8.28 Wa Kyun (15°12'N., 97°44'E.), the N island of the chain of

islands which lies off the entrance of the Ye River, lies about 2

miles W of Pagoda Point. The N summit of two which lie on

the island rises to a height of 135m. This island lies in about

the middle of a shoal about 2.3 miles long with depths of less

than 5.5m. Depths of 9.1m and less lie within a narrow tongue

which extends 4 miles NNW from the N end of Wa Kyun.

8.29 Hngetpyaw Kyun (15°11'N., 97°43'E.), 46m high,

small and wooded, lies almost 1 mile SW of Wa Kyun. Some

rocks, which dry about 5.5m and are awash at HWS, lie about

0.2 mile NW of the N point of the island. Depths of less than

9.1m lie up to 1 mile N of the island.

8.29 Nat Kyun (15°10'N., 97°44'E.), 135m high, lies 0.5 mile SE

of Hngetpyaw Kyun. A drying ridge of hard sand extends

about 3.8 miles S from Nat Kyun. Depths of 9.1m and less lie

from 0.5 to 0.8 mile off the W side of this ridge. The sea breaks

heavily over the ridge. A drying bank, which breaks heavily,

lies close N of Nat Kyun. The channel, which lies between Nat

Kyun and Hngetpyaw Kyun on the SW side and Wa Kyun on

the NE side, has a least depth of 9.6m but is not recommended.

8.29 Ghorparay Rock (15°10'N., 97°43'E.), which dries about

0.9m, lies about 0.5 mile W of the S end of Nat Kyun.

8.29 Pascoe Shoal (15°10'N., 97°45'E.), with a least depth of

0.9m over its central part, lies centered about 1.3 miles E of

Nat Kyun. Depths over the remainder of this shoal are less than

5.5m. A detached 4.9m patch lies about 0.3 mile N of the N

end of Pascoe Shoal.

8.29 Kyettaik Kyun (15°10'N., 97°45'E.), 24m high to the tops of

the trees, lies about 1.3 miles SE of Nat Kyun. A narrow shoal,

with depths of less than 5.5m, extends about 0.3 mile SW from

the island.

8.30 Simpson Shoal (15°08'N., 97°45'E.), about 2 miles

long and 0.3 mile wide with depths of less than 5.5m within its

limits, lies about 0.8 mile S of Kyettaik Kyun. The E extremity

of Nat Kyun in range 352° with the SW extremity of Wa Kyun

leads through the S part of the channel between Simpson Shoal

and the drying ridge of sand which extends S from Nat Kyun.

The channel E of Simpson Shoal and Pascoe Shoal is preferred. Kyettaik Kyun, bearing 351° and open W of the high

land near the coast to the N, leads E of Simpson Shoal.

8.30 Kyungyi (15°05'N., 97°44'E.), 2.5 miles long and marked by

four distinct, wooded hills, lies about 4.5 miles S of Nat Kyun.

The S hill is 163m high and the N hill is 76m high.

8.30 Shoal ground, with depths of less than 5.5m, lies up to about

1.5 miles W of Kyungyi. A tongue of shoal ground, with a drying sand ridge on its N half, extends about 5.5 miles S from a

position about 1.5 miles W of the central part of Kyungyi. The

sea breaks over the drying sand ridge.

8.30 Dathat Island (15°00'N., 97°46'E.), small in extent and 79m

high, lies about 4 miles SSE of the S end of Kyungyi. Magyi

Island, 44m high, lies about 3.3 miles SSE of Dathat Island.
Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 223

Pub. 173

8.30 Several small islets lie close S of Magyi Island.

8.30 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in the channel between Kyungyi and the coast, in depths of 16.5 to 18.3m, with

the N end of Kyungyi bearing 328°, almost 1 mile distant.

8.30 Anchorage can be taken in the channel E of Wa Kyun, in a

depth of 11.9m, mud, with the N extremity of the island bearing 299° and the S extremity bearing 215°.

8.30 Anchorage can be taken E of Pascoe Shoal, in depths of 9.1

to 11m, with the E extremity of Kokunye Kyun in line bearing

339° with the W extremity of the mainland, located about 3.8

miles SSE of the E extremity of Kokunge, and Kyettaik Kyun

bearing 212°.

8.30 Directions.—If approaching from the N, steer to pass 1.5

miles W of Kokunye Kyun after sighting Kalegauk Island.

When Wa Kyun is sighted, steer 147° for the N summit of the

island. When Pagoda Point bears 129° and is in range with the

W slope of Sidaw Taung and with a dip in the distant high land,

steer for the point. This course leads about 0.2 mile N of the

shoal which lies N of Wa Kyun. When the E extremity of Nat

Kyun is open E of the E side of Wa Kyun and bears about 190°,

change course SSE for the anchorage E of Wa Kyun.

8.30 To arrive at the anchorage E of Pascoe Shoal, maintain the

129° course for Pagoda Point until the E end of Kokunye Kyun

is in line bearing 339° with the W extremity of the mainland,

located about 3.8 miles SSE of the E end of Kokunye Kyun.

Then change course SSE, keeping the range astern, and steer

for the anchorage. Note that the charted anchorage position is

about 2.3 miles from the position where the stern range is

picked up.

8.30 If approaching the entrance of the Ye River from the S, steer

000° for Kyungyi passing W of Magyi Island and E of Ross

Sand. When Dathat Island bears 045°, steer to pass midway between Kyungyi and the mainland. Pagoda Point, in line bearing

004° with a notched peak, 2.5 miles to the N of the point, leads

E of Simpson Shoal to a position off the entrance bar of the Ye

River, E of Pascoe Shoal.

8.30 The entrance bar from the NW almost dries and can be

crossed by vessels only at HW. At springs, a vessel drawing 4m

might reach the town; at neaps, the maximum draft is less than

2.1m.

8.31 Ye (15°15'N., 97°51'E.) (World Port Index No.

49670), a small river port, lies on high ground on the N bank of

the river. The pagodas in the town can be seen for a considerable distance and are good landmarks.

8.31 A wooden pier abreast of the town is available only to small

vessels.

8.31 The coast between Damatha Taung and White Point, about 9

miles to the S, rises to high land several miles inland, but closes

the coast in the vicinity of White Point.

8.31 Pawdi Taung (14°57'N., 97°52'E.) rises to an elevation of

789m about 7 miles NE of White Point. Kinbun Taung, 774m

high, lies 1.5 miles N of Pawdi Taung. Several other peaks in

the vicinity make these two peaks difficult to identify.

8.31 The coast between White Point and the Dolphin’s Nose,

about 11 miles SSE, is bold and rocky. A mountain range, with

elevations of 305 to 634m, rises close inland along this stretch

of coast.

Heinze Chaung

8.32 Heinze Chaung (14°43'N., 97°54'E.) is an estuary

formed by the confluence of three large creeks which flow into

the sea between high hills. The funnel-shaped estuary is about

4 miles long and 0.8 mile wide at its narrowest part.

8.32 The entrance to Heinze Chaung is encumbered by a bar

which lies between South Sands and the outer part of North

Sands. The outer part of the bar is fairly level, but farther in between the sands, there are a number of shoal patches which

may reduce the depth in the channel to about 2.7m or less in

spots. These patches are steep-to and marked by tide rips during maximum flood or ebb. Vessels with drafts to 7.6m can enter Heinze Chaung at HW springs and those with a draft of

5.5m at HWN.

8.32 Dolphin’s Nose (14°43'N., 97°52'E.), the N entrance point

of the estuary, rises to an elevation of 304.8m. Other hills on

the same side of the estuary rise to heights of up to 451m.

8.32 Kandaung Promontory (14°40'N., 97°53'E.), an isolated

hill 28m high, is the S entrance point of the estuary.

8.32 The shores of the estuary, with the exception of a few rocky

points and some creeks, are fringed by mangroves. Kwethongyima, a jungle-covered low peninsula, lies between the

mouths of the two creeks which flow into the estuary from the

N. Fish Trap Point, on the S side of the estuary, lies S of and

nearly opposite Kwethongyima. East Point, on the S side of the

estuary at its narrowest part, lies about 3 miles NE of Kandaung Promontory.

8.32 Tides—Currents.—The currents in the approaches to Heinze Chaung turn from 2.5 to 3.5 hours after HW and LW at Mergui. In the offing, the flood tidal current sets N parallel with the

coast and the ebb current sets in the opposite direction. At the

entrance of the N channel, the currents also set parallel with the

coast.

8.32 Outside South Sands, the tidal currents set across the bar and

through the S channel until the sands are covered, when they

set slightly across them at velocities estimated at 1.5 to 3 knots.

8.32 In the entrance of Heinze Chaung, the flood current commences about 14 hours after LW at Mergui and has a velocity

of about 0.8 to 1.8 knots. The ebb current commences about

1.3 hours after HW at Mergui and has a velocity of 1 to 3

knots. Inside the entrance, the flood current commences about

0.8 hour after LW at Mergui and the ebb current commences at

about the same time that it does in the entrance.

8.32 The observations upon which these statements are based

were made during the dry season. During the rainy season, the

ebb current will be considerably stronger, perhaps even to the

point of overcoming the flood current.

8.32 Depths—Limitations.—Vessels drawing up to 7.6m can enter Heinze Chaung at HWS and vessels drawing up to 5.5m can

enter at HWN. Local knowledge is required.

8.32 No attempt should be made to cross the entrance bar unless

the channel has first been thoroughly examined and buoyed to

mark it.

8.32 North Sands (14°41'N., 97°50'E.), with general depths of

3.7m and which dry in places, extend about 4.8 miles SSW

from the coast between Dolphin’s Nose and a position on the

coast about 2 miles WNW.
224 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

8.32 Position Rock (14°42'N., 97°52'E.), which dries 4.3m and is

awash at HWS, lies near the inner edge of North Sands about

0.5 mile SE of the Dolphin’s Nose.

8.32 South Sands (14°39'N., 97°52'E.), with general depths of

less than 3.7m and which dry in places, extend about 3.5 miles

SSW from Kandaung Promontory.

8.32 The entrance bar lies between the outer part of North Sands

and South Sands. The depths are fairly uniform on the outer

part of the bar, but on the inner side of the bar the depths are

shoal in places.

8.32 Shoal patches on the bar separate the entrance into N and S

channels. In the past these channels had a least depth of 4m.

8.32 The S channel passes close along the edge of South Sands

and of the two channels it has less LW to be crossed. Shoals

along the channel are steep-to and are usually marked by tide

rips.

8.32 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken outside the entrance

W of North Sands, with the Dolphin’s Nose bearing between

080° and 102°, distant 3 miles. The depth in this position is

about 8.2m.

8.32 Anchorage can be taken anywhere within the estuary after

passing Kandaung Promontory, but the depths are more convenient and the currents are weaker on the S side.

8.32 Good anchorage can be taken within the estuary, in a depth

of 12.8m, midway between Fish Trap Point and the S end of

Kywethonyima Promontory.

8.32 The estuary is usually closed during the Southwest Monsoon

to all shipping.

8.32 The coast between Heinze Chaung and Pazin Kyun, about 55

miles SSE, is backed by mountain ranges and fronted by the

Moscos Islands.

8.32 Between Kandaung Promontory and the mouth of a creek,

about 16 miles SSE, the coast is fronted by depths of 9.1m and

less which lie from 1.5 to 7 miles offshore.

8.32 Caution.—Local knowledge is absolutely essential for passage; vessels should not attempt to cross the bar without thoroughly examining and buoying the channel which it is intended

to take. During the Southwest Monsoon, the port is usually

closed to shipping.

8.33 North Ledge (14°31'N., 97°49'E.), a 0.9m high rock

with shoal depths extending about 0.5 mile NE from it, lies

about 9.5 miles SSW of Kandaung Promontory.

8.33 Tapir Hill (14°36'N., 97°55'E.), a densely-wooded summit

about 369m high, lies about 5.5 miles SSE of Kandaung Promontory. Middle Hill, 513m high and densely wooded, lies 24

miles ESE of Tapir Hill. Yetagun Taung, 905m high, lies about

in the middle of another mountain range 7.5 miles SE of Middle Hill. Paungchon Taung, 1,167m high, marks the S end of

this range about 5.5 miles S of Yetagun Taung. This latter peak

appears blunt when viewed from the W, but appears sharp

when viewed from the S.

8.33 Luce Hill, 706m high, and Sieve Hill, both densely wooded,

lie close together about 17 miles SSE of the entrance of Heinze

Chaung. False Peak, 445m high, lies about 2.8 miles S of Sieve

Hill. Another densely-wooded hill, a high close to Fenton

Point, lies about 4.5 miles S of False Peak. A pagoda stands

close SE of Fenton Point.

8.33 Maungmagan Bay (14°09'N., 98°04'E.) lies between Fenton Point and Pagoda Point, about 134 miles to the SSE.

Taungbadaung, a peak with a height of 482m, lies on the S part

of a mountain ridge about 3.5 miles ENE of Pagoda Point.

8.33 An obstruction, with a least depth of 3.7m, lies about 5.8

miles NNW of Pagoda Point.

8.33 A rock, awash, lies almost 1.5 miles N of the same point.

8.33 Letkat Taung (13°55'N., 98°06'E.), 600m high with a pagoda on its summit, lies 10 miles S of Pagoda Point.

8.33 Pazin Kyun (13°48'N., 98°04'E.), 145m high, lies close offshore about 17 miles S of Pagoda Point. The island appears as

part of the mainland when viewed from the W. The island has

been reported to be a good radar target up to 23 miles.

8.33 The coast between Pazin Kyun and Tavoy Point, about 17

miles SSE, is bold and rocky.

8.33 Several mountain ranges, which are lower than those to the

N, attain elevations of well over 305m along the S part of this

section of coast.

8.34 Nyawbyin Bay (13°40'N., 98°08'E.), the largest of

several bays which indent this coast, lies about midway between Pazin Kyun and Tavoy Point. Nyawbyin Point marks the

S side of the entrance of the bay. A large fishing village lies

close E of this latter point.

8.34 Kyanak Taung, about 3 miles S of Nyawbyin Taung, rises to

a height of 390m.

8.34 Myinkwa Aw (13°33'N., 98°09'E.), entered between Than

Maw and Tavoy Point, lies about 5 miles S of Nyawbyin

Taung.

8.34 Hngetthaik Kyun (13°32'N., 98°08'E.), 159m high, lies

about 0.5 mile S of Than Maw. The island is steep-to on its W

side, but has depths of less than 9.1m extending from its E side.

A depth of 7.9m, rocky bottom, lies about 0.2 mile S of Than

Maw, otherwise the channel between Hngetthaik Kyun and the

coast is deep and clear.

The Tavoy River and Approaches—Tavoy Entrance to Mergui Island

8.35 The Tavoy River, which is about 120 miles long, has it

main source in the W slopes of the range that separates Burma

from Thailand. Tavoy, a river port of some importance, lies on

the left bank, about 39 miles N of Tavoy Point. The river

traverses a broad plain about 3 miles above the town; sand

banks and alluvial islands, which are constantly changing in

form and position, impede the course of it. Many tidal creeks

intersect the plain between the river and the foot of the hills on

either side of it.

8.35 The hills extend N and S in parallel ranges on the W side of

the estuary. Shinmaw Daung, 344.4m high, is located about 0.8

mile N of Tavoy Point on the small peninsula forming that

point. Kyaneik Taung, 390m high and densely wooded, lies

about 3 miles NW of Shinmaw Daung. The hills, farther N,

gradually recede from the W bank of the river. At a position

about 16.5 miles N of Tavoy Point, the crest of the range,

which is about 610m high, is located about 2.5 miles from the

W bank. Abreast Tavoy, the range again closely approaches the

river bank.

8.35 Low hills, with parallel ridges behind them, are found on the

E side of the estuary. These ridges gradually rise to a height of

1,125m at Nanpayok Taung which is located about 19 miles E

of Tavoy Point. Bok Taung, a steep summit, 670m high and
Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 225

Pub. 173

conspicuous, is located about 9.5 miles northward of Bok

Taung and is similar in appearance to that hill.

8.35 At Elbow Point, located on the E bank of the river, about 9.5

miles W of Tetchaung Taung, the river narrows considerably.

Between Elbow Point and Shive Taung, a hill 243m high, about

7 miles NNE, the hills approach the E bank and at Shive Taung

are within about 1.5 miles of it. This distance is maintained as

far as Tavoy where they again recede from the banks and rise in

successive ranges to Nwalabo Taung, 542m high and prominent, this peak is located about 14 miles ESE of Tavoy.

8.35 Between the mouth of the Tavoy River and Mergui Island,

the best landmarks are Shittaunggyi Taung and Round Hill.

The former, located 16 miles ESE of Tavoy Point, is 457m

high. The latter is 198m high and lies about 10 miles SSE of

Shittaunggyi Taung.

8.35 The coast between Round Hill and Kalwin Point forms the E

side of the inner route to Mergui Harbor.

8.35 Mountain ranges with distinctive peaks back the coast for

about 40 miles SSE of the entrance of the Tavoy River. Chimun

Taung, 1,616m high, is located about 20 miles ENE of Round

Hill and is the S peak of the highest range.

8.35 A 119m hill, located close within Zotzit Point, the S extremity of Zotzit Island, about 10.5 miles SSE of Round Hill, serves

as a good mark. Seinnat Taung, 168m high and located about 6

miles SSE of Round Hill, is prominent. Durbar Peak, 661m

high, is located about 9 miles NE of the same hill. Flat Hill,

193m high, and Barn Hill, 317m high, serve as useful marks.

They are located 7.5 and 14 miles, respectively, SE of Zotzit Island.

8.35 Winds—Weather.—Tavoy receives weather information but

no signals are displayed. For additional information on winds

and weather, see paragraph 8.1.

8.35 Tides—Currents.—The mean range at Tavoy is 3.2m; the

spring range is 4.7m. The tidal currents attain a rate of 3 to 4

knots during the dry season and up to 7 knots during the rainy

season. During the latter season, the ebb currents may run continuously. At Simbyubyin, springs rise 5.3m and neaps rise

3.7m.

8.35 Depths—Limitations.—The 40m curve lies about 11.5

miles W of Tavoy Point and up to 18.5 miles off the S end of

Tavoy Island. A least depth of 10m is found in the fairway of

the Inner Route, between Tavoy River and Mergui Harbor. The

dangers off this coast, except for the outer islands of the Mergui Archipelago, lie within the 40m curve and are described

with their related coastal features.

8.35 Caution.—Depths in the vicinity of Tavoy Point and in

some of the river channels were reported to be less than charted.

8.36 Yetagun Marine Terminal (13°04'N., 96°51'E.), an

oil production platform and an FSO, lies about 80 miles W of

Tavoy Island. 

Pilotage is compulsory for off-loading tankers. Pilots will

board about 3 miles N of the terminal. 

A prohibited zone 5 miles in diameter surrounds the terminal. Vessels should not enter the prohibited zone without permission. 

Vessels should send their ETA 72 hours, 48 hours, 24 hours,

12 hours, and 3 hours in advance.

The terminal can be contacted, as follows: 

1. Call sign: Yetagun FSO

2. VHF: VHF channels 16 and 72

3. Telephone: 873-330808510 (INMARSAT)

4. Facsimile: 873-330808512 (INMARSAT)

5. Telex: 583-330808514 (INMARSAT)

6. E-mail: ytg_fso@petronas.com.my

A submarine pipeline runs NE to the Burmese coast, as seen

on the chart. 

The Tavoy River

8.37 The estuary of the Tavoy River is about 12 miles wide

between Tavoy Point and an unnamed point about 7 miles W of

Nanpayok Taung (13°35'N., 98°29'E.).

8.37 The W bank extends in a general N direction for about 11

miles above Tavoy Point. The S part of this coast is bordered

by several islands.

The Tavoy River Entrance

8.38 The E bank extends in a general NW direction for

about 12.5 miles above the river entrance to Thamokmo, where

above the river width is about 3 miles. The land on the E side is

flat, open, and has many rice paddies. Several hills, with

heights of 76 to 305m, lie along this stretch of coast. The higher mountain ranges inland have been previously described in

paragraph 8.33. Three small rivers discharge into the Tavoy

River between Thamokmo and a point about 3 miles to the SE.

8.38 Above Thamokomo, both banks extend in a general N direction for about 21 miles to Tavoy. Thamokmo is densely-covered with mangroves. Between Thamokmo and the village of

Sinbyubyin, about 7.5 miles to the N, the E bank of the river is

marked by paddy fields and clumps of trees.

8.38 Depths—Limitations.—The main channel passes close E of

the islands off the S part of the W bank and then close off the

W bank. North of Kathema Kyun, the E side of the channel is

formed by a spit of sand and mud that extends about 5.5 miles

S from Pyingyi and divides the river into two channels. Depths

of less than 3.7m exist on the spit. The recommended channel

passes W of the spit and then W of the island.

Yetagun Oil Platform
226 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

8.38 Depths of not less than 7.3m are found in the fairway of the

entrance channel for a distance of about 10 miles above the entrance, except for charted depths of 6.4m and 6.1m, about 1.5

miles NNE and 1.3 miles NE, respectively, of the N end of

Mibya Kyun. Depths of not less than 3.4m are found as far as

Goodridge Plains, about 16.5 miles N of Tavoy Point. The river

is shallow above Goodridge Plains and is navigable only by

shallow-draft river craft.

8.38 Vessels up to 61m in length, with a draft of about 3.7m, can

proceed to Simbyubin, about 14 miles below Tavoy, at HWN.

8.38 Caution.—Soundings in the Tavoy River between Mibya

Kyun and Pyingyi-ashe differ from charted depths.

8.38 Hngetthaik Kyun, which lies about 2 miles W of Tavoy

Point, has been previously described in paragraph 8.31.

8.38 Puklaji, a rock, awash at LW, lies about 2 miles NE of Tavoy

Point.

8.39 Mibya Kyun (13°36'N., 98°12'E.), 143m high, lies

about 4.3 miles NNE of Tavoy Point. Both sides of the island

are fairly steep-to. A shoal, with a least depth of 1.2m in its

central part, extends about 1 mile S from a position 0.2 mile SE

from the SE end of the island. A shoal, with a least depth of

3.6m, extends about 0.5 mile SSW from the S end of the island.

8.39 Whale Rock (13°36'N., 98°13'E.), 0.9m high, lies about 0.3

mile NE of the SE part of Mibya Kyun.

8.39 Thin-bon Kyun (13°38'N., 98°11'E.), 221m high and densely-wooded, lies about 0.8 mile NW of Mibya Kyun. Satlaik

Kyun, a tree-covered islet, lies close E of the E extremity of

Thin-bon Kyun. A narrow shoal, with a drying rock on its central part, extends about 3 miles SSW from Satlaik Kyun.

8.39 Kathema Kyun (13°40'N., 98°11'E.), 167m high and densely wooded, lies close offshore about 0.5 mile N of Thin-bon

Kyun. A pagoda stands on a large boulder on the NE point of

the island. A 4.3m patch lies about 0.8 mile N of the pagoda.

8.39 Mahratta Rock (13°42'N., 98°11'E.), a pinnacle with a least

depth of 2.1m, lies about 2.3 miles NNW of the pagoda on

Kathema Kyun. Two rocky patches, with depths of 3.7 and

5.5m, lie close together about 0.3 mile E of Mahratta Rock.

Two similar patches, with depths of 3.7 and 4.3m, lie close together about 0.7 mile N of Mahratta Rock.

8.39 Pyingyi (13°47'N., 98°12'E.), a long, narrow island, lies in

mid-channel, about 2.5 miles NNE of Mahratta Rock. A conspicuous high tree lies on the E side of the island, about 2 miles

from its N end.

8.40 Chaukdaw Rock (13°46'N., 98°11'E.), with a least

depth of 3m, lies about 2.3 miles NW of the S end of Pyingyi.

8.40 Many alluvial islands, which are connected by shoals, lie in

the river between Pyingyi and Tavoy.

8.40 Nauwi Rocks, 1.2m high, lie about 10.8 miles ESE of Tavoy

Point. A rock, awash at LW, lies about 1 mile SSW of these

rocks and two detached rocks, awash at HW, lie about 1.5

miles SSE of the same rocks.

8.40 An extensive shore bank, with depths of less than 5.5m,

fronts this entire shore and extends up to 7 miles offshore to a

position about 6.5 miles WNW of Nauwi Rocks.

8.40 A detached 3.7m patch lies close off this shore bank, about

4.8 miles ENE of Tavoy Point.

8.40 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 7.3m,

about 1 mile N of Puklaji.

8.40 Deep-draft vessels can anchor, in depths of 9.1 to 10.4m,

about 0.8 mile E of Mibya Kyun Light. Vessels with similar

drafts can also anchor, in depths of 9.4 to 11.6m, about 0.5 mile

NE of Saitlaik Kyun. Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 9.8

to 12.2m, about 0.5 mile E or 0.8 mile NNE of Kathema Kyun.

A mooring buoy, used by lighters, is anchored about 0.5 mile N

of the same island.

8.40 Light-draft vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in

5.8m, from 1.3 to 1.5 miles SSW of the S end of Pyingyi. Similar vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in 4m, off Goodridge Plains with a waterfall bearing 270°, distant about 1.5

miles.

8.40 Directions.—A vessel may approach the Tavoy River in a

345° direction, from a position 5.5 miles, bearing 121° from

the pagoda on Tavoy Point, which leads towards the anchorages off Mibya Kyun, Satlaik Kyun, and Kathema Kyun. If proceeding to the anchorage about 0.8 mile NNE of Kathema

Kyun, from a position about 0.5 mile E of Mibya Kyun Light, a

course of about 350° should be steered, which leads to the anchorage. If proceeding to the anchorages upriver, when N of

the 4.3m patch about 0.8 mile N of Kathema Kyun, course

should be altered to the W to bring the NE point of Kathema

Kyun in line bearing 173° astern with the W edge of Satlaik

Kyun. This stern range leads in the fairway to the anchorage

SSW of the S end of Pyingyi, passing between Mahratta Rock

and the 3.7m shoal which lies about 0.3 mile E of it, but it leads

very close E of the 3.7m patch located about 0.8 mile N of

Mahratta Rock.

8.41 Tavoy (14°04'N., 98°11'E.) (World Port Index No.

49680) lies on the E bank of the Tavoy River, about 35 miles

above the entrance. An extensive export trade is maintained

with Rangoon, Penang, and Thailand.

8.41 There are a number of jetties, pontoon piers, and finger piers

suitable only for small light-draft craft. Almost all of the vessels calling at the port are coastal craft and all but the smallest

of these anchor near the mouth of the river and work cargo to

and from lighters. An ample number of small lighters, launches, and native craft are available for this purpose.

Mergui Harbor and Approaches—North End of

the Bentinck Route

8.42 Kantu Rocks (13°20'N., 98°24'E.), two small isolated rocks, lie about 5.5 miles WNW of Round Hill. The outer

rock lies about 4 miles offshore. A shoal extends about 0.5

mile S from these rocks.

8.42 The W side of the channel leading to Mergui Harbor from

the N is formed by Tavoy Island and the islands to the S of it.

The E side of the channel is formed by flats and banks fronting

the mainland from abreast of Round Hill to Mergui Island.

Middle Passage and Iron Passage lead into the Inner Route

from the W.

8.42 The S approach to Mergui Harbor is made through an 18-

mile long channel, the SW extremity of which connects with

the Bentinck Route.

8.42 Mergui Harbor has some commercial importance. Other

ports and harbors are available which provide sheltered anchorage and which can be reached through deep channels.

8.42 Winds—Weather.—Mergui receives weather information
Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 227

Pub. 173

but no signals are displayed. For additional information refer to

the winds and weather described in paragraph 8.1.

8.42 Tides—Currents.—The tide may fall 0.3m lower than the

datum to which the soundings on the chart are reduced in the

perigee spring tides of February and March.

8.42 During the rising tide the tidal currents set S off the E coast

of Tavoy Island through Port Owen at rates of 1 to 2 knots at

springs in the dry season, but may attain a strength of 4 knots

during the rainy season. During the falling tide these currents

set N at rates of 2 to 3 knots at springs during the dry season.

During the rainy season, the rates are weaker and at neaps, the

set may be to the S.

8.42 The tidal currents set through the channel between the N part

of Tavoy Island and the extensive flat that extends W from the

adjacent mainland at a rate of 1.5 knots at springs. The tidal

currents on the rising tide set towards this flat.

8.42 Strong eddies, tide rips, overfalls and tidal currents occur in

Middle and Iron Passages, especially during the Southwest

Monsoon. In both passages, the tidal currents appear to set E

on the rising and W on the falling tide. The tidal currents attain

a rate of more than 3 knots at springs in Iron Passage.

8.42 Between Pinbwa Island (12°17'N., 98°20'E.) and Christmas

Island, about 20 miles SW, in the SW approach to Mergui Harbor, the tidal currents set SE on the rising tide. In the vicinity of

Shrub Rocks (12°15'N., 98°21'E.), these currents set E on the

rising tide and are strong at springs.

8.42 In Fell Passage, E of King Island, the tidal currents on the

rising tide enter at both ends, meeting abreast of Yemyok. The

tidal currents set NE in the narrows N of Payi Kyun from 6

hours after to 1 hour before HW at Mergui at a rate of 1.25

knots at springs. The tidal currents in the S approach to Fell

Passage are described with the Bentinck Route in paragraph

8.65.

8.42 Depths—Limitations.—There is a least depth of 10m over a

width of 2.8 miles in the fairway of the navigable channel between the N part of Tavoy Island and the extensive flat which

extends W from the adjacent mainland. Soundings give no

warning of the approach to this flat.

8.42 Middle Passage and Iron Passage are deep and clear of dangers.

8.42 The approach channel to Mergui from the S is shallow. Vessels with a draft not exceeding 2.4m and having local knowledge can use this channel at HW.

8.42 The dangers off this coast, except for the outer islands of the

Mergui Archipelago, lie within the 40m curve.

8.42 Aspect.—Vessels approaching from the N and using the Inner Route should shape course to pass about 2 miles E of the N

extremity of Tavoy Island and then alter course to pass about

the same distance off Cornwall Point, the E extremity of that

island. A direct track, which is free from dangers, then leads

between Iron Island and Long Island.

8.42 Vessels approaching from the W should proceed through either Middle Passage or Iron Passage. Care is necessary in both

passages because of the strong tidal currents and tide rips usually encountered.

8.42 Iron Island, King Island, and Plantain Island appear as one

lofty island to vessels approaching from the N. From a position

about midway between Iron Island and Long Island, a vessel

should steer 167° for the steep E extremity of Plantain Island.

When Thita Kyun bears 113°, course should be altered to 150°

with the summit of Pataw Island ahead. When the NE end of

Plantain comes in line bearing 312° with the summit of Little

Cannister Island, it should be brought astern and kept on that

bearing until the old light structure off Kalwin Point can be

identified. At such time the light structure should be brought in

line bearing 130° with Pawdawmu Pagoda. This course of 130°

leads to the outer anchorage NW of Kalwin Point.

8.42 The approach from the S is suitable only for light-draft vessels with local knowledge.

North Approach to Mergui Harbor—West Side

8.43 Tavoy Island (13°13'N., 98°15'E.), narrow and mountainous, lies with its N end about 10.8 miles SW of Kantu

Rocks. Its W side is steep and rises to an elevation of 687m

about 7 miles S of its N end. Its E side is low and terminates in

Cornwall Point. A small white pagoda, not visible from the N,

stands on the E side of the island about 2 miles N of its S end.

8.43 Port Owen (13°06'N., 98°19'E.) lies on the E side of Tavoy

Island about 7.5 miles SSE of its N extremity. Edward Island,

William Island, Rich Island, and Campbell Island lie on the N

side of the port and the peninsula terminating to the E in Cornwall Point forms its S side. North Button Island, Rat Island,

and Mouse Island lie within 0.5 mile N of the N end of the

above group of islands.

8.43 A few small villages lie in the vicinity of Port Owen. The

principal village stands at the head of Fisher Bay on the S side

of Port Owen.

8.43 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Port Owen, in

depths of 12.8 to 23.8m, but the holding ground is not good.

During the Southwest Monsoon, sudden squalls may sweep

down from the mountains. There is a least depth of 11m in the

approach to the anchorage and depths of 5.5 to 9.1m in the S

approach between Cambell Island and the N side of the peninsula forming the S side of the port. An obstruction, with a least

depth of 7.3m, lies about 0.8 mile SW of the SE end of Campbell Island.

8.43 South Island (12°54'N., 98°19'E.), densely wooded and

153m high, is separated from the S end of Tavoy Island by a

narrow unnavigable channel.

8.43 South Rocks (12°50'N., 98°19'E.), a chain of rocky islets,

extend about 2 miles SSE from a position 0.5 mile S of South

Island.

8.43 Kyun Taung Island, Cochin Island, and South Button Island

lie between 8 and 3 miles N of the S end of Tavoy Island.

8.43 Iron Island (12°45'N., 98°20'E.), 365m high in its S part,

lies about 2.5 miles SSE of the S end of South Rocks. The W

side of the island is precipitous. Middle Passage separates Iron

Island from South Rocks; Iron Passage separates Iron Island

from Kadan Kyun to the S.

8.43 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 22m,

sand and mud, off the E side of Iron Island.

8.44 Kadan Kyun (12°40'N., 98°21'E.) is large and densely wooded. Its NE side forms the W side of the inner route.

8.44 Lys Shoal (12°39'N., 98°25'E.), which consists of two rocky

patches, lies about 5 miles SE of the S end of Iron Island. The

NW patch has a least depth of 3m and the SE patch a least

depth of 3.7m. The SW extremity of Iron Island bearing 308°

and in line with the SW extremity of Little Canister Island
228 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

leads close NE of Lys Shoal. The N entrance of Padaw Aw

bearing 248° leads S of the shoal.

8.44 Kadan Kyun Sound (12°37'N., 98°26'E.) is entered between a point about 1 mile SW of Lys Shoal and the N end of

Plantain Island, about 2.5 miles ESE. The latter island appears

to be a peninsula. A 406m high peak rises just within the N end

of the island. Panella Island, low and small, lies 0.4 mile NW

of the N end of Plantain Island. A shoal, with a depth of 8.7m,

lies about 0.8 mile NE of Plantain Island.

8.44 Kadan Kyun Sound is almost entirely filled by shoals and

drying flats except near its entrance. Anchorage can be taken,

in a depth of 12.8m, with the W entrance point of the sound

bearing 341°, distant 0.5 mile. Caution is necessary because

this anchorage lies only about 0.2 mile from the edge of a 3.7m

shoal.

North Approach to Mergui Harbor—East Side

8.45 The coast between Round Hill and Zatzit Point, about

10.5 miles SSE, is fronted by extensive sand and mud flats.

Shoal ground, as defined by the 9.1m curve, extends up to 9.5

miles offshore. Zatzit Flat, which dries in places, extends 7

miles W from Zatzit Point.

8.45 Kyunhla Taung (13°02'N., 98°28'E.), a conical island 165m

high, lies about 6.8 miles SW of Zatzit Point.

8.45 Kumla Patch (12°58'N., 98°28'E.), with a least depth of

4.9m, lies about 3.8 miles SSW of Kyunhla Taung.

8.45 Anyinpo Island, 142m high, lies about 11 miles S of Zatzit

Point and Anyinma Island, 107m high, lies about 1.5 miles farther S. Both islands are densely wooded. Reefs and shoal

ground lie between these islands and the coast.

8.45 Mandrell Reef (12°57'N., 98°32'E.), a low isolated islet, lies

about 1 mile NNW of Anyinpo Island.

8.45 A beacon marks a drying reef about 1.5 miles SW of Anyinma Island. 

8.45 Galbraith Rock (12°50'N., 98°34'E.), which dries 2.7m and

is surrounded by shoal depths, lies about 4 miles S of Anyinma

Island.

8.45 Gladys Island (12°49'N., 98°36'E.), 103m high, lies about

2.3 miles ESE of Galbraith Rock.

8.45 Long Island (12°48'N., 98°31'E.), 134m high, lies about 6.8

miles SSW of Anyinma Island and is the outermost island of a

group which lie within the limits of a shoal which extends

about 7.3 miles NW from the coast.

8.45 The other islands of the group consist of Daisy Rocks, Cone

Island, and Two Spade Island.

8.45 Kadwe Rock, a detached rock 1.2m high, lies 2.8 miles S of

Long Island.

8.45 Pyinban Rocks (12°44'N., 98°34'E.) consists of a chain of

rocks which lies about 2.5 miles E of Kadwe Rock. The furthest S, Peak Island, rises to a height of 36m. A rock awash lies

about 0.2 mile S of Peak Island.

8.45 White Rocks (12°41'N., 98°34'E.), 4.3m high, lie about 1.8

miles S of Peak Island. A drying rock lies 0.5 mile SW and a

similar rock lies 1 mile SSE of White Rocks.

8.45 High Rock, 11.3m high, lies about 3.8 miles SE of White

Rocks. Cap Rock, 6.7m high, lies 4.5 miles SSW of White

Rocks. Thitya Kyun, a steep-to square rock 26m high, lies 1.3

miles SE of Cap Rock. These three islets or rocks lie on an extensive shoal, as defined by the 10m curve, which extends

about 13 miles NW from a position about 0.8 mile N of Kalwin Point (12°29'N., 98°36'E.).

Mergui Harbor—West Appoach

8.46 Islands west of the south end of Tavoy Island.—

Pinnacle Rock (12°59'N., 98°14'E.), West Rock, and Mali Kaing are a group of high steep-to black rocks lying about 3 miles

W of the S part of Tavoy Island.

8.46 Paine Kyun (12°55'N., 98°11'E.), densely wooded and

370m high, lies about 6.5 miles W of the S end of Tavoy Island. Sinthama Kyun, conical, densely wooded and 311m high,

lies about 5.5 miles SSE of Paine Kyun.

8.46 The Birds Nest Islands (12°53'N., 98°15'E.), a group of

three gray rocky islets, lie about 3.3 miles WSW of the S end

of Tavoy Island. Mali Don, the largest of the group, rises to an

elevation of 103m.

8.46 The channels between these island groups are clear of all

known dangers.

8.47 Outer islands.—Kabosa Island (12°48'N.,

97°51'E.), the N outer island of the Mergui Archipelago, lies

about 26 miles W of the N end of Iron Island. The denselywooded island has four summits arranged in the form of a

square. The two S summits rise to elevations of about 396m. A

rock lies about 183m off the SW end of the island.

8.47 West Canister Islet (12°41'N., 97°43'E.), 144m high, steep,

and covered with jungle growth, lies about 8.3 miles SW of

Kabosa Island. North Pinnacle and South Pinnacle, two low

rocks, lie on a detached rocky patch about 4.5 miles E of the

above islet.

8.47 Freak Islet (12°41'N., 97°53'E.), conical in shape and 37m

high, lies about 4.8 miles ESE of North Pinnacle. A few scattered trees lie on this islet.

8.47 Investigator Passage (12°45'N., 97°48'E.), deep and clear,

lies between the above three islands to the S and Kabosa Island

to the N.

8.47 Tenasserim Island (12°34'N., 97°51'E.) lies about 10.5

miles S of Kabosa Island. Tenassarim Peak, 494m high, is the

highest and furthest S of several peaks which, from a distance,

appear as separate islands. Herbert Island and Howard Island,

both high, lie close N of Tenasserim Island. West Islet, 106m

high, lies close off the SW side of the same island and appears

to be a part of that island. East Islet, 82m high and not easily

distinguished, lies close S of the E end of the same island. All

of the above islands are densely wooded and steep-to.

8.47 Rock Islet (12°35'N., 97°54'E.), 20m high and white in appearance from the E, lies about 1 mile NE of the E end of Tenasserim Island.

8.47 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 16.5m, near the head

of an inlet which lies about in the middle of the NW side of Tenasserim Island. Protection is provided during the Northeast

Monsoon.

8.47 The outer islands of the Mergui Archipelago, S of Tenasserim Island, are somewhat similar in appearance. All are high,

steep, and usually densely covered.

8.48 Saurin Island (12°30'N., 97°48'E.), 178m high, lies

about 5 miles SW of Tenasserim Peak. Two small islets, Ramsey and Morgan, lie 2.5 miles ESE and 4.5 miles E of Saurin
Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 229

Pub. 173

Island. A breaking rock awash lies about 0.5 mile SSW of

Morgan Islet.

8.48 The channel between these islands and Tenasserim Island is

deep. The currents are irregular and tide rips occur.

8.48 Blundell Island (12°27'N., 97°50'E.), 284m high, lies about

4.5 miles SSW of Tenasserim Island. Chevalier, a small high

islet, lies about 1.5 miles W of the S point of Blundell Island.

Chevalier Rock, small and low, lies about 0.3 mile S of Chevalier Islet.

8.48 Lion Rock (12°24'N., 97°49'E.), 40m high and sparsely covered with scrub, lies about 1.8 miles S of Blundell Island.

8.48 Sir Charles Metcalfe Island (12°17'N., 97°47'E.), about

411m high, lies 6 miles S of Lion Rock.

8.48 Mermaid Passage (12°22'N., 97°51'E.), entered from the

SW between Lion Rock and Sir Charles Metcalfe Island, is

deep and clear of known dangers.

8.48 Smart Island (12°17'N., 97°52'E.), about 268m high, has

rocky shores and lies 3 miles E of Sir Charles Metcalfe Island.

Numerous rocks lie off the points which form open bays.

8.48 Saddle Island (12°24'N., 97°55'E.), 77m high, lies 5.5 miles

ESE of the S end of Blundell Island. A reef extends about

183m from its SW point.

8.48 Oubliee Rock (12°26'N., 97°58'E.), 16m high, lies 8 miles E

of the S end of Blundell Island. A rock, which dries 3.7m, lies

about 0.6 mile E of this rock.

8.48 South Direction Island (12°29'N., 98°00'E.), 95m high, lies

about 10 miles E of the N end of Blundell Island. Two rocks lie

about 0.3 mile off its SW side. North Direction Island, 46m

high at its S end, lies 14 miles NNW of South Direction Island.

A deep channel separates these two islands.

8.49 Elphinstone Island (12°20'N., 98°00'E.), irregular in

shape, hilly, and densely wooded, lies with its NW end about 8

miles ESE of the S end of Blundell Island. The most prominent

summits are Elphinstone Peak, 533m high, and False Peak,

430m high. Both peaks lie on the W part of the island. Elphinstone Peak appears as a separate conical island when viewed

from the N.

8.49 A large bay indents the W side of the island. The bay head

extends in a NE direction almost to the foot of Elphinstone

Peak, and in a E direction almost to the foot of False Peak.

During the Northeast Monsoon, vessels with local knowledge

can anchor in convenient depths, sand, near the head of the bay.

8.49 Port Maria (12°23'N., 98°03'E.) lies within the limits of an

open bay that indents the N side of Elphinstone Island. The bay

is sheltered except from the N and NE.

8.49 The W side of the bay is irregular and broken, with many islets close off that side. The steep-to E side of the bay is bordered by hills which slope down to the high-water line.

8.49 Castle Island, topped by three peaks, lies on the W side of

the N approach to the bay about 0.8 mile NNW of the W entrance point. The highest peak rises to a height of 52m. Sack Island, 137m high, lies 0.5 mile SW of Castle Island. Two islets

lie about 0.3 S of Sack Island. All of these islets and islands appear to be a part of Elphinstone Island when viewed from the

N.

8.49 Entrance Islet (12°28'N., 98°03'E.), 66m high, lies about 2

miles NE of Castle Island and about in the middle of the N approach to the bay. A fringing reef extends from the E and S

side of the islet. The E part of this reef just covers at HW.

8.49 Burne Island (12°27'N., 98°05'E.), 112m high and narrow,

lies 1.8 miles ESE of Entrance Islet. Three small islets lie off

the SE point of the island.

8.49 Tidal currents in the vicinity of Port Maria are weak. Cross

currents are sometimes encountered in the N approach to the

port

8.49 Anchorage.—When Crab Islet, about 1.8 miles S of the W

entrance point, is in line bearing 261° with Elphinstone Peak,

anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 12.8m. This position is

exposed to N and NE winds.

8.49 Directions.—Vessels approaching Port Maria can pass on

either side of Entrance Islet and then steer directly into the bay,

favoring the E side until a bay at its W end opens.

Islands and Dangers Between Elphinstone Island

and Iron Passage and Middle Passage

8.50 Bowers Island (12°30'N., 98°06'E.), small, steep, and

74.7m high, lies about 4 miles NE of Entrance Island.

8.50 Corbin Island (12°29'N., 98°09'E.), irregularly shaped and

136m high, lies about 2.5 miles SE of Bowers Island. This

densely-wooded island is the furthest N of a group of islands

and rocks lying E of Elphinstone Island and in the NW approach to the Bentinck Route.

8.50 Hayes Island (12°29'N., 98°11'E.), 91m high and densely

wooded, lies about 1 mile E of Corbin Island. A sunken rock

lies about 1 mile NNE of Hayes Island. The channel between

Hayes Island and Corbin Island is deep.

8.50 Maingy Island (12°31'N., 98°15'E.), separated from the W

side of King Island by a narrow shallow channel, is high and

steep-to on its W side. A peak, 600m high, rises in its SW part.

Its SE side is fronted by an extensive flat which dries 1.5m. A

small, high islet lies close E of the N end of Maingy Island.

8.50 Page Islet (12°36'N., 98°10'E.), 26m high, lies 5 miles NW

of Maingy Island. This conical-shaped islet is covered with

straggly trees.

8.50 The Marcus Islands (12°39'N., 98°12'E.) consist of a group

of four islands which lie close together about 6 miles WSW of

the N end of King Island. Marcus Island, 140m high, is the N

island of the group. Gifford Island, 134m high, is fringed by a

reef which extends about 0.3 mile SW from it; a part of this

reef is 3.7m high. Harris Island, 140m high, appears as two islands joined by a narrow sandy strip. Genn Island, the smallest

and E, is 69m high. Strong currents and tide rips are encountered in the deep channels between these islands.

8.50 Brown Rock (12°41'N., 98°11'E.), 20.1m high, lies about

2.5 miles NW of Marcus Island. Rocks, which dry at times, lie

close N and S of it.

8.50 Middle Passage (12°49'N., 98°20'E.), a deep, clear passage

about 2 miles wide, lies between the N end of Iron Island and

South Rocks.

8.50 Iron Passage (12°42'N., 98°22'E.), deep and clear of dangers in the fairway, lies between Iron Island to the N and King

Island to the S.

8.51 Ant Islet (12°42'N., 98°19'E.), 16m high and scrub

covered, lies on the S side of Iron Passage, about 1 mile N of

the N end of King Island. Mussel Islet, 8.2m high, lies about

0.3 mile S of Ant Islet. Melhuish Island, 68m high and densely

wooded, lies about the same distance NE of the N point of
230 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

King Island. Three wooded islets lie close off the W shore of

an open bight that forms the N side of King Island.

8.51 Directions.—Middle Passage and Iron Passage lead into the

Inner Route to Mergui Harbor.

8.51 Vessels proceeding E through Iron Passage should favor the

N side of the passage to minimize the effects of the strong eddies and tide rips off Ant Islet and Mussel Islet. The set of the

flood current onto Iron Island must be guarded against.

Mergui Harbor—North Approach

8.52 The channel leading to Mergui Harbor is about 2.8

miles wide between the NE side of Plantain Island and Cap

Rock, about 5 miles ENE. The E side of the channel is formed

by an extensive shoal, as defined by the 10m curve, which extends about 13 miles NW from a position about 0.8 mile N of

Kalwin Point (12°29'N., 98°36'E.).

8.52 Kala Kyun (12°30'N., 98°30'E.), which is hilly on its W side

and fronted by mangroves, is separated from King Island by

Fell Passage.

8.52 Sa Kyun, 89m high and steep, lies on the W side of the N entrance of Fell Passage, about 2.3 miles NNW of the N end of

Kala Kyun.

8.52 Kaw Mwe, 61m high and topped by a pagoda, is connected

to Kala Kyun by a drying flat. A rocky shoal, as defined by the

6m curve, extends about 2.5 miles N from the N side of Kala

Kyun and forms the E side of the N entrance of Fell Passage.

8.52 A narrow channel, with depths of 6.1 to 27.4m, extends

about 6.5 miles S from Kaw Mwe along the E side of Kala

Kyun. South of a line drawn between Kaw Mwe and Kalwin

Point to the SE, with the exception of the narrow channel referred to above, the entire area is marked by numerous small islands, shoals, and drying flats.

8.52 Pataw Island (12°27'N., 98°35'E.), which lies in the SE corner of this shoal area, is divided into two parts by a large mangrove swamp. The S part is known as Pahtet Island. Pataw

Taung, rises to a height of 238m near the N end of the island,

and Pati Taung, 83m high, lies near its S end. Numerous pagodas lie on various parts of the island.

8.52 Kalwin Point (12°29'N., 98°36'E.), the NW extremity of

Mergui Island, forms the S entrance point of the Kiaupi River.

This river separates the island from the mainland and forms

one of the outlets of the Tenasserim River.

Mergui Harbor

8.53 Mergui Harbor lies at the S end of the channel that

separates Pataw Island and Pahtet Island from Mergui Island.

The town of Mergui lies on the W coast of Mergui Island

abreast the S part of Pahtet Island.

8.53 Tides—Currents.—The tidal range at springs is about 51m;

the mean range is about 3.4m.

8.53 The tidal currents set S through the harbor on the flood and

N on the ebb. At springs, the rate of the tidal currents at halftide is about 2 knots during the dry season. During the rainy

season, the rate of the ebb is probably greater.

8.53 Depths—Limitations.—Depths of 10 to 11m are found at

the outer anchorage.

8.53 Depths of 2.7 to 3m are found in the fairway of the channel

from the entrance, about 137m W of Kalwin Point Light to a

position about 1 mile S of the entrance. From the latter position, depths of 3 to 4m are found in the fairway to a position

about 0.3 mile NNW of the Main Wharf.

8.53 Depths of 5.8 to 9.8m are found in the inner anchorages NW

and W of the Main Wharf.

8.53 A narrow shoal, with depths of 1.2m or less, lies close W of

the channel about 0.3 mile within the entrance.

8.53 An obstruction, with a least depth of 2.7m, lies on the SW

side of the entrance channel, about 0.3 mile NW of the same

light structure.

8.53 A 1.8m patch lies close E of the fairway about 0.9 mile N of

the Main Wharf.

8.53 The E sides of Pataw Island and Pahtet Island are fringed by

rocks, with the 5.5m curve lying up to 0.2 mile offshore. Drying flats extend up to 0.2 mile off the W side of Mergui Island.

8.53 Aspect.—Mergui Pagoda, gilded and prominent, stands in

the city at an elevation of 73m and is brilliantly illuminated at

night. Pawdawmu Pagoda stands at an elevation of 57m, about

2 miles NE of Mergui Pagoda. Some conspicuous oil tanks

stand about 2 miles S of Kalwin Point.

8.53 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Mergui Outer Harbor, in depths of 10 to 11m, between 1 and 1.7 miles NW of

Kalwin Point Light, with Pataw Pagoda bearing between 168°

and 181°.

8.53 Vessels with local knowledge and drawing more than 5.5m

can anchor about 0.2 mile W and 0.3 mile NW of the head of

Main Wharf. The swinging room is restricted by the extending

shoals.

8.53 Vessels of greater draft can anchor in The Pool, a small deep

area of the E end of Pahtet Island. The swinging room is restricted and the eddies and currents are strong. Local knowledge is required.

8.53 Directions.—Vessels should only enter Mergui Harbor during the daytime and under favorable conditions. Navigational

aids are inadequate and pilotage is not available.

8.53 Vessels drawing up to 3m, and not possessing local knowledge, should not attempt to enter until after the first quarter of

the flood; those of greater draft should not enter until after the

first half of the same tide. Vessels with local knowledge and

having a draft of 4.6m can enter after the first quarter of the

flood at neaps.

8.53 Vessels entering Mergui Harbor should steer with Kalwin

Point red light structure, in line bearing 130° with Pawdawmu

Pagoda, until the lighted beacon on the seawall at Mergui is in

line bearing 169.5° with Mergui Pagoda. A course of 169.5°

should then be steered until the white pagoda on the SE side of

Pawtaw Island bears about 258°. Course should then be altered

slightly to the E for about 0.2 mile to avoid the 1.2m patch, located close W of the range lines. Having cleared this patch,

vessels should steer for the pagoda, lying about 0.2 mile ENE

of Pawhtet Pagoda, on a course of 197° and anchor as convenient.

8.53 Care should be taken to clear the wreck, with a depth of

1.2m, which lies close N of the 130° course line.

8.54 Mergui (12°28'N., 98°36'E.) (World Port Index No.

49690), the most important town in the southern district of

Burma, extends for more than 1 mile along the SW shore of

Mergui Island. It is a scheduled port of call for small coastal

vessels and is the center of important rubber and tin mining op-
Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 231

Pub. 173

erations.

8.54 Main Wharf, a wooden structure on piles with depths of 0.6

or 0.9m alongside, lies at the S end of the seawall which fronts

the town. Naukle Jetty extends from the shore S of Main Wharf

and was reported to have a depth of 1.5m alongside.

8.54 A pontoon wharf, 73.2m long and 6.1m wide, with a reported depth of 4.3m alongside, is situated abreast of the town.

Ocean-going vessels normally work cargo into lighters at the

anchorages.

Mergui Harbor—South Approach

8.55 Mergui Harbor can be approached from the SW by

way of a channel 18 miles long, which leads between islands

and mud banks that extend SW from Mergui Island. The seaward end of the channel connects with the Bentinck Route in

the vicinity of Shrub Rocks (12°15'N., 98°21'E.). This channel, which can only be used by light-draft vessels with local

knowledge, saves about 15 miles in distance.

8.55 Depths—Limitations.—The entrance of the approach channel leads between Tatagyi Island (12°17'N., 98°23'E.), which

lies about 2 miles E of the S end of King Island, and North

Round Island, about 0.5 mile S of Tatagyi Island. The entrance

lies about 3 miles ENE of the N end of the Bentinck Route.

8.55 There are considerable depths in the approaches and within

the entrance, but from there to Limlor Anchorage, about 6.5

miles NE of North Round Island, the depths in the fairway

range from 6.4 to 9.1m. Only small vessels with local knowledge and drawing not more than 2.4m at HW can proceed from

Limlor Anchorage to Mergui.

8.55 Aspect.—Tatagyi Island is generally low but has some hills

on its W, E, and SE sides. The W hill is the highest.

8.55 Shrub Rocks, 7m high, lie about 1.8 miles WSW of the S end

of Tatagyi Island. A reef extends almost 1 mile NW from the

rocks.

8.55 North Round Island (12°15'N., 98°23'E.), 74m high, lies

0.5 mile S of Tatagyi Island. South Round Island, 41m high,

lies about 0.3 mile farther S. A shoal, with a least depth of

4.9m, lies 1 mile NE of North Round Island.

8.55 The Mergui Islands (12°10'N., 98°25'E.) are bold, densely

wooded, and lofty. The higher summit of the S island rises to

an elevation of 382m and is pyramidal in shape. Shelving mud

banks extend 1.5 miles W from the N island and about 2 miles

W from the S island.

8.56 Saunggyi Kyun (12°07'N., 98°24'E.), about 1 mile S

of the S island of the Mergui Islands, rises to an elevation of

158m. Shoal ground, as defined by the 10m curve, extends

about 3.3 miles WSW from the W side of Saunggyi Kyun.

8.56 Irregular depths lie between South Round Island and the N

island of the Mergui Isands. A 5.5m patch lies about 0.6 mile

SE and a rock, which dries 2.7m, lies about 14 miles ENE of

South Round Island.

8.56 Thetyagi Island (12°16'N., 98°26'E.), small in extent, lies

on the S end of a drying shoal on the SE side of the approach

channel about 2.8 miles ENE of North Round Island.

8.56 Pyin Island (12°19'N., 98°26'E.), 89m high, lies on a mud

flat about 1.8 miles NE of Tatagyi Island. Bertie Island, low,

covered with mangroves, and marked by a wooded hill near its

SE point, lies about 1 mile NE of Pyin Island. The mud flat, on

which the island lies, extends about 1.3 miles E from Bertie Island.

8.56 Limlor Island, 62m high, lies about 0.5 mile S of Bertie Island. 

8.56 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 12.8 to

14.6m, about 0.2 mile SE of Limlor Island.

8.56 Directions.—From a position on the Bentinck Route, with

the S point of Cantor Island (12°13'N., 98°15'E.) bearing

316°, distant 1.8 miles, vessels using the S approach to Mergui

Harbor should steer about 049°, with the S end of Tatagyi Island a little on the starboard bow. When Shrub Rock bears

about 041°, distant 1.3 miles, course should be altered to 066°

in order to pass midway between Tatagyi Island and North

Round Island. Allowance should be made for the strong spring

tidal currents. After passing the S end of Tatagyi Island, course

should be altered to about 042° for 3.5 miles until the E end of

Pyin Island bears about 012°. Course should then be altered to

068° for the anchorage S of Limlor Island.

8.56 Caution.—Only light-draft craft with local knowledge can

proceed NE of this anchorage.

8.56 The coast between Mergui Harbor and Auckland Bay, about

20 miles SSW, is low and swampy. Several shallow rivers, navigable only by boats, flow out through narrow channels bordered by flats. Large trees usually cover the ridges and

hummocks.

8.56 Auckland Bay (12°07'N., 98°32'E.), which has not been

closely examined, is entered between Sellore Island and Pyingi

Island, about 10 miles to the NE. Sheltered anchorage, in

depths of 7.3 to 22m, can be taken in the outer part of the bay,

over a mud bottom. Caution is required.

Fell Passage

8.57 Fell Passage (12°18'N., 98°21'E.), which extends S

along the E coast of King Island, is used by coastal vessels proceeding through the Mergui Archipelago. The narrow passage

is about 19 miles long. Passage is not difficult on the flood tide,

but local knowledge is necessary.

8.57 The passage has a depth of 7.9m in the N entrance. A least

depth of 6.1m can be carried up to 7 miles S of the N entrance,

but up to 5 miles farther SSW there is a least depth of 4.3m in

the channel.

8.57 Considerable depths are found in the S entrance and up to

5.5 miles NE of this entrance.

8.57 The N entrance of Fell Passage, which has a channel width

of about 0.3 mile, is entered between Sa Kyun (12°33'N.,

98°29'E.) and the rocky shoal which extends 2.5 miles N from

Kala Kyun.

8.57 Yemyok Island (12°26'N., 98°27'E.) lies on a drying flat in

the middle of the passage about 6.5 miles SSW of Sa Kyun.

The preferred channel passes W of this island.

8.57 Bare Island (12°25'N., 98°26'E.), 45m high with a rounded,

wooded summit, lies on the W side of the channel about 0.5

mile SW of Yemyok Island.

8.57 Payi Kyun (12°22'N., 98°26'E.), 82m high on its SE side,

lies in mid-channel about 2 miles SSW of Yemyok Island. A

pagoda lies on the NW side of the island. A drying mud flat extends about 1.3 miles NNE of the island and a drying sand flat

extends the same distance SW from it. Sakone Island lies close

off the E side of Payi Kyun.
232 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

8.57 Pigale Islet, 33m high, lies about 0.2 mile NW of the previously-mentioned pagoda. A beacon, 3.7m high and topped by a

black and white ball, marks the SE end of the rocky shoal extending E from Pigale Islet.

8.57 The Myini Islets (12°24'N., 98°26'E.), a group of small islets, lie on the W side of the channel about 0.5 mile N of Pigale

Islet.

8.57 A shoal, with a least depth of 2.7m, lies in the channel about

0.3 mile E of the N end of Thanpo Islet (12°23'N., 98°25'E.).

8.58 Gyun Thaung (12°20'N., 98°24'E.), about 52m high,

lies on a drying bank on the SE side of the channel, 2 miles SW

of the SW point of Payi Kyun. The two islands are joined by a

narrow shallow ridge. A 4.9m shoal lies in the fairway about

0.5 mile SW of the NW end of Gyun Thaung.

8.58 The S entrance of Fell Passage lies between the S end of

King Island and Tatagyi Island, Fell Island, and Passage Island

to the S.

8.58 Tatagyi Island has been previously described in paragraph

8.55. Tatange Island, 243m high, lies about 0.5 mile W of the

N part of Tatagyi Island.

8.58 The Lahchi Islands, five small conical islets, lie between 0.3

and 1.3 miles SW of Tatange Island.

8.58 Passage Island (12°17'N., 98°21'E.), about 1.3 miles SW of

Tatange Island, forms the S entrance point of Fell Passage. The

113m high summit is almost flat with a slight dip in the middle.

Shoal ground connects the island with the Lahchi Islands.

8.58 Shrub Rocks, which lie 1 mile SSE of the Lahchi Islands,

have been previously described in paragraph 8.55.

8.58 Directions.—A vessel should approach the N entrance of

Fell Passage with the E extremity of Sa Kyun bearing 203°,

and when about 0.2 mile E of the islet lying close N of it,

should alter course to about 195°. When nearing the NW side

of Kala Kyun, a vessel should keep at a distance of about 0.3

mile from it until the channel between Yemyok and King Island opens; the W side of the passage should then be gradually

approached in order to avoid the shoal depths of 2.7m which lie

NE of the N point of Yemyok, and a course shaped to pass

about midway between the N point of Yemyok and the E side

of King Island.

8.58 After passing a large double creek, which does not dry, and

when Sakone Islet (12°23'N., 98°26'E.) is open W of Yemyok

Island and bearing 189°, course should be gradually altered until that islet bears 184°, or open twice its own breadth E of

Nga-thok Kyun. After passing close E of the latter island, the

channel leads W of the spit extending N from Payi Kyun, and

between it and Myini Islets.

8.58 A passage leads on either side of Thanpo Islet; the E passage, although narrower, is more convenient for vessels proceeding to the S. Vessels heading N should use the W passage,

taking care to avoid the 2.7m shoal lying about 0.3 mile E of

the N end of Thanpo Islet.

8.58 South of Thanpo Islet, the channel leads between Payi Kyun

and Mye-ni-kyun. Care should be taken to avoid the 2.7m shoal

which lies about 0.2 mile NE of the latter island. The course

then leads W of Kantaung Kyun and the 4.9m patch which lies

about 0.5 mile SW of its NW point, and then about midway between King Island on the NW side and Tatagyi Island, Tatange

Island, and Passage Island on the SE side. At springs, the eddies are strong between these islands.

8.58 Directions for vessels bound S from Fell Passage through the

Bentinck Route are continued in paragraph 8.65.

The Bentinck Route—Northwest Approach

8.59 The NW approach to the Bentinck Route lies between

Elphinstone Island and the S part of King Island. Numerous islands, rocks, and dangers lie between the two islands. There

are irregular depths, and because of the nature of the adjacent

islands, dangers other than those charted may exist. Tide rips

and cross currents occur around these islands. Passage through

this area should only be attempted by vessels having local

knowledge and then only under favorable conditions.

8.59 The islands and dangers N of a line joining the N point of Elphinstone Island and a line joining the SE point of Maingy Island have been previously described paragraph 8.49.

8.59 Macleod Island (12°25'N., 98°09'E.), close off the NE end

of Elphinstone Island, is topped by a densely-wooded summit

173m high. Two small islets, joined to the island by a reef, lie

off its NE side. A patch, with a least depth of 6.7m, lies about

0.4 mile N of the N islet, and a 3.7m patch lies about 0.3 mile

SE of the S islet.

8.59 Between Macleod Island and Corbin Island, about 2.3 miles

to the N, the water is deep. Tide rips, overfalls, and variable

currents prevail.

8.59 Swirl Rock (12°25'N., 98°11'E.), an isolated patch of rock,

1.5m high, lies about 1 mile E of Macleod Island. Shoals extend about 0.8 mile S from this patch. Depths of 14.6 to 27.4m

exist in the channel between the island and the rock.

8.59 Johnny Island (12°22'N., 98°14'E.), 149m high, lies 4 miles

SE of Macleod Island. This densely-wooded island is fringed

by a reef and indented by small shallow bays. 

8.59 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 9.1m, about 1 mile

SW of the SW extremity of the island.

8.59 Six similar small islands lie between Maingy Island, Macleod Island, and Johnny Island. Wilson Island, Evans Island, and

Robert Scott Island comprise one group. Wood Island and

Dauglish Island lie between this group and Johnny Island. Several drying patches and shoal areas exist in the vicinity of these

islands. Tide rips and cross currents occur in this area.

8.59 A sheltered area is formed by the NE side of Elphinstone Island, the S side of Macleod Island, and the N side of Grants Island. This latter island is densely wooded, hilly, and indented

by many shallow bays.

8.60 Allans Island (12°21'N., 98°11'E.), 155m high; Patons Island; Oates Island; and Bomford Island form the E side

of the sheltered area. Numerous other small islands lie within

this area which is marked by irregular depths.

8.60 The N entrance of this sheltered area lies between Elphinstone Island and Macleod Island, but should not be used because of the narrow channel and foul ground which lies off the

NE end of the former island.

8.60 The E entrance, which lies between Macleod Island and

Bomford Island, should not be used because of the many islands and dangers within the entrance. A drying rock lies 183m

NE of Oates Island.

8.60 La-e-ale Island (12°20'N., 98°15'E.), densely wooded and

93m high, lies a little more than 0.8 mile SSE of Johnny Island.

Two small islets lie between these two islands.
Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 233

Pub. 173

8.60 La-e-atet Island (12°18'N., 98°15'E.), densely wooded with

a high prominent peak, lies close S of the above island. This

peak appears conical when viewed from the N.

8.60 Haycock Island (12°17'N., 98°10'E.), densely wooded and

215m high, is the largest and highest of a group of islets and

rocky patches which lie from 2.5 to 5.5 miles W of La-e-atet

Island. Other islands of this group consist of Rat Island, Rock

Island, Flat Island, Humpty Island, Mouse Island, and Dumpty

Island. Mouse Island, 82m high, lies about 4.3 miles W of Lae-atet Island. This island should not be confused with another

island of the same name about 2.5 miles S of La-e-atet Island.

8.60 The channel, between Grants Island and the N side of Ross

Island, about 2.3 miles to the S, has a least charted depth of

6.1m in the fairway. The greater depths are found close to the

former island. This channel has not been closely examined.

The Bentinck Route—West Approach

8.61 Sir Charles Metcalfe Island (12°17'N., 97°47'E.), at

the SW entrance of Mermaid Passage and the islands between

it and Kabosa Island, about 29 miles to the N, have been previously described in paragraph 8.48.

8.61 West Spur and East Spur, two islets about 1 mile apart, lie on

a rocky shoal about 1 mile S of Sir Charles Metcalfe Island.

The intervening channel is foul.

8.61 Brunnette Island (12°14'N., 97°52'E.) lies about 5 miles,

Greenlaw Island about 8.5 miles, and Lion Island about 11.8

miles E, respectively, of East Spur Islet.

8.61 Thankes Islet (12°15'N., 98°01'E.) lies about 2.5 miles NE

of Lion Island and close SE of the S end of Elphinstone Island.

Shagstone Island lies 1 mile SE of Thankes Islet. Knap Island,

Basham Island, Middle Island, and Pym Island extend about 5

miles S from Shagstone Island.

8.61 Knap Island (12°13'N., 98°02'E.) and Basham Island are

separated from the W side of Ross Island by a channel restricted to a width of 0.3 mile by rocks, and having a least depth of

5.5m. Pym Island, steep-to and conical, is about 122m high.

8.61 Bailey Island (12°08'N., 97°44'E.), 354m high in its N part,

lies about 7.5 miles SSW of Sir Charles Metcalfe Island. The

W islets of a group, that extends about 7.5 miles E, lie 11 miles

E of Bailey Island. This group consists of ten islands. Howe Island, the largest and highest of the group, rises to an elevation

of 246m.

8.61 Hattrass Passage (12°11'N., 97°44'E.) lies between West

Spur Islet and East Spur Islet to the N and Bailey Island to the

S. The passage is deep and clear.

8.61 Henry Prinsep Island (12°03'N., 97°38'E.) lies about 5

miles SW of Bailey Island. Tower Rock, an excellent landmark, lies at the N end of the island. Sargent Island, 366m

high, is separated from Henry Prinsep Island by a narrow foul

channel.

8.61 Chester Island (12°02'N., 97°46'E.), 290m high, lies about

4 miles E of Sargent Island. Reefs have been reported to extend

some distance S from the SW extremity of Chester Island.

These dangers may extend across the passage between this island and Mackenzie Island.

8.61 Observation Island (11°59'N., 97°55'E.), densely wooded

and 169m high, lies 9 miles E of Mackenzie Island.

8.62 Courts Island (11°57'N., 98°00'E.), 344m high, lies

about 3 miles ESE of Observation Island and is bordered along

its N side by foul ground. The island summit appears as a volcanic cone when viewed from the N. During the Southwest

Monsoon, anchorage can be taken, in depths of 7.3 to 9.1m, in

a bay on the NE side of the island. The sandy beach abreast this

anchorage is foul up to 137m offshore. During the Northeast

Monsoon, good anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 9.1m, off

a sandy beach at the E end of the head of the bay on the S side

of Courts Island.

8.62 East Islet (11°57'N., 97°45'E.), 57m high, lies 2.3 miles S of

Mackenzie Island. West Island, slightly lower, lies 5 miles SW

of the same island. Lunka Rock, which dries 1.8m, lies 8.5

miles ESE of East Islet.

8.62 Hayes Island (11°52'N., 97°40'E.) lies 7 miles S of Sargent

Island and rises to a height of 486m. A rock, 4.6m high, lies

close N of Hayes Island. Fletcher Island, 256m high, lies 0.8

mile S of Hayes Island.

8.62 The Great Western Torres Islands (11°47'N., 97°30'E.) are

the W group of the Mergui Archipelago Island group. They lie

from 6.5 to 12 miles W of Fletcher Island. The two largest islands of the group are separated by a channel with a least depth

of 5.5m in the middle of the fairway.

8.62 The Great Western Torres Islands have been reported to be a

good radar target up to 23 miles.

8.62 Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor in a cove on

the shore of the SW island of the two larger islands about halfway through the channel. Larger vessels can anchor off the

cove entrance, in depths of 27.4 to 29.3m, but the holding

ground is only fair and the anchorage is exposed to swells. Vessels should enter through the NW end of the channel with

Northeast Little Torres Island bearing 131° and showing

through the entrance. When the cove opens, anchorage can be

taken as convenient.

8.62 The Little Torres Islands (11°43'N., 97°35'E.) consist of

Northeast Little Torres Island, of moderate elevation, with a

reef about 0.5 mile W of it, and a group of three islets in the

form of an elipse between 4.5 miles SE and 10 miles S of the

Great Western Torres Islands. The highest islet of the group appears as two islets and has a needle-shaped rock off it. Vessels

should not approach within 3 miles of the Little Torres Islands

group.

8.62 Nearchus Rock (11°42'N., 97°52'E.), which covers at HW,

lies about 13 miles SE of Fletcher Island.

8.62 Nearchus Passage (11°53'N., 97°34'E.) connects with the

Bentinck Route from the W and lies between Fletcher Island,

Lunka Rock, and Courts Island to the N and the Great Western

Torres Islands, Nearchus Rock and Bentinck Island to the S.

The peak on Bentinck Island is not conspicuous from this passage.

8.62 Directions.—From a position about 2 miles N of the Great

Western Torres Islands, steer to pass 1.5 miles S of Fletcher Island. Then steer to pass 1 mile S of Courts Island, then about 1

mile NW of Christmas Island which lies about 9 miles ENE of

Courts Island, where the track joins the Bentinck Route.

The Bentinck Route—Fell Passage to Christmas

Island

8.63 The Bentinck Route leads from the S end of Fell Passage (12°17'N., 98°21'E.) for about 90 miles S to the N end of
234 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

Forrest Strait, passing between Bentinck Island to the W and

Domel Island to the E.

8.63 Pinbwa Island (paragraph 8.42), the Lahchi Islands (paragraph 8.58), and Shrub Rocks (paragraph 8.55) have been previously described.

8.63 Mouse Island (12°15'N., 98°15'E.), 53m high and conical,

lies 5.5 miles SW of the S end of Fell Passage.

8.63 Mayan Island (12°15'N., 98°17'E.), 62m high and rounded,

lies 1 mile E of Mouse Island. Lump Rock, 6.1m high, lies

about 1.3 miles S of the same island. Medina Patches, composed of gravel and having a least depth of 2.7m, rise from a

sand and mud bank which extends about 3.3 miles ESE from

Mayan Island. White Rock, 3.7m high, lies about 1.8 miles SW

of Mouse Island.

8.63 Cantor Island (12°13'N., 98°15'E.), 109m high, lies about

0.8 mile SE of White Rock. A rock, with a depth of less than

1.8m, lies 1.3 miles ENE of the S end of Cantor Island, with

foul ground in between.

8.63 Ross Island (12°13'N., 98°06'E.), marked by a prominent,

double summit 245.6m high on its SE side, lies 7 miles W of

Cantor Island. The N part of the E coast is foul with drying

rocks lying 0.5 to 1 mile offshore. Griffiths Island and Helfer

Island, both fairly high, lie between Ross Island and Cantor Island.

8.63 Martin Island (12°07'N., 98°09'E.), actually an islet 64m

high, lies 1.5 miles S of the S point of Ross Island. Two larger

islets lie in between.

8.63 Mewstone Island (12°04'N., 98°02'E.), 152m high, Lloyds

Island, Drakes Island, and Criddles Island lie close together

from 8 to 13 miles SW of the double summit near the SE extremity of Ross Island. The area between the latter three islands is foul. A rock, 4.6m high, lies close off the NW end of

Criddles Island. Button Island, 17m high, lies 2 miles E of the

S end of the same island.

8.63 The Mergui Islands (paragraph 8.55) and Auckland Bay

(paragraph 8.56) have been previously described.

8.64 Hext Rock (12°08'N., 98°16'E.), which has a least

depth of 0.3m and is marked by ripples or breakers, lies about

4.3 miles S of Cantor Island. The summit of Cantor Island, in

line bearing 002° with the 199m peak on La-e-atet Island, leads

W of this rock.

8.64 Christmas Island (12°00'N., 98°09'E.), 137m high to the

tops of the trees and lying about 6.5 miles S of Martin Island, is

the furthest N island of a group of islets and rocky patches. The

island is densely wooded. The S side is bold and fronted by offlying rocks. The indented N side is fronted by shoals extending

0.5 mile NE from it. The summit of the island is prominent

from the S. Vessels can pass 0.5 mile off the W side of the island, but the currents are strong during the flood.

8.64 Double Rock (12°01'N., 98°11'E.), 13.7m high, bare and

having two summits, lies 2.5 miles ENE of Christmas Island.

Single Rock, 4.6m high, lies about 0.5 mile N of Double Rock.

8.64 Directions.—Vessels proceeding S from Fell Passage

through the Bentinck Route should pass about 0.5 mile W of

Pinbwa Island and should then bring the SW point of King Island in line bearing 340° with the sharp peak on Maingy Island. A course of 160° should then be steered with the range

astern until Shrub Rocks bear 046°. Course should then be altered to 229° until the S end of Cantor Island bears 316°, distant 1.8 miles, when course should be altered to 222° which

leads about 1 mile NW of Christmas Island.

8.64 Note that the double peak on the S end of Ross Island, kept

well open S of the S end of Cantor Island, leads S of the banks

which extend E from the latter island.

8.64 Small vessels can cross the shoal E of Medina Patches by

keeping the E side of Pinbwa Island open NW of Tatange Island and bearing less than 034°.

8.64 Caution.—Vessels must guard against being set S between

Cantor Island and Hext Rock.

The Bentinck Route and Adjacent Coasts

8.65 Basin Island (11°59'N., 98°10'E.), 61m high and

sparsely wooded on its N side, lies 1 mile SE of Christmas Island. An islet lies about midway between the two islands.

8.65 The Bentinck Route leads from the S end of Fell Passage to

the N end of Forrest Strait, about 90 miles to the S. It passes

between Bentinck Island on the W and Domel Island on the E.

The N end of the route has been previously described in paragraph 8.56.

8.65 The coastal area abreast of the Bentinck Route is indented by

numerous mangrove-filled inlets with meandering tidal currents at their heads. The shores are extensive mangrove

swamps and mudflats with a few areas of rocky headlands and

several short, narrow, sandy beaches. Mountain rangestrending

N and S lie close inland along the S part of this coast.

8.65 The coastal islands are low and swampy, whereas, the offshore islands are generally high, rocky, and well-wooded.

8.65 Tides—Currents.—In the N approaches to the Bentinck

Route, the tidal currents set SSE on the rising tide and in an opposite direction on the falling tide, at rates of about 2 knots in

open waters. Tide rips, eddies, and overfalls are found in the

narrow channels.

8.65 Near the S entrance of Fell Passage and in the vicinity of

Shrub Rocks, the tidal currents set E on the rising and W on the

falling tide, at rates of about 2 knots.

8.65 Between Shrub Rocks and the Pickwick Group, about 14.5

miles SSW, the tidal currents set SE on the rising and NW on

the falling tide. Rates of 4 to 5 knots have been reported at

springs.

8.65 Between Courts Island and Parker Island, about 13 miles E,

the tidal currents set NE on the rising and in an opposite direction on the falling tide. A set onto the SW side of Christmas Island occurs during the rising tide. The rate at springs on the rising tide is 1.3 knots; that on the falling tide is 1.8 knots.

8.65 Between Bentinck Island and Domel Island, N of West Passage Island, the tidal currents set NE on the rising and SW on

the falling tide, with rates at springs of about 2 knots. In the

more open waters NE of South Passage Island (11°46'N.,

98°07'E.), the tidal currents set N on the rising and S on the

falling tide, with rates at springs of about 1 knot.

8.65 At a position about 4 miles S of the S end of Bentinck Island,

the tidal currents at the start of the rising tide set ESE and then

turn gradually through E to NE. The tidal currents set WSW

during the falling tide. The rate of both currents at springs is

about 1.5 knots.

8.65 East of Maria Island (11°27'N., 98°00'E.), the tidal currents

set SE during the rising and NW during the falling tide, with

rates at springs of about 1.3 knots. Between the S end of Domel
Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 235

Pub. 173

Island and Carew Island, about 2 miles S, the tidal currents set

NE during the rising and SW during the falling tide, with rates

at springs of over 3 knots. The tidal currents are also strong between High Peaked Island and Bushby Island, and in Jubilee

Channel. Rips occur in this channel, especially off its E entrance.

8.65 Between Bushby Island and Owen Island, 8.5 miles SSE, the

tidal currents set NE or ENE during the rising tide and in reverse directions during the falling tide, with rates at springs of

about 1.5 knots.

8.65 In the N approaches to Forrest Strait, between Bernard Island (11°11'N., 98°16'E.) and the Dolphin Islands, about 14.5

miles S, the tidal currents set ENE during the rising and in an

opposite direction during the falling tide, with rates at springs

of about 1.5 knots.

8.65 Depths—Limitations.—The approaches to the outer islands

of the Mergui Archipelago are deep and clear of dangers, but

navigation through them is intricate and dangerous. The approaches to the mainland coast are greatly encumbered by

these islands and the extensive mudflats and shoals closer inshore.

8.65 There are considerable depths in the fairway of the Bentinck

Route between Christmas Island and the entrance of Forrest

Strait. Caution is necessary, however, because there are no navigational aids and the channels have only been partially examined. The least depth in the fairway between West Passage

Island and Elephant Island, about 2.3 miles to the ENE, is

6.4m; the greatest depths are formed near West Passage Island.

8.65 Directions.—The track from Rangoon to Singapore leads

well seaward of the Mergui Archipelago. Navigation through

this group is very intricate and dangerous to those not possessing local knowledge.

8.66 The Bentinck Route.—Vessels should follow the directions previously given in paragraph 8.64 to a position about

1 mile NW of Christmas Island and then to a position about 1

mile W of that island. From this latter position a course of 176°

should be steered, which leads about midway between Warning

Rock and Biddy Rock and between Cap and Feathers Rock and

West Passage Island. Allowance should be made for the currents as soundings give little warning of the approach to the

dangers in this area.

8.66 When the summit of South Passage Island (11°46'N.,

98°07'E.) bears 270°, course should be altered to 195° which

leads about 0.5 mile E of Bluff Point the S extremity of

Bentinck Island. When this point comes in line bearing 005°

astern with the W end of South Passage Island, course should

be altered to about 185° so as to pass about 1 mile W of Fly

Rock(11°30'N., 98°06'E.).

8.66 When Fly Islet, which lies about 2.3 miles SE of Fly Rock,

bears 090°, distant 3 miles, course should be altered to 180°,

passing about 0.7 mile W of Cone Islet. When the summit of

Jane Island (11°22'N., 98°01'E.) bears 279°, course should be

altered to 152° which leads about 1.8 miles NE of Celia Rock,

about 4 miles NE of Father Island, and about 2 miles SW of

High Island at the entrance of Forrest Strait.

8.66 South Passage Island is difficult to identify from the S. Vessels bound to the N should keep Cone Islet (11°23'N.,

98°06'E.) bearing not more than 180° astern, and well open W

of Bushby Island until Fly Rock is passed.

Christmas Island to Bentinck Island

8.67 Courts Island (11°57'N., 98°00'E.), on the W side of

the Bentinck Route fairway, has been previously described in

paragraph 8.62.

8.67 Pickwick Island (12°01'N., 98°16'E.) and Weller Island, the

W islands of the Pickwick Group, are densely wooded, and

fairly high and lie about 5.5 miles E of Christmas Island. This

group lies on the W side of the entrance of Morrison Bay. Bare

Rocks, both small, lie between Weller Island and the N end of

Parker Island, about 0.5 mile to the S. During spring tides,

strong eddies occur in this vicinity.

8.67 Holly Island (12°00'N., 98°12'E.), 39m high, wooded, and

having a prominent summit, lies 2 miles ESE of Christmas Island. Dangers lie within a radius of 1 mile of Holly Island. Stodart Rock, a small pinnacle with a depth of 1.8m, lies about 2.5

miles S of this island.

8.67 Parker Island (11°57'N., 98°15'E.), Trotter Island, and

Money Island, which lie S of the Pickwick Group, form the E

side of the Bentinck Route. All three islands are densely wooded; their W sides are indented by small sandy bays. An intricate, but rather deep channel about 0.5 mile wide, separates

Parker Island from Trotter Island. Strong currents set through

this channel. The channel between Trotter Island and Money

Island almost dries. The channel between Money Island and

Domel Island is narrow and intricate.

8.67 Amie Island (11°56'N., 98°13'E.), small but high and densely wooded, lies 4.8 miles SE of Christmas Island. A prominent

summit tops the island.

8.67 Williams Reef (11°55'N., 98°11'E.), which dries 1.2m, lies

about 1.8 miles SW of Amie Island. Biddy Rock, with a least

depth of 4.9m, lies 1.5 miles farther SW.

8.67 Warning Rock (11°54'N., 98°05'E.), which dries 0.6m, lies

on the W side of the fairway about 6.8 miles SSW of Christmas

Island. The Bentinck Route track passes midway between this

rock and Biddy Rock.

8.67 Whale Rock (11°52'N., 98°05'E.), 9.1m high, lies 1.8 miles

S of Warning Rock. A shallow patch lies close SE of Whale

Rock.

8.67 Zahora Rock (11°52'N., 98°01'E.), awash and steep-to, lies

1.3 miles N of the N end of Bentinck Island.

8.68 Marian Island (11°51'N., 98°12'E.), sparsely wooded, lies about 5 miles S of Amie Island. A high conspicuous

peak lies at the W end of the island. Two fairly high summits

lie in the E part of the island. The saddle in between is prominent from the S.

8.68 A group of islands and rocks, including Rosie Island and

Biddy Island, lies between Marian Island and Amie Island. A

prominent summit lies on the NW side of Rosie Island. Biddy

Island consists of two parts connected by a causeway. A foul

channel separates this group from Trotter Island to the E.

8.68 A pinnacle rock, with a least depth of 3.4m, lies about 1.8

miles S of Marian Island. Several islets and rocks lie between

this island and the rock.

8.68 Elephant Island (11°50'N., 98°10'E.), which appears flattopped from the offing, is 58m high and wooded. It lies about

1.8 miles SW of Marian Island and marks the E side of the

channel abreast West Passage Island.

8.68 Cap and Feathers (11°50'N., 98°09'E.), a single rock 13.7m
236 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

high, lies 0.8 mile NW of Elephant Island. A drying rock lies

about 91m W of this rock. A 5.5m shoal lies about 0.5 mile N

of the same rock.

8.68 Peterson Rock (11°50'N., 98°06'E.), which dries 1.8m, lies

on the W side of the fairway about 3.5 miles W of Elephant Island.

8.68 Crown Island (11°50'N., 98°05'E.), 61m high and steep-to

on its N side, lies 1.5 miles W of Peterson Rock.

8.68 West Passage Island (11°49'N., 98°07'E.) lies 2.5 miles

WSW of Elephant Island and is bold and wooded. The island is

steep-to on its E side.

8.68 Dennis Rock (11°49'N., 98°06'E.), 4m high, lies 1 mile

WSW of West Passage Island.

Bentinck Island—Off-lying Islets and Rocks

8.69 Bentinck Island (11°45'N., 98°02'E.), with a very irregular indented coast, is separated from Courts Island by a

deep channel about 0.3 mile wide. The island is densely wooded and hilly. A bold flat-topped hill, 294m high, lies 2 miles off

the N end of the island. A prominent higher peak rises about

2.5 miles SSE of this hill and appears as a horn when viewed

from the NE or SW. Another prominent hill lies about 10 miles

SSW of this peak.

8.69 The island is surrounded by fairly deep water on all but its E

side, which is fringed by a shoal which extends up to 2 miles

offshore.

8.69 The W coast of Bentinck Island is rugged, wooded, irregular,

and fronted by several islets which lie up to 2 miles offshore.

8.69 The N inlet of three, which indent the W coast, lies about 9

miles NNW of Bluff Point and provides anchorage, in a depth

of 9.1m, in a bay indenting its N shore.

8.69 The middle inlet, which lies 7 miles NNW of Bluff Point,

provides anchorage in a cove along the N shore, in a depth of

9.1m. Only small vessels with local knowledge can be accommodated.

8.69 The S inlet, which lies 4.3 miles NW of Bluff Point, provides

anchorage to small vessels with local knowledge, in depths of

11 to 27.4m.

8.69 The E coast of Bentinck Island is indented by North Bay and

two other inlets. Thompson Island, 305m high, is separated

from the NE coast of Bentinck Island by a narrow shoal channel. North Bay lies on the W side of Thompson Island and provides anchorage, in depths of 11 to 27.4m.

8.69 South Passage Island (11°46'N., 98°07'E.), bold and wooded, lies about 3.3 miles S of West Passage Island. A drying reef

lies about 0.3 mile NE of the N point of South Passage Island,

with shoal depths in between. During the Southwest Monsoon,

anchorage can be taken between these two islands about 2

miles E of the S end of Thompson Island.

8.69 Doris Rock (11°43'N., 98°06'E.), which dries, and Daphne

Rock, awash, lie 6 miles N and 4.5 miles N, respectively, of

Bluff Point.

8.69 The S part of the E coast of Bentinck Island is indented by

two inlets about 2.8 and 4 miles N of Bluff Point. Small vessels

with local knowledge can anchor in the N arm of the S inlet.

8.69 Several rocks lie off the S end of Bentinck Island. Perforated

Rock, 24m high and bare, lies 1.5 miles WSW of Bluff Point.

Fish Rock, 3m high, lies 1 mile SSW of Perforated Rock.

8.69 Perforated Rock has been reported to be a good radar target

up to 22 miles.

8.69 Domel Island (11°39'N., 98°15'E.), one of the largest islands of the Mergui Archipelago, lies roughly parallel with and

7 to 13 miles E of Bentinck Island. Several densely wooded

conspicuous peaks lie on the island and range from 488m to

683m high. Sanderson Hill rises to a bare summit, 539m high,

9.5 miles SSW of the N end of the island. The W coast is indented by many bays with sandy beaches at their heads.

8.69 Livock Bay (11°28'N., 98°14'E.), on the S coast of the island, contains numerous dangers, but small vessels with local

knowledge can anchor, in a depth of 7.3m, in the N arm of the

bay. Protection is provided during the Southwest Monsoon.

8.69 Pigeon Island (11°47'N., 98°13'E.), 119m high near its N

end and wooded, lies 3 miles W of the NW point of Domel Island. A shoal spit extends almost 0.5 mile N from the island.

Bentinck Island to Forrest Strait

8.70 West side of the Bentinck Route.—Tree Island

(11°32'N., 97°58'E.) lies about 9 miles SW of the S end of

Bentinck Island. Northwest Islet lies 3 miles farther WSW and

Flat Islet lies 1.8 miles SW of Tree Island.

8.70 Five Sisters (11°23'N., 98°00'E.) consist of a group of islands and rocks which lie between 10 and 20 miles SSW of the

S end of Bentinck Island. Maria, Eliza, Jane, Anne, and Charlotte are the principal islands of the group. These wooded islands are rocky and precipitous on the their W sides, and

marked by sandy beaches on their E sides.

8.70 Maria Island (11°27'N., 98°00'E.), irregularly-shaped and

fairly high, is marked by four distinct peaks. Two small islets

lie within 0.5 mile N of the N end of the island. A fairly high

rock lies close off the NE end of the island. Violet Island,

wooded and having a grassy summit, lies 0.5 mile SE of Maria

Island. Several above-water rocks lie in between the two islands. Maria Rock, 13.7m high, lies almost 1 mile E of Violet

Island. A rock, 6.1m high, lies 183m NW of the rock.

8.70 Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor in a small

bay on the N coast of Maria Island, in a depth of 12.8m, sand,

0.5 mile SSE of the NW end of the island. Protection is provided during the Southwest Monsoon.

8.70 Eliza Island (11°24'N., 98°00'E.), 204.2m high, lies about

1.3 miles SW of Violet Island. Northeast Quoin Island lies 1

mile E of the SE end of Eliza Island. Eliza Rock, 10.7m high

and bare, lies 2 miles SE of the N end of the same island. Umbrella Rock, 22.9m high with a drying rock 137m S of it, lies

0.6 mile SSE of Northeast Quoin Island.

8.70 Jane Island (11°21'N., 98°01'E.) lies 1 mile S of Eliza Island and is 207m high. Jane Rock, 12.2m high and bare, lies

about 2 miles ENE of the N end of Jane Island. A rock, 3m

high, lies about 0.2 mile SSE of Jane Rock. A smaller rock lies

91m NW of Jane Rock.

8.70 Janet Island (11°21'N., 98°01'E.), densely wooded and 88m

high, lies 0.4 mile SE of Jane Island. Two rocky ledges lie in

between.

8.70 Anne Island (11°20'N., 98°00'E.), the next island to the S,

rises to a height of 204m. Two isolated rocks lie about 3.3

miles W of the N end of Anne Island. Small vessels with local

knowledge can anchor, in a depth of 14.6m, sand, in a bay

about 0.5 mile SSE of the N end of Anne Island.

8.70 Charlotte Island (11°19'N., 98°01'E.), separated from Anne
Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 237

Pub. 173

Island by a narrow channel, is 157m high. Charlotte Rock, 21m

high and bare, lies about 0.3 mile ENE of the island of the

same name. May Island, 41m high and densely wooded, lies

137m E of Charlotte Island. Pin Island, steep-to and densely

wooded, is 62m high and lies about 0.2 mile ESE of South

Quoin Islet. This latter islet is 78m high and lies 183m S of

May Island.

8.70 Celia Rock (11°19'N., 98°04'E.), awash, lies 2 miles ENE of

May Island. Depths of 14.6m exist about 0.5 mile SE of this

rock.

8.70 Black Rock (11°23'N., 97°40'E.) lies isolated about 18.5

miles WSW of Maria Island and can be seen for a distance of 8

miles.

8.71 Coopers Driver Island (11°27'N., 97°55'E.), rugged

and partly wooded, lies 5 miles SW of Charlotte Island. A

small islet lies close off the SW end of the island, but it is

steep-to on its E and W sides. A bare islet, connected by a

chain of rocks to a similar islet about 1 mile to the E, lies close

off the N end of the island. Strong eddies prevail during the

strength of the tidal currents.

8.71 Hen and Chickens, a group of six rocks, lies 2.5 miles S of

Charlotte Island. The S rock of the group rises to a height of

15.2m and is the largest of the group.

8.71 Son Island (11°12'N., 98°05'E.) and Father Island, both

bare, lie close together about 5.5 miles SE of Hen and Chickens. The S and W sides of Father Island are marked by red

streaked cliffs. A rock, 0.9m high, lies 0.6 mile N of Son Island. Two other rocks, which dry 2.4m, lie almost 0.3 mile N of

this rock.

8.71 High Peaked Island (11°27'N., 98°08'E.), 1 mile W of the

SW extremity of Domel Island, rises to a prominent denselywooded summit, 302m high. Second Observation Island, 70m

high, cliffy and wooded, lies 0.4 mile N of the N end of High

Peaked Island. Fly Islet and Mosquito Islet lie within 0.5 mile

NE of Second Observation Island. A drying rock lies close SW

of Mosquito Islet. A similar rock lies 1.5 miles ESE of Second

Observation Island. Fly Rock, a small, steep-to pinnacle awash,

lies 2.3 miles NW of Fly Islet and is difficult to distinguish.

8.71 Bushby Island (11°24'N., 98°08'E.), bold and topped by

many high wooded peaks, lies 2 miles SW of the SW extremity

of Domel Island.

8.71 Cone Islet (11°23'N., 98°06'E.), 65m high, conical and

heavily wooded, lies 1.5 miles S of the W end of Bushby Island.

8.71 Constitution Bank (11°24'N., 98°04'E.), with a least depth

of 12.5m, lies between Bushby Island and the Five Sisters.

8.71 Vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in a depth of

14.6m, close outside a line joining the entrance points of a

small sandy cove near the NW point of Bushby Island.

8.71 Dorothy Island (11°24'N., 98°11'E.), 85.3m high, lies 2

miles ESE of the NE point of Bushby Island. Within about 6

miles E and ESE of Dorothy Island, there are a group of densely-wooded islands and rocks. These include Carew Island,

North Park Island, South Park Island, Ravenshaw Island, and

Wendy Island. Alligator Rock, 4.6m high, lies 1.5 miles E of

Ravenshaw Island.

8.71 Jubilee Channel (11°19'N., 98°15'E.), a fairly-wide deep

passage, branches off from the Bentinck Route in an ENE direction between Ravenshaw Island and Alligator Rock. The

currents are strong in this passage.

8.71 Katherine Island (11°18'N., 98°13'E.), 75m high and wooded, lies in the SW entrance of Jubilee Channel. Vessels can

pass N of it, or between it and Barbara Island, about 1.5 miles

to The S. The latter island is 79m high and densely wooded.

8.71 Sir J. Malcom Island (11°18'N., 98°15'E.) has two prominent summits. Both summits rise to elevations of over 366m.

8.71 A drying rock lies about 0.6 mile WSW of Barbara Island.

8.71 Three islets lie S of Barbara Island and close off the SW extremity of Sir J. Malcom Island. An islet lies in the middle of

an inlet on the E side of the latter island.

8.72 Paines Reef (11°18'N., 98°18'E.), composed of drying coral, lies 1 mile E of the NE side of Sir J. Malcom Island.

A rocky patch, with a least depth of less than 1.8m, lies 1.3

miles S of Paines Reef. Haldane Island, 41m high and heavily

wooded, lies 4.8 miles SE of the N end of Sir J. Malcom Island.

8.72 A navigable passage, 0.3 mile wide, separates the last-named

island from Owen Island to the S. Jubilee Channel is considered to be the safer of the two.

8.72 Owen Island (11°14'N., 98°15'E.) has three distinct summits; the S summit is 381m high and the other two are each

472m high. Sinclair Bay indents the W side of the island and

has a sandy beach about 1 mile long. Small vessels with local

knowledge can anchor, in a depth of 14.6m, sand, about 0.5

mile W of a small bluff in the middle of the bay head. Protection is provided during the Northeast Monsoon.

8.72 June Bay, bordered by rocky ledges around its shores, lies S

of Sinclair Bay. Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in a depth of 16.5m, in the entrance of the bay.

8.72 Joan Island (11°15'N., 98°18'E.), 59m high, lies about 0.8

mile E of the NE end of Owen Island. Doris Island, 85m high,

lies 1.5 miles E of the N summit of the same island. Both islands are densely wooded. A drying reef lies almost 1 mile E of

the E end of Owen Island.

8.72 Maxwell Island, Milne Island, and Bain Island, all small, lie

close S of Owen Island.

8.72 Bernard Island (11°11'N., 98°16'E.), 190m high and densely wooded, lies 0.5 mile S of Owen Island. A deep channel separates the two islands. A shoal bank, with a least depth of

11.3m, extends about 3.5 miles W from the W side of Owen Island. A bank, with a least depth of 14.3m, lies 1.5 miles W of

the S end of Bernard Island.

Morrison Bay

8.73 Morrison Bay (12°00'N., 98°21'E.) is entered between the Pickwick Group and Saunggyi Kyun, about 10 miles

to the NE. The bay extends about 15 miles SSE of Julian Island, Kennedy Island, and Tucker Island near its head. Parker

Island, Trotter Island, and Money Island form the W side of the

bay and Sellore Island forms its E side. The N side of Kisseraing Island forms the S side of the bay.

8.73 Morrison Bay can also be entered from the S by a narrow

channel which is approached between Domel and Kisseraing

Island. This channel leads between flats which extend from the

N parts of these islands into the SW corner of the bay.

8.73 The N entrance of Celerity Passage lies in the SW part of the

bay.

8.73 Parker Island (11°57'N., 98°15'E.), 189m high near its SE
238 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

end, is densely wooded. Numerous islets lie off the E side of

the island. Edmund Island and Wilmot Island lie close together

about 0.5 mile off its NE coast. Pirie Island, densely wooded

and conical in shape, lies 1 mile NE of the E end of Parker Island. Tree Island, having shoal ground extending 0.5 mile N

from it, lies 0.5 mile NW of Pirie Island.

8.73 Star Island, densely wooded and 113m high, lies 1 mile SSW

of Pirie Island. This island is the northernmost and easternmost

of a group of five islands lying off the SE point of Parker Island. Reef Island, the southernmost, is 50m high and lies 0.5

mile off the NE end of Trotter Island. A small islet lies 0.3 mile

E of Trotter Island.

8.73 Trotter Island (11°53'N., 98°16'E.), the next island S of

Parker Island, is 326m high and densely wooded. Whaleback

Reef, which dries 1.5m, lies about 1 mile N of the E end of

Trotter Island. Shoal patches lie NNW and SW of the reef, but

to the E there is deep water.

8.74 Heath Rock (11°55'N., 98°19'E.), which has a least

depth of 1.5m, lies about 1.8 miles NNE of the E end of Trotter

Island. Eddies usually mark this rock. Forfar Rock, 1.2m high,

lies on a rocky patch about 1.8 miles ENE of the same point.

8.74 Money Island (11°50'N., 98°17'E.), the next island to the S,

is 335m high and heavily wooded. A wooded islet lies in midchannel between this island and Domel Island.

8.74 Una Island (11°52'N., 98°18'E.), 23m high and separated

from Jack Island by a channel, 0.2 mile wide, lies 1 mile NE of

the NE end of Money Island. Jack Island, 68m high and sparsely wooded, lies 0.5 mile off the NE side of Money Island. A

village lies on the N side of Jack Island.

8.74 The channels between the above islands are not to be used

because of the strong, irregular currents.

8.74 Kayo Island (12°04'N., 98°24'E.), 52m high, lies 2 miles

SW of the NW end of Sellore Island.

8.74 Donnelly Reef (11°55'N., 98°25'E.), which dries 1.2m, lies

about 8 miles S of Kayo Island. The intervening area is marked

by several shoal patches.

8.74 Donnelly Island (11°54'N., 98°26'E.), 47m high and wellwooded, lies 2 miles SSE of Donnelly Reef. This island lies on

the NE side of a channel which leads between Julian Island and

Kennedy Island.

8.74 Lokthama Kyun (11°54'N., 98°27'E.), which lies between

Donnelly Island and the E shore of the bay, is 79m high and

well-wooded. The intervening channel is deep but the currents

are strong. A 2.4m patch lies in the S entrance of this channel.

8.74 Twin Rocks (11°53'N., 98°27'E.), 9.1m high, lie 0.8 mile

SSE of Donnelly Island. Bird Rocks, white in color and steepto, lie 0.4 mile S of Twin Rocks.

8.75 Head of Morrison Bay.—The N coast of Kisseraing

Island is fronted by Julian Island, Kennedy Island, and Tucker

Island. Julian Island, 134m high on its W side, lies with its SW

point about 3 miles NE of the NW end of Kisseraing Island. A

village lies near the S end of the island.

8.75 An extensive bank, as defined by the 6m curve, extends 6.5

miles NNW from the NW point of Kisseraing Island. Square

Rock, 4.6m high, lies near the end of this bank about 2 miles

ESE of the E end of Trotter Island. Quoin Rock, 9.1m high, lies

0.8 mile S of Square Rock. Both rocks are jungle covered.

8.75 Sidney Island (11°52'N., 98°25'E.), 21m high and heavily

wooded, lies 0.5 mile N of Julian Island.

8.75 Kennedy Island (11°50'N., 98°28'E.), 174m high and heavily wooded, lies 1 mile E of Julian Island. Numerous islets and

rocks lie between this island and the S end of Sellore Island. A

shoal, having a depth of 7.9m, lies between Julian Island and

Kennedy Island.

8.75 Tucker Island, separated from Kennedy Island to the E by a

narrow shoal channel, is densely wooded and has two high

summits.

8.75 Kanmaw Village lies at the NE end of Kisseraing Island. A

beacon lies on a rock 0.3 mile NE of the village. Regular sea

communication is maintained between the village and Mergui.

8.75 Celerity Passage (11°46'N., 98°20'E.), narrow and tortuous,

leads S from the SW corner of Morrison Bay between Domel

Island to the W and the extensive flats known as Leslie’s Garden to the E. Jubilee Channel joins this channel about 25 miles

to the S and then leads S to the N entrance of Forrest Strait,

about 22 miles distant.

8.75 Leslie’s Garden (11°47'N., 98°20'E.), an extensive flat

which dries in places, extends about 5.5 miles NW from the

NW end of Kisseraing Island to within 0.5 mile of Jack Island.

The flat also extends W for about 4.5 miles from the same

point to within a short distance of the E coast of Domel Island.

Morrison Bay—South Approach

8.76 The S approach to Morrison Bay lies between the SE

point of Domel Island and Mawyut Point, the S end of Kisseraing Island about 15 miles ENE.

8.76 A bank, with depths of less than 5.5m, extends about 4 miles

off the W side of Kisseraing Island, 11 miles WNW of Mawyut

Point.

8.76 The Marble Islands, a group of two large and four small islands, lie from 1.5 to 2 miles off the SE side of Domel Island.

The group is almost bare of trees and steep-to. The S island of

the group is the highest, attaining an elevation of 317m. Small

vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in a depth of 11m, off

the W entrance point of a cove on the S end of this island. Vessels can anchor off this group of islands according to the monsoon; the greatest depths being found between them and Domel

Island.

8.76 Sydney Island (11°32'N., 98°27'E.), small, wooded, and

brown, lies close off the SW point of Kisseraing Island.

8.76 Lalla Rookh Island (11°30'N., 98°30'E.), 32m high, wellwooded, and having a prominent dark tree at its N end, lies

about 2 miles W of Mawyut Point and is the furthest S of a

small group of islands. All of these islands are densely wooded

and lie on an area of foul ground which extends about 2 miles

offshore.

8.76 Small vessels with local knowledge can use Celerity Passage

on the last of the flood; the tidal currents are not strong.

Whale Bay

8.77 Whale Bay (11°35'N., 98°39'E.) lies between the SE

side of Kisseraing Island and the mainland to the E. The entrance lies between Mawyut Point and Wet Kyun, about 9

miles to the E. The bay is approached from the SW, but caution

is required because the bay has not been closely examined.

Sheltered anchorage can be taken, in depths of 11 to 18.3m, in
Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 239

Pub. 173

the S part of the bay.

8.77 Pawe Kyun, marked by a prominent tree-covered hill near its

S end, lies about 3.3 miles SSW of Mawyut Point. Firth Rock

lies on a reef which extends about 0.5 mile NE from the NE

side of the island. Shoal ground, as defined by the curve, extends more than 1 mile farther NE. Shoal ground, with a least

depth of 3m, extends 1 mile off the SE side of the island.

8.77 Vera Island (11°29'N., 98°32'E.), 90m high and wooded,

lies 1.5 miles NE of the N end of Pawe Kyun. Vera Shoal,

which has a least depth of 11.9m, lies about in mid-channel between Vera Island and Lalla Rookh Island. Tide rips exist in the

channel between Vera Island and Mawyut Point.

8.77 Robert Island (11°24'N., 98°30'E.), high and heavily wooded, lies close S of the S end of Pawe Kyun.

8.77 Fink Island, high and heavily wooded, is the northeasternmost of a group of small islands and rocks that lie up to 5.5

miles SW of Pawe Kyun. The channels between these islands

should not be used because of the rips and variable currents.

8.77 Malcom Island (11°18'N., 98°32'E.), high and densely

wooded, lies about 5 miles NE from the outer edge of a shoal

tongue which extends 17 miles SW from the mainland. Cheding Flats is that part of the tongue which lies between the island

and the mainland.

8.78 Alice Island (11°21'N., 98°31'E.) lies on a detached

shoal, about 1.3 miles in extent, which lies about 2 miles NNW

of the N point of Malcom Island.

8.78 Barn Island, 114m high and heavily wooded, lies 4.5 miles

W of the S part of Malcom Island.

8.78 Mawyut Point (11°31'N., 98°32'E.) the W entrance point of

Whale Bay, is steep-to on its S and E sides. Wet Kyun, on the E

side of the entrance, is 125m high and well-wooded. There is

no navigable channel between the island and the mainland.

Kyauk Kalat, a small islet of whitish color, lies 0.5 mile S of

the island and on the N side of the entrance of Yengan Chaung,

a creek bordered by drying flats on both sides of the entrance.

8.78 From the entrance of Yengan Chaung, the E side of Whale

Bay extends N for about 14 miles to the mouth of the Lenya

River at the NE corner of the bay. None of the creeks along this

section are as large as the Yengan Chaung.

8.78 Campbell Rock (11°33'N., 98°34'E.), awash, lies about 3

miles NE of Mawyut Point and is marked by a beacon with a

white circle topmark. The rock consists of two pinnacles and is

steep-to on its E side.

8.78 Mawgaung-don, a point on the E side of Kisseraing Island,

lies 6 miles N of Mawyut Point. Bhadra Reef fronts the shore

for about 3 miles S of Mawgaung-don and extends up to 1.5

miles offshore. A vessel, with a draft of 2.4m, struck a rock on

the outer part of this reef about 1.8 miles S of Mawgaung-don.

8.78 Northward of Mawgaung-don, the depths decrease and the

channel along the NE side of Kisseraing Island almost dries.

8.78 The Lenya River (11°40'N., 98°43'E.) rises close to the Pakchan River and roughly flows from N to S. The small village

of Lenya lies 36 miles upstream and can be reached by small

light-draft power vessels.

8.78 Between Kabyachaung (11°27'N., 98°43'E.), a 65.8m high

islet which lies on the S side of the entrance of Yengan Chaung

and the entrance of the Bokpyin Chaung, about 11 miles to the

S, the coast is fringed by mangroves and intersected by creeks.

8.78 Sadien Ondawagan, the largest of many villages in this area,

lies 4.5 miles S of the S entrance point of Yengan Chaung.

Cheding Rocks, 12.2m high, lie close offshore about 1.3 miles

NW of this village.

8.78 Kho Gyun, 65m high, well-wooded, and prominent, lies 5.5

miles SSW of the same village. A shoal, which dries in places,

extends about 0.5 mile NE from the island.

8.78 Boat Rock (11°18'N., 98°41'E.), about 0.4 mile N of Kho

Gyun, is 15.2m high. Bhadra Rock, about 0.5 mile W of Boat

Rock, dries 0.9m.

8.78 Small vessels can anchor, in a depth of 7.3m, about 1 mile S

of Kho Gyun.

8.78 A small village lies on the S side of the entrance of Bokpyin

Chaung, a creek about 7 miles S of Sadien Ondawagan. A

prominent house lies on a hill behind the village.

8.78 The coast between Bokpyin Chaung and the islands forming

the N side of Karathuri Bay, about 13 miles to the S, is indented by creeks and marked inland by high hills.

8.79 Nopu Taung Saba (Elephant Rock) (11°13'N.,

98°39'E.), 48m high and prominent, lies 4.5 miles SW of Kho

Gyun. This islet is the northwesternmost of a group of islets

and rocks which lie on the S side of the approach to Bokpyin

Chaung. Numerous rocks and reefs lie between this group and

the mainland. Needle Rocks lies 1.3 miles NE of Nopu Taung

Saba.

8.79 Pulau Ting-nga (11°12'N., 98°39'E.), a group of three conical rocks, lies about 1.5 miles S of Nopu Taung Saba. The S

rock rises to a height of 21m. Foul ground extends 14 miles NE

and 0.8 mile E from these rocks.

8.79 Pulau Ampat (11°10'N., 98°37'E.), three well-wooded islets, lie 3.5 miles SSW of Nopu Taung Saba. The S islet is 76m

high. From a distance, these islets appear as one. Foul ground

extends about 1.5 miles ENE from these islets.

8.79 North Cone Island, about 2 miles SSW of Pulau Ampat, is

30m high. Pualu Kyin Ngai, 69m high, lies 4 miles WSW of

North Cone Island, Pualu Panyam, 73m high, lies 3 miles farther SW.

8.79 An islet, 43m high, lies near the S end of the shoal ground

that extends 3 miles S from Pulau Panyam.

8.79 Karathuri Bay (10°58'N., 98°36'E.) lies between Carnac Island and Jenkins Island to the N, and Kyeinni Taung and the

Brothers Islands to the S. Carnac Island and Jenkins Island are

surrounded by numerous islands, all lying on an extensive mud

bank, about 6 miles SSE of North Cone Island. A narrow, shoal

channel separates this mud bank from the mainland to the E.

8.79 Carnac Channel, which leads into Karathuri Bay from the N

between Carnac Island and Kauye Kyun, about 3 miles to the

W, is suitable only for small vessels with local knowledge.

Some of the reefs and shoals in this channel are marked by beacons.

8.79 Warrington Straits (10°55'N., 98°30'E.) leads into Karathuri Bay from the W between Collies Island and Kauye Kyun

to the N, and Mingyi Sakan, Sir Robert Campbell Island and

Kandaw Island on the S. Kyaukmedaung and Tunnel Rock,

which is conspicuous, lie close N of Kandaw Island. This latter

island is 80m high.

8.79 A group of islets and rocks lie within 0.8 mile from the S end

of Kauye Kyun. A rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies 1.5

miles S of this group and 0.8 mile ENE of Mingyi Sakan.

8.79 Riou Island (10°56'N., 98°26'E.), 65m high, lies on an area
240 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

of shoal ground, about 1.3 miles S of Collies Island. The intervening channel is known as Warrington Passage.

8.79 Kinnears Passage (10°59'N., 98°28'E.) separates Collies Island from Kauye Kyun, but is suitable only for small vessels

with local knowledge.

8.79 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 11m, about 0.5 mile E

of an islet which lies about 2 miles N of Tunnel Rock.

Forrest Passage and Forrest Strait—West and

Southwest Sides

8.80 Forrest Passage (11°05'N., 98°04'E.) is 16 miles

wide at its entrance between Father Island, previously described in paragraph 8.71, and North Sentinel Islet, and leads

ESE for about 15 miles to the N entrance of Forrest Strait.

8.80 North Sentinel Islet (10°57'N., 97°58'E.), small and steepto, has a rock close off its W side.

8.80 Clara Island (10°54'N., 97°55'E.) rises to two summits and

lies 1.5 miles SW of North Sentinel Islet. The N summit is

534m high and the S summit is sharp. South Sentinel Islet lies

0.5 mile S of the S point of Clara Island.

8.80 Kanzagyi, an island 173m high, lies 2.8 miles E of Clara Island. Wa-ale Kyun (Blunt Island), 314m high, lies 1 mile farther E.

8.80 A reef, partly above and below-water, lies within 2 miles SW

of Kanzagyi.

8.80 Forrest Strait (10°50'N., 98°21'E.), entered between the N

end of Sullivan Island and Collies Island, about 15 miles to the

E, is a deep-water sheltered passage available to deep-draft

vessels. At its N end, Forrest Strait connects with Forrest Passage, the Bentinck Route, and the route from Morrison Bay

through Celerity Passage. Investigator Channel leads from the

W into the strait.

8.80 The strait extends about 70 miles S as far as the entrance of

the Pakchan River, and leads between the mainland coast and a

chain of islands, islets, and rocks which lie from 10 to 12 miles

offshore. A group of islands, about 18 miles S of the N entrance of the strait, lie in the fairway and divide the strait into

two channels. Areas of discolored water are found throughout

the strait.

8.80 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in Forrest Passage set

E with the rising tide and W with the falling tide. The rate is

about 2.3 knots at springs.

8.80 Overfalls and eddies occur about 2 miles W of High Island.

Within the strait, the tidal currents set N with the rising tide and

S on the falling tide, with rates at springs of about 1 knot. In the

vicinity of the channels between the islands on the W side of

the strait, the directions are NE on the rising and SW on the

falling tide, with rates of 1.3 to 1.5 knots at springs.

8.80 In Investigator Channel, the tidal currents set ENE on the rising tide and WSW on the falling tide, with rates of 0.5 knot at

springs.

8.80 Depths—Limitations.—Forrest Passage and the approaches

to Forrest Strait from the N are deep and clear. The W channel

leading through Forrest Strait has a least depth of 11.9m; the E

channel has a least depth of 8.5m. The outer islands along this

coast are fairly steep-to on their seaward sides.

8.80 Directions.—Vessels without local knowledge should proceed with caution because there are few navigational aids, none

of which are lighted. The W channel should be used because of

the deep water within 1 mile of the Gregory Islands and the

landmarks available for position fixing.

8.80 From a position about 2 miles SW of High Island, a course

of 152° should be steered until the S end of the S Dolphin Island bears 270°, distant 4 miles. The latter position can also be

reached by steering a course of 195° from a position 2.3 miles

E of High Island. Course should then be altered to 180° and

maintained until Bold Promontory (11°44'N., 98°18'E.) bears

270°, distant 1.5 miles. A course of 186° should then be steered

until Pulau Tuhan bears 090°, distant 2 miles. Course should

then be altered to 165° for a position about 2 miles E of the

Five Islands.

8.80 Vessels using the E channel should from a position about 2

miles SW of High Island, steer a course of 152° until Shitpwin

Kyun bears 045°. Course should then be altered to about 172°,

which leads in mid-channel over a least depth of 8.2m. When

Karachi Rock Beacon bears 270°, distant 1 mile, course should

be altered to 181° which leads to a position about 2 miles E of

the Five Islands.

8.80 From the junction of the two channels, at a position 2 miles

E of the Five Islands, a course of 193° should be steered in order to clear the extensive sand and mudflat which lies off the

Pakchan River entrance.

8.80 Vessels bound for the Pakchan River entrance from the junction point should steer for a position 4 miles W of Pulo Mah

Puteh and then follow the directions for the Pakchan River.

 Forrest Strait—North Entrance

8.81 The N entrance of Forrest Strait lies between the N

end of Sullivan Island and Collies Island, about 15.5 miles to

the E. High Island, which lies about in the middle of the N entrance, rises to a double peak, about 428m high. A drying

rocky ledge extends about 0.2 mile from the SE side of the island. A cove lies NW of this ledge.

8.81 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 22m, close off this

cove.

8.81 Collies Island is the northernmost island of many which

form the E side of the N portion of Forrest Strait.

North Part of Forrest Strait—West Side

8.82 Two Hill Island (10°59'N., 98°12'E.), 143m high, and

Pulo Gaban, 120m high, lie close E of the N end of Sullivan Island. The islands are steep-to except for a rock awash, about

0.3 mile NNW of Pulo Gaban.

8.82 The E coast of Sullivan Island forms the W side of the N part

of Forrest Strait and rises steeply to form a thickly wooded

range of hills about 309m high. East Peak, the highest summit,

rises to a height of 462m about 12 miles SSE of the N end of

the island.

8.82 The Dolphin Islands (10°55'N., 98°15'E.), a densely-wooded group of three, lie between 3 and 5.5 miles SSE of Pulo Gaban. The S islet is the highest. Small vessels can anchor in the

channel between these islets and Sullivan Island.

8.82 Katyang (10°51'N., 98°16'E.), a small islet 68m high, lies

close offshore about 2 miles S of the Dolphin Islands.

8.82 Half Moon Reef (10°50'N., 98°18'E.), which dries 0.3m,

lies 1.5 miles offshore about 2.5 miles SE of Katyang. A similar reef, which also dries 0.3m, lies 1.3 miles NW. The summit
Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 241

Pub. 173

of Pulo Gaban, open NE of the N Dolphin Island and bearing

about 030°, leads E of Half Moon Reef. Bold Promontory,

open E of The Foreland and bearing 190°, also leads E of Half

Moon Reef.

8.82 The Foreland (10°47'N., 98°18'E.), a projecting headland

13.6m high, is the E extremity of Sullivan Island and is more

prominent than Bold Promontory, about 2.3 miles farther S.

8.82 Marble Island (10°45'N., 98°18'E.), 8.3m high with an islet

off its W side, lies 1 mile SSW of The Foreland.

8.82 Ramsom Shoal (10°42'N., 98°19'E.), a coral patch with a

least depth of 7.3m, lies about 2.5 miles S of Bold Promontory.

8.82 Pulo Nalo, 235m high, and Pulo Kugyi, 34m high, lie within

4.5 miles S of the S end of Sullivan Island. Several islets lie between them.

8.82 Steep Shoal (10°38'N., 98°17'E.), a rocky patch with a least

depth of 1.5m, lies about 1.3 miles E of the N end of Pulo

Kugyi. The Foreland, open E of Bold Promontory and bearing

about 360°, leads E of Steep Shoal.

North Part of Forrest Strait—East Side

8.83 Collies Island (10°59'N., 98°27'E.), Riou Island,

Mingyi Sakan, and Sir Campbell Island, together with the

mainland coast to the S, form the E side of Forrest Strait.

8.83 Shitpwin Kyun (10°49'N., 98°26'E.), 27m high, lies 7.5

miles E of Half Moon Reef and is the N islet of several which

lie on the coastal bank on the E side of Forrest Strait. A 4.3m

beacon, with a white ball topmark, marks a rock awash about

0.3 mile N of Shitpwin Kyun.

8.83 Campbell Reef (10°47'N., 98°26'E.), flat and rocky, dries

about 24m and is marked at its SW end by a beacon which

stands 3.5 miles S of Shitpwin Kyun.

8.83 Pinwun Maw (10°45'N., 98°28'E.), which lies about 3 miles

ESE of the beacon on Campbell Reef, is the NW point of the

mainland which forms the E side of Forrest Strait. The coast

then extends 7.5 miles S to Tutthabo Maw. These two points

and Kyakyke Maw, about midway between them, are the only

prominent features along this low stretch of coast which rises

some distance inland to high peaks about 670m high.

8.83 Kala Taung (10°40'N., 98°29'E.), 1.3 miles SE of Kyakyke

Maw, rises to a height of 235m and is the highest hill near the

coast. A smaller hill lies 1.5 miles S of Kala Taung.

Forrest Strait—Mid-channel Dangers

8.84 Jefford Shoal (10°48'N., 98°21'E.), a steep-to detached 9.1m patch, lies in mid-channel about 4.5 miles WSW

of Shitpwin Kyun.

8.84 A shoal, with a depth of 13.7m, lies about 3.5 miles E of The

Foreland.

8.84 Gregory Group (10°40'N., 98°21'E.) consists of five low

wooded islands, which lie in mid-channel, abreast the S end of

Sullivan Island.

8.84 Leik-u Kyun, small, wooded, and 33m high, is the N island

of the group. Shoals extend 1.5 miles N from the island and terminate in Marble Patch, which has a least depth of 1.8m, sand

and shells.

8.84 Wa Kyun, Pulo Myang, and Pulo Myang Basa lie within 3.5

miles S of the above island. Extensive reefs fringe these islands.

8.84 Myang Shoal (10°39'N., 98°20'E.), with a least depth of

11m, lies 1.3 miles WSW of Pulo Myang.

8.84 Karachi Rock (10°37'N., 98°23'E.), which dries, lies 1.5

miles SE of Pulo Myang Basa. A beacon, with a white ball topmark, marks this danger.

8.84 Pulo Tuhan, the S island of the group, lies 2 miles S of Pulo

Myang Basa. The intervening channel has a least depth of

14.6m. A shoal ridge extends about 0.5 mile SW from Pulo Tuhan.

South Part of Forrest Strait—West Side

8.85 Pulo Hayat (10°35'N., 98°14'E.) and Saucer Island

lie close together about 2 miles SSW of Pulo Kugyi. Pulo Balu,

a high island, lies 1 mile farther SSW. A drying reef extends

about 0.3 mile N from Pulo Hayat.

8.85 Pulo Bada (10°30'N., 98°13'E.), 250m high near its S end,

lies 1 mile SSW of Pulo Balu. A shoal, with a least depth of

7m, lies about 3.5 miles E of the NE point of Pulo Bada.

8.85 Pocock Island and five islets lie on an unexamined area

which extends up to 4.5 miles S and SW from the S side of Pulo Bada. Foul ground extends S from S islet.

8.85 Bowen Shoal (10°29'N., 98°15'E.), a sand and coral patch

which dries 0.6m, lies about 1 mile E of the SE end of Pulo Bada. A shoal ridge, with a least depth of 0.3m, lies between 1

and 2 miles N of Bowen Shoal.

8.85 A chain of islands and islets lies between Pulo Bada and

Pine Tree Island, about 9.5 miles SSE. These include Potter Island, Saddle Island, Naked Islet, Bare Islet, the Ninepins Islands, and Cat and Kitten Island; Northwest Hump Island lies 4

miles W of the latter island. These islands should be approached with caution, because of the irregular depths and

rocky bottom.

8.85 A reef, marked by several drying rocks, extends 1.3 miles N

from the N coast of Pine Tree Island.

8.85 Southeast Hump Island (10°16'N., 98°19'E.), 97m high,

lies 4.5 miles SSE of Pine Tree Island. A dangerous rock,

awash, lies 0.8 mile SSE of the summit of this island.

8.85 The Five Islands (10°17'N., 98°22'E.), a small group of

rocky islets, extend about 1.5 miles N from a position 2 miles E

of Southeast Hump Island. The N islet rises to a height of 49m

and is the most prominent. A rock that dries 1.5m lies almost

0.3 mile NW of the N islet.

8.86 Russell Island (10°15'N., 98°15'E.), tree covered, lies

5 miles SSW of Pine Tree Island and has a well-defined summit, 267m high. Two detached rocks lie 0.5 mile W and NW,

respectively, of the S end of Russell Island.

8.86 Two Tree Island (10°16'N., 98°14'E.), grass covered and

67m high, lies close N of the NW point of Russell Island. The

SW point of the island is reef fringed.

8.86 Little Russell Island (10°13'N., 98°15'E.), tree covered and

76m high, lies close S of Russell Island. A rocky islet lies close

off the SW side of Little Russell Island. The passage between

the two islands is 0.5 mile, wide and deep.

8.86 Currents in the vicinity of Little Russell Island are variable

in strength and direction and numerous eddies exist. Vessels

should give the rocky islet close SW of this island a wide berth.

8.86 North Phipps Island (10°10'N., 98°17'E.), topped by a

prominent summit, 110m high, lies 3.3 miles SSE of Little
242 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

Russell Island.

8.86 South Hump Island (10°11'N., 98°20'E.), of moderate elevation and grass covered, lies 5.5 miles ESE of Little Russell

Island. Helmet Island, also moderately high and tree covered,

lies 7 miles ESE of the same island. Foul ground extends up to

183m offshore around this latter island.

8.86 St. Lukes Island (10°09'N., 98°12'E.) rises to a prominent

summit 484m high and lies 2 miles W of North Phipps Island.

The 2-mile wide channel, between Little Russell Island and the

W end of St. Lukes Island, is clear of dangers in the fairway.

8.86 Care should be taken to avoid a 9.8m rocky patch about 1.3

miles ENE of the NW extremity of St. Lukes Island.

8.86 South Phipps Island, 155m high, Barwell Island, and Horseshoe Island, lie between 2 and 4 miles SSW of Helmet Island

and close off the NE and E coasts of Hastings Island. A channel, about 183m wide with a depth of 5.2m, leads between

South Phipps Island and Barwell Island.

8.86 Most of the islands mentioned above, with the exception of

South Hump Island and those forming Hastings Harbor, are

tree-covered. They usually have well-defined peaks, especially

South Hump Island and the N summit of Hastings Island,

which is 267m high.

East Side of Forrest Strait—South Part

8.87 Between Tutthabo Maw (10°37'N., 98°27'E.) and an

unnamed point about 26 miles S, the E side of the strait is indented

by a number of shallow creeks. Pulo Mah Puteh, 81m high, lies

close off the unnamed point.

8.87 The Turrets Islands (10°31'N., 98°27'E.) lie close together

about 6 miles S of Tutthabo Maw and about 2.5 miles offshore.

Pulau Salangin, the middle and largest island of the group, is a

bold, precipitous rock, 104m high. In clear weather it resembles a square block of marble. Pulo Beba lies close N and Pulo

Prewang lies about 0.5 mile S of Pulau Salangin. A 4.9m shoal

lies almost 0.8 mile SSW of Pulo Prewang.

8.87 An islet, 17m high, lies about 1.8 miles SSE of Pulo Prewang.

8.87 Whaleback Rock (10°28'N., 98°27'E.), 0.9m high, lies about

2.5 miles S of Pulo Prewang and 4 miles offshore.

8.87 Canister Island, 87m high, lies 8.5 miles S of Pulo Prewang

and 4 miles offshore.

8.87 Between Pulo Mah Puteh and Victoria Point, the N entrance

point of the Pakchan River, about 14 miles SSE, the coast is

fronted by an extensive shoal bank as defined by the 6m curve.

This bank extends in a general SSW direction from Pulo Mah

Puteh to a position about 11 miles W of Victoria Point. Numerous patches, with depths of 1.8m and less, lie on this bank.

8.87 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in depths of 12.8 to

14.6m, E of Pulo Gaban (10°58'N., 98°13'E.) and SSW of

High Island in the positions indicated on the chart.

8.87 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 18.3m, off the NE side

of Pine Tree Island with the summit of that island bearing

231°, distant 0.6 mile. Care should be taken to avoid the reef

extending 1.3 miles N from the N coast of the island.

8.87 Anchorage can be taken on the E side of the strait between

High Island and the Turrets Islands, in depths of 9.1 to 11m,

soft mud.

Outer Islands and Banks West of Forrest Strait

8.88 North Twin Island (10°38'N., 97°42'E.), 137m high,

lies about 16 miles SW of Clara Island. The W side of North

Twin Island is bare to a height of 30m; its N and E sides are

densely wooded.

8.88 South Twin Island (10°28'N., 98°41'E.), 82m high, lies 9.3

miles S of North Twin Island. Its W side is almost bare and its

summit consists of bare rock. The N and S sides of the island

are indented by open bays. Two rocks lie close off the NW

point of the island. A sunken rock lies close NE of the E end of

the island.

8.88 A number of isolated shoals and banks have been reported to

exist in the W approach to Investigator Channel (10°15'N.,

97°56'E.), between the 185m curve and a position about 90

miles WSW of Cavern Island. They have reported depths of 9.1

to 87.8m, but these depths have not been closely examined.

8.88 Heckford Bank (10°20'N., 97°10'E.), the NE bank, has a

depth of 12.8m and lies about 48 miles W of Cavern Island.

Coral Bank, about 49 miles WSW of the same island, has a

least depth of 20m.

8.88 A 9.1m patch was reported to exist in position 10°03'N,

97°03'E. Depths of less than 11m were reported to exist in position 10°08'N, 96°48'E.

8.88 Roe Bank (10°08'N., 96°38'E.), of sand and coral with a least

depth of 11.6m, is about 0.4 mile wide between the 20m curves.

A depth of 18.3 was reported to lie E of Roe Bank in position

10°08'N, 96°50'E. A shoal, with a depth of 14m, lies about 8

miles S of Roe Bank.

Forrest Strait—Islands and Dangers West and

Southwest

8.89 The Great Swinton Islands (10°34'N., 98°03'E.) lie

about 15 miles ESE of North Twin Island. Numerous small islets lie between Wa-ale Kyun and the W end of Kyun Pila,

about 18 miles SSW. Pulau Tika, 91.1m high, lies about 3

miles SSW of the S end of Wa-ale Kyun.

8.89 Brown Island (10°45'N., 98°03'E.), 30m high, and Pulau

Tajam, 47m high, lie 2 and 5.8 miles SSW, respectively, of Pula

Tika. An unnamed islet, with a sunken rock close W of it, lies

5.5 miles SW of Pulau Tajam.

8.89 Kyun Pila (10°34'N., 98°00'E.), the largest island of the

group, lies with its N point about 3 miles SE of the unnamed island. A group of white rocks, 3m high, lie about 0.8 mile SSE of

the E end of Kyun Pila.

8.89 Pulo Set (10°34'N., 98°06'E.), 207m high and the E of the

group, lies 3.5 miles E of Kyun Pila. A rocky islet, surrounded

by sunken rocks, lies 1.5 miles SW of Pulo Set. A rocky islet,

surrounded by sunken rocks, lies 3.3 miles SSE of the same island.

8.89 Lord Loughborough Island (10°27'N., 97°55'E.) lies about

3.8 miles SW of Kyun Pila. The Paps, which rise to a height of

439m, are the most prominent of several peaks on the island. The

W coast of the island is bold, steep-to, and densely wooded.

8.89 Loughborough Passage (10°30'N., 97°57'E.) lies between

Kyun Pila and Lord Loughborough Island. A rock, with a depth

of 3.7m, lies in the middle of the passage about 1.5 miles SSW

of the W end of Kyun Pila. Pollock Reef, with a rock 15.2m high

near its SW end, and another rock 3.7m high near its NE end,
Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 243

Pub. 173

lies at the E and of the passage. An islet, 24m high, lies near the

middle of the reef.

8.89 Vessels are advised not to use Loughborough Passage.

8.89 Hayward Island (10°27'N., 97°57'E.), with sunken rocks

extending 0.5 mile NE from it, lies 0.5 mile NE of the E end of

Lord Loughborough Island. Richards Island lies 0.8 mile SE of

the same point. Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 14.6 to

27.4m, between Richards Island and Lord Loughborough Island. An unnamed island, with several unexamined dangers S

of it, lies in the S entrance of this anchorage.

8.89 O’Connor Island, Saul Island, and Skinner Island lie close

together between 1 and 2 miles NE of Richards Island. Off-lying rocks are reported to lie in their vicinity. Vessels should

keep closer to Richards Island in passing between that island

and the above islands.

8.90 Investigator Channel (10°15'N., 97°56'E.) lies between McCarthy Island, Steward Island, and Cavern Island to

the N and the St. Andrew’s Group to the S. The channel is

about 6 miles wide and has depths in excess of 36.6m. Vessels

from the W bound for Hastings Harbor or the Pakchan River

use this channel.

8.90 Cavern Island (10°20'N., 98°00'E.), which lies about 5

miles SE of Lord Loughborough Island, is the largest of several

islands which lie to SE of that island. McCarthy Island, 213m

high, and Steward Island, 154m high, lie between the above islands. Prominent Rocks lie off the S ends of all three of these

islands.

8.90 Quoin Island (10°21'N., 98°04'E.), 114m high, lies 4 miles

E of Cavern Island. High Rock, 20m high, lies close S of Quoin

Island.

8.90 The St. Andrew’s Group (10°10'N., 97°55'E.), on the S side

of Investigator Channel, consists of a number of densely-wooded islands and rocks.

8.90 Horsburgh Island (10°12'N., 97°53'E.), the W of the group,

lies 9.5 miles SW of Cavern Island and rises to a height of

76m. Horsburgh Islet, 71m high, lies close SSE of Horsburgh

Island. Boulder Rock, 7.6m high, lies 0.8 mile SW of the same

island.

8.90 The Cockburn Islands (10°12'N., 97°59'E.), four in number, lie 5 miles E of Horsburgh Island. The highest island rises

to an elevation of 163m. Mackay Island, 3.8 miles SE, and Macleod Island lie 5.8 miles SSE of Horsburgh Island.

8.90 Parsons Island, 277m high, lies 3 miles E of the Cockburn Islands. Several islets and rocks lie close S and E of this island.

Parsons Rock, a compact group of pinnacles which dry about

1.8m, lies 1.8 miles NNW of the N end of Parsons Island.

8.90 Mackenzie Island (10°04'N., 97°59'E.), MacIan Island, and

MacNab Island, lie between 3 and 6 miles S of the main body

of the St. Andrew’s Group.

8.90 St. Pauls Island (10°09'N., 98°09'E.), about 5.5 miles E of

Parsons Island and close W of the N part of St. Lukes Island,

has a prominent horn-shaped peak, 224m high. The channel

separating the two islands has a depth of 6.4m over the bar at

its N end.

8.90 St. Pauls Island has been reported to be a good radar target

up to 20 miles.

8.90 The W side of St. Pauls Island is foul. Several rocks and islets lie off this side and off the N side of the island.

8.90 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 7.3m, near the head of

a bay on the N side of the island. Protection is provided during

the Southwest Monsoon.

Za Det Gyi Island and Hastings Harbor

8.91 Za Det Gyi Island (Big Top Island) (9°58'N.,

98°13'E.) lies S of Za Det Nge Island (Small Top Island) and is

hilly and densely wooded. Its N side forms the S shore of Hastings Harbor. Highest Peak, 864m high, lies near the middle of

the island; South Peak, 585m high, lies near the S end of the island; both peaks are well-defined. Middle Peak, 744m high and

prominent, lies between the above peaks.

8.91 The N and NE coasts of the island are indented by a number

of foul coves. Fish Harbor, near the NE extremity, provides anchorage for small vessels with local knowledge and a draft of

2.7m or less. White Rock, 9.1m high and prominent, lies 0.5

mile E of the harbor entrance. A 4m shoal lies close SE of the

rock.

8.91 A rock, which dries 1.5m, lies about 1.3 miles SSW of the

NE end of the island.

8.91 The SE coast of Za Det Gyi Island is densely wooded. Foul

ground extends up to 1 mile offshore in places.

8.91 Tongue Island (9°55'N., 98°14'E.), 113m high, steep-to and

densely wooded, lies 2.5 miles SE of Highest Peak. A bare

grassy mound lies near its S end.

8.91 South Bay, a bight in the S end of Za Det Gyi Island, provides sheltered anchorage, in a depth of 18.3m, sand and shells.

A 7.9m shoal lies in the E part of the entrance and on the E side

of the bay.

8.92 Hastings Harbor (10°06'N., 98°18'E.) is bordered by

St. Lukes Island to the W, Za Det Nge Island to the E, and Za

Det Gyi Island to the S. There are two navigable entrances.

8.92 The N entrance lies between the NE end of St. Lukes Island

and the NW end of Za Det Nge Island about 2.3 miles SE. Haycock Island, 100m high and jungle-covered, lies 0.5 mile SE of

Bengal Point, the NE end of St. Lukes Island. The main channel passes between Haycock Island and Minto Point, about 1.5

miles SE. The main fairway has depths of 20.1 to 27.4m. Thomas Shoal, with a least depth of 2.1m, lies about in mid-channel 0.6 mile NW of Minto Point. Elsewhere the channel is clear

of dangers. This shoal can be passed on either side, but there is

a submerged rock off Minto Point.

8.92 The E entrance lies between Cornwallis Point, the S end of

Za Det Nge Island, and Dufferin Point, the N end of Za Det

Gyi Island, about 1.3 miles SSW. This entrance has depths of

11 to 18.3m in the fairway.

8.92 Chaves Shoal (10°04'N., 98°17'E.), a detached patch with a

least depth of 5.2m, lies on the S side of the entrance about 0.8

mile SSW of Cornwallis Point. Depths of 12.8m surround this

shoal.

8.92 James Patch (10°05'N., 98°19'E.), with a least depth of

0.6m, lies on the N side of the entrance almost 1 mile ESE of

the above point.

8.92 The W entrance lies between St. Lukes Island and Za Det

Gyi Island, but is not navigable except by small craft and boats.

8.93 St. Marks Islet (10°03'N., 98°13'E.), 175m high, lies

in a shallow bight in the SW part of the harbor.

8.93 Ryland Patch (10°04'N., 98°13'E.), a small coral rock that
244 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

dries 0.3m, lies about 1 mile N of St. Marks Islet.

8.93 St. Johns Islet, 122m high, lies off the NE side of Hindustan

Bay, about 3 miles S of Bengal Point.

8.93 The reefs which fringe the shores of the harbor are quite distinct and rise sharply from depths of 5.5 to 9.1m.

8.93 Tides—Currents.—Between South Hump Island

(10°11'N., 98°20'E.) and Za Det Nge Island, the tidal current

sets E on the flood and W on the ebb at a rate of 1.5 knots at

springs. The currents are weak within Hastings Harbor.

8.93 Anchorage.—Hastings Harbor provides excellent protected

anchorage for all classes of vessels, in depths ranging from 11

to 22m, mud. A lee is always obtainable and no sea or current

of any consequence is experienced. Anchorage can be anywhere according to draft, with very good holding ground.

8.93 Caution.—Patches of discolored water frequently appear in

the harbor, but examination has proven that they do not indicate dangers. The W entrance channel is often muddy, making

it difficult to make out any dangers.

The Aladdin Islands to Birds Nest Rock

8.94 The Aladdin Islands (9°43'N., 98°03'E.), a well-scattered group of islands, some of which are high and bold, extend

about 15 miles W and 18 miles SSW of the S end of Za Det

Gyi Island.

8.94 Caution.—It has been reported (2011) that there is an uncharted 5m shoal in the vicinity of position 9°56.8'N,

97°51.8'E. 

8.94 Western Rocky Island (9°51'N., 97°52'E.), the westernmost

of the group, is 21m high. A 10.7m rock lies close NE of this

island.

8.94 North Rocky Island (9°53'N., 97°58'E.), 15m high and

scrub-covered, lies 5.8 miles ENE of the above island and is

surrounded by off-lying rocks.

8.94 Davis Island (9°49'N., 98°02'E.), the largest and highest of

the group, lies 4 miles WSW of the S end of Za Det Gyi Island.

This densely-wooded island has two main peaks each about

454m high with the W peak being slightly higher. A rock, 5.5m

high and surrounded by a reef, lies close off the E end of Davis

Island.

8.94 Chimney Island (9°51'N., 98°03'E.), 43m high, lies 1.3

miles NNW of the NE end of Davis Island. Several rocks lie

between the two islands. The N rock dries 0.9m.

8.94 Drake Island (9°46'N., 98°01'E.), 143m high, lies 0.8 mile S

of Davis Island. The channel between islands is deep.

8.94 Glasshouse Island (9°45'N., 97°59'E.), 137m high, bold,

and rocky, lies 1.8 miles WSW of Drake Island. A 52m high

rock lies close off the W end of Glasshouse Island.

8.94 Slave Island (9°43'N., 98°00'E.), 64m high, lies 2 miles S of

Glasshouse Island. A chain of rocks extends 1.5 miles NNE

from Slave Island. Pat Rock, the S rock, is 38m high, and

Sheila Rock, the N rock of the chain, is 61m high. A rocky

reef, about 0.6m high, lies 1 mile S of Slave Island.

8.94 Lamp Island (9°43'N., 98°01'E.), about 2.5 miles S of

Drake Island, is 97m high. Honor Rock, with a depth of 0.6m,

lies about midway between the two islands. North Brother and

South Brother, two large rocks, 46 and 59m high, respectively,

lie about 0.5 mile S of Lamp Island. Kai Koh, a rock which

dries 0.9m, lies 0.2 mile S of South Brother.

8.94 Haycock Rock (9°41'N., 97°55'E.), high and steep-to, lies

5.5 miles WSW of Slave Island.

8.94 Christie Island (9°38'N., 97°58'E.), the furthest S of the

main Aladdin Islands, lies 4 miles SE of Haycock Rock and

has several wooded peaks. The highest peak rises to an elevation of 325m at the NW end of the island.

8.94 Sanders Island (9°37'N., 97°59'E.), 106.7m high, lies 0.8

mile E of the S end of Christie Island. Murray Island, 71m

high, lies 0.5 mile SSW of the same point. Both islands are

rocky. A rock, 5.5m high, lies close off the N point of Murray

Island. The passage between this island and Christie Island is

foul.

8.95 Cash Island (9°49'N., 98°07'E.), 113m high, lies 0.8

mile S of the SW end of Za Det Gyi Island. Mawken Passage,

the channel between the two islands, has considerable depths

and provides a short cut for vessels proceeding W from the Pakchan River. Rocks lie in the passage within 0.3 mile of the

SW end of Za Det Gyi Island. The S rock is 6.1m high. A

rocky islet, 36m high, lies 0.3 mile E of Cash Island; a similar

islet, 43m high, lies about 0.5 mile S of Cash Island. There are

strong rips in the passage at springs. The passage should only

be used during daylight hours and then only under favorable

conditions.

8.95 Dunkin Island (9°47'N., 98°07'E.) rises to a height of 238m

near its N end. The Sisters, two small rocks of almost equal

height, lie 0.5 mile S of Dunkin Island. Bruer Island, 292m

high and densely wooded near its SE end, lies 3 miles S of the

same island. A rock, having a depth of less than 1.8m, the position of which is approximate, lies about 1 mile SSW of the S

end of Bruer Island.

8.95 Auriol Island, densely wooded and 183m high at its W end,

lies about 2.5 miles S of Bruer Island. A low rock lies close off

the NW side of Auriol Island. Swallow Island, about 0.5 mile

N of Auriol Island, rises to a height of 88m. The intervening

channel is shoal.

8.95 Graham Island (9°39'N., 98°02'E.), 164m high, lies 2 miles

W of Auriol Island. Two prominent high rocks lie close N of

the N end of Graham Island. Ninepin Rock, 24m high, lies

about 0.5 mile SSE of the S end of Graham Island.

8.95 A 5.5m shoal, the position of which is doubtful, lies about

5.5 miles SE of Auriol Island.

8.95 Birds Nest Rocks (9°47'N., 98°11'E.) consist of two groups

of rocks which lie within 5 miles SSE and 4.5 miles E of the

SE end of Za Det Gyi Island. The principal rocks in the N

group are Horse Shoe Island, 119m high, Cupola Island, 212m

high, Tower Rock, 143m high, and Square Rock, 82m high,

and Sloap Rock, 88m high. The latter rock is the furthest N of

this group.

8.95 The principal rocks in the S group are Spur Rock, 149m

high, about 2.3 miles SW of Horse Shoe Island, and Cocks

Comb Island, about 0.5 mile farther SW. This latter island rises

to a height of 76m. An islet, 76m high, lies close S of Cocks

Comb Island.

Ko Chan (Koh Sindarar) and Adjacent Islands

8.96 Ko Chan (9°25'N., 97°52'E.), consisting of Koh Sindarar Nua and Koh Sindarar Tal, lies about 10 miles SW of

Christie Island. A winding channel, which nearly dries, sepa-
Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 245

Pub. 173

rates the two islands. From a distance, both islands appear as

one high and densely wooded island. A high prominent summit

lies near the N end of the S island and rises to a height of

366m.

8.96 Torilla Island (9°22'N., 97°52'E.), 117m high, lies off the S

side of the S island. Pachumba Island, 163m high, lies off the

W side of the same island. Stork Island, 97m high, lies about

1.8 miles NE of the N island.

8.96 A rocky islet, 13m high, lies about 1 mile NE of the SE end

of the S island. Some 0.6m rocks lie close W of the islet. The

group is separated from the S island by a 0.5 mile wide deep

channel.

8.96 A rocky islet, 14m high and steep-to, lies 0.8 mile NW of the

N end of the N island. A 9.1m islet lies about the same distance

N of the same point.

8.96 A 14.6m bank was reported to lie about 1 mile N of Pachumba Island.

8.96 Marshall Rock (9°23'N., 97°49'E.), a pinnacle with a depth

of 4.5m surrounded by depths of 36.6m, lies about 2.8 miles W

of the S point of the S island.

8.96 Richelieu Rock (9°21'N., 98°02'E.), a small, coral pinnacle

which dries 1.2m, lies about 10 miles E of Torilla Island. The

drying part of the rock is about 9.1m wide. The sea does not always break over this danger at HW, even with a considerable

swell.

8.96 A depth of 40.2m, rock, was reported to lie about 6 miles

WSW of Richelieu Rock.

8.96 Anchorage can be taken in the bay formed by the E sides of

the two islands, well protected from W winds.

Pulo Mah Puteh to Casuarina Point—The Pakchan River and Approaches

8.97 Victoria Point (9°58'N., 98°33'E.), the N point of the

entrance of the Pakchan River, forms the S end of a range of

hills. The point is high, bold, and steep-to. An iron flagstaff,

23m high and with an elevation of 57m, lies on the point. Two

radio masts, with elevations of 117m, stand near the coast

about 0.9 mile N of the flagstaff. A triangular wooden daymark

is secured to the NW radio mast.

8.97 The land N of Victoria Point is very hilly and partly cleared.

The summits of the hills in the vicinity are flat-topped and not

easily identified.

8.97 The coast between Victoria Point and Pulo Mah Puteh, about

14 miles NNW, is mostly low and bordered in places by mangroves. Tanjong Padah, a bluff headland lies about 7.5 miles N

of Victoria Point and a similar headland, lies about 5 miles N

of the same point.

8.97 The Pakchan River rises in about position 10°50'N, 99°00'E.

and is about 80 miles long; it forms the boundary between Burma and Thailand. Both of its banks are densely wooded and

numerous streams discharge into it. Access is provided to the

river outlets of many of the tin mines in the S part of Burma

and the N part of Thailand.

8.97 The coast S of the river entrance, between Seaward Peak and

Casuarina Point, about 38 miles SSW, is generally low, densely

wooded, and intersected by numerous creeks and rivers. Seaward Peak (9°49'N., 98°32'E.) rises to a prominent summit

401m high, about 9 miles S of Victoria Point. Double Peak,

945m high and prominent when visible, lies 6 miles ESE of

Seaward Peak.

8.97 A range of mountains backs this section of coast about 10

miles inland. Round Mountain (9°41'N., 98°37'E.) rises to a

conspicuous 970m high peak, about 9.3 miles SSE of Seaward

Peak. This mountain has a very distinct conical summit, with a

peak of almost perpendicular appearance. Kao Phrami

(9°18'N., 98°28'E.), about 5.8 miles ENE of Casuarina Point, is

topped by three peaks each about 1,097m high.

8.97 The coast between the S entrance of the Pakchan River and

the mouth of the Banlin River, about 9.5 miles SSW, is fronted

by mangroves and bordered by extensive banks of sand and

mud.

8.97 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents near the coast, S of

Pulo Mah Puteh, set S on the rising tide and N on the falling

tide. In the N approach channel, the tidal currents set in a direction parallel with the channel at a rate of 2 knots at springs.

8.97 Between Ko Chan and Koh Chang, the tidal currents set NE

on the rising tide and SW during the falling tide. The rate is 0.8

knot at springs. Between the latter island and the mainland, the

tidal currents set N on the rising tide and S on the falling tide.

8.97 In the S approach channel, the tidal currents set parallel with

the channel, toward the Pakchan River entrance on the rising

tide and in the opposite direction on the falling tide. Strong rips

are found between the N end of Koh Chang and Ko Kan. Both

the flood and ebb currents set strongly towards Ko Kan. The

flood current sets E past the N coast of Pulo Ru, and then turns

NE towards the entrance of the river. The ebb current from the

Pakchan River divides at the NE point of Pulo Ru, one part setting W and the other setting S. Tide rips are found in the channel N of Pulo Ru.

8.97 Depths—Limitations.—The 11m curve lies about 2.5 miles

W of Pulo Mah Puteh and up to 12.5 miles W and WSW of

Victoria Point. Farther S, this curve is not clearly defined off

Casuarina Point.

8.97 The least depths in the N, W, and S approach channels to the

Pakchan River entrance are 3.4m, 5.8m, and 7.3m, respectively. The depths at the anchorage in Victoria Point Harbor, close

N of that point, are 12.8 to 14.6m. Depths of about 4.6m exist

off the entrance of Ranong Creek at the recommended anchorage.

8.97 Vessels, with a draft of 3.7 to 4m, can proceed about 14

miles upriver to the entrance of the Klong Maliwun River and

then 3 miles up that river.

The Pakchan River—Islands and Dangers in the

North Approach

8.98 Several islands lie on the extensive bank which fronts

the coast between Pulo Mah Puteh and Victoria Point.

8.98 Pulo Remiah (10°05'N., 98°30'E.), the furthest north of

these islands, is 18.3m high and lies 0.8 mile S of Tanjong Padeh. A group of islands, islets, and reefs lie between 10 miles

NW and 12 miles W of Victoria Point.

8.98 Sims Reef (10°02'N., 98°29'E.), which dries 2.7m, lies about

5.3 miles NW of Victoria Point. A beacon with a ball topmark

marks this danger.

8.98 Thane Island (10°02'N., 98°30'E.), small and 30m high, lies

about 0.3 mile E of Sims Reef. A small drying reef lies close S

of the island.

8.98 Pulo Tonton (10°01'N., 98°30'E.), 123m high and partially
246 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

cleared, lies 4 miles NW of Victoria Point. Some villages lie on

its E and W coasts. A drying bank extends E to the mainland

and SE almost to Victoria Point.

8.98 Pulo Besin (9°59'N., 98°29'E.), 106m high, lies about 1 mile

SSW of the S end of Pulo Tonton. Several drying reefs lie close

off the E side of Pulo Besin. A beacon, with a globe topmark,

stands on one of these reefs. A 4m patch lies N of the NE end

of the island.

8.98 Akha Barit, 65m high and steep-to, lies about 0.5 mile N of

the above point.

8.98 Pulo Jungis (10°00'N., 98°29'E.),183m high, lies 0.4 mile N

of Pulo Besin. The narrow channel between the islands dries.

8.98 A shoal, with depths of less than 1.8m, lies between 2 and 5

miles WNW of Pulo Jungis.

8.98 Pulo Perlin (9°58'N., 98°30'E.) 137m high, lies about 0.4

mile S of the SE end of Pulo Besin. Two small drying reefs lie

within 1 mile S of Pulo Perlin. A white beacon marks the N

reef of the two. A light shows from the SE point of Pulau Perlin.

8.98 A drying reef lies at the E end of a shoal about 0.9 mile S of

Pulo Perlin. The shoal extends about 4 miles to the WSW. A

rock, with a depth of 0.6m, lies in the middle of the shoal.

8.98 A white beacon stands close off the SE side of Pulo Perlin.

The Pakchan River—Islands and Dangers in the

South Approach

8.99 Shoal ground, as defined by the 6m curve, extends up

to 6 miles offshore between a 183m high headland about 10.5

miles NNE of Casuarina Point, and a point about 15 miles

NNE. A tongue of this shoal extends as far as the E side of Ko

Kam Yai.

8.99 Ko Nui, a small islet 60m high, lies about 0.5 mile W of the

above headland. Shoal ground extends about 4 miles WSW.

8.99 Ko Kam Yai (9°29'N., 98°21'E.), 314m high, lies about 13

miles N of Casuarina Point. Shoal ground, as defined by the

11m curve, extends about 2 miles off the W side of the island.

An extensive sandbank lies about 0.5 mile E of the S end of the

island. Ko Kam Tok, 105m high, lies close N of Ko Kam Yai.

Ko Kam Nui, 288m high, lies 1 mile E of the same island. The

depths between the islands are very irregular and no attempt

should be made to pass between them.

8.99 Double Islet (9°27'N., 98°20'E.), located about 1 mile S of

Ko Kam Yai, rises to two peaks joined by a low, narrow strip of

sand. The N peak is 83m high and the S peak is 44.5m high. A

rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies about 0.2 mile NE of

the N peak. South Rock, 12m high, lies 0.5 mile SW of Double

Islet.

8.99 Metcalfe Island (9°26'N., 98°21'E.), 22m high and wooded,

lies miles SSE of Ko Kam Yai. A sandy spit extends about 1.3

miles ENE from Metcalfe Island.

8.99 Hayes Island (9°20'N., 98°20'E.), circular in shape, high,

and wooded, lies 6 miles SSW of Metcalfe Island.

8.99 Umbrella Island (9°20'N., 98°19'E.), located about 0.8 mile

NW of Hayes Island, is rocky and shows up well when not in

range with the latter island. A high umbrella-shaped tree lies

on the island. These islands are surrounded by large sand banks

and rocks which are marked by breakers at LW.

8.99 Koh Chong Pianam (9°34'N., 98°23'E.), about 4 miles

NNE of Ko Kam Yai, is 157m high and wooded. The E side of

the island is fringed by rocks which extend up to 183m offshore.

8.99 Hin Sawai, 6.4m high and topped by a white summit, lies 0.5

mile N of Koh Chong Pianam.

8.99 Koh Piam (9°44'N., 98°25'E.), densely wooded and topped

by a prominent peak, lies about 15 miles SW of Victoria Point.

The reef-fringed W side of the island is indented by two open

bays. A rocky islet 15.2m high, lies about 0.3 mile off the SW

point of Koh Piam. A drying rock lies about 0.5 mile SW of the

island. Extensive sandbanks lie between the island and the

mainland.

8.99 Koh Chang (9°50'N., 98°27'E.), densely wooded and 390m

high, lies 2 miles NNE of Koh Piam. Some wooded islets lie

off the S end of Koh Chang. Large sand banks lie between the

island and the mainland.

8.99 A sand bank, having depths of less than 5.5m, extends 1.3

miles SW from the SW side of Koh Chang toward the N end of

Koh Piam. Depths of 7.9 to 11m lie between this bank and the

N end of Koh Piam. A 3.7m patch lies about 0.3 mile E of the

N point of the latter island.

8.99 Harry Head (9°52'N., 98°27'E.), the N end of Koh Chang, is

a high tree-covered bluff. Tree Island, 13.7m high and wooded,

lies 1.5 miles SW of Harry Head. A 0.6m high rock lies close

off the W coast of Koh Chang about 1 miles S of Tree Island.

8.99 Ko Khan (9°52'N., 98°26'E.), a rocky islet lying about 0.5

mile NW of Harry Head, is steep-to on its E and S sides. The

light structure on the islet is not easily distinguished by day because of the trees which obscure all but the top.

8.99 Several shoal patches, having a least depth of 0.9m, extend

up to 2.5 miles WSW from Ko Khan.

The Pakchan River—Islands and Shoals 

8.100 A group of islands and islets, surrounded by shoals

and foul ground, lie between Koh Kan and Victoria Point.

8.100 Pulo Pingngwe (9°54'N., 98°29'E.), 184m high lies 1.8

miles NE of Koh Kan. A large drying shoal extends up to 1

mile ESE from the island. A shoal, with a least depth of 1.5m,

lies 0.6 mile S of the S end of the island. Other shoal patches

lie W of the island.

8.100 Pulo Saung Kharang (9°55'N., 98°31'E.), 132m high, lies 2

miles ENE of Pulo Pingngwe. Foul ground extends about 0.8

mile W from Pulo Saugn Kharang.

8.100 Dyke Island lies 0.5 mile S of Pulo Saung Kharang.

8.100 Pulo Ganga (9°56'N., 98°29'E.), 123m high, lies 1.5 miles N

of Pulo Pingngwe, with Pulo Gattai about 2 miles E of it. A

narrow drying spit lies between Pulo Ganga and Pulo Gattai

and almost joins the two. A shoal, with a least depth of 1.2m,

extends about 2.3 miles W from Pulo Ganga.

8.100 Pulo Ru (9°57'N., 98°32'E.), 186m high near its NW end,

lies with its S end about 0.3 mile E of Pulo Gattai and its NE

point about 1 mile S of Victoria Point. A shoal, as defined by

the 5.5m curve, fronts the W side of Pulo Ru and extends 4.5

miles W from it. The inner part of this shoal dries.

8.100 Narrow channels separate the above islands.

8.100 Round Island (9°55'N., 98°33'E.), 88m high and steep-to,

lies 0.8 mile SE of the S end of Pulo Ru. The intervening channel is fairly deep.

8.100 A shoal, with a least depth of 3.4m, lies on the S side of the

entrance channel between the NE extremity of Pulo Ru and the
Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 247

Pub. 173

S side of the river entrance.

The Pakchan River Entrance—Approach Channels

8.101 There are three approach channels leading to the Pakchan River entrance. The N channel leads between the shoal

ground extending N from Pulo Jungis and Pulo Remiah. The

least depth of 3.4m found in this channel lies SW of Pulo Remiah. The channel leads between Sims Reef and Thane Island

and then between Akha Barit and the NE end of Pulo Besin.

8.101 The W channel leads between Pulo Perlin and the reef lying

about 0.8 mile S of that island. The least depth of 5.8m to be

found in this channel lies 4.5 miles WSW of the SW end of Pulo Besin.

8.101 Bell Passage, the S channel, leads between Koh Kan and the

N end of Koh Chang and then E between the N coast of the latter island and the shoals extending S from Pulo Pingngwe. The

channel then leads SE of the drying bank that extends SE from

the latter island and then SE of Round Island. The least depth

of 7.3m found in this channel lies about 0.8 mile SW of Koh

Kan.

8.101 The Pakchan River entrance lies between Victoria Point and

the entrance of Ranong Creek, about 2.5 miles to the ESE. The

small Victoria Point Harbor, with the village of Kawsong at its

head, lies on the E side of the point, between it and Browning

Island, about 0.3 mile to the E.

8.101 Koh Phi, a small islet, lies on the E side of the Pakchan River

entrance, about 2.3 miles ESE of Victoria Point. A sand bank,

with depths of 0.9 to 3.4m, extends about 0.3 mile SSW from

the islet.

8.101 Shoal ground, as defined by the 6m curve, extends about 0.2

mile WSW from the S end of Browning Island. Depths of 4 to

5.5m exist between the outer edge of this bank and Victoria

Point.

8.101 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in a

depth of 10m, sand and mud, off a sandy beach in the bay that

indents the SW coast of Koh Piam.

8.101 Vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in depths of 9.1 to

11m, off the NE side of Koh Piam. Protection is provided during the Southwest Monsoon.

8.101 Sheltered anchorage can be taken in the N approach channel

between Pulo Jungis and Pulo Tonton.

8.101 Vessels with local knowledge can anchor in the S approach

channel S of Pulo Pingngwe. Light-draft vessels can anchor E

of Pulo Ru.

8.101 Small vessels with local knowledge frequently anchor, in a

depth of 4.6m, off the entrance of Ranong Creek, about 0.3

mile S of Koh Phi.

8.101 Vessels can anchor 0.5 mile S of Victoria Point, in depths of

9.1 to 18.3m.

8.101 Vessels can anchor, in 12.8 to 14.6m, in Victoria Point Harbor. The anchorage area is about 0.3 mile long and 137m wide

and lies E of the pier. Vessels using this anchorage pass over a

shoal, having depths of 4 to 5.5m, that lies across the harbor

entrance.

8.101 Directions.—Directions for each channel are, as follows:

1. North Approach Channel.—From a position 4 miles

W of Pulo Mah Puteh, steer toward Thane Islet on a course

of 149°. Double Peak, in line with the E tangent of Thane Islet, makes an excellent mark for this course. Double Peak is

seldom visible before noon.

When the beacon marking Sims Reef bears 185°, alter

course to 172° so as to pass between that reef and Thane Islet. When the N point of Akha Barit bears 090°, alter course

to 148° to avoid the 4m patch which lies SW of Akha Barit

and the reefs off the E coast of Pulo Besin. Vessels can pass

close off the steep-to SW coast of Akha Barit.

When the SE and SW points of Pulo Besin are in line bearing 261°, alter course to 128°. Maintain this course until Koh

Phi Light bears 095°, and then steer that course which leads

through the river entrance. When Victoria Point bears 045°,

course may be altered for the selected anchorage.

Vessels bound for the anchorage off Koh Phi should, after

passing Victoria Point, approach that island from a more N

direction in order to avoid the 3.4m shoal in mid-channel, SE

of Victoria Point.

2. West Approach Channel.—From a position about 9

miles W of Pulo Ganga, steer 090° for that island until the

SE end of Pulo Besin bears 061°. Then steer 061° until the

SE end of Pulo Perlin bears 090°. A least depth of 5.8m exists about 2 miles along this latter course.

When the SE point of Pulo Perlin bears 090°, steer 095°

for Koh Phi Light which leads between Pulo Perlin and the

beacon marking the reef S of it. The SE point of this island

can be passed at a distance of 183m. Continue on course

095° and then proceed as directed for the North Approach

Channel.

3. South Approach Channel.—From a position about

4.3 miles W of Kho Piam, steer 048° for the summit of Pulo

Pingngwe which leads between the N end of Koh Chang and

Koh Kan after passing Tree Island at a distance of 0.4 mile

abeam. A least depth of 7.3m is found 4.5 mile SW of Koh

Kan.

Vessels approaching this channel from the N should keep

W of the shoals in the approach until the summit of Koh

Chang bears 120°. Then bring the summit of Pulo Pingngwe

to bear 048° and proceed as directed above.

When the N tangent of Koh Kan bears 270° and is in range

with South Peak on Za Det Gyi Island, steer 090°, keeping

that range astern.

When the summit of Pulo Pingngwe bears 335°, alter

course gradually to 045° and steer for Koh Phi Light on that

bearing.

Vessels bound for the anchorage off Koh Phi should maintain a course of 045° and anchor as convenient. The least

depth on this track is 9.1m, but a shoal with a depth of 4.6m

lies in mid-channel about 1.8 miles SW of Kho Phi Light.

Vessels bound for the anchorage off Victoria Point should

continue on the 045° course until the summit of Round Island bears 270°. Then alter course to the N and steer 013° for

Browning Island. The least depth on this track, 7.3m, is located about 1 mile NE of Round Island. When the NE end of

Pulo Ru has been passed, steer for the anchorage which lies

about 0.5 mile S of Victoria Point.

8.101 Caution.—Caution is required because of the lack of navigational aids.

8.102 Victoria Point Harbor (Kawsong Harbor) (9°59'N.,

98°33'E.) (World Port Index No. 49700), the S settlement of
248 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

Burma, consists of a small government station and a native village. A police station lies on the summit of the hill forming

Victoria Point; some government buildings lie on a ridge to the

N. Ocean-going vessels work cargo from lighters at the anchorages.

8.102 Ranong, a village which lies about 2 miles above the entrance of Ranong Creek, is the site of a Thailand Government

Station. Several tin mines are situated in this area.

8.102 The customhouse stands at the inner end of a 137.2m pier

which extends from the shore on the W side of Victoria Point

Harbor.

8.102 A pontoon jetty, with reported depths of 5.5 to 6.1m alongside, extends from the shore of the harbor.

8.102 Above Victoria Point, the Pakchan River extends in a general

NNE direction. During the Southwest Monsoon, or rainy season, small power vessels can reach the Thailand town of

Kraburi, about 28 miles above Victoria Point where the river is

about 76.2m wide; above Kraburi the river becomes tortuous.

8.102 Glong Maliwun flows into the Pakchan River, on the Burmese side, about 14 miles above Victoria Point. The river is

available to vessels, with a draft of 3.7 to 4m, for about 3 miles

above the entrance. Higher up, the river becomes narrow and

winding, but it can be navigated by power launches as far as

Maliwun, a small settlement, about 5 miles farther upriver. 

8.102 Khlong Bangben (9°39'N., 98°29'E.), an extensive shallow

inlet, is entered about 7 miles SE of the S end of Koh Piam.

The 2m curve lies over 1 mile offshore, S and W of the N entrance point. The channel, which lies on the S side of the entrance, has depths of 1.8 to 3.7m.

8.102 Shong Pianam (9°34'N., 98°28'E.), or the “Entrance of the

Three Big Rivers,” an extensive inlet, is entered between Koh

Pianam and Laem Tashin, about 0.8 mile S. Koh Pianam,

wooded and 228m high, lies about 9 miles SSE of the S end of

Kho Piam. Laem Tashin, a high wooded point, lies about 0.4

mile SE of its extremity.

8.102 The outer edge of a bar, which has depths of 1.8 to 3.7m, lies

3.5 miles W of the entrance. The bottom is sand and mud.

8.102 Within the bar the depths in the entrance range from 18.3 to

29.3m.

8.102 The tidal currents attain a rate of 2 to 3 knots at springs in the

narrow part of the entrance. In the offing and over the bar, the

rate is much less. The N current on the flood is stronger than

the S current on the ebb.

8.102 Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in depths of

9.1 to 16.5m, mud, about 0.5 mile inside the entrance.

8.102 Directions.—From a position about 0.5 mile N of Hin

Sawai, a vessel should steer 089° for a 91m hill on the N end of

Koh Pianam. When the summit of Laem Tashin (9°33'N.,

98°28'E.) bears 132°, course should be altered to that bearing.

When the 212m conical hill at the head of the inlet bears 095°,

it should be steered for on that bearing which leads through the

entrance to the anchorage. 

Casuarina Point to Laem Pak Phra

8.103 Casuarina Point (9°14'N., 98°21'E.), the E entrance

point of Pak Kura, is low and densely wooded. Takuapa, the W

entrance point of Pak Kura, forms the N point of Koh Rah, a

high densely-wooded island. This island, which is steep-to on

its W side, is high in its N part and 344m high in its S part.

8.103 Takuapa Inlet is the estuary of a large river which discharges

through four channels which intersect the W coast of Thailand

between the parallels of 9°15'N and 8°52'N.

8.103 Laem Krangnoi, a low sandy point, lies 3.5 miles S of the S

entrance point of Takuapa Inlet. Laem Krangyai, about 4.5

miles SSW of Laem Krangnor, is low, sandy, and backed by

tall trees.

8.103 From Laem Krangyai, the coast extends S for about 7 miles

to Laem Lachan, a wooded bluff, 93m high. This stretch of

coast is low in the N part and backed by high hills. These hills

gradually approach the coast, reaching it at Laem Lacham and

then receding inland S of this point.

8.103 Laem Ao Kham, about 2 miles SSW of Laem Lachan, forms

the W entrance point of a common estuary of several rivers. A

hill, 84m high, lies on the point which is the N extremity of a

bold peninsula. Kao Tamchok, a hill which lies about 2 miles S

of the point, is 166m high. Laem Tamchok, about 0.2 mile SW

of the hill, forms the W extremity of the peninsula. This peninsula is isolated from and considerably W of any other high land

in this vicinity. It is the only readily-identifiable land between

Koh Ra and Ko Phuket.

8.103 Between Laem Tamchok and Laem Pak Phra, about 22 miles

SSE, the coast consists of sandy beaches backed by high wooded hills. Trees grow down to the water’s edge in places. The

latter point forms the N entrance of Chong Pak Phra, the strait

which separates Ko Phuket from the mainland.

8.103 Laem Pak Phra is marked by a group of tall trees. A 61m

high hill lies just within the point. Koh Pilai, a small hill near

the coast about 2.5 miles N of the point, is the only coastal hill

between Laem Tamchok and Laem Sai, about 7.5 miles S of

Laem Pak Phra. Ko Pilai is hard to identify.

8.103 Tides—Currents.—During the Northeast Monsoon, the

current off the coast between Koh Ra and Laem Tamchok sets

either N or S. It sets in one direction for a considerable period

and then without any apparent reason, changes its direction.

8.103 The direction does not seem to be related to the wind, as the

current often sets N during and after periods of moderate N

winds.

8.103 Even when opposed by the tidal current, this offshore current

maintains its direction. When the current and tidal current are

confluent, the resultant current may attain a rate of nearly 2

knots; when in opposition, the rate is usually not more than 1

knot.

8.103 Depths—Limitations.—The 40m curve lies about 15.5

miles W of Casuarina Point and about 5 miles W of Laem

Tamchok. The inlets and estuaries that intersect the coast N of

the latter point are shoal. The coast between Laem Tamchok

and Chong Pak Phra is fairly steep-to, with the 20m curve lying

up to 2 miles offshore.

Middle Island, Perforated Island, and Similan Island

8.104 Middle Island (Koh Tasai) (9°04'N., 97°50'E.),

densely wooded and 226m high at its S end, lies about 18 miles

S of Koh Sindarar Tai. A 91m high peak lies near the N end of

the island, with another peak, slightly lower, between it and the

226m peak. The island is steep-to on all except its E side,

where depths of 7m are found about 0.3 off a sandy beach

about 0.5 mile from the N point of the island.
Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 249

Pub. 173

8.104 A rocky shoal, with a depth of 4.2m, lies 0.4 mile S of the island. 

8.104 Middle Island has been reported to be a good radar target up

to 11 miles.

8.104 Perforated Island (Koh Born) (8°51'N., 97°48'E.), wooded

and topped by two distinct peaks, lies 14 miles S of Middle Island. The E peak is the highest. The island derives its name

from a hole near the water’s edge in the dips between the two

peaks. The island is steep-to, except N of its W end, where a

depth of 6.4m is found about 0.2 mile offshore.

8.104 The Similan Islands (8°35'N., 97°39'E.), a group of six islands, extend about 12 miles S from Ko Bangu, the N island,

which lies 12.5 miles SW of Perforated Island. Ko Bangu is

96m high and wooded. Several large prominent boulders lie

close off its SE end; a drying rock lies N of its W end. The remainder of the island is steep-to.

8.104 The Similan Islands have been reported to be good radar targets up to 19 miles.

8.104 Great Sayer Island (Ko Similan) (8°39'N., 97°39'E.),

wooded and flat-topped, is separated from Ko Bangu by a

channel about 0.3 mile wide, with a depth of about 25.6m. The

island is 261m high in its N part. Two well-defined peaks, 157

and 164m high, lie near the S end of the island. A small cove,

with a depth of 9.1m, indents the NW end of the island. Some

small sandy coves indent the E side of the island.

8.104 Survey vessels engaged in offshore exploration may be encountered S and W of the Similan Islands, usually in depths

greater than 200m and up to 80 miles from the Thai mainland.

8.104 Hin Pusar (8°37'N., 97°39'E.), a group of three above-water

detached rocks, lies about 0.5 mile SW of the SW end of Great

Sayer Island. A rock, with a depth of 15.5m, lies about 0.2 mile

S of Hin Pusar.

8.105 The Center Islands (8°35'N., 97°38'E.) lie between 2

and 4 miles S of Great Sayer Island. Ko Pabu, the N island, is

119m high, conical, wooded, and steep-to, except on its NE

side, which is fringed by depths of 3.7m. Ko Miang, the S island, is 128m high, flat-topped, and wooded. A drying rock lies

close off the N end of the island. A small sandy cove, with a

depth of 7.3m, indents the NE side of the island.

8.105 Two islets lie on a reef about 0.2 mile off the NE end of Ko

Miang. The intervening channel has a depth of 11.3m. The W

islet is 48m high and wooded. The E islet is 20m high and

rocky.

8.105 Ko Payan (8°31'N., 97°39'E.), a small steep-to bare conical

rock 42m high, lies 3 miles SSE of Ko Miang. Scrub covers the

summit of the rock.

8.105 Ko Payan has been reported to be a good radar target up to

12 miles.

8.105 Hin Payan (8°30'N., 97°40'E.), a group of steep-to rocks,

some drying and others above-water, lie about 0.6 mile ESE of

Ko Payan. A detached drying rock lies about 0.2 mile ESE of

the main group.

8.105 Ko Payang (8°30'N., 97°38'E.), 126m high and wooded, lies

1 mile SW of Ko Payan. The intervening channel has depths of

7.3 to 11m. 

8.105 Ko Huyong (South Island) (8°29'N., 97°39'E.), wooded and

topped by two rounded peaks, lies 0.5 mile S of Ko Payang.

The island is steep-to except on its NE side, which is reeffringed.

8.105 Ko Huyong has been reported to be a good radar target up to

25 miles.

Takua Pa Inlet and Approaches

8.106 Takua Pa Inlet (9°02'N., 98°18'E.) is the estuary of a

large river which flows into the sea through four channels between the parallels of 9°15'N and 8°52'N.

8.106 No recent surveys have been made of Takua Pa and its approaches. Entry should only be attempted by small vessels having local knowledge.

8.106 Pak Kura (9°16'N., 98°20'E.), the N entrance of the inlet,

lies between the NE end of Koh Ra and Casuarina Point, about

2 miles SE. Depths of 11 to 3.7m are found in the channel, with

the greater depths being found on the W side. This narrow intricate steep-to channel is the only safe entrance during the

Southwest Monsoon.

8.106 Pak Chik (9°09'N., 98°16'E.), the entrance between the S

end of Koh Ra and the N end of Ko Phra Thong, is foul and can

only be used by small craft with local knowledge.

8.106 Pak Kruen (9°01'N., 98°15'E.) is entered between the S end

of Ko Phra Thong and the N end of an unnamed island about 1

mile to the S. Extensive sandbanks, parts of which dry, extend

about 1 to 2 miles seaward of the entrance. The entrance bar,

which lies between 2.5 and 3.5 miles W of the entrance, has a

reported depth of 3m. During the Southwest Monsoon, a heavy

swell is raised over the bar.

8.106 Depths of 9.1 to 12.8m are found along the N side of the

channel between the entrance points.

8.106 Pak Koh (8°52'N., 98°15'E.), the S entrance of the inlet, lies

9 miles S of Pak Kruen. The land in the vicinity of the entrance

is densely wooded. The entrance channel leads between sand

banks which are reported to be stationary. Depths of 4.6 to

5.5m are found for about 2 miles within the entrance. Small

vessels with local knowledge can use this entrance only under

the most favorable conditions.

8.106 The town of Takua Pa lies about 4 miles above the mouth of

a creek which flows into the E side of Pak Koh about 2 miles

within the entrance.

8.106 Elbow Point (9°02'N., 98°20'E.) lies on the E side of the inlet abreast Macauley Point, the SE end of Ko Phra Thong. A

black beacon off the latter point marks an area of foul ground

with a depth of 2.7m 

8.106 Small vessels with local knowledge and drawing up to 3.7m

can anchor about 0.5 mile N of Feather Tree, which lies on the

N side of Elbow Point. Vessels drawing less than 3.7m can anchor on the S side of the inlet about 2 miles S of Elbow Point.

Pak Ko to Laem Pak Phra

8.107 Laem Krangnoi (8°50'N., 98°15'E.) is a low, sandy

point about 3.5 miles S of Pak Ko. A drying reef extends about

0.8 mile W from the point.

8.107 Laem Krangyai (8°44'N., 98°14'E.), about 4.5 miles SSW

of Laem Krangnoi and backed by high trees, is another low,

sandy point. A drying coral reef surrounds the point and extends about 0.8 mile N and S, and 2 miles W from it.

8.107 Klong Kokak (8°41'N., 98°15'E.), small river, intersects the

coast about 3.8 miles SSE of Laem Krangyai. A village with

some tin mines in the vicinity is so close within the entrance
250 Sector 8. Burma—South and West Coasts and Thailand—West Coast 

Pub. 173

that the lights in the village are sometimes visible from seaward.

8.107 Krung Nork, a detached drying reef, lies about 1 mile off the

entrance of the Klong Kokak. The coast close inshore between

this reef and Laem Lachan, about 3 miles to the S, is foul.

8.107 Ao Kaulak (8°36'N., 98°15'E.), an open bay, indents the

coast between Laem Lachan and a point about 3 miles to the S.

Laem Ao Kham forms the S entrance point of this bay. A reef,

which dries in places, extends about 0.5 mile W from a sandy

point about 1 mile SSE of Laem Lachan and divides the bay into two parts. A rock, 3.7m high, lies near the outer part of this

reef. Foul ground extends 1 mile offshore in the bight N of the

reef and 0.8 mile offshore S of the reef.

8.108 Klong Bagatae (8°35'N., 98°14'E.) flows into the S

part of Ao Kaulak and serves as the common estuary of several

small rivers. Laem Ao Kham is the N extremity of the peninsula which forms the W side of the estuary. The entrance is about

0.5 mile wide, but narrows to a width of 0.2 mile between the

6m curve.

8.108 Ban Tablamu Light is shown from a white three-legged

structure, 10.1m high, situated at the N end of Laem Ao Kham.

8.108 A middle ground, with a least depth of 3.7m, lies on a bar

about 0.8 mile within the entrance. A channel extends along

the NE side of the peninsula for about 1 mile; from there the

bar can be crossed in a depth of 5.2m. Depths of 5.5 to 8.2m

are then found in mid-channel up to a position about 3 miles

above the entrance, where the river bifurcates.

8.108 Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in a depth of

11m, mud, about 0.5 mile inside the entrance.

8.108 The entrance should be approached on a course of 135° in

order to pass S of the previously-mentioned 3.7m rock. A

course of 190° should then be steered so as to pass not more

than 183m off the E extremity of the peninsula forming the W

side of the entrance.

8.108 Between Laem Tamchok and Laem Pak Phra, about 22 miles

SSE, the depths gradually decrease from seaward to depths of

11 to 14.6m about 0.5 mile offshore. This coast should be given a berth of at least 3 miles as it has not been closely examined.

8.108 Ko Lumphuk (8°19'N., 98°16'E.), a group of rocks about

1.8m high, lies about 0.5 mile offshore 7.5 miles N of Laem

Pak Phra. Two smaller rocks lie about 0.5 mile N of the group.
251

Pub. 173

9. 

The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands

9.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 9 — CHART INFORMATION
253

Pub. 173

SECTOR 9 

 THE ANDAMAN ISLANDS AND THE NICOBAR ISLANDS

9.0 Plan.—This sector describes Preparis Island, the Coco Islands, the Andaman Islands, and the Nicobar Islands. The descriptive sequence is from N to S, and from W to E. 

General Remarks

9.1 A chain of islands, divided into four groups by welldefined channels, stretches in a vast ellipse between Pagoda

Point (15°57'N., 94°15'E.) and the N end of Sumatera, about

630 miles to the S. The principal channels leading through the

groups consist of Preparis North Channel, between Preparis Island and Alguada Reef; Preparis South Channel, between Preparis Island and the furthest N of the Coco Islands; Coco

Channel, between the S island of the Andaman Islands; and

Ten Degree Channel, between the furthest S of the Andaman

Islands and the furthest N of the Nicobar Islands. 

9.1 Vessels bound from Calcutta or Madras to Rangoon usually

pass through Preparis North Channel. 

9.1 The track from Calcutta to Singapore leads through Preparis

South Channel, well N of Table Island. Vessels often use this

channel during the Southwest Monsoon in order to pass E of

and to the leeward of the Andaman Islands. Vessels should

keep well N of Table Island because of the irregularity of the

soundings in the vicinity of that island and the strong tidal currents. Vessels passing E of Table Island should keep in depths

of more than 91.1m.

9.1 Vessels passing through Coco Channel should pass at least 5

miles S of Little Coco Island and at least 4 miles N of Landfall

Island.

9.1 During the Northeast Monsoon, the banks off the W side of

the Andaman Islands may be passed over by vessels of light

draft. Vessels of deep draft should not cross the shallower

parts. Navigation inside the banks to within 3 miles of the land

is safe, except on the W side of North Andaman Island, to

which a berth of 6 miles should be given.

9.1 Winds—Weather.—The Southwest Monsoon commences

in the Nicobar Islands about mid-May and rapidly extends over

the Andaman Islands. From June through September the wind

blows from the W through SW at Force 4 to 6. During the

months of October and November, the winds are variable with

Force 1 to 3. The Northeast Monsoon prevails from December

through March, the prevailing wind is between N and E at

Force 2 to 4. During the months of April and early May the

winds are variable with Force 1 to 3. 

9.1 During the months immediately preceding and following the

Southwest Monsoon, these island groups lie athwart or close to

the tracks of the tropical disturbances of the Bay of Bengal. 

9.1 The temperatures are relatively high, with little variation

from one place to another or between one month and the next.

The humidity is high at all times. The mean daily temperature

is 27°C; the mean daily minimum temperature is 21°C.

9.1 Heavy rains, with a yearly average of 3,200mm, occur in

these island groups. Rains occur on the W slopes from midMay through September, and on the east slopes from October

through mid-December. The rainfall is variable both as to seasons and to geographical positions. In the N part of the Andaman Islands, heavy rainfall (over 250mm per month) falls from

June through September. More moderate amounts (125 to

225mm per month) occur in May, October, and November. The

months of December through April are relatively dry. In the S

part of the Andaman Islands, the heaviest rainfall occurs from

May through early November. More moderate amounts fall

from early November through December, and relatively small

amounts from January through April. 

9.1 In the Nicobar Islands, heavy rains occur from May through

November. More moderate amounts occur from December

through mid-January, and relatively small amounts from January through April. 

9.1 As a rule, the islands with the higher elevation receive the

greatest amount of rain. 

9.1 Thunderstorm frequency varies from island to island. The

greatest activity occurs during those months immediately preceding and the first few weeks immediately following the onset

of the Southwest Monsoon. Thunderstorms occur most frequently during May and June at Port Blair, when about 4 to 6

days per month have them. In November, thunderstorms occur

on the average of 3 days per month at this port. 

9.1 The cloud cover is more uniform, with cloud amounts increasing from N to S. During the Southwest Monsoon, there is

little diurnal variation in cloud cover. During the remainder of

the year the cloud cover is more extensive in the afternoons.

The cloudiest months are June through September. During

these months the cloud coverage amounts to 70 to 80 per cent,

with few clear days. February and March are the months with

least cloud coverage. During these months there is 30 to 40 per

cent coverage in the N and 50 to 60 per cent coverage in the S. 

9.1 The visibility is good except during heavy rains. 

9.1 Tides—Currents.—The currents in the vicinity of Alguada

Reefs are greatly influenced by the winds, especially at neaps.

The tidal currents set SE on the rising tide and NW on the falling tide. During the Northeast Monsoon, the ebb current at

springs begins about 2 hours after HW, and runs until LW, at a

rate of 1 knot to 2 knots. The period of slack water is very

short.

9.1 Tide rips have been reported in a position about 19 miles W

of Alguada Reefs. 

9.1 The tidal currents in Preparis North Channel appear to set SE

on the rising tide and NW on the falling tide. During the Northeast Monsoon, there is a strong S current of 1 to 1.5 knots,

which at neaps entirely overcomes the NW tidal currents. A N

current of 0.5 to 0.8 knot has been experienced. The S current

has a rate of about 2 knots. 

9.1 The tidal currents in South Preparis Channel in the vicinity

of Table Island are strong and often set toward the rocks. 

9.1 The tidal currents set very strongly through Marshall Channel and heavy tide races occur. The rate is upwards of 5 knots

in the fairway and about 2 knots past the N and S ends of Little

Coco Island. 
254 Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 

Pub. 173

9.1 The tidal currents in the vicinity of the Coco Islands set E on

the rising tide and W on the falling tide. In settled weather, the

tidal currents appear to turn at HW and LW. Heavy tide races

are found off all salient points. 

9.1 The tidal currents in Coco Channel, during settled weather,

are regular, the current setting E on the rising tide and W on the

falling tide, at rates of 1 knot to 2 knots at springs. Strong

winds influence the tidal currents at times, even reducing them.

During the Northeast Monsoon, the current frequently sets NW

through Coco Channel, but during the Southwest Monsoon the

set is mostly to the E. Tide rips occur in the vicinity of all shoal

water in Coco Channel. 

9.1 The tidal currents during the Northeast Monsoon set SW and

S along both the E and W coasts of the Andaman Islands. During the Southwest Monsoon the set is N to E.

9.1 In light breezes and fine weather, the tidal currents set E and

W into Duncan Passage, but sometimes a current caused by the

prevailing winds sets through it.

9.1 Within a few miles of the Nicobar Islands, the tidal currents

usually set NE on the rising tide and SW on the falling tide.

The tidal currents attain a rate of 3 to 4 knots in the channels

between the islands. Well offshore of these islands, the currents

usually set with the prevailing wind. The rate, at times about 2

knots, and direction are variable. Heavy overfalls were reported in a position about 110 miles WSW of the S end of Great

Nicobar Island. 

9.1 The currents in the vicinity of Car Nicobar Island flow rapidly enough to cause tide races, particularly N of the island. During the month of February, usually a calm month, from a

position about 6 to 8 miles E of the island, a current setting SW

at a rate of 7 knots has been experienced about 1.5 hours after

HW.

9.1 The tidal currents in the vicinity of Chowra Island set NE

during the rising tide and SW during the falling tide. 

9.1 The tidal currents in Sombrero Channel set NW on the rising

tide and SE on the falling tide. These currents are reported to

attain a rate of 5 knots at springs.

9.1 The tidal currents in St. Georges Channel are strong and set

NE through the channel on the rising tide, and SW through the

channel on the falling tide. 

9.1 Caution.—Although the shoals off the N end of the Andaman Islands have been examined, there is a possibility that

depths less than those charted may exist. Vessels are advised

not to pass over them because these shoals are not always visible from aloft. 

9.1 The Andaman Islands lie on fault line, but no earthquakes

have been reported in recent years. 

Preparis Island

9.2 Preparis Island (14°53'N., 93°42'E.), 81m high, narrow, and wooded, slopes gradually to the sea. A shoal spit extends about 3.5 miles S from the S end of this island. Preparis

Island has been reported to be a good radar target up to 24

miles and has been reported to be identifiable with charted features by radar up to 22 miles. 

9.2 Cow and Calf Islets (14°57'N., 93°43'E.), flat-topped, three

in number, and about 23m high, lie close together about 1.8

miles N of Preparis Island. 

9.2 Some islets lie on a reef about 1.3 miles W of Preparis Island.

9.2 A 12.2m high pinnacle rock lies on a reef about 4 miles SW

of the S end of Preparis Island. A 1.8m high rock lies on a reef

about 0.5 mile S of this reef. 

9.2 Several coral heads, with depths of 3.7m and less, lie within

1.3 miles of the SE side of Preparis Island. A rock, awash, lies

about 0.8 mile S of the N end of the island and 0.3 mile offshore. A pinnacle rock, with a least depth of 2.7m, lies 1.8

miles E of the N end of the island. 

9.2 During the Southwest Monsoon, anchorage can be taken off

the E side of Preparis Island, in depths of 21.9 to 25.6m. During the Northeast Monsoon, anchorage can be taken on the opposite side of the island. 

9.2 Preparis North Channel (15°22'N., 93°48'E.), deep and

clear in its central part, lies between Preparis Island and Alguada Reef, about 55 miles to the NNE. Thalia Shoal (15°15'N.,

93°48'E.), with a least depth of 18.3m, lies about 21.5 miles

NNE of the N end of Preparis Island. Irregular depths surround

this shoal.

9.2 Alguada Reef, Hugh Rose Rock, and the dangers which lie

between Hugh Rose Rock and the Bassein River Entrance to

the NE have been previously described in paragraph 8.4. 

9.2 Preparis South Channel (14°28'N., 93°33'E.), which lies

between Preparis Islands and the Coco Islands to the S, has

depths of 200 to 275m and a width of 34 miles between the

dangers on either side. 

9.2 A radar conspicuous wreck, stranded in 1980, lies at the W

side of the islet 2.5 miles W of the S end of Preparis Island.

9.2 Caution.—Less water than charted has been reported to lie

Preparis Island has been reported to lie about 3.5 miles W of its

charted position. All of the Andaman Islands have been reported to lie 1.3 miles of their charted positions. 

9.2 Preparis South Channel is dangerous to diving submarines,

because sunken mines may still exist in this area.

The Coco Islands—Coco Channel

9.3 The Coco Islands consist of Table Island, Great Coco

Island, and Little Coco Island. 

9.3 Table Island (14°11'N., 93°23'E.), which is densely wooded

on all except its SW side, appears as a flat, level surface with

steep-to sides on all bearings. The island has been reported to

be a good radar target up to 16 miles. 

9.3 Slipper Island (14°11'N., 93°22'E.), 34m high and grass

covered, lies about 0.2 mile NW of the NW end of Table Island. The two islands are connected by a drying reef with a

steppingstone causeway on it. A few trees lie near the summit

of the island; a remarkable pillar rock lies near its W extremity.

Foul ground extends 0.3 mile W and N from Slipper Island,

and depths of 9.1m extend 0.8 mile NW from the island with

depths of 3.7 and 5.5m over the outer end. 

9.3 Numerous rocks and shoals, the positions of which may best

be seen on the chart, lie off Table Island in depths of less than

18.3m. A detached 11.9m patch lies about 1.3 miles NE of the

island, and irregular depths, which cause tide rips, extend about

4.5 miles NE from the island. 

9.3 During the Northeast Monsoon, anchorage can be taken

about 0.3 mile offshore in Table Bay, on the SW side of Table

Island, in a depth of 18.3m, rock, with the lighthouse bearing

012°. When anchoring, care is necessary neither to be too close
Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 255

Pub. 173

to the reef, nor to far out where the currents are strong. 

9.3 During the Southwest Monsoon, anchorage can be taken

about 0.4 mile off the N side of the island, in depths of 16.5 to

21.9m, sand and rock, with the lighthouse bearing 180°. This

anchorage is exposed. 

9.3 In Table Bay, a small, short jetty extends from the shore

close S of the lighthouse. The channel approach to this jetty is

marked by a white square board in line with the E whitewashed gate of the lighthouse fence.

9.3 The landing place on the N side of the island is approached

through a channel, about 91.5m wide at its outer end, and 46m

at its inner end. Iron stakes mark the reefs on either side. 

9.3 Marshall Channel (14°10'N., 93°22'E.), which lies between

Table Island and Great Coco Island to the S, has depths of 9.1

to 18.3m in the fairway seaward of the fringing reefs. Strong

currents set through this channel.

The Coco Islands—Table Island 

9.4 Great Coco Island (14°06'N., 93°23'E.), densely

wooded and steep on its W side, slopes gradually to the sea on

its E side. There are no off-lying dangers, but rocky foul

ground extends 0.3 mile from its N end and 0.4 mile from its

NW end. 

9.4 Great Coco Island has been reported to be a good radar target

up to 23 miles. 

9.4 Pollock Bay (14°09'N., 93°23'E.) lies between the N point

of the island and Pechee Point, about 1 mile to the SE. This latter point consists of a 46m high bluff topped by a few trees.

The outer part of the bay has depths of 7.3 to 9.1m, whereas its

inner part is fouled by rocky reefs. Binnacle Rock, 4m high,

lies on the outer edge of this reef. 

9.4 Ford Bay (14°08'N., 93°23'E.), entered S of Pechee Point,

has depths of 9.1 to 18.3m in its outer part, but shoals rapidly

in its inner part. Rat Islet, 38m high and wooded, lies in the S

part of the bay about 1 mile S of Pechee Point. 

9.4 Anchorage can be taken in the outer part of Ford Bay, in

depths of 12.8 to 18.3m, about 0.7 mile N of Rat Islet. Shelter

is provided against strong W winds. 

9.4 Jerry Island (14°03'N., 93°22'E.), 30m high, is connected to

the S end of Great Coco Island by a reef. Rocky ground, with

uneven depths, extends about 2 miles S from Jerry Island.

9.4 Little Coco Island (14°00'N., 93°14'E.), densely wooded

and fairly high, is separated from Great Coco Island and Jerry

Island by Alexander Channel. This channel is free of dangers

in the fairway, but strong currents and tide rips are encountered. Vessels using this channel should give the S end of Jerry

Island a berth of at least 3 miles.

9.4 Irregular depths extend about 1.8 miles N, and foul, uneven

ground extends about 4 miles S from Little Coco Island. 

9.4 Investigator Patch (13°57'N., 93°16'E.), an area of shoal

rocky ground with a least depth of 2.7m, lies about 2 miles

ESE of the S end of the island. Rocks, some of which are

awash, lie on the foul ground which extends 4 miles S from the

end of the island. Middle Rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m,

lies 2 miles S of the above end of the island. Daphne Rock,

with a least depth of 5m or less, lies 0.5 mile farther S. South

Patch, with a least depth of 12.8m or less, lies 1.5 miles SSE of

Daphne Rock. 

9.4 During E winds, sheltered anchorage can be taken, in depths

of 16.5 to 21.9m, sand and mud, in Lambert Bay on the W side

of the island. The bottom on the E side of the island is rocky

and foul. 

9.4 Coco Channel (13°47'N., 93°12'E.), which separates Little

Coco Island from the Andaman Islands to the S, is wide and

deep. The S side of the channel has irregular depths over a coral bottom. A 18.3m patch, which is marked by a heavy sea during strong winds, lies 13 miles SSW of Little Coco Island.

The Andaman Islands 

9.5 Landfall Island (13°39'N., 93°02'E.), 79m high in its

N part, is fringed by a reef which extends up to 0.5 mile offshore in places. Landfall Rocks, 12.8m high, lie on the reef

fringing the S end of the island. 

9.5 East Island lies 0.8 mile E of Landfall Island. The intervening channel has a least depth 5.5m and provides anchorage to

small craft. The anchorage is approached from the S. East Island Light is shown from a white, round metal tower with red

bands standing on the S summit of East Island; a racon is situated at the light.

9.5 Channel Islet, a 29m high rock, lies 0.3 mile off the E side of

Landfall Island near the edge of the reef which fringes that island.

9.5 Hickman Shoal (13°42'N., 93°59'E.), which consists of two

small patches, lies about 2 miles N of the NW end of Landfall

Island. The patches have a least depth of 8.2m. Several patches,

with depths of 5 to 10.1m, lie between Hickman Shoal and

Landfall Island. Shoals, with depths of less than 9.1m, lie within 2 miles NW of the N end of the island. 

9.5 Ranger Reef (13°39'N., 93°07'E.), with a least depth of

1.8m, lies 2 miles E of the N end of East Island. Two 9.1m

patches lie within 0.8 mile N of Ranger Reef. In heavy weather, the reef is marked by breakers, but at other times it is difficult to identify. 

9.6 Jackson Ledge (13°39'N., 93°08'E.), with a least

depth of 3.2m, lies about 3.3 miles E of the NE end of East Island and is marked by tide rips. An 11m detached patch lies 3

miles ESE of the ledge. An 8.4m patch lies 2.5 miles NE of the

ledge.

9.6 The Andaman Islands, a group of 204 islands, islets and

rocks, lie between the parallels of 10°30'N and 13°40'N and the

meridians of 92°11'E and 94°13'E. The principal islands consist of North Andaman Island, South Andaman Island, Middle

Andaman Island, Baratang Island, and Rutland Island. Little

Andaman Island lies about 30 miles farther S. These islands

are known as the Great Andamans. North Andaman Island and

Little Andaman Island have been reported to be good radar targets at distances up to 18 miles. South Andaman Island has

been reported to be a good radar target at distances up to 17

miles. 

9.6 The principal groups of small islands consist of the Richies

Archipelago, off the E side of Baratang Island, and the Labyrinth Islands, off the SW coast of South Andaman Island. The

principal off-lying islands are North Sentinel Island, Barren Island, and Narcondam Island. The latter island is an extinct volcano which lies 70 miles E of the main group. 

9.6 The Andaman Islands consist of a mass of very high hills enclosing very narrow valleys. Most of the islands are covered
256 Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 

Pub. 173

with dense tropical growth.

9.6 The shores of the islands are deeply indented, forming a

number of harbors, some of which are very spacious. The principal ports or harbors on the W coasts of the islands consist of

Temple Sound, Port Anson, Port Campbell, Port Mouat, and

Macpherson Strait. Those which indent the E coasts consist of

Port Cornwallis, Stewart Sound, Elphinstone Harbor, Colebrook Passage, Port Meadows, and Port Blair. The latter port is

the administrative center for the whole group. 

9.7 The reefs and dangers off the W coasts of the Andaman Islands are more extensive than those off the E coast and

extend in places up to 21 miles offshore. 

9.7 The surf breaks a considerable distance offshore on the E

coast of the Andaman Islands because of the rocky ledges and

foul ground which fringe these shores. 

9.7 West Coral Bank, Middle Bank, and South Bank, composed

of coral and sand, lie off the W side of the Andaman Islands.

The water over them is very clear and judging from the appearance of the bottom, it seems probable that rollers break on

Middle Bank during the Southwest Monsoon but not on the

others. The 183m curve passes close W of these banks, and the

increase of swell usually indicates their general location.

9.7 West Coral Bank (13°13'N., 93°31'E.), the N of these

banks, lies between 15 and 23 miles W of North Andaman Island. A least depth of 11m lies on the N part of the bank about

14 miles NW of North Reef Island (13°05'N., 92°43'E.). 

9.7 Middle Bank (12°32'N., 92°25'E.) has a least depth of 6.8m,

which lies about 38 miles SSW of North Reef Island.

9.7 South Bank (12°16'N., 92°26'E.), about 8 miles in extent,

lies about 18 miles SW of Flat Island (12°32'N., 92°41'E.).

The central part of the bank has a least depth of 11m. 

9.7 Dalrymple Bank (10°31'N., 92°14'E.), about 7 miles in extent and almost circular in shape, lies centered about 9 miles W

of the SW end of Little Andaman Island. The depths near the

center range from 10.1 to 16.5m, but elsewhere they range

from 20.1 to 36.6m. Heavy rollers mark this bank during the

Southwest Monsoon. 

9.7 In 1951, an 11m patch was reported to lie about 23 miles

WSW of the SW end of Little Andaman Island. 

9.7 Invisible Bank (11°10'N., 93°31'E.), about 37 miles long

and 9 miles wide, lies centered about 46 miles E of the Cinque

Islands (11°17'N., 92°43'E.). Flat Rock, 27m in diameter and

awash, lies near the center which is the shallowest part of the

bank.

9.8 North Sentinel Island (11°33'N., 92°14'E.), separated from the Labyrinth Islands by a wide, deep channel, is 122m

high, densely wooded, and has a level ridge which slopes to the

low NW point. Depths of 42.1 to 95.1m are found in this channel. 

9.8 North Sentinel Island has been reported to be a good radar

target up to 13 miles. 

9.8 No dangers, except those S of the anchorage, exist outside

the reef which extends between 0.5 and 0.8 mile from the shore

around the island. A dangerous wreck lies about 2.5 miles W of

the S part of the island. Constance Islet, 12m high, is the largest of four islets which lie on this reef off the SE point of the island. 

9.8 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 18.3m, 0.5 mile off the

E side of the North Sentinel Island with its NE point bearing

283°. Sunken dangers exist S of this fair weather anchorage. 

9.8 In fair weather, small vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in a depth of 21.9m, about 0.5 mile off an entrance

through the reef which lies close E of a small islet on the S side

of the island. This anchorage lies about 0.8 mile W of Constance Islet. 

9.8 South Sentinel Island (10°58'N., 92°14'E.), 44m high to the

tops of the trees and level topped, lies 15 miles NW of Little

Andaman Island. Its appearance is much the same on all bearings. A bank, as defined by the 36m curve, surrounds the island

and extends about 6 miles NW from it. Considerable depths exist in the channel between this island and Little Andaman Island.

9.8 Anchorage can be taken off the W side of South Sentinel Island with its center bearing 101°, distant 0.9 mile. Anchorage

can also be taken off the E side of the island, with its center

bearing 281°, distant 0.9 mile. 

9.8 Narcondam Island (13°26'N., 94°17'E.), an extinct volcano

710m high, lies about 74 miles E of the N end of North Andaman Island. Its summit is shaped like a truncated cone. Barata

Bay on the E side of the island can be identified by a grove of

palm trees. A light is shown from a white framework tower on

the NW side of the island; the visible sector bears between

058° and 179°. 

9.8 Narcondam Island has been reported to be a good radar target up to 27 miles. 

9.8 In 1946, and subsequently through 1984, the island has been

reported to lie 2.3 miles farther W than charted.

9.9 Barren Island (12°16'N., 93°51'E.), 353m high with

densely-wooded cliffs rising sheer from the sea, lies about 72

miles SSW of Narcondam Island. The outer slopes of the crater, which lies in the center of the island, is covered with foliage. The interior of the crater is visible through a gap on its W

side. A thin column of steam rises from a sulphur bed on the

crater side and near the summit. No known dangers exist within 0.5 mile of the island. A light is shown from a white metal

tower on the NW end of the island. 

9.9 Barren Island has been reported to be a good radar target up

to 24 miles. 

9.9 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 27.4m, about 0.2 mile

off a beach on the SW side of the island. The currents were reported to set SE at a rate of 2.5 knots at half tide at this anchorage. 

9.9 The tidal currents in Cleugh Passage, between Landfall Island and North Andaman Island, set about ESE on the rising

tide and WNW on the falling tide. The rate at springs is about

1.5 knots. Tide rips occur throughout the passage. 

9.9 The current off the seaward side of the Labyrinth Islands,

which are located off the SW side of South Andaman Island,

sets S, but it occasionally reverses its direction for periods of

about 24 hours.

9.9 The tidal currents in Macpherson Strait, between Little Andaman Island and Rutland Island, set E on the rising tide, and

W on the falling tide, turning at about the times of high and

LW. The tidal currents are strong only in the narrows NE of Rifleman Island. 

9.9 The tidal currents in Diligent Strait, between the Ritchies Archipelago and Baratang Island, are weak, but with strong S
Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 257

Pub. 173

winds there is probably a considerable N set in the narrowest

part of the strait between Wilson Island and Strait Island. 

Cleugh Passage

9.10 Cape Price (13°35'N., 93°02'E.), the N end of North

Andaman Island, is densely wooded and slopes gradually to

the sea. The S shore of Cleugh Passage, between Cape Price

and Cape Thornhill, about 7 miles WSW, is indented, densely

wooded, and fringed by mangroves in places.

9.10 Cleugh Passage (13°36'N., 93°02'E.), which separates

Landfall Island and East Island from North Andaman Island, is

available to vessels with local knowledge. Passage through it is

not recommended because of the strong currents and lack of

navigational aids. Depths in the fairway range from 20.1 to

56.7m, but patches of less than 18.3m are numerous. Patches,

with depths of 9.1 and 10.5m, lie 1 and 2 miles ESE of Passage

Rock. 

9.10 Cleugh Rocks (13°37'N., 92°58'E.), about 1.5 miles SSW of

the SW end of Landfall Island, lie on a reef, the W part of

which dries 1.8m. 

9.10 Passage Rock (13°36'N., 93°00'E.) awash, steep-to and

marked by breakers, lies about 0.5 mile SE of Cleugh Rocks

and almost in mid-channel. 

9.10 Wedge Rock, about 1.8m high and fringed by a drying reef,

lies 1.5 miles WNW of Cape Price. A shoal, with depths of 4.6

to 8.2m, lies 1 mile W of Wedge Rock. A 0.9m high rock, surrounded by depths of less than 9.1m, lies 0.5 mile S of this

shoal about 2.7 miles W of Cape Price. 

9.10 One Fathom Patch (13°36'N., 93°02'E.), which breaks in

heavy weather, has a least depth of 1.8m and lies 0.6 mile N of

Cape Price. Depths of 6.4 to 11.9m lie between this danger and

Cape Price. A 5m patch lies about 0.5 mile W of the Cape. 

9.10 West Island (13°36'N., 93°54'E.), 53m high, reef-fringed,

and densely wooded, lies in the W approach to Cleugh Passage, about 3.5 miles NNW of Cape Thornhill. Depths of less

than 9.1m lie up to 0.5 mile off the island. Several patches,

with depths of 7.3 to 8.7m lie between West Island and Wedge

Rock. 

North Andaman Island—West Coast

9.11 Between Cape Thornhill (13°32'N., 92°56'E.) and

Shark Islet, about 22 miles SSW, the coast is backed some distance inland by many conspicuous summits. 

9.11 Taylor Hill (13°27'N., 92°54'E.) about 6.3 miles SSE of

Cape Thornhill, is a long ill-defined summit, 196m high.

D’Oyley Peak, 159m high and pointed, lies 8 miles S of the

same cape. Tasou Hill, 240m high and having three summits of

nearly equal height with only a slight dip between them, rises

6.5 miles farther SSW. Tradikeli Hill, 335m high, a sharp ridge

with its peak at its S end, lies 8 miles S of D’Oyley Hill. Saddle

North Peak, 686m high and having a flat top with a sharp peak

at its N end, rises about 23 miles S of Cape Price. Saddle Hill,

731m high, lies 2.8 miles S of Saddle North Peak and has a

rounded summit. The peak and the hill are covered with vegetation and appear saddle-shaped when viewed from the W or E.

9.11 Several conspicuous hills lie near the W coast of the island.

Brown’s Hill, 91m high, lies 1 mile SE of Cape Thornhill. Jessop Hill, 134m high, lies on a point at the head of Hudson Bay

about 15 miles SSW of the same cape. Lewis Hill, 110m high,

lies on a peninsula separating the above bay from Casuarina

Bay about 1.3 miles S of Jessop Hill. All of the above hills

have twin summits. 

9.11 Between Cape Thornhill and Bluff Point, about 4.5 miles

SW, the coast is somewhat indented and lined with mangroves.

The latter bold, cliffy point is 70m high, has an irregular summit, and appears as three peaks when viewed from the SSW. 

9.11 Thornhill Island (13°32'N., 92°55'E.), 77m high, is separated from Cape Thornhill by a narrow shallow channel. 

9.11 White Cliff Island (13°32'N., 92°53'E.), 33m high, lies 1.5

miles W of Thornhill Island. Cliffs, 20m high and dark-colored, back the N end of the island.

9.11 Reef Island (13°30'N., 92°53'E.) is 5.5m high to the tops of

the trees. Shoal ground, as defined by the 6m curve, extends almost 1 mile WSW from the SW point of the island. Irregular

depths of less than 18.3m lie up to 1.3 miles farther WSW. 

9.11 Temple Sound (13°25'N., 92°51'E.) lies between Shearme

Island on the E, and Paget Island and Point Island on the N and

W. Shearme Island is 57m high and, except in the narrow channel separating it from the mainland to the E, is fringed by a

drying reef. Oldham Rocks, 3m high, lie about 0.5 mile NNE

of the NW point of Shearme Island; Sugarloaf Island, a prominent conical rock, 20m high, lies about 1.5 miles SSW of the

SW end of Shearme Island and on the SE side of the entrance

of the sound. 

9.12 Paget Island (13°26'N., 92°50'E.), about 0.8 mile

NW of the NW end of Shearme Island, is 76m high to the tops

of the trees and fringed by a drying reef on all except part of its

E side. A spit, with depths of less than 5.5m, extends about 0.8

mile N from its NE point. Cliffs, about 30m high, line the SE

side of Paget Island. 

9.12 Point Island (13°24'N., 92°50'E.), about 0.5 mile SW of

Paget Island, is tree-covered. A drying reef almost surrounds

the island and extends about 0.3 mile from its N and SW sides.

A least depth of 6.4m exists in the fairway of the channel separating Paget Island and Point Island. 

9.12 In the N approach to Temple Sound, between Paget Island to

the W and the coast between Bluff Point and Shearme Island to

the E, there are several rocks, awash and sunken, and some

shoals, the positions of which may best be seen on the chart. 

9.12 In the S approach, Bolton Shoal, which lies almost in midchannel between the S end of Point Island, and Sugarloaf Island, about 2.5 miles SSE, has a least depth of 9.1m.

9.12 A bank, on which the depths are less than 18.3m, extends almost 1 mile SSE from the S end of Point Island and almost

joins Bolton Shoal. 

9.12 Anchorage, sheltered from all except SW winds, can be taken, in depths of 18.3 to 21.9m, mud and sand, in the middle of

the sound about midway between Shearme Island and Point Island. Small vessels can anchor, in a depth of 14.6m, about 0.3

mile W of Oldham Rocks. 

9.12 The depths in Temple Sound are very irregular and caution is

advised both when entering and when anchoring.

9.12 The coast between Point Stuart (13°22'N., 92°51'E.) and the

W entrance of Austin Strait, about 29 miles to the S, is very irregular and fronted by numerous islets, rocks and shoals. Hudson Bay, entered about 5 miles S of Point Stuart and Casuarina

Bay, 3 miles farther S, are both shallow and exposed to the W
258 Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 

Pub. 173

wind and seas. 

9.12 Mackey Bank (13°20'N., 92°46'E.), with a least depth of

7.3m, lies about 6 miles SW of Point Island. Vessels should

give this bank a wide berth when passing. 

9.12 Shark Island (13°12'N., 92°46'E.), about 12.3 miles SSW of

the same island, is sandy and covered with bushes about 6.1m

high. A rocky reef surrounds this island. Vessels should give

this island a wide berth when passing. 

9.13 North Reef Island (13°05'N., 92°43'E.), low, flat,

wooded, and marshy, lies 6.5 miles SSW of Shark Island. A

reef extends about 2 miles S from the S end of the island. 

9.13 Latouche Island (13°05'N., 92°43'E.) lies close off the NE

point of North Reef Island. A spit extends about 0.3 mile S

from Latouche Island. A 3.7m patch lies about 1.5 miles SE of

the E end of North Reef Island. 

9.13 Interview Island (12°55'N., 92°42'E.) lies 4.5 miles S of the

S end of North Reef Island. The island is low at its N end, but

rises gradually to a height of 113m. The highest part of the island is a wooded plateau. A rocky pinnacle, 7m high, lies close

off a cliff on the S end of the island. Foul ground extends about

2 miles NNE from the island. A light is shown from the W side

of the island. 

9.13 South Reef Island (12°47'N., 92°40'E.) lies about 1 mile

SW of Interview Island on a stony spit, as defined by the 6m

curve, that extends about 3 miles S from that island. 

9.13 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in

depths of 11.8 to 16.4m, about 2 miles E of the S end of North

Reef Island. Care should be taken to avoid the shoal patches

which lie 1.5 and 2 miles ENE of the S end of the island. Vessels approaching from the NW should round Latouche Island

about 0.5 mile off in order to avoid a 6.4m shoal which lies 1.5

miles N of that island. 

9.13 Austin Strait (12°53'N., 92°50'E.), which separates North

Andaman Island from Middle Andaman Island, is shoal and

can only be used by boats. The shallowest parts are over the

bars at either entrance. The W entrance, which lies about 8.5

miles SE of the N end of Interview Island, is approached

through Interview Sound which lies between the N part of Interview Island and the mainland. Numerous islands, rocks, and

shoals lie in the sound. 

9.13 White Mountain (12°51'N., 92°55'E.), 361m high, lies at

the N end of the E coastal range of Middle Andaman Island,

about 7 miles ESE of the W entrance of Austin Strait. The

mountain appears whale-backed when viewed from the SW. 

9.13 The W coast of the island, between Tuft Island about 6 miles

SSE of the S end of Interview Island, and the W entrance of

Andaman Strait, is bold and precipitous. Tuft Island is sandy

and about 3m high. 

9.13 Port Andaman (12°44'N., 92°42'E.), of little commercial

importance, lies between South Reef Island and Anderson Island. This latter island lies close to and parallel with Middle

Andaman Island. The water at the entrance is muddy and irregular depths exist over a rocky bottom. Port Andaman leads N to

Interview Passage, which lies between Interview Island to the

W and Anderson Island and Bennett Island to the E. This area

is dangerous and should be avoided. 

9.13 Buchanan Passage, which lies between Anderson Island and

the mainland, is foul. 

9.13 Rocky Point, the extremity of a promontory, lies about 4.5

miles SSW of Tuft Island. Hump Island lies about 3 miles S of

Tuft Island and Flat Island lies about 6 miles farther S. 

9.13 A shoal, with a least depth of 11m, lies 2.5 miles W of

Rocky Point. 

Andaman Strait—West Entrance

9.14 The W entrance of Andaman Strait, which separates

Middle Andaman Island from South Andaman Island, is divided into two channels by Spike Island. Fairly deep water exists

in the outer part of the main entrance which lies N of the latter

island. The channel is entered between the W entrance point of

Foul Bay and Breaker Point, the NW end of Spike Island. The

channel abreast Foul Bay is about 0.4 mile wide between the

shoals on either side, but narrows to a width of 0.2 mile between the reef extending from Steep Point, the NE end of Spike

Island and Brook Point to the N. 

9.14 Andaman Strait bifurcates about 0.5 mile E of Steep Point.

Homfray Strait, the N channel, separates Middle Andaman Island from Bara. The S channel, which separates the latter island from South Andaman Island, retains the name of

Andaman Strait. That part of the channel between Spike Island

to the W and Stoat Island, Mangrove Island, and Tala Kaicha

Island, to the E, is known as Port Anson. 

9.14 The S part of the W entrance of Andaman Strait, between

Spike Island and the N end of South Andaman Island, about

0.3 mile SW, is fairly deep. This narrow, intricate channel is

considered to be dangerous. 

Port Anson—Approaches

9.15 Foul Bay (12°19'N., 92°42'E.), on the N side of the

main entrance of Andaman Strait, is fouled by reefs. The coast

between this bay and Brooke Point, about 1.8 miles SSE, is

fringed by a reef which extends about 0.3 mile offshore in places. Brooke Point rises to a rounded knoll, 96m high, close N of

its extremity. 

9.15 Foul ground extends almost 1 mile S from the W point of

Foul Bay. A rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies near the S

end of this reef. Half-tide Rock, which dries 0.9m, lies 0.6 mile

S of the same point. 

9.15 Spike Island (12°16'N., 92°43'E.), whose N side forms the S

side of the entrance channel, is 136m high at its N end and 94m

high at its S end. The N coast of the island between Breaker

Point and Steep Point is fringed by a narrow reef. A vessel

drawing 4.6m reported grounding about 0.4 mile E of Breaker

Point. Braganza Ledge, almost 0.5 mile NW of Breaker Point,

has a least depth of 8.2m.

9.15 The W side of Spike Island is fringed by a reef which extends up to 0.2 mile offshore in places. Long Rock, 1.2m high,

lies 1.5 miles SSW of Breaker Point. Cingue Rocks, two

groups of above-water rocks, lie about 0.3 and 0.5 mile S of

Long Rock. 

9.15 Taylor Patches (12°16'N., 92°42'E.), which have a least

depth of 5m, lie about 1.5 miles SW of Breaker Point. A shoal

area, with a least depth of 7.3m, lies 0.5 mile W of Long Rock. 

9.15 Bluff Island (12°15'N., 92°42'E.), 30m high to the tops of

the trees, lies in the mouth of the S entrance channel, close N of

the N end of South Andaman Island. A drying reef extends 0.3

mile W and 0.5 mile N from Bluff Island. 
Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 259

Pub. 173

Port Anson

9.16 Port Anson (12°16'N., 92°44'E.) lies between Spike

Island to the W, and Stoat Island, Mangrove Island, and Tala

Kaicha Island to the E. Depths of 12.8 to 20m exist in the central part of the bay. All of the above islands are reef-fringed. 

9.16 Whales Reef (12°15'N., 92°44'E.) lies about 0.8 mile NW of

the S end of Tala Kaichi Island. Two small reefs lie S of this

reef. 

9.16 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in the N part of Port

Anson, in depths of 16.5 to 18.3m, mud, about midway between Stoat Island and the N part of Spike Island. 

9.16 Directions.—The low mangrove point at the N end of Stoat

Island, just open S of Brooke Point, bearing 112°, leads

through the channel N of Spike Island. When within about 0.3

mile of Brooke Point, course should be altered to the S passing

about midway between Brooke Point and Steep point. After

rounding Steep Point, about 0.1 to 0.2 mile distant, course can

be shaped for the anchorage. 

9.17 Andaman Strait.—Vessels drawing 4m have navigated the strait. Small vessels with local knowledge should

only attempt the passage during daylight hours, under favorable conditions. Such vessels should follow the directions

above and steer S in mid-channel through Port Anson until W

of the S end of Mangrove Island. The course should then be altered slightly E until the summit of a conical peak, to the N, is

seen bearing 003° and just open E of the nearer hills that form

the W side of a large mangrove valley. The course should then

be shaped to about 183° and these marks kept on the bearing of

003°, astern. This course leads between the ledge of rocks that

dries 2.1m and Whales Reef and other reefs to the S of it.

9.17 When the S end of Tala Kaicha Island bears 090°, the course

should be altered to about 220° for the S point of Spike Island,

giving a berth of about 0.3 mile to the E side of the strait until

about 0.6 mile distant from the S point of Spike Island. The

course should then be altered to pass 0.2 mile E of that point.

When the same point bears 000°, the course should be altered

to the S to proceed along the W side of the strait, about 0.2

mile off the W shore. 

9.17 When the W end of Baby Island (12°11'N., 92°44'E.), an island with two hillocks, located at the W end of the narrows

about 3 miles SSE of the S end of Spike Island, bears about

113°, the course should be altered to pass S of that point and

continue in mid-channel through the strait. 

9.17 Vessels should not attempt to pass through the narrows during the strength of the tidal currents at springs. Slack water occurs at the times of HW and LW at Port Blair. The tidal

currents are weak at neaps. 

9.18 Cape Bluff (12°12'N., 92°40'E.) the NW end of

South Andaman Island, is fronted by dangers which extend

about 1 mile offshore. The coast between this cape and Petrie

Island, about 15.5 miles SSW, is clear of off-lying dangers, except for South Bank, which has been previously described in

paragraph 9.7. The shallowest part of this bank lies 15 miles

WNW of Cape Bluff. 

9.18 Port Campbell (11°57'N., 92°35'E.), almost landlocked and

sheltered, is entered between Petrie Island and Montgomery Island, about 1.8 miles SSW. The cliffs in the vicinity of the port

are yellowish-gray sandstone with clearly defined stratum

lines. 

9.18 Petrie Island (11°58'N., 92°37'E.), which lies on the N side

of the entrance, is joined to the N extremity of Defence Island

by reefs and shoals. This latter island forms part of the E side

of the port. 

9.18 An area of shoal ground extends 0.5 mile S from Petrie Island and a similar shoal, with some rocks awash, extends about

1 mile W from the middle part of Defence Island.

9.18 Montgomery Island (11°56'N., 92°35'E.), on the S side of

the entrance, is joined to the mainland by foul ground. The E

side of this island is fringed by foul ground. A detached patch,

with depths of 9.1 to 11.9m, lies about 0.8 mile NE of Montgomery Island. 

9.18 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor in the entrance, in a depth

of 21.9m, about 0.8 mile NE of Montgomery Island. Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 23.8m, a little over 1 mile SE of

the same island. 

9.18 Directions.—Vessels can approach the latter anchorage in

depths of not less than 18.3m by passing close N of the previously-mentioned 9.1 to 11.9m patch, on a 090° course until the

W point of Petrie Island bears 000°. A course of 180° should

then be steered until the N end of Montgomery Island bears

305°. A course of 130° should then be steered and anchorage

taken when the NW end of Defence Island bears 003°. 

9.19 The coast between Montgomery Island and Palmer

Point, about 15 miles to the S, has not been closely examined.

A reef fringes this section of coast and an area of shoal ground

extends up to 2.5 miles S from Palmer Point. A 5.5m patch lies

near the S end of this shoal ground. 

9.19 Constance Bay (11°42'N., 92°36'E.), entered between Palmer Point and Florence Point, about 2 miles to the SE, is foul and

has not been closely examined. 

9.19 Port Mouat (11°37'N., 92°38'E.), entered between Perseus

Point and Andromeda Point about 0.8 mile S, extends about

1.5 miles E through a narrow channel to a landlocked basin. 

9.19 The entrance channel between the extending reefs on either

side is about 0.3 mile wide, but about 1 mile to the E the channel narrows to a width of only about 91m. Two detached patches, having depths of 4.3 and 4.6m, lie in the middle of the narrowest part of the channel. Depths E and W of these patches

range from 12.8 to 20m. Depths in the landlocked basin to the

E range from 7.3 to 10m. 

9.19 Small fishing vessels with local knowledge frequently use

the port as an anchorage. It is advisable to buoy the two shoal

patches which lie in the narrowest part of the channel prior to

entering. 

The Labyrinth Islands

9.20 The Labyrinth Islands (11°35'N., 92°3'E.), consisting of 14 islands and islets, lie off the SW side of South Andaman Island. All of these islands are rocky and fringed by reefs

which extend up to 1 mile offshore along their seaward faces.

Large blocks of these extending reefs have been broken off by

the sea during the Southwest Monsoon and have been tossed

up onto the reefs where they appear as rocky boulders.

9.20 Tarmugli Island (11°35'N., 92°34'E.), the NW island of the

group, is 78m high and lies with Frederick Point, its NW end,
260 Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 

Pub. 173

about 4.5 miles WSW of Perseus Point. Two rocks, each 4.6m

high, lie close off the cliffy S side of the island. 

9.20 A large area of foul ground extends up to 2.5 miles N from

the reef which fringes the N coast of the island. Allen Patches,

partly awash, lie on the outer part of this foul ground about 2

miles NE of Frederick Point. A 5.5m patch was reported to lie

about 2.5 miles NE of the same point.

9.20 Boat Island (11°31'N., 92°34'E.), 27m high, lies on an area

of foul ground about 1.8 miles SE of the SW end of Tarmugli

Island.

9.20 Malay Island (11°32'N., 92°37'E.), the SE island of the

group, lies 2.3 miles E of Boat Island. A rounded summit, 68m

high, rises at its N end. A rocky ledge extends 0.3 mile from

the S point of the island. 

9.20 Hobday Island (11°32'N., 92°37'E.), which lies close NE of

Malay Island, has a rocky ledge extending 0.5 mile S from its

SE side. A ridge, with depths of 6.4 to 8.2m, extends 0.5 mile

farther S.

9.20 Redskin Island (11°33'N., 92°36'E.) lies close NW of Malay Island. It has been reported that Elphinstone Passage,

which leads between the W side of Redskin Island and Snob Island, 46m high, is used by local fishing craft proceeding to Port

Mouat. Snob Island is 75m high and lies W of Redskin Island.

9.20 Pluto Island (11°33'N., 92°38'E.), small, rounded, and 49m

high, lies close E of Hobday Island. A rock, 0.6m high and said

to be a useful mark at all stages of the tide, lies 0.5 mile SSE of

Pluto Island.

9.20 Jolly Boys Island (11°30'N., 92°37'E.), 45m high, lies 0.8

mile NW of Rutland Island. A reef, which is usually visible,

fringes the island and extends about 0.8 mile SW from it. 

9.20 Grub Island (11°35'N., 92°36'E.), 24m high with a yellow

cliff on it, lies 1.5 miles E of Tarmugli Island.

9.21 Macpherson Strait (11°30'N., 92°36'E.) separates

South Andaman Island and the Labyrinth Islands from Rutland

Island. The recommended channel has a least depth of 7.3m

and a least navigable width of 0.2 mile. 

9.21 The W entrance is narrow and obstructed by reefs as are both

shores of the strait. The reef edges are visible in places. That

part of the strait which lies between the SW end of South Andaman Island and the NE side of Rutland Island, is clear except

for a rocky ledge which extends 0.6 mile ENE from the NE end

of the latter island. 

9.21 Several channels are found in the W approach to Macpherson Strait. Those leading between the islands forming the Labyrinth Islands are mostly foul. The channel between Malay

Island and Jolly Boys Island, which leads from Macpherson

Strait to Elphinstone Passage, is navigable by small vessels

with local knowledge under favorable conditions. 

9.21 Brooker Rock (11°30'N., 92°36'E.), a pinnacle with a depth

of 1.5m, lies on the NW side of the channel about 0.8 mile NW

of the SW end of Jolly Boys Island. Because of the discoloration of the water this rock is not usually visible. 

9.21 Beauchamp Patch, a small coral head awash, lies on the SE

side of the channel, 0.4 mile NNE of the NE end of Jolly Boys

Island. This rock is not usually visible. 

9.21 Peck Shoals (11°32'N., 92°38'E.), a group of coral heads on

the N side of the channel, lie 1.3 miles NNE of the NE end of

Jolly Boys Island. 

9.21 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in depths of 11 to 18.3m,

on the N side of the E part of the strait with the S end of South

Andaman Island bearing 125°, distant 1.5 miles. A white rock

on the N side of the strait, about 1.3 miles NNW of the above

point, bears 058° and is reported to be a good mark. 

9.21 Directions.—Vessels approaching Macpherson Strait from

the W, about 5 miles off the entrance, should steer a course of

051° for Jolly Boys Island until the N end of Pluto Island bears

034°. Pluto Island will then be open, 0.3 of its length E of the

SE side of Hobday Island. A 034° course will then lead midway between Brooker Rock and the reef extending SW from

Jolly Boys Island. This reef is usually visible. When the summit of this island is abeam course should be altered to 052°

with 0.6m rock, located about 0.5 mile SSE of Pluto Island,

ahead. When the S end of Boat Island is seen just open S of the

S end of Malay Island, bearing 265°, course should be altered

to 085° with that mark astern. This course leads between Peck

Shoals and Beauchamp Patch. 

9.21 A mid-channel course can be steered through the narrows.

When the above 0.6m rock is abeam, course should be altered

so as to pass midway between Rifleman Islet and the NE shore

of the strait. A mid-channel course can then be steered through

the rest of the strait. 

9.22 Rutland Island (11°25'N., 92°39'E.), the furthest S of

the Andaman Islands, consists of two parts joined together by a

low neck of land. Mount Ford, 433m high, lies in the N part of

the island; Mount Mayo, 227m high, lies in the S part.

9.22 Woodmason Bay (11°25'N., 92°37'E.), which indents the W

coast of the island, lies with its S part abreast the low neck of

land. Depths in the central part of the bay, seaward of the fringing reefs, range from 14.6 to 29.3m. 

9.22 A bank, as defined by the 20m curve, extends about 4 miles

W from the SW side of the island. The Twin Islands, flattopped and wooded, lie on the N side of this bank. East Twin

Island is 44m high and West Twin Island is 48m high. A rocky

ledge extends 0.8 mile SW from the latter island. Turtle Rock,

which dries 1.8m, lies near the extremity of this ledge. A spit

extends about 0.8 mile from the rock. A 2.7m patch lies near

the extremity of this spit. 

9.22 Investigator Rock (11°20'N., 92°37'E.), with a least depth

of 5.5m and marked by rips, lies about 1 mile SSW of the S extremity of Rutland Island. A rocky shoal, with a least depth of

8.2m, lies about 0.3 mile NNE of this rock. 

9.22 An extensive bank of dead coral, having a least depth of

11m, lies centered about 6.5 miles SW of the SW end of Rutland Island.

9.22 The E side of Rutland Island is described in paragraph 9.47.

Manners Strait and the islands and passages to the S are described beginning in paragraph 9.48. 

North Andaman Island—East Side

9.23 Cape Price, the NE point of North Andaman Island,

has been previously described in paragraph 9.10. The coast between the cape and the entrance of Gibb Creek, about 7 miles

to the S, is fronted by several rocky patches. Vessels should

keep at least 2.5 miles off this coast when passing. 

9.23 Union Ledge (13°32'N., 93°11'E.), almost awash, lies about

6.5 miles ESE of Pocock Island. It lies near the S extremity of

an extensive bank on which the irregular depths are less than
Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 261

Pub. 173

36.6m. A patch, with depths of 11 to 14.6m, lies about 0.8 mile

E, and a 5.5m patch lies almost 0.5 mile SSW of Union Ledge. 

9.23 Pocock Island (13°34'N., 93°04'E.), 55m high and wooded,

lies about 1.8 miles SSE of Cape Price. A rock, awash, lies

near the S end of an area of foul ground which extends 0.3 mile

S from the island. A drying rock lies 0.3 mile farther S. 

9.23 A shoal, with a least depth of 5.5m, lies about 4 miles S of

Pocock Island.

9.23 Beauchamp Reef (13°27'N., 93°04'E.), awash, lies almost 1

mile offshore about 6.5 miles S of Pocock Island. 

9.23 Cadell Bay (13°26'N., 93°04'E.), entered between the S entrance point of Gibb Creek and Colvin Point about 2.8 miles

SE, provides anchorage during the Southwest Monsoon, in

depths of 11 to 12.8m, mud, in the middle of the bay.

9.23 Trilby Island lies 0.2 mile ENE of Colvin Point; Tree Islet,

11m high with some vegetation on it, lies 0.3 mile ENE of Trilby Island.

9.23 Bond Harbor (13°24'N., 93°04'E.), entered about 1 mile

SSE of Colvin Point, provides anchorage to small craft, in

depths of 12.8 to 14.6m, mud and sand. 

9.23 The Table Islands (13°25'N., 93°07'E.) consist of Excelsior

Island and Delgarno Island, both tree-covered, which lie at the

N and SW ends, respectively of an extensive shoal on which

the depths are less than 5.5m. 

9.23 Excelsior Island, 29m high, lies about 1.5 miles E of the

coast and is fringed by a reef which extends about 0.3 mile

from its NE side.

9.23 Delgarno Island (13°25'N., 93°06'E.), about 61m high, lies

0.8 mile SSW of Excelsior Island and has a clear sandy beach

on its NW side and mangroves on its E and S sides. A reef extends about 0.4 mile S from the island. 

9.23 Both islands are fairly steep-to on their W sides, but foul

ground extends about 1 mile SE from Excelsior Island and the

same distance E from Delgarno Island. Seaward of the foul

ground, irregular depths extend about 1.3 miles E of Excelsior

Island and 1.8 miles E of Delgarno Island. 

9.24 North Passage Reef (13°26'N., 93°06'E.), which

dries about 2.4m, lies about 0.5 mile W of Excelsior Island.

The passage between this reef and Tree Islet, almost 0.5 mile to

the W, is clear of dangers.

9.24 Mushroom Reef and Table Reef lie about 0.2 mile apart, 1.8

miles E of the S end of Delgarno Island. Both reefs dry and are

usually visible. 

9.24 South Passage Reef, which dries, lies in the passage between

the Table Islands and North Andaman Island. A shoal spit extends about 0.4 mile ESE from the reef. Vessels using this passage should pass W of this reef. 

9.24 Vessels passing E of the Table Islands should not shoal to

depths of less than 36.6m.

9.24 From Tree Point (13°23'N., 93°05'E.), the coast extends 1.8

miles SW to the entrance of Thoroughfare Creek. This boat

channel separates Smith Island from North Andaman Island

and leads into Port Cornwallis.

9.24 Smith Island (13°20'N., 93°05'E.), 131m high, has a conspicuous tree on its summit. Mangrove Point, the E end of the

island, is fronted by a drying reef that extends about 0.2 mile

offshore. A 10.1m patch lies about 0.8 mile S of the point. 

9.24 Temple Island, which forms the S entrance point of Thoroughfare Creek, lies 0.5 mile NE of the N end of Smith Island.

A shelving reef extends about 0.3 mile from the E side of Temple Island. A drying ledge lies about 0.3 mile E of the same island.

9.24 The Turtle Islands (13°22'N., 93°05'E.), two wooded islands about 46m high, lie 1.8 miles NNW of Mangrove Point.

Turtle Reef, with a 1.2m high sandbank in its middle, lies 0.5

mile N of the islands. A 7.3m shoal lies 0.5 mile ESE of the

reef. 

9.24 The channel between the Turtle Islands and Smith Island is

clear with a fairway depth of not less than 20.1m.

9.24 Back Bay, an open bight, lies between Mangrove Point and

Ross Island, about 2 miles to the S. The shores of the bay are

reef-fringed. Back Bay Shoal, with a least depth of 1.8m, lies

about 1 mile SE of Mangrove Point and breaks only in heavy

weather. Back Bay Reef dries 1.5m and lies about 1 mile S of

Mangrove Point. This reef is usually visible at HW, except

when the sea is very smooth. Depths of 11 to 16m exist between Back Bay Shoal and Back Bay Reef.

9.24 Tree Island, in line bearing 341° with Cape Price, leads E of

Back Bay Shoal. Hand Peak, in line bearing 235° with the SE

side of Ross Island, leads SE of the same shoal.

Port Cornwallis

9.25 Port Cornwallis (13°17'N., 93°05'E.) is entered between Ross Island and Dundas Point, about 1.8 miles SSW.

Ross Island, 82.6m high, is connected to Smith Island by a

sandy spit and is almost entirely surrounded by a drying reef.

Dundas Point, sharp and rocky, is fronted by a drying reef

which extends about 0.2m NNE from its extremity. The point

rises to a height of 124m about 0.4 mile S of its extremity.

Hand Peak, 219m high, sharp and wooded, lies 2.8 miles WSW

of the same point. A 184m peak lies 1 mile SW of Dundas

Point. 

9.25 There are considerable depths in the entrance and within the

harbor. The W part of the harbor is very shallow, but a narrow

channel leads between Wharf Island and South Island and then

SW into Blair Bay, a shallow extensive backwater. 

9.25 Shoal ground, as defined by the 10m curve, extends almost

0.5 mile E, and a little over 0.3 mile S from Ross Island. North

Reef, which dries 2.4m, lies about 0.3 mile SE of the island. A

5m patch lies close SE of the reef.

9.25 A shoal, with a least depth of 6.9m, lies 0.8 mile ENE of

Dundas Point. 

9.25 South Reef, which dries 2.4m, lies about 0.4 mile E; Middle

Rock, 0.6m high, lies the same distance SSE of Dundas Point. 

9.25 Depths of 6.4m and 12.3m lie about 1.3 miles and 1.8 miles,

respectively, S of Dundas Point. A 1.2m shoal lies about 1 mile

S of the same point. Shoals, with depths of 5 to 9.6m, lie between Middle Rock and the 6.4m patch. 

9.25 Minerva Bay (13°19'N., 93°04'E.) is entered between Hood

Point and Perseverence Point, about 1.8 miles NW. A bank, as

defined by the 20m curve, extends 0.8 mile SE from the latter

point, about halfway across the bay entrance. A rocky shoal,

with depths of 10.5 to 16.5m, lies near the outer edge of this

bank. A 14.1m patch lies almost 0.8 mile NW of Hood Point.

A depth of 11.4m lies about 0.3 mile WNW of the same point.

9.25 Brush Islet (13°17'N., 93°04'E.), a reef-fringed islet about

6.1m high to the tops of the trees, lies almost in mid-channel

about 1 mile SW of Hood Point. A spit, with shallow depths,
262 Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 

Pub. 173

extends 1 mile W from the islet. A lighted beacon lies on the

NW side of Brush Islet.

9.26 Atalanta Bay (13°16'N., 93°04'E.) is entered between

Dundas Point and Barkely Point, about 1.3 miles WNW. A

shoal area, with depths of 2.3 to 11m, lies in the middle of the

bay. A 9.6m patch lies 0.4 mile E of Barkely Point. 

9.26 Ariel Bay is shallow and lies about 1.3 miles W of Barkely

Point. An L-shaped jetty extends 0.2m N, then NE from Kopi

Point, the E entrance point of the bay. In 1983, works were in

progress close SW of Kopi Point. 

9.26 Chatham Island (13°19'N., 93°02'E.), 61m high near its S

end and 58m high near its N end, lies about 1 mile W of Perseverence Point. 

9.26 Jungle Island (13°20'N., 93°03'E.), small and low, lies in

the S entrance of Thoroughfare Creek, about 1 mile N of Perseverence Point. North Island, 93m high to the tops of the trees,

lies 1 mile W of Jungle Island. WharfIsland and South Island

lie within 0.5 mile W of North Island. Shoal patches, with a

least depth of 6.9m, lie between North Island and Chatham Island. 

9.26 Anchorage.—During the Southwest Monsoon, anchorage

can be taken in the entrance of Atalanta Bay. The best anchorage lies NE of Chatham Island, in depths of 11 to 14.6m, mud,

about midway between the S end of that island and Jungle Island. Anchorage can also be taken, in depths of 21.9 to 23.8m,

about 1 mile NW of Brush Islet. 

9.26 Directions.—Vessels entering Port Cornwallis should keep

Brush Island bearing 287° and in line with South Point, the S

end of Chatham Island. When the NE end of the latter island

bears 313° and is in line with the SW end of Wharf Island,

course should be altered to that bearing. When abeam of Perseverence Point, course can be altered to the N for the anchorage. 

9.26 The coast, between Dundas Point and Cadell Point, about 15

miles to the S, is not well charted. Craggy Island, which lies

about 3 miles S of Dundas Point, is joined to the mainland by a

reef. Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain good anchorage off the S side of this reef. 

9.26 Saddle North Peak and Saddle Hill, both prominent, lie inland along this section of coast. Both have been previously described in paragraph 9.11. 

Stewart Sound

9.27 Stewart Sound (12°54'N., 93°00'E.), which contains

several bays and inlets within its limits, lies within Sound Island between Cadell Point and Cape Vestal, about 11 miles

SSW. The hills surrounding the sound are covered with dense

jungle. White Mountain, 361m high and prominent, lies 2

miles WSW of Cape Vestal at the N end of the E coastal range

of Middle Andaman Island. Ray Hill, a conspicuous coneshaped hill 135m high, lies 5.7 miles SW of Cadell Point. The

hill serves as a good mark for vessels approaching the S entrance of the sound. Ridges of high land span Sound Island in

all directions and are prolonged in spurs up to the entrance

points of the numerous bays that indent the island. The conspicuous summit of Sound Island is 147m high and lies 1 mile

WSW of Simpson Point. 

9.27 Stewart Sound is of great extent and contains the principal

port of North Andaman Island. Several lumber camps and settlements are found around the shores of the sound. 

9.27 Austin Strait (12°54'N., 92°53'E.), which separates North

Andaman Island and Middle Andaman Island, has its E entrance at the head of a shallow bay on the S side of Stewart

Sound. 

9.27 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents set N on the rising

tide and S on the falling tide. They attain a spring rate of 1.5

knots in the narrow parts of the sound. The N current attains a

rate of 0.3 knot, and the S current a rate of 2 knots, S of Comp

Bay, a small bight on the N side of the N entrance. The tidal

currents close N of Takla Oyster Point set SW on the rising tide

and NE on the falling tide. During the strength of the Southwest Monsoon, the SW current is very weak, but the NE current attains a rate of 2 knots. 

9.27 Sound Island (12°58'N., 92°59'E.) is an irregular-shaped island lying in the entrance of Stewart Sound. Above and belowwater rocks extend about 0.5 mile NE from Simpson Point, the

NE end of the island. Mitchell Point, the SE extremity of the island, is fringed by a drying reef that extends 0.3 mile SSW

from it. Square Rock, 4.3m high and prominent, lies on the W

side of the outer part of the reef. A lighted beacon lies on

Square Rock.

9.27 Jones Point, the SW extremity of Sound Island, is fringed by

a drying reef on which there is a ridge of rocks extending 0.4

mile S to SE. A rock, that dries 2.4m, lies near the end of this

ridge. 

9.28 Stewert Sound—North entrance.—The N entrance

of the sound lies between Cadell Point and Simpson Point. Elphin Patch, which lies near the middle of the entrance, has a

depth of less than 1.8m near its center. Morland Rock, which

dries 2.4m, lies about 0.4 mile SW of Cadell Point. Shoal

ground, with a least depth of 4.6m near its outer end, extends

about 0.3 mile SSE from the rock. 

9.28 Oliver Island (13°00'N., 93°00'E.), 59m high, lies 1 mile W

of Simpson Point. There are considerable depths in the channel

between it and Sound Island. 

9.28 Sunk Reef (13°00'N., 92°59'E.), which dries 0.6m and

which has a 5.5m patch on its NW side, lies 0.8 mile NW of

Oliver Island. 

9.28 A group of drying rocks lie about 1 mile W of Oliver Island.

An area of shoal ground extends about 0.3 mile SW from the

group. 

9.28 Oyster Island (12°59'N., 92°59'E.), 1.2m high, lies 0.8 mile

WSW of Oliver Island. 

9.28 Stewart Island (13°01'N., 92°56'E.), which lies in a shallow

bay on the NW side of the sound, is covered with jungle

growth. A drying mudbank joins the NW side of the island

with North Andaman Island. 

9.28 Marsack Shoals (12°57'N., 92°57'E.) consist of two small

patches that lie close together at the S end of the channel, between Sound Island and North Andaman Island. The E patch

has a least depth of 5.9m and the W patch a least depth of

2.7m. 

9.29 Stewert Sound—South entrance.—The S entrance

of the sound lies between Mitchell Point and Cape Vestal,

about 5 miles SSW. Five Fathom Patch, a fairly large shoal

with depths of 9.1 to 16.5m, lies about in the middle of the S

entrance. Convict Patch, with depths of less than 5.5m, lies 1
Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 263

Pub. 173

mile N of Cape Vestal. Some rocks, with depths of less than

1.8m, lie on the shoal. A 11m shoal lies about 2 miles ENE of

the same point. 

9.29 Aves Island (12°55'N., 92°57'E.), 63m high and conspicuous, lies about 2 miles SW of Sound Island. A drying reef connects the island to Aves Point to the WSW. 

9.29 Takla Oyster Point (12°55'N., 92°55'E.), about 1.5 miles

WNW of Aves Point, is the N end of a promontory which

forms the E side of a shallow bay. The E entrance of Austin

Strait lies at the head of this bay. 

9.29 A shoal, with a least depth of 3.2m, lies almost 0.5 mile E of

Takla Oyster Point. 

9.29 Berkeley Island Group (12°56'N., 92°54'E.) consists of Orchid Island, Curlew Island, Egg Island, and Dottrel Island,

which lie in the approach to Bacon Bay to the W and NW of

Takla Oyster Point. All except Dottrel Island are identifiable

from abeam of Square Rock. Several prominent trees, some

wooden huts, together with a red-roofed bungalow on its NE

side, makes Curlew Island identifiable. 

9.29 A shoal, having a depth of 12.8m, lies almost 0.3 mile S of

the S end of Orchid Island. A rock, which uncovers 2.1m, lies

0.3 mile E of Curlew Island. A shoal, with depths of 7.8 to

14.6m, extends about 0.6 mile NW from the NW end of Orchid

Island. 

9.30 Bacon Bay (12°57'N., 92°54'E.) is entered between

Brown Point and Orchid Island, about 0.3 mile WSW. The bay

is sheltered from all winds and its E part is clear of all dangers

up to within 0.2 mile of the shore. A detached 13.2m patch lies

about midway between Brown Point and Orchid Point.

9.30 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in suitable depths in

any part of Steward Sound. Anchorage can be taken in Bacon

Bay in all seasons. 

9.30 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 14.6 to 16.5m, almost 1

mile N of Oliver Island and in the channel between Sound Island and North Andaman Island, about 2 miles N of Jones

Point. These anchorages are partially open to the NE.

9.30 Vessels calling at Mayabunder Settlement, on the NW side

of Takla Oyster Point, can anchor, in a depth of 18.3m, mud,

with Egg Island bearing 272°, distant 0.5 mile and the S point

of Orchid Island bearing 023°. Ample depths are available for

anchoring elsewhere in this vicinity. Small vessels with local

knowledge can anchor farther W of Dottrel Island but caution

is advised. 

9.30 Ample depths are available for anchoring at the head of Bacon Bay, or about 0.4 mile off the E shore. 

9.30 Directions.—Vessels coming from the N and intending to

enter by the S entrance, should pass about 0.8 mile off Square

Rock and then steer for Orchid Island on a course of 284°. 

9.30 Vessels proceeding to the anchorage off Mayabunder Settlement should proceed as directed above until Egg Island bears

272°, and then alter course to this bearing which will lead to

the anchorage. Egg Island should not be brought to bear more

than 272°, until well clear of the 3.2m patch E of Takla Oyster

Point. 

9.30 Vessels proceeding to the anchorage in Bacon Bay should

pass about 0.8 mile off Square Rock, keeping Orchid Island

bearing 284° until the summit of Aves Island bears 135°. Then

a course of 315°, with Aves Island astern, leads into Bacon

Bay, passing midway between Orchid Island and Brown Point.

This course passes over the previously-mentioned 13.2m patch.

When the summit of Ray Hill bears 050°, course can be altered

for the anchorage at the head of the bay. 

9.30 Vessels coming from the S should keep Ray Hill bearing

322° until Orchid Island is seen about midway between Aves

Island and Jones Point, bearing 287°. The directions given

above can then be followed. 

9.30 Mayabunder Settlement (12°56'N., 92°55'E.) lies on the

NW side of Takla Oyster Point. 

9.30 The local district administrator resides in a conspicuous

white house with a red roof on the NE side of the point. Two

conspicuous high trees lie about 0.3 mile S of the house and the

ruins of a sawmill lie on the NW side of the point. 

9.30 A short wooden jetty, with a depth of 2.4m alongside its

head, extends from the NW side of Takla Oyster Point. In

1985, the jetty was extended 57m NE. 

Middle Andaman Island and Baratang Island—

East Coasts

9.31 The coast between Cape Vestal and Cape Strachan,

about 9 miles SSE, is high and clear of off-lying dangers. The

latter projection forms the N entrance point of Cuthbert Bay.

Mount Diavolo, 512m high, lies about 3.5 miles W of the same

point. Between Cuthbert Bay and Coxon Point, about 13 miles

to the S, the coast continues to be high. 

9.31 Rangat Bay (12°29'N., 92°58'E.) is entered between Coxon

Point and Johns Point, about 0.8 mile to the S. Both points are

bold and bluffy.

9.31 A shoal, with a depth of 7.3m near its outer end, extends

about 2.3 miles E from Coxon Point. The inner part of this

shoal has several detached heads, with depths which range

from 3 to 4.9. A rock, which dries 1.2m, lies among these

heads about 0.8 mile ENE of Coxon Point. 

9.31 A drying reef extends about 0.5 mile SE from Johns Point.

9.31 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 6.4 to 9.1m, midway

between the entrance points of Rangat Bay. Local knowledge is

required because the depths shoal rapidly within the entrance

points.

9.31 Between Johns Point and a 117m promontory on Baratang

Island, about 17 miles SSW, the coast is bordered by numerous

islands and dangers and indented by many bays. Between the

promontory and North Point, the SE end of Bartang Island,

about 9 miles SW, the coast is indented by many reef fringed

bays and backed inland by hilly terrain. North Point forms the

N side of the S entrance of Andaman Strait. 

9.31 Long Island (12°24'N., 92°57'E.) densely wooded and

fringed by shoal ground, lies about 2.5 miles SSW of Johns

Point. Its W coast is joined to Middle Andaman Island by a

shallow flat. 

9.31 Long Island is the N of a chain of islands, reefs, and other

dangers which extend S for about 15 miles from a position

about 2.5 miles S of Johns Point. The islands are separated

from each other, and from Middle Andaman Island and Baratang Island, by fairly narrow shoal channels. Small vessels with

local knowledge can find shelter in some of these bays. Elphinstone Harbor, which provides sheltered anchorage, lies close to

the E entrance of Homfray Strait, which separates Middle Andaman Island and Bartang Island.

9.31 Guitar Island (12°21'N., 92°55'E.) lies about 0.8 mile SSW
264 Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 

Pub. 173

of Long Island and is joined to Middle Andaman Island by a

shallow flat. Cape Dalrymple forms the S end of an islet, 75m

high, which lies close S of Guitar Island. Round Island lies

about 183m W of the SW end of Guitar Island. 

9.31 A shoal, with a least depth of 2.7m, lies about 0.8 mile SSE

of Cape Dalrymple. A detached patch, with a least depth of

7.6m, lies about 1 mile SSE of the same cape. 

9.31 Nancowry Ledge (12°20'N., 92°56'E.), which has depths of

less than 1.8m, lies about 1.3 miles E of Cape Dalrymple. 

9.32 Anderson Rock (12°26'N., 92°59'E.), which dries

0.3m, lies 1 mile E of the N end of Long Island.

9.32 Campbell Shoal (12°25'N., 93°04'E.) lies about 6 miles

ESE of the N end of Long Island and has a least depth of 5.5m,

rock. It lies on the E side of an irregular bank about 2.8 miles

long and 1.3 miles wide, which has depths which range 16.5 to

36.6m. 

9.32 Headlam Patch (12°24'N., 92°59'E.), with a least depth of

3.7m, lies about 2.5 miles SSE of the N end of Long Island.

Depths of 5.5 to 16.5m surround this danger. 

9.32 An extensive shoal, with a depth of 4.6m near its SW end

and a depth of 8.2m near its NE end, lies between 5.3 and 7.8

miles E of Cape Smith, the S end of Long Island. A detached

shoal, about 1 mile in extend, lies with its shallowest depth of

3.7m, about 6.3 miles ESE of Cape Smith. 

9.32 Ostmaston Shoal (12°21'N., 92°58'E.), with a least depth of

3m, lies about 1.8 miles E of Cape Smith. 

9.32 North Passage Island (12°16'N., 92°56'E.), irregular in

shape, high, and wooded, lies 3 miles S of Long Island. Cape

Portman is the NE extremity of the island. The E side of the island is fronted by dangerous foul ground which extends up to 2

miles offshore. Balfour Reef extends about 1 mile N from the

NW end of the island. Merk Bay, which lies between Balfour

Reef and the promontory to the E, has depths of 18.3 to 27.4m. 

9.32 Strait Island (12°13'N., 92°56'E.) lies about 0.8 mile SSE of

North Passage Island. The intervening passage between the

two is foul. The N and E sides of Strait Island are fringed by

reefs. Shoals and foul ground, with depths of less than 1.6m,

extend up to 1.3 miles E of the island. Shoals, with depths of 3

to 4.9m, extend about 0.5 mile SSW from Cross Point, the S

end of the island. A 8.7m shoal lies 2.5 miles ENE of the same

point. 

9.32 A light is shown on the W side and at the S end of Strait Island, close N of Cross Point. 

9.32 Colebrooke Island (12°14'N., 92°54'E.), of irregular shape

and densely wooded, lies close W of the SW part of North Passage Island. 

9.32 Tidal currents in the channel between Long Island and Guitar Island, in the approach to Elphinstone Harbor, and at the

various anchorages are weak. They become somewhat stronger, however, after consistent E winds. Strong tidal currents

and eddies are experienced in Homfray Strait.

9.32 A channel, with depths of 6.4 to 36.6m, leads between Long

Island and Guitar Island to the jetties on the SW side of the

former island. A narrow channel, with depths of 6.4 to 12.8m,

leads NNW to the entrance of several shallow creeks that lead

into the interior of Middle Andaman Island.

9.33 Homfray Strait (12°15'N., 92°52'E.), an intricate

rocky channel connecting Elphinstone Harbor with Port Anson, separates Middle Andaman Island from the Baratang Islands. Depths in the fairway are not less than 5m, except near

the E entrance where the depths over the bar is very shallow. 

9.33 The channel between North Passage Island and Strait Island

is shallow and foul.

9.33 The channel between North Passage Island and Colebrooke

Island is about 0.5 mile wide and has depths of 5.5 to 18.3m.

Small vessels with local knowledge can use this passage which

is obstructed in places by reefs and shoals.

9.33 Colebrooke Passage (12°13'N., 92°53'E.) is 0.2 mile wide

with depths of 7.3 to 18.3m. Its N part is shallow. 

9.33 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor about 0.3 mile SW of the

previously-mentioned jetty, in a depth of 8.2m, but the swinging room is restricted. 

9.33 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 23.8m, good holding

ground, about 10.3 miles W of Cross Point.

9.33 A sheltered anchorage with good holding ground can be taken, in a depth of 15.5m, near the S end of Colebrooke Passage,

with Cape Union in line bearing 065° with the center of Middle

Button Island.

9.33 Caution.—A depth of 3.2m lies a little over 1 mile W of

Cape Union; a 5m patch lies about 0.8 mile SW of the same

cape. 

9.34 Anchorage can be taken in Rogolochang Bay

(12°09'N., 92°50'E.), in depths of 7.3 to 9.1m, about 4 miles

SSW of the S entrance of Colebrooke Passage. 

9.34 A lumber camp, with a sawmill and a small woodshop, lies

on the SW side of Long Island about 0.8 mile WNW of Cape

Smith. A wooden jetty, with reported depths of 2.4 to 3m

alongside, extends from the shore about 0.4 mile N of the

camp. A trolley connects the two. 

9.34 Elphistone Harbor (12°18'N., 92°54'E.), which is formed

by the N part of the channel which separates North Passage Island from the E side of Baratang Island, is entered between

Cape Dalrymple and Cape Portman, about 1.8 miles SE. The

118m hill, which lies on the N entrance point of Homfray Strait

about 2 miles WSW of Cape Dalrymple, is a useful mark. A

prominent tree lies on Guitar Island. Depths in the entrance

range from 7.9 to 25.6m, decreasing gradually to depths of 6.1

to 18.3m within the harbor. Numerous shoals and reefs obstruct

the inner harbor, the positions of which can best be seen on the

chart. 

9.34 Mills Passage (12°15'N., 92°55'E.), between the S part of

North Passage Island and Colebrooke Island, has a least width

of 0.5 mile and depths of 5.5 to 18.3m. Numerous shoals and

reefs obstruct the passage which can only be used by small

craft with local knowledge. 

9.34 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 18.3m, good holding

ground, about 0.3 mile off the coast of North Passage Island,

with the NW point of that island bearing 029°, distant 0.5 mile. 

9.34 Diligent Strait (12°10'N., 92°57'E.) lies between North Button Island, Middle Button Island, and the Strait Islands to the

NW, and Outram Island, South Button Island, and the Wilson

Islands to the SE. 

9.34 Depths in the fairway of the strait range from 8.5 to 53m.

The shallowest depth of 8.5 lies about 1.8 miles E of the S end

of Strait Island and a 9.8m patch lies about 0.5 mile farther E.

9.35 North Button Island (12°19'N., 93°05'E.), 48m high
Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 265

Pub. 173

and reef-fringed, lies 7.5 miles E of the NE end of North Passage Island. Low, irregular cliffs lie at its E end. The W end of

the island descends abruptly to a tree-covered sand spit.

Shoals, as defined by the 10m curve, extend about 1 mile E and

0.3 mile W from the island. The N side is clear of dangers, but

the bottom is rocky. The E and W ends of the island should be

given a wide berth when passing. A light is shown on the NW

side of North Button Island. 

9.35 Anchorage can be taken by small vessels with local knowledge close off the reef on the S side of the island. 

9.35 Middle Button Island (12°17'N., 93°02'E.), 50m high, lies

about 3 miles SW of North Button Island. The N end is cliffy,

but the SW point terminates in a short sandspit with a few low

rocks off it. Shoals, with depths of 8.2m, extend about 1.5

miles NNE from the N end of the island. A rocky ridge and

shoal ground extends about the same distance SW from the island. A light is shown on the NE side of Middle Button Island. 

9.35 Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor S of Middle

Button Island clear of the shoals. 

9.35 Outram Island, 3.5 miles S of North Button Island, will be

described under the Ritchies Archipelago in paragraph 9.36.

9.35 South Button Island (12°13'N., 93°02'E.), about 3 miles S

of Middle Button Island, is 36m high and formed of large

steep-to rocks on all sides. A rocky head, with a depth of

10.1m, lies about 1 mile E and coral patch, with a depth of

3.2m, lies about 1 mile SE of the island. A light is shown from

South Button Island. 

9.35 Two Fathoms Rock (12°10'N., 92°58'E.) lies about 4.8

miles SW of South Button Island. 

9.35 Directions.—Vessels approaching from the N should shape

course, from a position about 2 miles E of North Button Island,

to pass about 0.5 mile NW of South Button Island. When that

island bears about 135°, course should be altered to the S until

the S side of the island is in line bearing 055° with the NW extremity of Outram Island. This range should be kept on that

bearing astern until the N point of Nicholson Island is seen

open W of the W end of Wilson Island, bearing about 192°.

Course can then be altered to pass about 1.5 miles W of the latter island. 

9.35 Vessels approaching from the S side should steer for Strait

Island until the S side of South Button Island is in line bearing

055° with the NW extremity of Outram Island. This range

should be steered until the E end of Middle Button Island bears

022°. Course should then be altered to pass NW of South Button Island and midway between Middle Island and North Button Island, and Outram Island. 

The Ritchies Archipelago 

9.36 The Ritchies Archipelago (12°03'N., 93°02'E.) consists of ten islands lying between the parallels of 12°16'N. and

11°47'N, with the N end of the group being separated from

Baratang Island by Diligence Strait. All of the islands are

heavily wooded.

9.36 Outram Island (12°15'N., 93°06'E.), the N island of the

group, is reef-fringed on all except its W side and contains

Outram Harbor in a deep indentation along its N coast. Some

low rocks lie on the reefs which fringe West Point, the W entrance point of the harbor. Shoal ground extends 0.8 mile NE

from this point, and 0.6 mile NNE from East Point, the E entrance point of the harbor. 

9.36 Outram Harbor (12°15'N., 93°06'E.) provides good shelter

from S winds. Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor,

in a depth of 18.3m, near the middle of the harbor, with the N

end of Middle Button Island in line bearing 290° with West

Point. 

9.36 Charka Juru, the strait separating Outram Island from Henry

Lawrence Island to the S, has considerable depths throughout

its length. Shoal ground extends about 0.8 mile S from South

Point, the S end of Outram Island. Once this shoal has been

cleared, a mid-channel course will lead through the strait. 

9.36 The W side of Henry Lawrence Island rises steeply to a ridge

about 137m high. A narrow reef fringes the island. 

9.36 Kwangtung Strait (12°06'N., 93°04'E.), the channel between Henry Lawrence Island and John Lawrence Island, has

considerable depths in the fairway. The drying reefs which

fringe both shores are usually visible. 

9.36 Rocky Heads lie about 0.5 mile N of Briton Point, the N end

of John Lawrence Island. Shoals and foul ground extend 1.5

miles NW from the NW coast of the island.

9.36 Wilson Island (12°08'N., 92°59'E.) lies W of the N part of

John Lawrence Island and is separated from it by a narrow

channel. Round Hill, which rises about 1 mile within the NW

point of Wilson Island, is 216m high. Foul ground, marked by

numerous coral heads, extends from the NW point of Wilson

Island to Briton Point on John Lawrence Island.

9.36 Nicholson Island (12°06'N., 92°58'E.), separated from Wilson Island by a channel about 1 mile wide, rises to a height of

97m in its N part. The W side of the island is fringed by prominent steep-to white reefs. A reef extends about 0.3 mile S from

the S end of the island. A shoal, with a depth of 3.2m, lies close

S of this reef.

9.36 Sir William Peel Island (12°05'N., 93°00'E.), low and bordered by dense mangroves, lies 0.5 mile E of Nicholson Island.

The intervening channel is available only to small craft with local knowledge. The channel between this island and Wilson Island to the N is narrow and foul. 

Havelock Island is the largest of the Ritchies Archipelago.

There is an L-shaped jetty, with a dolphin close SE of its head,

situated at Jetty Point, the NE extremity of the island; there is a

depth of 5.2m at its head.

9.37 Tadma Juru (12°03'N., 92°59'E.), narrow and deep,

separates Sir William Peel Island from Havelock Island to the

S. Both sides of the channel are fringed by shoals which extends up to 0.2 mile offshore in places. A detached patch lies

on the S side of the channel, about 0.5 mile E of Stowe Point

the N end of Havelock Island. Stowe Point is marked by a beacon. Yulutang, a conspicuous hill 167m high, lies 2.8 miles SE

of the point. 

9.37 Rosamund Shoal (12°04'N., 92°58'E.), a narrow coral ledge

almost awash, lies about 0.5 mile N of the N end of Havelock

Island. The ledge is difficult to make out. 

9.37 Directions.—Vessels approaching Tadma Juru from the W,

should pass S of Rosamund Shoal on a 090° course. When

about 0.2 mile from the SW coast of Sir William Peel Island,

course should be altered to 123°, maintaining a mid-channel

course. When close to the E entrance of the strait, course

should be altered to 073° toward the reef fringing the SW coast

of John Lawrence Island. This steep-to reef is usually visible.
266 Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 

Pub. 173

When close to the edge of this reef, course should be altered to

147°, which leads along the W edge of the reef and then E of

Pilot Reef, which lies 1 mile S of the S end of John Lawrence

Island. 

9.37 Between Stowe Point and Doone Point, about 3.8 miles SW,

the W coast of Havelock Island is slightly indented by an open

reef-fringed bight. Anchorage can be taken off Jalebao, about

2.3 miles SSW of Stowe Point. 

9.37 Between Doone Point and the S end of Havelock Island,

about 9.8 miles SE, the coastal reef extends up to 0.5 mile offshore. Havelock, 1.3 miles SE of Doone Point, is a conspicuous hill, 164m high, at the W end of a bay. White cliffs, about

27m high, line the S end of the island. Sail Rock, 6.1m high,

lies close off the S end of the island and appears as a sail on

some bearings. 

9.37 The N side of Outram Island and Charka Juru, the channel

separating it from Henry Lawrence Island, have been previously described in paragraph 9.36. 

9.37 The E coast of Outram Island is fringed by a reef which extends up to 0.3 mile offshore. As previously stated, coral heads

and foul ground extend about 0.8 mile S from the S end of Outram Island.

9.37 The E coast of Henry Lawrence Island is low, irregular, and

bordered by dense mangroves. Reefs extend up to 1 mile offshore in places. A densely-wooded islet lies on this reef about

4 miles S of the S end of Outram Island. 

9.38 Inglis Island (12°08'N., 93°07'E.) lies about 0.8 mile

E of the wooded islet and is fringed by a drying reef on all except its NW side. This reef extends up to 0.5 mile off the NE

coast, where it terminates in two rocks, each about 1.2m high.

Small portions of the N and S points of the island have been

detached by the action of the sea and appear as islets at high

tide. 

9.38 Inglis Shoals (12°06'N., 93°08'E.), two detached coral

patches with depths of 6.9m and 8.7m, lie about 0.8 mile S and

1.8 miles SSE of the S end of Inglis Island. 

9.38 During NE winds, sheltered anchorage can be taken, in a

depth of 12.8m, off a sandy bay, close NW of Wreck Point, the

S extremity of Henry Lawrence Island. 

9.38 Tadma Bay (12°03'N., 93°02'E.) lies W of Runnymeade

Point, the S end of John Lawrence Island, and between it and

Sir William Peel Island. It forms the S entrance of Paranga Juru, a narrow channel separating the two islands. It also forms

the E entrance of Tadma Juru, which has been previously described in paragraph 9.37. 

9.38 Pilot Reef (12°01'N., 93°02'E.), about 1 mile S of Runnymeade Point, has a least depth of 2.7m. A narrow coral reef,

as defined by the 10m curve, extends about 1 mile S from Pilot

Reef. 

9.38 Havelock Island, S of Sir William Peel Island, is reeffringed. Foul ground extends up to 1.3 miles E from its NE

coast to within a short distance of the ridge which extends S

from Pilot Reef. 

9.38 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in Tadma Bay, sheltered from all except S winds. 

9.38 Directions.—Vessels approaching Tadma Bay from the S

and E can clear Pilot Reef and the foul ground E of Havelock

Island by bringing the W extremity of Sir Hugh Rose Island

bearing 173°, and just open E of the E extremity of Neill Island. When the extremity of the reef extending S from Runnymeade Point is seen, course can be shaped to the NW into

Tadma Bay.

9.39 Minerva Ledge (12°04'N., 93°09'E.), a detached

rocky ledge with a least depth of 6.9m, lies about 4.5 miles

ESE of Wreck Point. It lies near the outer edge of a bank, as

defined by the 40m curve, that extends about 5 miles E from

the S end of Henry Lawrence Island. 

9.39 Vibart Shoal (11°59'N., 93°08'E.), narrow and steep-to on

its E side, lies centered about 6.3 miles SE of Runnymeade

Point. Depths over this shoal range from 16.4 to 18.3m. 

9.39 Nancowry Strait (11°52'N., 93°03'E.), between Havelock

Island and Neill Island to the S, has depths of 18.2m in the fairway. A small coral patch, with a least depth of 12.8m, lies in

the W part of the strait about 0.8 mile N of the NW end of Neill

Island. Vessels should pass N of this danger. 

9.39 Neill Island (11°50'N., 93°03'E.) rises to a height of 101m at

Nipple Hill, the conspicuous NE end of the island. White cliffs

border the seaward face of this end of the island. A rock, 10m

high, lies about 91m off this point. Some detached patches,

with depths of less than 5.5m, lie off the N coast. Neill Island

Pier projects NE between drying reefs on the N side of the island and is marked at its root by a flagstaff. Murugan Temple,

13m high and conspicuous, lies 0.1 mile SW of the pier. A reef

extends up to 0.5 mile off the S end of the island and is usually

marked by heavily breaking seas. The S point of the W coast of

Neill Island is formed by dark cliffs about 12.2m high. 

9.39 Sir Hugh Rose Island (11°47'N., 93°05'E.), the S island of

the Ritches Archipelago group, lies about 2 miles SE of Neill

Island and is densely wooded. The NW side of the island rises

to a height of 73m. Some prominent yellow cliffs, about 24m

high, border the NE point of the island. 

9.39 The island has been reported to be a good radar target up to

14 miles. 

9.39 Several patches, with depths of 5.5 to 11.9m, lie in the channel between Neill Island and Sir Hugh Rose Island. Vessels are

advised not to use this channel because the bottom is very uneven.

9.39 Deep-draft vessels passing SW of Sir Hugh Rose Island

should avoid a bank with depths of 16.5 to 18.3m, which lies

between 1.5 and 2.5 miles SW of the island. 

9.40 Andaman Strait (12°04'N., 92°47'E.), referring to

the E entrance of that strait, lies between North Point, a 76m

promontory forming the SE extremity of Baratang Island, and

South Point, the NE extremity of South Andaman Island, about

2 miles SSW. From the 76m promontory the coast extends

about 1.8 miles WSW to Entrance Hill, the N point of the inner

entrance of the strait. This 30m high conical hill is conspicuous. 

9.40 Andaman Strait Light is shown from the summit on North

Point. 

9.40 The general width of the strait ranges from 0.2 to 0.3 mile,

but narrows to a width of 73m in places. 

9.40 The strait has moderate depths, except for two ridges which

span the strait, and over which the least depth is 5.5m. A bar,

over which there are depths of 3.3 to 3.9m, obstructs the entrance from a position about 0.5 mile NE of Entrance Hill and

South Point. The navigable width of the bar is about 183m. A
Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 267

Pub. 173

vessel with a draft of 4m has passed through the strait. The bottom throughout is of mud and sand.

9.40 A small isolated, rocky ledge topped by a 4m high prominent

rock on it, lies about 0.5 mile SE of the 76m promontory. A detached shoal, with a least depth of 2.7m, lies about 0.5 mile S

of the promontory. 

9.40 A coral reef, which dries in places, extends up to 0.5 mile

offshore between North Point and Entrance Hill. 

9.40 A ledge of drying coral extends almost 0.5 mile NE from

South Point. The coast between this point, and the S point of

the inner entrance of the strait about 1.5 miles W, is bordered

by foul ground which extends up to 0.3 mile offshore. 

9.40 Oral Kaicha (12°11'N., 92°46'E.), a small island which lies

about midway between the E and W entrance of the strait, can

be passed on either side but the E side is preferred. 

9.40 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 16.5 to 18.3m, mud,

about 1.3 miles NNE of South Point.

9.40 The coast between South Point and Wedge Point, about 1.5

miles to the S, is fringed by a drying reef that extends almost

0.3 mile offshore. 

9.40 Smythe Rock (12°03'N., 92°48'E.), the outermost danger off

this section of coast, lies about 1 mile E of South Point and has

a least depth of 3.2m. 

9.40 Whitehouse Rock, which has a least depth of 3.7m, lies 1

mile E of Wedge Point. A shoal, with a least depth of 1.2m, lies

midway between this rock and the point. 

9.40 A rock, barely above water, lies 0.5 mile SE of South Point.

Rocks, which dry up to 1.2m, lie about 0.4 mile N and 0.3 mile

NNE of Wedge Point. 

9.40 Wedge Rock, 8.5m high and prominent, lies close S of

Wedge Point.

9.40 Port Meadows (12°01'N., 92°46'E.) is entered between

Wedge Point and Cape Persain, a little over 1 mile SW. The

shores of the port are reef fringed and the low land is covered

with mangroves. Cape Persain is the NE extremity of a fairly

high hill which lies on a promontory separated from the coast

by mangroves. 

9.41 Duncan Island (12°01'N., 92°47'E.), 90m high and

densely wooded, is connected to the shore W of Wedge Point

by a drying shoal. 

9.41 The entrance channel, which lies between Duncan Island and

Cape Persain has a least depth of 20.1m. 

9.41 The E and S sides of Duncan Island are fringed by abovewater and sunken rocks which extend up to 183m offshore. A

prominent 5.5m high rock lies close off the SW side of the island. A drying rock lies 137m SW of this rock.

9.41 The E side of the promontory forming Cape Persain is fronted by a drying reef that extends about 0.4 mile offshore. This

reef only extends about 183m offshore, E and N of Cape Persain. Some drying rocks lie on the reef.

9.41 A detached 4.5m patch lies about 0.2 mile E of Cape Persain. 

9.41 A two-pronged pinnacle rock, with a least depth of 5m, lies

on the S side of the approach to Port Meadows about 0.7 mile

SE of the summit of Duncan Island. A dangerous wreck,

marked by a buoy, lies on this rock.

9.41 The Patch, a shoal with a least depth of 7.3m, lies about 0.8

mile ESE of Cape Persain. 

9.41 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 16.5 to

18.3m, about 0.2 mile W of the W point of Duncan Island. Anchorage can also be taken, in a depth of 14.6m, in the center of

the SW part of the harbor, about 0.6 mile W of Cape Persain. 

9.41 Directions.—Vessels should keep Cape Persain bearing

276° until the E end of Duncan Island is in line bearing 012°

with Wedge Point. A course of about 292° then leads in midchannel through the entrance. When Wedge Rock becomes visible, course can be altered to 000° for the E anchorage, or to

260° for the previously-mentioned W anchorage. 

9.41 A jetty extends from the W side of the promontory, about 0.3

mile W of Cape Persain. A lumber camp lies near the inner end

of the jetty. 

9.41 The coast between Cape Persian and Point Crawley, about

0.8 mile S, and then to Kotara Point, about 1.5 miles farther

SW, is fringed by a drying reef which extends about 0.5 mile

offshore. Some drying rocks lie on this reef. 

9.41 Kotara Anchorage (11°59'N., 92°45'E.) lies between Kotara Point and the N side of Kyd Island, about 0.8 mile to the S.

This island is 237m high and rounded. 

9.41 A least depth of 6.4m exists in the fairway, with depths of 8.2

to 14.6m being found in the entrance. 

9.41 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 6.4 to 7.3m, mud,

about 0.5 mile SW of Kotara Point. Small vessels with local

knowledge can anchor, in depths of 7.3 to 8.2m, mud, in the

outer part of an inlet about 1.5 miles W of Kotara Point. 

9.41 Shoal Bay (11°56'N., 92°47'E.) entered between the SE side

of Kyd Island and Cape Masy, about 1.5 miles to the SE, is

shoal over most of its area. 

9.41 Depths of 6.4m are found in the narrow entrance channel decreasing to a depth of 5.5m about 1.5 miles within the entrance

and to a depth of 1.8m at the entrance of Shoal Bay Creek.

9.41 The coast between Cape Masy and North Point, about 14.5

miles to the S, is bold and free from dangers. The land rises to

form a broken ridge which parallels the coast at a distance of

about 2 miles. Koyob, a peak which rises to a height of 459m,

lies 6.8 miles N of North Point. 

Port Blair (11°41'N., 92°45'E.)

World Port Index No. 49720

9.42 Port Blair is entered between North Point and South

Point, about 2.3 miles to the S. The port consists of an inlet 4

miles long which is entered through two channels, one on each

side of Ross Island. The port is divided into an exposed outer

harbor and a landlocked inner harbor. The port is the headquarters of the Chief Commissioner, who is representative of the Indian Government for the Andaman Islands and the Nicobar

Islands. The principal administrative offices lie at the village of

Aberdeen on the S side of the harbor about 1 mile WNW of

South Point. The port officer also resides at Aberdeen. Port

Blair is the site of an Indian Naval Base, but has little commercial importance. 

9.42 Winds—Weather.—Port Blair has a mean temperature of

28°C.

9.42 Tides—Currents.—The currents in Port Blair are weak and

 Port Blair Home Page

http://www.and.nic.in/harbour.htm
268 Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 

Pub. 173

are affected by the prevailing winds. The rates rarely exceed 1

knot. During the Northeast Monsoon, the current sets S and

during the Southwest Monsoon it sets between N and E. Heavy

seas and swells occur in the outer harbor during the Northeast

Monsoon. The inner harbor is sheltered and experiences no sea

or swell. The mean range of the tide is 1.4m and the spring

range is 2m. 

9.42 Depths—Limitations.—Considerable depths exist in the N

entrance channel between North Point and Ross Island. A 5.2m

shoal lies in this channel about 0.4 mile ESE of Atalanta Point.

9.42 Depths of over 18.3m exist in the outer harbor and depths of

5.5 to 27.4m exist in the inner harbor. 

9.42 Depths at the anchorages range from 12.8 to 16.5m. Depths

alongside the berths range from 2.1 to 5.8m. An examination

anchorage area is shown on the chart. 

9.42 Vessels up to 300m long, with a maximum draft of 8m, can

be accommodated. 

9.42 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 200 nrt.

The pilot boards 0.8 mile N of Ross Island. 

9.42 Regulations.—Vessels should send an ETA message 24

hours in advance to Port Blair Port Radio, stating: 

1. Vessel name.

2. Port of departure.

3. Destination.

4. ETA.

5. Length, beam, maximum draft, and gross tons.

6. Speed.

7. Number of people on board suffering from dangerous

or contagious diseases, if any.

8. Type and quantity of cargo.

9. Agent’s name and requirements, if any.

9.42 Vessels should make VHF contact with the port when within

15 miles of the port. 

9.42 Signals.—Storm signals are displayed at the light station on

Ross Island; the Indian General System is used. Further information on these storm signals may be found in Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) South Atlantic Ocean and

Indian Ocean under “India—Signals.”

9.42 Contact Information.—Pilots, port, and port radio contact

information are given in the table titled Port Blair—Contact

Information. 

9.42 Caution.—A submarine exercise area is located 35 miles

SSE of Port Blair. A good lookout should be exercised in this

vicinity.

9.43 Ross Island (11°41'N., 92°46'E.) divides the entrance

of Port Blair into a N channel and a S channel. The island is

roughly triangular in shape and lies about 0.4 mile NE of South

Point. The former residence of the Chief Commissioner lies at

an elevation of 45m on the highest part of the island about 1.5

miles SSE of North Point. A dark stone building with battlements, about 17m high, lies on the N end of the island. 

9.43 A reef fringes the island on all except a small part of its W

side. A shoal as defined by the 6m curve, extends about 0.3

mile NW from the NW end of the island. 

9.43 Storm signals are displayed from the lighthouse on the NE

corner of the above-mentioned dark stone building. 

9.43 The following objects on the S side of the outer part of the

harbor are conspicuous:

1. The mast and tower on Atalanta Point.

2. A temple 0.8 mile S of Atalanta Point.

3. Mount Haughton, 155m high, about 1.5 miles S of

Atalanta Point.

4. Flagstaff Hill Tree, with an elevation of 122m, a little

over 1 mile SSW of Atalanta Point

9.44 Port Blair—North shore.—North Point (11°42'N.,

92°46'E.) is bordered by shoal ground, as defined by the 10m

curve, which extends almost 0.3 mile S from it.

9.44 North Bay, entered between North Point and Perseverence

Point, almost 1 mile SW, extends about 1 mile inland and is

bordered on its W and N side by foul ground. Mount Harriet,

about 1.8 miles NW of North Point rises steeply to a height of

364m. Some buildings lie close to its summit. 

9.44 Semiramis Bay (11°42'N., 92°44'E.), small and deep, is entered between Lime Kilns Point and Command Point, almost 1

mile WNW. A pier extends from the head of the bay. Command Point is 4m high; a light is shown from a white concrete

tower, 6m high, on the point. A beacon lies 91m N of the light. 

9.44 Command Bay lies on the W side of Command Point. The

settlement of Hope Town lies at the head of the bay. The wharf

at Hope Town is 100m long, with an alongside depth of 8m. 

9.44 Shore Point, the W entrance point of Bamboo Flat Bay, lies

about 1 mile W of Command Point. Some buildings lie at the

head of the bay. A small jetty extends from the shore in the

NW corner of the bay. The W shore of the bay is fringed by

shoal ground which extends about 0.3 mile offshore. 

9.45 Port Blair—South shore.—Sesostris Bay (11°40'N.,

92°46'E.) is entered between South Point and Atalanta Point,

about 0.8 mile NW. The bay is almost completely fouled by

reefs and shoals. A 3.7m patch lies on a line joining the entrance points, about 0.3 mile SSE of Atalanta Point. 

Port Blair—Contact Information

Pilots Port Port Radio Station

Call sign Pilot Station Port Blair Port Control Port Blair Port Radio

VHF VHF channels 12 and 16 VHF channels 10, 12, and 16

Radiotelephone 3632.5 kHz and 6220 kHz 2182 kHz, 3632.5 kHz, and 6220 kHz

Telephone 91-3192-232834

91-3192-233691 91-3192-233679

91-3192-233683

91-3192-232769

91-3192-233674

Facsimile 91-3192-232834 91-3192-233675 91-3192-233683
Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 269

Pub. 173

Sesostris Shoal (11°39'N., 92°01'E.), which consists of two

coral patches with depths of 2.4m, lies about 1 mile S of the S

end of Ross Island. A 5.7m patch lies close NE of the E end

and a 8.5m patch lies close S of the W end of Sesostris Shoal. 

9.45 Atalanta Point (11°40'N., 92°45'E.) is located 0.8 mile W of

Ross Island; the point is fringed by a reef extending 137m offshore. 

9.45 Phoenix Bay (11°40'N., 92°45'E.) is entered between Phoenix Point, about 0.8 mile W of Atalanta Point, and an unnamed

point about 0.4 mile to the W. Blair Reef, marked by some drying rocks, extends about 0.4 mile ENE from the latter point. A

5.2m patch lies about 183m ESE of the outer extremity of Blair

Reef. A conspicuous building lies on the W shore of Phoenix

Bay. There are numerous wrecks in the S part of the bay. 

9.45 Cholanga Jetty lies close S of Phoenix Point, with its W face

64.9m in length and having alongside depths between 3.5 and

6.1m. Fishery Jetty extends N for 0.2 mile from the S shore of

Phoenix Bay with varying depths from 1m at the inner end to

8m at the head. In 1980, works were in progress for new facilities in the SE corner of the bay. 

9.45 Blair Point (11°41'N., 92°44'E.), about 0.4 mile WNW of

the W entrance point of Phoenix Bay, is fringed by a reef which

extends about 0.1 mile offshore. A prominent 78m hill lies S of

the point. A lighted beacon stands 0.2 mile E of the group of islets close E of the drying extremity of Blair Reef. 

9.45 Chatham Island (11°41'N., 92°44'E.), about 0.3 mile N of

Blair Point, is connected to it by a conspicuous causeway.

Some buildings and a conspicuous chimney lie on the island.

9.45 Chatham Jetty lies along the N side of the island, 249m long

with varying depths between 4.8m to 7.4m alongside. Wooden

Jetty is situated at the SW side of the island with depths of 1.2

to 6m alongside. 

9.46 Port Blair—Inner port.—From Chatham Island, the

coast extends SW to Hood Point, and then S to Navy Point

forming the E side of the inner harbor. 

9.46 A conspicuous radio mast and a house lie about 0.7 mile E of

Navy Point. Navy Bay lies between Navy Point and Lewis

Point almost 1 mile SSW. 

9.46 Mangrove Bay (11°41'N., 92°43'E.), which is entered between Shore Point and Dundas Point, lies directly opposite

Hood Point. This shoal bay dries in its inner part. A conspicuous white tree lies on the W side of the bay, about 0.8 mile W

of Shore Point. 

Ranger Flat (11°41'N., 92°43'E.), having depths of less than

5.5m, extends about 0.5 mile SSE and 0.5 mile E from Shore

Point. A 4.3m rocky patch lies almost 0.5 mile S of Shore

Point. Black conical buoys are moored 0.5 mile E, 0.4 mile SE,

and 0.5 mile SSW of Shore Point and mark the SE side of the

flat. The N end of Chatham Island, bearing 087° and in line

with Perseverence Point, leads S of Ranger Flat and N of the

3.7m rocky patch. 

9.46 The head of the bay S and SW of Dundas Point is shoal and

obstructed by drying flats.

9.46 Depths—Limitations.—Jetties extend from the N and SW

sides of Chatham Island. Chatham Wharf, on the N side of

Chatham Island, is 220m long, with an alongside depth of 8m.

The wharf at Haddo, about 0.3 mile NE of Hood Point, is 690m

long, with an alongside depth of 8m. 

9.46 Anchorage.—Sheltered anchorage can be taken, in depths

of 11 to 12.8m, mud, about 0.5 mile WSW of Chatham Island,

with the NW extremity of that island bearing 068°. 

9.46 Small vessels can anchor W of Ross Island, in depths of 14.6

to 16.5m, sand, between 0.1 and 0.2 mile SW of the NW end of

Ross Island. This is a fair weather anchorage. 

9.46 Anchorage is prohibited in the vicinity of submarine cables

which extend from Ross Island to the mainland and between

Hood Point and Dundas Point. 

9.46 Directions.—Vessels entering Port Blair by way of the N

channel should pass about 0.5 mile N of Ross Island, and then

about 0.3 mile S of Perseverence Point. Shore Point, bearing

less than 293° and open the E end of Chatham Island, leads N

of Blair Reef. A mid-channel course between Chatham Island

and Command Point should then be steered. The NW end of

Chatham Island should be rounded at a distance of about 183m

and course altered to 237° which leads to the anchorage. 

9.46 Vessels from S using the S entrance channel should keep Atlantic Point bearing about 313°, in line with the light on Command Point, which leads close SW of the 5.2m patch in the

fairway, about 0.4 mile SE of Atalanta Point. The rear beacon

should not be confused with the beacon situated on the extremity of Command Point. When South Point bears 163°, the

course can be altered N to keep the point astern on that bearing.

When the N extremity of Ross Island bears 090°, the course

can be altered NW to pass midway between Blair Reef and

Perseverence Point, and then as directed above. 

9.46 Vessels bound for the anchorage W of Ross Island should

approach the S entrance channel as directed above. When

South Point bears 185°, the course should be altered N and the

point kept on that bearing astern, which leads to the anchorage. 

9.47 The E coast of South Andaman, between South Point

and Chiriya Tapu, about 11.5 miles SSW, is bold and deep,

with the 185m curve lying about 2.5 miles offshore. Sesostris

Shoal, the only coastal danger, has been previously described

in paragraph 9.45. 

9.47 Chiriya Tapu (11°29'N., 92°43'E.), the S end of South Andaman Island and the NE entrance point of Macpherson Strait,

is a prominent bare promontory with some caves at its base. A

rock, 0.3m high, lies about 0.5 mile W of the point; vessels

should not pass between this rock and the point. 

Portman Bay (11°25'N., 92°41'E.), which is open to heavy

swells during the Northeast Monsoon, indents the E coast of

Rutland Island. The head of the bay is shallow. 

9.47 Rocks, both above and below-water, extend some distance

off the S coast of Rutland Island. This coast should be given a

berth of 1.5 miles when passing. 

9.47 Investigator Rock, which lies off the W end of the S coast of

Rutland Island, has been previously described in paragraph

9.22. 

Islands, Dangers, and Passages between Rutland

Island and Little Andaman Island

9.48 Manners Strait (11°20'N., 92°42'E.) lies between the

SE coast of Rutland Island and the Cinque Islands, about 3

miles SE. A detached shoal, with a least depth of 16.5m, lies

about 4.8 miles W of the N end of North Cinque Island. 

9.48 A large shoal area, with depths of 11 to 18.3m, lies with its

shallowest part about 12.5 miles WSW of the N end of North
270 Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 

Pub. 173

Cinque Island. 

9.48 Depths in the strait, seaward of the fringing dangers, range

from 22 to 75m. 

9.48 A shoal with a depth of 5.5m, the existence of which is

doubtful, has been reported to lie 6 miles SSW from Rutland

Light on the S of the island. 

9.48 The Cinque Islands (11°17'N., 92°43'E.) are two hilly islands which are almost joined by a rocky ledge that dries 2.1m.

Two summits, 154 and 145m high, form a saddle near the N

end of North Cinque Island. A small, conical, bare hill, 89m

high, lies near the S end of the island. A promontory projects

WNW from this hill. 

9.48 North Clique Island Light is shown from its N summit. 

9.48 South Cinque Island, 166m high, has a 117m high conical

hill near its S end. 

9.48 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 12.8 to 18.3m, coral

and sand, W of the drying ledge which almost joins the two islands, with the W point of North Cinque Island bearing 349°.

Small vessels can anchor off the W side of the South Cinque

Island, in a depth of 23.8m, with the conical hill at its S end

bearing 168°, distant 1 mile. 

9.48 Passage Island (11°11'N., 92°41'E.), 85m high at its N end

but low at its S end, lies 3.3 miles SSW of South Cinque Island.

A detached rock, 1.8m high, lies about 0.3 mile N of Passage

Island. A shoal, with a least depth of 11m, lies 2 miles WSW of

the end of Passage Island. During spring tides, overfalls form

over this shoal. Small patches, with depths of 14.6 to 18.3m, lie

S and NE of this shoal. 

9.48 The channel between South Cinque Island and Passage Island is deep and clear, although tide rips occur during spring

tides. 

9.49 The Sisters (11°09'N., 92°44'E.), two small islets, lie

close together about 3.5 miles SE of Passage Island. A ledge

connects the islets and a partly drying spit extends about 0.8

mile NW from this ledge. East Sister Island is 76m high and

West Sister Island is 70.7m high. 

9.49 Duncan Passage (11°04'N., 92°40'E.) lies between The Sisters and North Brother Island, about 10 miles SSW, and is the

main channel between Little Andaman Island and Rutland Island. Depths in the fairway range from 21.9 to 36.6m.

9.49 Shoal ground, with depths of 5 to 18.3m, lies between 2

miles WNW and 3 miles NE of the N end of North Brother Island. A 12.3m patch lies about 1.5 miles E of the island. 

9.49 Patches, having depths of less than 18.3m, lie between 3.3

and 6.5 miles WNW, through 7.3 miles NNW of the N point of

North Brother Island. 

The Brothers (10°59'N., 92°40'E.), two small flat-topped islands, each 27m high, lie 10 and 14.5 miles SSW of The Sisters. Each island is marked by trees and has a lagoon in the

middle part. North Brother Island is fringed by a reef which extends 1.8 miles WNW from it. 

9.49 Foul unsurveyed ground lies between the two islands. Leeboard Ledge, a detached shoal, lies about midway between the

two islands. Foul ground extends about 5 miles WNW and 1.5

to 2 miles NNW from South Brother Island. In the latter direction, the foul ground terminates in a reef, awash, which usually

breaks. A reef lies SE of the island. A rock, awash, lies about 8

miles WNW of South Brother Island. 

9.50 Little Andaman Island (10°42'N., 92°31'E.), the S

island of the Andaman group, lies almost 28 miles S of Rutland

Island. The island appears almost level from a distance, but rises gradually to a 183m summit near its center. The island is

well-wooded.

9.50 The passage between Little Andaman Island and South

Brother Island has not been closely examined and should be

avoided. 

9.50 The low N side of Little Andaman Island is indented by Bumila Creek, which is difficult to make out until close off the entrance. A breaking reef extends almost across the entrance. 

9.50 Anchorage for small vessels with local knowledge can be

taken about 0.4 mile N of the creek entrance, in a depth of

14.6m, coral, with the entrance bearing 158°. This anchorage

should be approached from the NW because the depths to the

NE are irregular. The tidal currents set E and SE at the anchorage. A strong ebb sometimes flows out of the creek. 

9.50 Jackson Creek (10°48'N., 92°24'E.), which lies about 9

miles SW of Bumila Creek, can be identified by a conspicuous

square clump of trees near the bank which falls abruptly to the

waters edge. A reef appears to extend 0.8 mile N from the W

entrance point of the bay into which the creek discharges. 

9.50 Anchorage has been reported available, in a depth of 13.7m,

about 1 mile NNW of the entrance of the creek. Some prominent, cliffy islands lie in the NE part of the bay. 

9.50 The coast, between Jackson Creek and Sandy Point, the SW

end of Little Andaman Island about 16 miles to the S, appears

to be fringed by a reef. The coast close S of the creek is cliffy. 

9.50 A conspicuous sandy patch lies about 2 miles S of the W entrance point of the creek. A rocky reef extends about 1 mile

WSW from Sandy Point. 

9.50 A light is shown from a round concrete tower 6 miles E of

Sandy Point. 

Api Islet (10°39'N., 92°23'E.), a good landmark, lies close

offshore about 9 miles S of Jackson Creek. 

9.50 A drying reef extends almost 0.8 mile offshore from the SE

extremity of Little Andaman Island. 

9.50 The NE coast of Little Andaman Island has not been closely

examined. Hut Bay indents the SE coast of the island SE of its

summit.

9.50 Hut Bay (10°36'N., 92°35'E.) is an open bight on the E side

of Little Andaman Island. Landing can be made through a gap

in the reef close S of the village of Kwate-tu-Kwage. The Deep

Water Wharf is 225m long, with an alongside depth of 11m.

The wharf is protected by a breakwater about 0.7 mile long.

Both the wharf and the breakwater were undergoing major renovation in 2007. Clearance for entering the harbor can be obtaned from port control on VHF channel 16. 

9.51 Ten Degree Channel (10°22'N., 92°30'E.), which lies

between Little Andaman Island and the Car Nicobar, about 77

miles to the S, is deep and clear. A depth of 7.3m was reported

(1977) to lie 4 miles S of Sandy Point, the SW point of Little

Andaman Island.

9.51 South Sentinel Island (paragraph 9.8) lies NW of Little Andaman Island; Dalrymple Bank (paragraph 9.7) lies SW of Little Andaman Island. 

9.51 Invisible Bank (paragraph 9.7), Barren Island (paragraph

9.9), and Narcondam Island (paragraph 9.8), which lie E of the

Andaman Islands, have also been previously described. 
Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 271

Pub. 173

The Nicobar Islands

9.52 Car Nicobar Island (9°15'N., 92°46'E.), the N island

of the group, lies about 77 miles SSE of Little Andaman Island.

The island is densely wooded, mostly coconut trees. 

9.52 The island has been reported to be a good radar target up to

14 miles. 

9.52 Sawai Bay (9°14'N., 92°45'E.) indents the NW coast, between Keating Point and Hog Point, about 3.5 miles to SW.

Foul ground extends 1 mile N from Keating Point and 0.5 mile

N from Hog Point. Sawai Village lies 0.5 mile SE of Hog

Point. 

9.52 The tidal currents off Sawai Bay set NE on the flood tide.

9.52 An observation spot lies on a small promontory that extends

WNW from the coast about 1 mile S of Keating Point. Keating

Point Light is shown from a round metal tower on the point; a

racon and a radio beacon transmit from the tower. 

9.52 A coral patch, with a least depth of 10.1m, was reported to

lie about 0.7 mile NW of the observation spot. A 9.1m patch

lies 0.8 mile WNW of the same spot. 

9.52 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 21.9m, rock and coral

over a thin layer of sand, about 0.8 mile N of Sawi Village. Anchorage can also be taken in similar depths just over 1 mile W

of the observation spot. Small vessels with local knowledge

can anchor closer inshore off the observation spot. 

9.52 Arong Village (9°09'N., 92°43'E.) lies 3 miles S of Hog

Point. Anchorage can be taken about 0.5 mile W of the village,

in depths of 16.5 to 20.1m. Vessels should approach the anchorage with the village bearing 090°. 

9.53 Kemois Bay (9°07'N., 92°46'E.) is a slight indentation on the S side of the island. Kemois Village, fronted by a

beach, lies close W of a well-defined entrance of a creek. A village lies close E of this entrance. A reef is reported to lie about

0.2 mile offshore. 

9.53 The tidal currents set ESE on the flood at a rate of 3 knots at

springs and in the opposite direction on the ebb. Small vessels

with local knowledge can anchor, in depths of 18.3 to 21.9m,

about midway between the two villages. 

9.53 Kakana (9°07'N., 92°48'E.), a small village, lies about 2

miles SW of the SE end of Car Nicobar. 

9.53 Mus (9°14'N., 92°47'E.), the principal village on the island

and the residence of the Assistant Commissioner, lies 0.8 mile

SE of Keating Point. The village lies at the head of a small inlet; the village of Lapate lies 1 mile farther SE. A flagstaff lies

in the village of Mus. 

9.53 Anchorage can be taken off Mus, in a depth of 13.7m, about

0.4 mile offshore, with the NE extremity of Car Nicobar bearing 284°. Vessels may drag anchor because of the strong currents at springs. 

9.53 Vessels can anchor about 0.5 mile NE of Lapate Village, in a

depth of 21.9m. 

9.53 Tamalu and Perka are villages situated 4.8 and 5 miles SSE

of Keating Point.

9.53 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 25.6m, about 0.5 mile

offshore of either village. 

9.53 Malacca Village (9°10'N., 92°49'E.) lies on the S side of a

small bight, about 6 miles SE of Keating Point. A small masonry jetty, which dries completely at LW, serves as a good landmark. Two groups of beehive-shaped huts stand close N and S

of the jetty and lie out clearly in contrast to the jungle. A conspicuous two-story house, painted white and green with a red

roof, stands about 0.3 mile SSE of the jetty. A beacon stands

close SE of the two-story house. Two flagstaffs stand near the

jetty; two more stand in the village. 

9.53 A dangerous reef extends offshore close N of the jetty.

Stranded wrecks lie on this reef within 0.3 mile N and S of the

jetty head. 

9.54 The Nicobar Islands extend about 160 miles SSE

from Car Nicobar, the N island of the group. These islands are

a dependency of the Andaman Islands and are administered by

the Assistant Commissioner who resides at Mus, Car Nicobar.

The islands range from hilly and undulating to mountainous

and volcanic. There are few rivers. 

9.54 The Nicobar Islands are usually divided into three groups.

The N group consists of Car Nicobar and Batti Malv Island.

The S group consists of Great Nicobar Island and Little Nicobar Island, together with their off-lying islets. The central

group includes all the remaining islands of the Nicobar Islands.

Nancowry Harbor, between the islands of Camotra, Nancowry,

and Trinkat, is perhaps the most important and best sheltered

harbor.

9.54 The channels between the groups of islands and between the

individual islands have irregular depths, but are for the most

part deep and clear of dangers. 

The Nicobar Islands—North Group

9.55 Car Nicobar, the N island of the group, has been previously described in paragraph 9.52. 

9.55 Batti Malv Island (8°50'N., 92°51'E.), which lies about 17

miles SSE of Car Nicobar, appears wedge-shaped from the offing. This very small island rises to a densely wooded peak

about 73m high. The NW end of the island is low, but rocky

cliffs lie on the other sides. Reefs appear to extend 0.5 mile off

the NW, SW, and SE sides of the island. The 40m curve surrounding the island lies up to 5 miles SE and 2.8 miles N of the

island. A light is shown from a metal framework tower, 12m

high, on the N side of Batti Malv. 

9.55 Batti Malv Island has been reported to be a good radar target

up to 11 miles. 

9.55 Chowra Island (8°27'N., 93°04'E.), which lies about 24

miles SSE of Batti Malv Island, is generally low but rises to a

104.5m high rocky pinnacle at its S end. The island looks like a

hat from the offing. Sanenya, the principal village, lies on the

NE coast. Chowra Island has been reported to be a good radar

target up to 23 miles. 

9.55 Reefs extend about 1.5 miles from the NW side of the island.

A shoal, with a least depth of 2.4m, lies between 2.5 miles NW

and 4 miles NNW of the N point of Chowra Island. Depths of

16.5 to 18.3m are found between the shoal and the island reef. 

9.55 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 16.5 to 18.3m, abreast

of Sanenya Village. 

9.56 Tillanchang Dwip (8°31'N., 93°38'E.) lies with Cape

Winifred, its S end, about 34 miles E of Chowra Island. Maharani Peak, the highest of several peaks forming a jagged ridge

along the length of the island, lies in the center of the island

and attains an elevation of 244m. Tillanchang Dwip has been
272 Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 

Pub. 173

reported to be a good radar target up to 17 miles. 

9.56 Paira Rock (8°35'N., 93°36'E.), 86m high, lies 0.5 mile

NNW of Cape Maud, the N extremity of the island. Several detached rocks lie up to 1 mile off the W side of the island. Paria

Rock has been reported to be a good radar target up to 19

miles. 

9.56 Isle of Man (8°24'N., 93°39'E.), a detached rock, 111m

high, lies about 2.8 miles SE of Cape Winifred. A chain of needle-like rocks lie between this rock and the cape. 

9.56 An unexamined detached shoal, with a least depth of 20.1m,

lies about 9.5 miles SW of Cape Winifred. 

Castle Bay (8°27'N., 93°38'E.), which lies on the SE coast

of the island about 2 miles N of Cape Winifred, is deep and

clear in its central part. 

9.56 A rock, awash, lies about 0.3 mile S of Castle Bay Point, the

N entrance point of the bay. Foul ground, with depths of less

than 9.1m, extends about 0.2 mile S from the rock. A dangerous wreck lies in shoal water about 0.3 mile SSW of Castle

Bay Point. 

9.56 During fair weather, anchorage can be taken, in depths of

25.6 to 27.4m, with Castle Bay Point bearing 062°, distant

about 0.5 mile.

9.57 Teressa Island (Tarasa Dwip) (8°18'N., 93°07'E.),

roughly crescent-shaped and low in its central part, lies 6.5

miles SE of Chowra Island. It appears as two separate islands

from the offing. The N end of the island is 250m high. Hinam

Village lies 4.5 miles SSE of the N summit and is only visible

from seaward on a NE bearing. Laksi Village, which consists

of some huts amongst the trees, lies 4 miles SE of Hinam Village. The village is hard to identify from seaward. Bengala Village lies on the E side of the island about 2 miles S of its NE

extremity. Karawa Village lies 3.5 miles farther S. 

9.57 Reefs extend over 1 mile from the N and S ends of the island,

but less off the W coast. 

9.57 Anchorage can be taken by small vessels with local knowledge close off Hinam Village, in depths of 11 to 25.6m. Small

vessels can also anchor, in a depth of 25.6m, coral and coarse

sand, SSW of Laksi Village, about 0.5 mile seaward of the

coastal reef. 

9.57 Small vessels with local knowledge sometimes anchor, in a

depth of 45.7m, about 0.5 mile off Bengala Village, with the

NE end of the island bearing 006°, the E end bearing 146°, and

the N end of Bompoka Island bearing 115°. This is a fair

weather anchorage. 

9.57 Teressa Island has been reported to be a good radar target up

to 25 miles. 

9.57 Bompoka Island (8°14'N., 93°14'E.) lies 1.8 miles NE of

the SE tip of Teressa Island and is 204m high. The intervening

channel seaward of the fringing dangers is deep. Poahat Village

lies on the W side of the island. 

9.57 Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor about 0.3

mile offshore with the village in range 040° with the N peak of

the island. Seaward of this position the depths decrease rapidly

and caution is advised.

9.58 Camorta Island (8°09'N., 93°29'E.), separated from

Tillanchang Dwip to the NNE by a channel about 12 miles

wide, is very irregular in shape and hilly. A 52m hill lies close

to the NE end of the island; a 186m high hill lies 1 mile N of

the S end of the island. A 132m hill lies at the SE end of a

range of hills that extends 4 miles SE from a position 1 mile SE

of the NW end of the island. Mount Edgecumbe, a tree-covered

hill 109m high, lies about 4.3 miles N of the S end of the island. 

9.58 Several villages and huts lie along the shores of the island. 

9.58 The W coast is indented by bays which form Dring Harbor

and Expedition Harbor. Nancowry Island lies close S of and

overlaps the S end of Camorta Island. Nancowry Harbor, a secure landlocked inlet, lies between them. 

9.58 The NE coast of Camorta Island has not been closely examined. The SE side of the island is separated from Trinkat Island

by Beresford Channel. The E entrance of Nancowry Harbor

lies between the SE end of Camorta Island and the NE end of

Nancowry Island. The approach to this entrance leads through

Beresford Channel. 

9.58 A coral bank, with depths of 25.6 to 27.4m, lies about 6

miles ENE of Horace Point, the N extremity of Camorta Island. 

9.58 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents off the E coast of

Camorta Island, between a position about 2 miles WNW of the

NW end of that island and a position between the entrances of

Expedition and Nancowry Harbors, set S on the flood and N on

the ebb. At springs, the N current attains a rate of 3 knots about

2 to 3 miles offshore. The S current attains a rate of 0.8 to 1.3

knots. At neaps, the N current attains a rate of 0.8 to 1.3 knots

and the S current a rate of 0.3 to 0.8 knot. 

9.58 At springs, tide rips frequently occur at various places all

along the coast at variable distances offshore.

9.58 The W coast of Camorta Island, between Horace Point and

Kaihoa Village, almost 3.8 miles SW, is reef-fringed up to 0.5

mile offshore. From the village the coast extends SW for 1.3

miles and then S for 7.5 miles to Cave Point, the N entrance

point of Expedition Harbor. Dring Harbor, which is available

only to boats, is entered 2.3 miles N of Cave Point. 

9.58 A 22m shoal lies about 6.5 miles NW of Cave Point. 

9.58 The coast, between Satellite Point, the S entrance point of

Expedition Harbor, and Reef Point, the S extremity of the island, is fringed by a narrow reef. This latter point is the N entrance point of the W entrance of Nancowry Harbor. 

9.58 Perseus Reef (8°10'N., 93°27'E.) extends about 0.8 mile W

from the NW end of the island. A shoal, as defined by the 20m

curve, extends about 1.8 miles NW from the same point. 

9.59 Sanderson Rock (8°07'N., 93°27'E.), which has a

least depth of 1.5m, lies about 2.3 miles NW of the entrance of

Dring Harbor. The rock lies near the W extremity of a shallow

shoal that extends 10.3 miles offshore. 

9.59 A rocky shoal, with a least depth of 8.2m, lies 0.5 mile offshore about midway between the entrances of Dring Harbor

and Expedition Harbor. 

9.59 Temporary anchorage can be taken almost anywhere off the

W coast of Camorta Island, N of Exposition Harbor, in depths

of 18.3 to 36.6m, poor holding ground. Vessels anchoring S of

the harbor are advised to anchor in depths of 36.6m.

9.59 Vessels can anchor off Kaihoa Village, in depths of 12.8 to

16.5m, about 1 mile offshore. Perseus Reef provides no protection during the Southwest Monsoon. 

9.59 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 17.4m, off the entrance of Dring Harbor, about 0.7 mile W of the S entrance

point, with that point bearing 089° and in line with a 64m hill
Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 273

Pub. 173

near the head of the harbor. This is considered to be the best

anchorage off this coast, because there is little or no current. 

9.59 From the NE point of Camorta Island, about 1.5 miles E of

Horace Point, the E coast of the island curves SSW and then

SSE in a wide curve for about 8.5 miles and then S for 3.5

miles to Naval Point. A beacon lies about 0.8 mile N of this

point. This point forms the N side of the E entrance of Nancowry Harbor. An L-shaped jetty extends from a position close

WNW of Naval Point, and has a depth of about 11m at its seaward end. A reef extends up to 1 mile offshore along this entire

stretch of coast except off Moshoit Village, where it lies only

0.3 mile off. The village lies about 4 miles SSW of the NE

point of the island. This coastal reef is easily seen under favorable light conditions. 

9.59 Caution is necessary when approaching this coast between

the NE end of Camorta Island and the N entrance of Beresford

channel, because this area has not been closely examined. 

9.59 Trinkat Island (8°05'N., 93°35'E.), which lies between 1.5

and 2.5 miles E of the S part of Camorta Island, is separated

from that island to the W and NW by False Bay and Beresford

Channel. Trinkat Island is low, level, and covered by coconut

trees. An extensive reef surrounds the island. Morrel Point, the

S end of the island, is marked by a beacon.

9.59 Beresford Channel (8°07'N., 93°33'E.) is entered from the

S through False Bay. Both shores are fronted by reefs and

shoals that extend almost 0.8 mile offshore. A number of

shoals, with depths of 5.5 to 11m, lie in the middle of the S part

of the channel. The channel on both sides of Middle Reef,

which lies about 3.5 miles NNW of Morrel Point, is about

183m wide. The W channel has depths of 7.6 to 25.6m and the

E channel has depths of 5.8 to 20.1m. The area N of Trinkat Island has not been closely examined. 

Expedition Harbor and Grand Harbor

9.60 Expedition Harbor (8°03'N., 93°30'E.) is landlocked

and, together with Grand Harbor, its extension to the NE, is of

considerable size. A low narrow peninsula separates Expedition Harbor from Nancowry Harbor to the S. The entrance of

Expedition Harbor lies between Cave Point and Satellite Point,

about 0.3 mile SSE. 

9.60 The S and E sides of the harbor are indented by coves, and

are fringed by reefs and mangroves. Hoau Village lies about

0.3 mile ESE of Edgecumbe Point. The latter point lies a little

over 1 mile NE of Satellite Point. The coast from Edgecumbe

Point extends E and N to Edye Point, about 0.9 mile NNE, the

S entrance point of Grand Harbor. 

9.60 Wasp Point (8°03'N., 93°29'E.) lies about 0.3 mile SE of

Cave Point and forms the inner entrance point of the harbor.

The coast from Wasp Point extends NNE for 0.7 mile to Devils

Point, then N and NE for about 1.3 miles to the N entrance

point of Grand Harbor. A conspicuous palm tree lies close N of

this point.

9.60 Grand Harbor is entered between Edye Point, the N end of

the promontory separating Grand Harbor from Expedition Harbor, and a point about 0.3 mile to the N. The harbor is about 2

miles long in a N and S direction. Two creeks indent the E

shore. The bay at the N of the harbor is foul. 

9.60 Depths—Limitations.—Coral patches, which dry 1.2m, lie

0.2 mile SSE of Cave Point. 

9.60 A channel, about 91m wide and having depths of over

18.3m, forms the inner entrance of Expedition Harbor, between

the reefs fringing Wasp Point and Satellite Point. The channel

passes about 91m N of the latter point. 

9.60 Middle Reef, an extensive drying shoal, lies in the middle of

the fairway, abreast of Devils Point. A channel, about 183m

wide and having depths of 12.4m, leads between the SE end of

Middle Reef and the reef fringing Edgecumbe Point. 

9.60 A drying reef extends 0.2 mile SE from Foul Point, about 0.5

mile NE of Devils Point. A channel, about 183m wide with a

least depth of 23.8m, leads between the SW end of this reef and

the N end of Middle Reef.

9.60 Grand Harbor has depths of 7.3 to 14.6m in its middle part.

Foul ground extends up to 0.3 mile off the salient points. 

9.60 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in 18.3m, mud, with Devils Point bearing 340°, distant 0.3 mile. Vessels intending to

stay are advised to use Nancowry Harbor, because of the

swarms of mosquitoes which infest this anchorage. 

9.60 Directions.—Vessels wishing to enter Expedition Harbor

are advised to wait until the sun is high, and is possible to enter

at LW, when all the fringing reefs and dangers are visible. Vessels approaching from the N or S should keep at least 1 mile off

the coast until abeam of the entrance. When Hoare Village

opens out in the entrance and bears 071°, vessels should alter

course to this heading taking care to avoid the fringing dangers

on both sides of the channel. When Devils Point bears 000°,

course can be altered to the NNE which leads to the recommended anchorage. 

9.60 Vessels not having local knowledge should not proceed

above Devils Point into Grand Harbor until the N end of Middle Reef and the SW end of the drying reef fringing Foul Point

are clearly visible.

Nancowry Harbor (8°01'N., 93°31'E.)

World Port Index No. 49740 

9.61 Nancowry Harbor lies between the S coast of Camorta Island and the N coast of Nancowry Island. This spacious,

landlocked harbor is deeply indented by several bays and inlets. The harbor can be entered by deep-draft vessels either

through the E or W entrance during either monsoon to take

sheltered anchorage. Both entrances are readily identified from

the offing. The harbor consists of four bays, Satellite Bay and

Fort Bay on the N side, and Wasp Bay and Spiteful Bay on the

S side. Cross Harbor lies between Fort Bay to the N and Spiteful Bay to the S. 

9.61 Nancowry Harbor has been reported to be a good radar target

up to 25 miles. 

9.61 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents set E on the flood and

W on the ebb. These currents have considerable strength in the

entrances, but are very weak within the harbor. Between Man

Point and Indian Point the currents are very strong on both

tides.

9.61 Depths—Limitations.—The depths in the W entrance are

over 18.3m and the depths in the E entrance range from 11 to

42m. A depth of 22m exists in the three recommended anchorage areas. 

9.61 Although providing excellent shelter for all types of vessels,

the harbor has few facilities. The residence of the Government
274 Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 

Pub. 173

Agent lies about 0.3 mile WNW of Naval Point. 

9.61 A stone jetty, 119m long, with wooden extension projecting

about 100m SW and W from its head, lies about 0.3 mile

WNW of Naval Point. There are depths of about 11m at the

outer end of the jetty. The approach to the jetty requires much

attention as there are shoals and rocks in the vicinity. 

9.61 A wooden jetty, 72m long and 6.1m wide, extends in a W direction from the shore about 0.2 mile SSW of Mayo Point. 

9.61 The W entrance of the harbor lies between Reef Point and

Man Point on the N side and Burleigh Rock and Indian Point

on the S side. The latter point, which forms the NW extremity

of Nancowry Island, lies NE of Burleigh Rock. The W entrance can be identified by vessels up to 5 miles offshore by the

trend of the coast inland to form its S side. Reef Point can be

identified by a white mark on it and would otherwise be very

difficult to identify. This mark cannot be relied on. Man Point

is also difficult to identify. There is a least depth of 11.9m in

the fairway of the entrance which is about 183m between the

dangers on each side. 

9.61 Northbrook Patch (7°59'N., 93°29'E.), which has a least

depth of 3m, lies about 0.3 mile SSW of Reef Point. Shoal

patches lie between this danger and the coast to the W of the

point. 

9.61 Burleigh Rock, 7.3m high and topped by a wooded summit,

is joined to the SE by a reef. Foul ground extends about 137m

NW and 91m N from the rock. A patch, with a depth of 7.6m,

lies 0.2 mile SSW of the rock. 

9.61 The approach to the E entrance lies between Morrel Point,

the S extremity of Trinkat Island to the NE, and Laire and Reid

Points to the SW. The latter two points lie on the NE coast of

Nancowry Island. Trinkat Island is easily distinguished from

Camorta Island, which is higher and more open. 

9.61 A disc beacon lies on Reid Point and a similar beacon lies

about 91m NNW of Morrel Point. 

9.61 The coast between Laire Point and Reid Point is fronted by

an extensive reef which extends up to 0.5 mile offshore. The

edge of this reef, except at HW and on very calm days, is

marked by breakers. 

9.61 A shoal, with a least depth of 4.9m lies on the edge of the

shore bank, about 0.4 mile ENE of Reid Point. A 9.8m patch

lies near the center of the channel about 0.5 mile NE of the

same point. 

9.61 Eastern Shoals (8°02'N., 93°34'E.), a large shoal area with

depths of less than 11m, extends from 1 mile SSW to 1 mile

WSW of Morrel Point. Depths of 7.6 and 8.5m lie close within

the outer edge of Eastern Shoals.

9.61 The dangers N of an imaginary line joining Naval Point and

Marrel Point have been previously described with Beresford

Channel in paragraph 9.58. 

9.61 The E entrance of Nancowry Harbor lies between Naval

Point to the N, and between Reid and Mayo Points to the S. A

beacon lies on Mayo Point. 

9.61 Naval Point Light is shown from a structure 0.2 mile S of

Naval Point (8°02'N., 93°22'E.). 

9.61 The entrance channel, which is about 0.2 mile wide between

the fringing dangers on either side, has a least depth of 11m. 

9.61 Shoal ground, as defined by the 10m curve, extends up to 0.3

mile ESE and about 0.3 mile S from Naval Point.

9.61 The shore bank, as defined by the 10m curve, lies between

Reid and Mayo Points and extends up to 0.3 mile offshore

about midway between them. 

9.61 A detached 7.3m shoal lies 0.3 mile NW of Reid Point, close

off the above bank. 

9.61 A white metal beacon with a ball topmark lies about 0.2 mile

S of Naval Point near the edge of the reef. A similar beacon lies

1 mile N of the same point on the edge of the shore reef. 

Wasp Bay (8°00'N., 93°31'E.), which forms the SW part of

Nancowry Harbor, lies between the W entrance and an imaginary line drawn between Easter Point and Leda Point to the

ENE. Itoe Village, which lies on the E shore of the bay about

0.5 mile S of Leda Point, serves as a good mark. 

9.61 Wasp Bay has depths of over 18.3m in its central part, but is

fouled by some dangers and irregular depths around its shores. 

9.61 A shoal, with a least depth of 2.4m, lies 0.2 mile offshore

about 0.5 mile NNE of Man Point, which lies 0.3 ENE of Reed

Point. A shoal, with a least depth of 9.8m, lies about 0.7 mile

NE of the same point. Foul ground, with depths of less than

11m, extends 0.3 mile SE and 0.5 mile ENE from Easter Point.

9.61 A drying rock lies in the E part of the bay, a little over 1 mile

SSW of Leda Point and about 0.3 mile offshore. Shoals, with

depths of 4.9 to 12m, lie between this rock and the shore reef. 

9.61 Alfrey Shoal (8°01'N., 93°31'E.), having a depth of 9.7m,

lies almost in mid-channel, a little over 0.5 mile SW of Leda

Point.

9.61 Satellite Bay (8°02'N., 93°30'E.), which forms the NW part

of Nancowry Harbor, is entered between Easter Point and Alfred Point, about 1.3 miles NE. Alfred Point has been reported

to be a good radar target up to 21 miles. 

9.61 A deep channel, about 0.3 mile wide, leads between the W

side of Alfrey Shoal and the E side of the foul ground, which

extends 0.5 mile ENE from Easter Point. Depths of 16.5 to

31.1m exist in the outer part of the bay. 

9.61 Satellite Patch (8°01'N., 93°30'E.), which lies about 0.7

mile SW of Alfred Point, has a least depth of 4.1m. A 6.4m

patch lies about 183m S of this patch, and shoal patches, with

depths of 5.5 to 11m, lie between Satellite Patch and the coast

to the N and NW. 

9.61 Shoal ground, as defined by the 11m curve, extends 0.3 mile

SSW from Alfred Point and 0.3 mile NW and N from Leda

Point. 

9.61 Cross Harbor (8°02'N., 93°32'E.) is entered from the W between Alfred and Leda Points and from the E between Naval

and Mayo Points. Depths in the harbor area range from 21.9 to

53.1m, mud. 

9.61 Fort Bay (8°02'N., 93°31'E.), entered between Alfred Point

and Ray Point about 1 mile ENE, recedes about 0.8 mile NNW.

The latter point can be identified by two radio masts which lie

0.2 mile to the NE. Battery Point, which lies 0.2 mile NW of

Ray Point, can be identified by a conspicuous clump of casuarina trees about the same distance to the N. A flag staff lies

close NE of Ray Point. 

9.61 Depths in the bay range from 14.6 to 23.8m in its central

part, shoaling gradually to the coastal reef which fringes its

shores. A wreck, with a depth of 14.6m, lies about 0.3 mile W

of Ray Point. 

9.61 Spiteful Bay (8°01'N., 93°32'E.), the SE part of Nancowry

Harbor, is entered between Mayo Point and Leda Point. A village lies on the E shore of the bay, about 0.3 mile S of Mayo

Point. 

9.61 A 5.5m patch lies about in the middle of the entrance, about
Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 275

Pub. 173

0.3 mile ENE of Leda Point. 

9.61 Depths of 16.5 to 23.8m are found in the outer part of the

bay, shoaling gradually to the drying flats at its head. Shoals on

the W side of the bay extend up to 0.3 mile offshore.

9.61 Anchorage.—There is an outer anchorage about 1 mile E of

Naval Point (8°02'N., 93°22'E.). The depth is 21.9m and the

holding ground is good. A long scope of chain is advisable as

the squalls off the land are sometimes heavy. The anchorage is

otherwise sheltered. 

9.61 Excellent anchorage is provided in the outer part of Fort Bay,

in a depth of 21.9m, mud, with the previously-mentioned conspicuous clump of trees bearing about 075°, distant 0.3 mile.

The previously-mentioned wreck should be given a wide berth.

This anchorage is sheltered and little current is experienced. 

9.61 Anchorage can be taken in the middle of the entrance of

Spiteful Bay, in a depth of 21.9m. This anchorage is somewhat

exposed to the sea breezes. 

9.61 Anchorage can be taken in the fairway of the E entrance of

Nancowry Harbor, in convenient depths, on a line joining the

stone jetty and the village of Mala about 0.2 mile SSW of

Mayo Point. 

9.61 Directions.—West entrance.—Vessels should approach the

W entrance from the SW in order to avoid the dangers extending SSW from Reef Point and terminating in Northbrook

Patch. The conspicuous clump of casuarina trees near Battery

Point, midway between Man and Indian points, bearing about

039°, leads SE of Northbrook Patch. When Reef Point bears

000°, steer on that bearing until Burleigh Rock bears 090°.

Thengradually alter course to the NE, avoiding the foul ground

which extends NW from Burleigh Rock, and course shaped to

pass midway between Man Point and Indian Point. In passing

between these points, vessels should have good steerage way

as the currents are strong and there are many eddies.

9.61 After passing Man Point, the course should be altered to

about 051°, and when about 0.8 mile off the village, course

should be altered N, passing close W of Alfrey Shoal and E of

the 4.8m shoal, about 0.3 mile W of Alfrey Shoal.

9.61 When Mayo Point bears about 080° and is open N of Leda

Point, alter course should be altered E and the radio masts NE

of Ray Point should be steered for on a course of 055°. This

course leads between the dangers extending from Leda and Alfred Points and into Fort Bay where anchorage can be taken as

convenient. 

9.61 East entrance.—Vessels approaching the E entrance should

keep Reid Point bearing 281° and in line with Alfred Point.

This course leads S of Easter Point. When the right tangent of

Trinkat Island bears 034°, the course should be altered N to

bring Bay Point Beacon to bear 309° and kept on that bearing

which leads NE of the reef fronting the coast between Laire

and Reid Points.

9.61 When Mayo Point bears 261°, the course should be altered to

268° to pass midway between Naval Point and the N shore of

Nancowry Island, about 0.5 mile S. This track passes 183m S

of a shoal with 5.8m of water above, located 0.5 mile SE of Naval Point and 0.2 mile N of another shoal with a depth of 6.7m

on the S side of the entrance. When clear of Mayo Point, alter

course to the N to clear the spit extending NW from Mayo

Point. Anchorage can be taken, as convenient, in Fort Bay. 

The Nicobar Islands—Central Group

9.62 Katchall Island (7°56'N., 93°22'E.) is separated from

Camorta Island and Nancowry Island to the NE by Revello

Channel, which is about 3.8 miles wide and apparently free

from dangers, except for a detached 12.8m patch which lies

about 4.5 miles NE of the SE end of Katchall Island. The island

is densely wooded and rises to a height of 227m in its central

part. 

9.62 Katchall Island has been reported to be a good radar target

up to 18 miles. 

9.62 Depths off the W side of the island are very irregular. Some

16.5 to 18.3m patches lie up to 4 miles off this coast. 

9.62 West Bay (7°55'N., 93°20'E.) deeply indents the W side of

the island and is foul in its inner reaches. It has been reported

that a SW swell occasionally sets into the bay during the

Northeast Monsoon and that the tidal currents attain a rate of 2

knots across the entrance. A light is shown from a concrete

tower, 11m high, situated on the N entrance point of West Bay. 

9.62 Vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in a depth of

16.5m, about 1 mile SSW of the NW entrance point. 

9.62 South Bay (7°53'N., 93°24'E.) indents the S coast of the island close W of its S end. The bay should not be entered because of the rocks and foul ground found within its limits. It

has been reported that Cape Albany, the S end of the island,

had extended 0.2 mile farther S then charted.

9.62 East Bay (7°59'N., 93°25'E.), backed by steep cliffs and

Katchall Peak, indents the NE side of the island. Numerous

rocks and foul ground encumber the bay and lie up to 1.5 miles

off its shores. The depths in the bay range from less than 1m to

more than 36.6m. A light is shown from a square tower, 9m

high, situated on the N entrance point of East Bay. 

9.62 Hoinipoh Bay (7°58'N., 93°26'E.), a slight indentation, lies

close S of the S entrance point of East Bay. Anchorage can be

taken, in depths of 21.9 to 23.8m, with a conspicuous hut in the

village bearing 256°, distant 0.5 mile. The bay is often visited

by trading vessels. 

Sombrero Channel

9.63 Sombrero Channel (7°41'N., 93°36'E.) separates the

central and S groups of the Nicobar Islands. The channel is 30

miles wide between Cape Albany and Sombrero Point, the N

extremity of Little Nicobar Island. The depths in the channel

are irregular, but there is deep water in mid-channel. 

9.63 Strong tidal currents set through this channel. 

9.63 A yellow clay patch, with a depth of 21.9m, lies in the W approach to Sombrero Channel about 12 miles WSW of Cape Albany. Shoal patches may exist in this area.

9.63 A detached coral bank, with a least depth of 17.1m, extends

up to 12 miles SSW of Cape Albany. Depths elsewhere on this

bank range from 20.1 to 31.1m. This bank has been reported to

be extending to the W. 

9.63 Miroe Island (7°31'N., 93°32'E.), low and small, lies 10.5

miles WNW of Sombrero Point, the N extremity of Little

Nicobar Island. Miroe Island has been reported to be a good radar target up to 19 miles. 
276 Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 

Pub. 173

9.63 Trak Island (7°28'N., 93°37'E.) lies 5 miles WNW of Sombrero Point; Treis Island lies 1 mile SE of Trak Island. Both islands are small, reef-fringed, and surrounded by sunken rocks.

A rock, which has a depth of less than 1.8m, lies about midway

between Treis Island and Sombrero Point.

The Nicobar Islands—South Group

9.64 Little Nicobar Island (7°20'N., 93°42'E.) is densely

wooded, with Mount Deoban rising to a height of 413m on the

central part, and the Empress Peak rising to 401m on the NE

part of the island. 

9.64 Little Nicobar Island has been reported to be a good radar

target up to 23 miles. 

9.64 The NW coast between Sombrero Point and Pahua, about 6

miles SW and then about 7.5 miles S to Cape Edinburg, is

fringed by a reef which extends up to 0.5 mile offshore.

9.64 Pulo Milo Island (7°24'N., 93°42'E.) lies about midway between Sombrero Point and Pahua, in the bight formed by these

two places. Two 5.5m patches lie in the channel between Pulo

Milo Island and the coast of Little Nicobar Island, about 0.8

mile ENE and 0.7 mile ESE of the N end of Pulo Milo Island.

A light is shown from a structure on the NE point of Pulo Milo

Island. 

9.64 The channel separating Pulo Milo Island from Little Nicobar

Island is about 0.4 mile wide, but is narrower on the S side,

where the channel has not been closely examined. Depths of

less than 11m lie within 0.4 mile of Little Nicobar Island, E of

Pulo Milo Island. 

9.64 An 18.3m patch lies about 14.5 miles W of Pulo Milo Island.

Depths of 10.4m and 19.4m lie 2 and 3 miles W of Pulo Milo

Island. 

9.64 Anchorage can be taken in the channel between Pulo Milo

Island and Little Nicobar Island, in depths of 16.5 to 23.8m,

sand and coral. This anchorage is sheltered.

9.64 Ileya (7°25'N., 93°42'E.), a small village, lies on the NE

coast about 1.5 miles SSE of Sombrero Point. A small drying

patch lies close E of the village. 

9.64 Menchal Island (7°24'N., 93°45'E.), small in extent and

reef-fringed, lies 4 miles SE of Sombrero Point and 1.3 miles

off the NE coast of Little Nicobar Island. A depth of 11.9m exists in the intervening channel, but less depths may exist.

9.64 Anchorage can be taken by vessels with local knowledge,

during periods of fair weather, in depths of 11 to 12.8m, about

0.5 mile SW of Menchal Island. The tidal currents have been

reported to be strong, especially at springs. 

9.64 The SE coast of Little Nicobar Island, which forms the NW

side of St. Georges Channel, is fairly steep-to. 

St. Georges Channel

9.65 St. Georges Channel (7°17'N., 93°46'E.), which lies

between Little Island and Great Nicobar Island, has considerable depths in the fairway over an uneven bottom. Its W entrance has a least width of 3.8 miles reduced to a navigable

width of 2.8 miles by the shoals extending from both shores. 

9.65 The N side of the channel is free from off-lying dangers, except in the W entrance, where depths of 14 to 16.8m, about 0.4

mile apart, were reported to lie 1 mile ESE of the S end of Little Nicobar Island. A 32m shoal was reported to lie 0.7 mile S

of the same point. 

9.65 A bank, with a depth of 20.1m, the existence of which is

doubtful, was reported to lie about in the middle of the E entrance almost 3 miles NW of Kabra Island. 

9.65 The tidal currents through this channel are strong. 

Great Nicobar Island

9.66 Great Nicobar Island (7°00'N., 93°49'E.), the S and

largest of the Nicobar Islands, is well-wooded and fertile. Its

NW end lies about 4 miles SSE of Little Nicobar Island.

9.66 The island rises to considerable heights throughout its length

and is marked by steep-sided mountains covered by dense jungle growth. Mount Thuillier rises to a height of 642m in the NE

part of the S end of the island. A second ridge extends W from

this peak and a third ridge extends SW from a position near the

center of the main ridge. 

9.66 Great Nicobar Island has been reported to be a good radar

target up to 23 miles. 

9.66 Caution.—The coast of the island appears to be reef-fringed

on all sides. The edge of the submarine plateau, from which the

island rises, has not been clearly defined. It apparently extends

a considerable distance W from the coast. The W coast of the

island, which is fully exposed to the Southwest Monsoon, has

not been closely examined. Shoal depths of as little as 12.6m,

which are best seen on the chart, extend up to 9 miles off the W

coast of the island. Vessels are advised to use caution when approaching the island. 

9.66 A detached 18.3m shoal lies about 19 miles SW of the S end

of Great Nicobar Island. A detached 17.7m patch was reported

(1975) to lie about 11.8 miles SSW of the same point. The position of this latter depth is approximate.

9.67 Between the NW point of Great Nicobar Island and

the NW entrance point of Ganges Harbor, almost 5 miles ENE,

the coast is slightly indented and reef fringed. A 6.4m shoal

lies 1.5 miles off the N coast of Great Nicobar Island about 1.8

miles E of the N end of Kondul Island. A 0.9m patch lies about

2 miles farther E. 

9.67 Kondul Island (7°13'N., 93°43'E.), high and rocky on its N

side, rises to a height of 92m. 

9.67 Kondul Harbor (Pryce Channel) (7°12'N., 93°43'E.) is

formed by the S side of Kondul Island and a bight in the NW

coast of Great Nicobar Island. A radio station is situated in

Mayaiya Village, about 0.3 mile N of the S part of Kondul Island. 

9.67 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken off either the E or W

side of Kondul Island according to the direction of the wind.

The E anchorage has a depth of 12.8m about 0.5 mile offshore.

Depths of 18.3 to 21.9m exist in the W anchorage, but caution

is advised in its approach. 

9.67 Kondul Harbor provides sheltered anchorage, in depths 21.9

to 31.1m, sand and coral, E or NE of the previously-described

4.6m shoal.

9.67 Caution.—Caution is advised when approaching Kondul Island and the adjacent coast because uncharted dangers may exist. Lesser depths than charted have been reported to lie W of

this island and may extend for a considerable distance offshore.

A rock, with a least depth of 1.8m, lies 0.7 mile W of the S end

of the island. 
Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 277

Pub. 173

9.67 A 4.6m shoal, which has not been closely examined, lies

about 0.8 mile SSE of the SE end of the island. 

9.67 Ganges Harbor (7°13'N., 93°48'E.), which lies in a bight on

the N coast of Great Nicobar Island about 5 miles E of Kondul

Island, is entered between two points fouled by shoals. A spit,

with a depth of 6.4m at its outer end, extends almost 1 mile

WSW from the E entrance point; foul ground lies S of the coral

head. A reef extends almost 0.5 mile NNE from the W entrance

point. 

9.67 A coral head, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies 1.5 miles N

of the E entrance point. A shoal, which has two rocks with

depths of less than 1.8m on them, lies almost midway between

this shoal and the dangers extending from both entrance points.

9.67 Anchorage.—Ganges Harbor provides anchorage, in depths

of 16.5 to 29.3m, coarse sand and clay, well clear of the previously-described dangers. 

9.68 Between the NW point of Great Nicobar Island, lying

about 2.5 miles WSW of Kondul Island, and Teesta Point,

about 10 miles to the S, the W coast of Great Nicobar Island is

high and rugged. This coast has not been thoroughly examined

and lesser depths than charted may lie between 2 and 4.5 miles

offshore. 

9.68 Shoal patches, with depths of 12.8m and 19.5m, lie 6.5 miles

W and 4.5 miles WNW of Teesta Point. 

9.68 A depth of 16.9m lies about 7 miles NW of Teesta Point. A

depth of 5.8m lies 2.5 miles SSE of Teesta Point; a report also

indicates that lesser depths may exist in the area. 

9.69 Casuarina Bay (7°01'N., 93°41'E.), of no commercial importance, is entered close E of Teesta Point and recedes

about 1 mile to the N.

9.69 Between the SE entrance point of Casuarina Bay and Pygmalion Point (Indira Point), about 16.5 miles SSE, the coast is

indented by a number of small bays, none of which have been

closely examined. The villages of Kopenheat and Taeangha lie

about 3 and 5 miles SSE of Casuarina Bay. 

9.69 Pygmalion Point (Indira Point) has been reported to be good

radar target up to 21 miles. A light is shown from the point; a

racon transmits from the light tower. 

9.69 The coast between Teesta Point and Pygmalion Point (Indira

Point) is fronted by shoal ground which lies between 4 miles

off the former point to 2 miles off Pygmalion Point (Indira

Point). Less water than charted has been reported to exist along

this section of coast. 

9.69 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in a

depth of 20.1m, in Casuarina Bay, about 1 mile S of the NW

entrance point. Protection is provided during the Northeast

Monsoon. 

9.69 Vessels with local knowledge can anchor in the entrance of a

bight between the villages of Kopenheat and Taeangha, in a

depth of 27.4m, about 1 mile offshore.

9.69 Extreme caution is advised when approaching the above anchorages because of the numerous reports of shallow depths. 

9.69 Two small villages lie at the head of a bight about 8.5 miles

NNW of Pygmalion Point (Indira Point). A small island lies

close inshore about 6.5 miles NNW of the same point. 

9.70 The E coast of Great Nicobar Island between Murray

Point, the NE extremity of Great Nicobar Island, and Pygmalion Point (Indira Point) about 29 miles to the S, is hilly, wooded to the water’s edge, and indented by several bights. Mariners

are advised that this coast has not been closely examined. 

Kabra Island (7°18'N., 93°51'E.), 63m high, lies in St.

Georges Channel almost 3 miles N of Murray Point, the N end

of Great Nicobar Island. 

Trinkat Champlong Bay (7°13'N., 93°52'E.) is entered between Murray Point and Kerr Point, about 1.8 miles SE. The

NW shore of the bay is rocky and steep, with some coral heads

extending up to 183m offshore. A sandy beach lines the S

shore. Two conspicuous rocks lie about 0.5 mile W and 0.8

mile WSW of Kerr Point. The W rock is flat-sided. 

9.70 A coral reef, partly dry at lower water, extends about 0.2

mile offshore, NE of the W rock. Other dangers lie within the

6m curve. A shoal, as defined by the 20m curve, extends about

2 miles NE from Murray Point. A depth of 4.6m lies near the

outer edge of this shoal. 

9.70 Anchorage.—Trinkat Champlong Bay provides good, safe

anchorage for large vessels. Protection is provided during the

Southwest Monsoon. A vessel anchored, in a depth of 51.2m,

coral and shells, with Murray Point bearing 310°, distant almost 0.8 mile.

9.71 Laful Anchorage (7°10'N., 93°54'E.), a small coastal

indentation, lies about 3.3 miles S of Kerr Point. A ledge, with

depths of less than 9.1m and apparently steep-to, extends about

0.2 mile offshore. The coast in the vicinity is fairly steep-to.

Protection is provided from W winds.

9.71 The anchorage should be approached by steering 270° for

the middle of the S half of the sandy beach which is a good

mark. Anchorage can be taken when the coast S of the bight is

almost shut in by South Point, the S entrance of the bay. Care

should be taken because the depth decreases rapidly.

9.71 Between South Point and Pigeon Islet, about 5.5 miles to the

S, the rocky coast has no pronounced indentations except for a

small bay NW of the islet, which has not been closely examined. Good anchorage has been reported available in this bay.

Depths of 31.1m have been reported to lie close off the bay

shores. 

9.72 Tenlaa Bay (7°02'N., 93°56'E.), which lies 3 miles S

of Pigeon Islet, is narrow and has depths of 33m near its head.

The bay is sheltered except from NE winds. 

9.72 Between Tenlaa Bay and the NE of Koal-ta-pain, a promontory about 2 miles SE, the coast is rugged. The promontory

forms the NE side of Campbell Bay, a bight fully exposed to

SE winds and seas. The entrance of the bay is difficult because

it is fouled by rocks. Cerebus Rock lies 0.4 mile S of the E entrance point of the bay. 

9.72 A light is shown on the SW side of Campbell Bay, close

within its entrance. 

9.72 There is an L-shaped jetty, with a depth of 5m at its head, situated on the NE side of the bay; it is usually used only in good

weather. A breakwater, marked at its nead by a light, extends

SW from Man Point. 

9.72 Range lights, situated close together at the head of Campbell

Bay and in line bearing 323.75°, lead in from seaward.

9.72 Between Campbell Bay and Tara Point, about 7.5 miles

SSW, the coast forms a small bight which is indented at its

head. Boat Rock (6°56'N., 93°58'E.), awash, about 1 mile SE
278 Sector 9. The Andaman Islands and the Nicobar Islands 

Pub. 173

of the N entrance of the bight, has three smaller rocks close

SW of it. 

9.72 Mataita-anla, the S indentation in the above bight, lies about

1 mile WNW of Tara Point. Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor in this indentation protected from SW winds

and seas. Rocks and shoals restrict the available space. 

9.73 South Bay (6°48'N., 93°52'E.), entered between Hayward Point (6°47'N., 93°52'E.), also known as Kwangtung

Point, about 3 miles SW of Tara Point and Pygmalion Point

(Indira Point), about 3.8 miles farther SW, provides shelter during the Northeast Monsoon. A sand bar blocks the entrance of

the Galatea River, which flows into the head of the bay. 

9.73 Hayward Point has been reported to be a good radar target up

to 20 miles. 

9.73 Walker Island, about 1.5 miles NNE of Pygmalion Point (Indira Point), is flat, small and rocky. Several heaps of stones lie

on the island. The island is prominent from the S, but is difficult to make out from the E because of the high land behind it.

9.73 A breaking rock, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies about

0.7 mile SSE of Hayward Point. 

9.73 A shoal, with a least reported depth of 5m, lies 0.5 mile S of

Pygmalion Point Light, which marks the S extremity of Great

Nicobar Island.

9.73 Vessels can anchor within the bay as convenient, in depths of

16.5 to 18.3m.
Pub. 173

Glossaries 279

Glossaries

Burmese

BURMESE English

A

a-shae ............................................................................. east

a-nauk............................................................................ west

B

baamn...................................... range/row of hills, mountain

baanm (pan) ....................range/row of hills, mountain peak

C

chaung........................................................................stream

D

daan.......................................................... rank in file, range

H

hteyk.......................................................................top, peak

I

inn ..................................................................................lake

K

kan.........................................................................area, span

kaan.............................................................................. coast

kaana ........................................coast line, beach, river bank

kyauk..............................................................................rock

kyauk taung..................................................rocky mountain

kyauk hteyk............................................................rocky top

kyauk-cha-kan ..............................................anchorage area

kyun ............................................................................ island

L

laan .............................................................. road, path, way

lantaya..................................................... clear path, fairway

M

mee ........................................................................ light, fire

mee-pya ............................................... lighthouse, lightship

myauk .......................................................................... south

myit............................................................................... river

T

taung ............................................................................ north

taung .............................................................. mountain, hill

taung daan....................................................mountain range

taung gyi .......................................................large mountain

Y

ye ................................................................................. water

ye-gan (kan)......................................................... lake, pond

ye-dagun (dakun)....................................................waterfall

yoma ............................................................mountain range

BURMESE English
Pub. 173

280 Glossaries

Hindi

HINDI English

A

ar ................................................................................stream

B

bandar................................................................... anchorage

bet................................................................................ island

betta........................................................................mountain

bil ......................................................................lake, swamp

bum ................................................................ mountain, hill

C

cheruvu...........................................................................lake

chu..............................................................................stream

D

dhar ..............................................................mountain range

dongar ............................................................................. hill

durga .........................................................................hill fort

durgam ......................................................................hill fort

E

eri ...................................................................................lake

eru ..............................................................................stream

G

gad..............................................................................stream

ghat.................................................................................pass

giri..........................................................................mountain

gudda.............................................................. mountain, hill

gutta ............................................................... mountain, hill

J

jhil ..................................................................................lake

jhor.............................................................................stream

K

kas ..............................................................................stream

kayal...............................................................................inlet

kere........................................................................ lake, tank

khal.................................................................. stream, creek

kot ................................................................................... fort

M

mala .......................................................................mountain

malai ......................................................................mountain

mudi.......................................................................mountain

N

nadi ............................................................................ stream

nala ............................................................................ stream

nam ............................................................................ stream

P

pahar ......................................................................mountain

parbat .....................................................................mountain

parvat .....................................................................mountain

po ...........................................................................mountain

pulo ............................................................................. island

R

rann .................................................................... marsh, lake

sagar............................................................................... lake

sagara............................................................................. lake

suti ............................................................................. stream

T

tal ......................................................................lake, swamp

tala .................................................................................well

talab ............................................................................... lake

talao ............................................................................... lake

tapu ............................................................................. island

tivu .............................................................................. island

tlang ................................................... mountain peak, range

V

va ............................................................................... stream

vagu ........................................................................... stream

HINDI English
Pub. 173

Glossaries 281

Pakistani

PAKISTANI English

A

ab......................................................................water, spring

an....................................................................................pass

B

bandar......................................................................... harbor

bil ......................................................................swamp, lake

bundar .............................................mud dike, embankment

C

chah....................................................................spring, well

chakul..........................................................................spring

char.............................................................................. island

chara...........................................................................stream

chauki...............................................................customhouse

D

dar ..............................................................................stream

darya..................................................................river, stream

dasht.................................................................. desert, plain

dhand......................................................................... swamp

dhar ..............................................................mountain range

dhor ............................................................................stream

dimi ................................................................................ east

doab...................................................... plain between rivers

G

gang............................................................................stream

ghar .............................................mountain, mountain range

goth ..................................................................town, village

H

hamun.....................................................salt lake, salt waste

haor ................................................................................lake

hor ......................................swamp, fresh or brackish marsh

J

jabal; jebel...........................................hill, mountain, island

jezirat .......................................................................... island

K

kalat.................................................................................fort

kand; kandao..................................................................pass

kaur ...................................................................stream, river

khal ............................................................................... river

khand .............................................................................pass

khari.................................................................stream, creek

khor; khor .................................... stream, river mouth, inlet

koh ..............................................mountain, mountain range

kot .................................................................................. port

kotal ...............................................................................pass

kuh ................................................................. hill, mountain

L

lak ..................................................................................pass

lora............................................................................. stream

N

nadi ............................................................................ stream

nal .............................................................................. stream

nala ............................................................................ stream

narai ...............................................................................pass

nawar; nawar.................................................................. lake

nullah ........................................... intermittent stream, gully

P

padi ................................................................................west

pahaar ............................................................ mountain, hill

R

ras ....................................................................... cape, point

rud.....................................................................river, stream

S

sar (sur).................................................. peak, summit, well

T

tangi .............................................................................gorge

tar...................................................................................well

taung .............................................................. hill, mountain

toba ................................................................................well

toi............................................................................... stream

W

wah...................................................................canal, stream

Z

zarr.................................................................................. bay

ziarat .................................................................tomb, shrine

PAKISTANI English
Pub. 173

282 Glossaries

Thai

THAI English

A

ao.......................................................................... bay, creek

arang...............................................................................coal

B

ban..............................................................................village

bang......................................................... village, settlement

bon ...............................................................................upper

buket............................................................... hill, mountain

buri ..................................................................................city

C

chaung, chong ...............................................................strait

D

dam...............................................................................black

dan.................................................. police or custom station

dawang .........................................................................forest

deng..................................................................................red

din niau ..........................................................................clay

doi, dowi ................................................................mountain

don ............................................................. island, high land

F

fai .................................................................................. light

H

hat, hatsai ..............................................................sand bank

hin ....................................................................... rock, shoal

hoi ..............................................................................stream

htoong ................................................................. field, plain

hue..............................................................mountain stream

I

ikan..................................................................................fish

J

jankar .........................................................................anchor

K

kaler ............................................................................. north

kau................................................................................... hill

khao............................................mountain, hill, peak, white

khlon ..................................................................... clay, mud

klong ................................................. canal, channel, stream

ko, koh ........................................................................ island

L

laem........................................................................bay, cape

lang...............................................................................lower

langtao..............................................................................bar

lek ................................................................................ small

lem .................................................................................cape

lom................................................................................wind

luang ............................................................................green

lueng .......................................................................... yellow

luong .............................................................................great

M

maenam, menam........................................................... river

mai ................................................................................. new

me ................................................................................. river

menang ......................................................................district

muang ...........................................................................town

N

nam ................................................ water, tide, river, stream

nam-khun..............................................................rising tide

nam-long.............................................................ebbing tide

nam-0................................................ begining of rising tide

nam-tem-khraye...................................................high water

naung ................................................................lake, swamp

nawi ....................................................................small, little

nei ......................................................................................in

nei-kwa .........................................................................inner

noi .......................................................................little, small

noi-kwa ........................................................................lesser

nok ...................................................................................out

nok-kwa ........................................................................outer

nong ................................... pond, pool, marsh, swamp, lake

P

pa ................................................................................jungle

pak ............................................................................ estuary

pak nam ........................................ bay, estuary, river mouth

phra ........................................................................... pagoda

phrayk ..................................................................... tributary

pom ................................................................................. fort

pu ................................................................... hill, mountain

R

rai.................................................farmland, square measure

roti................................................................................bread

rong.................................................................custom house

S

sai.......................................................................sand, gravel

sao-thong .................................................................flagstaff

sap.......................................................................great, large

sawuh.........................................................................anchor

sayuran................................................................. vegetables

THAI English
Pub. 173

Glossaries 283 

T

ta...................................................................... landing place

thale.........................................................................sea, lake

thai ...........................................................................siamese

thang......................................................................road, path

thit-nua......................................................................... north

thit-tai...........................................................................south

thit-tuan-ok..................................................................... east

thit-tuan-tok .................................................................. west

thi-thort-samor ..................................................... anchorage

tida angin.......................................................................calm

toko ......................................................................storehouse

tong ........................................................................mountain

THAI English

tong koong ............................................................river bend

trumbu.........................................................dangerous shoal

tuwak ...............................................................................old

W

wat .............................................................. buddhist temple

Y

yai-kwa ......................................................................greater

yord..................................................................................top

yot ................................................................................. peak

THAI English
285

Pub. 173

How to use the Index—Gazetteer

Geographic names of navigational features are generally those used by the nation having sovereignty and are listed

alphabetically. Diacritical marks, such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to specific letters in certain foreign

languages, are not used in the interest of typographical simplicity.

Geographic names or their spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political status of an area by the United States

Government. Positions are approximate and are intended merely as locators to facilitate reference to the charts.

To use as a Gazetteer note the position and Sector number of the feature and refer to the Chart Information diagram for the

Sector. Plot the approximate position of the feature on this diagram and note the approximate chart number.

To use as an Index of features described in the text note the paragraph number at the right. To locate this feature on the best

scale chart use the Gazetteer procedure above. 

Index—Gazetteer

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

A

ABHAY ISLAND 17 45 N 94 29 E 7.42

ACHRA POINT 16 12 N 73 26 E 2.46

ADAM'S PEAK 6 48 N 80 30 E 4.1

ADDU ATOLL 0 39 S 78 10 E 5.66

AGASTYA MALAI 8 37 N 77 15 E 3.35

AGATTI ISLAND 10 51 N 72 12 E 5.9

AGHNASHINI RIVER 14 31 N 74 20 E 3.8

AGRA ROCK 18 07 N 83 46 E 6.31

AGUADA BAY 15 29 N 73 47 E 2.51

AGUIMARI CHAR 22 00 N 88 08 E 7.5

AHUNGALLA POINT 6 19 N 80 02 E 4.21

AKAUKTAUNG 18 25 N 95 11 E 8.15

AKIRIFURI 4 38 N 73 24 E 5.38

AKURALA POINT 6 12 N 80 03 E 4.22

AKYAB HARBOR 20 08 N 92 54 E 7.33

ALADDIN ISLANDS 9 43 N 98 03 E 8.94

ALANG SHIPBREAKING YARD 21 30 N 72 20 E 2.14

ALFREY SHOAL 8 01 N 93 31 E 9.61

ALGUADA REEF 15 42 N 94 12 E 8.5

ALICE ISLAND 11 21 N 98 31 E 8.78

ALLAMPARWA FORT 12 16 N 80 01 E 6.11

ALLANS ISLAND 12 21 N 98 11 E 8.60

ALLEPPEY 9 29 N 76 19 E 3.31

ALLIGATOR HEAD 16 36 N 94 19 E 7.57

ALPHEE SHOAL 7 25 N 81 52 E 4.40

AMAZON POINT 16 29 N 94 41 E 8.8

AMBU ISLET 19 08 N 72 47 E 2.28

AMBWAH BAY 17 16 N 73 13 E 2.40

AMENI ISLAND 11 07 N 72 44 E 5.7

AMHERST POINT 16 05 N 97 34 E 8.23

AMIE ISLAND 11 56 N 98 13 E 8.67

AMINI ISLAND 11 07 N 72 44 E 5.7

AMNAM 17 57 N 83 29 E 6.30

ANDAMAN STRAIT 12 04 N 92 47 E 9.40

ANDERSON ROCK 12 26 N 92 59 E 9.32

ANDREWS BAY 18 20 N 94 20 E 7.53

ANDROTH ISLAND 10 49 N 73 41 E 5.8

ANGEDIVA ISLAND 14 45 N 74 07 E 3.5

ANJADIP ISLAND 14 45 N 74 07 E 3.5

ANJENGO 8 40 N 76 46 E 3.35

ANNE ISLAND 11 20 N 98 00 E 8.70

ANT ISLET 12 42 N 98 19 E 8.51

AO KAULAK 8 36 N 98 15 E 8.107

APAW-YE KYUN 18 23 N 94 19 E 7.53

API ISLET 10 39 N 92 23 E 9.50

ARGO FLAT 21 44 N 89 57 E 7.16

ARI ATOLL 3 55 N 72 50 E 5.42

ARIYADDU CHANNEL 3 25 N 72 53 E 5.46

ARMAGON SHOAL 13 54 N 80 18 E 6.15

ARNALA ISLAND 19 28 N 72 44 E 2.25

ARONG VILLAGE 9 09 N 92 43 E 9.52

ASAR MATA 22 50 N 69 13 E 1.9

ASIRGARH SHOAL 20 28 N 92 28 E 7.27

ATALANTA BAY 13 16 N 93 04 E 9.26

ATALANTA POINT 11 40 N 92 45 E 9.45

AUCKLAND BAR 21 45 N 87 59 E 7.5

AUCKLAND BAY 12 07 N 98 32 E 8.56

AURANGA RIVER 20 38 N 75 53 E 2.21

AUSTIN STRAIT 12 53 N 92 50 E 9.13

AUSTIN STRAIT 12 54 N 92 53 E 9.27

AVES ISLAND 12 55 N 92 57 E 9.29

AZHIKAL 11 55 N 75 24 E 3.21

B

BACON BAY 12 57 N 92 54 E 9.30

BADAGARA 11 36 N 75 35 E 3.25

BAILEY ISLAND 12 08 N 97 44 E 8.61

BAINDUR HEAD 13 52 N 74 36 E 3.13

BALACHADI ROCKS 22 41 N 70 10 E 1.27

BALACHIRI ROCKS 22 41 N 70 10 E 1.24,

1.27

BALESHWAR 21 29 N 86 57 E 7.3

BALESHWAR ROAD 21 23 N 87 07 E 7.2

BALESHWAR TEMPLE 19 50 N 85 56 E 6.38

BALISAHI POINT 20 51 N 86 58 E 7.2

BARDA HILLS 21 48 N 69 44 E 1.34

BARDA RANGE 21 48 N 69 44 E 1.34

BARE ISLAND 12 25 N 98 26 E 8.57

BARONI ROCK 15 52 N 94 17 E 8.6

BARREN ISLAND 12 16 N 93 51 E 9.9

BARUVA 18 52 N 84 35 E 6.34

BASAVRAJDURG ISLAND 14 19 N 74 24 E 3.9

BASIN ISLAND 11 59 N 98 10 E 8.65

BASSEIN 16 47 N 94 44 E 8.9

BASSES DE PEDRO 13 05 N 72 25 E 5.5

BASWARAJ DRUG 14 19 N 74 24 E 3.9

BATAINA GALA 6 02 N 80 10 E 4.23

BATTI MALV ISLAND 8 50 N 92 51 E 9.55

BATTICALOA LIGHT 7 45 N 81 41 E 4.42

BATTICALOA ROADS 7 46 N 81 41 E 4.42

BEACON ISLAND 18 56 N 93 27 E 7.43

BEAUCHAMP REEF 13 27 N 93 04 E 9.23

BEDI 22 31 N 70 02 E 1.26

BELEKERI BAY 14 42 N 74 15 E 3.7

BELEKERI POINT 14 42 N 74 15 E 3.7

BENTINCK ISLAND 11 45 N 98 02 E 8.69

BENTINCK POINT 15 29 N 97 44 E 8.25

BENTINCK SOUND 15 35 N 97 42 E 8.26

BENTOTA GANGA 6 26 N 79 59 E 4.21

BERESFORD CHANNEL 8 07 N 93 33 E 9.59

BERKELEY ISLAND GROUP 12 56 N 92 54 E 9.29

BERNARD ISLAND 11 11 N 98 16 E 8.72

BERUWALA POINT 6 28 N 79 58 E 4.20

BETUL POINT 15 08 N 73 57 E 2.54

BEYPORE 11 10 N 75 48 E 3.28

BHANGADUNI ISLAND 21 33 N 88 52 E 7.12

BHATKAL FORT 13 58 N 74 32 E 3.12

BHAVNAGAR 21 46 N 72 14 E 2.15

BHIMUNIPATNAM 17 54 N 83 29 E 6.30

BIG TOP ISLAND 9 58 N 98 13 E 8.91

BILADU 3 09 N 72 59 E 5.52

BILUGYUN ISLAND 16 23 N 97 31 E 8.21

BILUGYUN SANDS 16 10 N 97 32 E 8.22

BIRDS NEST ISLANDS 12 53 N 98 15 E 8.46
286 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 173

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

BIRDS NEST ROCKS 9 47 N 98 11 E 8.95

BLACK POINT 9 06 N 80 54 E 4.52

BLACK ROCK 11 23 N 97 40 E 8.70

BLACK ROCKS 19 38 N 93 29 E 7.35

BLAIR POINT 11 41 N 92 44 E 9.45

BLUFF CAPE 18 00 N 94 26 E 7.55

BLUFF ISLAND 12 15 N 92 42 E 9.15

BLUFF POINT 15 46 N 97 42 E 8.24

BLUNDELL ISLAND 12 27 N 97 50 E 8.48

BOAT ISLAND 11 31 N 92 34 E 9.20

BOAT ROCK 11 18 N 98 41 E 8.78

BOAT ROCK 6 56 N 93 58 E 9.72

BOK YE-GAN 14 16 N 97 49 E 8.19

BOLD PROMONTORY 11 44 N 98 18 E 8.80

BOMBAY 18 56 N 72 51 E 2.29

BOMBAY LIGHTSHIP 18 50 N 72 44 E 2.29

BOMBAY SHOAL 19 26 N 93 31 E 7.37

BOMIE BAY 17 20 N 94 33 E 7.55

BOMPOKA ISLAND 8 14 N 93 14 E 9.57

BOND HARBOR 13 24 N 93 04 E 9.23

BORIA HEADLAND 17 24 N 73 10 E 2.38

BORONGA POINT 19 49 N 93 02 E 7.34

BOWEN SHOAL 10 29 N 98 15 E 8.85

BOWERS ISLAND 12 30 N 98 06 E 8.50

BROKEN POINT 16 55 N 94 23 E 7.42

BROOKER ROCK 11 30 N 92 36 E 9.21

BROUGHAM SHOAL 18 09 N 94 07 E 7.41

BROWN ISLAND 10 45 N 98 03 E 8.89

BROWN ROCK 12 41 N 98 11 E 8.50

BRUNNETTE ISLAND 12 14 N 97 52 E 8.61

BRUSH ISLET 13 17 N 93 04 E 9.25

BURAL REEF 22 30 N 69 19 E 1.19

BURGESS ROCK 16 00 N 94 22 E 8.8

BURHABALANG RIVER 21 29 N 87 03 E 7.2

BURNE ISLAND 12 27 N 98 05 E 8.49

BURNE ROCKS 20 15 N 92 45 E 7.32

BUSHBY ISLAND 11 24 N 98 08 E 8.71

BUTAWA POINT 6 19 N 81 29 E 4.37

BUTCHER ISLAND 18 58 N 72 54 E 2.29

BUTTON ISLAND 16 00 N 97 34 E 8.24

BYRAMGORE REEF 11 55 N 71 45 E 5.2

C

CADELL BAY 13 26 N 93 04 E 9.23

CALCUTTA 22 33 N 88 19 E 7.9

CALICUT 11 15 N 75 46 E 3.27

CALVENTURAS ISLANDS 16 54 N 94 16 E 7.42

CAMELS HUMP 11 25 N 76 08 E 3.26

CAMORTA ISLAND 8 09 N 93 29 E 9.58

CAMPBELL REEF 10 47 N 98 26 E 8.83

CAMPBELL ROCK 11 33 N 98 34 E 8.78

CAMPBELL SHOAL 12 25 N 93 04 E 9.32

CANNANORE 11 52 N 75 22 E 3.22

CANTOR ISLAND 12 13 N 98 15 E 8.63

CAP AND FEATHERS 11 50 N 98 09 E 8.68

CAPE BLUFF 12 12 N 92 40 E 9.18

CAPE COMORIN 8 05 N 77 33 E 4.3

CAPE NEGRAIS 16 02 N 94 12 E 8.2

CAPE PRICE 13 35 N 93 02 E 9.10

CAPE RAMA 15 05 N 73 55 E 3.2

CAR NICOBAR 9 15 N 92 46 E 9.52

CAR NICOBAR ISLAND 9 15 N 92 46 E 9.52

CARPENTER SHOALS 18 15 N 94 02 E 7.41

CASH ISLAND 9 49 N 98 07 E 8.95

CASTLE BAY 8 27 N 93 38 E 9.56

CASTLE ROCKS 16 28 N 97 37 E 8.24

CASUARINA BAY 7 01 N 93 41 E 9.69

CASUARINA POINT 9 14 N 98 21 E 8.103

CAVENDISH ISLAND 15 30 N 97 40 E 8.26

CAVERN ISLAND 10 20 N 98 00 E 8.90

CELERITY PASSAGE 11 46 N 98 20 E 8.75

CELIA ROCK 11 19 N 98 04 E 8.70

CENTER ISLANDS 8 35 N 97 38 E 8.105

CENTRAL SAND 19 58 N 86 24 E 6.36

CHALNA BAZAR 22 28 N 89 35 E 7.14

CHANDPUR 23 09 N 90 33 E 7.17

CHANK REEF 22 30 N 69 19 E 1.19

CHAPEL POINT 8 33 N 81 15 E 4.48

CHAPORA FORT 15 36 N 73 44 E 2.51

CHARLOTTE ISLAND 11 19 N 98 01 E 8.70

CHATHAM ISLAND 11 41 N 92 44 E 9.45

CHATHAM ISLAND 13 19 N 93 02 E 9.26

CHAUKDAW ROCK 13 46 N 98 11 E 8.40

CHAVES SHOAL 10 04 N 98 17 E 8.92

CHEDUBA 18 58 N 93 38 E 7.43

CHENNAI 13 06 N 80 18 E 6.13

CHERBANIANI REEF 12 20 N 71 55 E 5.2

CHESTER ISLAND 12 02 N 97 46 E 8.61

CHETLAT ISLAND 11 41 N 72 42 E 5.3

CHETWAI 10 32 N 76 03 E 3.29

CHETWAYI 10 32 N 76 03 E 3.29

CHILAW POINT 7 36 N 79 48 E 4.15

CHILDERS CHANNEL 18 30 N 93 52 E 7.48

CHILKA LAKE 19 45 N 85 23 E 6.37

CHIMNEY ISLAND 9 51 N 98 03 E 8.94

CHINA BAKIR RIVER 16 19 N 96 06 E 8.11

CHIRIYA TAPU 11 29 N 92 43 E 9.47

CHITTAGONG 22 19 N 91 49 E 7.21

CHOK RIVER 22 57 N 69 00 E 1.9

CHOKEY SHOAL 16 41 N 96 14 E 8.13

CHOWRA ISLAND 8 27 N 93 04 E 9.55

CHRISTIE ISLAND 9 38 N 97 58 E 8.94

CHRISTMAS ISLAND 12 00 N 98 09 E 8.64

CHULA LANKA 5 56 N 80 32 E 4.28

CHURMA ISLAND 24 54 N 66 36 E 1.1

CINQUE ISLANDS 11 17 N 92 43 E 9.48

CLARA ISLAND 10 54 N 97 55 E 8.80

CLEUGH PASSAGE 13 36 N 93 02 E 9.10

CLEUGH ROCKS 13 37 N 92 58 E 9.10

COCANADA BAY 17 00 N 82 19 E 6.25

COCHIN 9 58 N 76 14 E 3.30

COCKATOO POINT 16 30 N 94 40 E 8.8

COCKBURN ISLANDS 10 12 N 97 59 E 8.90

COCO CHANNEL 13 47 N 93 12 E 9.4

COCONUT ISLAND 13 23 N 74 40 E 3.15

COLABA POINT 18 54 N 72 49 E 2.29

COLEBROOKE ISLAND 12 14 N 92 54 E 9.32

COLEBROOKE PASSAGE 12 13 N 92 53 E 9.33

COLLIES ISLAND 10 59 N 98 27 E 8.83

COLOMBO 6 57 N 79 51 E 4.17

COLOMBO LIGHT 6 56 N 79 50 E 4.17

COMBERMERE BAY 19 37 N 93 29 E 7.35

CONE ISLET 11 23 N 98 06 E 8.71

CONSTANCE BAY 11 42 N 92 36 E 9.19

CONSTITUTION BANK 11 24 N 98 04 E 8.71

COOMBS PILLAR 22 15 N 91 51 E 7.20

COONDAPOOR 13 38 N 74 41 E 3.14

COOPERS DRIVER ISLAND 11 27 N 97 55 E 8.71

CORBIN ISLAND 12 29 N 98 09 E 8.50

COURTS ISLAND 11 57 N 98 00 E 8.62

COVELONG POINT 12 47 N 80 15 E 6.12

COVELONG POINT 8 23 N 76 58 E 3.37

COW AND CALF ISLETS 14 57 N 93 43 E 9.2

COX'S BAZAR 21 27 N 91 58 E 7.24

CRAWFORD SHOAL 16 29 N 94 13 E 7.58

CROSS HARBOR 8 02 N 93 32 E 9.61

CROWN ISLAND 11 50 N 98 05 E 8.68

CUDDALORE 11 43 N 79 46 E 6.9

CUTTERS PATCH 18 28 N 93 54 E 7.48

CYPRESS SANDS 20 40 N 92 18 E 7.30

D

D'APRES SHOAL 22 00 N 91 09 E 7.16

D'SILVA SHOAL 16 38 N 96 15 E 8.13

DAHANU 19 59 N 72 43 E 2.23

DALHOUSIE SAND 21 24 N 88 51 E 7.12

DALRYMPLE BANK 10 31 N 92 14 E 9.7

DAMAN 20 25 N 72 50 E 2.22

DAMOA 20 25 N 72 50 E 2.22

DANAI 19 59 N 85 20 E 6.37

DANSON BAY 17 12 N 94 29 E 7.56

DANSON PEAK 14 32 N 74 27 E 3.9

DATHAT ISLAND 15 00 N 97 46 E 8.30

DAVIS ISLAND 9 49 N 98 02 E 8.94

DELFT ISLAND 9 31 N 79 41 E 4.61

DELGARNO ISLAND 13 25 N 93 06 E 9.23

DENNIS ROCK 11 49 N 98 06 E 8.68

DEVI RIVER 19 59 N 86 24 E 6.38

DEVILS HORN 16 05 N 97 33 E 8.22

DHAMRA RIVER 20 47 N 86 58 E 6.42
Index—Gazetteer 287

Pub. 173

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

DHANI ISLAND 22 24 N 69 33 E 1.20

DHANUSHKODI 9 11 N 79 25 E 4.62

DIAMOND HARBOR ANCHORAGE 22 11 N 88 11 E 7.8

DIAMOND SAND 22 10 N 88 10 E 7.6

DICEY SHOAL 19 27 N 93 27 E 7.37

DIGURA 3 33 N 72 55 E 5.44

DILIGENT STRAIT 12 10 N 92 57 E 9.34

DIU HARBOR 20 43 N 71 00 E 2.4

DIU HEAD 20 41 N 70 50 E 2.2

DOLPHIN ISLANDS 10 55 N 98 15 E 8.82

DOLPHIN SHOAL 21 51 N 91 46 E 7.19

DOLPHIN'S NOSE 14 43 N 97 52 E 8.32

DOLPHIN'S NOSE 17 41 N 83 17 E 6.27

DOMEL ISLAND 11 39 N 98 15 E 8.69

DONDRA HEAD 5 55 N 80 36 E 4.29

DONGRI POINT 19 18 N 72 48 E 2.26

DONNELLY ISLAND 11 54 N 98 26 E 8.74

DONNELLY REEF 11 55 N 98 25 E 8.74

DORAVA POINT 6 12 N 81 19 E 4.35

DORIC BEACON 8 47 N 79 56 E 4.13

DORIS ROCK 11 43 N 98 06 E 8.69

DOROTHY ISLAND 11 24 N 98 11 E 8.71

DOUBLE ISLAND 15 52 N 97 35 E 8.24

DOUBLE ISLET 9 27 N 98 20 E 8.99

DOUBLE ROCK 12 01 N 98 11 E 8.64

DRAGON SHOAL 18 53 N 93 59 E 7.50

DRAKE ISLAND 9 46 N 98 01 E 8.94

DRUNKEN SAILOR ROCK 18 33 N 94 13 E 7.52

DUBLA SHOAL 21 46 N 89 31 E 7.13

DUNCAN ISLAND 12 01 N 92 47 E 9.41

DUNCAN PASSAGE 11 04 N 92 40 E 9.49

DUNKIN ISLAND 9 47 N 98 07 E 8.95

DWARKA POINT 22 14 N 68 57 E 1.32

E

EAST BAY 7 59 N 93 25 E 9.62

EAST CAPE 8 12 N 77 47 E 4.4

EAST ISLET 11 57 N 97 45 E 8.62

EAST REEF 18 30 N 93 56 E 7.48

EASTERN CHANNEL LIGHT VESSEL 20 55 N 88 15 E 7.4

EASTERN SANDS 16 26 N 94 24 E 8.12

EASTERN SEA REEF 21 14 N 88 03 E 7.5

EASTERN SHOALS 8 02 N 93 34 E 9.61

ELATTUR CAPE 11 19 N 75 44 E 3.26

ELBOW POINT 16 32 N 94 41 E 8.8

ELBOW POINT 9 02 N 98 20 E 8.106

ELEPHANT ISLAND 11 50 N 98 10 E 8.68

ELEPHANT POINT 16 28 N 96 20 E 8.12

ELEPHANT POINT 21 11 N 92 03 E 7.29

ELEPHANT ROCK 11 13 N 98 39 E 8.79

ELICALPENI BANK 11 15 N 74 03 E 5.5

ELIZA ISLAND 11 24 N 98 00 E 8.70

ELIZABETH ISLAND 8 30 N 81 13 E 4.46

ELPHINSTONE ISLAND 12 20 N 98 00 E 8.49

ELPHISTONE HARBOR 12 18 N 92 54 E 9.34

ENCIAM ISLET 8 13 N 77 11 E 3.37

ENNUR SHOAL 13 17 N 80 23 E 6.15

ENTRANCE ISLET 12 28 N 98 03 E 8.49

EQUATORIAL CHANNEL 0 00 N 73 15 E 5.64

EXPEDITION HARBOR 8 03 N 93 30 E 9.60

F

FADIFFOLU ATOLL 5 25 N 73 30 E 5.27

FAIRWAY ROCKS 16 28 N 97 37 E 8.24

FAKIR POINT 20 07 N 92 54 E 7.33

FAKIR REEF 20 06 N 92 54 E 7.33

FALSE BAY 20 31 N 86 55 E 6.40

FALSE DIVI POINT 15 43 N 80 50 E 6.20

FALSE POINT 20 20 N 86 44 E 6.40

FALSE POINT ANCHORAGE 20 28 N 86 47 E 6.40

FARNA 3 19 N 72 59 E 5.52

FEHINGILI 5 33 N 73 29 E 5.27

FELL PASSAGE 12 18 N 98 21 E 8.57

FIORI 0 14 N 73 05 E 5.62

FIVE ISLANDS 10 17 N 98 22 E 8.85

FIVE SISTERS 11 23 N 98 00 E 8.70

FLAGSTAFF POINT 8 35 N 81 15 E 4.47

FLAT ISLAND 20 11 N 92 58 E 7.33

FLAT ISLAND SPIT 20 10 N 92 57 E 7.33

FLAT REEF 18 55 N 94 00 E 7.50

FLY ROCK 11 30 N 98 06 E 8.66

FORD BAY 14 08 N 93 23 E 9.4

FORREST PASSAGE 11 05 N 98 04 E 8.80

FORREST STRAIT 10 50 N 98 21 E 8.80

FORT BAY 8 02 N 93 31 E 9.61

FOUL BAY 12 19 N 92 42 E 9.15

FREAK ISLET 12 41 N 97 53 E 8.47

FRIAR'S HOOD 7 26 N 81 30 E 4.40

FUA MULAKU ISLAND 0 17 S 73 26 E 5.65

FULIDU 3 41 N 73 24 E 5.47

FULIDU CHANNEL 3 45 N 73 25 E 5.46

FURI 3 01 N 73 01 E 5.53

G

GAHA FARO 4 16 N 72 45 E 5.43

GALBODA KANDA 6 24 N 80 01 E 4.21

GALBOKKA POINT 6 56 N 79 50 E 4.17

GALBRAITH ROCK 12 50 N 98 34 E 8.45

GALEE POINT 17 00 N 73 16 E 2.40

GALGODIYANA 5 56 N 80 32 E 4.28

GALLE HARBOR 6 01 N 80 13 E 4.24

GALLOPER SAND 15 38 N 97 40 E 8.26

GAN 0 17 N 73 22 E 5.62

GAN 0 41 S 73 10 E 5.69

GANGAVALI RIVER 14 36 N 74 18 E 3.8

GANGAVAREM 17 36 N 83 14 E 6.27

GANGAWALI RIVER 14 36 N 74 18 E 3.8

GANGES HARBOR 7 13 N 93 48 E 9.67

GANJAM 19 23 N 85 04 E 6.37

GAW TAUNG 18 31 N 19 16 E 7.52

GHOGHA 21 41 N 72 17 E 2.15

GHORPARAY ROCK 15 10 N 97 43 E 8.29

GILES BANK 19 28 N 93 27 E 7.36

GIRAVARU 4 12 N 73 24 E 5.38

GLADYS ISLAND 12 49 N 98 36 E 8.45

GLASSHOUSE ISLAND 9 45 N 97 59 E 8.94

GODAGALA POINT 6 25 N 80 00 E 4.21

GODAVARI POINT 16 59 N 82 20 E 6.24

GODAWAYE POINT 6 06 N 80 03 E 4.31

GODIA CREEK 23 14 N 68 35 E 1.9

GONO GALA 6 42 N 79 53 E 4.18

GOODWIN SANDS 16 07 N 97 35 E 8.22

GOPALPUR 19 15 N 84 55 E 6.35

GOPNATH POINT 21 12 N 72 07 E 2.13

GORAKHANATH 21 32 N 70 32 E 1.35

GOYANGYI KYUN 16 32 N 94 15 E 7.58

GRAHAM ISLAND 9 39 N 98 02 E 8.95

GRANDI ISLANDS 15 21 N 73 46 E 2.53

GREAT BASSES REEF 6 11 N 81 29 E 4.36

GREAT COCO ISLAND 14 06 N 93 23 E 9.4

GREAT NICOBAR ISLAND 7 00 N 93 49 E 9.66

GREAT SAYER ISLAND 8 39 N 97 39 E 8.104

GREAT SWINTON ISLANDS 10 34 N 98 03 E 8.89

GREAT WESTERN TORRES ISLANDS 11 47 N 97 30 E 8.62

GREEN ISLAND 16 04 N 97 33 E 8.22

GREGORY GROUP 10 40 N 98 21 E 8.84

GRUB ISLAND 11 35 N 92 36 E 9.20

GUDALI HILL 14 01 N 80 01 E 6.16

GUITAR ISLAND 12 21 N 92 55 E 9.31

GULHI 3 59 N 73 30 E 5.41

GULL ISLET 18 50 N 72 54 E 2.29

GUPTA POINT 22 15 N 91 50 E 7.21

GURU 3 59 N 73 30 E 5.41

GWA BAY 17 37 N 94 34 E 7.55

GWA KYUN 17 34 N 94 31 E 7.55

GYUN THAUNG 12 20 N 98 24 E 8.58

H

HADDUMMATI ATOLL 1 55 N 73 25 E 5.58

HAING GYI KYUN 16 00 N 94 19 E 8.7

HAING GYI SHOAL 15 57 N 94 17 E 8.6

HALDIA 22 01 N 88 05 E 7.7

HALDIA POINT 22 01 N 88 04 E 7.7

HALF MOON REEF 10 50 N 98 18 E 8.82

HAMBANTOTA 6 07 N 81 08 E 4.32

HAMIDARDIA ISLAND 21 30 N 91 57 E 7.24
288 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 173

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

HANIKANDU FARO 5 17 N 72 51 E 5.30

HANSTAL CREEK 22 56 N 70 24 E 1.31

HANUMAN POINT 22 28 N 69 09 E 1.18

HARINGHATA RIVER 21 50 N 89 57 E 7.15

HARRY HEAD 9 52 N 98 27 E 8.99

HASTINGS HARBOR 10 06 N 98 18 E 8.92

HASTINGS SAND 16 44 N 96 13 E 8.13

HATTRASS PASSAGE 12 11 N 97 44 E 8.61

HAYCOCK 6 20 N 80 18 E 4.2

HAYCOCK ISLAND 12 17 N 98 10 E 8.60

HAYCOCK ROCK 9 41 N 97 55 E 8.94

HAYES ISLAND 11 52 N 97 40 E 8.62

HAYES ISLAND 12 29 N 98 11 E 8.50

HAYES ISLAND 9 20 N 98 20 E 8.99

HAYWARD ISLAND 10 27 N 97 57 E 8.89

HAYWARD POINT 6 47 N 93 52 E 9.73

HAZIRA LNG TERMINAL 21 06 N 72 37 E 2.12

HAZIRA OFFSHORE TERMINAL 21 09 N 72 34 E 2.11

HEADLAM PATCH 12 24 N 92 59 E 9.32

HEADLAM PATCH 15 08 N 97 38 E 8.18

HEATH ROCK 11 55 N 98 19 E 8.74

HECKFORD BANK 10 20 N 97 10 E 8.88

HECKFORD PATCH 19 57 N 92 44 E 7.28

HEINZE CHAUNG 14 43 N 97 54 E 8.32

HELEN PASSAGE 19 24 N 93 27 E 7.37

HENRY PRINSEP ISLAND 12 03 N 97 38 E 8.61

HENRY ROCKS 18 52 N 93 27 E 7.46

HEXT ROCK 12 08 N 98 16 E 8.64

HEYWOOD CHANNEL 18 34 N 93 49 E 7.47

HICKMAN SHOAL 13 42 N 93 59 E 9.5

HIGH ISLAND 16 37 N 94 18 E 7.57

HIGH PEAKED ISLAND 11 27 N 98 08 E 8.71

HIKKADUWA POINT 6 08 N 80 06 E 4.22

HIN PAYAN 8 30 N 97 40 E 8.105

HIN PUSAR 8 37 N 97 39 E 8.104

HINDELNATTU 6 07 N 80 24 E 4.21

HINIDUMA KANDA 6 20 N 80 18 E 4.2

HITADU 1 48 N 73 25 E 5.59

HMAWUN LUMPS 16 34 N 96 15 E 8.13

HNGETPYAW KYUN 15 11 N 97 43 E 8.29

HNGETTHAIK KYUN 13 32 N 98 08 E 8.34

HOBDAY ISLAND 11 32 N 92 37 E 9.20

HOINIPOH BAY 7 58 N 93 26 E 9.62

HOLLY ISLAND 12 00 N 98 12 E 8.67

HOMFRAY STRAIT 12 15 N 92 52 E 9.33

HONAVAR 14 17 N 74 27 E 3.10

HONDEDU 0 27 N 72 57 E 5.63

HOPE ISLAND 16 49 N 82 20 E 6.23

HOPE POINT 15 21 N 97 43 E 8.27

HORSBURGH ATOLL 4 52 N 72 55 E 5.31

HORSBURGH ISLAND 10 12 N 97 53 E 8.90

HORSESHOE SHOAL 20 05 N 92 51 E 7.33

HUGLI POINT 22 13 N 88 04 E 7.6

HUGLI RIVER ENTRANCE 21 39 N 88 01 E 7.4

HUMANI POINT 22 29 N 69 04 E 1.16

HUMANI POINT 22 29 N 69 04 E 1.10

HUNTERS BAY 19 55 N 93 19 E 7.34

HUT BAY 10 36 N 92 35 E 9.50

I

IHAVANDIFFULU ATOLL 7 02 N 72 54 E 5.17

ILEYA 7 25 N 93 42 E 9.64

ILLUKATIYA POINT 6 30 N 81 42 E 4.37

IMMA 4 18 N 73 34 E 5.36

INGLIS ISLAND 12 08 N 93 07 E 9.38

INGLIS SHOALS 12 06 N 93 08 E 9.38

INTERVIEW ISLAND 12 55 N 92 42 E 9.13

INVESTIGATOR BANK 8 32 N 73 17 E 5.14

INVESTIGATOR CHANNEL 10 15 N 97 56 E 8.90

INVESTIGATOR LEDGE 18 01 N 94 09 E 7.41

INVESTIGATOR PASSAGE 12 45 N 97 48 E 8.47

INVESTIGATOR PATCH 13 57 N 93 16 E 9.4

INVESTIGATOR REEF 22 36 N 69 33 E 1.19

INVESTIGATOR ROCK 11 20 N 92 37 E 9.22

INVESTIGATOR ROCK 18 58 N 84 42 E 6.34

INVISIBLE BANK 11 10 N 93 31 E 9.7

IRNATIVU NORTH 9 17 N 79 59 E 4.61

IRON ISLAND 12 45 N 98 20 E 8.43

IRON PASSAGE 12 42 N 98 22 E 8.50

IRRAWADDY ROCK 19 25 N 93 23 E 7.29

ISDU 2 07 N 73 35 E 5.58

ISLE OF MAN 8 24 N 93 39 E 9.56

ISLET POINT 21 00 N 71 41 E 2.8

J

JACKSON CREEK 10 48 N 92 24 E 9.50

JACKSON LEDGE 13 39 N 93 08 E 9.6

JAFARABAD 20 52 N 71 23 E 2.6

JAFFNA 9 39 N 80 01 E 4.61

JAIGARH BAY 17 18 N 73 13 E 2.39

JAIGARH HEAD 17 18 N 73 11 E 2.39

JAMES PATCH 10 05 N 98 19 E 8.92

JAMNAGAR TERMINAL 22 30 N 69 50 E 1.24

JANE ISLAND 11 21 N 98 01 E 8.70

JANE ISLAND 11 22 N 98 01 E 8.66

JANET ISLAND 11 21 N 98 01 E 8.70

JAWAHAR DWEEP 18 58 N 72 54 E 2.29

JAWAHARLAL NEHRU PORT 18 57 N 72 57 E 2.29

JEFFORD POINT LIGHT 21 44 N 89 32 E 7.13

JEFFORD SHOAL 10 48 N 98 21 E 8.84

JERRY ISLAND 14 03 N 93 22 E 9.4

JOAN ISLAND 11 15 N 98 18 E 8.72

JODIYA 22 42 N 70 18 E 1.27

JOHNNY ISLAND 12 22 N 98 14 E 8.59

JOHNSTON POINT 21 49 N 72 13 E 2.20

JOLLY BOYS ISLAND 11 30 N 92 37 E 9.20

JUANITA SHOALS 16 00 N 93 40 E 7.42

JUBILEE CHANNEL 11 19 N 98 15 E 8.71

JUNGLE ISLAND 13 20 N 93 03 E 9.26

K

KABOSA ISLAND 12 48 N 97 51 E 8.47

KABRA ISLAND 7 18 N 93 51 E 9.70

KABYACHAUNG 11 27 N 98 43 E 8.78

KACHCHAITIVU 9 23 N 79 25 E 4.62

KACHCHTIVU 9 23 N 79 25 E 4.62

KADALUR POINT 11 28 N 75 38 E 3.25

KADAN KYUN 12 40 N 98 21 E 8.44

KADAN KYUN SOUND 12 37 N 98 26 E 8.44

KADDAIKADU 9 34 N 80 29 E 4.53

KADEAWELLA POINT 8 12 N 81 26 E 4.44

KAHANDAWA ROCKS 6 03 N 80 54 E 4.31

KAKANA 9 07 N 92 48 E 9.53

KAKANA TAUNG 15 41 N 97 43 E 8.25

KAKINADA BAY 17 00 N 82 19 E 6.25

KALA KYUN 12 30 N 98 30 E 8.52

KALA TAUNG 10 40 N 98 29 E 8.83

KALAMETIYA POINT 6 04 N 80 56 E 4.31

KALEGAUK ISLAND 15 33 N 97 40 E 8.26

KALINGAPATAM 18 20 N 84 09 E 6.32

KALMUNAI POINT 9 36 N 80 03 E 4.61

KALPENI 10 06 N 73 39 E 5.12

KALUTARA 6 35 N 79 58 E 4.19

KALUWATTE GALA 6 39 N 79 53 E 4.18

KALWIN POINT 12 29 N 98 36 E 8.52

KANDAUNG PROMONTORY 14 40 N 97 53 E 8.32

KANDLA 23 00 N 70 13 E 1.30

KANDUDU 5 39 N 73 16 E 5.25

KANDUFURI 2 32 N 73 00 E 5.56

KANIKA SAND 20 47 N 87 00 E 6.43

KANKESANTURAI 9 49 N 80 03 E 4.57

KANSA ROCK 18 50 N 72 54 E 2.29

KANTU ROCKS 13 20 N 98 24 E 8.42

KANYAKUMARI PORT 8 13 N 77 11 E 3.39

KAO PHRAMI 9 18 N 98 28 E 8.97

KAP LIGHT 13 13 N 74 44 E 3.16

KARACHI 24 47 N 66 59 E 1.3

KARACHI ROCK 10 37 N 98 23 E 8.84

KARAITIVU 9 44 N 79 53 E 4.57

KARATHURI BAY 10 58 N 98 36 E 8.79

KARDIVA 4 58 N 73 27 E 5.33

KARDIVA CHANNEL 5 00 N 73 30 E 5.32

KARIKAL PORT 10 50 N 79 51 E 6.5

KARWAR 14 49 N 74 07 E 3.4

KASARAGOD 12 29 N 75 00 E 3.19

KATAGARAMA PEAK 6 23 N 81 20 E 4.34

KATCHALL ISLAND 7 56 N 93 22 E 9.62

KATHEMA KYUN 13 40 N 98 11 E 8.39
Index—Gazetteer 289

Pub. 173

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

KATHERINE ISLAND 11 18 N 98 13 E 8.71

KATUKURUNDU 5 58 N 80 23 E 4.25

KATYANG 10 51 N 98 16 E 8.82

KAVARATTI ISLAND 10 34 N 72 39 E 5.10

KAVITI BEACON 19 02 N 84 42 E 6.34

KAWSONG HARBOR 9 59 N 98 33 E 8.102

KAYAING RIVER 18 45 N 94 09 E 7.51

KAYO ISLAND 12 04 N 98 24 E 8.74

KAYTS 9 42 N 79 51 E 4.60

KELAI 6 58 N 73 13 E 5.23

KEMOIS BAY 9 07 N 92 46 E 9.53

KENNEDY ISLAND 11 50 N 98 28 E 8.75

KHAMBHAT 22 18 N 72 37 E 2.20

KHANDERI ISLAND 18 42 N 72 49 E 2.29

KHANHOJI ANGRE 18 42 N 72 49 E 2.29

KHARNDUDU 5 39 N 73 16 E 5.25

KHLONG BANGBEN 9 39 N 98 29 E 8.102

KHORI CREEK 23 30 N 68 20 E 1.8

KHUDDI CREEK 24 36 N 67 12 E 1.6

KILTAN ISLAND 11 29 N 73 00 E 5.4

KINGS BANK SAND 16 44 N 96 12 E 8.13

KINNEARS PASSAGE 10 59 N 98 28 E 8.79

KLONG BAGATAE 8 35 N 98 14 E 8.108

KLONG KOKAK 8 41 N 98 15 E 8.107

KNAP 12 13 N 98 02 E 8.61

KO CHAN 9 25 N 97 52 E 8.96

KO HUYONG 8 29 N 97 39 E 8.105

KO KAM YAI 9 29 N 98 21 E 8.99

KO KHAN 9 52 N 98 26 E 8.99

KO LUMPHUK 8 19 N 98 16 E 8.108

KO PAYAN 8 31 N 97 39 E 8.105

KO PAYANG 8 30 N 97 38 E 8.105

KO SIMILAN 8 39 N 97 39 E 8.104

KOATTEY 0 35 S 73 05 E 5.69

KODUWAKATTU MALAI 8 52 N 81 05 E 4.52

KOH BORN 8 51 N 97 48 E 8.104

KOH CHANG 9 50 N 98 27 E 8.99

KOH CHONG PIANAM 9 34 N 98 23 E 8.99

KOH PIAM 9 44 N 98 25 E 8.99

KOH TASAI 9 04 N 97 50 E 8.104

KOHINUR SHOAL 21 07 N 91 38 E 7.19

KOILTHOTTAM 8 59 N 76 32 E 3.32

KOKUNYE KYUN 15 18 N 97 43 E 8.27

KOLACHEL 8 10 N 77 15 E 3.38

KOLKATA 22 33 N 88 19 E 7.9

KOLLAM 8 53 N 76 35 E 3.31

KOLUMADULU ATOLL 2 23 N 73 08 E 5.56

KONADA 18 01 N 83 34 E 6.31

KONDUL HARBOR 7 12 N 93 43 E 9.67

KONDUL ISLAND 7 13 N 93 43 E 9.67

KONGOLA 6 34 N 81 42 E 4.39

KORONGE ISLAND 16 32 N 94 15 E 7.58

KOTADA BLUFF 21 07 N 71 58 E 2.8

KOTARA ANCHORAGE 11 59 N 92 45 E 9.41

KOTTAGODA POINT 5 57 N 80 38 E 4.29

KOTTAPALLI 9 19 N 76 23 E 3.32

KOTTAPATAM 15 26 N 80 10 E 6.19

KOVALAM POINT 8 23 N 76 58 E 3.37

KOVILTHOTTAM 8 59 N 76 32 E 3.32

KOZHIKODE 11 15 N 75 46 E 3.27

KRISHNA RIVER 15 45 N 80 54 E 6.20

KRISHNA SHOAL 15 41 N 95 37 E 8.11

KRISHNAPATNAM 14 15 N 80 08 E 6.17

KUDA HUVADU 2 41 N 72 54 E 5.54

KUDA POINT 21 38 N 72 18 E 2.14

KUDAHUVADU CHANNEL 2 40 N 73 15 E 5.55

KUDREMALAI POINT 8 32 N 79 52 E 4.14

KUMBARU POINT 18 13 N 72 56 E 2.34

KUMLA PATCH 12 58 N 98 28 E 8.45

KUMPTA POINT 14 25 N 74 23 E 3.9

KUMTA POINT 14 25 N 74 23 E 3.9

KUNDAGAL POINT 9 15 N 79 13 E 4.9

KUNDAPUR 13 38 N 74 41 E 3.14

KUNDUGAL POINT 9 15 N 79 13 E 4.9

KURA ISLET 16 06 N 73 27 E 2.46

KURELI 2 47 N 73 21 E 5.50

KUSHIPUR POINT 16 57 N 73 17 E 2.41

KUSULDIVA GUDDA 14 38 N 74 16 E 3.7

KUTUBDIA CHANNEL 21 44 N 91 52 E 7.23

KUTUDBIA ISLAND 21 51 N 91 52 E 7.22

KWANGTUNG STRAIT 12 06 N 93 04 E 9.36

KYAUKPANDU 19 29 N 93 30 E 7.36

KYAUKPYU 19 25 N 93 33 E 7.39

KYAUKPYU HARBOR 19 27 N 93 34 E 7.36

KYAUKPYU KYUN 13 46 N 97 55 E 8.19

KYAUNGTHA RIVER 16 57 N 94 26 E 7.57

KYETTAIK KYUN 15 10 N 97 45 E 8.29

KYUN PILA 10 34 N 98 00 E 8.89

KYUNGYI 15 05 N 97 44 E 8.30

KYUNHLA TAUNG 13 02 N 98 28 E 8.45

KYUNTHAYA 19 43 N 93 27 E 7.34

L

LABYRINTH ISLANDS 11 35 N 92 34 E 9.20

LACAMS CHANNEL 21 13 N 88 24 E 7.10

LA-E-ALE ISLAND 12 20 N 98 15 E 8.60

LA-E-ATET ISLAND 12 18 N 98 15 E 8.60

LAEM KRANGNOI 8 50 N 98 15 E 8.107

LAEM KRANGYAI 8 44 N 98 14 E 8.107

LAFUL ANCHORAGE 7 10 N 93 54 E 9.71

LALLA ROOKH ISLAND 11 30 N 98 30 E 8.76

LAMP ISLAND 9 43 N 98 01 E 8.94

LANDFALL ISLAND 13 39 N 93 02 E 9.5

LANDS END 9 10 N 79 26 E 4.11

LATOUCHE ISLAND 13 05 N 92 43 E 9.13

LATTADIA ISLAND 21 35 N 91 51 E 7.23

LAWS ISLAND 19 26 N 93 37 E 7.36

LENYA RIVER 11 40 N 98 43 E 8.78

LESLIE'S GARDEN 11 47 N 98 20 E 8.75

LETKAT TAUNG 13 55 N 98 06 E 8.33

LION ROCK 12 24 N 97 49 E 8.48

LITTLE ANDAMAN ISLAND 10 42 N 92 31 E 9.50

LITTLE BASSES REEF 6 24 N 81 44 E 4.38

LITTLE COCO ISLAND 14 00 N 93 14 E 9.4

LITTLE NICOBAR ISLAND 7 20 N 93 42 E 9.64

LITTLE QUOIN ISLAND 16 39 N 94 20 E 7.57

LITTLE RUSSELL ISLAND 10 13 N 98 15 E 8.86

LITTLE TORRES ISLANDS 11 43 N 97 35 E 8.62

LIVOCK BAY 11 28 N 98 14 E 8.69

LOKTHAMA KYUN 11 54 N 98 27 E 8.74

LOLIEM POINT 14 55 N 74 03 E 3.4

LOLIEN POINT 14 55 N 74 03 E 3.4

LONG ISLAND 12 24 N 92 57 E 9.31

LONG ISLAND 12 48 N 98 31 E 8.45

LONG SAND 16 04 N 94 28 E 8.8

LONGSTONES REEF 16 06 N 97 32 E 8.22

LORD LOUGHBOROUGH ISLAND 10 27 N 97 55 E 8.89

LOUGHBOROUGH PASSAGE 10 30 N 97 57 E 8.89

LOW ISLET 18 58 N 94 00 E 7.50

LOWER GASPER LIGHT VESSEL 21 22 N 88 10 E 7.5

LUHARA POINT 21 39 N 72 33 E 2.17

LUSHINGTON SHOAL 22 38 N 68 47 E 1.10

LYS SHOAL 12 39 N 98 25 E 8.44

M

MACHILIPATNAM 16 09 N 81 09 E 6.22

MACKENZIE ISLAND 10 04 N 97 59 E 8.90

MACKEY BANK 13 20 N 92 46 E 9.12

MACLEOD ISLAND 12 25 N 98 09 E 8.59

MACPHERSON STRAIT 11 30 N 92 36 E 9.21

MADA GALA 6 02 N 80 09 E 4.23

MADHWAD BAY 20 42 N 70 56 E 2.2

MADRAS 13 06 N 80 18 E 6.13

MADUNI FARO 5 53 N 72 54 E 5.29

MADUNI FARO 6 51 N 72 57 E 5.22

MAFURI 0 50 N 73 08 E 5.63

MAGAMPURA PORT 6 07 N 81 06 E 4.33

MAGYI KYUN 18 44 N 94 00 E 7.49

MAHANADI RIVER 20 18 N 86 44 E 6.40

MAHE 11 42 N 75 32 E 3.25

MAHIM 19 39 N 72 43 E 2.24

MAHRATTA ROCK 13 42 N 98 11 E 8.39

MAHUVA BAY 21 02 N 71 47 E 2.8

MAINGY ISLAND 12 31 N 98 15 E 8.50

MAIPURA RIVER 20 42 N 87 00 E 6.41

MAISKHAL CHANNEL 21 30 N 91 59 E 7.23

MAISKHAL ISLAND 21 37 N 91 56 E 7.22

MAKUNUDU ATOLL 6 20 N 72 36 E 5.26

MALACCA VILLAGE 9 10 N 92 49 E 9.53

MALANGAR 19 06 N 73 11 E 2.29
290 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 173

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

MALAY ISLAND 11 32 N 92 37 E 9.20

MALCOM ISLAND 11 18 N 98 32 E 8.77

MALE 4 10 N 73 30 E 5.37

MALE ATOLL 4 25 N 73 30 E 5.35

MALPE 13 21 N 75 42 E 3.15

MALVAN BAY 16 06 N 73 28 E 2.47

MALVAN ROCK 16 02 N 73 26 E 2.48

MAMIGILI 3 30 N 72 50 E 5.45

MANADU 5 47 N 73 24 E 5.25

MANAPPAD POINT 8 22 N 78 04 E 4.4

MANDALAY 21 59 N 96 08 E 8.16

MANDRELL REEF 12 57 N 98 32 E 8.45

MANDVI 22 49 N 69 21 E 1.10

MANDVI 22 50 N 69 21 E 1.12

MANDVI BREAKWATER 22 49 N 69 21 E 1.10

MANDWA BAY 20 42 N 70 56 E 2.2

MANGALORE 12 51 N 74 50 E 3.18

MANGROVE BAY 11 41 N 92 43 E 9.46

MANIARA 23 28 N 68 37 E 1.8

MANNAR ISLAND 9 05 N 79 50 E 4.12

MANNERS STRAIT 11 20 N 92 42 E 9.48

MANORA POINT 24 47 N 66 59 E 1.2

MANSFIELD PATCH 9 10 N 79 18 E 4.10

MARBLE ISLAND 10 45 N 98 18 E 8.82

MARBLE POINT 8 31 N 81 13 E 4.49

MARCUS ISLAND 12 39 N 98 12 E 8.50

MAREGIRI 5 31 N 72 49 E 5.29

MARIA ISLAND 11 27 N 98 00 E 8.70

MARIAN ISLAND 11 51 N 98 12 E 8.68

MARMAGAO BAY 15 26 N 73 48 E 2.53

MARMUGAO HEAD 15 24 N 73 48 E 2.53

MARSACK SHOALS 12 57 N 92 57 E 9.28

MARSHALL CHANNEL 14 10 N 93 22 E 9.3

MARSHALL ROCK 9 23 N 97 49 E 8.96

MARTIN ISLAND 12 07 N 98 09 E 8.63

MARTINI SANDS 20 13 N 92 44 E 7.32

MASANUTIPPA TEMPLE 16 39 N 82 19 E 6.23

MATIWARI 4 12 N 72 44 E 5.45

MATLA RIVER 21 37 N 88 41 E 7.11

MAUNGMAGAN BAY 14 09 N 98 04 E 8.33

MAUNGMAGAN PASSAGE 14 00 N 97 50 E 8.19

MAW DENGI 15 57 N 94 15 E 8.3

MAWYUT POINT 11 31 N 98 32 E 8.78

MAYABUNDER SETTLEMENT 12 56 N 92 55 E 9.30

MAYAN ISLAND 12 15 N 98 17 E 8.63

MAYO BAY 18 18 N 94 22 E 7.54

MAYU RIVER 20 13 N 92 45 E 7.31

MEGHNA FLATS 21 30 N 90 24 E 7.16

MENCHAL ISLAND 7 24 N 93 45 E 9.64

MERGUI 12 28 N 98 36 E 8.54

MERGUI ISLANDS 12 10 N 98 25 E 8.55

MERMAID PASSAGE 12 22 N 97 51 E 8.48

METCALFE ISLAND 9 26 N 98 21 E 8.99

MEWSTONE ISLAND 12 04 N 98 02 E 8.63

MIBYA KYUN 13 36 N 98 12 E 8.39

MIDDLE BANK 12 32 N 92 25 E 9.7

MIDDLE BANK 16 30 N 96 20 E 8.13

MIDDLE BANK 19 04 N 93 59 E 7.51

MIDDLE BUTTON ISLAND 12 17 N 93 02 E 9.35

MIDDLE GROUND 15 38 N 97 42 E 8.27

MIDDLE ISLAND 9 04 N 97 50 E 8.104

MIDDLE PASSAGE 12 49 N 98 20 E 8.50

MIDDLE POINT 8 34 N 81 12 E 4.50

MIDDLETON BAR 21 36 N 88 03 E 7.5

MIDU 0 35 S 73 14 E 5.67

MILADUMMADULU ATOLL 6 10 N 73 08 E 5.24

MILESTONE ROCK 16 40 N 94 17 E 7.57

MILLS PASSAGE 12 15 N 92 55 E 9.34

MILLS PATCH 18 19 N 94 15 E 7.53

MINERVA BAY 13 19 N 93 04 E 9.25

MINERVA LEDGE 12 04 N 93 09 E 9.39

MINICOY ISLAND 8 17 N 73 03 E 5.13

MIROE ISLAND 7 31 N 93 32 E 9.63

MIRYA DONGHUR 17 02 N 73 16 E 2.40

MONEY ISLAND 11 50 N 98 17 E 8.74

MONGLA ANCHORAGE 22 28 N 89 35 E 7.14

MONGLA FAIRWAY LIGHTBUOY 21 27 N 89 34 E 7.13

MONKEY POINT 16 46 N 96 12 E 8.13

MONTGOMERY ISLAND 11 56 N 92 35 E 9.18

MORMUGAO BAY 15 26 N 73 48 E 2.53

MORRISON BAY 12 00 N 98 21 E 8.73

MOSCOS CHANNEL 14 30 N 97 51 E 8.19

MOSCOS ISLANDS 14 10 N 97 48 E 8.19

MOULMEIN HARBOR 16 29 N 97 37 E 8.24

MOULMEIN RIVER 16 09 N 97 31 E 8.20

MOUNT DELLI 12 02 N 75 12 E 3.20

MOUNT DILL 12 02 N 75 12 E 3.20

MOUNT LAVINIA 6 50 N 79 52 E 4.17

MOUNT TODD 20 23 N 92 42 E 7.31

MOUSE ISLAND 12 15 N 98 15 E 8.63

MUDWAH POINT 22 46 N 69 30 E 1.13

MUL DWARKA 20 45 N 70 40 E 1.37

MULAKU ATOLL 3 00 N 73 29 E 5.50

MULLAITTIVU LIGHT 9 16 N 80 49 E 4.52

MUMBAI 18 56 N 72 51 E 2.29

MUN AUNG ISLAND 18 47 N 93 38 E 7.46

MUN AUNG STRAIT 18 58 N 93 38 E 7.43

MUNDRA PORT 22 54 N 69 42 E 1.14

MURADU 6 33 N 72 54 E 5.23

MURICAADI MUNAI 8 12 N 81 26 E 4.44

MURUDJANJIRA HARBOR 18 18 N 72 57 E 2.33

MUS 9 14 N 92 47 E 9.53

MUTAPOLLI BANK 15 26 N 80 21 E 6.15

MUTTAM POINT 8 07 N 77 19 E 3.39

MUTTUM POINT 8 07 N 77 19 E 3.39

MUTWAL POINT 6 58 N 79 51 E 4.16

MYANG SHOAL 10 39 N 98 20 E 8.84

MYENGUN KYUN 20 00 N 92 58 E 7.33

MYINI ISLETS 12 24 N 98 26 E 8.57

MYINKWA AW 13 33 N 98 09 E 8.34

N

NAF RIVER 20 43 N 92 22 E 7.30

NAGAPATTINAM 10 46 N 79 51 E 6.3

NAGARI HILLS 13 34 N 79 37 E 6.16

NAGORE 10 50 N 79 50 E 6.4

NAGWA POINT 20 42 N 70 54 E 2.2

NAKTI CREEK 22 56 N 70 09 E 1.29

NAMUNAKULI 6 57 N 81 06 E 4.2

NANCOWRY LEDGE 12 20 N 92 56 E 9.31

NANCOWRY ROCK 13 48 N 74 33 E 3.13

NANCOWRY STRAIT 11 52 N 93 03 E 9.39

NANTHA KYUN 18 04 N 94 05 E 7.41

NARASAPUR POINT 16 18 N 81 43 E 6.23

NARAYANGANJ 23 37 N 90 32 E 7.17

NARCONDAM ISLAND 13 26 N 94 17 E 9.8

NASAPO KYUN 19 39 N 93 33 E 7.38

NAT KYUN 15 10 N 97 44 E 8.29

NAVAL POINT 8 02 N 93 22 E 9.61

NAVIBANDAR 21 27 N 69 47 E 1.35

NAVINAL POINT 22 44 N 69 43 E 1.13

NAWABANDAR 20 44 N 71 05 E 2.5

NEARCHUS PASSAGE 11 53 N 97 34 E 8.62

NEARCHUS ROCK 11 42 N 97 52 E 8.62

NEGAPATAM 10 46 N 79 51 E 6.3

NEGOMBO POINT 7 12 N 79 48 E 4.16

NEILL ISLAND 11 50 N 93 03 E 9.39

NERBUDDA SHOAL 18 22 N 93 59 E 7.48

NETRANI 14 01 N 74 20 E 3.11

NEW ISLAND 21 33 N 88 11 E 7.5

NEW MANGALORE 12 55 N 74 49 E 3.17

NEW SHOAL 18 05 N 94 15 E 7.41

NGAYOT BAY 16 34 N 94 18 E 7.57

NGAYOT TAUNG 16 32 N 94 24 E 7.57

NHAVA ISLAND 18 58 N 72 57 E 2.29

NICHOLSON ISLAND 12 06 N 92 58 E 9.36

NICOBAR ISLANDS 8 00 N 93 30 E 9.52

NILANDU 3 05 N 72 54 E 5.52

NILEWELLI POINT 5 57 N 80 43 E 4.30

NILOT POINT 11 44 N 75 30 E 3.24

NINDAKARA 8 56 N 76 33 E 3.33

NISHANBOTU 14 42 N 79 56 E 6.18

NIZAMPATAM BAY 15 42 N 80 33 E 6.20

NOPU TAUNG SABA 11 13 N 98 39 E 8.79

NORMAN’S POINT 22 12 N 91 49 E 7.20

NORTH BUTTON ISLAND 12 19 N 93 05 E 9.35

NORTH DELAY SHOAL 20 30 N 92 15 E 7.27

NORTH ISLAND 14 28 N 97 47 E 8.19

NORTH LEDGE 14 31 N 97 49 E 8.33

NORTH PAP BEACON 18 46 N 72 56 E 2.29

NORTH PASSAGE ISLAND 12 16 N 92 56 E 9.32

NORTH PASSAGE REEF 13 26 N 93 06 E 9.24
Index—Gazetteer 291

Pub. 173

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

NORTH PATCHES 21 43 N 91 44 E 7.19

NORTH PHIPPS ISLAND 10 10 N 98 17 E 8.86

NORTH REEF ISLAND 13 05 N 92 43 E 9.13

NORTH ROCKS 15 46 N 97 39 E 8.25

NORTH ROCKY ISLAND 9 53 N 97 58 E 8.94

NORTH ROUND ISLAND 12 15 N 98 23 E 8.55

NORTH SANDS 14 41 N 97 50 E 8.32

NORTH SENTINEL ISLAND 11 33 N 92 14 E 9.8

NORTH SENTINEL ISLET 10 57 N 97 58 E 8.80

NORTH SHOAL 19 28 N 93 30 E 7.36

NORTH TERRIBLE 19 27 N 93 16 E 7.28

NORTH TWIN ISLAND 10 38 N 97 42 E 8.88

NORTHBROOK PATCH 7 59 N 93 29 E 9.61

NUMARA 6 26 N 73 03 E 5.24

NYAWBYIN BAY 13 40 N 98 08 E 8.34

O

OBSERVATION ISLAND 11 59 N 97 55 E 8.61

OKHA 22 28 N 69 05 E 1.17

OKHAMANDAL PENINSULA 22 29 N 69 05 E 1.17

OLAHALI 4 41 N 73 26 E 5.35

OLIVELIFUR 5 17 N 73 36 E 5.32

OLIVER ISLAND 13 00 N 93 00 E 9.28

ONA GALA 7 00 N 79 50 E 4.17

ONE FATHOM PATCH 13 36 N 93 02 E 9.10

ORAL KAICHA 12 11 N 92 46 E 9.40

OSPREY ROCKS 18 40 N 94 05 E 7.48

OSTMASTON SHOAL 12 21 N 92 58 E 9.32

OTTIVAKAM HILL 12 48 N 80 07 E 6.12

OUBLIEE ROCK 12 26 N 97 58 E 8.48

OUTER TUNA LIGHTED BUOY 22 51 N 70 07 E 1.30

OUTRAM HARBOR 12 15 N 93 06 E 9.36

OUTRAM ISLAND 12 15 N 93 06 E 9.36

OWEN ISLAND 11 14 N 98 15 E 8.72

OYSTER ISLAND 12 59 N 92 59 E 9.28

OYSTER ISLAND 20 12 N 92 32 E 7.27

OYSTER REEF 20 05 N 92 39 E 7.27

OYSTER ROCK 19 00 N 93 59 E 7.50

OYSTER ROCKS 14 49 N 74 04 E 3.4

P

PAGE ISLET 12 36 N 98 10 E 8.50

PAGET ISLAND 13 26 N 92 50 E 9.12

PAGODA POINT 15 12 N 97 46 E 8.28

PAGODA POINT 15 37 N 97 44 E 8.25

PAGODA POINT 15 57 N 94 15 E 8.3

PAINE KYUN 12 55 N 98 11 E 8.46

PAINES REEF 11 18 N 98 18 E 8.72

PAIRA ROCK 8 35 N 93 36 E 9.56

PAK CHIK 9 09 N 98 16 E 8.106

PAK KOH 8 52 N 98 15 E 8.106

PAK KRUEN 9 01 N 98 15 E 8.106

PAK KURA 9 16 N 98 20 E 8.106

PALAR RIVER 12 28 N 80 10 E 6.11

PALATUPANA POINT 6 14 N 81 22 E 4.36

PALERU RIVER 15 19 N 80 06 E 6.19

PALK BAY 9 30 N 79 30 E 4.59

PALK STRAIT 10 00 N 80 00 E 4.55

PALMYRAS POINT 20 46 N 86 59 E 6.43

PALMYRAS SHOALS 20 47 N 87 12 E 6.36

PALURU BLUFF 19 26 N 85 08 E 6.37

PAMBAN 9 17 N 79 13 E 4.63

PAMBAN ISLAND 9 17 N 79 18 E 4.11

PAMBAN PASS 9 17 N 79 12 E 4.9

PANCHPARA RIVER 21 31 N 87 07 E 7.3

PANDI ARICHA MUNAI PAAR 8 32 N 81 13 E 4.50

PANJU ISLAND 19 20 N 72 51 E 2.27

PANTAW ROCKS 18 40 N 94 09 E 7.48

PARADIP 20 16 N 86 41 E 6.39

PARKER ISLAND 11 57 N 98 15 E 8.73

PARVAT GUDI 14 32 N 74 27 E 3.9

PASCOE SHOAL 15 10 N 97 45 E 8.29

PASSAGE ISLAND 11 11 N 92 41 E 9.48

PASSAGE ISLAND 12 17 N 98 21 E 8.58

PASSAGE ROCK 13 36 N 93 00 E 9.10

PATAW ISLAND 12 27 N 98 35 E 8.52

PATENGA POINT 22 13 N 91 48 E 7.20

PATHFINDER INLET 22 28 N 69 40 E 1.21

PATHIYANKARA 9 14 N 76 25 E 3.32

PATIRAJJA POINT 6 10 N 81 14 E 4.35

PATTANAMARUDUR 8 55 N 78 11 E 4.7

PAVANGA SHOAL 21 51 N 89 30 E 7.13

PAVAS POINT 16 54 N 73 17 E 2.42

PAWDI TAUNG 14 57 N 97 52 E 8.31

PAYI KYUN 12 22 N 98 26 E 8.57

PAZIN KYUN 13 48 N 98 04 E 8.33

PECK SHOALS 11 32 N 92 38 E 9.21

PEGU RIVER 16 46 N 96 13 E 8.13

PEINNECHAUNG KYUN 19 57 N 93 05 E 7.34

PENNER RIVER ENTRANCE 14 35 N 80 11 E 6.18

PERFORATED ISLAND 8 51 N 97 48 E 8.104

PETERSON ROCK 11 50 N 98 06 E 8.68

PETRIE ISLAND 11 58 N 92 37 E 9.18

PHAETON SHOALS 15 47 N 94 14 E 8.6

PHAUNGKALA TAUNG 15 35 N 97 50 E 8.25

PHITTI CREEK 24 40 N 67 09 E 1.4

PHOENIX BAY 11 40 N 92 45 E 9.45

PICKWICK ISLAND 12 01 N 98 16 E 8.67

PIGEON INLAND 8 43 N 81 12 E 4.54

PIGEON ISLAND 11 47 N 98 13 E 8.69

PIGEON ISLAND 14 01 N 74 20 E 3.11

PIGEON ISLET 17 37 N 83 14 E 6.27

PILLAR ROCK 17 29 N 83 01 E 6.27

PILLINAWA POINT 6 22 N 81 34 E 4.37

PILOT REEF 12 01 N 93 02 E 9.38

PINNACLE ROCK 12 59 N 98 14 E 8.46

PINWUN MAW 10 45 N 98 28 E 8.83

PIPAVAV BANDAR 20 54 N 71 31 E 2.7

PIROTAN ISLAND 22 36 N 69 57 E 1.25

PITI SAND BANK 10 46 N 72 33 E 5.9

PITTI ISLET 10 46 N 72 33 E 5.9

PLUTO ISLAND 11 33 N 92 38 E 9.20

POCOCK ISLAND 13 34 N 93 04 E 9.23

POINT CALIMERE 10 18 N 79 52 E 6.2

POINT ISLAND 13 24 N 92 50 E 9.12

POINT PEDRO 9 50 N 80 15 E 4.54

POINT PUDI 13 47 N 80 15 E 6.16

POLLOCK BAY 14 09 N 93 23 E 9.4

PONDICHERRI 11 56 N 79 50 E 6.10

PONDICHERRY 11 56 N 79 50 E 6.10

PONDICHERRY LIGHT 11 55 N 79 50 E 6.10

PONNANI 10 47 N 75 55 E 3.29

PONTAMAU ISLAND 17 19 N 94 30 E 7.56

PORBANDAR 21 38 N 69 36 E 1.34

PORT ANDAMAN 12 44 N 92 42 E 9.13

PORT ANSON 12 16 N 92 44 E 9.16

PORT BANKOT 17 59 N 73 03 E 2.35

PORT BLAIR 11 41 N 92 45 E 9.42

PORT CAMPBELL 11 57 N 92 35 E 9.18

PORT CANNING 22 19 N 88 39 E 7.12

PORT CHAUL 18 33 N 72 55 E 2.32

PORT CORNWALLIS 13 17 N 93 05 E 9.25

PORT DABHOL 17 35 N 73 10 E 2.37

PORT MARIA 12 23 N 98 03 E 8.49

PORT MEADOWS 12 01 N 92 46 E 9.40

PORT MOUAT 11 37 N 92 38 E 9.19

PORT MUHAMMAD BIN QASIM 24 46 N 67 20 E 1.5

PORT OLUVIL 7 17 N 81 51 E 4.41

PORT OWEN 13 06 N 98 19 E 8.43

PORT REDI 15 45 N 73 39 E 2.51

PORTMAN BAY 11 25 N 92 41 E 9.47

PORTO NOVO 11 30 N 79 46 E 6.8

POSITION ROCK 14 42 N 97 52 E 8.32

POSITRA BAY 22 26 N 69 09 E 1.18

POSITRA POINT 22 25 N 69 12 E 1.18

POWELL ISLANDS 5 58 N 72 55 E 5.29

PREPARIS ISLAND 14 53 N 93 42 E 9.2

PREPARIS NORTH CHANNEL 15 22 N 93 48 E 9.2

PREPARIS SOUTH CHANNEL 14 28 N 93 33 E 9.2

PRONGS REEF LIGHT 18 53 N 72 48 E 2.29

PRYCE CHANNEL 7 12 N 93 43 E 9.67

PUDIMADAKA VILLAGE 17 30 N 83 00 E 6.26

PULAU AMPAT 11 10 N 98 37 E 8.79

PULAU TING-NGA 11 12 N 98 39 E 8.79

PULICAT SHOALS 13 22 N 80 23 E 6.15

PULO BADA 10 30 N 98 13 E 8.85

PULO BESIN 9 59 N 98 29 E 8.98

PULO GABAN 10 58 N 98 13 E 8.87

PULO GANGA 9 56 N 98 29 E 8.100

PULO HAYAT 10 35 N 98 14 E 8.85
292 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 173

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

PULO JUNGIS 10 00 N 98 29 E 8.98

PULO MILO ISLAND 7 24 N 93 42 E 9.64

PULO PERLIN 9 58 N 98 30 E 8.98

PULO PINGNGWE 9 54 N 98 29 E 8.100

PULO REMIAH 10 05 N 98 30 E 8.98

PULO RU 9 57 N 98 32 E 8.100

PULO SAUNG KHARANG 9 55 N 98 31 E 8.100

PULO TONTON 10 01 N 98 30 E 8.98

PURI 19 48 N 85 50 E 6.37

PURIAN BANK 15 53 N 94 22 E 8.8

PURIAN POINT 15 50 N 94 24 E 8.5

PUSUR RIVER 21 46 N 89 30 E 7.13

PYIN ISLAND 12 19 N 98 26 E 8.56

PYINBAN ROCKS 12 44 N 98 34 E 8.45

PYINGYI 13 47 N 98 12 E 8.39

PYRAMID BAY 18 41 N 93 39 E 7.46

Q

QUILON 8 53 N 76 35 E 3.34

QUOIN ISLAND 10 21 N 98 04 E 8.90

QUOIN SANDHILL 21 36 N 87 28 E 7.3

R

RABNABAD CHANNEL ENTRANCE 21 50 N 90 16 E 7.16

RAJAPUR BAY 16 37 N 73 20 E 2.43

RAKIDU 3 19 N 73 27 E 5.48

RAMAYPATNAM VILLAGE 15 03 N 80 03 E 6.19

RAMREE HARBOR 19 00 N 94 00 E 7.49

RAMREE HARBOR 19 01 N 94 02 E 7.47

RAMREE ISLAND 19 07 N 93 47 E 7.39

RAMSOM SHOAL 10 42 N 98 19 E 8.82

RANGAT BAY 12 29 N 92 58 E 9.31

RANGER FLAT 11 41 N 92 43 E 9.46

RANGER REEF 13 39 N 93 07 E 9.5

RANGOON 16 46 N 96 10 E 8.14

RANSOM REACH 16 17 N 94 39 E 8.8

RAS MUARI 24 47 N 66 39 E 1.1

RASDU 4 16 N 73 00 E 5.43

RASDU ATOLL 4 16 N 73 00 E 5.43

RASULPUR RIVER 21 47 N 87 54 E 7.3

RATI BEACON 18 47 N 84 32 E 6.33

RATNAGIRI 16 59 N 73 17 E 2.41

RATNAGIRI GAS/POWER TERM 17 32 N 73 09 E 2.37

REDSKIN ISLAND 11 33 N 92 36 E 9.20

REEF ISLAND 13 30 N 92 53 E 9.11

REJU SHOAL 21 17 N 91 59 E 7.19

RELIANCE SHOAL 19 27 N 93 32 E 7.38

REMARKABLE ROCK 18 14 N 94 22 E 7.54

RESEARCH STRAIT 19 58 N 93 02 E 7.34

RETKAMAUK TAUNG 19 48 N 93 28 E 7.35

REVADANDA PORT 18 33 N 72 55 E 2.32

RICHELIEU ROCK 9 21 N 98 02 E 8.96

RIOU ISLAND 10 56 N 98 26 E 8.79

RITCHIES ARCHIPELAGO 12 03 N 93 02 E 9.36

ROBERT ISLAND 11 24 N 98 30 E 8.77

ROCK ISLET 12 35 N 97 54 E 8.47

ROCKINGHAM PATCHES 12 41 N 80 15 E 6.11

ROCKY POINT 19 00 N 93 41 E 7.42

ROE BANK 10 08 N 96 38 E 8.88

ROGOLOCHANG BAY 12 09 N 92 50 E 9.34

ROSAMUND SHOAL 12 04 N 92 58 E 9.37

ROSS ISLAND 12 13 N 98 06 E 8.63

ROSS SAND 14 55 N 97 41 E 8.18

ROUND HILL 17 22 N 82 16 E 6.26

ROUND ISLAND 8 30 N 81 13 E 4.45

ROUND ISLAND 9 55 N 98 33 E 8.100

ROUND MOUNTAIN 9 41 N 98 37 E 8.97

ROZI MATA TEMPLE 22 33 N 70 03 E 1.26

RUPADIA SANDS 21 27 N 91 57 E 7.23

RUSSELL ISLAND 10 15 N 98 15 E 8.86

RUTLAND ISLAND 11 25 N 92 39 E 9.22

RUVAPARI LIGHT 21 47 N 72 14 E 2.15

RYLAND PATCH 10 04 N 98 13 E 8.93

S

SACRAMENTO SHOAL 16 32 N 82 20 E 6.21

SACRIFICE ROCK 11 30 N 75 32 E 3.26

SADDLE ISLAND 12 24 N 97 55 E 8.48

SADDLE ISLAND 19 25 N 93 27 E 7.37

SAGAR ISLAND 21 44 N 88 07 E 7.5

SAGAR ISLAND LIGHT 21 39 N 88 03 E 7.4

SAGAR ROADS 21 39 N 88 01 E 7.5

SAGU KYUN 18 48 N 93 58 E 7.49

SAIL ROCK 18 33 N 93 51 E 7.47

SAINGBAIN KIEU 16 20 N 94 11 E 7.59

SALAYA 22 19 N 69 36 E 1.20

SALAYA HARBOR 22 26 N 69 33 E 1.20

SANDERS ISLAND 9 37 N 97 59 E 8.94

SANDERSON ROCK 8 07 N 93 27 E 9.59

SANDOWAY BAY 18 22 N 94 21 E 7.53

SANDOWAY RIVER 18 33 N 94 13 E 7.53

SANDWIP ISLAND 22 28 N 91 29 E 7.17

SANGAMANKANDA POINT 7 01 N 81 52 E 4.40

SANTAPILLLI ROCKS 18 01 N 83 43 E 6.24

SAPTAMUKHI SAND 21 20 N 88 27 E 7.10

SARWAH SAND 21 42 N 89 28 E 7.13

SATARA REEF 18 20 N 84 09 E 6.32

SATBAIA SANDHILL 20 38 N 86 56 E 6.41

SATELLITE BAY 8 02 N 93 30 E 9.61

SATELLITE LEDGE 18 07 N 94 18 E 7.41

SATELLITE PATCH 8 01 N 93 30 E 9.61

SAUNDERS SHOAL 20 07 N 92 56 E 7.33

SAUNGGYI KYUN 12 07 N 98 24 E 8.56

SAURIN ISLAND 12 30 N 97 48 E 8.48

SAWAI BAY 9 14 N 92 45 E 9.52

SEARLE PATCH 15 27 N 73 48 E 2.53

SEAWARD PEAK 9 49 N 98 32 E 8.97

SEMIRAMIS BAY 11 42 N 92 44 E 9.44

SESOSTRIS BANK 13 08 N 72 00 E 5.5

SESOSTRIS BAY 11 40 N 92 46 E 9.45

SESOSTRIS SHOAL 11 39 N 92 01 E 9.45

SETSE YELE PAYA 15 57 N 97 36 E 8.24

SHAHPURI FLAT 20 43 N 92 18 E 7.30

SHALLINGER SHOAL 14 23 N 80 12 E 6.18

SHARK ISLAND 13 12 N 92 46 E 9.12

SHEARME SAND 15 04 N 97 35 E 8.18

SHITPWIN KYUN 10 49 N 98 26 E 8.83

SHIYAL BET 20 54 N 71 31 E 2.7

SHOAL BAY 11 56 N 92 47 E 9.41

SHONG PIANAM 9 34 N 98 28 E 8.102

SHORTT ISLAND 20 47 N 87 05 E 6.41

SIDAW TAUNG 15 10 N 97 48 E 8.28

SIDNEY ISLAND 11 52 N 98 25 E 8.75

SIKKA 22 26 N 69 50 E 1.23

SIKKA CREEK ENTRANCE 22 29 N 69 47 E 1.23

SIKOTAR MATA 22 19 N 72 24 E 2.20

SIL POINT 17 34 N 73 09 E 2.37

SIMAR 20 46 N 71 10 E 2.4

SIMILAN ISLANDS 8 35 N 97 39 E 8.104

SIMPSON SHOAL 15 08 N 97 45 E 8.30

SIMS REEF 10 02 N 98 29 E 8.98

SINCLAIR SHOAL 14 53 N 97 21 E 8.18

SINSWE KYUN 16 23 N 94 42 E 8.8

SIR CHARLES METCALFE ISLAND 12 17 N 97 47 E 8.48

SIR CREEK 23 38 N 68 02 E 1.7

SIR HUGH ROSE ISLAND 11 47 N 93 05 E 9.39

SIR J. MALCOM ISLAND 11 18 N 98 15 E 8.71

SIR WILLIAM PEEL ISLAND 12 05 N 93 00 E 9.36

SITAKUND MOUNTAIN 22 38 N 91 41 E 7.19

SITAPAROKIA 20 33 N 92 32 E 7.31

SITAPAROKIA PATCHES 20 32 N 92 26 E 7.27

SITTANG RIVER ENTRANCE 16 50 N 96 55 E 8.18

SITTWE HARBOR 20 08 N 92 54 E 7.33

SLAVE ISLAND 9 43 N 98 00 E 8.94

SLIPPER ISLAND 14 11 N 93 22 E 9.3

SMART ISLAND 12 17 N 97 52 E 8.48

SMITH ISLAND 13 20 N 93 05 E 9.24

SMYTHE ROCK 12 03 N 92 48 E 9.40

SOMBRERO CHANNEL 7 41 N 93 36 E 9.63

SON ISLAND 11 12 N 98 05 E 8.71

SONADIA ISLAND 21 29 N 91 53 E 7.23

SONNAPURAM 19 07 N 84 47 E 6.35

SOUND ISLAND 12 58 N 92 59 E 9.27

SOUTH BANK 12 16 N 92 26 E 9.7

SOUTH BANKS 9 57 N 79 57 E 4.55

SOUTH BAY 6 48 N 93 52 E 9.73

SOUTH BAY 7 53 N 93 24 E 9.62

SOUTH BUTTON ISLAND 12 13 N 93 02 E 9.35
Index—Gazetteer 293

Pub. 173

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

SOUTH DELAY SHOAL 20 28 N 92 15 E 7.27

SOUTH DIRECTION ISLAND 12 29 N 98 00 E 8.48

SOUTH HATIA ISLAND 22 15 N 91 05 E 7.16

SOUTH HUMP ISLAND 10 11 N 98 20 E 8.86

SOUTH ISLAND 12 54 N 98 19 E 8.43

SOUTH ISLAND 13 20 N 74 42 E 3.15

SOUTH ISLAND 8 29 N 97 39 E 8.105

SOUTH MALE ATOLL 4 00 N 73 25 E 5.40

SOUTH PASSAGE ISLAND 11 46 N 98 07 E 8.69

SOUTH PATCHES 21 26 N 91 40 E 7.19

SOUTH REEF ISLAND 12 47 N 92 40 E 9.13

SOUTH ROCKS 12 50 N 98 19 E 8.43

SOUTH SANDS 14 39 N 97 52 E 8.32

SOUTH SENTINEL ISLAND 10 58 N 92 14 E 9.8

SOUTH SHOAL 15 28 N 97 39 E 8.26

SOUTH TERRIBLE 19 23 N 93 16 E 7.28

SOUTH TWIN ISLAND 10 28 N 98 41 E 8.88

SOUTH VAZHAPURAM 9 19 N 76 23 E 3.32

SOUTHEAST HUMP ISLAND 10 16 N 98 19 E 8.85

SPIKE HILL 16 22 N 94 18 E 7.58

SPIKE ISLAND 12 16 N 92 43 E 9.15

SPITEFUL BAY 8 01 N 93 32 E 9.61

SQUARE ROCK 15 59 N 73 27 E 2.49

SRIVARDHAN POINT 18 01 N 73 00 E 2.34

ST. ANDREW'S GROUP 10 10 N 97 55 E 8.90

ST. GEORGES CHANNEL 7 17 N 93 46 E 9.65

ST. JOHN'S ROCKS 17 28 N 94 20 E 7.42

ST. LUKES ISLAND 10 09 N 98 12 E 8.86

ST. MARKS ISLET 10 03 N 98 13 E 8.93

ST. MARTINS ISLANDS 20 37 N 92 20 E 7.26

ST. MARTINS REEF 20 37 N 92 13 E 7.27

ST. PAULS ISLAND 10 09 N 98 09 E 8.90

STEEP SHOAL 10 38 N 98 17 E 8.82

STEWART ISLAND 13 01 N 92 56 E 9.28

STEWART SOUND 12 54 N 93 00 E 9.27

STRAIT ISLAND 12 13 N 92 56 E 9.32

SUBARNAREKHA RIVER 21 34 N 87 23 E 7.3

SUHELI PAR 10 05 N 72 16 E 5.11

SUNK REEF 13 00 N 92 59 E 9.28

SUNK ROCK 18 53 N 72 50 E 2.29

SURATKAL POINT LIGHT 13 00 N 74 47 E 3.16

SUVADIVA ATOLL 0 30 N 73 15 E 5.61

SUVALI POINT 21 05 N 72 38 E 2.16

SWATCH OF NO GROUND 21 05 N 89 17 E 7.10

SWIRL ROCK 12 25 N 98 11 E 8.59

SYDNEY ISLAND 11 32 N 98 27 E 8.76

T

TABLE ISLAND 14 11 N 93 23 E 9.3

TABLE ISLANDS 13 25 N 93 07 E 9.23

TADMA BAY 12 03 N 93 02 E 9.38

TADMA JURU 12 03 N 92 59 E 9.37

TADRI RIVER 14 31 N 74 20 E 3.8

TAKLA OYSTER POINT 12 55 N 92 55 E 9.29

TAKUA PA INLET 9 02 N 98 18 E 8.106

TALAIMANNAR 9 06 N 79 43 E 4.62

TANGALLE POINT 6 01 N 80 48 E 4.30

TANGASSERI POINT LIGHT 8 53 N 76 43 E 3.34

TANKHARO ISLAND 19 30 N 93 32 E 7.36

TAPIR HILL 14 36 N 97 55 E 8.33

TARAPUR POINT 19 50 N 72 39 E 2.24

TARMUGLI ISLAND 11 35 N 92 34 E 9.20

TAUNGNYO HILL 21 04 N 92 12 E 7.29

TAVOY 14 04 N 98 11 E 8.41

TAVOY ISLAND 13 13 N 98 15 E 8.43

TAYLOR HILL 13 27 N 92 54 E 9.11

TAYLOR PATCHES 12 16 N 92 42 E 9.15

TAYLOR SHOAL 20 15 N 92 25 E 7.27

TAZINGYUN 16 09 N 94 32 E 8.8

TEKKU 9 14 N 76 25 E 3.32

TEKRA LIGHT 22 56 N 70 07 E 1.29

TELLICHERRY 11 45 N 75 29 E 3.24

TEMPLE POINT 20 25 N 86 44 E 6.40

TEMPLE SOUND 13 25 N 92 51 E 9.11

TEN DEGREE CHANNEL 10 22 N 92 30 E 9.51

TENASSERIM ISLAND 12 34 N 97 51 E 8.47

TENLAA BAY 7 02 N 93 56 E 9.72

TERESSA ISLAND 8 18 N 93 07 E 9.57

THALIA SHOAL 15 15 N 93 48 E 9.2

THAMES POINT 19 09 N 93 36 E 7.40

THAMIHLA KYUN 15 52 N 94 17 E 8.6

THANE ISLAND 10 02 N 98 30 E 8.98

THANKES ISLET 12 15 N 98 01 E 8.61

THANTE FLATS 16 28 N 96 28 E 8.12

THANTE POINT 16 30 N 96 23 E 8.12

THE BROTHERS 10 59 N 92 40 E 9.49

THE FORELAND 10 47 N 98 18 E 8.82

THE SISTERS 11 09 N 92 44 E 9.49

THE SWATCH 23 40 N 67 27 E 1.7

THE TERRIBLES 19 24 N 93 17 E 7.28

THETYAGI ISLAND 12 16 N 98 26 E 8.56

THIN-BON KYUN 13 38 N 98 11 E 8.39

THORNHILL ISLAND 13 32 N 92 55 E 9.11

THULUSDHOO 4 22 N 73 38 E 5.37

THYNE BANK 17 46 N 94 19 E 7.42

TILADUMMATI ATOLL 6 45 N 73 00 E 5.21

TILLANCHANG DWIP 8 31 N 93 38 E 9.56

TIRUCHENDUR POINT 8 30 N 78 08 E 4.5

TIRUKKADAIYUR PORT 11 04 N 79 53 E 6.6

TIRUMULLAIVASAL 11 15 N 79 51 E 6.7

TOBY ROCK 15 16 N 97 43 E 8.27

TODDU 4 26 N 72 57 E 5.42

TODDU 4 26 N 72 58 E 5.32

TOLKESHWAR POINT 17 34 N 73 09 E 2.37

TONDI 9 45 N 79 01 E 4.64

TONGUE ISLAND 9 55 N 98 14 E 8.91

TORILLA ISLAND 9 22 N 97 52 E 8.96

TOUNZOUN POINT 16 14 N 97 32 E 8.22

TOWER HILL 7 43 N 81 24 E 4.43

TOWN ROCK 16 29 N 97 37 E 8.24

TRAK ISLAND 7 28 N 93 37 E 9.63

TRANQUEBAR 11 01 N 79 51 E 6.6

TREE ISLAND 11 32 N 97 58 E 8.70

TREE ISLET 11 36 N 72 11 E 5.3

TRINCOMALEE HARBOR 8 33 N 81 13 E 4.50

TRINKAT CHAMPLONG BAY 7 13 N 93 52 E 9.70

TRINKAT ISLAND 8 05 N 93 35 E 9.59

TRIPALUR REEF 12 37 N 80 12 E 6.11

TRIVANDRUM 8 29 N 76 57 E 3.36

TROMBAY PEAK 19 02 N 72 55 E 2.29

TROTTER ISLAND 11 53 N 98 16 E 8.73

TULUSDU 4 22 N 73 38 E 5.37

TUMMALAPENTA 14 54 N 80 04 E 6.15

TUNDAHA OBELISK 19 54 N 86 13 E 6.38

TURAKUNA 7 07 N 72 54 E 5.18

TURRETS ISLANDS 10 31 N 98 27 E 8.87

TURTLE ISLANDS 13 22 N 93 05 E 9.24

TUTICORIN 8 48 N 78 10 E 4.6

TUTTHABO MAW 10 37 N 98 27 E 8.87

TWANTE CANAL 16 46 N 96 08 E 8.13

TWIN ROCKS 11 53 N 98 27 E 8.74

TWO FATHOMS ROCK 12 10 N 92 58 E 9.35

TWO HILL ISLAND 10 59 N 98 12 E 8.82

TWO TREE ISLAND 10 16 N 98 14 E 8.86

U

U PE BEACON 15 44 N 95 24 E 8.10

UKULAHU 4 13 N 72 51 E 5.44

UKULHAS 4 13 N 72 51 E 5.44

UMARGAM 20 12 N 72 45 E 2.23

UMBARGAON 20 12 N 72 45 E 2.23

UMBRELLA ISLAND 9 20 N 98 19 E 8.99

UNA ISLAND 11 52 N 98 18 E 8.74

UNAWATUNA POINT 6 00 N 80 15 E 4.24

UNGUAN ISLAND 18 26 N 93 55 E 7.48

UNION LEDGE 13 32 N 93 11 E 9.23

UNNIAMOR 22 38 N 68 47 E 1.10

UPADA 17 04 N 82 20 E 6.26

UPPER LONG SAND 21 34 N 87 57 E 7.5

URAN SHOAL 18 56 N 72 54 E 2.29

V

V. O. CHIDAMBARANAR PORT 8 48 N 78 10 E 4.6

V.O. CHIDAMBARANAR PORT 8 48 N 78 10 E 4.5

VADA MIRYA 17 02 N 73 16 E 2.40

VALINOKKAM POINT 9 09 N 78 39 E 4.8

VALLANAD 8 43 N 77 54 E 4.6

VANDELOOS POINT 7 55 N 81 35 E 4.43
294 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 173

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

VAVUL MALA 11 25 N 76 08 E 3.26

VEIMANDU CHANNEL 2 10 N 73 20 E 5.57

VENGURLA ROADS 15 51 N 73 37 E 2.50

VENGURLA ROCKS LIGHT 15 53 N 73 28 E 2.49

VERA ISLAND 11 29 N 98 32 E 8.77

VERAGALLE POINT 5 56 N 80 27 E 4.27

VERAVAL 20 54 N 70 22 E 1.36

VERAVAL LIGHT 20 54 N 69 23 E 1.36

VESTAL SHOAL 18 03 N 94 13 E 7.41

VIBART SHOAL 11 59 N 93 08 E 9.39

VIBART SHOAL 16 43 N 94 19 E 7.57

VICTORIA POINT 9 58 N 98 33 E 8.97

VICTORIA POINT HARBOR 9 59 N 98 33 E 8.102

VIJAYADURG HARBOR 16 34 N 73 20 E 2.44

VISHAKHAPATNAM 17 41 N 83 18 E 6.28

VOMANI POINT 22 29 N 69 04 E 1.16

W

WA KYUN 15 12 N 97 44 E 8.28

WAAL ISLET 6 08 N 80 06 E 4.21

WADU 4 07 N 73 27 E 5.40

WAGARU 7 06 N 72 52 E 5.19

WAGH-GIRI 15 53 N 73 42 E 2.49

WALES ROCK 16 28 N 97 37 E 8.24

WALTAIR POINT 17 44 N 83 21 E 6.29

WARNING ROCK 11 54 N 98 05 E 8.67

WARRINGTON STRAITS 10 55 N 98 30 E 8.79

WASP BAY 8 00 N 93 31 E 9.61

WASP POINT 8 03 N 93 29 E 9.60

WATARU CHANNEL 3 15 N 73 30 E 5.49

WATTARA 17 25 N 82 52 E 6.26

WELIGAMA BAY 5 57 N 80 26 E 4.26

WEST BAY 7 55 N 93 20 E 9.62

WEST CANISTER ISLET 12 41 N 97 43 E 8.47

WEST CORAL BANK 13 13 N 93 31 E 9.7

WEST ISLAND 13 36 N 93 54 E 9.10

WEST PASSAGE ISLAND 11 49 N 98 07 E 8.68

WEST POINT 19 22 N 93 28 E 7.39

WEST SHOAL 18 30 N 93 50 E 7.47

WESTERN ROCKY ISLAND 9 51 N 97 52 E 8.94

WHALE BAY 11 35 N 98 39 E 8.77

WHALE ROCK 11 52 N 98 05 E 8.67

WHALE ROCK 13 36 N 98 13 E 8.39

WHALEBACK ROCK 10 28 N 98 27 E 8.87

WHALERS ROCK 18 37 N 94 12 E 7.52

WHALES REEF 12 15 N 92 44 E 9.16

WHITE CLIFF ISLAND 13 32 N 92 53 E 9.11

WHITE MOUNTAIN 12 51 N 92 55 E 9.13

WHITE ROCK 16 29 N 94 15 E 7.59

WHITE ROCKS 12 41 N 98 34 E 8.45

WILLIAMS REEF 11 55 N 98 11 E 8.67

WILSON ISLAND 12 08 N 92 59 E 9.36

WIRINGILI 0 45 N 73 23 E 5.61

WOLF ROCK 15 59 N 94 20 E 8.7

WOODMASON BAY 11 25 N 92 37 E 9.22

Y

YAKINIGEDUWA 5 58 N 80 23 E 4.25

YANGON 16 46 N 96 10 E 8.14

YE 15 15 N 97 51 E 8.31

YE KYUN 18 37 N 93 47 E 7.47

YE RIVER 15 11 N 97 47 E 8.28

YEMYOK ISLAND 12 26 N 98 27 E 8.57

YETAGUN MARINE TERMINAL 13 04 N 96 51 E 8.36

YWATHIT TAUNG 18 48 N 93 37 E 7.46

Z

ZA DET GYI ISLAND 9 58 N 98 13 E 8.91

ZAHORA ROCK 11 52 N 98 01 E 8.67

ZIKHA TAUNG 18 56 N 93 51 E 7.44